JACC Phase 2 Project Manual - 3.19.15

Project Manual
Covenant Health System

Joe Arrington Cancer Center and
Medical Office Building Renovations
and Additions Phase 2
Lubbock, Texas
March 2015
PSC Project # 03798614
Joe Arrington Cancer Center Renovations and Additions

Phase 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT INFORMATION

00000
00010
00020
00050
00100
00705
00840
Letter from Dunn + Teinert

Advertisement for Bid
Phase 2 Bid Schedule
Information to Proposers
Proposal Form
Agreement
3D Model Coordination Program
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01110
01120
01250
01290
01310
01315
01320
01325
01330
01450
01453
01455
01500
01600
01700
01720
01732
Summary of Work and Special Requirements

References and Definitions
Contract Modification Procedures
Payment Procedures
Project Management and Coordination
Contractor Requests for Information
Construction Progress Documentation
Project Schedule
Submittal Procedures
Quality Control
Mock-Up Requirements
Testing and Inspection Services
Temporary Facilities & Controls
Product Requirements
Execution Requirements
Contract Closeout Procedures
Selective Demolition
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION

02221
02300
Structure Demolition
Earthwork
03/19/2015
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300
Cast-In-Place Concrete
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04011
04220
04720
03798614
03/15
Masonry Cleaning
Concrete Unit Masonry
Cast Stone Masonry
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE - 1

Phase 2
DIVISION 5 - METAL
05120
05310
05500
05511
05521
05581
05731
Structural Steel
Steel Deck (To Be Issued by Addendum)
Metal Fabrications
Metal Pan Stairs
Pipe and Tube Railings
Column Covers
Glazed Decorative Metal Railings
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

06105
06125
06402
06410
Miscellaneous Carpentry
Sheathing
Interior Architectural Woodwork
Custom Casework (To Be Issued by Addendum)
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07015
07190
07210
07260
07272
07419
07420
07540
07591
07620
07720
07900
Preparation for Reroofing (To Be Issued by Addendum)

Water Repellents
Building Insulation
Vapor Retarders
Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers
Metal Soffit Panels
Aluminum Composite Panel
Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing
Preparation for Reroofing
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Roof Accessories
Joint Sealers
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

08110
08210
08311
08410
08462
08520
08630
08710
08800
08816
08911
03798614
03/15
Steel Door Frames

Impact Resistant Wood Doors (Flush)
Access Doors and Frames
Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
Sliding Automatic Entrances
Aluminum Windows
Metal-Framed Skylights
Finish Hardware
Glazing
Resinous Glazing
Fixed Louvers
TABLE OF CONTENTS
03/19/2015
PAGE - 2

Phase 2
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09000
09250
09300
09355
09511
09540
09651
09653
09654
09681
09720
09911
09912
09960
Finish Material Legend

Gypsum Board Systems
Tile
Glass Tiling
Acoustical Ceilings
Modular Metal Ceiling System
Resilient Floor Tile
Resilient Wall Base and Installation Accessories
Linoleum Floor Coverings
Tile Carpeting
Wall Coverings
Exterior Painting
Interior Painting
High-Performance Coatings
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10100
10191
10210
10265
10400
10500
10520
10750
10801
Visual Display Boards

Cubicle Curtains and Tracks
Metal Wall Louvers
Wall Protection
Identifying Devices
Metal Wardrobe Lockers
Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets, and Accessories
Telephone Specialties
Toilet and Bath Accessories
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11132
Projection Screens
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12365
12484
12491
12494
Pharmacy Casework
Entrance Floor Mats and Frames
Horizontal Louver Blinds
Roller Shades
03/19/2015
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13090
Radiation Protection
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

14212
03798614
03/15
Machine Room-less Elevators
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE - 3

Phase 2
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15000
15050
15060
15061
15075
15076
15080
15081
15140
15150
15160
15180
15212
15310
15325
15410
15721
15810
15820
15840
15850
15902
15950
General Mechanical Requirements

Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
Plumbing Insulation
HVAC Insulation
Domestic Water Piping
Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Storm Drainage Piping
Hydronic Piping
Medical Gas and Vacuum Systems
Fire Protection Piping
Sprinkler Systems
Plumbing Fixtures
Packaged Outdoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units
Ducts
Duct Accessories
Air Terminal Units
Air Outlets and Inlets
Controls & Instrumentation - DDC
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16000
16111
16123
16130
16140
16170
16180
16190
16195
16441
16470
16481
16510
16620
16630
16762
03798614
03/15
Basic Electrical Methods

Conduit
Building Wire and Cable
Boxes
Wiring Devices
Grounding and Bonding
Equipment Wiring Systems
Supporting Devices
Electrical Identification
Enclosed Switches
Switchboards and Panelboards
Enclosed Motor Controllers
Interior Luminaires
Engine Generator (Deduct Alternate No. 1)
Enclosed Transfer Switches (Deduct Alternate No. 1)
Telephone and Data Communications Cabling
TABLE OF CONTENTS
03/19/2015
PAGE - 4

Phase 2
DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY
The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited in the following:
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16000
16111
16123
16130
16140
16170
16180
16190
16195
16441
16470
16481
16510
16620
16630
16762
Basic Electrical Methods

Conduit
Building Wire and Cable
Boxes
Wiring Devices
Grounding and Bonding
Equipment Wiring Systems
Supporting Devices
Electrical Identification
Enclosed Switches
Switchboards and Panelboards
Enclosed Motor Controllers
Interior Luminaires
Engine Generator (Deduct Alternate No. 1)
Enclosed Transfer Switches (Deduct Alternate No. 1)
Telephone and Data Communications Cabling
03/19/2015
03798614
03/15
DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY
KS - 1
January 9, 2015
Joe Arrington Cancer Center Bidder,

Thank you for your interest in working with Dunn+Teinert Joint Venture
Construction Company. As we're continuing our growth here, we're enhancing
our regional and national informational subcontractor databases. To better manage
and maintain this information on an ongoing basis, we have created an on-line
system where subcontractors can update and manage their prequalification
information.
To begin the prequalification process with Dunn+Teinert, please visit:
http://sms.jedunn.com/ and log in by creating a new user account.
Once logged in, you will see several sections in need of completion / updating these will be highlighted on your profile with a RED CIRCLE. After completing
the section, the system will mark it as completed with a GREEN CHECK.
After registering it is essential that you return and update your information on an
annual basis to maintain an active status.
Thank you again and best wishes for continued success.
Please contact me if you have any questions.
Thank you again.
Sincerely,
Ben Donaldson
Project Manager
SECTION 00010
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID
1.01.
OWNER:
Covenant Health Systems
1.02.
PROJECT:
Joe Arrington Cancer Center & MOB Renovations

Package 2 - JACC
4101 22nd Place
Lubbock, TX 79410
1.03.
DATE:
Proposals will be received until 2:00PM local time, April 17, 2015
1.04.
LOCATION:
Proposals will be received by the Construction Manager at Risk:

Dunn+Teinert, a Joint Venture Company
16000 N Dallas Pkwy, Suite 500
Dallas, Texas 75248
Telephone: (214) 651-7103
Facsimile: (469) 737-8600
1.05.
SCOPE OF WORK:
A.
The work in this project involves interior demolition and finish-out of existing space on the 1st and 2nd
floor of the Joe Arrington Cancer Center. In addition to the renovation there will be two 2 story additions
to the cancer center.
B.
The Proposer will be responsible for the accomplishment and coordination of all construction activities
indicated in the documents.
C.
As Described in the Proposal Documents.
1.06.
CONDITIONS:
A.
Proposers shall submit their Proposals and all documentation required by this Request for Proposals in
one complete package to the Construction Manager at Risk. Failure to include any part of the requested
information or documentation may result in the disqualification of the Proposal
B.
Proposals shall be submitted to the Construction Manager at Risk on the date and time that the
Proposals are due:
1.
C.
The Construction Manager at Risks Proposal Package and ADDITIONAL REQUIRED INFORMATION as
requested.
After receiving and qualifying submitted Proposals, the Construction Manager at Risk and COVENANT
HEALTH SYSTEMS will evaluate each qualified Proposal. The Construction Manager at Risk and
COVENANT HEALTH SYSTEMS will select the Proposal that offers the best value for COVENANT HEALTH
SYSTEMS.
Contracts will be awarded on the basis of the lowest responsive proposal complying with the conditions of
the Proposal Package provided it is in the best interest of COVENANT HEALTH SYSTEMS and the
Construction Manager at Risk. The Construction Manager at Risk, however, reserves the right to reject
any and all proposals and to waive any informality in proposals received whenever any such rejection or
JACC & MOB Package 2
00010
SECTION 00010
waiver is in the best interest of COVENANT HEALTH SYSTEMS and the Construction Manager at Risk.
In determining the lowest responsive subcontractor and best value for COVENANT HEALTH SYSTEMS, the
Construction Manager at Risk will evaluate the following items:
1) The number of the Base Proposal including each Alternate Proposal if applicable.
2) The probability that the Subcontractor can and will perform in accordance with the Proposal and
Construction Documents.
3) The likelihood that the Subcontractor will deliver the awarded scope per the Construction
Manager at Risk and COVENANT HEALTH SYSTEMS required schedule.
4) The reputation and past performance of the Subcontractor including past contracts,
subcontractors proposed personnel, financial ability, and safety record.
D.
Following successful negotiations with the Construction Manager at Risk, the Proposer will be expected to
execute a comprehensive Subcontract Agreement indicating the contract value as the final amount
agreed upon in negotiations with the Construction Manager at Risk.
E.
The Construction Manager at Risk, can, at its discretion, require the subcontractor to whom the work will
be awarded, to supply a Performance and Payment Bond. As such, each proposal shall state on the line
provided in the Form of Proposal, the added cost for the bond. If the firm submitting a proposal is unable
to supply a Performance and Payment Bond, the words not available shall be stated in the line provided.
It is important to note that a subcontractors inability to provide a Performance and Payment Bond will
not solely be a determining factor in awarding a contract.
F.
Proposals received after the closing time for whatever reason, will not be accepted.
G.
No Proposer may withdraw its Proposal within sixty (60) calendar days after the bid date.
H.
The Construction Manager at Risk and COVENANT HEALTH SYSTEMS reserves the right to accept or reject
any or all Proposals, and to waive any and all formalities.
I.
Dunn+Teinert and COVENANT HEALTH SYSTEMS are Equal Opportunity Employers.
J.
K.
All Request for Information (RFI) to be submitted no later than April 3, 2015.
Submit bids via fax or email.
Fax: (469) 737-8600
Email: dallas.estimating@jedunn.com
L.
Construction Manager at Risk:

Gordon McAurthur
Pre-Construction Director
Dunn+Teinert
16000 N Dallas Pkwy
Suite 500
Dallas, Texas 75248
Telephone:
(214) 651-7103
Facsimile:
(469) 737-8600
Email: gordon.mcarthur@jedunn.com
00010
SECTION 00010
1.07.
A.
B.
1.08.
A.
CONTRACT DOCUMENT ACQUISITION:

Drawings and specifications can be obtained electronically via the Construction Managers Invitation to
Bid. The invitation to bid will be sent electronically.
No hard copies of the plans and specifications will be available.
PRE-PROPOSAL MEETING:
A mandatory on-site pre-proposal meeting and walk-through will be held on :
Structural, Exterior Skin, Drywall, Mechanical, Fire Protection, Electrical - March 31, 2015 at 10:30am
Interior Finish Trades March 31, 2015 at 1 :30pm
END OF SECTION
00010
: (
! /
"
: (
!
!
" #
" "# $%& '& ("

% )
"
" #
"
" ,
" %-
+(
" .
" . *
1 # *
"
" "# $%& '& ("

% )
"
"
" ,
" %-
" .
"
" . *
" ,
" *-
1 # *
"
$%& '& *
"
" ,
" *-
$%& '& *
(
(
(
(
!
"
' 2
"
* 3 "
$ !$ 4
35 6 4
7
' 2
)# 2 /0 $ !
%8 9
$"
""
/(
3
%8 9
%8 9
* 3 "
35 6 4
)# 2 /0 $ !
"
$ !$ 4
$"
""
2 ' : 27 " ) 3
""# (%$
""# 3
%8
"
2 ' : 27 " ) 3
"
6 &"!
2&"! " ) $
(%$ /
, "
" 3
" )2&
$
'
30 4
'
<" )
(%$ &
'"
(%$ &
8
4*
'
4
;
(%$ ;
" 3
'
'
" )2&
$
6
<" )
(%$ &
(%$ &
"
"" 2= 4<
$
"
'"
30 4
3&
"" *
"
(%$ /
!
'
2&"! " ) $
3
3
(%$ ;
6 &"!
4
;
""
""# 3
%8
!$
, "
2 7
""# (%$
%8 9
2 7
*
""
/(
'
4*
'
"
3&
"
"" *
"
"" 2= 4<
"
"
% $
% $
$
$
"" 2$
("
"
"" 2$
("
(
+
&
"
(
"
"
&
!%
"
" "
"
*
"
!$
"
"'
"! 2 >
"'
"
" "
<
&
*
:
<
&
!$
"'
"
:
!
"
" ) 2&
"
$ !$ 4
2$"
%8
$
3 2 4
20 4 7
3 2 4
/(
:
"
20 4 7
"
"
""# 3
" #"
/(
>
%8
""# $
7*
'
" *
!
@
!$
6 &"!
2&"! " ) $
(%$ /
4
;
(%$ ;
'"
"
" #"
, "
@
" *
" #"
6 &"!
2&"! " ) $
(%$ /
!
/
2 ' : 7" ) 3
"
""# 3
4
;
3
"
%
!
!
" 3
" )2&
" 6
+
2 ' : 7" ) 3
7*
+
3
""# $
, "
/0 $ !2$"
" 6
" #"
?20 (%$
/0 $ !2$"
2$"
2 2$ $ ;
?20 (%$
%
"
2 2$ $ ;
'
%8
" =?
$ !$ 4
>
" =?
"
"
"! 2 >
"'
" ) 2&
%8
!%
3
8
(%$ ;
" 3
" )2&
'
30 4
"
$
'
30 4
'
<" )
"
'
<" )
&'
'"
"
4
"
! /
"
: (
(%$ &
'
(%$ &
4*
'
! /
"
: (
(%$ &
"
(%$ &
"
'
4*
:
$
"
"
$
% $
$
$
"" 2$
("
"
"
:
'"
"
'"
'"
" 7
(%$ &
""
;
"
"
'"
''
"
" 3 *
:* #
6 &"!
''
%8
3%
(%$ /
""
" 3
" )2&
$
'
30 4
'
<" )
(%$ &
'"
"
4*
(%$ ?20
:* #
"*
"
"
, "
''
" 3 *
6 &"!
%8
"
'"
;
4
"
"
(%$ ;
" 3
" )2&
"
4*
'
30 4
"
'
<" )
(%$ &
"
'
3&
'
"
3&
"" 2= 4<
% $
3
"
4*
"" 2= 4<
$
(%$ &
"" *
'
'"
"
"
"" *
4*
(%$ /
"
'
3%
2&"! " ) $
/
"
"
(%$ ;
(%$ &
4*
2&"! " ) $
(%$ &
"
" 7
''
(%$ ?20
, "
'"
"
"
4*
"*
% $
;
$
"" 2$
("
$
"
"
'
"" 2$
A
("
"
"
(
'"
"
'"
""
'"
"
"
"
"
6 &"!
(%$ /
4
;
(%$ ;
" 3
'
30 4
'
<" )
""
'"
"
(%$ &
"*
, "
'"
;
" 3
" )2&
'
30 4
'
(%$ &
!
"
"" *
3
8
4*
"
'"
<" )
(%$ &
3&
'
"
3&
"" *
"" 2= 4<
$
)
4
(%$ ;
4*
"
6 &"!
(%$ /
'
"
"
'
(%$ &
*
" 7
'
"
'"
" )2&
(%$ &
'"
"*
, "
" 7
(%$ &
"
"" 2= 4<
% $
% $
$
"" 2$
("
$
"
"
"" 2$
("
(
'"
"
'"
""
'"
'"
"
"*
"
"
"
"
" 7
(%$ &
" 7
""
'"
"
(%$ &
"*
"
" 3 *
"
:
" 3 *
:* #
6 &"!
, "
2&"! " ) $
(%$ /
6 &"!
(%$ /
" 3
(%$ ;
'
30 4
'
<" )
(%$ &
'"
'
"
4*
!
3&
+
"
'
30 4
'
<" )
(%$ &
3
+
" 3
" )2&
"" *
'
;
4
" )2&
2&"! " ) $
;
(%$ ;
(%$ &
"
"
(%$ ?20
:* #
, "
"
'"
(%$ ?20
"
$
"
! /
"" 2= 4<
+
"" 2$
"
"" *
% $
3&
("
'
"
"" 2= 4<
$
3
8
3&
"" *
"
(%$ &
'"
'
"" *
( &'
"
4*
'
!
3&
"
"
4
"
: (
"" 2= 4<
$
% $
;
$
("
"
"
""
3
+
"
"
("
'"
""
(%$ &
"*
"
:2%8
"
4 "
(%$ ?20
'"
" 7
'"
"
"
"
" 3 *
"
: "
;
4
(%$ ;
" 3
(%$ /
3
" )2&
$
'
30 4
'
<" )
(%$ &
'"
'
(%$ &
3
8
4*
+
!
'
"
3&
"" *
"
"" 2= 4<
$
% $
"" 2$
"
"
1 # * #
'
30 4
'
<" )
(%$ &
(%$ &
"" *
"" 2= 4<
!
/
"
" 7
'"
""
'"
"
(%$ &
"*
"
+
6 &"!
(%$ /
"
, "
;
"
"
4
1 # * #
"
" 3 *
6 &"!
(%$ /
" 3
(%$ ;
'
30 4
'
<" )
(%$ &
'"
(%$ &
'
"" *
"
4*
'
"
3&
"" 2= 4<
$
3
$
"" 2$
*
"
'
<" )
(%$ &
'
"" *
"
4*
'
"
3&
"" 2= 4<
$
% $
"" 2$
'"
(%$ &
4
,
30 4
'
!
"
3
$
" 3
" )2&
% $
;
4
2&"! " ) $
" )2&
("
"
"
'"
"
'"
""
'"
" 7
'"
"
(%$ &
"*
"
"
"
'"
"
"
" 7
""
'"
"
(%$ &
"*
(%$ ?20
6 &"!
)
4
(%$ ;
" 3
;
" )2&
(%$ &
'"
"
(%$ ?20
(%$ /
"
"
"
" 3 *
:* #
;
(%$ ;
, "
% $
:* #
2&"! " ) $
"
(%$ ?20
:* #
("
"
" 3 *
"
0
'"
(
"
"
"
!
3&
("
(%$ ?20
4*
"
3
8
"" 2$
"
'
'"
"*
'"
'
" 7
(%$ &
"
""
"
'"
" )2&
$
(
'"
" 3
(%$ ;
!
$
" 3 *
:* #
(%$ /
, "
4 "
(%$ ?20
("
"
"
:2%8
? 4
:* #
"
4
"
: "
"
"
"
"" 2$
'"
"
"
? 4
% $
"*
: (
* &
"
" 7
(%$ &
! /
"" 2= 4<
'"
'"
# )
"" 2$
" 3 *
:* #
(%$ /
, "
(%$ ;
6 &"!
" 3
;
" )2&
$
6
8
(%$ &
'"
'
30 4
'
30 4
'
<" )
'
<" )
(%$ &
3&
+(
"
"" *
"" 2= 4<
(%$ &
/
'
4*
'
"" *
"" 2= 4<
$
% $
;
3
$
"
'
4*
'
"
% $
+ &'
"
3&
+(
3
!
3
$
! /
"
: (
$
"" 2$
("
(
"
"
! /
"
: (
! /
"
"" 2$
("
"
"
( !
(
'"
"
'"
""
'"
"
(%$ &
''
"
"
)
;
* #
(%$ /
;
(%$ ;
''
" 3
%8
3%
'
30 4
'
<" )
(%$ &
(%$ &
'
"" *
"
4*
'"
'
"
3&
"" 2= 4<
$
"
"
"
4*
"*
"
6 &"!
2&"! " ) $
%8
* #
(%$ /
4
;
(%$ ;
!
" )2&
'"
4
, "
4*
" 7
(%$ &
''
2&"! " ) $
%8
""
"
6 &"!
"
'"
4*
"*
, "
'"
" 7
''
%8
" 3
3%
4*
" )2&
"
'
30 4
"
'
<" )
"
"
(%$ &
(%$ &
"
"
"
"
"
"
'
"" *
"
"
4*
'
$
"
3&
"" 2= 4<
% $
'"
% $
;
$
"" 2$
("
$
"
"
"" 2$
("
+
"
'"
""
"
'"
"
"*
, "
'"
" 7
(%$ &
"
'"
(%$ /
4
;
" 3
" )2&
$
'
30 4
'
<" )
'
4*
'
" 3
" )2&
'
<" )
+(
(%$ &
(%$ &
+(
$
$
;
(%$ ;
+(
"
30 4
"" 2$
(%$ /
'
("
"
"" 2= 4<
% $
6 &"!
2&"! " ) $
3&
"
"
"
"
+(
"" *
*
'"
(%$ &
(%$ &
, "
"
"*
6 &"!
'"
(%$ &
"
(%$ ;
"
" 7
""
"
2&"! " ) $
"
'"
8
'
"" *
"
4*
'
"
3&
"" 2= 4<
% $
+ !
3
$
;
$
"" 2$
+ !
'
("
"
"
!
'"
"
'"
""
+ !
'"
"
+ !
"
"
"
6 &"!
(%$ /
4
;
(%$ ;
" 3
" )2&
$
'
30 4
'
<" )
(%$ &
""
'"
"
(%$ &
, "
+(
+(
(%$ ;
)
4
" 3
" )2&
'
30 4
'
'
(%$ &
!
"
3&
3
8
4*
"
'"
<" )
(%$ &
8
4*
"
6 &"!
(%$ /
"" *
"
"
'
"
3&
"" *
"" 2= 4<
$
" 7
"*
'"
'
'
"
'"
(%$ &
/
'"
"*
, "
" 7
(%$ &
"
"" 2= 4<
% $
% $
$
"" 2$
("
"
4
+ !
'"
+
"
"
"" 2$
("
' &'
"
4
"
SECTION 00050
INFORMATION TO PROPOSERS
ARTICLE 1.
1.1.
RECEIPT OF PROPOSALS:
Competitive Proposals for:

Package 2 Cancer Center
4101 24th Street
Lubbock, TX 79410
Will be received by the Construction Manager at-Risk, Dunn+Teinert, 16000 N Dallas Pkwy, Suite 500,
Dallas, TX 75248 at 2:00PM, April 17, 2015 Any Proposals received after the closing time will be
rejected.
1.2.
The Construction Manager at-Risk may consider informal any Proposal not prepared and submitted in
accordance with the provisions herein. The Construction Manager at-Risk may waive any or all
formalities and accept or reject any or all Proposals.
1.3.
Any Proposal may be withdrawn prior to the above scheduled time or authorized postponement
thereof. No Proposer may withdraw a Proposal within 60 calendar days after the bid date.
1.4.
Faxed Proposals may be sent to:

Construction Manager at-Risk
Dunn+Teinert
Attention: Gordon McArthur
Facsimile: (469) 737-8600
1.5
Email Proposals may be sent to:

Dallas.estimating@jedunn.com
ARTICLE 2.
COMPETITIVE PROPOSALS PREPARATION:
2.1.
Each proposal must be submitted on the prescribed form. All blank spaces for the proposal prices must
be filled, in ink or typewritten, in both words and figures. In cases of conflicts between the amount in
words and figures, the amount in words takes precedence.
2.2.
Each proposal form must be signed by the person authorized to sign and submit a proposal.
2.3.
Any proposer may modify his proposal by facsimile communication at any time prior to the scheduled
closing time for receipt of proposals, provided such facsimile communication is received by the
Construction Manager at-Risk prior to the closing time.
ARTICLE 3.
3.1
BADGING:
All employees of all subcontractors and suppliers working on site must attend Covenant Health
Systems mandatory contractor training to obtain a badge. EMPLOYEES WILL NOT BE PERMITTED ON
THE JOBSITE WITHOUT A BADGE. Effort must be made to coordinate the training session well in
advance of commencing work.
JACC & MOB Renovation Package 2
00050
SECTION 00050
ARTICLE 4.
4.1
AFTER HOURS WORK:
In general, work for this package will take place during regular business hours. However, the following
types of work must be done after hours and coordinated with Dunn+Teinert 7 days in advance of work
taking place.:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Noisy Work (attachment to existing structure, etc.)

Vibratory Work that might transfer to adjacent spaces
Work that will result in transmission of odors into adjacent spaces
Underfloor work in occupied spaces below*
Sawcutting of existing structure or slab
*Infection control plans must be coordinated in advance of this type of work.
ARTICLE 5.
SITE INVESTIGATION:
5.1.
It is the responsibility of each Proposer to examine the project site, existing improvements and adjacent
property and be familiar with existing conditions before submission of a Proposal. PLEASE SEE SECTION
00010 REGARDING ON SITE PRE-PROPOSAL MEETING.
5.2.
After investigating the project site and comparing the Contract Documents with the existing conditions,
the Proposer should immediately notify the Construction Manager at-Risk of any conditions for which
requirements are not clear or about which there is any question regarding the extent of the work
involved.
5.3.
Should the successful Proposer fail to make the required investigations and should a question arise after
award of the contract as to the extent of the work involved in any particular case, Covenant Health
Systems, after receiving recommendations from the Design Professional, will make the interpretation of
the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 6.
6.1.
METHOD OF PROPOSAL:
All work called for in the Proposal Documents shall be proposed under a fixed fee subcontract and/or
purchase order, which may include provisions for Unit Price items of work as applicable. The
successful Proposer shall contract directly with the Construction Manager at-Risk.
ARTICLE 7.
NOT USED
ARTICLE 8.
QUALIFICATIONS OF PROPOSERS:
8.1.
The Construction Manager at-Risk may make such investigations, as it deems necessary to determine
the ability of the Proposers to perform all the work. The Proposers shall furnish to the Construction
Manager at-Risk all such information and data for this purpose as the Construction Manager at-Risk may
request. The Construction Manager at-Risk reserves the right to reject any Proposal if the evidence
submitted by, or the investigation of, the Proposer fails to satisfy the Construction Manager at-Risk that
the Proposer is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work
contemplated therein.
ARTICLE 9.
ELIGIBILITY OF PROPOSERS:
00050
SECTION 00050
9.1.
Under Section 231.006 Family Code, Vernons Texas Civil Statues, relating to child support, the Proposer
certifies that the individual or business entity named in this Proposal is not ineligible to receive the
specified payment and acknowledges that this contract may be terminated and payment may be
withheld if this affirmation is inaccurate. Any Proposer submitting a Proposal must include in the
Proposal the name and Social Security Number of each person with at least 25% of the business entity.
9.2.
Governmental entities and any corporation, including a nonprofit corporation, that do not have a
majority shareholder who is a natural person capable of being a child support obligor, are not subject to
the Texas Family Code.
ARTICLE 10.
NOT USED
ARTICLE 11.
SECURITY FOR FAITHFUL PAYMENT (Proposals exceeding $25,000):
11.1. Payment or Performance Bonds are not required on contracts of $25,000.00 or less unless otherwise
stipulated in the Special Conditions. Contracts exceeding $25,000.00 may require Payment and
Performance Bonds and the Proposer shall identify the associated costs of the bonds as listed in the
Proposal document.
11.2. If requested by the Construction Manager: simultaneously with the delivery of the executed contract,
the Proposer shall furnish surety bonds as security for faithful performance of this contract and for the
payment of all persons performing labor on the project under this contract and furnishing materials in
connection with this contract, as specified in the General Conditions included herein. Each bond shall
be executed by a corporate surety or corporate sureties which are on the approved list of the United
States Department of Treasury (Federal Register Circular 570 - "Companies Holding Certificates of
Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and Acceptable Reinsuring Companies", sections
9304 through 9308 of Title 31 of the United States Code, Surety Companies Acceptable on Federal
Bonds) and duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and those acceptable to Covenant
Health Systems , and submitted on forms approved by the Attorney General of Texas.
ARTICLE 12.
POWER OF ATTORNEY:
13.1 Attorneys-in-fact who sign Proposal / Bid Bonds or Contract Bonds must file with each bond a certified
and effectively dated copy of their power of attorney.
ARTICLE 13.
INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS:
13.1. The Proposer shall provide for the insurance coverage required by the Proposal documents and the
associated cost of the insurance shall be identified in the Proposal document.
13.2. Except for asbestos abatement projects, all coverage must be provided on an occurrence basis, rather
than claims made, and be provided through companies who have a minimal "Best's" rating of A with a
financial size category of X. The company must also be authorized to do business in the State of Texas
and be acceptable to the Owner and the Construction Manager at-Risk.
13.3. The Successful Proposer shall not commence work under the Contract until it has obtained all the
insurance required hereunder, with Covenant Health Systems and Dunn+Teinert as a named insured
and certificates of such insurance have been filed with and approved by the Construction Manager atINFORMATION TO PROPOSERS
00050
SECTION 00050
Risk and Covenant Health Systems. Approval of the insurance by the Covenant Health Systems and
Construction Manager of Project Administration and the Construction Manager at-Risk shall not relieve
or decrease the liability of the Proposer.
13.4. The Proposer shall be responsible for the deductible associated with all Builders Risk claims.
ARTICLE 14.
NOT USED
00050
SECTION 00050
ARTICLE 15.
TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES:
15.1. The time stipulated in the proposal documents for the completion of the work is an essential element of
the contract. It is mutually agreed that Covenant Health Systems and the Construction Manager at-Risk
will suffer financial damages in an amount not now possible to ascertain if this work is not completed on
schedule, and in view of these facts, it is agreed that the Construction Manager at-Risk will withhold
from the successful Proposer, as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, the sum as designated in the
Proposal for each calendar day that the work remains incomplete beyond the date specified for the
completion of the work.
15.2. Proposer must agree to commence work on or after a date to be specified in a written "Notice to
Proceed" by the Construction Manager at-Risk and to fully complete the Contractor's category of work
in the number of consecutive calendar days noted on the proposal. The Proposer shall pay, as liquidated
damages, the sum noted on the proposal for each calendar day the work remains substantially
incomplete after the specified completion date shown on the "Notice to Proceed", or as extended by
change order by the Construction Manager at-Risk.
ARTICLE 16.
ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS:
16.1. No oral interpretations of the meaning of the contract documents will be made to any proposer.
16.2. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing addressed to the Project Manager as
identified in the Request for Proposals and, to be given consideration, must be received by April 3,
2015. Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental instructions, which if issued, will be issued
via Invitation to Bid. All addenda and RFIs so issued shall become part of the contract documents.
16.3. Each Proposer shall ascertain prior to submitting a Proposal that the Proposer has received all Addenda
and RFIs issued, and the Proposer shall acknowledge their receipt in the Proposal. Failure to
acknowledge receipt of any or all addenda may result in the disqualification of the Proposal.
ARTICLE 17.
NOT USED:
ARTICLE 18.
OBLIGATION OF PROPOSERS:
18.1. At the time of the bid, each Proposer shall be presumed to have inspected the site and to have read and
to be thoroughly familiar with the contract documents related to this portion of the work. The failure or
omission of any Proposer to examine the site, any form, instrument or document shall in no way relieve
the Proposer from any obligation in respect to its Proposal.
ARTICLE 19.
NOTICE OF SPECIAL CONDITIONS:
19.1. Attention is particularly called to those parts of the contract documents and specifications that deal
with General Requirements, Special Conditions, Insurance Requirements, and Conditions of
Employment to be observed and minimum wage rates to be paid under the Contract.
ARTICLE 20.
PROPOSERS AFFIRMATION:
00050
SECTION 00050
21.1 Signing the Proposal with a false statement shall constitute a material breach of contract and shall void
the submitted Proposal or any resulting contracts, and the Proposer shall be removed from all Proposal
lists. The Proposer hereby certifies that:
1.
The proposer has not given, offered to give, nor intends to give at any time hereafter
any economic opportunity, future employment, gift, loan, gratuity, special discount, trip,
favor, or service to a public servant in connection with the submitted proposal.
2.
The proposer is not currently delinquent in the payment of any franchise tax owed the
State of Texas under Chapter 171 Tax Code.
3.
Neither the proposer nor the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented
by the proposer, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation or institution has violated
the antitrust laws of the state, codified in Section 15.01, et seq., Texas Business and
Commerce Code, or the Federal Antitrust Laws, nor communicated directly or indirectly
the proposal made to any competitor or any other person engaged in such line of
business.
4.
The proposer has not received compensation for participation in the preparation of the
specifications for this invitation for proposal.
5.
The proposer, or sole proprietor, partner, majority shareholder or substantial owner in
the business entity, if a child support obligor, is not more than 30 days behind in paying
child support and therefore ineligible to submit a proposal or enter into a contract with
the State of Texas.
END OF SECTION
00050
SECTION 00100
PROPOSAL FORM
PROJECT:
DATE:

Package 2 Cancer Center
4101 24th Street
Lubbock, TX 79410
_____________________
PROPOSER:
Firm Name:
Business Address:
Telephone:
Facsimile:
E-Mail:
TO:
Construction Manager at Risk

Dunn+Teinert, a Joint Venture Company
16000 N Dallas Pkwy, Suite 500
Dallas, TX 75248
Telephone: (214) 651-7107
Facsimile:
(469) 737-8600
Having carefully examined the UNIFORM GENERAL CONDITIONS and SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS of
the CONTRACT, the SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, and ANY ADDENDA to the drawings and specifications prepared
by the Design Professional on this Project, as well as the site and all conditions affecting the work, the undersigned
proposes to provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the entire work in accordance with
the above documents for the following sums:
Proposer to list all specification sections, inclusions, exclusions, and provide a complete and clear scope of work for
submitted proposal. Proposer may attach separate scope of work or proposers standard proposal form if desired.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
00100-1
SECTION 00100
PROPOSAL FORM
ADDENDUM/ADDENDA:
The Proposer acknowledges the receipt of _______ Addendum / Addenda to the Proposal Documents as follows:
No.________ Date: ___________________
No.________ Date: ___________________
No.________ Date: ___________________
No.________ Date: ___________________
No.________ Date: ___________________
No.________ Date: ___________________
BASE PROPOSAL:
The Construction Manager at Risk will pay the Proposer, in current funds, for the performance of all work set forth
in the Contract Documents, the total contract sum of:
________________________________________________________________________and ___/100 Dollars
(Written Amount)
$_____________________________
(Figures)
Cost for Performance and Payment Bond:

________________________________________________________________________and ___/100 Dollars
(Written Amount)
$_____________________________
(Figures)
ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1 Eliminate emergency generator:
1.
2.
3.
ADD______________ DEDUCT_______________NO CHANGE_____NOT APPLICABLE_____.

_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
ADD__________DEDUCT__________calendar days to adjust the Contract Time for this Alternate.
B.
Alternate No. 2 Eliminate renovation of existing Courtyard #1:
1.
2.
3.

_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
C.
Alternate No. 3 Eliminate construction of new Courtyard #2:
1.

00100-2
SECTION 00100
PROPOSAL FORM
2.
3.
_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
D. Alternate No. 4 Eliminate installation of new skylights in existing roof (north):

1.
2.
3.

_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
E.
Alternate No. 5 Eliminate installation of new skylights in new addition (south):
1.
2.
3.

_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
F.
Alternate No. 6A Eliminate installation of both new elevators and shaft:
1.
2.
3.

_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
G. Alternate No. 6B Eliminate installation of (1) one new elevator:

1.
2.
3.

_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
H. Alternate No. 7 Eliminate installation of new window in 2nd Floor Staff Break Room (#2516) and all
associated work in its entirety:
1.
2.
3.

_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
I.
Alternate No. 8 Eliminate installation of new window in 1st Floor Staff Break Room (#1424) and all
associated work in its entirety:
1.
2.
3.

_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
J.
Alternate No. 9 Replace interior Acrovyn style interior doors currently scheduled with alternate
style door.
1.
2.
3.

_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
K.
Alternate No. 10 Replace premanufactured glazed wood door panels at 2nd Floor Infusion Bays with
shop or site-built carpentry glazed frames.
1.
2.
3.

_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
00100-3
SECTION 00100
PROPOSAL FORM
L.
Alternate No. 11 Eliminate new trees on north side of project (along 22nd Place).
1.
2.
3.

_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
M. Alternate No. 12 Eliminate check-out window at Room #1112.

1.
2.
3.

_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
N. Alternate No. 13 Eliminate wall modification at west side of Mechanical Room #1212.
1.
2.
3.

_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
O. Alternate No. 14 Eliminate storefront glazing at 2nd Floor Entry to Infusion Clinic Waiting Room.
1.
2.
3.

_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
P.
Alternate No. 15 Reduce number of hand sinks at 2nd Floor Infusion area from 19 to 10.
1.
2.
3.

_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
Q. Alternate No. 16 Eliminate spandrel glass in new storefront glazing and replace with composite
metal panels:
1.
2.
3.

_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
R.
Voluntary Alternate
1.
2.
3.
Deduct___________
_____________________________________________________Dollars ($_____________).
Deduct___________calendar days to adjust the Contract Time for this Alternate.
S.
Voluntary Alternate
1.
2.
3.
Deduct___________
_____________________________________________________Dollars($_____________).
Deduct___________calendar days to adjust the Contract Time for this Alternate.
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES:
The Proposer agrees and understands that liquidated damages for this project will be assessed in accordance with
the Supplementary General Conditions for each calendar day until the Work is Substantially Complete. The
00100-4
SECTION 00100
PROPOSAL FORM
Proposer agrees and understands that they may be liable for damages caused by their firms delays resulting in
said damages.
CONSTRUCTION DURATION:
The Proposer agrees and understands to commence work when directed by the Construction Manager and to
diligently and continuously execute their scope of work, and to coordinate their work with other trades so that the
Construction Manager shall not be delayed.
THE UNDERSIGNED AGREES:

A.
To enter into a contract with the Construction Manager at Risk within five (5) days of notification of
award.
B.
And understands that the time in the Agreement between the Construction Manager at Risk and the
Proposer for the completion of the work is an essential element of the Agreement. It is mutually
agreed that the Construction Manager at Risk and Covenant Health Systems will suffer financial
damages in an amount not now possible to ascertain if the work is not completed on schedule, and in
view of these facts, it is agreed that the Construction Manager at Risk will withhold from the
successful Proposer, as liquidated damages and not as a penalty the sum of money indicated in this
Section per day for each calendar day that the work remains incomplete beyond the date specified as
the completion date of the work.
C.
Covenant Health Systems shall have the right to accept or reject any or all proposals, to reject a
Proposal not accompanied by a required proposal security or by other data required by the Proposal
Documents, reject a proposal that is in any way incomplete or irregular, and to waive all formalities.
D.
That this Proposal shall be valid and not withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days from the bid date.
E.
That amounts shall be shown in both writing and figures. In case of discrepancy between the written
amount and the figure, the written amount shall govern.
G.
That signing this Proposal with a false statement shall constitute a material breach of contract and
shall void the submitted Proposal or any resulting contracts, and the Proposer shall be removed from
all Proposal lists. By signature hereon affixed, the Proposer hereby certifies that:
1.
The Proposer has not given, offered to give, nor intends to give at any time hereafter any economic
opportunity, future employment, gift, loan, gratuity, special discount, trip, favor, or service to a public
servant in connection with the submitted Proposal.
2.
The Proposer is not currently delinquent in the payment of any franchise tax owed the State of Texas
under Chapter 171 Tax Code.
3.
Neither the Proposer nor the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the
Proposer, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation or institution has violated the antitrust laws of
this state, codified in Section 15.01, et seq., Texas Business and Commerce Code, or the Federal
Antitrust Laws, nor communicated directly or indirectly the Proposal made to any competitor or any
other person engaged in such line of business.
4.
The Proposer has not received compensation for participation in the preparation of the specifications
for this invitation for Proposal.
5.
The Proposer, or sole proprietor, partner, majority shareholder, or substantial owner in the business
entity, if a child support obligor, is not more than thirty (30) days behind in paying child support and
therefore ineligible to submit a Proposal or enter into a contract with the State of Texas.
00100-5
SECTION 00100
PROPOSAL FORM
SUBMITTED:
Firm:
(SEAL: If Proposal is by a
Corporation)
By:
Title:
00100-6

Phase 2
SECTION 00705
AGREEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
APPLICABLE DOCUMENT
A.
The Agreement for the Work will be as indicated below and that follows this Section.
1.
AIA A401-2007, Standard Form of Agreement Between Contractor and
Subcontractor, as amended.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
AGREEMENT
00705 - 1
DOCUMENT 00840
3D MEP MODEL COORDINATION PROGRAM
I.
COORDINATION SCHEDULE & MEETING REQUIREMENTS

A. A coordination schedule will be established at the MEP coordination kickoff meeting. The
building will be divided into coordination areas and a completion date will be assigned to
each area.
B. An MEP coordination meeting will be held once a week at a minimum for the duration of
the MEP coordination process. Additional meetings may be held as required. JE Dunn
plans to use a web meeting platform and conference call bridge. The login instructions
and conference call information will be provided by JE Dunn.
II.
3D BIM MODELS
A. BIM Models will be prepared by each individual trade for the coordination process. All
drawings will be imported into one file using Navisworks, and reviewed during the
coordination meetings. The BIM Coordination models will be used to locate conflicts with
trades when they must route their systems outside the assigned zones or areas.
B. Modeling Procedures (BIM Coordination Models)
1. JE Dunn will not provide CAD background files or 3D models to subcontractors
unless they are provided to us by the design team.
2. All files will be in a 3-D solid object format. No wire frame objects files will be
accepted.
3. All items above ceilings, and items listed in the trade specific requirements for
items below ceiling, shall be included in the electronic files.
4. The Coordinated BIM Model Manager will execute coordination using
Navisworks. All other trades shall use software that can be exported into a file
format that can be directly imported into Navisworks.
5. Elevations of object must be true accurate elevations per plans and
specifications. Coordinate elevations with JE Dunn grade elevation which will
be established at the MEP coordination kickoff meeting.
6. Include locations of all hangers associated with piping, ductwork and conduits.
7. Show seismic anchor points for all items needing cabling and bracing.
8. Include insulation thickness in overall dimensions and clearances on drawings.
9. All models will use the insertion point 0,0, lined up with the furthest Northwest
grid line intersection or as mutually determined by the team.
10. Access and clearances around FP Box control panels and anything needing
clearances by code must be maintained. Clearance requirements by code, or
equipment manufacturer, must be modeled using solid objects. The fire alarm
subcontractor will note clearances on coordination drawings.
11. All coordination files for each respective subcontractor must be backed up in
case of server failure.
C. Model Creators (Architectural and Structural will be modeled as noted below when not
modeled by the design team)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Architectural - JE Dunn
Cast-in-place Concrete JE Dunn
Precast Concrete by Supplier (if applicable)
Structural Steel by Supplier (if applicable)
Mech/Plum Mechanical Subcontractor
Page 1
DOCUMENT 00840
6. Electrical Electrical Subcontractor
7. Fire Protection Fire Protection Subcontractor
D. Extent of Final Model: The BIM model shall extend to five feet beyond the exterior walls of
the building in plan. Vertically, the model shall extend from the lowest extent of the
foundations or lowest underground utility up through and including the roof of the top most
structure. The building systems will be included to the full horizontal and vertical extent of
the model including underground utilities and roof-top mounted items. If site utility
coordination is required, the horizontal extent of the model will be expanded as needed.
E. As-Built Model: The extent of the as-built model will match the extent of the final model. It
is the responsibility of the model creators to update their trade specific models to reflect
as-built conditions. Any and all changes that occur during construction, that deviate from
the final model, will be updated in the as-built model to reflect actual conditions.
F. In the event equipment is provided by one entity and installed by another, it will be the
responsibility of the installing contractor to show required equipment in their model.
Equipment modeled shall include required access and clearance zones as prescribed by
the governing building code or equivalent requirement.
G. Systems Modeled and Level of Detail: The level of detail defined in each section below is
the minimum level of detail required in the model.
1. Architectural
a.
b.
c.
d.
All interior walls.

All interior and exterior doors and windows.
All fixed casework.
All ceilings and soffits will be modeled.
1. Ceilings and soffits will be modeled as the overall thickness including
elevation changes and termination points.
e. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
2. Structural
a. All cast-in-place concrete, including all penetrations and openings identified
in the construction documents, will be modeled. Chamfers at corners will
not be modeled.
b. Edges of all slabs and penetrations of structural systems will be accurately
located in the model.
c. All primary and secondary structural steel members will be modeled,
including standard steel member sizes, gusset plates, braces and kickers.
Any systems requiring embeds to be placed in CIP concrete will show
connections in the model. Reinforcing steel will not be modeled for MEP
coordination.
d. Metal, wood and concrete decks will be modeled as the overall thickness of
the slab. Ribs in metal deck will not be modeled.
3. HVAC
a. All ducts and air handling equipment will be modeled. If Flanges are not
modeled, ducts will be modeled to the outside face dimension of the
flanges or overall dimension including insulation (If required). Duct joints
do not have to be modeled, but all hangers will be modeled to ensure
conflicts are reduced.
Page 2
DOCUMENT 00840
b. Equipment will be modeled to its overall height, width and depth.
Equipment will be modeled as separate objects.
Equipment access zones will be modeled as solids.
c. Any piping associated with the mechanical equipment will be modeled.
Pipes will be modeled to the outside diameter of the pipe or pipe insulation,
whichever is greater. Pipe hangers must be shown extending to structure.
d. The intent of this model is to show the ductwork and piping as accurately
as possible to the actual condition at completion of construction. Specific
dimensional location of these items may not be included in the construction
documents. To the extent that location can be determined from the
construction documents, the model will reflect that location.
4. Electrical
a. Conduits, 1" or greater or smaller conduits if in ganged runs will be
modeled.
b. Cable tray, access zones, and equipment to be included in the model.
c. Light fixture locations and space requirements to be included in the model.
d. All power feeds to equipment and all switch gear will be modeled. Also
consider switches and outlets where coordination with architectural FFE or
interior elevations is a concern.
5. Plumbing
a. All plumbing piping and gas piping, including specialty gas, access zones,
and equipment will be modeled. Pipes will be modeled to the outside
diameter of the pipe or pipe insulation, whichever is greater. Pipe slope
will be incorporated in the model.
b. All plumbing equipment will be modeled to its overall height, width and
depth. Equipment will be modeled as separate objects.
c. All valves and clean outs will be modeled along with all access to
valves/cleanouts.
6. Fire Protection Sprinkler and Alarm
a. All components of the fire protection system will be modeled. This includes
all piping, valves, fire pump and sprinkler heads.
b. Any access zone requirements will be modeled.
H. Model Management, Electronic File Management and the Coordinated BIM Model
Manager
1. JE Dunn will be the Coordinated BIM Model Manager and will manage and
maintain an FTP site or similar file sharing method.
a. The FTP site shall have enough capacity to store all subcontractors BIM
models and the Coordinated BIM Model.
b. Also stored on this database will be all the contract documents for access
by all trades (if provided by the design team).
c. Directories will be included for all subcontractors to store BIM Models and
sketches.
d. A separate directory will also be available for the posting of Coordinated
BIM Models
e. A job specific password will be provided, access will be limited to upload or
download, no erase or modify allowed.
Page 3
DOCUMENT 00840
2. All subcontractors will upload current project data once a week in conjunction
with the MEP model coordination schedule. The day of the week and time of
day requirements for uploading information will be established at the MEP
coordination kickoff meeting. Uploads may occur more frequently if required by
project schedule. When subcontractors upload files to the FTP site, the
information shall be organized in folders with the current date (YY/MM/DD).
This will ensure that the date is easily understood by the rest of the team.
3. When uploading files, please notify all affected parties via e-mail including a list
of uploaded files, summary and purpose of contents and location if placed in a
specific folder.
4. It is the responsibility of each team member to always download the latest files
necessary to complete their task. Please check the folder location, name and
dates of the files you download. This will reduce coordination errors
throughout the design phase.
5. File Naming Conventions: All subcontractors shall use the file naming
conventions as follows.
a. Working model files:
1. 3-Letter Firm Acronym-4-Letter Discipline-Area-Date.dwg
Example: JED-Conc-1stfl-composite-20110324 (Note date style:
yyyymmdd)
2. Disciplines:
Sheet metal
Plumbing
Mechanical
Electrical
Med Gas
Fire Protection
Duct
Plum
Pipe
Elec
Mgas
Fire
Note: The structural and architectural information will be provided for

coordination in the JED composite model when models are not
provided by the Design Team.
b. Archived model files:
1. The Coordinated BIM Model Manager shall archive all model files as
zip files using the archive file naming conventions as follows:
Firm acronym-Project name-Disc-Date.zip
Example: JED-SPIRE-CONC-071225.zip (Note date style:
yy/mm/dd)
III.
TRADE CLASH DETECTION / COORDINATION / RESOLUTION

A. Purpose: The Coordination and Resolution phase is used to identify conflicts between
trades not coordinated during the design/drawing phase and resolve those conflicts prior
to beginning the actual construction in a given space. A weekly meeting will be held to
review outstanding RFIs, coordination conflicts, and additional issues that relate to the
coordination process. A representative from each trade will attend these meetings and
will be prepared to resolve all conflicts. Conflicts needing input from the engineers and
architects will be addressed through the RFI process.
Page 4
DOCUMENT 00840
B. Clash Detection: Navisworks software shall be used to identify clashes between trades.
These clashes will be communicated to individual trades via a clash report in advance of
weekly coordination meetings such that the clashes can be discussed and resolved in
those meetings.
C. Coordination
1. A flow of coordination along with a completion schedule will be established
that allows the floors to be coordinated and signed off prior to installation of
any MEP equipment.
2. All trades must review other trades drawings prior to coordination and agree
to an elevation space above the ceiling for each system
3. For each particular area or floor, there will be two phases of coordination.
The first phase will be the mains associated with each trade. This includes
all medium pressure duct (including VAV boxes), large return ducts (greater
the 24"), large diameter pipe (2" and above), sloped piping and conduit
racks. The second phase will be all remaining items.
4. Shop Drawings for items that will be involved in coordination shall be
submitted and reviewed prior to the start of coordination in each area.
5. Systems not submitted and reviewed prior to coordination are subject to
change without cost to the project.
6. All trades to use software that can be imported into Navisworks.
7. Allow for required access over cable tray as indicated on contract
documents.
8. Each subcontractor shall verify local code clearance requirements relating to
their respective scopes of work.
9. Reference Division 1 Specifications for additional information.
10. Working Models will be imported into one file to create a BIM Coordination
Model.
11. A weekly coordination meeting will be scheduled to review conflicts, or more
often as necessary to meet project schedules. See section I.B.
12. A representative from each company coordinating must be present at each
meeting. This representative should have first hand knowledge of what has
been modeled and is prepared resolve conflicts based on what is discussed
in the coordination meeting.
13. As is the case on most structural frames, the structure takes priority over
conflicts unless specific changes are approved by the EOR. Furthermore,
work on the structure will proceed and will not be stopped waiting for BIM
drawings from the various trades.
14. At completion of coordination for each area, the Coordinated BIM Model
Manager shall provide a coordinated drawing that includes a block with lines
and spaces for every subcontractor to sign off.
15. The clash resolution priorities listed in section E below will be reviewed at the
MEP coordination kickoff meeting and will be amended as needed to fit the
project specific requirements.
D. Resolution of Conflicts
1. All parties shall review the Coordinated CAD Drawing and the BIM Models
for coordination conflicts.
2. J.E. Dunn will be available to facilitate coordination between trades.
3. If RFIs are needed to address a conflict, that RFI will be noted on the
Navisworks report with an image of conflict within the subcontractors
drawing.
Page 5
DOCUMENT 00840
4. RFIs must include an image of the conflict and a proposed answer if
possible.
5. Conflicts shall be noted on the Navisworks report and a copy kept on file until
all corrections are completed.
6. An agreed upon completion date will be established based on the estimated
time to resolve the conflict (not to exceed scheduled coordination milestones,
as shown on contract schedule.)
E. Clash Resolution Priorities: In the event of conflicts involving location and layout of work,
use the following priority guidelines to resolve
1. Architecture and Structure take precedence over other disciplines, this
includes ceilings, walls, soffit framing, light fixture locations, etc...
2. Equipment location and access
3. Gravity drain lines, including steam, condensate, waste, storm and
dry/preaction fire protection systems.
4. High and medium pressure ductwork and devices.
5. Large diameter pressurized pipe mains, valves and devices (2" and larger),
including all fire protection mains.
6. Pneumatic Tube (PT)
7. Lighting fixtures and conduit racks/cable trays.
8. Fire protection branch piping, devices and heads.
9. Low pressure ductwork, grilles, registers, diffusers and associated
equipment.
10. Small diameter pressurized pipe mains, valves and devices (3" and smaller).
11. Sleeves through rated partitions.
12. Access panels
13. Notes
a. Ceilings should only be lowered (RFI) if all other design alternatives
have been exhausted.
b. The PT station must be per the design. All other alternatives should
be exhausted before following up with an RFI.
c. The PT Transfer Station is flexible so you can find open areas in the
ceiling cavity to elevate any conflicts (they need access panel in hard
ceiling, and access to this in general).
d. Do not allow ducts to run parallel and on top of walls or crossing
perpendicular to walls at the edge of door frames.
e. If a conflict regarding access to a particular piece of equipment
cannot be resolved, an RFI shall be written to the architect to
confirming that the proposed layout is acceptable.
F. Changes to the Contract Documents During Coordination
1. When time allows, changes will be made to BIM models and re-coordinated.
2. When time does not allow, detailers and foremen will coordinate with existing
field conditions.
3. If field coordination is required, as-builts will reflect the new field condition.
4. All changes to the construction documents (IE: ASIs, PRs, RFIs, etc.) will
be included in the as-builts.
G. Equipment Provided By Others

1. Subcontractors with connections to equipment provided by others are
required to coordinate layout and access as noted on the submittals and
shop drawings or local codes.
Page 6
DOCUMENT 00840
2. Where equipment submittals are not available or equipment is unknown at
the time of coordination, subcontractors will work with J.E. Dunn to establish
access and installation zones to insert in the coordinated shop drawings.
3. Equipment locations will be coordinated with architectural layouts and
owners input.
4. Equipment requiring individualized detailing will be detailed separate from the
coordination drawing and added as a block or access zone. 3D rendering
and viewing may be necessary. These individual areas will be reviewed by
representatives from J.E. Dunn, the supplier, the design team and the owner,
for maintenance, access, and serviceability.
IV.
DRAWING SUBMITTAL AND APPROVAL

A. General submittal requirements:
1. Coordination Models will be submitted for information only. Each
subcontractor must submit a separate set of shop drawings.
2. All shop drawings must be submitted per the contract documents. Refer to
division 1 specification sections, 15000 General Mechanical Requirements,
16000 General Electrical Requirements and related section.
3. Drawings showing additional detail of the mechanical spaces or congested
areas may be required.
4. Shop drawings must be fully coordinated and submitted prior to the
installation of any items pertaining to those drawings.
5. Shop drawings will include background and gridlines, company title block,
submittal numbers, drawing number and additional information for the title
block to be identified at the MEP Coordination Kickoff Meeting.
B. General drawing requirements:
1. Provide detailed coordinated shop drawings (following coordination sign off)
for review.
a. Title block to include area (floor number or designation area),
print date, drawn by and for review.
b. Provide 8 copies to JE Dunn with a transmittal noting action and
date required.
2. Show all equipment (simple frame with equipment indication is acceptable,
detail is preferred) and associated equipment pads, dimensioned from
nearest grid lines.
3. Show dimensions and elevations to all systems from nearest grid that would
be required for accurate layout in the field.
4. Drawings indicating structural wall and floor penetrations are required for
review and approval. Also provide block wall penetrations for coordination
with the block subcontractor. Drawings should show required penetration
sizes not duct sizes.
5. Where equipment needs to be coordinated with lab equipment, owner
provided equipment, cut sheets and dimensional layout will be provided.
Suppliers will be available for coordination meetings on an as needed basis.
When equipment information is not available subcontractors will work with
J.E. Dunn to establish access and installation zones to insert in the
coordination drawings.
C. Trade specific drawing requirements:
1. HVAC Subcontractor
a. All ductwork, including flexible duct and transitions outlined in the
subcontract agreement
Page 7
DOCUMENT 00840
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Access doors
Duct insulation
Air handling equipment
Filters and access to filters
Grilles, registers and diffusers
Fire dampers (include access to motors and dampers)
Sound attenuating equipment
Dampers (automatic and controlled)
VAV boxes and access clearances (hatched)
Equipment furnished by others when connections are to be provided
by HVAC subcontractor
l. Show locations of all balance dampers and regulators.
m. Maintenance and access clearance around equipment.
2. Plumbing Subcontractor
a. All piping runs outlined in the subcontract agreement
b. Valves (manual and automatic)
c. Piping rack
d. Plumbing equipment
e. All fixtures and drains
f. Sensor and gauge locations
g. Meters and filters
h. Clearances and access space (hatched)
i. Equipment furnished by others when connections are to be provided
by the plumbing subcontractor
j. Maintenance and access clearance around equipment.
3. HVAC Piping Subcontractor
c. Piping rack
d. HVAC Equipment
by the HVAC piping subcontractor
4. Fire Protection Subcontractor
c. FP Equipment
d. Sprinkler heads
e. Fire hose cabinets
f. Fire Department connection
g. Drain outlets
by the fire protection subcontractor
5. Electrical Subcontractor
a. All conduit runs as outlined in the subcontract agreement
b. Light fixtures (include depth) both above, below ceiling
Page 8
DOCUMENT 00840
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Cable tray
UPS and emergency generator systems
Switch gear
Electrical panels
Fire alarm control panels
Access required for code compliance and maintenance
by the electrical subcontractor
Maintenance and access clearance around equipment
Items not specifically mention in this list will be field coordinated
Page 9
DOCUMENT 00840_DA
3D MODEL COORDINATION PROGRAM
I.
3D Model Coordination Program

A. BIM Models will be prepared by each individual trade for the coordination process. All
drawings will be imported into one file using Navisworks, and reviewed during the
coordination meetings. The BIM Coordination models will be used to locate conflicts with
trades when they must route their systems outside the assigned zones or areas.
B. Due to the design assist role of each sub-contractor, model changes will need to be made
as the design evolves to completion. Changes to each system model will be directed by
the design team and JE Dunn based on a holistic system analysis. These changes will be
made by each sub trade to their respective models, and then resubmit the model for
review. Changes to these models will not be a basis for claiming additional detailing
expense.
C. Modeling Procedures (BIM Coordination Models)
1. JE Dunn will not provide CAD background files or 3D models to subcontractors
unless they are provided to us by the design team.
2. All files will be in a 3-D solid object format. No wire frame objects files will be
accepted.
3. The Coordinated BIM Model Manager will execute coordination using
Navisworks. All other trades shall use software that can be exported into a file
format that can be directly imported into Navisworks or a determined
collaboration platform established at a later date.
4. Elevations of object must be true accurate elevations per plans and
specifications.
5. Include locations of all hangers associated with piping, ductwork and conduits.
6. Show seismic anchor points for all items needing cabling and bracing.
7. Include insulation thickness in overall dimensions and clearances on drawings.
8. All models will use the insertion point 0,0, lined up with the furthest Northwest
grid line intersection or as mutually determined by the team.
9. Trades choosing not to detail any items (i.e. reheat coil piping) must field
coordinate the installation of those items not modeled and take the
responsibility for access, conflicts and design team comments. Every effort
shall be made to avoid this condition.
10. Access and clearances around FP Box control panels and anything needing
clearances by code must be maintained. Clearance requirements by code,
or equipment manufacturer, must be modeled using solid objects. The fire
alarm subcontractor will note clearances on coordination drawings.
11. All coordination files for each respective subcontractor must be backed up in
case of server failure.
D. Model Creators (Architectural and Structural will be modeled as noted below when not
modeled by the design team)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Architectural Architect of Record

Cast-in-place Concrete Concrete Subcontractor
Mech/Plum Mechanical Subcontractor
Electrical Electrical Subcontractor (Includes Temperature control, AV,
Security, Fire alarm, and any other low voltage system.)
5. Fire Protection Fire Protection Subcontractor
Page 1
DOCUMENT 00840_DA
E. Extent of Final Model: The BIM model shall extend to five feet beyond the exterior walls of
the building in plan. Vertically, the model shall extend from the lowest extent of the
foundations or lowest underground utility up through and including the roof of the top most
structure. The building systems will be included to the full horizontal and vertical extent of
the model including underground utilities and roof-top mounted items. If site utility
coordination is required, the horizontal extent of the model will be expanded as needed.
F. In the event equipment is provided by one entity and installed by another, it will be the
responsibility of the installing contractor to show required equipment in their model.
Equipment modeled shall include required access and clearance zones as prescribed by
the governing building code or equivalent requirement.
G. Systems Modeled and Level of Detail: The level of detail defined in each section below is
the minimum level of detail required in the model. See Section I, part B.9 for any items not
modeled.
1. Architectural
a. All interior ceilings and soffits will be modeled.
b. Ceilings and soffits will be modeled as the overall thickness including
elevation changes and termination points.
c. Interior partition walls and doors will be modeled with king stud framing.
2. Structural
a. All cast-in-place concrete, including all penetrations and openings identified
in the construction documents, will be modeled. Chamfers at corners will
not be modeled.
b. Edges of all slabs and penetrations of structural systems will be accurately
located in the model.
c. All primary and secondary structural steel members will be modeled,
including standard steel member sizes, gusset plates, braces and kickers.
Any systems requiring embeds to be placed in CIP concrete will show
connections in the model. Reinforcing steel will not be modeled for MEP
coordination.
d. Metal, wood and concrete decks will be modeled as the overall thickness of
the slab. Ribs in metal deck will not be modeled.
3. HVAC
a. All ducts and air handling equipment will be modeled. If Flanges are not
modeled, ducts will be modeled to the outside face dimension of the
flanges or overall dimension including insulation (If required). Duct joints
do not have to be modeled, but all hangers will be modeled to ensure
conflicts are reduced.
b. Equipment will be modeled to its overall height, width and depth.
Equipment access zones will be modeled as solids.
c. Any piping associated with the mechanical equipment will be modeled.
Pipes will be modeled to the outside diameter of the pipe or pipe insulation,
whichever is greater. Pipe hangers must be shown extending to structure.
d. The intent of this model is to show the ductwork and piping as accurately
as possible to the actual condition at completion of construction. Specific
dimensional location of these items may not be included in the construction
documents. To the extent that location can be determined from the
construction documents, the model will reflect that location.
Page 2
DOCUMENT 00840_DA
4. Electrical
a. Conduits 2 or greater, or smaller conduits if in ganged runs of two or more
will be modeled.
b. Cable tray, access zones, and equipment to be included in the model.
c. Light fixture locations and space requirements to be included in the model.
d. All power feeds to equipment and all switch gear will be modeled. Also
consider switches and outlets where coordination with architectural FFE or
interior elevations is a concern.
5. Plumbing
a. All plumbing piping and gas piping, including specialty gas, access zones,
and equipment will be modeled. Pipes will be modeled to the outside
diameter of the pipe or pipe insulation, whichever is greater. Pipe slope
will be incorporated in the model.
b. All plumbing equipment will be modeled to its overall height, width and
depth.
c. All valves and clean outs will be modeled along with all access to
valves/cleanouts.
6. Fire Protection Sprinkler and Alarm
a. All components of the fire protection system will be modeled. This includes
all piping, valves, fire pump and sprinkler heads.
b. Any access zone requirements will be modeled.
H. Model Management, Electronic File Management and the Coordinated BIM Model
Manager
1. JE Dunn will be the Coordinated BIM Model Manager and will manage and
maintain an FTP site or similar file sharing method.
a. The FTP site shall have enough capacity to store all subcontractors BIM
models, Design models, and the Coordinated BIM Model.
b. Also stored on this database will be all the contract documents in electronic
format for access by all trades (if provided by the design team).
c. Directories will be included for all subcontractors to store BIM Models and
sketches.
d. A separate directory will also be available for the posting of Coordinated
BIM Models
e. A job specific password will be provided, access will be limited to upload or
download, no erase or modify allowed.
2. All subcontractors will upload current project data once a week in conjunction
with the MEP model coordination schedule. The day of the week and time of
day requirements for uploading information will be established at the MEP
coordination kickoff meeting. Uploads may occur more frequently if required by
project schedule. When subcontractors upload files to the FTP site, the
information shall be organized in folders with the current date (YY/MM/DD).
This will ensure that the date is easily understood by the rest of the team.
3. When uploading files, please notify all affected parties via e-mail including a list
of uploaded files, summary and purpose of contents and location if placed in a
specific folder.
Page 3
DOCUMENT 00840_DA
4. It is the responsibility of each team member to always download the latest files
necessary to complete their task. Please check the folder location, name and
dates of the files you download. This will reduce coordination errors
throughout the design phase.
5. File Naming Conventions: All subcontractors shall use the file naming
conventions as follows.
a. Working model files:
1. Firm Acronym-trades-floor- area-date.file extension
Example: JED-Const-1stfl-composite-20110324 (Note date style:
yyyymmdd)
2. Disciplines:
Sheet metal
Plumbing
Mechanical
Electrical
Med Gas
Fire Protection
Duct
Plum
Pipe
Elec
Mgas
Fire
Note: The structural and architectural information will be provided for

coordination in the JED composite model when models are not
provided by the Design Team.
II.
TRADE CLASH DETECTION / COORDINATION / RESOLUTION

A. Purpose: The Coordination and Resolution phase is used to identify conflicts between
trades not coordinated during the design/drawing phase and resolve those conflicts prior
to beginning the actual construction in a given space. A weekly meeting will be held to
review outstanding RFIs, coordination conflicts, and additional issues that relate to the
coordination process. A representative from each trade will attend these meetings and
will be prepared to resolve all conflicts. Conflicts needing input from the engineers and
architects will be addressed through the RFI process.
B. Clash Detection: Navisworks software shall be used to identify clashes between trades.
These clashes will be communicated to individual trades via a clash report in advance of
weekly coordination meetings such that the clashes can be discussed and resolved in
those meetings.
C. Coordination
1. A flow of coordination along with a completion schedule will be established
that allows the floors to be coordinated and signed off prior to installation of
any MEP equipment.
2. All trades must review other trades drawings prior to coordination and agree
to an elevation space above the ceiling for each system
3. For each particular area or floor, there will be two phases of coordination.
The first phase will be the mains associated with each trade. This includes
all medium pressure duct (including VAV boxes), large return ducts (greater
the 24), large diameter pipe (2 and above), sloped piping and conduit racks.
The second phase will be all remaining items.
Page 4
DOCUMENT 00840_DA
4. Shop Drawings for items that will be involved in coordination shall be
submitted and reviewed prior to the start of coordination in each area.
5. Systems not submitted and reviewed prior to coordination are subject to
change without cost to the project.
6. All trades to use software that can be imported into Navisworks.
7. Allow for required access over cable tray as indicated on contract
documents.
8. Each subcontractor shall verify local code clearance requirements relating to
their respective scopes of work.
9. Reference Division 1 Specifications for additional information.
10. Working Models will be imported into one file to create a BIM Coordination
Model.
11. A weekly coordination meeting will be scheduled to review conflicts, or more
often as necessary to meet project schedules. See section I.B.
12. A representative from each company coordinating must be present at each
meeting. This representative should have first hand knowledge of what has
been modeled and is prepared resolve conflicts based on what is discussed
in the coordination meeting.
13. As is the case on most structural frames, the structure takes priority over
conflicts unless specific changes are approved by the EOR. Furthermore,
work on the structure will proceed and will not be stopped waiting for BIM
drawings from the various trades.
D. Resolution of Conflicts
1. All parties shall review the Coordinated CAD Drawing and the BIM Models
for coordination conflicts.
2. J.E. Dunn will be available to facilitate coordination between trades.
3. If RFIs are needed to address a conflict, that RFI will be noted on the
Navisworks report with an image of conflict within the subcontractors
drawing.
4. RFIs must include an image of the conflict and a proposed answer if
possible.
5. Conflicts shall be noted on the Navisworks report and a copy kept on file until
all corrections are completed.
6. An agreed upon completion date will be established based on the estimated
time to resolve the conflict (not to exceed scheduled coordination milestones,
as shown on contract schedule.)
E. Changes to the Contract Documents During Coordination

1. When time allows, changes will be made to BIM models and re-coordinated.
2. When time does not allow, detailers and foremen will coordinate with existing
field conditions.
3. If field coordination is required, as-builts will reflect the new field condition.
4. All changes to the construction documents (IE: ASIs, PRs, RFIs, etc.) will
be included in the as-builts.
F. Equipment Provided By Others

1. Subcontractors with connections to equipment provided by others are
required to coordinate layout and access as noted on the submittals and
shop drawings or local codes.
Page 5
DOCUMENT 00840_DA
2. Where equipment submittals are not available or equipment is unknown at
the time of coordination, subcontractors will work with J.E. Dunn to establish
access and installation zones to insert in the coordinated shop drawings.
3. Equipment locations will be coordinated with architectural layouts and
owners input.
4. Equipment requiring individualized detailing will be detailed separate from the
coordination drawing and added as a block or access zone. 3D rendering
and viewing may be necessary. These individual areas will be reviewed by
representatives from J.E. Dunn, the supplier, the design team and the owner,
for maintenance, access, and serviceability.
III.
DRAWING SUBMITTAL AND APPROVAL

A. General submittal requirements:
1. Coordination Models will be submitted for information only. Each
subcontractor must submit a separate set of shop drawings.
2. All shop drawings must be submitted per the contract documents. Refer to
division 1 specification sections, 15000 General Mechanical Requirements,
16000 General Electrical Requirements and related section.
3. Drawings showing additional detail of the mechanical spaces or congested
areas may be required.
4. Shop drawings must be fully coordinated and submitted prior to the
installation of any items pertaining to those drawings.
5. Shop drawings will include background and gridlines, company title block,
submittal numbers, drawing number and additional information for the title
block to be identified at the MEP Coordination Kickoff Meeting.
B. Trade specific drawing requirements:

1. Sheetmetal Subcontractor
a. All ductwork, including flexible duct and transitions outlined in the
subcontract agreement
b. Access doors
c. Duct insulation
d. Air handling equipment
e. Filters and access to filters
f. Grilles, registers and diffusers
g. Fire dampers (include access to motors and dampers)
h. Sound attenuating equipment
i. Dampers (automatic and controlled)
j. VAV boxes and access clearances (hatched)
k. Equipment furnished by others when connections are to be provided
by sheetmetal subcontractor
l. Show locations of all balance dampers and regulators.
m. Maintenance and access clearance around equipment.
2. Plumbing Subcontractor
c. Piping rack
d. Plumbing equipment
Page 6
DOCUMENT 00840_DA
i.
j.

by the plumbing subcontractor
Maintenance and access clearance around equipment.
3. HVAC Piping Subcontractor

c. Piping rack
d. HVAC Equipment
by the HVAC piping subcontractor
4. Fire Protection Subcontractor
c. FP Equipment
d. Sprinkler heads
e. Fire hose cabinets
f. Drain outlets
g. Clearances and access space (hatched)
h. Equipment furnished by others when connections are to be provided
by the fire protection subcontractor
i. Maintenance and access clearance around equipment.
5. Electrical Subcontractor
a. All conduit runs as outlined in the subcontract agreement
b. Light fixtures (include depth)
c. Cable tray
d. UPS and emergency generator systems
e. Switch gear
f. Fire alarm control panels.
g. Access required for code compliance and maintenance
h. Equipment furnished by others when connections are to be provided
by the electrical subcontractor
i. Maintenance and access clearance around equipment.
j. Items not specifically mention in this list will be field coordinated.
Page 7

Phase 2
SECTION 01110
SUMMARY OF WORK AND SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
WORK COVERED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A.
B.
1.3
The Contractor shall, within ten (10) calendar days of authorization to proceed with the
Work, notify in writing the regulatory Authorities of the commencement of construction.
CONTRACTS
A.
1.5
The Work of the Contract comprises of all Work described by the Contract Documents. In
general terms the Work includes: Renovation of Joe Arrington Cancer Center Medical Office
Building Partial 1st Floor and Renovation and Addition to Joe Arrington Cancer Center,
1st and 2nd Floors.
The intent of the Contract is for the Contractor to perform all Work in compliance with all
laws, rules, regulations, building codes, orders, decrees and all other legal requirements of
any local, state or federal governmental agency or Authority having jurisdiction over the
Project. Should conditions develop wherein the Contractor believes that upon completion
of the Work, as described by the Contract Documents, will not comply those requirements,
the Contractor shall notify the Owner and Architect immediately.
NOTIFICATION OF REGULATORY AUTHORITIES

A.
1.4
Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions

(if any) and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
Perform the Work under a single Contract.
WORK RESTRICTIONS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Access to Site:
1.
Promptly notify the Owner, adjacent property owners, and local governing Authorities,
as applicable, as required by the Authority having jurisdiction, in advance of
performing Work that necessitates closing or interfering with traffic on public
thoroughfares, parking areas, and driveways. Obtain written permission, and permits
when required by governing Agencies, prior to effecting such closures and
interruptions.
2.
The Owner will designate an entrance to the Site for the Contractor's use.
Use of Premises:
1.
Use of the premises for the Work, storage, and vehicular parking shall be limited to
the areas designated by the Owner.
2.
If the areas on the premises are not sufficient, obtain and pay for the use of additional
Work, storage, and parking areas needed.
01110 - 1

Phase 2
1.6
SPECIAL PROCEDURES - ASBESTOS AND OTHER HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES

A.
B.
C.
1.7
SPECIAL PROCEDURES - MAGNETIC FIELD

A.
B.
C.
D.
1.8
Coordinate construction activities within the limits of a magnetic field with the Owner's
representative.
The Owner's representative will define the limits of a magnetic field within which a person
fitted with a pacemaker may not enter.
The Owner's representative reserves the right to restrict the construction activities within
the limits of a magnetic field to maintain the operations of the M.R.I.S. (Magnetic Resonance
Imaging System) diagnostic procedures.
The Owner will inform the Contractor regarding the influence of the magnetic field on
nearby equipment, including but not limited to the following:
1.
Video terminals.
2.
Ferrite cores.
3.
Magnetic tapes.
4.
Magnetic discs.
5.
Credit cards.
6.
Watches.
7.
Clocks.
8.
E-Ray tubes.
9.
Image intensifiers.
10. Medical imaging equipment.
PROJECT SITE AND ADJACENT SITE CONDITION SURVEY

A.
B.
C.
1.9
Should a material suspected to be asbestos or a hazardous substance be encountered,

immediately contact the Owner, who will arrange for and pay the costs of determining
whether or not the material is asbestos or a hazardous substance.
Should asbestos and/or a hazardous substance be determined to be present, the Owner will
arrange for and pay the costs of removal or encapsulation, in compliance with applicable
regulatory requirements.
Refer to the Contract for further information.
Prior to commencement of Work, the Contractor and Owner shall jointly survey the Site,
adjacent properties and buildings, paving, plant life, and other items, noting and recording
existing damage such as cracks, sags, loose masonry, unhealthy plant life, and other damage.
The Contractor shall deliver a copy of the completed written survey to the Owner within
seven (7) days. The Contractor shall videotape the survey as it progresses and shall retain the
original tape. Contractor shall furnish a copy of the videotape to the Owner in DVD format,
or other format acceptable to the Owner.
This record shall serve as a basis for determination of subsequent damage to these items
due to settlement or movement due to construction operations.
Cracks, sags, or other damage to the Site, adjacent sites, adjacent buildings, paving, plant
life, and other items not noted in the original survey but subsequently observed shall be
reported in writing immediately to the Owner, and prior to being disturbed.
PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES

A.
03798614
03/15
Utilities and portions of structures whose locations are unknown may exist. Be alert. If
such utilities are encountered, immediately report to the Owner for disposition of same.
01110 - 2

Phase 2
B.
C.
1.10
In addition to reporting, if a structure or utility is damaged, take appropriate action as

provided in the Contract.
Additional compensation or extension of time, if any, on account of below-grade structures
or utilities not indicated or otherwise brought to the Contractor's attention, including
reasonable action taken to protect, relocate, or repair damage to same, as required, shall be
determined as provided in the Contract.
USE AND OCCUPANCY OF WORK PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER

A.
The Owner may use and occupy all or a portion of the Work before formal acceptance
under the following conditions:
1.
The Owner will make a determination of Substantial Completion for the portion of
the Work to be occupied, as stipulated in the Contract. The Certificate of Substantial
Completion shall be accompanied by a written endorsement of the Contractor's
insurance carrier and surety permitting occupancy by the Owner during the remaining
period of the Work.
2.
Occupancy by the Owner shall not be construed as being an acceptance of that part of
the Work to be occupied.
3.
The Contractor will not be held responsible for any damage to the occupied portion of
the Work resulting from the Owner's occupancy.
4.
Occupancy by the Owner shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of existing
claims on behalf of the Owner or Contractor against each other.
5.
If required by the Owner for areas it has beneficially occupied, make available, on a
24-hour-a-day, 7-day-a-week basis, utility services, heating, and cooling as are in
condition to be put in operation when such beneficial use and occupancy occurs. Be
responsible for the operation and maintenance of such equipment while it is so
operated until the Work is complete, at which time, the Owner shall assume operation
and maintenance of such equipment, when Contract requirements for such equipment
have been met.
6.
Make an itemized list of each piece of equipment operated during beneficial
occupancy, with the date operation commences; submit to the Owner. This list shall
be the basis for the commencement of guarantee periods on the equipment being
operated for the benefit of the Owner's occupancy.
7.
The Owner will pay the utility costs associated with its occupancy during construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
01110 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 01120
REFERENCES AND DEFINITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3

Abbreviations and acronyms, additional definitions, and reference standards used in the
Contract Documents.
Refer to Contract and other Contract Documents for further information.
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A.
03798614
03/15
The following abbreviations and acronyms may be used in the Contract Documents. Refer
uncertainties to the Owner for a decision before proceeding.
1.
AA - Aluminum Association.
2.
AAADM - American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers.
3.
AAMA - Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association.
4.
AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.
5.
AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists.
6.
ACI - American Concrete Institute.
7.
ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act.
8.
AFPA - American Forest and Paper Association.
9.
AIA - American Institute of Architects.
10. AIMA - Acoustical and Insulation Materials Association.
11. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction.
12. AMCA - American Movement and Control Association.
13. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
14. APA - The Engineered Wood Association (formerly the American Plywood
Association).
15. ARI - Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
16. ASA - American Standards Association.
17. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning
Engineers.
18. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
19. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.
20. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute.
21. AWPA - American Wood Preservers' Association.
22. AWWA - American Water Works Association.
23. AWS - American Welding Society.
24. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers' Association.
25. BIA - Brick Institute of America.
26. CDA - Copper Development Association.
27. CISCA - Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association.
01120 - 1

Phase 2
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
03798614
03/15
CFFA - Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.

CFMG - Cabinet and Fixture Manufacturers Guild.
CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers' Institute.
CPA - Composite Panel Association (formerly the National Particleboard
Association).
CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute.
CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.
CPSC - United States Consumer Products Safety Commission.
CS - Commercial Standard, United States Department of Commerce.
CSA - Canadian Standards Association.
DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association International.
EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association.
EPA - Environmental Protection Agency.
ESO - Electrical Safety Orders.
FAA - Federal Aviation Administration, United States Department of
Transportation.
FCC - Federal Communications Commission.
FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association (now the GANA).
FM - Factory Mutual System, Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation.
FS - Federal Specification Unit.
GA - Gypsum Association.
GANA - Glass Association of North America (formerly the Flat Glass Marketing
Association and Glass Tempering Association).
GRI - Geosynthetic Research Institute.
GTA - Glass Tempering Association (now the GANA).
HMA - Hardwood Manufacturers Association.
HPMA - Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association.
HPVA - Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association.
HUD - United States Department of Housing and Urban Development.
IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
IGCC - Insulating Glass Certification Council.
ITS-WH - Intertek Testing Service - Warnock Hersey.
LSGA - Laminators Safety Glass Association.
MIA - Marble Institute of America or the Masonry Institute of America.
MIL - Military Standardization Document, United States Department of Defense.
ML/SFA - Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association.
MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry,
Inc.
NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.
NBS - National Bureau of Standards (now the NIST).
NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association.
NEC - National Electrical Code.
NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association.
NEMA - National Electric Manufacturers' Association.
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
NFPA - National Forest Products Association (now the AFPA).
NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council.
NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association.
NICET - National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
01120 - 2

Phase 2
74.
B.
1.4
NIST - National Institute of Standards and Technology, United States Department of

Commerce (formerly the National Bureau of Standards).
75. NOAA - National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration.
76. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association.
77. NPDES - National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System.
78. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association.
79. NSF - NSF International (formerly National Sanitary Foundation).
80. NTMA - National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association.
81. NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association (now WDMA).
82. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration.
83. PCI - Precast / Prestressed Concrete Institute.
84. PS - Product Standard, United States Department of Commerce.
85. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service.
86. SDI - Steel Deck Institute or the Steel Door Institute.
87. SFMO - State Fire Marshal Office.
88. SIGMA - Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association.
89. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association.
90. SSPC - Society for Protective Coatings (formerly the Steel Structures Painting
Council).
91. SWI - Steel Window Institute.
92. TCNA - Tile Council of North America.
93. TDLR - Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation.
94. TxDOT - Texas Department of Transportation.
95. UBC - Uniform Building Code.
96. UFC - Uniform Fire Code.
97. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
98. UMC - Uniform Mechanical Code.
99. UPC - Uniform Plumbing Code.
100. USPS - United States Postal Service.
101. USS - United States Standard.
102. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
103. WDMA - Window and Door Manufacturers Association (formerly the National
Wood Window and Door Association).
104. WLPDIA - Western Lath Plaster /Drywall Industries Association (now the
WWCCA).
105. WWCCA - Western Wall & Ceiling Contractors Association.
106. WWPA - Woven Wire Products Association or Western Wood Products
Association.
Additional abbreviations, used only on the Drawings, are listed and defined thereon.
ADDITIONAL DEFINITIONS
A.
In addition to the terms defined in the Contract and in other SECTIONS of the
Specifications, the following terms are used in the Contract Documents and are defined
as follows:
Term
Accepted Equal
03798614
03/15
Definition
Accepted by the Owner as being of equivalent quality,
utility, and appearance.
01120 - 3

Phase 2
Term
03798614
03/15
Definition
Agreement, Contract
Contract between the Owner and Contractor.
Authorities, Authority
Any local, state or federal governmental agency or

quasi-governmental agency or authority having
jurisdiction over the Project.
By Owner
Work on this Project that will be performed by the

Owner or its agents, at the Owner's cost.
By Others
Work on this Project that is outside the scope of Work to

be performed by the Contractor under this Contract, but
that will be performed by the Owner, other contractors,
or other means.
Consultant
Consultant to the Owner, including, but limited to,

architects,
engineers,
construction
managers,
accountants, and other service providers.
Directed
Directed by the Owner.
Drawings
Graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract documents

showing the design, location and dimensions of the
Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections,
details, schedules, and diagrams.
Furnish
Supply only; do not install.
Indicated
As shown or noted within the Contract Documents.
Inspector
An inspector under contract with the Owner, or an

employee of the Owner, or an inspector of an Authority
having jurisdiction over the Work, who has a duty to
inspect the Work. The term "Inspector" may also refer to
the Inspector of Record on Projects under the
jurisdiction of OSHPD.
Install
Install or apply only; do not furnish.
Owner-Furnished,
Contractor-Installed
The Owner will furnish at its cost and the Contractor

shall install under the Contract for this Work.
Project
The total construction of which the Work performed

under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a
part and which may include construction by the Owner
or by separate contractors.
Provide
Furnish and install.
SECTION
A specific portion of the Specifications.

01120 - 4

Phase 2
Term
1.5
Definition
Site
Geographical location of the Project.
Specifications
Portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the

written requirements for materials, equipment, systems,
standards, and workmanship for the Work and
performance of related services.
Specified
As written in the Specifications or as noted on the

Contract Documents.
Work
The construction and services required by the Contract

documents, whether completed or partially completed,
and includes all other labor, materials, equipment, and
services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to
fulfill the Contractors obligations. The Work may
constitute the whole or a part of the Project.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Specified standards of the construction industry shall have the same force and effect on the
performance of the Work as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents. Such
standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
Each entity or person engaged in the Work shall be familiar with the industry standards
applicable to its construction activity.
Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum qualities or quality levels, comply with
the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to the Owner for a decision before proceeding.
Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Where copies
are required for proper performance of the Work, obtain and pay for authorized copies
directly from publication source and maintain at the Site during submittals, planning, and
performance of Work until final acceptance by the Owner. Make such copies of standards
available to the Owner and others for review upon request.
For Products or quality of installation Specified by association, trade, military, federal, or
other reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more
rigid requirements are Specified or are required by applicable codes and/or public
Authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Except as otherwise Specified or Indicated, where compliance with a reference
standard is required, comply with the standard in effect as of the date established for
the receipt of Bids. Where a reference standard has been revised and reissued after
the date established for the receipt of Bids and before performance of the Work
affected, notify the Owner in writing and request a decision on how to proceed.
Owner may issue an Instruction Bulletin or a Minor Change in the Work for
proceeding in accordance with the updated standard in accordance with Section
01250 - Contract Modification Procedures.
2.
The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from
the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in a reference standard.
The provisions of the Contract and DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of
01120 - 5

Phase 2
these Specifications shall void the general, but not technical, provisions of a
reference standard in conflict therewith.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
01120 - 6

Phase 2
SECTION 01250
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
This Section describes administrative and procedural requirements for making

modifications to the Contract.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.4

Field Directive (FD): Written order prepared by the Architect and approved by the Owner
directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract
Sum or Contract Time, or both.
Change Order: Refer to the Contract for definition.
Change Order Request (COR): Written request, issued by the Contractor to the Architect
and/or Owner after the date of the Contract, which proposes changes to the Contract
Documents.
Authorization to Proceed (ATP): Written description, narrative or graphic in form, or both,
and issued to the Contractor by the Owner and acknowledged by the Architect after the
date of the Contract, that directs changes to the Contract Documents. An Authorization to
Proceed is not a Change Order, Field Directive, or Minor Change in the Work.
Minor Change in the Work: Written direction, issued to the Contractor by the Architect and
approved by the Owner ordering a minor change in the Contract Documents that does not
affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time.
Refer to the Contract and other Division 1 SECTIONS for further information.
MODIFICATIONS TO THE CONTRACT

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
General: Modifications to the Contract shall be executed in compliance with the

requirements of the Contract.
Authorizations to Proceed (ATPs):
1.
During the course of the Work, the Owner may issue ATPs to the Contractor
directing revisions. ATPs shall bear the signature of an Owner's authorized
representative indicating approval.
2.
The Owner will identify each ATP with a separate number and, if amendments to an
ATP are required, the Owner will identify each amendment with a numeric suffix
(.1, .2, .3, etc.) to the original number.
3.
An ATP may result in a contract modification involving the Contract Sum or
Contract Time, or both.
4.
Upon receipt of an ATP, the Contractor shall promptly review the Work described in
the ATP and, within fourteen (14) calendar days, respond in writing to the Architect
01250 - 1

Phase 2
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
and Owner as to whether or not the described Work will require a modification to
the Contract to adjust the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both.
5.
For ATPs that necessitate a modification to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or
both, the Contractor shall follow the COR procedure Specified hereinafter.
6.
Upon Contractors receipt of the Authorization to Proceed, the Contractor shall
proceed without delay with the Work described in the Authorization to Proceed.
Change Order Requests (CORs):
1.
Contractor may propose a change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both, by
submitting a COR to the Architect and Owner for review and action. Changes may
consist of additions, deletions, or other revisions. If the Contractor believes that an
Authorization to Proceed, Field Directive, or Minor Change in the Work issued by
the Architect and approved by the Owner results in a change in the Contract Sum or
Contract Time, or both, it shall submit its COR promptly, and within fourteen (14)
calendar days of the date of its receipt of the Authorization to Proceed, Field
Directive, or Minor Change in the Work, or within other time period as mutually
agreed in writing between the Contractor and Owner.
2.
Contractor shall identify each COR with a separate number. If amendments to a
COR are required, each amendment shall be identified with a numeric suffix
3.
For each COR include:
a.
A complete detailed description of the requested change.
b.
Contractors statement outlining the reason for the COR and the effect of the
requested change on the Work.
c.
Contractors price quotation in the form of a detailed price breakdown,
indicating the amount of adjustment to the Contract Sum. The price
breakdown shall be itemized by each trade and task and shall include all
labor, materials, equipment, other costs, markups, overhead, and profit. Item,
price, and fee limitations shall be as provided in the Contract.
d.
A proposed revised Project Schedule in compliance with Section 01325 Project Schedule, that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not
limited to, changes in Activity duration, start and finish times, and Activity
relationship. Use available total Float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time. Include a written justification for extension of Contract Time.
4.
Upon the Owners request, the Contractor shall promptly submit additional
information needed by the Architect or Owner to properly evaluate the Contractors
proposal.
5.
The Architect and Owner will review the Contractors proposal and make a decision
regarding action.
6.
Architect and Owner may accept or reject the Contractors proposal, request further
documentation, and/or Owner may negotiate acceptable terms with the Contractor
Field Directives (FDs):
1.
During the course of the Work, the Architect may, upon prior approval by the
Owner, without invalidating the Contract, issue written Field Directives to the
Contractor for changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract that, if
not implemented expeditiously, might delay the Project..
2.
Field Directives may consist of additions, deletions, or other revisions.
3.
Architect will issue Field Directives in writing in compliance with the requirements
of the Contract.
01250 - 2

Phase 2
4.
E.
1.5
Architect will identify each FD with a separate number and, if amendments to a FD

are required, the Architect will identify each amendment with a numeric suffix
5.
6.
Upon receipt of a Field Directive, the Contractor shall promptly review the Work
described in the Field Directive and, within the time limit noted, respond in writing
to the Architect and Owner as to whether or not the described Work will require a
modification to the Contract to adjust the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If
a time limit is not noted in the Field Directive, the Contractor shall respond within
fourteen (14) calendar days. If such notice is given, Contractor shall follow the COR
procedure described above. If notice is not provided within the time specified, the
Contractor is deemed to have accepted the Change Directive without necessitating a
Change Order.
7.
Contractor shall promptly proceed with the additions, deletions, or other revisions to
Work as described by the Field Directive.
Minor Changes in the Work:
1.
During the course of the Work, the Architect, with prior approval from the Owner,
may order minor changes to the Work not involving adjustment of the Contract Sum
or Contract Time. Such changes will be issued in the form of Minor Changes in the
Work.
2.
Minor Changes in the Work will be issued in writing.
3.
4.
Upon receipt of a written Minor Change in the Work, the Contractor shall promptly
review the Work described in the Minor Change in the Work and, within seven (7)
calendar days, respond in writing to the Architect and Owner if the described Work
will require a modification to the Contract to adjust the Contract Sum or Contract
Time, or both. If such notice is given, Contractor shall follow the COR procedure
described above. If notice is not provided within the time specified, the Contractor is
deemed to have accepted the Minor Change in the Work without necessitating a
Change Order.
CHANGE ORDERS
A.
B.
Contractors proposed change order requests (CORs) that are accepted by the Architect and
Owner, or are amended through discussions and agreement between the Architect or
Owner and Contractor, will be finalized by a Change Order to the Contract. Each Change
Order shall constitute full compensation and final settlement of all costs for time and for
direct, indirect, and consequential costs, including costs of delays, inconvenience,
disruption of schedule, and loss of efficiency or productivity related to any Work either
covered or affected by the change in the Work or related to the events giving rise to the
contract modification.
Upon proper execution of the Change Order, the Contractor shall proceed without delay
with the Work described in the Change Order in compliance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
03798614
03/15
01250 - 3

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
01250 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 01290
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
This Section describes administrative and procedural requirements for the Contractors
Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.4

(if any) and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section.
Application for Payment: Itemized written request for payment, prepared by the Contractor
in accordance with the Contract Documents, and supported by such data substantiating the
Contractors right to payment as the Owner may require.
Architects Certification for Payment: Written certification, prepared by the Contractor and
approved by the Architect, for such amount as the Architect and Owner determine to be
properly due to the Contractor.
Schedule of Values: Written schedule, prepared by the Contractor and accepted by the
Owner, which shows values allocated to various portions of the Work. Schedule of Values
shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy, as
the Owner may require. Schedule of Values total dollar amount shall equal the Contract
Sum, plus fully-executed Change Orders, so as to always reflect the current Contract Sum.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
General: Coordinate Contractors Schedule of Values and Project Schedule as Specified in

Section 01325 - Project Schedule.
Form and Content:
1.
Type or print the Schedule of Values on the form stipulated in the Contract. Upon
request, Contractor's own standard form with automated printout will be considered
by the Owner for acceptance.
2.
List the installed cost of the component parts of the Work broken down into
sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments.
Further break down mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and fire sprinkler systems by
floor and by rough and finish Work.
3.
For each major line item list subcosts of major products and operations.
4.
For the various portions of the Work:
a.
Include a separate line item for the amount of overhead and profit drawn on
an even monthly basis spread over the entire project duration.
b.
Include mobilization as a separate item.
5.
The sum of all costs listed in the schedule, plus the overhead and profit shall equal
the total Contract Sum.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01290 - 1

Phase 2
6.
C.
D.
1.5
Revise and resubmit Schedule of Values as follows:

a.
With each properly executed Change Order.
b.
As required by the Owner.
Subschedule of Unit Material Costs:
1.
Submit for products on which progress payments will be requested for stored
products.
2.
The form of submittal shall parallel that of the Schedule of Values, with each item
identified the same as the line item in the Schedule of Values.
3.
The unit quantity for bulk materials shall include an allowance for normal waste.
4.
The unit costs for the materials shall exclude overhead and profit and shall be
broken down into:
a.
Cost of the material, delivered and unloaded at the Site, with applicable taxes
paid.
b.
Installation costs.
5.
Installed unit cost multiplied by the quantity listed shall equal the cost of that item in
the Schedule of Values.
Submit Schedule of Values to the Owner for review and approval a minimum of thirty (30)
days prior to the Contractors first Application for Payment in compliance with
requirements of the Contract.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Billing Meetings: Refer to Section 01310 - Project Management and Coordination, under
the Billing Meetings paragraph.
Format and Data Required: Submit Contractors Application for Payment typed on the
form stipulated in the Contract, or other form acceptable to the Owner.
1.
Line items and dollar values shall be from the Contractors Schedule of Values as
approved by the Owner.
2.
Include names, categories and description of Work, and amounts for Subcontractors.
3.
Overhead and profit shall be a line item each month for the Contractor and
Subcontractors.
Preparation of Each Application for Payment:
1.
Application Form:
a.
Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders and Change
Directives that have been fully executed prior to the stipulated application
cutoff date.
b.
Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with the respective totals indicated
on the continuation sheets.
c.
Execute certification with the signature of a person authorized to bind the
Contractor in such matters.
d.
Submit each Application for Payment with the Architects Certification for
Payment to the Owner for review and action.
e.
2.
Continuation Sheets:
a.
Fill in total list of scheduled component items of Work, with item number and
the Schedule of Values dollar amount for each item.
b.
Fill in the dollar value of the Work earned to date, and for the current period,
and the percentage complete in each column for each scheduled line item
when Work has been performed or products stored as accepted. Round off
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01290 - 2

Phase 2
D.
E.
F.
03798614
03/15
values to nearest dollar, unless otherwise specified for the Contractors

Schedule of Values.
c.
At the end of the continuation sheets list each Change Order and Change
Directive executed prior to the date of submission. List by Change Order
number, description, and breakdown of values in a manner similar to the
original component item of Work.
3.
Lien Waivers and Releases:
a.
Conditional Waivers of Lien: With each application, submit notarized
conditional waivers of lien, on form acceptable to the Owner, in compliance
with the requirements of the Contract.
b.
Unconditional Releases of Lien: Submit notarized unconditional releases of
lien, on form acceptable to the Owner, in compliance with the requirements of
the Contract.
c.
Missing, incomplete, or unsatisfactory lien waivers and releases will be
grounds for non-payment of the dollar amount requested for the item(s) of
Work without satisfactory lien waivers and releases.
Substantiating Data for Progress Payments:
1.
Submit all detailed data to substantiate the requested costs and suitable information
as Specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures, with a cover letter identifying:
a.
SJHS/CHS Project number and name.
b.
Application number and date.
c.
Detailed list of enclosures.
d.
For stored products:
1)
Item number and identification as shown on application.
2)
Specific description of product.
3)
Invoice.
4)
Proof of insurance.
5)
Physical address or map to location where materials are stored.
6)
Photographs of stored materials. Owner may require a field visit to
verify the quantity and condition of the stored materials prior to
approval.
2.
Submit one (1) copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application.
Preparation of Application for Final Payment:
1.
Complete application form as Specified for progress payments, indicating all line
items as 100 percent complete.
2.
Use continuation sheets for presenting the final statement of accounting.
3.
Provide final conditional and unconditional waivers.
Submittal Procedure:
1.
Submit three (3) notarized copies of Contractors Application for Payment to the
Owner at the frequency and on or before the dates stipulated in the Contract. If not
stipulated in the Contract, submit Contractors Application for Payment monthly
utilizing the monthly cut-off date designated by the Owner.
2.
Include Contractors updated Project Schedule as Specified in Section 01325 Project Schedule, with each Payment Application. Failure of the Contractor to
submit an acceptable updated Project Schedule may be grounds for withholding the
entire payment otherwise due the Contractor.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01290 - 3

Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01290 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 01310
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Administrative and procedural requirements for managing and coordinating the Work,
construction operations scheduling, and meetings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4

Coordination Drawings: Submit one (1) full-size hardcopy of the coordination drawings to
the Owner. Such drawings shall include all required signatures.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
General Requirements:
1.
Coordinate the Work; do not delegate the responsibility for coordination to a
Subcontractor or any other entity.
2.
Resolve differences or disputes concerning coordination, interference, or extent of
Work of the various Sections.
Field Engineering: Refer to Section 01700 - Execution Requirements.
Coordination of Layouts:
1.
Provide basic layouts of grid lines and station points on subfloors as necessary to
facilitate coordination and layout of partitions and Work at and above ceilings.
2.
Coordinate space requirements and the installation of mechanical, electrical, and
other Work.
3.
Follow routing indicated for pipes, ducts, conduit, and the like as closely as
practicable; place runs parallel with the lines of the building.
4.
Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations,
maintenance, and for repairs.
Coordination Drawings:
1.
Prepare coordination drawings before beginning fabrication or delivery of materials
to the Site. Such drawings shall include, but not be limited to system piping, ducts,
conduit, fixtures, and equipment for all utilities and shall demonstrate that such
items will fit in the space available within the structure.
2.
Use large-scale layout drawings of the mechanical and electrical Work, together
with Shop Drawings or layout drawings of other affected Work, to check,
coordinate, and integrate the Work to prevent interferences.
3.
Include an area on each coordination drawing to receive the signatures of the
Contractor and each affected Subcontractor. Require each affected Subcontractor to
review coordination drawings and to certify, by signature of its responsible party in
the designated area, that such coordination drawings are acceptable.
01310 - 1

Phase 2
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.5
Contractor shall review such signed coordination drawings and certify, by signature
of its authorized representative, that the Work is coordinated.
Keep copies of the coordination drawings at the Site. Submit signed copies of
coordination drawings as Specified hereinbefore.
Owner or Architect will verify that the coordination drawings have been prepared
and signed but will not review coordination drawings.
Perform and complete checking and coordination before commencing construction
Work in the affected areas.
CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS SCHEDULING

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Three-Week Look-Ahead Schedule:

1.
Develop a Three-Week Look-Ahead Schedule specifically for use as a coordination
tool between the Owner and construction activities. Coordinate the Three-Week
Look-Ahead Schedule with the Project Schedule Specified in Section 01325 Project Schedule. The Three-Week Look-Ahead Schedule can be prepared manually
or may be generated by the Project Schedule software as long as it is in sufficient
detail to properly describe the Work required for coordination with the Owner.
2.
Three-Week Look-Ahead Schedule shall show the anticipated date, time, and
duration of each of the various activities that could affect the Owners facilities or
activities, or that could cause excessive noise, vibration, disturbance, or nuisance.
3.
Three-Week Look-Ahead Schedule shall be in a format appropriate to the nature and
complexity of the Contractor's activities and those activities' effect on the Owners
operations. The format shall be acceptable to the Owner and may include bar charts,
CPM schedules, tables, charts, narrative descriptions of work sequences, floor plans,
drawings, and other graphic representations.
4.
Review Three-Week Look-Ahead Schedule with the Owner prior to commencing
Work and periodically thereafter as needed; incorporate adjustments as necessary
and resubmit accordingly.
Interruption of Systems:
1.
It is essential that there be no unscheduled interruption of critical building systems
such as normal and emergency power, medical gases, heating and ventilation, fire
alarm and protection, communications, and other critical systems.
2.
Coordinate scheduling of system interruptions with the Project Schedule Specified
in Section 01325 - Project Schedule.
3.
Notify the Owner in writing a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance of
proposed interruptions of Owners systems. Obtain the Owner's written approval
prior to effecting such interruptions. Work involving an interruption of Owner's
systems shall not commence without Owner's prior written approval of the proposed
interruption.
4.
Arrange and perform Work involving existing building systems to result in
minimum shutdown time.
5.
Coordinate with the Owner to schedule noisy, dirty, vibratory, and wet Work; and
arrange to cause minimal interference with normal facility activities.
Coordinate access to Owners controlled facilities with the Owner. Refer to
Section 01110 - Summary of Work and Special Requirements, for additional information.
01310 - 2

Phase 2
1.6
MEETINGS
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Pre-Construction Conference:
1.
Prior to commencement of Work, a pre-construction conference will be held to
discuss procedures to be followed during the progress of the Work.
2.
Location: A mutually agreed-upon site.
3.
Attending shall be:
a.
Owner's representative.
b.
If applicable, Testing Laboratory as Specified in Section 01455 - Testing and
Inspection Services.
c.
Owner's Inspector.
d.
Architect, Engineer, and other Consultants, as appropriate.
e.
Subcontractors, as appropriate to the agenda.
f.
Suppliers, as appropriate to the agenda.
g.
Others, as appropriate to the agenda.
4.
Contractor shall take meeting notes and distribute them to attendees within fortyeight (48) hours of the meeting. Attendees taking exception to anything in the
meeting notes shall state such exception in writing to the Contractor within fortyeight (48) hours following receipt of meeting notes. If no exception is received by
the Contractor within the Specified time, Contractors meeting notes shall stand as
an accurate documentation of the meeting.
Initial Project Schedule Meeting:
1.
After initial Project Schedule has been prepared, the Contractor shall schedule and
conduct a meeting to review the Project Schedule.
2.
Location shall be at a mutually agreed-upon site.
3.
Attending shall be the Owner and Contractor.
4.
Contractor shall take meeting notes and distribute them to attendees within fortyeight (48) hours of the meeting. Attendees taking exception to anything in the
meeting notes shall state such exception in writing to the Contractor, within fortyeight (48) hours following receipt of meeting notes. If no exception is received by
the Contractor within the Specified time, Contractors meeting notes shall stand as
an accurate documentation of the meeting.
Progress Meetings:
1.
Schedule and conduct regular progress meetings once a week for the duration of the
Project. Meetings shall be scheduled for a uniform weekday and hour. Attending
shall be the Owner, Contractors project manager and superintendent, Architect and
Consultants as appropriate to the agenda, Subcontractors as appropriate to the
agenda, suppliers as appropriate to the agenda, and others as appropriate to the
agenda.
2.
Prepare agenda for such meetings and distribute to the Owner and other attendees in
advance of the scheduled meeting date. Basis of the agenda shall be the meeting
notes of the previous meeting.
3.
Location shall be at a mutually agreed-upon site.
4.
Contractor shall take meeting notes and distribute them to attendees within fortyeight (48) hours. Attendees taking exception to anything in the meeting notes shall
state such exception in writing to the Contractor within forty-eight hours following
receipt of meeting notes. If no exception is received by the Contractor within the
Specified time, Contractors meeting notes shall stand as an accurate documentation
of the meeting.
01310 - 3

Phase 2
D.
E.
Billing Meetings:
1.
Schedule and hold a billing meeting each month, as close as practical to the 25th day
of the month, prior to formal submittal of the Contractors Application for Payment.
Billing meetings may be on the same day as the last weekly Progress Meeting of the
month when practical. However, the Billing Meeting shall be separate from the
weekly Progress Meeting.
2.
Location of meeting shall be the same as for Progress Meetings.
3.
Attending shall be the Owner, Architect and Contractor.
4.
Prior to the meeting, prepare a draft of the Contractors Application for Payment in
compliance with requirements of the Contract with progress and earned-to-date
values and percentage complete projected to the last day of the month.
5.
Review draft of Application for Payment with the Owner and Architect at the
meeting. Following review, revise the draft Application for Payment in accordance
with the discussions and agreements during the meeting.
6.
Refer to Section 01290 - Payment Procedures, for further information.
Guarantee/warranties, Bonds, and Service and Maintenance Contracts Review Meeting:
1.
Eleven (11) months following the date of Substantial Completion of the Work,
schedule and conduct a meeting for the purpose of review of guarantees / warranties,
bonds, and service and maintenance contracts for materials and equipment.
2.
Meeting location shall be at a mutually agreed-upon site. Contractor shall coordinate
the meeting date and time with the Owner, and shall send a notice to all attendees
not less than thirty (30) calendar days prior to date of meeting
3.
Attending shall be representatives of the Owner, Contractor, Architect, affected
Subcontractors and suppliers, and others as appropriate to the agenda.
4.
Prepare a written agenda and distribute it to attendees not less than forty-eight (48)
hours prior to date of meeting.
5.
Take action as appropriate to implement repair or replacement of defective items,
and to extend service and maintenance contracts.
6.
Contractor shall take meeting notes and distribute them to attendees within fortyeight (48) hours. Attendees taking exception to anything in the meeting notes shall
state such exception in writing to the Contractor within forty-eight (48) hours
following receipt of meeting notes. If no exception is received by the Contractor
within the Specified time, Contractors meeting notes shall stand as an accurate
documentation of the meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
01310 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 01315
CONTRACTOR REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Procedures for submitting Requests for Information and limitations on use of Requests for
Information to obtain information and clarification.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4

Request for Information: A document submitted by the Contractor requesting clarification

of a portion of the Contract Documents, hereinafter referred to as an RFI.
CONTRACTOR'S REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
When the Contractor is unable to determine from the Contract Documents the exact
material, process, or system to be installed; or when the items of construction are required
to occupy the same space (interference); or when an item of Work is described differently
at more than one place in the Contract Documents; the Contractor shall request Architect to
make a clarification of the indeterminate or interfering item. The RFI procedure Specified
herein shall be the method for requesting the clarification.
RFIs shall be submitted on a form approved by the Architect and the Owner. Forms shall
be completely filled in, and if prepared by hand, shall be fully legible after copying by
xerographic process. Each RFI shall be given a discrete, consecutive number. Each page of
the RFI, and of attachments to the RFI, shall bear the RFI number in the lower right corner.
RFIs may be submitted only on regular working days. With prior approval of the Architect
and Owner, RFIs may be submitted electronically utilizing e-mail, and attachments in a
format and utilizing software acceptable to the Architect and Owner. If electronic
submission is utilized, Contractor shall follow up with a paper copy, mailed or delivered
the same day, including a hard copy of the outgoing e-mail message signifying that the RFI
was also e-mailed.
Contractor shall endeavor to keep the number of RFIs to a minimum. Contractor shall
thoroughly review and investigate RFIs submitted by its Subcontractors and material
suppliers, and satisfy itself that the answer to the RFI is not already contained in the
Contract Documents.
RFIs from Subcontractors or material suppliers shall be submitted through, reviewed by,
given a number, and signed by the Contractor prior to submittal to Architect. RFIs
submitted directly by Subcontractors or by material suppliers will be returned unanswered
to the sender. Contractor shall be responsible for delays resulting from not following the
specified RFI procedures.
Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents to assure that the information it
seeks is not available therein. RFIs that request information available in the Contract
Documents may be returned unanswered by Architect.
01315 - 1

Phase 2
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
In all cases in which RFIs are issued to request clarification of coordination issues, for
example, pipe and duct routing, clearances, specific locations of Work shown
diagrammatically, apparent interferences and similar items, the Contractor shall furnish all
information required for Architect to analyze and/or understand the circumstances causing
the RFI and prepare a clarification or direction as to how the Contractor shall proceed. If
the information included with that type of RFI by the Contractor is insufficient, the RFI
may be returned unanswered.
RFIs shall not be used for the following purposes:
1.
To request approval of submittals. Comply with requirements Specified in
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
2.
To request approval of substitutions. Comply with requirements Specified in
Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
3.
To request changes that entail change in Contract Time and Contract Sum, or both.
Comply with requirements Specified in Section 01250 - Contract Modification
Procedures.
4.
To request different methods of performing Work than those indicated in the
Drawings and Specifications.
In the event the Contractor believes that a clarification by Architect contained in the
Architect's RFI response results in additional cost, the Contractor shall not proceed with
the Work indicated by the response to the RFI, shall immediately notify the Architect and
Owner in writing that the Contractor believes that the RFI response indicates a Contract
Modification, and shall follow the procedures Specified Section 01250 - Contract
Modification Procedures.
Unanswered RFIs will be returned to the Contractor with a stamp or notation "Rejected or
Not Answered with the reason for the rejection.
The Contractor shall prepare and maintain a log of RFIs, and at any time requested by
Architect or Owner, the Contractor shall furnish copies of the log showing all submitted
RFIs and their current status. The Contractor shall note all unanswered RFIs in the log.
Architect will return RFIs to the Contractor within seven (7) calendar days of receipt. RFIs
received after 12:00 p.m. (noon) shall be considered received on the next regular working
day for the purpose of establishing the start of the response period.
A complete copy, either hardcopy or electronic as specified by the Owners representative,
of each submitted and answered RFI shall be transmitted to the Owner. RFIs shall include
all attachments.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
01315 - 2

Phase 2
SECTION 01320
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
B.
Weekly Construction Activities: Submit digital photographic images with captions on a

weekly basis documenting the previous weeks construction progress on the Monday
following the week covered. When available, the Owner shall provide a template for the
Contractors use.
Daily Construction Reports: Submit one (1) copy of Contractors written reports to the
Owner on the Monday following the week covered in the report. Upon request, furnish
digital computer file copies to the Owner in a format acceptable to the Owner.
WEEKLY CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES

A.
B.
1.5
Administrative and procedural requirements for Project construction progress

documentation including, but not limited to, construction photographs, and daily
construction reports.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4

General:
1.
Furnish photographs of the Site and construction throughout the progress of the
Work, as coordinated with the Owner.
2.
Take photographs on a weekly basis to document the work performed during the
prior seven (7) calendar days.
Delivery of Weekly Construction Activities: Electronically distribute the Weekly
Construction Activities to the Owner and Architect, and any other representatives indicated
by the Owner, Include Weekly Construction Activities with each Application for Payment
as Specified in Section 01290 - Payment Procedures.
DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS

A.
03798614
03/15
Prepare a construction report for each workday on a daily basis. Produce reports utilizing
either word-processing or spreadsheet computer software that substantially replicates the
Owner's form found at the end of this Section of the Specifications. The Contractor's
standard daily construction report form may be used if acceptable to the Owner. Prior to
use of the Contractor's standard report form, the Contractor shall submit its form to the
Owner for approval. Each daily construction report shall include, as a minimum, all of the
data listed below.
1.
Project name and address as they appear on the Contract Documents.
2.
Contractors name and address, name of Contractors on-Site superintendent, and
the name of the individual responsible for the report.
01320 - 1

Phase 2
3.
B.
C.
Day of the week and calendar date. Date that the report was prepared and who
prepared it.
4.
Personnel and workers on Site, including name of the entity they represent, type and
quantity of each trade.
5.
Visitors to the Site, including the name of the entity they represent.
6.
Brief description and location of the days Work Activities referenced to the current
Project Schedule.
7.
Material and product deliveries to the Site.
8.
Equipment, other than hand tools, utilized by personnel on Site.
9.
Brief description of unusual Site conditions, Work stoppages, delays, special
problems, unusual events, losses, and shortages.
10. Accidents and emergency procedures taken.
11. Inspections and testing performed, and the results of those inspections and tests.
12. Utility services connected, interrupted, and disconnected.
13. Equipment or system tests and start-ups.
14. Work Activities started or completed, referenced to the Project Schedule, Project
milestones reached, and Substantial Completions received.
If a report item is not applicable to that days activities, item shall be noted as none, or
"not applicable".
Each report shall be printed, signed by the Contractor's Project Superintendent, and dated
indicating the date signed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
01320 - 2

Phase 2
SECTION 01325
PROJECT SCHEDULE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Administrative and procedural requirements for the Contractors Project Schedule.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.4

Baseline Schedule: Submit to the Owner one (1) electronic copy on compact disk and one
(1) paper printout no later than fourteen (14) calendar days after date of Owners written
notice to proceed and prior to the first Application for Payment. The Baseline Schedule
shall not indicate any progress on any activity in the schedule; it shall be a zero-progress
schedule.
Updated Schedule: Submit to the Owner one (1) electronic copy on compact disk and one
(1) paper printout monthly as Specified hereinafter.
Schedule Revisions: Submit to the Owner one (1) electronic copy on compact disk and one
(1) paper printout when required and as Specified hereinafter.
The paper version of each Schedule submitted shall include:
1.
Network diagrams as Specified herein. Network diagrams may exclude activities
that were completed forty-five (45) calendar days, or more, prior to the data date.
2.
Sheet Size: Maximum sheet size shall be 24-inches by 36-inches. If the full schedule
requires more than one (1) sheet, include a Summary Schedule in addition to the full
schedule sheets, in a format acceptable to the Owner.
3.
Tabular reports in a format acceptable to the Owner. One of each of the following
reports shall be provided. Tabular reports shall show all activities, both completed
and uncompleted, and all milestone activities.
a.
Predecessor / Successor Report showing the predecessor activities and
successor activities for each Activity in the Project Schedule, sorted by
activity ID number,
b.
Total Float Report, sorted by total float, and
c.
Early Start Report, sorted by early start date.
DEFINITIONS
A.
03798614
03/15
Activity: A discrete part of a Project that can be identified for planning, scheduling,
monitoring, and controlling the Work.
1.
Critical Path Activities: Work Activities that, if delayed or extended, will delay the
scheduled completion of one or more of the Project milestones or the scheduled
completion of all other Work, or both.
2.
Non-Critical-Path Activities: Work Activities other than Critical Path Activities.
Non-Critical-Path Activities will contain Float.
PROJECT SCHEDULE
01325 - 1

Phase 2
3.
B.
1.5
Near-Critical-Path Activities: Work Activities that have fourteen (14) calendar days
of Total Float or less.
Schedule Float
1.
Total Float: The amount of time that a Work Activity can be delayed or extended
without delaying the scheduled completion of a Contract milestone or the scheduled
completion of the Project, or both.
2.
Free Float: Amount of time that a Work Activity can be delayed without adversely
affecting the early start of the following Activity.
3.
Project Float: Amount of time between the scheduled completion of the latest Work
Activity and the Contract Time.
4.
Ownership of Total Float, Free Float, and Project Float shall be shared equally by
the Owner and the Contractor and shall be available to both parties as needed to
meet schedule milestones and Contract completion dates.
SCHEDULES
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
General: Upon award of the Contract, Contractor shall immediately commence with the
development of schedules to ensure timely compliance with schedule submittal
requirements. Unless otherwise required by the Contract, the baseline Project Schedule
shall be submitted no later than fourteen (14) calendar days after the Notice of Award or
Notice to Proceed.
Schedule of Values: Specified in Section 01290 - Payment Procedures.
Three-Week Look-Ahead Schedule: Specified in Section 01310 - Project Management and
Coordination. Coordinate the Three-Week Look-Ahead Schedule with the Project
Schedule. The Three-Week Look-Ahead Schedule may be generated by the Project
Schedule software as long as it is in sufficient detail to properly describe the Work to be
performed during the three-week period.
Contractors Project Schedule:
1.
General:
a.
The Project Schedule shall consist of a baseline schedule and monthly
schedule updates and revisions.
b.
Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner, by the development and use of its
Project Schedule, that the Contractor fully understands the nature and scope
of the Work and has thoroughly planned and sequenced Work activities to
ensure that the Project will be completed within the required time constraints.
Submittal of the Project Schedule shall be understood to be the Contractors
representation that the Project Schedule meets the requirements of the
Contract Documents and that the Contractor will execute the Work in
accordance with the most current Project Schedule submitted to the Owner.
c.
Contractor is responsible for developing and submitting an orderly and
realistic Project Schedule and for monitoring the actual Work progress
relative to it. Failure to include any element of the Work and inaccuracies or
errors in the Project Schedule will not relieve the Contractor of its
responsibility for completing the Work in compliance with the requirements
of the Contract Documents.
d.
Nothing in this requirement shall be deemed to be a usurpation of the
Contractor's authority and responsibility to plan, schedule, sequence, and
coordinate the Work as it sees fit, subject to all other requirements of the
Contract Documents.
PROJECT SCHEDULE
01325 - 2

Phase 2
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
03798614
03/15
Project Schedule shall be based on and incorporate Project milestones and

completion dates provided in the Contract. Overall time of completion and
time of completion for each milestone shall conform to the dates or times in
the Contract, unless an earlier (advanced) time of completion is requested by
the Contractor, agreed to by the Owner, and formalized by Change Order. The
Owner will not be required to accept an early completion schedule (that is,
one that shows completion dates prior to the contractually required Project
completion date or milestone date(s)).
The Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in Contract Sum in the
event agreement is reached on an early completion schedule and the
Contractor completes the Work, for whatever reason, beyond the completion
date shown in the early completion schedule but within Contract Time.
Any Project Schedule, accepted by the Owner, showing the Work completed
in less than the Contract Time shall be considered to have Project Float.
In developing the Project Schedule, the Contractor shall:
1)
Utilize only experienced personnel who are thoroughly trained and
skilled in the use of the Specified scheduling program.
2)
Require and include necessary input from its Subcontractors and
suppliers, including but not limited to information regarding items with
long order lead times.
3)
Include input from other concerned parties, including but not limited to
the Owner, utility companies, public Authorities having jurisdiction,
Testing Laboratory, and others interfacing with the Work.
4)
If applicable, consider and include the normal weather conditions for
the locale where the Project is located, in accordance with NOAA
National Weather Service records of climatic conditions during the
same time interval for the previous five (5) years in the planning and
scheduling of Work that may be influenced by high or low ambient
temperatures and/or precipitation.
5)
Coordinate and integrate the Project Schedule with other accepted
schedules, including but not limited to the accepted Cash Draw
Schedule, Three-Week Look-Ahead Schedule, and the Contractors
Schedule of Values.
Electronic copies of the Project Schedule shall be in the format Specified
hereinafter.
Owners review and acceptance of the Project Schedule will be for its own
use in monitoring and evaluating the progress of the Work, Contractors
Applications for Payment, and Contractors requests for extensions of
Contract Time. Such review and acceptance shall not impose a duty of care
upon the Owner or relieve the Contractor of its sole responsibility for the
means, methods, and techniques of construction. Upon completion of the
review and provision of comments by the Owner, the Contractor shall make
corrections as necessary to comply with requirements of the Contract
Documents and resubmit the Project Schedule within seven (7) calendar days,
and no later than the next Payment Application submission.
Contractor shall prepare Progress Reports for the Project as required by the
Contract and submit copies as Specified hereinbefore.
PROJECT SCHEDULE
01325 - 3

Phase 2
2.
03798614
03/15
Requirements: The Project Schedule shall utilize the latest version of Primavera
SureTrak.
a.
Form: Network diagram critical path method (CPM).
b.
Content:
1)
Show complete sequence of construction by Activity, with number of
Activities and their relationship to the critical path, to adequately
explain the various stages of Work.
(a)
For each Activity include a brief description, the beginning and
completion date, the duration in working days, a responsibility
code identifying the entity performing the Activity, and a
location code for the Activity, if the Project is divided into
floors, areas, or other clearly divisible sections.
(b) No single Activity shall be longer than thirty (30) calendar days,
except concrete curing and procurement Activities such as
submittals, fabrication, and delivery.
(c)
Activities shall be time-scaled and cost-loaded. Cost loading
shall be based on the accepted Schedule of Values.
(d) Each Activity, except the first and last Activity in the schedule,
shall have a predecessor and successor Activity.
(e)
The use of start-to-start, finish-to-finish, and lead / lag, logical
relationships shall be kept to a minimum and only used when
necessary to model the planned and reasonable relationship
between the work Activities.
(f)
The use of constrained start and finish dates for an Activity shall
be kept to an absolute minimum and only used when necessary
to model a planned and reasonable restriction placed on a work
Activity. Constrained start and finish dates shall not be used as a
short-cut to "fix" an activity in time, when proper CPM
scheduling techniques can be used to create an accurate logical
relationship with other events or activities.
2)
Show projected or actual percentage of completion for each Activity
through the schedule data date, which shall be the same as the cutoff
date for Applications for Payment.
3)
Identify the following milestones:
(a)
Request For Proposal date.
(b) Award of Contract.
(c)
Construction permits in place.
(d) Dates of Owners notice to proceed, Substantial Completion, and
completion of Work for each Project phase, as applicable to the
Work.
(e)
Start and completion dates for Work in each occupied space, as
applicable to the Work.
(f)
Utility shutdowns and connections, as applicable to the Work.
(g) Inspections by public Authorities having jurisdiction, Testing
Laboratory, and others.
(h) Approvals by public Authorities having jurisdiction.
(i)
Licensing approvals.
(j)
Commissioning start and completion dates.
(k) Completion of financial closeout.
(l)
Owner acceptance of the Work for each Project phase.
PROJECT SCHEDULE
01325 - 4

Phase 2
4)
3.
03798614
03/15
The Contractor shall also include the following types of Activities in

the Project Schedule.
(a)
All procurement, submittals, submittal review periods,
fabrication or manufacture, tests, delivery, and installation
activities for all major materials and equipment.
(b) Separate activities for the preparation, submittal, and approval,
of shop and/or working drawings, data, and material samples
using a thirty (30) calendar day minimum time for the
Architects, Engineers, and Owner's review of submittals, unless
the submittal is of the type requiring a longer period of review
time as specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The
Contractor's Project Schedule shall include two (2) complete
strings of activities representing two (2) separate submit, review
and approval cycles for each submittal of shop and/or working
drawings, data, and material samples.
(c)
Deliveries of Owner furnished equipment and/or materials in
accordance with the dates or schedule windows of such items set
forth in the Contract Documents.
(d) All start up, testing, training, and assistance required under the
Contract Documents.
(e)
Identification of manpower, material, or equipment restrictions,
as well as any activity requiring unusual shift work, such as two
(2) shifts, six (6) day weeks, specified overtime, or work at times
other than regular work days or hours, shall be clearly identified.
(f)
Punchlist inspection periods, punchlist correction work periods,
and final cleanup.
(g) All start up, testing, training, and commissioning requirements of
the Contract Documents.
(h) If applicable, an activity named "Weather Days" as the successor
to the last Work activity and the predecessor to the "Substantial
Completion" activity, with a duration of _______ (__) calendar
days. The Weather Days activity represents the number of days
of anticipated adverse weather delay to the Project. As adverse
weather delay days are requested by the Contractor and approved
by the Owner, the duration of the Weather Days activity is
reduced.
(i)
Any other requirement of the Contract Documents that is
essential to the completion of the Work that is required by the
Owner to be incorporated into the Project Schedule as an
Activity.
(j)
Calendars.
Project Schedule Updates and Revisions:
a.
Updates: Update the Project Schedule monthly as appropriate to the progress
of the Work, but no less often than with each Application for Payment.
Updating of the Project Schedule to reflect actual progress of the Work shall
not be considered a revision to the Project Schedule. Updates to the Project
Schedule include recording of the actual start date and finish date, and the
revised percentage complete (or remaining duration) of the active activities,
PROJECT SCHEDULE
01325 - 5

Phase 2
b.
c.
d.
e.
03798614
03/15
and the data date. A Schedule Update shall not include any of the following
modifications, which are considered to be schedule revisions.
1)
Change of an activity original duration,
2)
Addition or deletion of an activity or a change to activity description
(except spelling corrections),
3)
Modifications to activity logical relationships,
4)
Change in calendar designation for an activity, or changes to any
calendar,
5)
Change to a previously recorded actual start or finish date,
6)
Adding or deleting a constraint to an activity, or
7)
Any other modification that affects the future portion of the planned
Work that makes it different from the Project Schedule previously
accepted by the Owner.
Revisions: Revise the Project Schedule periodically during the course of the
Work to maintain its accuracy.
1)
The following conditions shall require a schedule revision:
(a)
When delay in completion of any Work Activity or sequence of
Work Activities results in an extension of a Project milestone or
Project completion by thirty (30) or more calendar days, or ten
(10) or more percent of the remaining duration, whichever is
less.
(b) When delays in submittals, deliveries, or Work stoppages are
encountered that make replanning or rescheduling of the Work
necessary.
(c)
When the schedule does not represent the actual progress and
planned sequence of the future Work.
(d) At any time when directed by the Owner.
2)
A Revised Schedule shall be submitted for review and acceptance by
the Owner separately from the Schedule Update. The Revised Schedule
shall not be used as the Project Schedule until accepted by the Owner in
writing. The proposed Revised Schedule shall use the same data date
(status date) as the most recent Schedule Update. An Updated
(previously accepted) Schedule and a proposed Schedule Revision may
be submitted at the same time for review by the Owner.
Other Project Schedule Requirements:
1)
Updated Project Schedules shall accurately represent the as-built
condition of all completed and in-progress Work activities as of the
data date of the updated schedule.
2)
Revised Project Schedules shall incorporate all changes in the progress,
sequences, and scope of Work, by adding, deleting or modifying
activities since the previous accepted schedule and all changes resulting
from executed Change Orders.
With each updated and revised Project Schedule, prepare a written report in
explanation of the updates and/or changes made to the previous schedule and
submit to the Owner.
Only updated and revised Project Schedules, as accepted by the Owner, shall
be used as the basis for payments during that period.
PROJECT SCHEDULE
01325 - 6

Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
PROJECT SCHEDULE
01325 - 7

Phase 2
SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
1.3
Submittal procedures.
Resubmittal requirements.
Construction progress schedules.
Shop drawings.
Product data.
Samples.
Design data.
Test reports.
Certificates.
Manufacturers' instructions.
Manufacturers' field reports.
Erection drawings.
Construction photographs.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.4

Section 01325 - Project Schedule.

Section 01450 - Quality Control: Manufacturers' field services and reports; Testing Laboratory
Services.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Contract warranty, manufacturer's certificates and
closeout submittals.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Submit to Architect for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with
information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
Produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and
for record documents purposes described in Section 01700.
Transmit each submittal separately with Contractor's standard transmittal letter including
Contractor's name, address and phone number. Each submittal shall contain only one
specification section.
Sequentially number transmittal forms using Section number or Contractors other sequential
numbering system.
Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing sheet and detail
number(s), and specification Section number, appropriate to submittal.
01330 - 1

Phase 2
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
1.5
RESUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
1.6
Revise and resubmit submittals, as required, and resubmit to meet requirements as specified
and as noted on submittal reviews.
Mark as RESUBMITTAL.
Re-use original transmittal number and supplement with sequential alphabetical or numeric
suffix for each re-submittal.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

A.
1.7
Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products
required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in
accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect at business address.
Coordinate submission of related items.
For each submittal for review, allow 14 days excluding delivery time to and from the
Contractor.
Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be
detrimental to successful performance of completed Work. All information, comments, field
verifications, responses or other notations marked on submittals by the Contractor shall be
done in blue or green colors only.
Allow space on submittals for Contractor and Architect review stamps.
Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly
report any inability to comply with provisions.
Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.
Format
1.
Submit all submittals digitally using .PDF file extension. Each submittal shall be a
single .PDF file including transmittal letter. Multiple files for the same submittal will
not be accepted.
2.
Submittals in any other format, including .ZIP files, will be rejected.
3.
Hard copies will not be accepted.
4.
To ensure each page is legible, .PDF pages of drawings shall be the same size/scale as a
hard copy. Where applicable, scale symbols should be provided to indicate scale.
Illegible submittals will be rejected.
5.
Submittals will be uploaded to Architects Info Exchange website.
The submittal procedures described in this Article applies to the Construction Progress
Schedule, Products List, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples (actual samples and digital
files of same), Design Data, Test Reports, Certificates, Manufacturers Instructions and Field
Reports, Erection Drawings and any other type of submittal submitted to Architect.
Reference Section 01325 - Project Schedule.
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and
location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
Printable Image Size: Minimum 8-1/2 x 11 inches and maximum 30 x 42 inches.
Draw details to a minimum scale of 1/2 inch equal to 1 foot.
Draw site plans to same scale indicated on contract drawings.
Draw all other plans to a minimum scale of 1/8 inch equal to 1 foot.
01330 - 2

Phase 2
F.
G.
Construction Documents (electronic or paper format) issued by the Architect cannot be used in
any shape, form or fashion in the creation and development of shop drawings, except that
electronic files containing floor plans or site plans which have been purchased from the
Architect may be used as backgrounds for Contractor, subcontractors, sub-subcontractors
and material suppliers in the Shop Drawing process.
Electronic Files
1.
Electronic AutoCAD drawing files are available for purchase from the Architect upon
request. Cost of the files are indicated below plus applicable taxes.
1 3 sheets
4 6 sheets
7 9 sheets
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.8
Only the Contractor or his subcontractors and sub-subcontractors may purchase an

electronic file. An electronic file will be provided in the software release currently used
by the Architect. File will be provided via Architects Info Exchange website.
Electronic Revit model files are available for purchase from the Architect upon request.
Cost of the model files are $150.00 each plus applicable taxes. Only the Contractor or
his subcontractors and sub-subcontractors may purchase an electronic file. An
electronic file will be provided in the software release currently used by the Architect.
File will be provided via Architects Info Exchange website.
Prior to delivery of the file, purchaser shall sign an Electronic File Transfer Release
Form. Payment for an electronic file shall occur upon delivery of file to purchaser.
Electronic file shall be used only for the production of information required by this
project and shall not be used in any other form (in whole or part).
In the creation and publication of Shop Drawings, under no circumstances shall the
Design Professionals seal or title block of the drawing be reproduced. All shop
drawings must be original works from the Contractor subcontractors, subsubcontractors and material suppliers.
PRODUCT DATA
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.9
$100.00 per sheet

$400.00 flat fee
$500.00 flat fee
Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement
manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project.
Include recommendations for application and use, and reference to compliance with specified
standards of trade associations and testing agencies.
Include notation of special coordination requirements for interfacing with adjacent work and
building utilities where applicable.
After review, distribute in accordance with Article titled SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES above
and provide copies for Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Execution
Requirements.
SAMPLES
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with
integral parts and attachment devices. Accompany physical sample with color digital image
(photo or scanned PDF) of sample. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
Unless otherwise specified, submit samples of finishes from manufacturers' full range of
standard colors, textures, and patterns, for Architect's selection.
01330 - 3

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.10
DESIGN DATA
A.
B.
1.11
B.
C.
When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer,

installation/application subcontractor, or Contractor to Architect.
Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting
reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be
acceptable to Architect.
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.14
Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.

Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with
information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
CERTIFICATES
A.
1.13
Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.

Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given
and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
TEST REPORTS
A.
B.
1.12
Where variations in color, pattern or texture are inherent in the material or product, submit
multiple samples to indicate the approximate range or variations.
Include full Project information and identification of manufacturer, model number, type, style
and color on each sample.
Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification Sections; two of which will
be retained by Architect.
Reviewed samples which may remain as part of the Work are indicated in individual
specification Sections.
Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in individual
specification section.
When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions

for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing.
Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents.
Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention and special environmental
criteria required for application or installation.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Submit reports for Architects benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.

Submit report within 30 days of observation to Architect for information.
01330 - 4

Phase 2
1.15
ERECTION DRAWINGS
A.
B.
C.
1.16
Submit drawings for Architects benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.

Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Architect or
Owner.
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A.
B.
C.
Each month submit photographs to Architect.

Photographs
1.
Format: JPEG file extension; color.
2.
Subject
a.
Take two site photographs from differing directions and five interior photographs
indicating the relative progress of the Work, 5 days maximum prior to submitting
pay request.
b.
Take photographs as evidence as required to document existing project
conditions.
Identify photographs with date, time, orientation and project identification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
01330 - 5

Phase 2
SECTION 01450
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3

Requirements for Contractors quality control.
CONTRACTORS QUALITY CONTROL

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
General:
1.
Initiate and maintain an effective quality control program and perform sufficient
inspections and tests of all items of Work, including those of Subcontractors, to
ensure compliance with the Contract Documents.
2.
Superintendent or Project Manager of the Contractor shall be present at the Site at
all times during the execution of the Work.
3.
Contractor shall monitor the quality of Work performed by its own forces and
Subcontractors and shall monitor suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, and
Site conditions to produce Work of Specified quality in compliance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4.
Work shall be performed by qualified, skilled, and experienced workers.
5.
Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the Work for all trades under
this Contract and with other contractors. Refer to Section 01310 - Project
Management and Coordination, for further information.
Installation Quality Control:
1.
Conditions for the Work: Install Work during conditions of temperature, humidity,
exposure, forecasted weather, and status of Project completion to ensure the best
possible result for each unit of Work in coordination with the entire Work. Isolate
each unit of Work from non-compatible Work as required to prevent deterioration
and damage.
2.
Inspection: Inspect each items of materials or equipment immediately prior to
installation. Reject damaged and defective items.
3.
Dimensions: Recheck measurements and dimensions of the Work, as an integral step
of starting each installation.
4.
Manufacturers Instructions: Unless specified otherwise, comply fully with
Manufacturers' printed instructions, following each requirement and step in proper
sequence. Do not omit any preparatory steps or installation procedures unless
specifically modified or exempted in writing. Should manufacturers' instructions
conflict with Contract Documents, request written clarification of requirements from
the Owner before proceeding. Refer to Section 01250 - Contract Modification
Procedures, for further information.
QUALITY CONTROL
01450 - 1

Phase 2
5.
Manufacturers Field Services: When required by various Specification Sections,

require manufacturers to furnish qualified technical service representatives to the
Site to observe Site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, and quality of
workmanship and to make appropriate recommendations and written reports
detailing their observations and recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
QUALITY CONTROL
01450 - 2

Phase 2
SECTION 01453
MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
B.
Construct mock-up in full size, with the same materials, methods, and workmanship that
will be used for the Work.
Following acceptance, the mock-up shall serve as a standard of quality and appearance for
the Work it represents.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Administrative and procedural requirements for Project mock-ups and includes

requirements for fabricating and erecting mock-ups where Specified or otherwise required
by the Contract Documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.4

Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for complete mock-up Work, including
provisions for attachment or insertion of associated Work.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Schedule construction and review of mock-ups so as not to delay the progress of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Materials and finish shall be as specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FABRICATION
A.
3.2
Fabricate mock-ups as shown on the accepted applicable Shop Drawings.
ERECTION
A.
03798614
03/15
Erect mock-ups at the fabricating plant, at an outside location that will permit the mock-up
to be viewed clearly and in full from a distance.
01453 - 1

Phase 2
B.
3.3
INCORPORATION IN THE WORK

A.
3.4
Following acceptance, transport the mock-up to the Site, and erect in the location
designated by the Owner.
With the Owner's prior acceptance, mock-ups may be incorporated in the Work.
PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE

A.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Owner, mock-ups shall be maintained and protected
until inspection and formal acceptance of the Work that the mock-up represents.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
01453 - 2

Phase 2
SECTION 01455
TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Administrative and procedural requirements for testing and inspection services.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.4

Soils Engineer: A civil engineer, licensed in the State of Texas, retained and paid by the
Contractor to perform services as required by the Contract Documents.
Testing Laboratory (also called Testing Agency): An independent testing organization,
retained by the Owner to perform inspections and tests, and report on the Work as required
by the Contract Documents.
TESTING LABORATORY
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
General:
1.
Services of a Testing Laboratory are required for Work specified in various
individual Specification Sections.
2.
Selection of the material required to be tested shall be by the Testing Laboratory and
not by the Contractor or a Subcontractor.
Owners Responsibility: Owner will pay cost of the first of such inspections and tests, as
stipulated in the Contract.
Contractor's Responsibilities:
1.
Cooperate with Testing Laboratory personnel.
2.
Furnish copies of product test reports as Specified.
3.
Furnish incidental labor and facilities:
a.
To provide access to Work to be tested.
b.
To obtain and handle samples at the Site or at the source of the product to be
tested.
c.
To facilitate inspections and tests.
d.
For storage and curing of test samples.
4.
Promptly notify Testing Laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow
for Testing Laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.
5.
Pay costs of retesting if tests or inspections show a failure to meet the requirements
of the Contract Documents, as stipulated in the Contract.
01455 - 1

Phase 2
1.5
TEST REPORTS
A.
1.6
The Testing Laboratory shall distribute reports as follows:

1.
One (1) copy to the Owner.
2.
Number of copies required by the Contractor and others.
3.
One (1) copy to each city and state Authority, building inspector, and Owner's
Inspector, as appropriate.
RETESTING
A.
Owner reserves the right to order additional tests if the Owner has any doubt that materials
comply with Specification requirements.
1.
If additional tests establish that materials comply with Specification requirements,
costs for such tests will be paid by the Owner.
2.
If additional tests establish that materials do not comply with Specification
requirements, costs for such tests shall be paid by the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
01455 - 2

Phase 2
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.3

Requirements for furnishing, installing, and maintaining temporary facilities and controls
as required to perform the Work and for relocating them as required by the progress of the
Work.
Owners Contractors Handbook for the Project is incorporated into this Section by
reference. A copy of the handbook is available from the Owner.
Materials for temporary facilities and controls may be new or used and shall be suitable for
the purposes intended.
Materials, installation, and maintenance of temporary facilities and controls shall be in
compliance with applicable regulatory requirements.
Maintain temporary facilities in sound, neat, and clean condition.
Remove temporary facilities and controls, including associated materials and equipment
when their use is no longer required.
1.
Restore and recondition areas of the Site damaged and disturbed by temporary
facilities and controls and their installation.
2.
Remove and properly dispose of debris resulting from removal and reconditioning
operations.
BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Provide and maintain temporary barriers and enclosures to prevent public entry; protect the
Work and existing facilities from the elements, and adjacent construction and
improvements, persons, and trees and plants from damage or injury from construction
operations.
Provide and maintain temporary enclosures to separate Work areas from areas occupied by
Owner and to prevent the penetration of dust and noise into occupied spaces.
1.
Construct with closed, sealed joints. Close or seal edges, penetrations, and
intersections with other surfaces to prevent penetrations of dust and noise.
2.
Construct in compliance with fire-resistive requirements of regulatory Authorities
where required. Maintain fire exits.
3.
Finish surfaces exposed to view of public or in Owner-occupied areas as directed by
the Owner.
Comply with Covenant Health Infection Control Risk Assessment (ICRA) and Interim Life
Safety Measures (ILSM) procedures.
01500 - 1

Phase 2
1.4
SECURITY
A.
B.
1.5
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.6
Secure, maintain, and protect the Work, stored materials, equipment, and temporary
facilities until time of acceptance, or such earlier time as Owner may choose to assume
such responsibility.
Security and protection may be by any legal method, or combination of methods,
acceptable by the Owner.
Noise and Vibration:

1.
Equipment and impact tools shall have intake and exhaust mufflers.
2.
Secure written permission from the Owner at least five (5) calendar days prior to
using noisy and vibratory equipment, such as jackhammers, concrete saws, impact
tools, and high-frequency electrical equipment.
3.
Cooperate with the Owner if the use of noisy and vibratory equipment becomes
objectionable by its longevity.
Dust and Dirt:
1.
Conduct construction operations to minimize the generation of dust and dirt, and
prevent dust and dirt from interfering with the progress of the Work and from
accumulating in Work and adjacent areas.
2.
Periodically water construction areas to minimize the generation of dust and dirt.
3.
To additionally minimize the generation of dust and dirt, hauling equipment and
trucks carrying loads of soil and debris shall have their loads sprayed with water or
covered with tarpaulins.
4.
Prevent dust and dirt from accumulating on walks, roadways, parking areas, and
planting, and from washing into sewer and storm drain systems.
Water: Do not permit surface and subsurface water and other liquids to accumulate in or
about the Site and vicinity thereof. Should such conditions develop, control the water or
other liquid, and suitably dispose of it by means of temporary pumps, piping, drainage
lines, troughs, ditches, dams, or other methods.
Pollution:
1.
No burning of refuse, debris, or other materials shall be permitted on or in the
vicinity of the Site.
2.
Comply with applicable regulatory requirements and anti-pollution ordinances
during the conduct of construction and disposal operations.
3.
Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of public authorities having
jurisdiction and Owner Contractors handbook.
Pest Control: Take adequate provisions to control rodents, insects, and other pests.
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Provide, and maintain for the life of the Project, a Project identification sign of the design,
text, and colors designated by the Owner; locate sign as approved by the Owner.
Signs other than the Specified Project sign will not be permitted, unless otherwise
approved in advance by the Owner.
01500 - 2

Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
01500 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Administrative and procedural requirements for material and equipment.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.4

Material and equipment incorporated in the Work shall be:

1.
New, unless otherwise specified.
2.
In a condition acceptable to the Owner.
3.
Suitable for the use intended.
4.
In compliance with EPA codes and regulations and Authorities having jurisdiction.
No material or equipment shall be used for any purpose other than that for which it is
designed or specified.
No material shall contain asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB).
No materials or products shall contain formaldehyde in excess of the amount
recommended by OSHA Regulations (Standards-29 CFR).
No lead containing powder driven anchors are permitted. Wherever powder driven anchors
are Specified or Indicated, provide equivalent strength non-lead containing powder driven
anchors.
Reuse of Existing Material and Equipment:
1.
Use special care in removal, handling, storage, and reinstallation to assure proper
function in the completed Work.
2.
Arrange for transportation, storage, and handling of items that require off-Site
storage, restoration, or renovation, and pay the costs for such Work.
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Deliver manufactured products in the manufacturer's original, unbroken containers or

packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.
Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents and Accepted Submittals, and to verify that products are properly
protected and undamaged.
Handle products in a manner to avoid soiling and damaging the products and their
packaging.
Promptly remove damaged and defective products from the Site, and replace at no increase
in Contract Sum.
01600 - 1

Phase 2
1.5
STORAGE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.6
Store manufactured products in compliance with the manufacturers' printed instructions,

with seals and labels intact and legible.
1.
Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures.
2.
Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturers.
Exterior Storage:
1.
Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids, to prevent soiling
and staining.
2.
Cover products that are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings;
provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.
3.
Store loose granular material in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent
mixing with foreign matter.
Arrange storage to facilitate inspection.
Periodically inspect stored products to assure that products are maintained under Specified
conditions and free from damage and deterioration.
Protection After Installation:
1.
Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage
from traffic and construction operations. Remove coverings when no longer needed.
2.
Maintain temperature and humidity conditions for interior equipment and finish
products in compliance with the manufacturers' printed instructions.
PRODUCT OPTIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
For products Specified or Indicated by descriptive requirements only, select any product by
any manufacturer meeting description and is recommended by manufacturer for the
application required. Products not in compliance with the requirements will be considered
substitutions.
For products Specified or Indicated by performance requirements only, select any product
by any manufacturer meeting the requirements and as recommended in writing by the
manufacturer for the application. General overall performance of a product is implied
where the product is Specified or Indicated for a specific application. Manufacturers
recommendations may be contained in published literature or by manufacturers written
certification of performance. Products not in compliance with the Specified or Indicated
performance requirements will be considered substitutions.
For products Specified or Indicated only by reference standard of trade, industry or
governmental organizations select any product meeting such standard. Refer to
Section 01120 - References and Definitions, for further information. Products not in
compliance with the reference standard will be considered substitutions.
For products Specified or Indicated by naming several products or manufacturers, select
any one of the products or manufacturers named that complies with the requirements.
When the naming of one or more products is followed by or accepted equal, a substitute
product may be offered for consideration by the Owner. Products other than those
Specified or Indicated will be considered substitutions.
For products Specified or Indicated by combination of descriptive material, reference to
standards, performance criteria, product or manufacturers name and there are apparent
discrepancies or conflicts between the requirements, the Owner reserves the right to
consider them a substitution that fails to satisfy one or more of the requirements.
Subcontractor bidders who discover such a discrepancy during bidding period shall request
clarification in writing from the Contractor.
01600 - 2

Phase 2
F.
G.
1.7
For products Specified or Indicated by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is
no option. Provide Specified product only.
Products considered substitutions shall be submitted as Specified under the Article titled
Substitutions of this Section.
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Substitutions by Contractor after the Execution of the Contract: After the execution of the
Contract, Contractor may propose other products in lieu of products identified in the
Contract Documents.
General:
1.
Whenever a product is identified in the Contract Documents by reference to
manufacturer's name, product trade name, catalog number, or the like, it is so
identified for the purpose of establishing a standard of required quality, utility,
appearance, and dimension.
2.
Products of other manufacturers may be acceptable, provided the proposed substitute
products are acceptable to the Owner, whose decision will be final.
3.
In requesting acceptance of a product other than that identified in the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall certify that:
a.
Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and has
determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the Specified or
Indicated product.
b.
The proposed substitute product is in full compliance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents and applicable regulatory requirements and does not
affect dimensions or functional clearances.
c.
Contractor will furnish the same guarantees / warranties or bonds for the
proposed substitute product as for the Specified or Indicated product.
d.
The proposed substitute product will have no adverse effect on other trades
and will not adversely affect or delay the Project Schedule.
e.
Contractor will coordinate the installation of the proposed substitute product
into the Work, and make such other changes as required to make the Work
complete and in compliance with the Contract Documents and applicable
regulatory requirements.
f.
Contractor agrees to pay all additional costs caused by the proposed substitute
product including, but not limited to the Owners and Consultants additional
services and approvals of regulatory Authorities.
g.
Contractor waives claims for additional costs and time extensions related to
the proposed substitute product that may subsequently become apparent.
4.
The burden of proving to the Owner that the proposed substitute product is equal
shall be solely upon the Contractor. Only one (1) substitute product may be
proposed for a product identified in the Contract Documents.
Substitution Request Procedure:
1.
Request for acceptance of a product other than that Specified or Indicated in the
Contract Documents shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Owner on the form
included at the end of this Section and accompanied by sufficient information to
enable proper evaluation to be made.
2.
Submit four (4) complete copies of the substitution request.
01600 - 3

Phase 2
3.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Include the following with the substitution request:

a.
Complete descriptive and technical data, including drawings, performance
specifications, cost data, samples, and test reports of the proposed substitute
product. Submit additional information as required by the Owner.
b.
Data similar to that Specified for the item for which the substitute product is
proposed.
c.
Written evaluation of the effect of the proposed substitute product on the
Project Schedule.
d.
Complete breakdown of costs indicating the amount to be deducted from the
Contract Sum if the proposed substitute product is accepted.
e.
Signed certification that the proposed substitute product is in full compliance
with the Contract Documents and applicable regulatory requirements.
f.
List of other Work, if any, which may be affected by the proposed substitute
product.
g.
Information on availability of maintenance service and source of replacement
materials for the proposed substitute product.
h.
Sample of manufacturer's standard form of guarantee or warranty for
proposed substitute product.
Owners Action:
1.
Owner will notify the Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject the
proposed substitute product. Accepted substitute products will be processed as
contract modifications in accordance with Section 01250 - Contract Modification
Procedures.
2.
Owner will determine the acceptability of proposed substitute products, and the
Owners determination will be final.
3.
The Owner will review requests for proposed substitute products with reasonable
promptness.
4.
No consideration will be given to a proposed substitute product when, in the
Owners judgment:
a.
It is merely shown or implied on Shop Drawings or other submittals without
the required completed substitution request form.
b.
It is a result of Contractors failure to execute the Work in a timely manner or
to coordinate activities properly.
c.
The substitution request is received without sufficient factual and comparative
data or information necessary for the Owner to properly evaluate the request.
5.
No consideration will be given to a proposed substitute product unless, in the
Owner's judgment, it complies with the following conditions:
a.
It is equal in quality and serviceability to the Specified or Indicated product.
b.
Its use does not entail changes in details or related construction.
c.
It is acceptable in design and artistic effect.
d.
There is cost or time, or both, advantage to the Owner.
e.
It meets or exceeds the Specified guarantee or warranty period and extent of
coverage.
The Owners cost of reviewing such proposed substitute products, whether accepted or not
by the Owner, and the Architects costs necessary to review the proposed substitute
product and incorporate or accommodate the proposed substitute product into the Work,
will be processed as a deductive Change Order in compliance with the requirements of
Section 01250 - Contract Modification Procedures.
01600 - 4

Phase 2
F.
G.
H.
Acceptance of a proposed substitute product shall not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for the proper execution of the Work and any other requirements of the
Contract Documents.
If a proposed substitute product is not accepted, provide the product originally Specified or
Indicated.
No product other than those Specified or Indicated in the Contract Documents shall be
purchased or incorporated in the Work without the Owner's prior written acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
01600 - 5

Phase 2
SECTION 01700
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Demolition, if applicable: Submit written reports of inspections conducted with the

Owner, both before and after performing demolition.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Administrative and procedural requirements for the execution of the Work including, but
not limited to:
1.
Cutting and patching.
2.
Demolition, if applicable.
3.
Progress cleaning.
4.
Protection of installed Work.
5.
Corrections to Work.
6.
Completion of Work.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4

Design Criteria for Patching:

1.
Patching shall achieve security, strength, and weather protection, as applicable, and
shall preserve continuity of existing fire ratings.
2.
Patching shall successfully duplicate undisturbed adjacent finishes, colors, textures,
and profiles. Where there is dispute as to whether duplication is successful or has
been achieved, the Owner's judgment will be final.
CUTTING AND PATCHING

A.
03798614
03/15
General:
1.
Perform cutting, associated structural reinforcing, and patching in a manner to
prevent damage to existing construction and other Work and to provide proper
surfaces for the installation of materials, equipment, and repairs.
2.
Where practicable, avoid interference with Owners use of adjoining areas and
interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. Where existing services are required
to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services to avoid interruption
of services to occupied areas.
01700 - 1

Phase 2
3.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Employ skilled workers for cutting and patching. Wherever practicable, employ
original installer or fabricator providing Work under this Contract to perform cutting
and patching for new:
a.
Weather-exposed and moisture-resistant products.
b.
Fireproofing.
c.
Finished surfaces exposed to view.
4.
Provide temporary support of construction to be cut to ensure structural integrity.
5.
Perform cutting and patching using methods and materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
6.
Refer to Section 01110 - Summary of Work and Special Requirements, for special
procedures pertaining to asbestos and other hazardous materials.
Cutting:
1.
Cut existing construction to provide for installation of Work. Make new openings
neat, as close as possible to profiles indicated and only to extent necessary for new
Work.
2.
Do not cut or alter existing structural members without prior consultation with the
Owner unless specifically indicated. Do not damage reinforcing or structural steel to
remain.
3.
At concrete, masonry, paving, and other materials where edges of cuts and holes will
remain exposed in the completed Work, make cuts using power-sawing and -coring
equipment; do not overcut at corners of cut openings. Saw overruns shall not be
permitted.
4.
Prior to cutting, employ a competent private utility locating service capable of
locating positions and depths of underground and concealed structural reinforcement
and utilities including, but not limited to electrical conduits, plumbing lines, and
other utilities in the vicinity of the construction to be cut.
5.
Do not damage electrical conduits, plumbing lines, and other utilities to remain.
6.
Upon completion of cutting and coring, clean remaining surfaces of loose particles
and dust.
Patching:
1.
Patch existing construction by filling repairing, refinishing, closing up and similar
operations. Patching includes the insertion or projection of other products in or from
a surface.
2.
Adjust and fit materials and products to provide a neat installation and to restore
surfaces to their original condition.
3.
Patch weather-exposed components in a manner that restores them to a weathertight
condition.
4.
Finish or refinish, as required, cut and patched surfaces to provide an even surface of
uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance, matching existing adjacent. Finish
complete surface plane, unless otherwise indicated. Over patched wall or ceiling
surfaces, finish to nearest cutoff line for entire surface, such as intersection with
adjacent wall or ceiling, beam, pilasters or to nearest opening frame, unless
otherwise indicated. Finished surfaces shall not present a spotty, touched-up
appearance.
5.
Where removal of partitions, equipment, and other items has exposed holes in
existing concrete floor slabs, fill in holes with new concrete and reinforce as
necessary. Prepare slabs as required to provide clean, sound surfaces for the
installation of new materials.
01700 - 2

Phase 2
1.6
DEMOLITION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
General: This subsection may or may not be applicable to the Work, but where planned
demolition is not part of the Work, this subsection is included for instances where the
Contractor must demolish Work that is non-compliant, or to perform Change Order Work.
1.
Refer to Section 01110 - Summary of Work and Special Requirements, for special
procedures pertaining to asbestos and other hazardous materials.
Protection:
1.
It is essential that there be no interruption of essential systems such as normal and
emergency power, medical gases, fire alarm and protection, and other such systems,
and no interruption of the normal operation of the Owner's facilities. Refer to
Section 01310 - Project Management and Coordination, for additional information.
2.
Take care to ensure that there will be no damage to structural elements or portions
thereof that are not required to be removed. Erect and maintain temporary shoring,
bracing, and other means to safeguard the structural integrity of the existing building
and its parts.
3.
Erect and maintain temporary bracing, shoring, lights, barricades, signs, and other
means to protect the public, workers, and other persons; finishes and improvements
to remain; and adjoining property from damage from demolition activities, all in
compliance with applicable regulatory requirements.
4.
Erect and maintain temporary barriers to confine dust and debris.
Inspections:
1.
Prior to starting selective demolition, make inspection and report to the Owner in
writing observable defects and structural weaknesses of construction designated for
demolition, of adjacent structures, and of improvements to remain. If unsatisfactory
conditions exist, do not commence demolition until appropriate determinations have
been made.
2.
As selective demolition progresses, periodically inspect for damage. Immediately
notify the Owner in writing if damage is noticed, and stop operations at that location
until appropriate determinations have been made.
3.
Following selective demolition, make inspection and report to the Owner in writing
defects and structural weaknesses of items partially demolished, cut, or removed; of
adjacent structures; and of improvements remaining.
4.
The Owner will accompany the Contractor on its inspections before and after
selective demolition to confirm the physical condition of structures and
improvements involved. Contractor shall videotape (using NTSC VHS format) each
room to serve as a record and will furnish copies of such tapes to the Owner.
Preparation:
1.
Lay out cutting Work at Site and coordinate with related Work for which cutting is
required.
2.
Review proposed layout with Owner prior to performing cutting operations.
General:
1.
Perform demolition in compliance with ANSI A10.6 Safety Requirements for
Demolition Operations and NFPA 241 Standard for Safeguarding Construction,
Alteration, and Demolition Operations, and applicable regulatory requirements of
public Authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Remove items designated for demolition within the limits of Work indicated, and as
required to perform the Work. Do not remove anything beyond the limits of
demolition indicated without the prior written acceptance of the Owner; if in doubt
whether to remove an item, contact the Owner prior to proceeding.
01700 - 3

Phase 2
3.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
03798614
03/15
Remove materials carefully, providing for neat and structurally sound junctions
between existing and new materials.
4.
Protect existing structures, facilities, and plant life from damage. Items damaged as a
result of demolition operations shall be repaired or replaced, at no increase in
Contract Sum.
5.
Perform demolition to provide the least interference and most protection to existing
facilities and improvements to remain.
6.
Demolish concrete in small sections. Lower heavy framing members carefully.
7.
Do not jack hammer within 2-inches of reinforcing or structural steel to remain;
remove final 2-inches of material using chipping guns or suitable hand tools.
8.
Blasting will not be permitted.
9.
Clean surfaces of adhesives, bitumen, and other adhering materials, as necessary to
produce acceptable substrates for new materials.
Cutting:
1.
Make new openings neat, as close as possible to profiles indicated and only to extent
necessary for new Work.
2.
Refer to Article titled Cutting and Patching of this Section for additional
requirements.
Pipes, Ducts, and Conduits:
1.
Deactivate utilities in compliance with applicable utility company procedures.
Return meters to utility companies as required.
2.
Cap deactivated piping systems at points of cutoff.
3.
Remove deactivated mechanical, plumbing, and sprinkler piping, ducts, and
electrical conduit, including fastenings, connections, and associated items that would
otherwise be exposed in the completed Work or interfere with construction
operations.
4.
These facilities above ceilings may remain in place if their presence does not result
in interference with new Work, in which case they shall be removed to extent
necessary.
Roofing and Rooftop Items:
1.
Remove existing roofing, including associated insulation, cants, crickets, flashings,
copings, and other materials to the extent indicated.
2.
Remove rooftop items and equipment not required to remain.
Miscellaneous Items: In addition to main items to be removed, remove miscellaneous
items such as signs, bells, wires, and fastenings, on interior and exterior of building.
Demolition Debris:
1.
Regularly remove debris from the Site so that its presence will not delay the
progress of the Work. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of public
Authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Nothing to be removed from the Site shall be stored, sold, or burned on the Site
without the Owner's prior written approval.
Reconditioning Existing Substrates:
1.
Clean surfaces on which new materials will be applied, removing adhesives,
bitumen, and other adhering materials, as necessary to produce acceptable substrates
for new materials.
2.
Perform sandblasting, chipping, grinding, acid washing, etching, and other Work as
required by conditions encountered and new materials involved.
3.
Use of acids or other cleaning agents shall include neutralizing, washing, rinsing,
and drying, as applicable.
01700 - 4

Phase 2
4.
5.
1.7
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.8
General:
1.
Maintain Site and Work areas in a clean, safe, and orderly condition and free of
waste materials and debris.
2.
Comply with applicable regulatory requirements for cleaning and for the removal,
storage, and disposal of waste materials and debris.
3.
Schedule cleaning operations to prevent dust and other contaminants resulting from
cleaning from adhering to wet or newly finished surfaces.
Use cleaning materials and methods recommended by the manufacturers of the materials
and products to be cleaned. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use
cleaning materials that will not create hazards to health or property or cause damage to
materials, products, or Work.
Clean areas where Work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for the proper
execution of the Work.
Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
Maintain installed Work in clean condition.
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A.
B.
1.9
Determine substrate requirements for reconditioned surfaces in cooperation with the

manufacturer's representative and installer of each new material involved.
Prepare existing concrete surfaces to receive new pneumatically placed or cast-inplace concrete by sandblasting, to the extent that the entire surface has a moderate to
heavy broken or fractured texture, except for keyed joints and other areas indicated,
that require the exposure of coarse aggregate.
Protect installed Work as required for the duration of the construction period to ensure the
Work will be without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
Comply with manufacturers printed instructions for Site conditions and protection of
materials and products, including temperature and humidity.
CORRECTIONS TO WORK
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Restoration of Deteriorated and/or Damaged Work:

1.
Restore, or remove and replace as Specified or determined by the Owner, material
and finishes that are deteriorated and/or damaged from construction activities at no
additional expense to the Owner.
2.
Restoration shall be equal to the original Work and finishes shall match the
appearance of existing adjacent Work and show no visual evidence of restoration.
Remedial Work:
1.
Remedial Work necessary owing to faulty workmanship or materials shall be at no
additional expense to the Owner.
2.
Work shall be coordinated with the Owner and performed at such time and in such
manner to cause minimal interruption and inconvenience to the Owner's operations,
as acceptable to the Owner.
01700 - 5

Phase 2
1.10
COMPLETION OF WORK
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Operation Tests:
1.
Conduct operational tests as required to demonstrate that all equipment and systems
have been completed and are in compliance with all requirements.
2.
Submit to the Owner a written record of test results using recording type instruments
where applicable.
Preparation for Inspections by Owner:
1.
Perform final cleaning as Specified hereinbefore.
2.
Assemble guarantees / warranties, service and maintenance contracts, operating and
maintenance instructions, and other items as Specified, and submit to the Owner.
3.
Remove temporary tapes, wrapping, coatings, paper labels, and similar items. Dust,
mop, wash, or wipe exposed and semi-exposed surfaces as necessary to leave the
Work in a new, clean condition.
4.
Perform final waxing, polishing, and buffing using materials as directed by the
Owner.
Extra Materials:
1.
Where required in the individual Specification Sections, furnish extra materials in
the quantities and manner Specified.
2.
Deliver extra materials to the Owner at the Site, jointly inventory with Owner until
agreement, and obtain Owners acceptance signature on delivery ticket.
Final Cleaning:
1.
General:
a.
Comply with applicable regulatory requirements during the conduct of
cleaning and disposal operations.
b.
Use cleaning materials and methods recommended by the manufacturers of
the materials and products to be cleaned. If specific cleaning materials are not
recommended, use cleaning materials that will not create hazards to health or
property or cause damage to materials, products, or Work.
c.
Schedule operations to prevent dust and other contaminants resulting from
cleaning operations from adhering to wet or newly finished surfaces.
2.
Perform the following final cleaning operations as applicable to the Work of this
Contract:
a.
Exterior:
1)
Remove and dispose of sticks, rubbish, debris, and surplus materials
from Site and other areas.
2)
Broom-clean exterior paving.
3)
Rake-clean lawn and landscaped areas.
4)
Remove dust, dirt, grease, stains, fingerprints, labels, spilled and
spattered, and other foreign materials from surfaces exposed to view.
b.
Interior:
1)
Vacuum-clean interior spaces including casework.
2)
Wash and shine mirrors and both sides of glazing.
3)
Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine.
4)
Mechanical Ventilating Equipment:
(a)
Clean diffusers, grilles, and registers.
(b) Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters of units
operated during construction.
(c)
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without
filters during construction.
01700 - 6

Phase 2
5)
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
Plumbing Equipment: Clean, sanitize, and polish plumbing fixtures,

drains, and fittings.
6)
Electrical Equipment:
(a)
Vacuum and wipe insides of electrical panels.
(b) Clean electrical equipment.
(c)
Wash and polish lighting fixtures including the inside and
outside of fixture lenses and diffusers.
Instruction of the Owner's Personnel:
1.
Where specified, furnish qualified personnel for on-the-job instruction of the
Owner's operating and maintenance personnel.
2.
Where possible, furnish instruction and training, including special start-ups and
running time, prior to occupancy of the Project, at no additional expense to the
Owner.
Procedures for Architect and Owners Determination of Substantial Completion of the
Work:
1.
Prior to requesting Architect and Owners inspection for the determination of the
date of Substantial Completion of the Work, or a portion thereof that the Owner
agrees to accept separately, the Contractor shall:
a.
Remove all tools, equipment, and other materials from the Work area.
b.
Complete final cleaning.
c.
Submit the following to the Owner:
1)
Original certificates of occupancy and operation from Authorities
having jurisdiction enabling Owner unrestricted use of the Work and
access to services and utilities.
2)
Contractors written certification that Owners designed personnel have
received specified training.
3)
Contractors written certification that final changeover of permanent
locks has been completed and that all keys have been delivered to the
Owner.
4)
Project record documents.
5)
Guarantees/warrantees and bonds.
6)
Service and maintenance contracts.
7)
Record of operation test reports.
8)
Signed delivery tickets for extra materials.
2.
Submit Contractors written request for determination of Substantial Completion to
the Owner.
3.
Architect and Owner will make an inspection for determination of Substantial
Completion in accordance with the requirements of the Contract.
Completion Inspections:
1.
Punchlist Inspection:
a.
Before requesting the Owners punchlist inspection, Contractor shall complete
all Work.
b.
Upon receipt of Contractors written request for punchlist inspection and
written certification that all Work is complete in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner and Architect will
schedule the inspection. Contractors request for such inspection shall be
received by the Owner no less than seven (7) calendar days prior to the
requested date of such inspection.
01700 - 7

Phase 2
c.
2.
Contractors Project Superintendent shall be present during the entire

inspection. Contractor shall provide incidental labor and equipment to
facilitate the inspection.
d.
If the Contractor has not completed all Work the Owner may terminate the
inspection and promptly notify the Contractor accordingly. Contractor shall
complete all required Work and request another inspection as Specified
hereinbefore.
e.
Architect and Owner will make one punchlist inspection of the Work and the
Architect will prepare a list of deficiencies (punchlist) and transmit one (1)
copy to the Contractor. If the Contractor takes exception to any item on the
list, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and Owner in writing of such
exception within seven (7) calendar days of the Contractors receipt of the list.
f.
Contractor shall correct all punchlist Work prior to final payment.
Punchlist Backcheck Inspection:
a.
Upon receipt of Contractors written request and written certification that all
punchlist Work is complete in compliance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents and is ready for inspection, the Architect and Owner will
schedule the inspection. Contractors request for such inspection shall be
received by the Architect and Owner not less than seven (7) calendar days
prior to the requested date of inspection.
b.
Architect and Owner will make inspection, and if any incomplete or
non-complying Work remains, the Architect or Owner will promptly notify
the Contractor in writing accordingly.
c.
Contractor shall complete remaining Work and request re-inspection as
Specified hereinbefore.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS FOR PATCHING

A.
B.
Materials shall be as specified in applicable Specification Sections and as required to

match existing construction in visual and functional performance.
For exposed surfaces, provide materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to
the fullest extent possible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
01700 - 8

Phase 2
SECTION 01720
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Administrative and procedural requirements for the execution of the Work including, but
not limited to:
1.
Contract closeout requirements.
2.
Warranty / Guarantee form.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4

Contract Closeout: Prior to Application for Final Payment submit documentation Specified
hereinafter in the Paragraph titled Final Completion Documentation in this Section.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
General: Contract closeout includes, but is not limited to Project record documents and
samples, operating and maintenance data, guarantees / warranties and bonds, service and
maintenance contracts, and other closeout documentation required by the Contract
Documents.
Project Record Documents:
1.
General:
a.
Project record documents shall include As-Built Drawings, Annotated
Specifications, large scale layout drawings, and the record Project Schedule.
b.
Maintenance of Record Documents:
1)
Store record documents in a secure location in Contractors field office,
apart from the documents used for construction.
2)
Maintain record documents clean, dry, in a legible condition, and in
good order.
3)
Do not use record documents for construction.
c.
Recording:
1)
Record information carefully and neatly, with felt-tip pens, in color
code designated by or approved in advance by the Owner, and in the
manner approved in advance by the Owner.
2)
Label each document PROJECT RECORD in large, neat, printed
block letters.
01720 - 1

Phase 2
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
03798614
03/15
At the time of the Contractors Application for Final Payment, Contractor

shall:
1)
Sign and date the completed record documents.
2)
Certify in writing that the completed record documents as a complete
and accurate reflection of the actual construction of the Work.
3)
Deliver record documents to the Owner.
As-Built Drawings:
a.
Record the following information on a clean set of black-line or blue-line
prints in a manner acceptable to the Owner:
1)
Changes made by contract modifications as provided in the Contract.
2)
Locations of Work buried under and outside the building, such as
plumbing and electrical lines and conduits.
3)
Locations of significant Work concealed inside the building whose
general locations have been changed from those indicated on the
Contract Documents.
4)
Locations of items, not necessarily concealed, that have been changed,
with the Owner's prior acceptance, from the locations indicated on the
Contract Documents.
b.
In addition to the previously Specified requirements for record documents:
1)
Keep as-built drawings up to date during the entire progress of the
Work, and make them available to the Owner for review at any time.
2)
Include additional drawings as necessary for clarification.
3)
Record deviations from the sizes, locations, and other features of
installations Indicated on the Contract Documents.
4)
Establish locations of underground Work by dimensions to column
lines or walls, locating turns, and by referenced centerline or invert
elevations and rates of fall.
5)
Give sufficient information to locate Work concealed in the building.
6)
Drawing to Scale:
(a)
Locate main runs of piping, conduit, ductwork, and similar items
by dimension.
(b) Locate other items either by dimension or in relation to spaces
within the building.
c.
Submit reproducible record drawings, made from final accepted Shop
Drawings that have been updated to show actual conditions.
Annotated Specifications: Mark each Specification Section to record:
a.
Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and
item of equipment actually incorporated in the Work.
b.
Changes made by contract modifications provided by the Contract.
Large-Scale Layout Drawings:
a.
The preparation of large-scale, detailed layout drawings may be required for
the Work of Divisions 15 and 16 of these Specifications. These layout
drawings are not Shop Drawings, but together with Shop Drawings or layout
drawings of other affected Work, are used to check, coordinate, and integrate
the various types of Work.
b.
If furnished, include the layout drawings as part of the Project record
documents.
Record Product Data:
a.
Furnish one (1) copy of manufacturers' product data, specifications,
installation instructions, and maintenance instructions for products
01720 - 2

Phase 2
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
incorporated in the Work; information Specified herein shall be for products

in addition to equipment items requiring operating and maintenance data
Specified in the Paragraph titled Operating and Maintenance Data of this
Section. Assemble together all product data pertaining to an item.
b.
Sign and date the completed record product data and submit them to the
Owner.
Operating and Maintenance Data:
1.
General: Where maintenance manuals, record data, and operating instructions are
required in the individual Specification Sections, prepare and assemble such in
manageable size, heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered binders with pockets sized
for 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch sheets and including at least the following:
a.
Identification on, or readable through, the front plastic cover and spine with
the Project name, Owners Project identification number, and address and the
general subject matter contained in the manual.
b.
Neatly typewritten index near the front of the manual furnishing immediate
information as to locations in the manual of all emergency data regarding the
equipment included in the manual.
c.
Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of the equipment
included in the manual.
d.
Complete nomenclature of replaceable parts, their part numbers, current cost,
and name, address, and telephone number of the nearest source of parts.
e.
Copy of each guarantee/warranty and service contract issued for equipment in
the manual.
f.
Additional data as required for the instruction of the Owner's operating and
maintenance personnel.
2.
Extraneous Data: Where contents of manuals include manufacturers' catalog pages,
clearly indicate the items included in this installation and delete, or otherwise clearly
indicate, data that is not applicable to this installation.
3.
Record Shop Drawings: With each copy of the manual, furnish to the Owner one (1)
set of final accepted Shop Drawings showing changes made during construction.
4.
Number of Copies Required: Submit manuals in the quantity required to be returned,
plus the following unless otherwise Specified, that will be retained by the Owner:
a.
One (1) copy of all manuals.
5.
When shop drawings or other drawing sheets larger than 8-1/2 x 11 inches are part
of the data, neatly fold the drawing sheets individually and three-hole punch or
insert the sheets in a three-hole punched envelope and insert in the notebook.
Hole-punching of the drawings shall not cut through printed lines or text.
Guarantees / Warranties and Bonds:
1.
General:
a.
Manufacturers' warranties notwithstanding, warrant the entire Work against
defects in materials and workmanship as for one (1) year from the date of
Substantial Completion in compliance with the requirements of the Contract.
b.
Guarantee / warrant or bond Work as required in the individual Specification
Sections.
c.
Warranties between the Contractor and manufacturers, and the Contractor and
suppliers, shall not affect guarantees and warranties between the Contractor
and the Owner.
d.
The Contractor will not be held responsible for defects due to misuse,
negligence, willful damage, improper maintenance, or accident caused by
others and the Contractor will not be responsible for defective parts whose
01720 - 3

Phase 2
E.
F.
03798614
03/15
replacement is necessitated by failure of the Owner's maintenance forces to

properly clean and service them, provided the Contractor has furnished
complete written maintenance instructions to the Owner.
e.
Compile Specified guarantees / warranties and bonds.
f.
Co-execute as required.
g.
Review guarantees / warranties and bonds to verify compliance with Contract
Documents.
h.
Submit to the Owner for review.
2.
Form of Guarantee / Warranty:
a.
Submit the guarantees / warranties, typed on the Contractor's letterhead if for
the entire Work, or on the Subcontractor's letterhead if for the Work of a
Specification Section to the Owner for review.
b.
Use guarantee / warranty form included at the end of this Section.
3.
Submittal Requirements:
a.
Time of Submittal:
1)
For equipment or component parts of accepted equipment put into
service for the Owner's benefit during the progress of the Work, submit
guarantees / warranties within seven (7) calendar days after acceptance
of the Work.
2)
Otherwise, submit guarantees / warranties within seven (7) calendar
days after date of Substantial Completion and prior to Contractors
Final Application for Payment.
3)
For items of Work where acceptance is delayed materially beyond the
date of Substantial Completion, furnish updated submittal within
seven (7) calendar after such delayed acceptance, listing the date of
delayed acceptance as the start of the guarantee / warranty period.
b.
Form:
1)
Assembled in durable, three-ring plastic binders sized for 8-1/2 inch
x 11 inch sheets. Fold larger sheets to fit into binders as indicated
above under Operating and Maintenance Data.
2)
Identification on, or readable through, the front cover with the Project
name and address, Owners Project identification number, Contractor's
name and address, and the title GUARANTEES / WARRANTIES
AND BONDS.
c.
Number of Original Signed Copies Required: Two (2) each.
4.
Review Meeting: 11 months following date of acceptance, hold a meeting for the
purpose of review of, and action upon, guarantees / warranties, bonds, and service
and maintenance contracts, as Specified in Section 01310 - Project Management and
Coordination.
Service and Maintenance Contracts: Compile, review, and transmit service and
maintenance contracts to the Owner.
Final Completion Documentation: Complete and submit the following in compliance with
the requirements of the Contract:
1.
Final meter readings for utilities, a measure record of stored fuel, and similar data
effective as of the date of Substantial Completion.
2.
Evidence of continuing insurance coverage.
3.
Request for Final Change Order.
4.
Application for Final Payment.
5.
Application for payment of retainage.
01720 - 4

Phase 2
6.
7.
8.
9.
Releases from all parties who are entitled to claims against the Project, property, or
improvement pursuant to the provisions of law.
Consent of surety to final payment.
Project permit documents issued by Authorities having jurisdiction.
Other data required by the Owner in compliance with the requirements of the
Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
Attachment: The following Form of Warranty / Guarantee, or typed and printed form matching exactly
the specified Form of Warranty / Guarantee form, shall be used to submit a Warranty / Guarantee.
03798614
03/15
01720 - 5

Phase 2
FORM OF WARRANTY / GUARANTEE
WARRANTY / GUARANTEE FOR
We hereby warrant/guarantee that the
that we have provided in the
has been completed in compliance with the requirements of specification SECTION
and the Contract Documents.

We agree to repair or replace any or all of our Work, together with any other adjacent Work that may be
displaced by so doing, that may prove to be defective in its workmanship or material within a period of
_____________________________ from the earlier of the date of Substantial Completion or Owners
acceptance of the above-named Project in compliance with the requirements of the Contract; and we also
agree to repair any and all damages resulting from such defects, all without any expense to the Owner,
ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse or neglect excepted.
In the event of our failure to comply with the above-mentioned conditions within sixty (60) calendar days
after being notified in writing by the Owner, we collectively or separately do hereby authorize the Owner
to proceed to have such defective Work repaired or replaced and made good at our expense, and we will
honor and pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand.
Signed:
Date:
(Subcontractor's name, address, and license number, or manufacturer's name and address)
03798614
03/15
Page 1 of 2

Phase 2
Countersigned:
Date:
(Contractor's name, address, and license number)
END OF FORM OF WARRANTY / GUARANTEE
03798614
03/15
Page 2 of 2

Phase 2
SECTION 01732
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.3
B.
C.
D.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site,
unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to
Owner ready for reuse.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse,
and reinstall them where indicated.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are
not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.5
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4

Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective

demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption
of utility services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and
means of egress.
Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site
improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
selective demolition operations. Submit before Work begins.
Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition

work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved
certification program.
01732 - 1

Phase 2
C.
D.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.7
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner
as far as practical.
1.
Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:
a.
All loose stored items and equipment.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before
proceeding with selective demolition.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1.
Hazardous materials have been removed by Owner under a separate contract.
2.
If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not
disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous
materials under a separate contract.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void
existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.

Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with
intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent
of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
01732 - 2

Phase 2
E.
F.
3.2
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A.
B.
3.3
Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them

against damage during selective demolition operations.
Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated
utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively
demolished. Coordinate with Owner prior to any shut down of systems.
1.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before
proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that
bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems
to other parts of building.
3.
Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and
seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
3.4
Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction

photographs and/or preconstruction videotapes.
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective
demolition activities.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to
prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as
required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction
and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of
construction being demolished.
A.
03798614
03/15
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within
limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining
construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,
not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces.
Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid
marring existing finished surfaces.
3.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and
portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
01732 - 3

Phase 2
4.
B.
C.
D.
3.5
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A.
B.
C.
3.6
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
5.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
Removed and Salvaged Items:
1.
Clean salvaged items.
2.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4.
Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1.
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
equipment to match new equipment.
2.
Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3.
4.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous
materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and
soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed
to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and
reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or

otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project
site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of
them.
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
01732 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 02221
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
B.
C.
B.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be salvaged.
Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent
damage, sort and tag, and store. Include fasteners or brackets needed for reattachment
elsewhere.
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
B.
1.6
Section 01110 Summary of Work and Special Requirements: Use of the premises and
phasing requirements.
Section 01320 - Construction Progress Documentation: Preconstruction photographs taken
before building demolition.
Section 01732 - Selective Demolition: Partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site
improvements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.5
Demolition and removal of buildings facades and area of building structure.

Removing below-grade construction.
Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities below area of new
construction as documents indicate.
Salvaging items for reuse by Owner.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to,
cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of
interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of
Owner.
1.
Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
03798614
03/15
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.
Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be demolished.
2.
Review structural load limitations of existing structures.
02221 - 1

Phase 2
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.7
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.8
Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.10
Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.
Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the
measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for dust control and for noise
control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
1.
Adjacent Buildings: Detail special measures proposed to protect adjacent buildings
to remain, including means of egress from those buildings.
Schedule of Building Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1.
Detailed sequence of demolition work, with starting and ending dates for each
activity.
2.
Temporary interruption of utility services.
3.
Shutoff and capping or re-routing of utility services.
Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction
and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage
caused by demolition operations. Comply with Section 01320 Construction Project
Documentation. Submit before the Work begins.
Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible
for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and
that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of
technician and date refrigerant was recovered.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.9
Review and finalize building demolition schedule and verify availability of

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
Review and finalize protection requirements.
Review procedures for noise and dust control.
Review procedures for protection of adjacent buildings.
Review items to be salvaged and returned to Owner.
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification

program.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the
Work.
Buildings immediately adjacent to demolition area will be occupied. Conduct building
demolition so operations of occupied buildings will not be disrupted.
1.
Provide not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that will affect operations of
adjacent occupied buildings.
02221 - 2

Phase 2
2.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.11
Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other facilities used by occupants
of adjacent buildings.
a.
Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other facilities used by occupants
of adjacent buildings without written permission from authorities having
jurisdiction.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner
as far as practical.
1.
Before building demolition, Owner will identify and remove items for their storage.
Work.
1.
Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
2.
disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be
removed by Owner under a separate contract.
Hazardous Materials: Present in buildings and structures to be demolished. A report on the
presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become
aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.
1.
Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
2.
Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous
materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
3.
Owner will provide material safety data sheets for materials that are known to be
present in buildings and structures to be demolished because of building operations
or processes performed there.
On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted.
COORDINATION
A.
Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations or

operations of adjacent occupied buildings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
2.2

beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Section 02300 - Earthwork.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
03798614
03/15
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition
operations.
02221 - 3

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
3.3
Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment

according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:
1.
Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris.
2.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4.
Transport items to storage area designated by Owners representative.
5.
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A.
3.4
Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and
hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that
existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.
Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building
to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or
unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during building
demolition operations.
Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for detensioning.
Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building
demolition operations.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide
photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
salvage operations.
Existing Utilities to be Disconnected: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off
utilities serving buildings and structures to be demolished.
1.
Owner will arrange to shut off utilities when requested by Contractor.
2.
Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.
3.
If removal, relocation, or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent
occupied buildings, then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and
structures to be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings
and structures.
4.
Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or plug
and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
5.
Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been
completed and verified in writing.
PROTECTION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other
building facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing buildings.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or
structural support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of
construction being demolished.
1.
Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition.
02221 - 4

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
3.5
Existing Utilities to Remain: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage
during demolition operations.
1.
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities
unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to
Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
a.
Provide at least 5 days notice to occupants of affected buildings if shutdown
of service is required during changeover.
Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings,
canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and
as indicated. Comply with requirements in Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities &
Controls.
1.
Protect adjacent buildings and facilities from damage due to demolition activities.
2.
Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
3.
Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter
drip line of groups of trees to remain.
4.
Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to
people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
5.
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition area
and to and from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures.
6.
Protect walls, windows, roofs, and other adjacent exterior construction that are to
remain and that are exposed to building demolition operations.
7.
Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust,
noise, and dirt migration to occupied portions of adjacent buildings.
Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open
excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections
in place.
DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
General: Demolish indicated portions of building completely. Use methods required to

complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials.
Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
2.
Maintain fire watch during and for at least 4 hours after flame-cutting operations.
3.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
4.
Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed trafficways if required by
2.
Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply
with governing environmental-protection regulations. Do not use water when it may
damage adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such
as ice, flooding, and pollution.
Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.
02221 - 5

Phase 2
3.6
DEMOLITION BY EXPLOSIVES
A.
B.
3.7
DEMOLITION BY MECHANICAL MEANS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.8
Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to

lower level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before
disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.
Remove debris from elevated portions of the building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
1.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to
minimize ground impact and dust generation.
Salvage: Items to be removed and salvaged are indicated on Drawings.
Below-Grade Construction: Abandon foundation walls and other below-grade construction.
Cut below-grade construction flush with grade.
Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction
that are within footprint of new construction and extending 5 feet outside footprint
indicated for new construction. Abandon below-grade construction outside this area.
Existing Utilities: Abandon existing utilities and below-grade utility structures. Cut utilities
flush with grade.
Existing Utilities: Demolish existing utilities and below-grade utility structures that are
within 5 feet outside footprint indicated for new construction. Abandon utilities outside this
area.
SITE RESTORATION
A.
B.
C.
3.9
Explosives: Perform explosive demolition according to governing regulations.

1.
Obtain written permission from authorities having jurisdiction before bringing
explosives to, or using explosives on, Project site.
2.
Do not damage adjacent structures, property, or site improvements when using
explosives.
Comply with recommendation in specialty explosives consultant's report.
Below-Grade Areas: Rough grade below-grade areas ready for further excavation or new
construction.
Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building
demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in
Section 02300 - Earthwork.
Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface,
free from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing
grades and new grades.
REPAIRS
A.
03798614
03/15
Promptly repair damage to adjacent buildings caused by demolition operations.
02221 - 6

Phase 2
3.10
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A.
B.
3.11
Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPAapproved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.
Do not burn demolished materials.
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building
demolition operations began.
1.
Clean roadways of debris caused by debris transport.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
02221 - 7

Phase 2
SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3
Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade.

Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.4

Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
1.
Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond
indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized
excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without
additional compensation.
Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs,
mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features
constructed above or below the ground surface.
Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an.
Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located
before beginning earth moving operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, SM, GC and SC
according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger
than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other
deleterious matter.
1.
Plasticity Index: Between 5 and 15.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 1

Phase 2
C.
Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT
according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.
1.
Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
3.2
EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A.
3.3
Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch.
If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and
removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for
inspections.
1.
Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim
bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A.
B.
3.5
Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of

surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may
include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
1.
If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil
materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A.
3.4
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused
by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth
moving operations.
Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.
Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove
temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.
Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water,
or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A.
03798614
03/15
Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom

elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top
elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used
when approved by Architect.
1.
Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed
by Architect.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 2

Phase 2
3.6
STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A.
3.7
SOIL FILL
A.
B.
3.8
Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1.
Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or
contain frost or ice.
2.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to
specified dry unit weight.
COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.10
Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so
fill material will bond with existing material.
Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1.
Under building slabs, use satisfactory soil material.
SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A.
3.9
Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without
intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent
windblown dust.
1.
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line
of remaining trees.
Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose
depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations,
and uniformly along the full length of each structure.
Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches
of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 96 percent modified
proctor.
1.
Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12
inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95
percent.
Do not use vibratory rollers for compaction.
GRADING
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes.
Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations
indicated.
Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent
ponding.
Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with
a 10-foot straightedge.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 3

Phase 2
3.11
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.
B.
C.
3.12
PROTECTION
A.
B.
C.
3.13
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to
perform tests and inspections.
Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed
with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply
with requirements.
When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to
depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion.
Keep free of trash and debris.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially
completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to
subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.
Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent
work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A.
Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash,
and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
EARTHWORK
02300 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with fly ash.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.5
Cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design,
placement procedures, and finishes.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4

Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
1.
Admixtures.
2.
Repair materials.
Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics
of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant
adjustments. Submitted compressive test results must be less than 6 months old.
1.
Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement,
prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement,
and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for
openings through concrete structures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar
in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1.
Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete
Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the
testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
1.
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
03300 - 1

Phase 2
D.
E.
1.6
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand
from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture
from the same manufacturer.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are
indicated:
1.
ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."
2.
ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.
Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.2
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
2.3
Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true,
and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of
joints.
1.
Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, earth, or another approved
material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1.
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced
plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to
prevent spalling of concrete on removal.
1.
Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter
in concrete surface.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A.
03798614
03/15
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, and spacers for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to
CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiberreinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:
1.
For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact
forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar
supports.
2.
Plastic, wood, concrete or clay blocks and other devices are not permissible.
03300 - 2

Phase 2
2.4
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
B.
2.5
ADMIXTURES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.6
Vapor Barrier (Under Slab): Shall conform to ASTM E 1745, Class A and shall have a
maximum water vapor permeance of 0.01 perms [grains/(ft2 * hr * in. Hg)] before and after
the mandatory conditioning tests ASTM E 154 Sections 8, 11, 12, and 13. Vapor barrier
component no less than 15 mils thick in accordance with ACI 302, 1R-96.
CURING MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.8
General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent watersoluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other
admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.
Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
VAPOR BARRIERS
A.
2.7
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II.

1.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C.
Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows:
1.
Class: Moderate weathering region, but not less than 3M.
2.
Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch.
3.
Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not more
than 18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except
that less than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 sieve, and
less than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for

application to fresh concrete. Dayton Superior Sure Film J-74 or equal.
Absorpative Cover AASHTO M 182, Class 2, Burlap Cloth made from Jute or Kenaf
weighing approximately 9 oz per sq. yards.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
sheet.
Water: Potable.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,
Class B, 18 to 22 percent solids.
REPAIR MATERIALS
A.
03798614
03/15
Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent
floor elevations.
1.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic
cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
2.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate,
conditions, and application.
03300 - 3

Phase 2
3.
B.
2.9
CONCRETE MIXES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.10
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as

recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
4.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109.
Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product
that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch.
1.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic
cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
2.
Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
3.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as
recommended by topping manufacturer.
4.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either
laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows:
1.
Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.
2.
For each design mix submitted that includes the use of fly ash, an alternate design
mix shall be submitted excluding fly ash. The alternate design mix shall be provided
for concrete placements that occur during cold weather as defined by ACI 306.1.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix
designs for the laboratory trial mix basis.
Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:
1.
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi.
2.
Minimum Slump: 3 inches.
3.
Maximum Slump: 5 inches.
4.
Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture:
8 inches after admixture is added to concrete with 2- to 4-inch slump.
5.
Maximum WaterCementitious Material Ratio: .55.
Retaining Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:
1.
Compressive Strength (28 days): 4000 psi.
2.
Minimum Slump: 3 inches.
3.
4.
Max Water-Cementitious Material Ratio: Cementitious material shall be 20% fly ash
by weight.
Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:
1.
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi.
2.
Minimum Slump: 3 inches
3.
4.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Material Ratio: 0.45.
5.
Cementitious material shall be 15% fly ash by weight.
Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floors. Do not allow entrapped air
content to exceed 3 percent.
Admixtures with chloride-ions are prohibited.
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A.
03798614
03/15
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

03300 - 4

Phase 2
2.11
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.
1.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time
from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce
mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
3.2
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support
vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied,
until concrete structure can support such loads.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as
follows:
1.
Class B, 1/4 inch.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces.
Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood
inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
1.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support
screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of
formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely
braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at
inconspicuous locations.
Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and
bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such
items.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,
and other debris just before placing concrete.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks
and maintain proper alignment.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's
written instructions, before placing reinforcement.
EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
03798614
03/15
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1.
Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required.
03300 - 5

Phase 2
3.3
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A.
B.
C.
3.4
SHORES AND RESHORES

A.
B.
3.5
Vapor Barrier: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643
and manufacturer's written instructions.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.7
Comply with ACI 318, ACI 301, and recommendations in ACI 347R for design,
installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.
Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and
provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
VAPOR BARRIER:
A.
3.6
General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that
does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less
than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not
be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are
maintained.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces.
Apply new form-release agent.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close
joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed
concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder
before placing concrete.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack
weld crossing reinforcing bars.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
All reinforcement to be in place prior to placing of concrete. Equipment will not be
allowed to drive over reinforcement.
JOINTS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1.
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement
through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
2.
Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead
forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into
concrete.
03300 - 6

Phase 2
3.
C.
D.
E.
3.8
Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least
one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:
1.
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and
finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction
joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete
surfaces.
2.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with early entry power saw. Cut 1/8-inchwide joints into concrete within 1 to 2 hours after the finishing process and before
final set.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at
slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1.
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one
length is required, lace or clip sections together.
Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at
joints where indicated.
1.
Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent
concrete bonding to one side of joint.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless
approved by Architect.
Before placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of
ACI 301.
1.
Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to
mix.
2.
Do not add water to concrete beyond the limit of water withheld from the plant.
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be
placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a
section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit
concrete to avoid segregation.
Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to
avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to
avoid cold joints.
1.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment
and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R.
2.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible
effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at
least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of
concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of
vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of
03300 - 7

Phase 2
F.
G.
H.
3.9
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A.
B.
3.10
reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to

segregate.
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within
limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1.
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2.
Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3.
Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4.
Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5.
Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and opentextured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or
bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before
starting finishing operations.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work
from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions,
or low temperatures.
1.
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly
heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of
not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
2.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and
as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist:
1.
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at
time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control
temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing
water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2.
Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not
exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie
holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections
exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly
across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is
small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low
03300 - 8

Phase 2
C.
3.11
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A.
B.
C.
3.12
spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth,
granular texture.
1.
Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to
floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing,
built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate
concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until
surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any
surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1.
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to
view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a
cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system
2.
Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled freestanding 10-foot- long straightedge, resting on two high spots and
placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following:
a.
Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 40; and levelness, F(L) 30; with
minimum local values of flatness F(F) 20; and of levelness, F(L) 15 for slabs.
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated,
after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend
with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or
required to complete Work.
Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections,
and terminations slightly rounded.
Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations
as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,
complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and
equipment.
CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with
recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
Formed surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by the
following method:
Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure floors and
slabs by the following method:
1.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends
lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not
less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period
using cover material and waterproof tape.
03300 - 9

Phase 2
3.13
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.
Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to
two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for
handling and placing.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface,
and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1.
Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more
than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth.
Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water,
and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching
mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or
cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2.
Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly
higher than surrounding surface.
3.
Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish
and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test
surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1.
Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2.
After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3.
Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish
repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4.
Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair
underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
5.
Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out
low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent
floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface.
6.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas
with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete
and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as
original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to
blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
03300 - 10

Phase 2
7.
E.
F.
3.14
Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust,
dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding
agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching
mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist
for at least 72 hours.
Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy
adhesive and patching mortar.
Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency
to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement.
Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article.
Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1.
Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each
concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each
additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.
2.
Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but
not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional
tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3.
Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;
ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for
each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each
concrete mix.
4.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite
sample.
5.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; cast and laboratory cure one set of four
standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
a.
Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
6.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test two laboratory-cured specimens at 7
days and two at 28 days.
a.
Test two field-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days.
b.
A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from
two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age
indicated.
7.
Testing specimens are to be taken after all admixtures and/or field added water has
been added and incorporated into concrete.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for
protecting and curing in-place concrete.
Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive
compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no
compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than
500 psi.
03300 - 11

Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor
within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and
inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28
days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of
break for both 7-and 28-day tests.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency
may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
03300 - 12

Phase 2
SECTION 04011
MASONRY CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi; 4 to 6 gpm; test for surface integrity.
A.
1.5
Cleaning stone surfaces.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.
Review methods and procedures related to cleaning masonry including, but not
limited to, the following:
a.
Verify masonry-cleaning equipment and facilities needed to make progress
and avoid delays.
b.
Materials, material application, and sequencing.
c.
Cleaning program.
d.
Coordination with building occupants.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Work Sequence: Perform masonry-cleaning work in the following sequence:

1.
Remove plant growth.
2.
Inspect for open mortar joints. Where repairs are required, delay further cleaning
work until after repairs are completed, cured, and dried to prevent the intrusion of
water and other cleaning materials into the wall.
3.
Remove paint.
4.
Clean masonry surfaces.
5.
Where water repellents are to be used on or near masonry, delay application of these
chemicals until after cleaning.
As scaffolding is removed, patch anchor holes used to attach scaffolding. Patch holes in
masonry units according to masonry repair Sections. Patch holes in mortar joints according
to masonry repointing Sections.
MASONRY CLEANING
04011 - 1

Phase 2
1.6
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
A.
B.
C.
1.8
Qualification Data: For paint-remover manufacturer and chemical-cleaner manufacturer.

Preconstruction Test Reports: For cleaning materials and methods.
Cleaning program.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
1.9
Product Data: For each type of product.

1.
Include material descriptions and application instructions.
2.
Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.
Chemical-Cleaner Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm regularly engaged in producing

masonry cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and
with factory-authorized service representatives who are available for consultation and
Project-site inspection, preconstruction product testing, and on-site assistance.
Cleaning Program: Prepare a written cleaning program that describes cleaning process in
detail, including materials, methods, and equipment to be used; protection of surrounding
materials; and control of runoff during operations. Include provisions for supervising
worker performance and preventing damage.
1.
If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for any phase of
cleaning work, add a written description of such materials and methods, including
evidence of successful use on comparable projects and demonstrations to show their
effectiveness for this Project.
Mockups: Prepare mockups of cleaning on existing surfaces to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Cleaning: Clean an area approximately 25 sq. ft. for each type of masonry and
surface condition.
a.
Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible
adverse reactions. Do not test cleaners and methods known to have
deleterious effect.
b.
Allow a waiting period of not less than seven days after completion of sample
cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions.
2.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A.
03798614
03/15
Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage one or more chemical-cleaner manufacturers to

perform preconstruction testing on masonry surfaces.
1.
Use test areas as indicated and representative of proposed materials and existing
construction.
2.
Propose changes to materials and methods to suit Project.
MASONRY CLEANING
04011 - 2

Phase 2
1.10
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
B.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit masonry-cleaning work to be performed according to product
manufacturers' written instructions and specified requirements.
Clean masonry surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and is predicted
to remain so for at least seven days after completion of cleaning.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CLEANING MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
2.2
Water: Potable.
Hot Water: Water heated to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F.
One-Part Limestone Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard one-part acidic formulation
for cleaning limestone.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Liquid Strippable Masking Agent: Manufacturer's standard liquid, film-forming, strippable

masking material for protecting glass, metal, glazed masonry, and polished stone surfaces
from damaging effects of acidic and alkaline masonry cleaners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PROTECTION
A.
3.2
Comply with each manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building and other
surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. Prevent paint removers and
chemical cleaning solutions from coming into contact with people, motor vehicles,
landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be harmed by such contact.
1.
Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist paint removers and
chemical cleaners used unless products being used will not damage adjacent
surfaces. Use protective materials that are waterproof and UV resistant. Apply
masking agents according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid
strippable masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed,
promptly remove masking to prevent adhesive staining.
2.
Do not apply chemical solutions during winds of enough force to spread them to
unprotected surfaces.
3.
Neutralize alkaline and acid wastes before disposal.
4.
Dispose of runoff from operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil
erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water
penetration into building interiors.
CLEANING MASONRY, GENERAL

A.
03798614
03/15
Cleaning Appearance Standard: Cleaned surfaces are to have a uniform appearance as

viewed from 20 feet away by Architect.
MASONRY CLEANING
04011 - 3

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.3
Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold
width and from one end of each elevation to the other. Ensure that dirty residues and rinse
water do not wash over dry, cleaned surfaces.
Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location.
1.
Brushes: Do not use wire brushes or brushes that are not resistant to chemical
cleaner being used.
2.
Spray Equipment: Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at
volume and pressure indicated, measured at nozzle. Adjust pressure and volume to
ensure that cleaning methods do not damage surfaces, including joints.
a.
Equip units with pressure gages.
b.
For chemical-cleaner spray application, use low-pressure tank or chemical
pump suitable for chemical cleaner indicated, equipped with nozzle having a
cone-shaped spray.
c.
For water-spray application, use fan-shaped spray that disperses water at an
angle of 25 to 50 degrees.
d.
For high-pressure water-spray application, use fan-shaped spray that disperses
water at an angle of at least 40 degrees.
e.
For heated water-spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining
temperature between 140 and 160 deg F at flow rates indicated.
f.
For steam application, use steam generator capable of delivering live steam at
nozzle.
Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all
surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect
without streaking or damaging masonry surfaces. Keep wall wet below area being cleaned
to prevent streaking from runoff.
Perform additional general cleaning, paint and stain removal, and spot cleaning of small
areas that are noticeably different when viewed according to the "Cleaning Appearance
Standard" Paragraph, so that cleaned surfaces blend smoothly into surrounding areas.
Chemical-Cleaner Application Methods: Apply chemical cleaners to masonry surfaces
according to chemical-cleaner manufacturer's written instructions; use brush application.
Do not allow chemicals to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each treated
area at each stage or scaffold setting. Periodically during each rinse, test pH of rinse water
running off of cleaned area to determine that chemical cleaner is completely removed.
1.
Apply neutralizing agent and repeat rinse if necessary to produce tested pH of
between 6.7 and 7.5.
After cleaning is complete, remove protection no longer required. Remove tape and
adhesive marks.
PRELIMINARY CLEANING
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Removing Plant Growth: Completely remove visible plant, moss, and shrub growth from
masonry surfaces. Carefully remove plants, creepers, and vegetation by cutting at roots and
allowing remaining growth to dry as long as possible before removal. Remove loose soil
and plant debris from open joints to whatever depth they occur.
Preliminary Cleaning: Before beginning general cleaning, remove extraneous substances
that are resistant to planned cleaning methods. Extraneous substances include paint,
calking, asphalt, and tar.
MASONRY CLEANING
04011 - 4

Phase 2
3.4
CLEANING MASONRY
A.
3.5

A.
3.6
One-Part Limestone Chemical Cleaning:

1.
Wet surface with cold water applied by low-pressure spray.
2.
Apply cleaner to surface by brush.
3.
Let cleaner remain on surface for period recommended in writing by chemicalcleaner manufacturer.
4.
Immediately repeat application of one-part limestone cleaner as indicated above
over the same area.
5.
Rinse with cold water applied by medium-pressure spray to remove chemicals and
soil.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage chemical-cleaner manufacturer's factory-authorized

service representatives for consultation and Project-site inspection, to perform
preconstruction product testing, and provide on-site assistance when requested by
Architect. Have chemical-cleaner manufacturer's factory-authorized service representatives
visit Project site not less than once to observe progress and quality of the work.
FINAL CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
Clean adjacent nonmasonry surfaces of spillage and debris. Use detergent and soft brushes
or cloths.
Remove debris from gutters and downspouts. Rinse off roof and flush gutters and
downspouts.
Remove masking materials, leaving no residues that could trap dirt.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
MASONRY CLEANING
04011 - 5

Phase 2
SECTION 04220
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
A.
1.7
Section 07190 - Water Repellents: Water repellents applied to unit masonry assemblies.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.6
Cast-stone cap in concrete unit masonry.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.5
Concrete masonry units; exterior screen wall.

Mortar and grout.
Steel reinforcing bars.
Masonry-joint reinforcement.
Masonry-cell fill.
PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION

A.
1.4

ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15

Shop Drawings: For the following:
1.
Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
2.
Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry
reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315.
Samples for Initial Selection:
1.
Decorative CMUs, in the form of small-scale units.
2.
Pre-faced CMUs.
3.
Colored mortar.
Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:
1.
Split face CMUs.
2.
Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used
on Project.
04220 - 1

Phase 2
1.8
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.9
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.10
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.11
Qualification Data: For testing agency.

Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:
1.
Masonry Units: Include data on material properties.
2.
Integral water repellant used in CMUs.
3.
Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type.
4.
Mortar admixtures.
5.
Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
6.
Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
7.
Reinforcing bars.
Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and
proportions of ingredients.
1.
Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification.
Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506
for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content.
2.
Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply
with compressive strength requirement.
Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit
type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of
masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry
determined according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials,
and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.
Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If
units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do
not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry
mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered
weatherproof dispensing silos.
Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation
of dirt and oil.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Protection of Masonry: Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in

progress.
Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at
least three days after building masonry walls or columns.
04220 - 2

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be
left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact
with such masonry.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated
with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry
damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
1.
Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is
40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than
seven days after completing cleaning.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained
in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
2.2
A.
2.3
Provide unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days.
1.
Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area
compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method)
according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
2.
Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms
according to ASTM C 1314.
UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A.
B.
2.4
Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture
and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from
single source from single manufacturer for each product required.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.
Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 except as modified by

requirements in the Contract Documents.
Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of
units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units
where such defects are exposed in the completed Work and will be within 20 feet
vertically and horizontally of a walking surface.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed
faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent.
1.
Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that
does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent,
when tested according to ASTM E 514/E 514M as a wall assembly made with
04220 - 3

Phase 2
C.
2.5
mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test

period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test
specimen.
CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1.
Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area
compressive strength of 3050 psi.
2.
Density Classification: Normal weight.
3.
Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less-than-nominal dimensions.
4.
Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by
Architect's sample (split face).
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
03798614
03/15
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for
cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce
mortar color indicated.
1.
Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to
ASTM C 114.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime
containing no other ingredients.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M.
Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329/C 1329M.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for
use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a
record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime
and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other
ingredients.
1.
Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as
selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
2.
Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1.
For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand
or crushed stone.
2.
For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the
No. 16 sieve.
3.
White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
4.
Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to
produce required mortar color.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying
with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in
masonry mortar of composition indicated.
Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with
CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.
Water: Potable.
04220 - 4

Phase 2
2.6
REINFORCEMENT
A.
B.
C.
2.7
EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A.
2.8
Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking
CMU web covers made from UV-resistant, high-density polyethylene. Cell flashing pans
have integral weep spouts designed to be suilt into mortar bed joints and that extend into
the cell to prevent clogging with mortar.
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A.
B.
2.9
Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M,
Grade 60.
Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning
masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from
0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for
number of bars indicated.
Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: Ladder type complying with ASTM A 951/
A 951M.
1.
Exterior Walls: Stainless steel.
2.
Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.
3.
Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.
4.
Spacing of Cross Rods: Not more than 16 inches o.c.
5.
Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.
Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from
neoprene.
Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I
(No. 15 asphalt felt).
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2.
Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3.
For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar.
4.
For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar.
5.
Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed
to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend
ingredients before delivering to Project site.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide
the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.
1.
For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.
2.
For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
3.
For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet
walls; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
04220 - 5

Phase 2
D.
E.
Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product.

1.
2.
Mix to match Architect's sample.
3.
Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following
units:
a.
Split face CMUs.
Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1.
Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)
that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
2.
Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified
28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.
3.
Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
3.3
Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions
detrimental to performance of the Work.
2.
Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3.
Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
4.
Verify that substrates are free of substances that would impair mortar bond.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.
Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean,
sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is
specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
TOLERANCES
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1.
For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch
or minus 1/4 inch.
2.
For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus
or minus 1/2 inch.
3.
For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than
plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
Lines and Levels:
1.
For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than
1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
04220 - 6

Phase 2
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
3.4
For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not
vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch
maximum.
For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in
10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in
10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,
For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than
For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by
more than 1/16 inch.
Joints:
1.
For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.
2.
For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by
more than 1/8 inch.
3.
For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus
3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.
4.
For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/8 inch.
LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
03798614
03/15
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and
offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where
possible, at other locations.
Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
bond pattern indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch
horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not
less than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use
units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those
in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to
receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before
laying fresh masonry.
Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise
indicated.
Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of
metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.
Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts,
and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
04220 - 7

Phase 2
3.5
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.6
MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.7
Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1.
Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2.
Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3.
Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
4.
Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings
where cells are not grouted.
Lay solid CMUs with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush
head joints.
Set cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor,
and similar holes.
1.
Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with
clear water.
2.
Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.
3.
Rake out mortar joints for pointing with sealant.
Rake out mortar joints at pre-faced CMUs to a uniform depth of 1/4 inch and point with
epoxy mortar to comply with epoxy-mortar manufacturer's written instructions.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other
than paint) unless otherwise indicated.
Cut joints flush where indicated to receive waterproofing unless otherwise indicated.
General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of
5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of
6 inches.
1.
Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.
2.
Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet
walls.
3.
Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and
extending 12 inches beyond openings, in addition to continuous reinforcement.
Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners,
returns, offsets, and other special conditions.
ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

A.
03798614
03/15
Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces structural
steel or concrete, to comply with the following:
1.
Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and structural
steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and
other rigid materials.
2.
Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.
3.
Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches
o.c. horizontally.
04220 - 8

Phase 2
3.8
CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A.
B.
3.9
FLASHING
A.
B.
3.10
General: Install embedded flashing at ledges and other obstructions to downward flow of
water in wall where indicated.
Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to
comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned
edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned
with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell
pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell.
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A.
B.
C.
3.11
General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry

progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision
to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.
Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:
1.
Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control
joint. Fill resultant core with grout, and rake out joints in exposed faces for
application of sealant.
2.
Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3.
Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at
joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar, or rake out joint for application of
sealant.
4.
Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints, and remove filler when unit
masonry is complete for application of sealant.
Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1.
Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as
indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout.
Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and
curing of reinforced masonry.
2.
Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them
during construction.
Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
enough strength to resist grout pressure.
1.
Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for
grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2.
Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.

A.
03798614
03/15
Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and
inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as
needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with
specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
04220 - 9

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.12
REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.13
Inspections: Special inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.

1.
Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of siteprepared mortar.
2.
Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of
grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
3.
Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each wall area or portion thereof.
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140
for compressive strength.
Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according
to ASTM C 780.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.
Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.
Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 7 days
and at 28 days.
Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units;
install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
where indicated.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as
follows:
1.
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
2.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before
proceeding with cleaning of masonry.
3.
Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by
covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and
waterproof masking tape.
4.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5.
Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in
NCMA TEK 8-4A.
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A.
03798614
03/15
Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are

Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
04220 - 10

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soilcontaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with
fill material as fill is placed.
1.
Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension.
2.
Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of
masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 02300 - Earthwork.
3.
Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.
Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for
recycling.
Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's
property.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
04220 - 11

Phase 2
SECTION 04720
CAST STONE MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
B.
C.
D.

1.
For cast-stone units, include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions
of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast-stone units. Include
dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished
faces.
1.
Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and
anchors.
Samples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar.
Samples for Verification:
1.
For color and texture of cast stone required, 6 inches square in size.
2.
For colored mortar, make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be
used on Project.
A.
B.
1.6
Section 04220 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Installing cast-stone units in unit masonry.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Cast-stone trim including wall caps.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

Qualification Data: Include copies of material test reports for completed projects,
indicating compliance of cast stone with ASTM C 1364.
Material Test Reports: For mix required to produce cast stone, based on testing according
to ASTM C 1364, including test for resistance to freezing and thawing.
1.
Provide test reports based on testing within previous two years.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast-stone units similar to those

indicated for this Project, that has sufficient production capacity to manufacture required
units, and is a plant certified by the Cast Stone Institute, the Architectural Precast
Association, or the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute for Group A, Category AT.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
CAST STONE MASONRY
04720 - 1

Phase 2
1.7

A.
B.
C.
D.
1.8
Coordinate delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to avoid delaying the Work and
to minimize the need for on-site storage.
Pack, handle, and ship cast-stone units in suitable packs or pallets.
1.
Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining.
Move cast-stone units if required, using dollies with wood supports.
2.
Store cast-stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers,
securely tied. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units.
Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do
not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained
and contamination can be avoided.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated

with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
1.
Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is
40 deg F and above and will remain so until cast stone has dried, but no fewer than
seven days after completing cleaning.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements in
TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
2.2
Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast-stone units from single source from single
manufacturer.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one
source or producer for each aggregate.
CAST-STONE MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
General: Comply with ASTM C 1364.

Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type III, containing not more than 0.60
percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. Provide natural color or white
cement as required to produce cast-stone color indicated.
Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33/C 33M;
gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast-stone textures and colors.
Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33/C 33M,
gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast-stone textures and colors.
Color Pigment: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored waterreducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime
and other alkalis.
CAST STONE MASONRY
04720 - 2

Phase 2
F.
G.
H.
2.3
Admixtures: Use only admixtures specified or approved in writing by Architect.

1.
Do not use admixtures that contain more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride
ions by mass of cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium
chloride.
2.
Use only admixtures that are certified by manufacturer to be compatible with cement
and other admixtures used.
3.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.
Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60.
Use galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of
cast-stone material.
1.
Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775/A 775M.
2.
Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767/A 767M.
Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with
ASTM A 666, Type 304.
CAST-STONE UNITS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
Cast-Stone Units: Comply with ASTM C 1364.

1.
Units shall be manufactured using the wet-cast method.
2.
Units shall be resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing
according to ASTM C 666/C 666M, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364.
Fabricate units with sharp arris and accurately reproduced details, with indicated texture on
all exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12 to drain unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs.
3.
Provide drips on projecting elements unless otherwise indicated.
Fabrication Tolerances:
1.
Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than
1/8 inch.
2.
Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of
the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, but in no case by more than
1/4 inch.
3.
Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch,
whichever is greater.
4.
Location of Grooves, False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not
vary from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch on formed surfaces of units and
3/8 inch on unformed surfaces.
Cure Units as Follows:
1.
Cure units in enclosed, moist curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity and
temperature of 100 deg F for 12 hours or 70 deg F for 16 hours.
2.
Keep units damp and continue curing to comply with one of the following:
a.
No fewer than five days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F or above.
b.
No fewer than six days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F or above.
c.
No fewer than seven days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F or above.
d.
No fewer than eight days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F or above.
Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view.
Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Colors and Textures: Provide units with fine-grained texture and buff color resembling
sand-rubbed Indiana limestone.
CAST STONE MASONRY
04720 - 3

Phase 2
H.
2.4
MORTAR MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.5
Provide mortar materials that comply with Section 04220 - Concrete Unit Masonry.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for
cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce
mortar color indicated.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime
containing no other ingredients.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for
use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a
record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime
and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other
ingredients.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1.
For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand
or crushed stone.
2.
For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the
No. 16 sieve.
3.
White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
4.
Colored Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce
required mortar color.
Water: Potable.
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
2.6
Colors and Textures: Provide units with fine texture and red-brown color resembling
brownstone on adjacent buildings.
Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel complying with
ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666.
Dowels: 1/2-inch-diameter round bars, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel complying
with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666.
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for
removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new
masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly
approved for intended use by cast-stone manufacturer and expressly approved by cleaner
manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials.
MORTAR MIXES
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Comply with requirements in Section 04220 - Concrete Unit Masonry for mortar mixes.
Do not use admixtures including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,
water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2.
Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.
CAST STONE MASONRY
04720 - 4

Phase 2
C.
D.
2.7
Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.

1.
For setting mortar, use Type S.
2.
For pointing mortar, use Type N.
Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product.
1.
2.
Mix to match Architect's sample.
3.
Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample and test cast-stone units
according to ASTM C 1364.
1.
Include one test for resistance to freezing and thawing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
Install cast-stone units to comply with requirements in Section 04220 - Concrete Unit
Masonry.
Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated, with
edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.
1.
Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to
secure units in place.
2.
Coordinate installation of cast stone with installation of flashing specified in other
Sections.
Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar.
Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Set units with joints 1/4 to 3/8 inch wide unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set.
3.
Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar.
4.
Fill collar joints solid as units are set.
5.
Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set.
6.
Keep head joints in copings and between other units with exposed horizontal
surfaces open to receive sealant.
Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch. Rake joints to
uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess
mortar as joints are raked.
Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch.
Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying
next layer.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard. Use a smooth plastic jointer
larger than joint thickness.
CAST STONE MASONRY
04720 - 5

Phase 2
H.
I.
J.
3.3
SETTING ANCHORED CAST STONE WITH SEALANT-FILLED JOINTS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.4
Rake out joints for pointing with sealant to depths of not less than 3/4 inch. Scrub faces of
units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked.
Point joints with sealant to comply with applicable requirements in Section 07900 - Joint
Sealers.
1.
Prime cast-stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in
joints before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated.
Provide sealant joints at head joints of copings and other horizontal surfaces; at expansion,
control, and pressure-relieving joints; and at locations indicated.
1.
Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.
2.
Build in compressible foam-plastic joint fillers where indicated.
3.
Form joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch.
4.
Prime cast-stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in
joints before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with
applicable requirements in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated, with
edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.
1.
Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to
secure units in place.
2.
Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set cast stone in locations
indicated with uniform joints.
Keep cavities open where unfilled space is indicated between back of cast-stone units and
backup wall; do not fill cavities with mortar or grout.
Fill anchor holes with sealant.
1.
Where dowel holes occur at pressure-relieving joints, provide compressible material
at ends of dowels.
Set cast stone supported on clip or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use
material of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths. Hold shims back from face
of cast stone a distance at least equal to width of joint.
Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. Remove temporary shims and spacers
from joints after anchors and supports are secured in place and cast-stone units are
anchored. Do not begin sealant installation until temporary shims and spacers are removed.
1.
Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch.
Prime cast-stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints
before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated.
Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable
requirements in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch
maximum.
Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch (12
mm) maximum.
Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or
one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.
CAST STONE MASONRY
04720 - 6

Phase 2
D.
3.5
Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment
with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than
1/16 inch, except where variation is due to warpage of units within tolerances specified.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A.
B.
C.
D.
Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved
Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.
Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying
with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses.
1.
Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
2.
Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as
follows:
1.
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
2.
Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison
purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with
cleaning of cast stone.
3.
Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid
strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
4.
Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
5.
Clean cast stone by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA
Technical Notes 20.
6.
Clean cast stone with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
CAST STONE MASONRY
04720 - 7

Phase 2
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3
B.
Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract

Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads
indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.
1.
Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360.
2.
Use ASD; data are given at service-load level.
Construction: Braced frame and shear wall system.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of

Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
A.
1.6
Section 05310 - Steel Deck: For field installation of shear connectors through deck.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.5
Structural steel.
Grout.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1.
Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2.
Include embedment drawings.
3.
Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field
welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to
be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
4.
Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.
A.
03798614
03/15
Welding certificates.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 1

Phase 2
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.9

A.
B.
1.10
Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality
Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.
Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical
welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by
AWS D1.8. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for
welding personnel qualification.
Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1.
AISC 303.
2.
AISC 341 and AISC 341s1.
3.
AISC 360.
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members
off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect
steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
1.
Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage,
or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged
materials or structures as directed.
Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
1.
Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with
paint and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and
topcoats are compatible with one another.
Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other
construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates,
instructions, and directions for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

Channels, Angles, Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Plate: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 2

Phase 2
2.2
BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A.
B.
C.
2.3
PRIMER
A.
2.4
Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer

complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
GROUT
A.
2.5
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural
bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1,
hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.
Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
1.
Configuration: Straight.
2.
Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.
3.
Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
4.
Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
5.
Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1.
Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.
2.
Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened.
3.
Finish: Plain.
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable
for application and a 30-minute working time.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
03798614
03/15
Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and
AISC 360.
1.
Camber structural-steel members where indicated.
2.
Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.
3.
Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain
markings until structural steel has been erected.
4.
Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
5.
Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting
shop-priming operations.
Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1.
Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing
loads.
Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPCSP3 Power Tool Cleaning.
Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work
to pass through steel framing members.
1.
Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt
holes or enlarge holes by burning.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 3

Phase 2
2.
3.
2.6
SHOP CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
2.7
High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification

for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1.
Joint Type: Snug tightened.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment
of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.
SHOP PRIMING
A.
B.
C.
2.8
Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular
to steel surfaces.
Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other
work.
Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1.
Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches.
2.
Surfaces to be field welded.
3.
Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4.
Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).
5.
Galvanized surfaces.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications
and standards:
1.
SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film
thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners,
edges, and exposed surfaces.
1.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2.
Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or
erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

A.
03798614
03/15
Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform shop test and inspections and prepare test reports as required by the 2006
International Building Code, Chapter 17: Structural Test and Special Instructions.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 4

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep
structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and
loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent
structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
ERECTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.4
Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces
and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with
requirements.
1.
Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other
embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.
Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC 303 and AISC 360.
Base Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing
materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
1.
Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2.
Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.
3.
Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and
plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge
of plate before packing with grout.
4.
Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.
Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with
manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice
for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will
be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1.
Level and plumb individual members of structure.
Splice members only where indicated.
Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that
must be enlarged to admit bolts.
FIELD CONNECTIONS
A.
03798614
03/15
High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1.
Joint Type: Snug tightened.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 5

Phase 2
B.
3.5

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.6
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of
temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
2.
Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.
3.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment
of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges" for mill material.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency
to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connection as required by the 2006
International Building Code, Chapter 17: Structural Test and Special Instructions.
Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/
D1.1M.
1.
In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's
option:
a.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
b.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be
accepted.
c.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
d.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply
with the Contract Documents.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is
damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply
with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3
power-tool cleaning.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 6

Phase 2
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
1.3
C.
Loose steel lintels.

Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated
to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not
specified in other Sections.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.5
Steel framing and supports for countertops.

Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions.
Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in
other Sections.
Elevator machine beams, hoist beams, and divider beams.
Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills.
Prefabricated building columns.
Shelf angles.
Metal ladders.
Elevator pit sump covers.
Metal bollards.
Metal downspout boots.
Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other
Sections.
PRODUCTS FURNISHED, BUT NOT INSTALLED, UNDER THIS SECTION

A.
B.
1.4

Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slottedchannel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.
Section 04220 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other
items built into unit masonry.
Section 05120 - Structural Steel.
COORDINATION
A.
03798614
03/15
paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 1

Phase 2
B.
1.6
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.7
Product Data: For the following:

1.
Metal nosings and treads.
2.
Paint products.
3.
Grout.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations,
sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and
accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:
1.
Steel framing and supports for countertops.
2.
Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions.
3.
Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
4.
Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not
specified in other Sections.
5.
Elevator machine beams, hoist beams, and divider beams.
6.
Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills.
7.
Shelf angles.
8.
Metal ladders.
9.
Elevator pit sump covers.
10. Metal bollards.
11. Metal downspout boots.
12. Loose steel lintels.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.8
Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including
sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be
embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop
primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/

D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
3.
AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 2

Phase 2
1.9
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous
with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
2.2
METALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
2.3
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01450 Quality Control, to design ladders.
Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders, including landings,
shall withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions
specified in ANSI A14.3.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1.
Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive material metallically bonded to
steel.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise
indicated.
Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.
FASTENERS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior
use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941,
Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
1.
Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
2.
Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
3.
Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.
4.
Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.
Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 3

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.4
Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563, Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers.
Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,
ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy
Group 1.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563;
and, where indicated, flat washers.
1.
Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times
the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
Cast-In-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip
galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors.
1.
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy
Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts)
complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or
studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary
filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
03798614
03/15
Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09911 - Exterior Painting and
Section 09912 - Interior Painting.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
1.
Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich
primer.
Water-Based Primer: Emulsion type, anticorrosive primer for mildly corrosive
environments that is resistant to flash rusting when applied to cleaned steel, complying
with MPI#107 and compatible with topcoat.
Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated
metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/
D 1187M.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous
grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended
by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 4

Phase 2
I.
2.5
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2.6
Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete for

normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of
3000 psi.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble
units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas
on exposed surfaces.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3.
Remove welding flux immediately.
4.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so
no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of
adjacent surface.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware,
screws, and similar items.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space
anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated
loads.
Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch
embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and
24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction.
1.
Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
2.
Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes indicated
with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill or punch bottom
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 5

Phase 2
D.
E.
2.7
SHELF ANGLES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.8
Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete
framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than
6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Provide mitered and welded units at corners.
2.
Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint
approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.
For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry
and concrete.
Galvanize and prime shelf angles located in exterior walls.
Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to castin-place concrete.
METAL LADDERS
A.
B.
2.9
flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on
operable partition Shop Drawings.
Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.
General:
1.
Comply with ANSI A14.3, except for elevator pit ladders.
2.
For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
Steel Ladders:
1.
Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.
3.
Rungs: 3/4-inch-diameter steel bars.
4.
Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
5.
Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminumoxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung
filled with aluminum-oxide grout.
6.
Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material
metallically bonded to rung.
7.
Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from welded or pressure-locked steel bar
grating, supported by steel angles. Limit openings in gratings to no more than
1/2 inch in least dimension.
8.
Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded
or bolted steel brackets.
9.
Galvanize and prime ladders, including brackets.
10. Prime ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.
METAL FLOOR PLATE

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Fabricate from rolled-steel floor plate of thickness indicated below:

1.
Thickness: As indicated.
Provide grating sections where indicated fabricated from welded or pressure-locked steel
bar grating. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch in least dimension.
Provide steel angle supports as indicated.
Include steel angle stiffeners, and fixed and removable sections as indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 6

Phase 2
E.
2.10
ELEVATOR PIT SUMP COVERS

A.
B.
C.
2.11
B.
C.
D.
Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles
shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use
concealed field splices where possible.
Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation
with other work.
1.
Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or
masonry construction.
Galvanize and prime miscellaneous steel trim.
Prime miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer.
METAL BOLLARDS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.13
Fabricate from 1/8-inch rolled-steel floor plate with four 1-inch-diameter holes for water
drainage and for lifting.
Fabricate from welded or pressure-locked steel bar grating Limit openings in gratings to no
more than 1/2 inch in least dimension.
Provide steel angle supports as indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A.
2.12
Provide flush steel bar drop handles for lifting removable sections, one at each end of each
section.
Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe steel shapes, as indicated.
1.
Cap bollards with 1/4-inch-thick steel plate.
2.
Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide cutouts
for controls and holes for wire.
3.
Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide cutouts for fixtures
and holes for wire.
Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch-thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill
baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch anchor bolts.
1.
Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for
plumb alignment of bollards.
Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch-thick steel plate
welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger
than OD of bollard.
Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 1/4-inch
wall-thickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1/16 inch less than ID of bollards.
Match drill sleeve and bollard for 3/4-inch steel machine bolt.
Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.
METAL DOWNSPOUT BOOTS

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Provide downspout boots made from cast iron in heights indicated with inlets of size and
shape to suit downspouts. Provide units with flanges and holes for countersunk anchor
bolts.
1.
Outlet: At 35 degrees from horizontal, to discharge onto splash block or pavement.
Prime cast-iron downspout boots with zinc-rich primer.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 7

Phase 2
2.14
LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A.
B.
C.
2.15
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.16
Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported
from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no
fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
B.
2.18
Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths
for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a
single unit where indicated.
Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear
span, but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated.
Galvanize and prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A.
2.17
Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
Galvanize plates.
Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into
surrounding surface.
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M
for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron
products.
1.
Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean
railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate
process.
Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be
embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated
below:
1.
Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2.
Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
3.
Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance
Coatings: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
4.
Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 8

Phase 2
E.
2.19
Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
B.
As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M12.

Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, AA-M12C22A41.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.2
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;
with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established
lines and levels.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that
are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size
limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so
no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of
adjacent surface.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners
for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood
screws, and other connectors.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:
1.
Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.
2.
Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.
INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being
supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on
Shop Drawings.
Anchor supports for ceiling hung equipment securely to, and rigidly brace from, building
structure.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 9

Phase 2
C.
D.
3.3
INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.4
C.
Center nosings on tread widths unless otherwise indicated.

For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and
level with tread surfaces.
Seal thresholds exposed to exterior with elastomeric sealant complying with Section 07900
- Joint Sealers to provide a watertight installation.
INSTALLING CAST-IRON WHEEL GUARDS

A.
3.6
Anchor bollards to existing construction with anchor bolts. Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at
each bollard unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Embed anchor bolts at least 4 inches in concrete.
Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill
annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink grout; mixed and placed to comply
with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch
toward bollard.
Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches
above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support
and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.
Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
INSTALLING NOSINGS, TREADS, AND THRESHOLDS

A.
B.
3.5
Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure
girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through
top plates of pipe columns.
1.
Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on
concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates"
Article.
Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout
column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
1.
Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and
leveled.
Anchor wheel guards to concrete or masonry construction to comply with manufacturer's

written instructions. Fill cores solidly with concrete.
INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members
have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims
but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink
grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids
remain.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 10

Phase 2
3.7

A.
B.
C.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09911 - Exterior Painting.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 11

Phase 2
SECTION 05511
METAL PAN STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3
B.
C.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts,
and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they do not encroach
on required stair width and are within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.6
Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete fill for stair treads and platforms.
Section 05521 - Pipe and Tube Railings: Pipe and tube railings.
Section 05731- Glazed Decorative Metal Railings.
COORDINATION
A.
1.5
Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads.

Handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.4

Product Data: For metal pan stairs and the following:

1.
Prefilled metal-pan-stair treads.
2.
Abrasive nosings.
3.
Paint products.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of nosing.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs and railings, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
METAL PAN STAIRS
05511 - 1

Phase 2
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

1.
2.
AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
2.2
METALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.3
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01450 Quality Control, to design stairs and railings.
Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft.
2.
Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.
3.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
4.
Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in
addition to loads specified above.
5.
Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch,
whichever is less.
Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.
b.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
c.
2.
Infill of Guards:
a.
Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
b.
Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed).
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
ABRASIVE NOSINGS
A.
03798614
03/15
Extruded Units: Aluminum units with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon
carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder. Fabricate units in lengths
necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions.
1.
Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16 inch above aluminum
extrusion.
METAL PAN STAIRS
05511 - 2

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
2.4
FASTENERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.5
General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior
walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563;
and, where indicated, flat washers.
1.
Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for stairs
indicated to be shop primed with zinc-rich primer.
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining,
without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry
and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
2.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.6
2.
Provide solid-abrasive-type units without ribs.
3.
Nosings: Square-back units, 1-7/8 inches wide, without lip.
Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as
standard with manufacturer.
Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units set into concrete.
Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units set into concrete.

1.
primer.
D 1187M.
Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 03300 - Cast-InPlace Concrete for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum
28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.
Nonslip-Aggregate Concrete Finish: Factory-packaged abrasive aggregate made from
fused, aluminum-oxide grits or crushed emery; rustproof and nonglazing; unaffected by
freezing, moisture, or cleaning materials.
PRECAST CONCRETE TREADS

A.
03798614
03/15
Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete for normal-weight, ready-mixed concrete with a minimum 28-day
METAL PAN STAIRS
05511 - 3

Phase 2
B.
2.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.8
compressive strength of 5000 psi and a total air content of not less than 4 percent or more
than 6 percent.
Reinforcement: Galvanized, welded wire reinforcement, 2 by 2 inches by 0.062-inchdiameter wire; comply with ASTM A 185/A 185M and ASTM A 82/A 82M, except for
minimum wire size.
Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips,
brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and
platforms on supporting structure.
1.
Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly
and coordinated installation.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
Weld connections to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.
5.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's
"Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld with
spatter removed.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)
screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for
Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Commercial Class,
unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
Stair Framing:
1.
Fabricate stringers of steel channels.
a.
Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.
2.
Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as
indicated.
3.
Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers.
4.
Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts
to support landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger rods and
struts where they do not encroach on required stair width and are within the fireresistance-rated stair enclosure.
METAL PAN STAIRS
05511 - 4

Phase 2
5.
C.
2.9
Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts
designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.
Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown
from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less
than 0.067 inch.
1.
Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Steel Sheet: Galvanized-steel sheet, where indicated.
3.
Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they
are concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers.
4.
Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars.
Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or
bolting.
5.
Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser.
6.
Attach abrasive nosings to risers.
7.
At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal pan subtreads filled with
reinforced concrete during fabrication.
8.
Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as
subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing.
a.
Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with flat metal under
surfaces to produce smooth soffits.
STAIR RAILINGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
Comply with applicable requirements in Section 05521 - Pipe and Tube Railings and
Section 05731 - Glazed Decorative Metal Railings.
1.
Rails may be bent at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using
prefabricated fittings.
2.
Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.
Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post
spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.
1.
Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch-diameter top and bottom rails and 1-1/2-inch-square
posts.
Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at
connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around
at connections, including at fittings.
1.
Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for
Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint as shown in NAAMM AMP 521.
Form changes in direction of railings as follows:
1.
As detailed.
2.
By bending.
3.
By flush bends.
4.
By radius bends of radius indicated.
For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each
repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend
without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of
components.
Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close
ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.
METAL PAN STAIRS
05511 - 5

Phase 2
H.
I.
J.
2.10
Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.

Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to
other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or
masonry work.
1.
For galvanized railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and
other ferrous-metal components.
2.
For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,
fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and
concrete construction.
3.
Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded
hanger bolt and that provides 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to
finished wall surface.
Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material,
where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports.
Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent
bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate.
FINISHES
A.
B.
C.
D.
Finish metal stairs after assembly.

Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M
for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron
products.
1.
adhesion.
2.
Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field,
and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLING METAL PAN STAIRS

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where

necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for
concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from
established lines and levels and free of rack.
Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into
concrete unless otherwise indicated.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
METAL PAN STAIRS
05511 - 6

Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.2
INSTALLING RAILINGS
A.
B.
3.3
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that
are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size
limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.
Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 03300 - CastIn-Place Concrete.
1.
Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. Center nosings on
tread width.
Install precast concrete treads with adhesive supplied by manufacturer.
Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb
posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:
1.
Anchor posts to steel by welding to steel supporting members.
2.
Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to
rail ends and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts.
Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not
indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building
construction as required to comply with performance requirements and as follows:
1.
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and
hanger or lag bolts.
2.
For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3.
For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing
between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.
4.
For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardanttreated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate
backing members.
5.
For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to
concealed steel reinforcements.
6.
For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel
framing or through concealed steel reinforcements.

A.
B.
C.
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09911 - Exterior Painting and
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
METAL PAN STAIRS
05511 - 7

Phase 2
SECTION 05521
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Section 05511 - Metal Pan Stairs: Steel tube railings associated with metal pan stairs.
Section 05731 - Glazed Decorative Metal Railings: Ornamental railings fabricated from
pipes and tubes.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
C.
1.5
Steel pipe railings.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
1.4

Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such
items to Project site in time for installation.
Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not
support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance
requirements.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15

1.
Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
2.
Railing brackets.
3.
Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
1.
Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top
rails, posts, and balusters.
2.
Fittings and brackets.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
05521 - 1

Phase 2
1.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.8

1.
2.
3.

A.
1.9
Qualification Data: For testing agency.

Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified testing
agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
2.2
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01450 Quality Control, to design railings, including attachment to building construction.
Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall
withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and
under conditions indicated:
1.
a.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.
b.
c.
changes.
1.
METALS, GENERAL
A.
03798614
03/15
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
05521 - 2

Phase 2
B.
2.3
STEEL AND IRON

A.
B.
C.
2.4
B.
C.
Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and
finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and
durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form
required.
Extruded Bars and Tubing: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52.
Castings: ASTM B 26/26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.
STAINLESS STEEL
A.
B.
2.6
Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed).

Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40),
unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
1.
Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
ALUMINUM
A.
2.5
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish
as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded
hanger bolt and that provides 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to
finished wall surface.
Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304.
FASTENERS
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
General: Provide the following:

1.
Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.
2.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel
fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.
3.
Aluminum Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
4.
Stainless-Steel Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
5.
Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and
texture, of railings.
Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade,
and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
1.
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard
fastening method for railings indicated.
3.
Provide square or hex socket flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless
05521 - 3

Phase 2
D.
2.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.8
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining,

without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry
and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with
2.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
1.
For aluminum and stainless-steel railings, provide type and alloy as recommended
by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and
compatibility in fabricated items.
Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
1.
primer.
Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Section 09911 Exterior Painting and Section 09912 - Interior Painting.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
03798614
03/15
General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark
units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural
value of joined pieces.
Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items.
Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1.
05521 - 4

Phase 2
2.
3.
4.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
2.9

Remove flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining
surfaces.
Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with
concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard
system of sleeve and socket fittings.
Form Changes in Direction as Follows:
1.
As detailed.
For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each
repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend
without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of
components.
Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close
ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous
fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide
crush-resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to
structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with
inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal
plate forming bottom closure.
Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge
of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Galvanized Railings:
1.
Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
2.
Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
3.
Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
4.
adhesion.
5.
Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves,
and other ferrous components.
Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean
railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
For nongalvanized-steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,
fasteners, and sleeves; however, galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or
masonry.
05521 - 5

Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
2.10
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
B.
C.
2.11
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
requirements indicated below:
1.
Exterior Railings: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2.
Railings Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
3.
Other Railings: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance
Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be
embedded in concrete or masonry.
1.
Shop prime uncoated railings with universal shop primer.
2.
Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.
Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Section 09911 - Exterior Painting.
1.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
Mill Finish: AA-M12, nonspecular as fabricated.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41.
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish
indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
180-Grit Polished Finish: Oil-ground, uniform, directionally textured finish.
320-Grit Polished Finish: Oil-ground, uniform, fine, directionally textured finish.
Polished and Buffed Finish: Oil-ground, 180-grit finish followed by buffing.
Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
03798614
03/15
Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to
verify that locations of concealed reinforcements are clearly marked for Installer. Locate
reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
05521 - 6

Phase 2
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
RAILING CONNECTIONS
A.
3.4
Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately
in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free
of rack.
1.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or
other means without further cutting or fitting.
2.
Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
3.
Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from
parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in
12 feet.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating
metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.
Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that
are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.
Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article
whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.
ANCHORING POSTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts are
inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's
Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for
installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular
space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to
comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing
anchoring material.
Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by
conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1.
For aluminum pipe railings, attach posts using fittings designed and engineered for
this purpose.
2.
For stainless-steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting surfaces.
3.
For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in
concrete.
05521 - 7

Phase 2
3.5
ATTACHING RAILINGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.6

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.7
Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded
to railing ends.
Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to
railing ends.
Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Locate
brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1.
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and
hanger or lag bolts.
2.
For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3.
For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing
between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.
4.
For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardanttreated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate
backing members.
5.
For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to
concealed steel reinforcements.
6.
For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel
framing or through concealed steel reinforcements.
Clean aluminum and stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and
rinsing with clean water.
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for
shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted
surfaces.
1.
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09911 - Exterior Painting and
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at
time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
05521 - 8

Phase 2
SECTION 05581
COLUMN COVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
D.
Qualification Data: For fabricator.

Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for column covers.
Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or
design, including mechanical finishes.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on
6-inch-square Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.
A.
B.
1.5
Snap-together metal column covers.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.4

Maintenance Data: For mirrorlike stainless-steel finish to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing column covers similar to that

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
Anodic Finisher Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying anodic
finishes of type indicated and that employs competent control personnel to conduct
continuing, effective quality-control program to ensure compliance with requirements.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to
demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1.
Build mockups of typical column covers.
2.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of
the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
COLUMN COVERS
05581 - 1

Phase 2
1.7

A.
Deliver column covers wrapped in protective coverings and strapped together in suitable
packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they stain or bond to
finished surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SNAP-TOGETHER COLUMN COVERS

A.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
2.3
Form column covers to shapes indicated from metal of type and minimum thickness
indicated below. Return vertical edges and bend to form hook that engages continuous
mounting clips.
1.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, with not less than strength and durability properties
of Alloy 5005-H32, 0.063 inch thick.
2.
Finish: Color anodic.
3.
Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel,
exposed, 0.060 inch thick.
a.
Finish: Factory primed.
4.
Column covers may be fabricated from prefinished metal sheet in lieu of finishing
after fabrication provided unfinished edges are concealed from view.
5.
Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or
both, as needed to provide flat surfaces where indicated.
6.
Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of
adjoining sheets in flush alignment.
7.
Form returns at vertical joints to provide hairline V-joints.
8.
Form returns at vertical joints to provide 1/2-inch-wide reveal at joints. Provide
snap-in metal filler strips at reveals that leave reveals flush.
9.
Fabricate column covers without horizontal joints.
10. Fabricate ceiling ring to match column covers.
Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with materials joined.
1.
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting column covers and for attaching
them to other work unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Sound-Deadening Materials:
1.
Insulation: Unfaced, mineral-fiber blanket insulation complying with ASTM C 665,
Type I, and passing ASTM E 136 test.
2.
Mastic: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
Backing Materials: Provided or recommended by column cover manufacturer.
PAINTS AND COATINGS

A.
03798614
03/15
Lacquer for Copper Alloys: Clear, acrylic lacquer specially developed for coating copperalloy products.
COLUMN COVERS
05581 - 2

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
2.4
A.
B.
2.5
Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of column covers with those of adjoining
construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and
surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated.
Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat,
flush surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.6
Shop Primers: Comply with Section 09911 - Exterior Painting and Section 09912 - Interior
Painting.
Universal Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal
modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
D 1187M.
Complete mechanical finishes of flat sheet metal surfaces before fabrication where
possible. After fabrication, finish all joints, bends, abrasions, and other surface blemishes
to match sheet finish.
Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise
indicated.
variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

1.
Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color
densities.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
column covers.
COLUMN COVERS
05581 - 3

Phase 2
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3

A.
B.
C.
3.4
Locate and place column covers plumb and in alignment with adjacent construction.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install column covers.
1.
Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return
items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete
refinishing, or provide new units as required.
Use concealed anchorages where possible.
Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and
openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated.
Corrosion Protection: Apply bituminous paint or other permanent separation materials on
concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate
materials that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either
material or finish.
Clean copper alloys according to metal finisher's written instructions in a manner that
leaves an undamaged and uniform finish matching approved Sample.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of shop paint are specified in
Section 09911 - Exterior Painting and Section 09912 - Interior Painting.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence
remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop;
make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finishes from damage during construction period. Remove temporary protective
coverings at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
COLUMN COVERS
05581 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 05731
GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3
B.
paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and
topcoats are compatible.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items
to Project site in time for installation.
A.
1.7
Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at opensided floor areas and for pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall
protection.
COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A.
1.6
Section 06105 - Miscellaneous Carpentry: Wood blocking for anchoring railings.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.5
Glass- and plastic-supported railings.

Post-supported railings with glass infill.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15

1.
Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components.
2.
Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or
design, including mechanical finishes.
05731 - 1

Phase 2
D.
E.
1.8
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.9
Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
Preconstruction test reports.
Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.10
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.

1.
Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top
rails, posts, and balusters.
2.
Each type of glass required.
3.
Fittings and brackets.
4.
Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components, including
top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at
intersections. Samples need not be full height.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.
Build mockups as shown on Drawings.
2.
Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail,
infill area, and anchorage system components that are full height and are not less
than 24 inches in length.
3.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single
manufacturer.
Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements
for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are
indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and
assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.
Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more
05731 - 2

Phase 2
C.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
methods, including structural analysis, preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service
performance.
1.
Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Architect for review.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of railings
and are based on the specific system indicated. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
1.
Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Architect for review.
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01450

Quality Control, to design railings, including attachment to building construction.
General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine
allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1.
Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum
ultimate tensile strength divided by 1.95.
2.
Copper Alloys: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
3.
Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
4.
Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
5.
Glass: 25 percent of mean modulus of rupture (50 percent probability of breakage),
as listed in "Mechanical Properties" in AAMA's Aluminum Curtain Wall Series
No. 12, "Structural Properties of Glass."
Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall
withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and
under conditions indicated:
1.
a.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.
b.
c.
2.
Infill of Guards:
a.
Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
b.
Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
3.
Glass-Supported Railings: Support each section of top rail by a minimum of three
glass panels or by other means so top rail will remain in place if any one panel fails.
changes acting on exterior railings by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing
of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1.
METALS, GENERAL
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise
indicated.
05731 - 3

Phase 2
2.4
ALUMINUM
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.5
GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.6
Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and
finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with strength and durability properties for
each aluminum form required not less than that of alloy and temper designated below.
Extruded Bars and Shapes, Including Extruded Tubing: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52.
Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6.
1.
Provide Standard Weight (Schedule 40) pipe unless otherwise indicated.
Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210, Alloy 6063-T832.
Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 5005-H32.
Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247, Alloy 6061-T6.
Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.
Safety Glazing: Glazing shall comply with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.
Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated),
Type 1 (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3. Provide products that have been tested for
surface and edge compression according to ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength
according to 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
1.
Glass Color: Clear.
2.
Thickness for Structural Glass Balusters: 12.0 mm.
3.
Thickness for Structural Glass Balusters: As required by structural loads, but not less
than 12.0 mm.
4.
Thickness for Glass Infill Panels: 6.0 mm.
5.
Thickness for Glass Infill Panels: As required by structural loads, but not less than
6.0 mm.
6.
Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glass with certification label of the SGCC.
Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing
standard with which glass complies.
Glazing Cement and Accessories for Structural Glazing: Glazing cement, setting blocks,
shims, and related accessories as recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for
installing structural glazing in metal subrails.
1.
Glazing Cement: Nonshrinking organic cement designed for curing by passing an
electric current through metal subrail holding glass panel, as standard with
manufacturer.
Glazing Gaskets for Glass Infill Panels: Glazing gaskets and related accessories
recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing glass infill panels in postsupported railings.
FASTENERS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1.
Aluminum Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class
required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
05731 - 4

Phase 2
C.
D.
2.7
railings to other work unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to
the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193 or ICC-ES AC308.
1.
2.
Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated:
Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
03798614
03/15
General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous
locations.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items.
Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and
fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1.
Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this
is manufacturer's standard splicing method.
Form changes in direction as follows:
1.
As detailed.
Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required;
maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting,
cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous
fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work where indicated.
1.
At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide
crush-resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to
structural supports and to prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of
substrate.
Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
05731 - 5

Phase 2
M.
2.8
GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.9
General: Fabricate to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance and bite
on glazing panels.
1.
Clean-cut or flat-grind edges at butt-glazed sealant joints to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
2.
Grind smooth exposed edges, including those at open joints, to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
Structural Glass Balusters: Factory-bond glass to aluminum base and top-rail channels in
railing manufacturer's plant using glazing cement to comply with manufacturer's written
specifications, unless field glazing is standard with manufacturer.
Structural Balusters: Provide tempered glass panels.
Infill Panels: Provide tempered glass panels.

A.
B.
C.
2.10
For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with
inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal
plate forming bottom closure.

temporary protective covering before shipment.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within
one-half of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components
are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or
installed to minimize contrast.
Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of
railings.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
B.
Mechanical Finish: AA-M3x; sand top rails, handrails, and intermediate rails in one
direction only, parallel to length of railing, with 120- and 320-grit abrasive. After
installation, polish railings with No. 0 steel wool immersed in paste wax, then rub to a
luster with a soft dry cloth.
1.
Color: Champagne.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately
in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free
of rack.
1.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or
other means without further cutting or fitting.
05731 - 6

Phase 2
2.
3.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
RAILING CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
3.3
Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting

railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members
and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler
colored to match finish of railings.
Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending
2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate
joint within 6 inches of post.
ANCHORING POSTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.4
Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.

Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from
parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in
12 feet.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating
metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.
Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete,
masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts
have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's
Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for
installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular
space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to
comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing
anchoring material.
Leave anchorage joint exposed with anchoring material flush with adjacent surface.
Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by
conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1.
For aluminum railings, attach posts as indicated using fittings designed and
engineered for this purpose.
INSTALLING GLASS PANELS

A.
03798614
03/15
Glass-Supported Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written

instructions.
1.
Attach base channel to building structure, then insert and connect factory-fabricated
and -assembled glass panels if glass was bonded to base and top-rail channels in
factory.
05731 - 7

Phase 2
2.
B.
3.5

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.6
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections and to prepare test reports. Payment for these services will be made from the
testing and inspecting allowance, as authorized by Change Orders.
Extent and Testing Methodology: Testing agency will randomly select completed railing
assemblies for testing that are representative of different railing designs and conditions in
the completed Work. Test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935 for
compliance with performance requirements.
Remove and replace railings where test results indicate that they do not comply with
specified requirements unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to Architect
and comply with specified requirements.
Perform additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.7
Attach base channel to building structure, then insert glass into base channel and
bond with glazing cement unless glass was bonded to base and top-rail channels in
factory.
a.
Support glass panels in base channel at quarter points with channel-shaped
setting blocks that also act as shims to maintain uniform space for glazing
cement. Fill remaining space in base channel with glazing cement for uniform
support of glass.
3.
Adjust spacing of glass panels so gaps between panels are equal before securing in
position.
4.
Erect glass railings under direct supervision of manufacturer's authorized technical
personnel.
Post-Supported Glass Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's
written instructions and with requirements in other Part 3 articles. Erect posts and other
metal railing components, then set factory-cut glass panels. Do not cut, drill, or alter glass
panels in field. Protect edges from damage.
Clean aluminum and stainless steel by washing thoroughly with water and soap, rinsing
with clean water, and wiping dry.
Clean copper alloys according to metal finisher's written instructions in a manner that
leaves an undamaged and uniform finish matching approved Sample.
Clean and polish glass as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Wash both exposed
surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for
inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion.
Clean rails by wiping with a damp cloth and then wiping dry.
PROTECTION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at
time of Substantial Completion.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence
remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop;
make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
END OF SECTION
05731 - 8

Phase 2
SECTION 06105
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3

Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.

Wood furring.
Plywood backing panels.
Roof curbs.
Blocking in wall and roof openings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.

1.
Include data for wood-preservative and fire-retardant treatment from chemical
treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials
comply with requirements.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code
in effect for Project:
1.
Preservative-treated wood.
2.
Fire-retardant-treated wood.
3.
Power-driven fasteners.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A.
03798614
03/15
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading

agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any
rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an
agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules
indicated.
1.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade
stamp on end or back of each piece.
3.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
06105 - 1

Phase 2
2.2
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
2.4
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in
contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated
according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
1.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1.
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2.
Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
3.
Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
4.
Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl
spaces or unexcavated areas.
5.
Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27
(plywood).
1.
Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.
2.
Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1.
Plywood backing panels.
2.
Concealed blocking.
3.
Roof construction.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of
other construction, including the following:
1.
Blocking.
2.
Nailers.
3.
Cants.
4.
Furring.
5.
Grounds.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 or better grade lumber
with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species.
For exposed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of eastern
white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; No. 2 or better grade;
NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
06105 - 2

Phase 2
D.
2.5
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A.
2.6
For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any
of the following species and grades:
1.
Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.
2.
Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA.
3.
Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.
4.
Western woods, No. 2 or better grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1,

C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than
1/2-inch nominal thickness.
FASTENERS
A.
B.
C.
General: Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative

treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer
heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being
fastened.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.
Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of
preservative-treated lumber.
Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1.
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to
shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved.
Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
06105 - 3

Phase 2
C.
3.3
WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION

A.
B.
C.
3.4
Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber

not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact
thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as
required for tolerance of finish work.
Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal-size
furring horizontally and vertically at 24 inches o.c.
Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2 inch nominal-size furring vertically at 16
inches o.c.
SCHEDULES
A.
B.
Roof Blocking: S/P/F species, 19 percent maximum moisture content, pressure

preservative treatment.
Telephone and Electrical Panel Boards: 3/4 inch thick, square edges, site brush applied
preservative treated.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
06105 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 06125
SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.3
APA/EWA (APA/The Engineered Wood Association) - Certification.

ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) of Iron and Steel Hardware.
ASTM F568 - Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Fasteners.
AWPA C9 - Plywood, Pressure Treatment.
SPIB (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading Rules.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.6
Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Prefabricated steel structural supports.

Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Placement of steel fabrications embedded into masonry.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.5
Roof sheathing.
Wall sheathing.
Parapet sheathing.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
1.4

Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

Product Data: Submit technical data on roof sheathing.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products conform to specified requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies:

1.
Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
2.
Wood Structural Panel Grading Agency: Certified by APA/EWA - The Engineered
Wood Association.
Factory grade stamp each piece of lumber and each wood structural panel. In lieu of grade
stamping, submit manufacturer's certificate certifying that products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved
by ALSCs Board of Review.
SHEATHING
06125 - 1

Phase 2
1.7

A.
B.
C.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

Protect all wood materials from warping or other distortion by stacking in vertical position,
braced to resist movement.
Keep all wood materials covered and dry. Provide air circulation within and around stacks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SHEATHING MATERIALS
A.
2.2
WALL SHEATHING
A.
B.
2.3
Oriented-Strand-Board Sheathing: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.

1.
Span Rating: Not less than 16/0.
2.
Nominal Thickness: Not less than 7/16 inch.
PARAPET SHEATHING
A.
2.5
Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

1)
Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick.
2)
Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation.
Extruded-Polystyrene-Foam Sheathing: ASTM C 578, Type IV, in manufacturer's standard
lengths and widths with tongue-and-groove or shiplap long edges as standard with
manufacturer.
1.
Thickness: As indicated.
2.
Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to
NFPA 285.
ROOF SHEATHING
A.
2.4
Wood Panel Roof Sheathing:

1.
Conformance: ANSI A 208.1 and APA rated sheathing.
2.
Material: Oriented Strand Board.
3.
Thickness: 19/32 inch.
4.
Exposure: 1.
Oriented-Strand-Board Sheathing: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.

1.
Span Rating: Not less than 16/0.
2.
Nominal Thickness: Not less than 7/16 inch.
ACCESSORIES
A.
03798614
03/15
Fasteners and Anchors:

1.
Fasteners: ASTM F568 and FS FF-N-105B, Hot dipped or Electro galvanized steel.
Decking Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times
2.
thickness of sheathing cadmium plated or zinc coated.
SHEATHING
06125 - 2

Phase 2
2.6
FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT

A.
B.
Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C9 using water borne preservative
with a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft.
Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Colored type, as recommended by pressure
treatment manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
General
1.
Set sheathing to required lines and level, with members plumb, true to line, cut and
fitted.
2.
Fit sheathing to other construction, scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.
3.
Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking grounds and similar supports to allow
attachment of other construction.
4.
Apply field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated plywood.
5.
Securely attach carpentry work in accordance with requirements of applicable code
indicated on drawings.
6.
Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid
splitting wood.
GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Comply with GA 253 and with manufacturers written instructions.

1.
Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with screws.
2.
Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.
3.
Install panels with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural
elements.
4.
Install panels with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that
might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.
Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing.
Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up.
Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent panels
without forcing. Abut ends over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent panels not
less than one stud spacing. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud.
1.
Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from
edges and ends of panels.
2.
For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws
if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs
immediately after sheathing is installed.
Vertical Installation: Install vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges with those
of adjacent panels. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud.
Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. and set back a minimum of
1.
3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels.
2.
For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws
if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs
immediately after sheathing is installed.
SHEATHING
06125 - 3

Phase 2
E.
3.3
FOAM-PLASTIC SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A.
B.
C.
3.4
B.
Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment to site-sawn cuts on wood in contact with
roofing and related metal flashings.
Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.
TOLERANCES
A.
B.
3.6
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

Foam-Plastic Wall Sheathing: Install vapor-relief strips or equivalent for permitting escape of
moisture vapor that otherwise would be trapped in stud cavity behind sheathing.
Apply sheathing tape to joints between foam-plastic sheathing panels and at items penetrating
sheathing. Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing.
SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT

A.
3.5
Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturers written instructions.

1.
Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient
amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other
penetrations and openings.
2.
Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and
trowel sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed
fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and
openings.
Section 01450 - Quality Control: Tolerances.

Surface Flatness of Roof: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/2 inch in 30 feet maximum.
SCHEDULES
A.
B.
C.
Pressure Treated Lumber: Nailers, curbs, blocking and similar members in connection with
roofing and flashing.
Pressure Treated Plywood: All parapet sheathing.
Fire Retardant Treated Lumber: All wood blocking in interior partitions.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
SHEATHING
06125 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.3
C.
D.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork.

Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards."
MOCK-UP
A.
B.
C.
1.6
Product Data: For solid-surface material and Homasote panels.

Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
Samples:
1.
Plastic-laminates, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
2.
Thermoset decorative panels, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
3.
Solid-surfacing materials.
Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program
certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.5
Interior standing and running trim.

Plastic-laminate cabinets.
Solid-surfacing-material countertops.
Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips
unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
Homasote acoustical panels.
Aluminum reveals.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.4

Construct mock-ups, full size.

Locate where directed by Architect.
Incorporate accepted mock-up as part of work.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Section 01310 - Project Management and Coordination: Pre-installation meeting.

Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
06402 - 1

Phase 2
1.7

A.
B.
C.
1.8
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.9
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
SEQUENCING
A.
B.
1.10

Protect work from moisture damage.
Environmental Considerations:
1.
Environmental Requirements: Allow materials to acclimate to temperature and
humidity conditions recommended by AWI for minimum of 48 hours prior to
installation. Maintain same conditions during and after installation.
2.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is
enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining
temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period.
Section 01110 - Summary of Work and Special Requirements: Work sequence.

Sequence work to ensure utility connections are achieved in orderly and expeditious
manner.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
Section 01310 - Project Management and Coordination: Coordination and project

conditions.
Coordinate work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated
and adjacent components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Wood Products:
1.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
3.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
4.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with
thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated,
as required by woodwork quality standard.
Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
ISSFA-2.
1.
Available Manufacturers: See Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
Tackboard: Homosote 440 sound barrier, 1/2 thickness, sheet size as indicated. Provide
fabric cover as called out in Section 09000, mount with construction adhesive.
06402 - 2

Phase 2
2.2
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
2.3
A.
2.4
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
woodwork, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled
by Naming Products)."
Concealed hinges; Blum clip top 120 - full over lay (73T5590BTL).
Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. 96 MM ch. wire.
Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long. Equal to: BER 630-2SC US26D
Finish (satin chrome).
Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.
1.
Standard Duty (Grade 1, Grade 2, and Grade 3): Side mounted; full-extension type;
zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers.
2.
Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension
type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.
3.
Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches high and
24 inches wide # B230.
4.
File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers more than 6 inches high or
24 inches wide #4034 ACCURIDE.
5.
Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 3 inches high and
24 inches wide.
Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1.
Match facility standard.
Countertop support: Rakks brackets by Ragine, Inc. Coordinate size and spacing with
countertop indicated.
Grommets: 2-3/8 hole (chrome).
Shelving Supports: Spoon type metal pins, equal to: PG707-NK.
Shelving Standards: 5 mm holes at 1-1/4 o.c.
Clothes Rod and U Support Flange and End Flange: Chrome finish.
Metal Reveals: Equal to Fry Reglet.
1.
Finish: Per Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
2.
Size: Per Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried
to less than 15 percent moisture content.
FABRICATION
A.
03798614
03/15
General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site.
Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1.
Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom.
2.
Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove
splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
3.
Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 08800 - Glazing and
in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with
removable stops.
06402 - 3

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
Interior Standing and Running Trim:

1.
Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat
members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
2.
Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation
require field assembly.
Wood Chair Rail:
1.
Provide hardwood chair rail, paint grade.
2.
Profile: Match to existing for Adult Clinic.
3.
Profile for Pediatric Clinic: Per Section 09000 Finish Material Legend.
Plastic-Laminate Cabinets:
1.
AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
2.
Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate as
follows:
a.
Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.
b.
Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
c.
Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.
d.
Edges: Grade HGS.
3.
Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Plastic laminate to
match casework.
4.
Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels.
5.
Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.
6.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Refer to Finish Schedule - Appendix A.
Solid-Surfacing-Material Countertops:
1.
Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2 inch minimum.
2.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Refer to Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
3.
Fabricate tops in one piece. Fabricate top, side splashes, and backsplashes into one
integral piece.
4.
Install integral sink bowls in countertops in shop.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
03798614
03/15
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in

installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as
required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in
Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
Shim as required with concealed shims.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged
finish at cuts.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure
with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete
installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk
and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using
full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent
possible. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. Fill gaps,
06402 - 4

Phase 2
G.
H.
3.2
if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same
as wood base if finished.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation.
1.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than
16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood
framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall with
sealant specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
SCHEDULING
A.
Refer to Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.

END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
06402 - 5

Phase 2
SECTION 07190
WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.6
Section 04220 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Integral water-repellent admixture for unit
masonry assemblies.
A.
1.5
Penetrating water-repellent treatments for the following vertical and horizontal surfaces:
1.
Cast stone.
2.
Concrete unit masonry.
3.
Natural stone.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4


1.
Include manufacturer's printed statement of VOC content.
2.
Include manufacturer's standard colors.
3.
Include manufacturer's recommended number of coats for each type of substrate and
spreading rate for each separate coat.
4.
Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified in Part 2 that specifies water repellents approved by MPI, with the
proposed product highlighted.
Samples: For each type and color of water repellent and substrate indicated,
12 by 12 inches in size, with specified water-repellent treatment applied to half of each
Sample.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Qualification Data: For Applicator.

Product Certificates: For each type of water repellent.
Preconstruction Test Reports: For water-repellent-treated substrates.
Field quality-control reports.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
WATER REPELLENTS
07190 - 1

Phase 2
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
1.8
A.
1.9
Preconstruction Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction

testing of water repellents on existing substrate assemblies.
1.
In addition to verifying performance requirements, use mockups to verify
manufacturer's written instructions for application procedure and optimum rates of
product application to substrates.
2.
Propose changes to materials and methods to suit Project.
3.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
tested.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
1.10
Applicator Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

MPI Standards: Comply with MPI standards indicated and provide water repellents listed
in its "MPI Approved Products List."
Mockups: Prepare mockups of each required water repellent on each type of substrate
required to demonstrate aesthetic effects, for preconstruction testing, and to set quality
standards for materials and execution.
1.
Locate mockups on existing surfaces where directed by Architect in locations that
enable viewing under same conditions as the completed Work.
a.
Size: 10 sq. ft. each.
2.
3.
Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted
weather and substrate conditions permit water repellents to be applied according to
manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements:
1.
Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for not less than 28 days.
2.
Building has been closed in for not less than 30 days before treating wall assemblies.
3.
Ambient temperature is above 40 deg F and below 100 deg F and will remain so for
24 hours.
4.
Substrate is not frozen and substrate-surface temperature is above 40 deg F and
below 100 deg F.
5.
Rain or snow is not predicted within 24 hours.
6.
Not less than seven days have passed since surfaces were last wet.
7.
Windy conditions do not exist that might cause water repellent to be blown onto
vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated.
WARRANTY
A.
03798614
03/15
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Applicator

agree(s) to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency specified in
"Performance Requirements" Article within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
WATER REPELLENTS
07190 - 2

Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.2
Performance: Water repellents shall meet the following performance requirements as

determined by preconstruction testing on manufacturer's standard substrates representing
those indicated for this Project.
Water Absorption: Minimum 80 percent reduction of water absorption after 24 hours for
treated compared to untreated specimens when tested according to the following:
1.
Cast Stone: ASTM C 1195.
2.
Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 140.
3.
Natural Stone: ASTM C 97/C 97M.
Water-Vapor Transmission: Comply with one or both of the following:
1.
Maximum 10 percent reduction water-vapor transmission of treated compared to
untreated specimens, according to ASTM E 96/E 96M.
2.
Minimum 80 percent water-vapor transmission of treated compared to untreated
specimens, according to ASTM D 1653.
Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: Minimum 90 percent reduction in
leakage rate of treated compared to untreated specimens, according to ASTM E 514/
E 514M.
Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water-repellent performance after 2500 hours of
weathering according to ASTM G 154 compared to water-repellent-treated specimens
before weathering.
Chloride-Ion Intrusion in Concrete: NCHRP Report 244, Series II tests.
1.
Reduction of Water Absorption: 80 percent.
2.
Reduction in Chloride Content: 80 percent.
MPI-APPROVED WATER REPELLENTS

A.
Water Repellent, Clear (Not Paintable); MPI #117: Penetrating, silicone-oil type, clear
water-repellent for interior or exterior masonry block or brick that will not be recoated with
a coating other than the repellent.
1.
VOC Content: 200 g/L or less.
2.
MPI Green Performance Standard: GPS-1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
03798614
03/15
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent manufacturer's
requirements. Check moisture content in three representative locations by method
recommended by manufacturer.
2.
Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be
trapped beneath the application of water repellent.
3.
Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water
repellent.
WATER REPELLENTS
07190 - 3

Phase 2
B.
C.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
Test pH level according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure

chemical bond to silica-containing or siliceous minerals.
New Construction and Repairs: Allow concrete and other cementitious materials to age
before application of water repellent, according to repellent manufacturer's written
instructions.
Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could
impair penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent manufacturer's
written instructions and as follows:
1.
Cast Stone and Concrete Unit Masonry: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance,
and other substances that inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents
according to ASTM E 1857.
2.
Natural Stone: Section 04011 - Masonry Cleaning.
Protect adjoining work, including mortar and sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blowover of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if
there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live
vegetation.
Coordination with Mortar Joints: Do not apply water repellent until pointing mortar for
joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment has been installed and cured.
Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints
adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.
1.
Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and
compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and
sealant materials identical to those required.
APPLICATION
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product
and application method to be used.
Apply coating of water repellent on surfaces to be treated using 15 psi-pressure spray with
a fan-type spray nozzle or roller to the point of saturation. Apply coating in dual passes of
uniform, overlapping strokes. Remove excess material; do not allow material to puddle
beyond saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application
procedure unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Cast Stone: At Contractor's option, first application of water repellent may be
completed before installing units. Mask mortar and sealant bond surfaces to prevent
water repellent from migrating onto joint surfaces. Remove masking after repellent
has cured.
Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm
wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if
written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions.
WATER REPELLENTS
07190 - 4

Phase 2
3.4

A.
B.
3.5
Testing of Water-Repellent Material: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following
procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when
water repellent is being applied:
1.
Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample waterrepellent material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be
taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.
2.
Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of water-repellent material with
product requirements.
3.
Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying water repellents if test results show
material being used does not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall
remove noncomplying material from Project site, pay for testing, and correct
deficiency of surfaces treated with rejected materials, as approved by Architect.
Coverage Test: In the presence of Architect, hose down a dry, repellent-treated surface to
verify complete and uniform product application. A change in surface color will indicate
incomplete application.
1.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when surfaces will be
tested.
2.
Reapply water repellent until coverage test indicates complete coverage.
CLEANING
A.
B.
Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged
by water-repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades
caused by water-repellent application, as approved by Architect.
Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
WATER REPELLENTS
07190 - 5

Phase 2
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
B.
Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Vapor barrier and acoustical sealant. Supporting
construction.
Section 09511 - Acoustical Ceilings: Supporting construction.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
1.5
Batt insulation in exterior wall construction.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

ASTM C208 - Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board.

ASTM C240 - Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block.
ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
ASTM C578 - Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation Board.
ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and
Manufactured Housing.
ASTM C1289 - Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.
ASTM D2842 - Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building
Partitions.
ASTM E96 - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
ASTM E 119-83 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
ASTM E 413-87 - Determination of Sound Transmission Class.
NFPA 255 - Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
03798614
03/15
Insulation k Values
1.
k values indicated are based on 75 deg. F.
Where scheduled, provide insulations with conditioned k values complying with
2.
RIC/TIMA 281-1 Conditioning Procedure.
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 1

Phase 2
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
1.7
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.8
Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations.

Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.9
Conform to applicable code as indicated on drawings for combustibility and smoke

development requirements for materials as follows:
1.
Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2.
Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
Identify insulation with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
organization.
Do not install adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful
installation.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet or soiled. Comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Flexible Insulation
1.
CertainTeed.
2.
Manville Corp.
3.
Owens/Corning Corporation.
4.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
Board Insulation
1.
Polystyrene Insulation
a.
AFM - Molded Polystyrene Insulation.
b.
DivsersiFoam Products.
c.
Dow Chemical.
d.
EPS - Molded Polystyrene Insulation.
e.
Tenneco Foam Products.
f.
W.R. Grace Construction Products.
2.
Polyisocyanurate Insulation
a.
Celotex.
b.
NRG Barriers/Johns Manville.
c.
Rmax - Polyisocyanurate Insulation.
3.
Cellular Glass Insulation
a.
Certain Teed.
b.
Johns Manville, Insulation Group.
c.
Knauf Fiber Glass.
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 2

Phase 2
d.
e.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
2.3
Owens-Corning Fiberglas.
Pittsburgh Corning.
Flexible Thermal Insulation

1.
Conformance: ASTM C 665, glass or mineral fiber batt
2.
Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136.
3.
Fire Resistance Ratings: Passes ASTM E 119 as part of a complete fire tested
4.
Walls
a.
Thermal Resistance: R13.
b.
Type: Type I, unfaced.
5.
Surface Burning Characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84
a.
Maximum flame spread: 25.
b.
Maximum smoke developed: 50.
c.
Size: To fit framing spacing.
Flexible Acoustical Insulation
1.
Conformance: ASTM C 665, Type I, glass or mineral fiber batt.
2.
Thermal Resistance: R8.
3.
Surface Burning Characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84
a.
Maximum flame spread: 10.
b.
Maximum smoke developed: 10.
4.
Noise Reduction Coefficient: 1.05.
5.
Size: To fit framing spacing.
Thermal Board Insulation
1.
Extruded Polystyrene Insulation: ASTM C578 Type VI; cellular type, conforming to
the following:
a.
Board Density: 0.55 lb/cu ft.
b.
Board Size: 48 x 96 inch.
c.
Board Thickness: 2 inches.
d.
Thermal Resistance: R of 10.
e.
Water Absorption: In accordance with ASTM D2842 0.3 percent by volume
maximum.
f.
Compressive Strength: Minimum 25 psi.
g.
Board Edges: Square edges.
Flame/Smoke Properties: In accordance with ASTM E84, UL 723, and
h.
NFPA 255.
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Tape: Refer to Section 07272.

Wire Mesh: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh.
Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.
Fluid-Applied Air Barrier: Refer to Section 07272.
Impaling Clips: Galvanized steel with washer retainer and clips, to be mechanically fastened to
surface to receive board insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of
securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place.
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 3

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
3.3
General
1.
Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions.
2.
Install insulation without gaps or voids.
3.
Place insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and
around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items
passing through partitions.
4.
Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces.
Vapor Barrier: As specified in Section 07272.
Flexible Thermal Insulation: Place between and tight to framing members.
SCHEDULES
A.
3.4
Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation.
Verify insulation is dry.
Verify substrate surface is flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, and materials or
substances that may impede adhesive bond.
Flexible Thermal Insulation

1.
Exterior Walls: Install continuous on exterior of stud framing from floor to bottom of
roof deck above in all exterior walls; continuous tape all joints.
FLEXIBLE ACOUSTICAL INSULATION

A.
B.
Walls: Install in stud space from floor to bottom of roof deck above in all exterior walls.
Thermal Board Insulation
1.
Perimeter Insulation: Type B, extruded polystyrene, bead adhesive application, 1/2 inch
thick protection board.
2.
Cavity Wall Insulation: Type F, semi-rigid glass fiber board, full bed vapor retarder
adhesive, secured with impaling fasteners.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 07260
VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Under-slab vapor retarders.

Section 07272 - Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers: Vapor retarders integral with
exterior walls.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Reinforced-polyethylene vapor retarders.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
1.4

A.
Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
REINFORCED-POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDERS

A.
2.2
Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Sheet with outer layers of polyethylene film

laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim
and weighing not less than 20 lb./1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating of
0.1 perm.
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder

manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and
has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.
Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender
washers.
VAPOR RETARDERS
07260 - 1

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS BELOW SLABS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
Install vapor retarders over prepared grade. Lap joints a minimum of 12 inches and seal
with manufacturer's recommended tape. Install second layer over pathways to equipment.
Extend vapor retarder over footings and seal to foundation wall or grade beam with
manufacturer's recommended tape.
1.
Extend vapor retarder vertically minimum 24 inches above top of footing.
Seal around penetrations such as utilities and columns in order to create a monolithic,
airtight membrane at grade surface, perimeter, and all vertical penetrations.
Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and
vapor retarders.
Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other
work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.
PROTECTION
A.
3.4
Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders.
Protect vapor retarders from damage until concealed by permanent construction.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Reinforced below slab vapor barrier is to be inspected after installation and prior to
coverage to visually observe all tapes and penetrations are fully sealed and any tears are
fully repaired.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
VAPOR RETARDERS
07260 - 2

Phase 2
SECTION 07272
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
Fluid-applied, vapor-permeable membrane air barriers.

Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the
movement of air
Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity.
Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air-barrier materials and accessory material
applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to
control air movement through the wall.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.4

Section 01450 - Quality Control: Coordination with Owners independent testing and
inspection agency.
Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities & Controls: Requirement to schedule work to
prevent sunlight and weather exposure of materials beyond limits established by
manufacturer; requirement to protect materials from damage after installation and prior to
installation of enclosing work.
Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Requirement that backup concrete be free of fins,
protrusions and large holes.
Section 04720 - Cast Stone Masonry.
Section 07540 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Requirement for coordination with
sequencing of membrane roofing; requirement to seal roof membrane to wall air and vapor
barrier.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Requirement that backup gypsum sheathing has
been installed with damaged corners repaired, joints filled and surface flush with
compatible material as acceptable to the fluid-applied air and vapor barrier manufacturer;
requirement for gap at deflection joints and fillers.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
ASTM E 2357: Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Systems
(Full Scale Wall Testing of the Air Barrier System). Ensure tests were conducted on steel
stud frame walls with penetrations (Specimen 2) as some air barrier systems are not tested
in that critical mode.
ASTM E96: Water Vapor Transmission of Materials, Procedure B.
07272 - 1

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.5
ASTM E 2178-01: Standard Test for Determining the Air Permeability of Building
Materials.
ASTM E283-91: Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across
the Specimen.
ASTM E330-90: Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
AATCC 127: Water Resistance.
ICC-ES AC212: Freeze Thaw, Crack Bridging.
ASTM D 1970: Self Sealability.
ABAA: Air Barrier Association of America.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
Submit in accordance with Division 1 requirements.

Product Data: Submit manufacturers product data, installation instructions, and
manufacturer's printed instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate,
temperature and other limitations of installation conditions, technical data, and tested
physical and performance properties.
1.
Submit letter from primary materials manufacturer indicating approval of products
not manufactured by primary manufacturer.
2.
Include statement that materials are compatible with adjacent materials proposed for
use.
3.
Submit reports indicating that field peel-adhesion test on all materials to which
sealants are adhered have been performed and the changes made, if required, to
other approved materials, in order to achieve successful adhesion.
Samples: Submit clearly labeled samples, 3 by 4 inch minimum size of each material
specified.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing locations and extent of air and vapor
barrier assemblies and details of all typical conditions, intersections with other envelope
assemblies and materials, membrane counter-flashings, and details showing how gaps in
the construction will be bridged, how inside and outside corners are negotiated, how
materials that cover the air and vapor barrier are secured with air-tight condition
maintained, and how miscellaneous penetrations such as conduits, pipes, electric boxes and
similar items are sealed.
1.
Include VOC content of each material, and applicable legal limit in the jurisdiction
of the project.
2.
Include statement that materials are compatible with adjacent materials proposed for
use.
3.
Include recommended values for field adhesion test on each substrate.
Product Certificates: Submit letter from manufacturer stating that materials proposed for
use are permanently chemically compatible and adhesively compatible with adjacent
materials proposed for use. Submit letter from manufacturer stating that cleaning materials
used during installation are chemically compatible with each of the adjacent materials
proposed for use.
Qualification Data: For installer.
Product test reports. For each air-barrier assembly, for tests performed by qualified testing
agency.
07272 - 2

Phase 2
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.7
MOCK-UP
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.8
Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained
and approved by manufacturer.
Air Barrier Installer Qualifications: Currently accredited by the Air Barrier Association of
America (ABAA) whose applicators are certified in accordance with the ABAA Quality
Assurance Program.
Manufacturer: Obtain primary materials from a single manufacturer regularly engaged in
manufacturing air and vapor barrier membranes. Obtain secondary materials from a source
acceptable to the primary materials manufacturer.
VOC Regulations: Provide products which comply with applicable regulations controlling
the use of volatile organic compounds for the specific authority having jurisdiction.
Preconstruction Meeting: Convene a minimum of two weeks prior to commencing Work
of this Section. Agenda shall include, at a minimum, construction and testing of mock-up,
sequence of construction, coordination with substrate preparation, materials approved for
use, compatibility of materials, coordination with installation of adjacent and covering
materials, and details of construction. Attendance is required by representatives of related
trades including covering materials, substrate materials and adjacent materials.
Field Quality Assurance: Implement the ABAA Quality Assurance Program requirements.
Cooperate with (ABAA) inspectors and independent testing and inspection agencies
engaged by the Owner. Do not cover air and vapor barrier until it has been inspected,
tested and accepted.
Construct mock-up in accordance with Section 01450 - Quality Control: Requirements for
a mock-up.
Mock-Ups: Build mock-up to set quality standards for materials and execution and for
preconstruction testing.
1.
Build integrated mock-up of exterior wall assembly as shown on drawings,
approximately 8 feet long by 8 feet high, incorporating backup wall construction,
external cladding, window, storefront, door frame an sill, insulation, ties and other
penetrations, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint
treatment, application of air barriers, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and
penetrations of airbarriers assembly.
a.
Coordinate construction of mock-ups to permit inspection by Owners testing
agency of air barrier before external insulation and cladding are installed.
b.
Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and
foundation wall intersection.
c.
If Architect determines mock-ups do not comply with requirements,
reconstruct mock-ups and apply air barrier until mock-ups are approved.
Approval of mock-ups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mock-ups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mock-ups may remain as part of the
completed work if undisturbed at time of substantial completion.
A.
03798614
03/15
Preconstruction Testing Services: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform
preconstruction testing on field mock-ups.
07272 - 3

Phase 2
B.
C.
1.9
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A.
B.
1.10
Conduct conference at Project site two weeks prior to commencing work of this section,
under provisions of Section 01310 - Project Management and Coordination:
Pre-Installation Meeting. Attendance by the manufacturers representative along with the
installer is mandatory.
DO NOT PROCEED WITH THE INSTALLATION OF THE AIR BARRIER
MEMBRANE AND THE THROUGH WALL FLASHING MEMBRANE PRIOR TO
THE PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE.

A.
B.
C.
1.11
Mock-Up Tests for Air and Water Infiltration: Test mock-up for air and water infiltration
in accordance with ASTM E 1186 (air leakage location) or ASTM E 783 (air leakage
quantification), and ASTM E 1105 (water penetration). Use smoke tracer to locate sources
of air leakage. If deficiencies are found, repair or modify mock-up and retest until
satisfactory results are obtained. Deficiencies include air leakage beyond values specified,
uncontrolled water leakage, unsatisfactory workmanship.
1.
Perform the air leakage tests and water penetration test of mock-up prior to
installation of cladding and trim but after installation of all fasteners for cladding
and trim and after installation of other penetrating elements. For fasteners which
would normally only be installed with cladding, install representative fasteners
without cladding; intent is to perform testing with all types of penetrations in place.
Mock-Up Tests for Adhesion: Test mock-up of fluid-applied and sheet applied materials
for adhesion in accordance with ASTM D 4541 using a Type 1 pull tester except that the
disk used shall be 100mm in diameter and the membrane shall be cut through to separate
the material attached to the disk from the surrounding material. Perform test after curing
period recommended by the manufacturer. Record mode of failure and area which failed
in accordance with ASTM D 4541. When the air barrier material manufacturer has
established a minimum adhesion level for the product on the particular substrate, the
inspection report shall indicate whether this requirement has been met. Where the
manufacturer has not declared a minimum adhesion value for their product/substrate
combination, then the inspector shall simply record the value.
Deliver materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with
manufacturer's name, product, and date of manufacture, and directions for storage.
Store materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and
within temperature range required by air and vapor barrier membrane manufacturer.
Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
Handle materials in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Temperature: Install air and vapor barrier within range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by air and vapor barrier manufacturer.
Field Conditions: Do not install air and vapor barrier in snow, rain, fog, or mist without
temporary protection and supplemental heat as required. Do not install air and vapor barrier
when the temperature of substrate surfaces and surrounding air temperatures are below
those recommended by the manufacturer. Apply membrane to a surface dry substrate, or in
accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
07272 - 4

Phase 2
1.12
WARRANTY
A.
B.
Material Warranty: Provide manufacturers standard product warranty, for a minimum

3 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Installation Warranty: Provide air barrier subcontractors 2-year warranty from date of
Substantial Completion, including all components of the air and vapor barrier assembly,
against failures including loss of air tight seal, loss of watertight seal, loss of adhesion, loss
of cohesion, failure to cure properly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from
single source from single manufacturer.
VOC Content: 250g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24) and complying with VOC content limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Low-Emitting Materials: Air barriers shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-permeable air

barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental
condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of
accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints,
construction material changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without
deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.
The air barrier shall have the following characteristics:
1.
It must be continuous, with all joints made air-tight.
2.
It shall be capable of withstanding positive and negative combined design wind, fan
and stack pressures on the envelope without damage or displacement, and shall
transfer the load to the structure. It shall not displace adjacent materials under full
load. The air barrier shall be joined in an airtight and flexible manner to the air
barrier material of adjacent systems, allowing for the relative movement of systems
due to thermal and moisture variations and creep. Connection shall be made
between:
a.
Foundation and walls, including penetrations, ties and anchors.
b.
Walls, windows, curtain walls, storefronts, louvers or doors.
c.
Different wall assemblies, and fixed openings within those assemblies.
d.
Wall and roof connections and penetrations.
e.
Floors over unconditioned space.
f.
Walls, floor and roof across construction, control and expansion joints.
g.
Walls, floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations.
h.
Seismic and expansion joints.
i.
All other leakage pathways in the building envelope.
07272 - 5

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
2.3
VAPOR-PERMEABLE MEMBRANE AIR-BARRIER

A.
2.4
All penetrations of the air barrier and paths of air infiltration/exfiltration shall be made airtight.
Fire Testing: Air Barrier, as a component of a wall assembly, shall have passed a NFPA
285 complete wall fire test.
Listed as an evaluated assembly by the Air Barrier Association at
www.airbarriers.org/materials/assemblies_e.php.
Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Elastomeric, modified bituminous

membrane.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Synthetic polymer membrane:
1)
BASF; Senergy Senershield-R.
2)
Carlisle Coating & Waterproofing, Inc; Barritech VP.
3)
Dryvit Systems, Inc.; Backstop NT.
4)
DuPont; Tyvek Fluid Applied WB.
5)
Grace Construction Products; Perm-A-Barrier VP.
6)
Henry Company; Air-Bloc 31MR.
7)
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Air-Shield LMP.
8)
Momentive Performance Materials; Sil Shield AWB.
9)
Parex USA.
10) Polywall; Poly-Wall AIRLOK Flex VP.
11) Prosoco, Inc.
12) Sto Corp.
13) STS Coatings; Wall Guardian FW-100A.
14) TK Products; TK-Air Max 2104.
2.
Physical and Performance Properties:
a.
Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft.
pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
b.
Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10-20 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M.
c.
Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 200 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C.
d.
Assembly Performance; ASTM E 2357.
e.
AATC 127 - Water Resistance.
f.
ASTM D 1970 - Self Sealability.
g.
ICC-ES AC212 - Freeze Thaw, Crack Bridging.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
General: Accessory materials recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a

complete air-barrier assembly and compatible with primary air-barrier material.
Primer: Liquid (waterborne) (solvent-borne) primer recommended for substrate by air
barrier material manufacturer.
Butyl Strip: Vapor retarding, 30 to 40 thick, self-adhering; polyethylene-film-reinforced
top surface laminated to layer of butyl adhesive with release liner backing.
Joint Reinforcing Fabric: Air-barrier manufacturers nonwoven reinforcement fabric.
Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air-barrier manufacturers self-adhering glass-fiber-mesh tape.
Substrate-Patching Membrane: Manufacturers stand trowel-grade substrate filler.
Adhesive and Tape: Air-barrier manufacturers standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive
adhesive tape.
07272 - 6

Phase 2
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A240 M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch thick, and Series 300
stainless-steel fasteners.
Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: One- or two-component, foamed-in-place,
polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5- to 2.0-lb/cu. ft. density; flame-spread index of 25 or less
according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended
by foam sealant manufacturer.
Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Vapor retarding, 40 mils thick, smooth surfaced,
self-adhering; consisting of 36 mils of rubberize asphalt laminated to a 4-mil thick
polyethylene film with release liner backing.
Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 2000, minimum 50 to 65 mils thick, cured sheet
neoprene with manufacturer-recommended contact adhesives and lap sealant with
stainless-steel termination bars and fasteners.
Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Manufacturers standard system consisting of cured
low-modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with single-component,
neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to
substrates.
Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low
modulus), grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, Use O. Comply with Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
Termination Mastic: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied elastomeric
liquid; trowel grade.
Membrane at Transitions in Substrate and Connections to Adjacent Elements: Neoprene,
ASTM D 2000 Designation 2BC415 to 3BC620, 50 to 65 mils thick with non-corrosive
termination bars and fasteners. Adhesive and lap sealant as recommended by manufacturer.
Sealant at Transitions in Substrate and Connections to Adjacent Elements: Low-modulus
pre-cured silicone extrusion and sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates; Tremco
Silicone Extruded Sheet by Tremco, Proglaze ETA by Tremco, or Bondaflex Silbridge 300
by May National Associates.
Transition Membrane Between Air Barrier Membrane and Roofing and Other Adjacent
Materials: Comply with both vapor permeable air barrier manufacturers recommendations
and roofing material manufacturers recommendations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
03798614
03/15
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which air and vapor barrier assemblies
will be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements.
1.
Verify that surfaces and conditions are suitable prior to commencing work of this
section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
2.
Do not proceed with installation until after minimum concrete curing period
recommended by air and vapor barrier manufacturer.
3.
Ensure that the following conditions are met:
a.
Surfaces are sound, dry, even, and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or
other contaminants
b.
Concrete surfaces are cured and dry, smooth without large voids, spalled areas
or sharp protrusions.
c.
Masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar, and all excess
mortar sitting on masonry ties has been removed.
07272 - 7

Phase 2
d.
4.
5.
3.2
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.3
All joints between gypsum sheathing, roof board, masonry and concrete and
other substrates wider than 1/4 shall be sealed as recommended by
manufacturer.
Verify substrate is surface dry. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method
according to ASTM D 4263 and take suitable measures until substrate passes
moisture test. Surface dry is an acceptable substrate condition if acceptable to the
manufacturer.
Verify sealants used in sheathing are compatible with membrane proposed for use.
Perform field peel-adhesion test on materials to which sealants are adhered.
Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturers written instructions.

Provide clean, dust-free and dry substrate for air and vapor barrier application.
Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane.
Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.
At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners
and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.
Prime substrate for application of fluid-applied air and vapor barrier recommended by
manufacturer.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
General: Install fluid-applied membrane air-barrier and accessory materials according to

air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and
maintain a continuous air barrier.
1.
Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and
base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.
2.
Install air-barrier assembly on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum
of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate.
Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that
will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more
than 24 hours.
1.
Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to
achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.
2.
Prime masonry, concrete substrate with conditioning primer.
3.
Prime wood, metal and painted substrates with primer.
4.
Prepare, treat and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and
penetrations through air and vapor barrier and at protrusions.
Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air
barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and
window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior
door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory
materials.
At end of each working day, seal top edge of air barrier to substrate with flexible
termination mastic.
07272 - 8

Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
3.4
Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls,
storefronts, and doors. Apply transitions and flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of
coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm
bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact.
Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and
miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant.
Seal air-barrier assembly around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with
termination mastic.
Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier. Provide 6 inch minimum wide strip of
manufacturers recommended membrane counter-flashing to seal top of through-wall
flashing to membrane or as recommended by manufacturer.
Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed
by metal counter-flashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.
Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams. Slit and flatten fishmouths and
blisters. Extend patches 6 inches beyond repaired areas.
Fluid-Applied Membrane Material: Apply a continuous unbroken air-barrier membrane to
substrates according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier membrane in full contact
around protrusions such as masonry ties.
1.
Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended
in writing by manufacturer to meet performance requirements, but not less
than 40-mil dry film thickness, applied in one or more equal coats.
Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency.
Inspect installation prior to enclosing assembly and correct deficiencies in or remove air
barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air-barrier
components.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Inspections: Air-barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for
compliance with requirements.
Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
1.
Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.
2.
Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified
above.
Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions.
Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction
period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as
required by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for more than the
manufacturers recommended exposure period, remove and replace air barrier or
install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier application after repairing and preparing
the overexposed membrane according to air-barrier manufacturer's written
instructions.
2.
Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not
approved by air-barrier manufacturer.
Remove masking materials after installation.
07272 - 9

Phase 2
3.5
PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A.
B.
Protect vapor permeable air barrier assemblies from damage during application and
remainder of construction period, according to manufacturers written instructions.
1.
Coordinate with installation of materials which cover vapor permeable air barrier, to
ensure exposure period does not exceed that recommended by the vapor permeable
air barrier manufacturer.
Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction and acceptable to the primary
material manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
07272 - 10

Phase 2
SECTION 07419
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
B.
C.
D.

1.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge
conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim,
flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.
2.
Accessories: Include details of flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of
not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied
color finishes.
1.
Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below:
1.
Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and
other metal panel accessories.
A.
B.
C.
1.6
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Metal soffit panels.
A.
1.4

Qualification Data: For Installer.

Product Test Reports: For each product, tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
03798614
03/15
Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
07419 - 1

Phase 2
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
1.8

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.9
Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged
or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.
Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting,
and surface damage.
Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight
and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for
drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might
cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.
Copper Panels: Wear gloves when handling to prevent fingerprints and soiling of surface.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
1.10
UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming
equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as
factory-formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for
duration of work.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1.
Build mockup of typical roof eave and soffit as shown on Drawings; approximately
four panels wide by full eave width, including attachments and accessories.
2.
3.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers'
written instructions and warranty requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
03798614
03/15
Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of
walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive
installation.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
07419 - 2

Phase 2
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
B.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b.
Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1.
Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to
ASTM D 2244.
b.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of
the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:
1.
Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2.
Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
3.
Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.
Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to
ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.
Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.
Test-Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf/sq. ft.
changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
General: Provide metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and

interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to
supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for
weathertight installation.
Metal Soffit Panels: Match profile and material of metal wall panels.
1.
Finish: As indicated on Drawings.
2.
Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
07419 - 3

Phase 2
C.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.4
Flush-Profile Metal Soffit Panels: Solid panels formed with vertical panel edges and a flat
pan between panel edges; with flush joint between panels.
1.
Material: Same material, finish, and color as metal wall panels.
2.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated
steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation;
structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with
ASTM A 755/A 755M.
a.
Nominal Thickness: 0.028 inch.
b.
Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
c.
Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated

steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M,
Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide
manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel
system.
Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system
including trim, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefinfoam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-thick, flexible closure
strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where
indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels
as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Finish flashing and
trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.
Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed
fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factoryapplied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.
Panel Sealants: Provide sealant types recommended by manufacturer that are compatible
with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.
1.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene
compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic,
nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
2.
Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain
weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
3.
Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's
standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with
dimensional and structural requirements.
On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels
may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are
of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
07419 - 4

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
2.5
Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with

details shown.
Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
length of panel.
Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that
provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise
from movements.
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item
indicated.
1.
Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed
edges folded back to form hems.
2.
Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form
seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
3.
Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with
flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
4.
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate
sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards.
5.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are
not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
6.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal
panel manufacturer.
a.
Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or
metal soffit panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of
metal being secured.
FINISHES
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components
are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or
installed to minimize contrast.
Steel Panels and Accessories:
1.
Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply
coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
2.
Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or lightcolored acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat
with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
07419 - 5

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
1.
Examine framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural
panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment
tolerances required by metal panel manufacturer.
2.
Examine sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or
blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal panel
manufacturer.
a.
Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers been installed over sheathing or
backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.
Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support
members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's
written recommendations.
1.
Soffit Framing: Wire tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply
with requirements for assemblies indicated.
METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in

orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless
otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1.
Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels.
2.
Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping
screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings
that will be concealed by metal panels are installed.
3.
Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
4.
Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5.
Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds.
6.
Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel
splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
7.
Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.
Fasteners:
1.
Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use
galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
07419 - 6

Phase 2
D.
E.
F.
3.4
Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint
at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1.
Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure.
2.
Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather
side of metal panels.
3.
Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without
rupture of washer.
4.
Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to
compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install
screws in predrilled holes.
Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and
weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with
flashings and other components.
1.
Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim,
corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar
items. Provide types indicated by metal panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated,
provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written
installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide
concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install
work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.
1.
Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling, and tool marks, and that is
true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to achieve waterproof
performance.
2.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within
24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be
used or would not be waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked
flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within
joints).
CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.
B.
C.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are
installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal
panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt,
and sealant.
Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
07419 - 7

Phase 2
SECTION 07420
ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3
The extent of panel system work is indicated on the drawings and in these specifications.
Panel system requirements include the following components:
1.
Aluminum faced composite panels with mounting system. Panel mounting system
including anchorages, shims, furring, fasteners, gaskets and sealants, related flashing
adapters, and masking (as required) for a complete installation.
2.
Parapet coping, column covers, soffits, sills, border, and filler items indicated as
integral components of the panel system or as designed.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.4

Section 05120 - Structural Steel Framing.

Section 07210 - Building Insulation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
Composite Panel Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the

manufacturing of this product.
Composite Panel Manufacturer shall be solely responsible for panel manufacture and
application of the finish.
Fabricator/installer shall be acceptable to the composite panel manufacturer.
Fabricator/Installer shall have a minimum 5 years experience of metal panel work similar in
scope and size to this project.
Field measurements should be taken prior to the completion of shop fabrication whenever
possible. However, coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress as directed by
the Contractor to avoid delay of work. Field fabrication may be allowed to ensure proper fit.
However, field fabrication shall be kept to an absolute minimum with the majority of the
fabrication being done under controlled shop conditions.
Shop drawings shall show the preferred joint details providing a structurally sound wall panel
system that allows no uncontrolled water penetration on the inside face of the panel system as
determined by ASTM E 331. Systems not utilizing a construction sealant at the panel joints
(i.e., Rout and Return Dry and Rear Ventilated System) shall provide a means of concealed
drainage with baffles and weeps for water which may accumulate in members of the system.
Maximum deviation from vertical and horizontal alignment of erected panels: 1/4" in 20'
non-accumulative.
07420 - 1

Phase 2
H.
I.
1.5
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.6
Panel fabricator/installer shall assume undivided responsibility for all components of the
exterior panel system including, but not limited to attachment to sub-construction, panel to
panel joinery, panel to dissimilar material joinery, and joint seal associated with the panel
system.
Composite panel manufacturer shall have established a Certification Program acceptable to the
local Code Authorities.
Aluminum Association
1.
AA-M12C22A41: Anodized - Clear Coating.
2.
AA-M12C22A44: Anodized - Color Coating.
American Architectural Manufacturers Association
1.
AAMA 508-05: Voluntary Test Method and Specification for Pressure Equalized Rain
Screen Wall Cladding Systems.
American Society for Testing and Materials
1.
E 330: Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under
the Influence of Wind Loads.
2.
E 283: Rate of Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors.
3.
D 1781: Climbing Drum Peel Test for Adhesives.
4.
E 84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
5.
D 1929: Standard Test for Ignition Properties of Plastics.
6.
D 3363: Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test.
7.
D 2794: Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact).
8.
D 3359: Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.
9.
D 2247: Practice for TestingWater Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity.
10. B 117: Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing.
11. D 2244: Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color
Coordinates.
12. D 4214: Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films.
13. D 822: Practice for Operating Light and Water Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type)
for Testing Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products.
14. D 1308: Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes.
International Conference of Building Officials
1.
NFPA 285 Intermediate Scale Multi Story Test.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Submittals shall be in conformance with Section 01330.

Samples
1.
Panel System Assembly: Two samples of each type of assembly. 12" x 12" minimum.
2.
Two samples of each color or finish selected, 3" x 4" minimum.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing project layout and elevations; fastening and
anchoring methods; detail and location of joints, sealants, and gaskets, including joints
necessary to accommodate thermal movement; trim; flashing; and accessories.
Affidavit certifying material meets requirements specified.
Two copies of manufacturer's literature for panel material.
07420 - 2

Phase 2
F.
G.
1.7
Code Compliance: Documents showing product compliance with the national and local
building code shall be submitted prior to the bid. These documents shall include, but not be
limited to, appropriate Evaluation Reports and/or test reports supporting the use of the product.
Alternate materials must be approved by the architect prior to the bid date.

A.
B.
Protect finish and edges in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommendations.

Store material in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PANELS
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Composite Panels
1.
ALPOLIC PE or ALUCOBOND PLUS.
2.
Items of the same function and performance, which have received prior approval from
the architect, shall be allowed for this project. Approval shall be based on
documentation submitted showing the adequacy of the material.
Thickness: 0.157".
Product Performance
1.
Bond Integrity
a.
When tested for bond integrity, in accordance with ASTM D 1781 (simulating
resistance to panel delamination), there shall be no adhesive failure of the bond
a) between the core and the skin nor b) cohesive failure of the core itself below
the following values:
1)
Peel Strength:
(a)
22.5 in lb./in. as manufactured.
(b) 22.5 in lb./in. after 21 days soaking in water at 70 F.
2.
Fire Performance
a.
ASTM E 84 - Max. Flame Spread 25, Max. Smoke Developed 450.
b.
NFPA 285 - Panels shall meet requirements of the Intermediate Scale Multi
Story Test.
Finishes
1.
Coil coated KYNAR 500 or HYLAR 5000 based Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) or
Fluoro Ethylene - Alkyl Vinyl Ether (FEVE) resin in conformance with the following
general requirements of AAMA 2605.
a.
Color:
1)
Standard color as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard
colors.
b.
Coating Thickness:
1)
Colors: 1.0 mil ( 0.2 mil).
2)
Clear: 0.50 mil ( 0.05 mil).
c.
Hardness: ASTM D 3363; HB minimum using Eagle Turquoise Pencil.
d.
Impact:
1)
Test method: ASTM D 2794; Gardner Variable Impact Tester with 5/8"
mandrel.
2)
Coating shall withstand reverse impact of 1.5 in lb. per mil substrate
thickness.
07420 - 3

Phase 2
3)
2.
3.
4.
03798614
03/15
Coating shall adhere tightly to metal when subjected to #600 Scotch Tape
pick-off test. Slight minute cracking permissible. No removal of film to
substrate.
e.
Adhesion:
1)
Test Method: ASTM D 3359.
2)
Coating shall not pick off when subjected to a grid of 11 cuts x 11 cuts,
1/16" apart, and taped with #600 Scotch Tape.
f.
Humidity Resistance
1)
Test Method: ASTM D 2247.
2)
No formation of blisters when subjected to condensing water fog at 100%
relative humidity and 100F for 4000 hours.
g.
Salt Spray Resistance:
1)
Test Method: ASTM B 117; Expose coating system to 4000 hours, using
5% NaCl solution.
2)
Corrosion creepage from scribe line: 1/16" max.
3)
Minimum blister rating of 8 within the test specimen field.
h.
Weather Exposure
1)
Outdoor:
(a)
Ten-year exposure at 45 angle facing south Florida exposure.
(b) Maximum color change of 5 Delta E units as calculated in
accordance with ASTM D 2244.
(c)
Maximum chalk rating of 8 in accordance with ASTM D 4214.
(d) No checking, crazing, adhesion loss.
i.
Chemical Resistance:
1)
ASTM D 1308 utilizing 10% Muriatic Acid for an exposure time of 15
minutes. No loss of film adhesion or visual change when viewed by the
unaided eye.
2)
ASTM D 1308 utilizing 20% Sulfuric Acid for an exposure time of 18
hours. No loss of film adhesion or visual change when viewed by the
unaided eye.
3)
AAMA 2605 utilizing 70% reagent grade Nitric Acid vapor for an
exposure time of 30 minutes. Maximum color change of 5 Delta E units
as calculated in accordance with ASTM D 2244.
Anodized:
a.
Clear Coating: AA-M12C22A41 Architectural Class I.
b.
Color Coating: AA-M12C22A44, light bronze, medium bronze, dark bronze and
black, Architectural Class I.
Urethane Coating: For small quantity aluminum accent panels or custom color
applications, provide a multi coat urethane finish in accordance with the paint
manufacturer's requirements.
High Performance Clear: For application over pretreated natural and brushed aluminum
substrates, provide a high performance single coat clear finish.
07420 - 4

Phase 2
2.2
PANEL FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
03798614
03/15
Composition: Two sheets of aluminum sandwiching a solid core of extruded thermoplastic

material formed in a continuous process with no glues or adhesives between dissimilar
materials. The core material shall be free of voids and/or air spaces and not contain foamed
insulation material. Products laminated sheet by sheet in a batch process using glues or
adhesives between materials shall not be acceptable.
Aluminum Face Sheets:
1.
Thickness:
a.
0.0197" (nominal).
2.
Alloy:
a.
AA3000 Series (Painted material).
b.
AA5000 Series (Anodized material).
Panel Weight: 0.157": 1.55 lb/ft.
Tolerances
1.
Panel Bow: Maximum 0.8% of any 72 panel dimension.
2.
Panel Dimensions: Field fabrication shall be allowed where necessary, but shall be kept
to an absolute minimum. All fabrication shall be done under controlled shop conditions
when possible.
3.
Panel lines, breaks, and angles shall be sharp, true, and surfaces free from warp and
buckle.
4.
Maximum deviation from panel flatness shall be 1/8" in 5'0" on panel in any direction
for assembled units. (Non-accumulative - No Oil Canning)
System Characteristics
1.
Plans, elevations, details, characteristics, and other requirements indicated are based
upon standards by one manufacturer. It is intended that other manufacturers, receiving
prior approval, may be acceptable, provided their details and characteristics comply
with size and profile requirements, and material/performance standards.
2.
System must not generally have any visible fasteners, telegraphing or fastening on the
panel faces or any other compromise of a neat and flat appearance.
3.
System shall comply with the applicable provisions of the "Metal Curtain Wall,
Window, Storefront, and Entrance Guide Specifications Manual" by AAMA and
ANSI/AAMA 302.9 requirements for aluminum windows.
4.
Fabricate panel system to dimension, size, and profile indicated on the drawings based
on a design temperature of 70F.
5.
Fabricate panel system so that no restraints can be placed on the panel, which might
result in compressive skin stresses. The installation detailing shall be such that the
panels remain flat regardless of temperature change and at all times remain air and
water tight.
6.
The finish side of the panel shall have a removable plastic masking applied prior to
fabrication, which shall remain on the panel during fabrication, shipping, and erection
to protect the surface from damage.
System Type
Rout and Return Dry: System must provide a perimeter aluminum extrusion with
1.
integral weather-stripping as detailed on Drawings.
07420 - 5

Phase 2
G.
2.3
System Performance
1.
Composite panels shall be capable of withstanding building movements and weather
exposures based on the following test standards required by the Architect and/or the
local building code.
a.
Wind Load: To comply with the following minimum standards:
1)
Panels shall be designed to withstand the Design Wind Load based upon
the local building code, but in no case less than 20 lb/ft2 and 30 lb/ft2 on
parapet and corner panels. Wind load testing shall be conducted in
accordance with ASTM E 330 to obtain the following results.
2)
Normal to the plane of the wall between supports, deflection of the
secured perimeter-framing members shall not exceed L/175 or 3/4",
whichever is less.
3)
Normal to the plane of the wall, the maximum panel deflection shall not
exceed L/60 of the full span.
4)
Maximum anchor deflection shall not exceed 1/16".
5)
At 1-1/2 times design pressure, permanent deflections of framing
members shall not exceed L/100 of span length and components shall not
experience failure or gross permanent distortion. At connection points of
framing members to anchors, permanent set shall not exceed 1/16".
b.
Air/Water System Test: System tests shall be performed by an independent third
party laboratory, which show compliance to the following minimum standards:
1)
Air Infiltration - When tested in accordance with ASTM E 283, air
infiltration at 1.57 lb/ft2 must not exceed 0.06 ft3/min. per ft of wall area.
2)
Water Infiltration - Water infiltration is defined as uncontrolled water
leakage through the exterior face of the assembly. Systems not using a
construction sealant at the panel joints (i.e. Rout and Return Dry and Rear
Ventilated Systems) shall be designed to drain any water leakage
occurring at the joints. No water infiltration shall occur in any system
under a differential static pressure of 6.24 lb/ft2 after 15 minutes of
exposure in accordance with ASTM E 331.
3)
Pressure Equalized Rain Screen Systems shall comply with AAMA 50805 Voluntary Test Method and Specification for Pressure Equalized Rain
Screen Wall Cladding Systems.
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Extrusions, formed members, sheet, and plate shall conform with ASTM B 209 and the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
Panel stiffeners, if required, shall be structurally fastened or restrained at the ends and shall be
secured to the rear face of the composite panel with silicone of sufficient size and strength to
maintain panel flatness. Stiffener material and/or finish shall be compatible with the silicone.
Sealants and gaskets within the panel system shall be as per manufacturer's standards to meet
performance requirements.
Fabricate flashing materials from 0.030" minimum thickness aluminum sheet painted to match
the adjacent curtain wall / panel system where exposed. Provide a lap strap under the flashing
at abutted conditions and seal lapped surfaces with a full bed of non-hardening sealant.
Fasteners (concealed/exposed/non-corrosive): Fasteners as recommended by panel
manufacturer. Do not expose fasteners except where unavoidable and then match finish of
adjoining metal.
07420 - 6

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
B.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.3
Surfaces to receive panels shall be even, smooth, sound, clean, dry and free from defects
detrimental to work. Notify contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and
timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
Surfaces to receive panels shall be structurally sound as determined by a registered
Architect/Engineer.
Erect panels plumb, level, and true.

Attachment system shall allow for the free and noiseless vertical and horizontal thermal
movement due to expansion and contraction for a material temperature range of -20F to
+180F. Buckling of panels, opening of joints, undue stress on fasteners, failure of sealants or
any other detrimental effects due to thermal movement will not be permitted.
Fabrication, assembly, and erection procedure shall account for the ambient temperature at the
time of the respective operation.
Panels shall be erected in accordance with an approved set of shop drawings.
Anchor panels securely per engineering recommendations and in accordance with approved
shop drawings to allow for necessary thermal movement and structural support.
Conform to panel fabricator's instructions for installation of concealed fasteners.
Do not install component parts that are observed to be defective, including warped, bowed,
dented, abraised, and broken members.
Do not cut, trim, weld, or braze component parts during erection in a manner which would
damage the finish, decrease strength, or result in visual imperfection or a failure in
performance. Return component parts which require alteration to shop for refabrication, if
possible, or for replacement with new parts.
Separate dissimilar metals and use gasketed fasteners where needed to eliminate the possibility
of corrosive or electrolytic action between metals.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Remove and replace panels damaged beyond repair as a direct result of the panel installation.
After installation, panel repair and replacement shall become the responsibility of the General
Contractor.
Repair panels with minor damage.
Remove masking (if used) as soon as possible after installation. Masking intentionally left in
place after panel installation on an elevation, shall become the responsibility of the General
Contractor.
Any additional protection, after installation, shall be the responsibility of the General
Contractor.
Make sure weep holes and drainage channels are unobstructed and free of dirt and sealants.
Final cleaning shall not be part of the work of this section.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
07420 - 7

Phase 2
SECTION 07540
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3
Section 05310 - Steel Deck: Supporting construction.

Section 07015 - Preparation for Reroofing.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Seals in adjoining construction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.5
Fully adhered membrane roofing systems.

Patch/connection (curb) to existing roof areas.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.4

Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install

manufacturers products.
Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from approved
roofing membrane manufacturer.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-test
response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method
below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.
Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes
indicated.
2.
Factory Mutual Global (FMG) Class 1A; fire and wind resistant.
Single Source
1.
Provide primary products, including but not limited to, membrane, membrane
flashing, and adhesive from a single manufacturer.
2.
Provide secondary products as recommended by manufacturer of primary products
for use with roofing system specified.
Insulation k Values
1.
k values indicated are based on 75 deg F.
2.
Provide insulations with conditioned k values complying with PIMA Technical
Bulletin 100 Conditions Procedures.
WARRANTY
A.
03798614
03/15
Special Warranty: Manufacturers standard form, without monetary limitation, in which

manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail
07540 - 1

Phase 2
in materials or workmanship within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure
includes roof leaks.
1.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.7
Conform to applicable International Building Code 2009 requirements for roof assembly fire
hazard requirements.
Provide membrane roofing materials with a fire-test-response characteristics indicated as
determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG or other testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Exterior fire - Test Exposer: Class B, ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes
indicated.
Wind Uplift: Provide a system with a wind uplift resistance complying with IBC 2003 and
FMG Roof Assembly Classification, Class I Construction, 1-90 requirements in accordance
with FMG Construction Bulletins.
Impact Resistance: Provide a system complying with FM 4470 Class I - MH requirements
to provide a minimum of 8 ft lbs of impact resistance.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Product Data: For each product indicated.

Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
Samples: For each product included in membrane roofing system.
Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
2.2
Carlisle SynTec Incorporated; Surewhite fully adhered system.

Stevens Roofing Systems; Div. of JPS Elastomerics; GP fully adhered system.
Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING MEMBRANE

A.
03798614
03/15
Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: Uniform, flexible sheet formed from a

thermoplastic polyolefin, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, and as follows:
1.
Thickness: 0.080, nominal.
2.
Exposed Face Color: White.
3.
Physical Properties:
a.
Breaking Strength: 390 lbf; ASTM D 751, grab method.
b.
Elongation at Break: 15 percent; ASTM D 751.
c.
Tearing Strength: 100 lbf minimum; ASTM D 751, Procedure B.
d.
Brittleness Point: Minus 49 deg F; ASTM D-2137.
e.
Ozone Resistance: No cracks after sample, wrapped around a 3-inch-diameter
mandrel, is exposed for 166 hours to a temperature of 104 deg F and an ozone
level of 100 pphmmPa); ASTM D 1149.
f.
Resistance to Heat Aging: 90 percent minimum retention of breaking strength,
elongation at break, and tearing strength after 166 hours at 240 deg F;
ASTM D 573.
07540 - 2

Phase 2
g.
h.
2.3
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.4
General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with membrane roofing.
Sheet Flashing: Manufacturers standard sheet flashing of same material, type,
reinforcement, thickness, and color as PVC sheet membrane.
Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturers standard TPO solvent and/or water-based bonding
adhesive for membrane, and solvent-based bonding adhesive for base flashings.
Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturers standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum
bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion
resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and
acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, termination
reglets, cover strips, slip sheet, and other accessories.
ROOF INSULATION
A.
B.
C.
2.5
Water Absorption: Less than 4 percent mass change after 166 hours immersion
at 158 deg F; ASTM D 471.
Linear Dimension Change: Plus or minus 0.5 percent; ASTM D 6878.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, glass-fiber mat facer on both
major surfaces.
1.
Provide thickness required for a R rating of R-22 minimum on overall roof
insulation.
Perlite Board Insulation: ASTM C 728; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers,
binders, and waterproofing agents with top surface seal-coated.
1.
Provide 1/2 minimum thickness.
Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to minimum 1/4 inch/foot slope when installed.
INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion
resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to

precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturers written instructions for installing
roof insulation.
Install two layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Install
layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a
minimum of 6 inches in each direction.
07540 - 3

Phase 2
D.
3.2
FULLY ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A.
B.
C.
3.3
Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system
manufacturers written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before
installing.
Bonding Adhesive: Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of
roofing membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before
installing roofing membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing
membrane.
Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of
roofing membrane according to manufacturers written instructions to ensure a watertight
seam installation.
1.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that does not meet
requirements.
BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.4
Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using
mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof
insulation to deck type. Size fasteners to provide minimum penetration through deck.
1.
Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according
to membrane roofing system manufacturers written instructions.
Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at
required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of
flashing.
Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing.
Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side
and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.

A.
B.
Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturers technical personnel to
inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or
inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
07540 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 07591
PREPARATION FOR REROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.3
B.
B.
C.
Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA
Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.
Full Roof Tear-Off: Removal of existing roofing system from deck (Bid Alternate).
Partial Roof Tear-Off: Removal of selected components and accessories from existing
roofing system or as necessary to patch/extend onto new curb divider at new construction.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.6
Section 01110 - Summary of Work and Special Requirements: Use of the premises and
phasing requirements.
Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities & Controls: Temporary construction and
environmental-protection measures for reroofing preparation.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.5
Full tear-off of existing roof areas indicated (Bid Alternate).

Removal of base flashings at areas of parapet removal.
Patch and extend existing roofing onto new curb divider at new construction.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4


Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, and details.
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15

1.
Include certificate that Installer is approved by warrantor of existing roofing system,
if applicable.
Fastener pull-out test report.
Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site
improvements, including exterior and interior finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued
as having been damaged by reroofing operations. Submit before Work begins.
Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of demolished roofing materials and
hazardous wastes, such as asbestos-containing materials, by a landfill facility licensed to
accept them.
07591 - 1

Phase 2
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
1.8
Installer Qualifications: Approved by warrantor of existing roofing system to work on

existing roofing, if applicable.
beginning roofing removal. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
Reroofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
Meet with Owner; Architect; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting
agency representative; roofing system manufacturer's representative; roofing
Installer, including project manager, superintendent, and foreman; and installers
whose work interfaces with or affects reroofing, including installers of roof deck,
roof accessories, and roof-mounted equipment.
2.
Review methods and procedures related to roofing system tear-off and replacement,
including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
Reroofing preparation, including roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions.
b.
Temporary protection requirements for existing roofing system components
that are to remain.
c.
Existing roof drains and roof drainage during each stage of reroofing, and
roof-drain plugging and plug removal.
d.
Construction schedule and availability of materials, Installer's personnel,
equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.
e.
Existing roof deck conditions requiring notification of Architect.
f.
Existing roof deck removal procedures and Owner notifications.
g.
Condition and acceptance of existing roof deck and base flashing substrate for
reuse.
h.
Structural loading limitations of roof deck during reroofing.
i.
Base flashings, special roofing details, drainage, penetrations, equipment
curbs, and condition of other construction that affect reroofing.
j.
HVAC shutdown and sealing of air intakes.
k.
Shutdown of fire-suppression, -protection, and -alarm and -detection systems.
l.
Asbestos removal and discovery of asbestos-containing materials.
m.
Governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
n.
Existing conditions that may require notification of Architect before
proceeding.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
03798614
03/15
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately below reroofing area. Conduct
reroofing so Owner's operations are not disrupted. Provide Owner with not less than
72 hours' notice of activities that may affect Owner's operations.
1.
Coordinate work activities daily with Owner so Owner can place protective dust and
water-leakage covers over sensitive equipment and furnishings, shut down HVAC
and fire-alarm or -detection equipment if needed, and evacuate occupants from
below work area.
2.
Before working over structurally impaired areas of deck, notify Owner to evacuate
occupants from below affected area. Verify that occupants below work area have
been evacuated before proceeding with work over impaired deck area.
07591 - 2

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.9
Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior

plantings, and landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing operations.
Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding are maintained by Owner as far as
practical.
1.
A roof moisture survey of existing roofing system is available for Contractor's
reference.
2.
The results of an analysis of test cores from existing roofing system are available for
Contractor's reference.
3.
Construction Drawings and Project Manual for existing roofing system are provided
for Contractor's convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing
conditions. They are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Contractor's
own investigations. Contractor is responsible for conclusions derived from existing
documents.
Limit construction loads on roof to for rooftop equipment wheel loads and for uniformly
distributed loads.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofing preparation only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering existing
roofing system or building.
1.
Remove only as much roofing in one day as can be made watertight in the same day.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials, such as asbestoscontaining materials, will be encountered in the Work.
1.
Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. Existing
roof will be left no less watertight than before removal.
2.
disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be
removed by Owner under a separate contract.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during reroofing, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing roofing
system warranty. Notify warrantor before proceeding.
1.
Notify warrantor of existing roofing system on completion of reroofing, and obtain
documentation verifying that existing roofing system has been inspected and
warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INFILL AND REPLACEMENT MATERIALS

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Use infill materials matching existing roofing system materials unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Infill materials are specified in Section 07540 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing
unless otherwise indicated.
Steel deck is specified in Section 05310 - Steel Deck.
Wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are specified in Section 06105 - Miscellaneous
Carpentry.
Plywood roof sheathing is specified in Section 06125 - Sheathing.
07591 - 3

Phase 2
E.
2.2
Plywood Parapet Sheathing: Exterior fire-retardant-treated plywood wall sheathing, 19/32

inch thick, complying with Section 06125 - Sheathing.
AUXILIARY REROOFING MATERIALS

A.
General: Use auxiliary reroofing preparation materials recommended by roofing system

manufacturer for intended use and compatible with components of existing and new
roofing system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.2
Shut off rooftop utilities and service piping before beginning the Work.
Test existing roof drains to verify that they are not blocked or restricted. Immediately
notify Architect of any blockages or restrictions.
Protect existing roofing system that is not to be reroofed.
1.
Loosely lay 1-inch-minimum thick, expanded polystyrene (EPS) insulation over
existing roofing in areas indicated. Loosely lay 15/32-inch plywood or OSB panels
over EPS. Extend EPS past edges of plywood or OSB panels a minimum of 1 inch.
2.
Limit traffic and material storage to areas of existing roofing that have been
protected.
3.
Maintain temporary protection and leave in place until replacement roofing has been
completed. Remove temporary protection on completion of reroofing.
Coordinate with Owner to shut down air-intake equipment in the vicinity of the Work.
Cover air-intake louvers before proceeding with reroofing work that could affect indoor air
quality or activate smoke detectors in the ductwork.
During removal operations, have sufficient and suitable materials on-site to facilitate rapid
installation of temporary protection in the event of unexpected rain.
Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each
workday. Prevent debris from entering or blocking roof drains and conductors. Use roofdrain plugs specifically designed for this purpose. Remove roof-drain plugs at end of each
workday, when no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast.
1.
If roof drains are temporarily blocked or unserviceable due to roofing system
removal or partial installation of new roofing system, provide alternative drainage
method to remove water and eliminate ponding. Do not permit water to enter into or
under existing roofing system components that are to remain.
ROOF TEAR-OFF
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
General: Notify Owner each day of extent of roof tear-off proposed for that day and obtain
authorization to proceed.
Remove pavers and accessories from roofing. Store and protect pavers and accessories for
reuse. Discard cracked pavers.
Full Roof Tear-Off: Where indicated, remove existing roofing and other roofing system
components down to the deck.
1.
Remove wood blocking, curbs, and nailers.
2.
Remove fasteners from deck or cut fasteners off slightly above deck surface.
Partial Roof Tear-Off: Where indicated, remove existing roofing and immediately check
for presence of moisture by visually observing substrate that is to remain.
07591 - 4

Phase 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.3
DECK PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.4
Coordinate with Owner's inspector to schedule times for tests and inspections
immediately after removal.
With an electrical capacitance moisture-detection meter, spot check substrate that is
to remain.
Remove wet or damp materials below existing roofing and above deck.
Inspect wood blocking, curbs, and nailers for deterioration and damage. If wood
blocking, curbs, or nailers have deteriorated, immediately notify Architect.
Bitumen and felts that are firmly bonded to concrete decks are permitted to remain if
felts are dry. Remove unadhered bitumen, unadhered felts, and wet felts.
Remove excess asphalt from steel deck that is exposed by removal of wet or damp
materials. A maximum of 15 lb./100 sq. ft. of asphalt is permitted to remain on steel
decks.
Remove fasteners from deck or cut fasteners off slightly above deck surface.
Inspect deck after tear-off of roofing system.

Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary
moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263 or by pouring 1 pint of hot
roofing asphalt on deck at start of each day's work and at start of each roof area or plane.
Do not proceed with roofing work if moisture condenses under plastic sheet or if asphalt
test sample foams or can be easily and cleanly stripped after cooling.
If broken or loose fasteners that secure deck panels to one another or to structure are
observed, or if deck appears or feels inadequately attached, immediately notify Architect.
Do not proceed with installation until directed by Architect.
If deck surface is unsuitable for receiving new roofing or if structural integrity of deck is
suspect, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed by
Architect.
Provide additional deck securement as indicated on Drawings.
Replace steel deck as indicated on Drawings.
Replace steel deck as directed by Architect. Deck replacement will be paid for by adjusting
the Contract Sum according to unit prices included in the Contract Documents.
Prepare and paint steel deck surface. Painting and preparation for painting is specified in
Section 09911 - Exterior Painting.
Replace plywood roof sheathing as indicated on Drawings.
Replace plywood roof sheathing as directed by Architect. Roof sheathing replacement will
be paid for by adjusting the Contract Sum according to unit prices included in the Contract
Documents.
INFILL MATERIALS INSTALLATION

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Immediately after roof tear-off, and inspection and repair, if needed, of deck, fill in tear-off
areas to match existing roofing system construction.
1.
Installation of infill materials is specified in Section 07540 - Thermoplastic
Membrane Roofing.
2.
Installation of wood blocking, curbs, and nailers is specified in Section 06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry.
Install new roofing patch over roof infill area. If new roofing is installed the same day tearoff is made, roofing patch is not required.
07591 - 5

Phase 2
3.5
BASE FLASHING REMOVAL

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.6
FASTENER PULL-OUT TESTING

A.
3.7
Remove existing base flashings. Clean substrates of contaminants, such as asphalt, sheet
materials, dirt, and debris.
Do not damage metal counterflashings that are to remain. Replace metal counterflashings
damaged during removal with counterflashings of same metal, weight or thickness, and
finish.
Inspect parapet sheathing, wood blocking, curbs, and nailers for deterioration and damage.
If parapet sheathing, wood blocking, curbs, or nailers have deteriorated, immediately notify
Architect.
Remove existing parapet sheathing and replace with new parapet sheathing to comply with
Section 06125 - Sheathing. If parapet framing, wood blocking, curbs, or nailers have
deteriorated, immediately notify Architect.
When directed by Architect, replace parapet framing, wood blocking, curbs, and nailers to
comply with Section 06105 - Miscellaneous Carpentry.
Perform fastener pull-out tests according to SPRI FX-1, and submit test report to Architect
before installing new roofing system.
1.
Obtain Architect's approval to proceed with specified fastening pattern. Architect
may furnish revised fastening pattern commensurate with pull-out test results.
DISPOSAL
A.
B.
Collect demolished materials and place in containers. Promptly dispose of demolished

materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
1.
Storage or sale of demolished items or materials on-site is not permitted.
Transport and legally dispose of demolished materials off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
07591 - 6

Phase 2
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
C.
D.
B.
Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of
penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.
Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall
materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
A.
1.6
Section 06105 - Miscellaneous Carpentry: Wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.

Section 07420 - Aluminum Composite Panel: Sheet metal flashing and trim integral with
metal wall panels.
Section 07540 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Materials and installation of sheet
metal flashing and trim integral with roofing.
Section 07720 - Roof Accessories: Set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches,
vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.
COORDINATION
A.
1.5
Manufactured through-wall flashing.

Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.
Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
Formed equipment support flashing.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
1.4


1.
Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,
equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2.
Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment
curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim.
3.
Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
4.
Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing
installation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
03798614
03/15

1.
components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.
07620 - 1

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
1.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.8
Qualification Data: For fabricator.

Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing.
Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.9
Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2.
Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed
details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.
3.
Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and
location in Project.
4.
Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
5.
Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of
fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
6.
Include details of termination points and assemblies.
7.
Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing
direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points.
8.
Include details of roof-penetration flashing.
9.
Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets,
and counterflashings as applicable.
10. Include details of special conditions.
11. Include details of connections to adjoining work.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with
factory-applied finishes.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.
1.
Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished
seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other
attachments.
2.
Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous
Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other
exposed accessories.
3.
Unit-Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.
4.
Anodized Aluminum Samples: Samples to show full range to be expected for each
color required.
Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in
maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
03798614
03/15
Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal
flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record
of successful in-service performance.
1.
For copings and roof edge flashings that are SPRI ES-1 tested and FM Approvals
approved, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and
approved.
07620 - 2

Phase 2
B.
1.10

A.
B.
1.11

1.
Build mockup of typical roof edge, including fascia and fascia trim, approximately
10 feet long, including supporting construction cleats, seams, attachments,
underlayment, and accessories.
2.
3.
Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that
might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim
materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.
Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to
sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing
and trim installation.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal
flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
1.
Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
ASTM D 2244.
b.
c.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural
movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed
sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions
and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install copings that are listed in FM Approvals'
"RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-60. Identify materials with
name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals.
SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings tested according to
SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure:
1.
Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.
07620 - 3

Phase 2
E.
2.2
SHEET METALS
A.
B.
2.3
General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by
applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required,
with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth,
flat surface.
1.
Color Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I,
0.018 mm or thicker.
a.
Color: Champagne.
b.
densities.
c.
Color Range: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are
within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
2.4
changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt;
nonperforated.
Synthetic Underlayment: Laminated or reinforced, woven polyethylene or polypropylene,
synthetic roofing underlayment; bitumen free; slip resistant; suitable for high temperatures
over 220 deg F; and complying with physical requirements of ASTM D 226/D 226M for
Type I and Type II felts.
Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb./100 sq. ft. minimum.
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and
as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless
Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets
and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and
recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal.
1.
General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a.
Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers
under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.
b.
Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for
metal being fastened.
c.
Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching
internal gutter width.
2.
Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
07620 - 4

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.5
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant

tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,
nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted
joints.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.
Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for
application.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
03798614
03/15
General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and
recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,
metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing
and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
1.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and
metal.
2.
Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
3.
Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges
folded back to form hems.
4.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed
fasteners on faces exposed to view.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of
installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on
Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching
profiles.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of
installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal
Roofing."
Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1.
Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,
filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
2.
Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to
provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal
standard.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended
use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and
seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
07620 - 5

Phase 2
2.6
LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.7
Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 12-foot-long, sections.

Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to
support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter
corners, solder or weld watertight. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.
1.
Coping Profile: As indicated.
2.
Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch-wide, concealed backup plate.
3.
Fabricate from the Following Materials:
a.
Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.
Roof-to-Wall Transition, Roof-to-Roof Edge-Flashing (Gravel-Stop) Transition, and
Fascia-Cap Transition Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following materials:
Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.
1.
Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. thick.
2.
3.
Stainless Steel: 0.025 inch thick.
Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following
materials:
1.
2.
3.
Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following
materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. thick.
Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
2.
3.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
2.
Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
2.
WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch-long, but not

exceeding 12-foot-long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate
discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall
openings; and form with 2-inch-high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings
to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch-high, end
dams. Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
07620 - 6

Phase 2
2.8
MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A.
B.
Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1.
Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
1.
Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2.
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
3.
Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or
backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use
of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to
shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.
Synthetic Underlayment: Install synthetic underlayment, wrinkle free, according to
manufacturers' written instructions, and using adhesive where possible to minimize use of
mechanical fasteners under sheet metal.
Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free.
Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature
restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing
underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of
not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less
than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlayment before installing sheet metal flashing and
trim.
A.
03798614
03/15
General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely
in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder,
protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform,
neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
07620 - 7

Phase 2
3.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.4
ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A.
B.
3.5
Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
4.
Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of
buckling and tool marks.
5.
Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
6.
Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts
pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent
separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
1.
Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing
and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous
metal, or cementitious construction.
2.
Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on
cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or
intersection.
1.
Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,
filled with sealant concealed within joints.
2.
Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4
inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to
minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a
tight installation.
Seal joints as required for watertight construction.
1.
Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint
members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant.
When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set
joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at
temperatures below 40 deg F.
2.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07900 Joint Sealers.
Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.
General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system
according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation
of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.
Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration
indicated. Lap joints minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow.
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A.
03798614
03/15
General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance
requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet
metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line,
07620 - 8

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.6
WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A.
3.7
General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation
of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and
louvers.
MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A.
B.
3.8
levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight
and weather resistant.
Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to
recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock
bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered
3-inch centers.
Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited
sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate
at 16-inch centers.
2.
Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes
at 24-inch centers.
Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with
top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing.
Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base
flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing.
Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of
4 inches. Secure in waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead
wedges and sealant unless otherwise indicated.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with
installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and
clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.
Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with

installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to
equipment support member.
Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans from structure above, independent of other
overhead items such as equipment, piping, and conduit, unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings. Pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drainage system.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed
tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and
within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed
tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."
07620 - 9

Phase 2
3.9

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
Clean off excess sealants.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and
trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused
materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim
manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during
construction.
Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
07620 - 10

Phase 2
SECTION 07720
ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
C.
D.
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Metal vertical ladders.

Section 05521 - Pipe and Tube Railings: Safety railing systems not attached to roof-hatch
curbs.
Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Shop- and field-formed metal flashing and
miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories.
Section 08630 - Metal-Framed Skylights: Single- and double-glazed domed plastic
skylights with curb frame.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
1.5
Roof curbs.
Equipment supports.
Roof hatches.
Preformed flashing sleeves.
Roof walkways.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
1.4

Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base
flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight,
secure, and noncorrosive installation.
Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be
supported.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Product Data: For each type of roof accessory.

1.
components and profiles, and finishes.
Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.
1.
Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate
dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and fieldassembled work.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For roof curbs, equipment supports, and walkways indicated
to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.
Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof-mounted items to roof structure.
Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 1

Phase 2
2.
1.6
A.
B.
1.7
Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and
roof-mounted items. Show the following:
1.
Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.
2.
Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.
3.
Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork,
piping, and conduit.
4.
Required clearances.
Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.8
Wind-Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of wind restraints. Show

anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of
anchors.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of
deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1.
Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
ASTM D 2244.
b.
c.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
2.2
General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist
thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement
due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01450 Quality Control, to design roof curbs and equipment supports to comply with wind
performance requirements, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
Wind-Restraint Performance: As indicated on Drawings.
ROOF CURBS
A.
03798614
03/15
Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb units capable of supporting superimposed live
and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings,
bearing continuously on roof structure, and capable of meeting performance requirements;
with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, straight sides, integral
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 2

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.3
metal cant, stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation, and
integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.
Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment
to be supported.
Supported Load Capacity: As indicated on documents.
Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick.
1.
Finish: Factory prime coating.
2.
Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.090 inch thick.
1.
Finish: Clear anodic.
2.
Construction:
1.
Curb Profile: Profile as indicated on Drawings compatible with roofing system.
2.
Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless
3.
Top Surface: Level top of curb, with roof slope accommodated by sloping
deck-mounting flange or by use of leveler frame.
4.
Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter curb
height tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surface of perimeter curb is
level. Equip unit with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow.
5.
Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch-thick glass-fiber board insulation.
6.
Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.
7.
Nailer: Factory-installed wood nailer along top flange of curb, continuous around
curb perimeter.
8.
Wind Restraint Straps and Base Flange Attachment: Provide wind restraint straps,
welded strap connectors, and base flange attachment to roof structure at perimeter of
curb, of size and spacing required to meet wind uplift requirements.
9.
Platform Cap: Where portion of roof curb is not covered by equipment, provide
weathertight platform cap formed from 3/4-inch thick plywood covered with metal
sheet of same type, thickness, and finish as required for curb.
10. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same
metal and finish as curb.
11. Damper Tray: Provide damper tray or shelf with opening 3 inches.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Equipment Supports: Internally reinforced perimeter metal equipment supports capable of

supporting superimposed live and dead loads between structural supports, including
equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings, spanning between
structural supports; capable of meeting performance requirements; with welded or
mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, integral metal cant, and integrally formed
structure-mounting flange at bottom.
Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment
to be supported.
Supported Load Capacity: As indicated on documents.
Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick.
1.
Finish: Factory prime coating.
2.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 3

Phase 2
E.
F.
2.4
Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.090 inch thick.

1.
2.
Construction:
1.
Curb Profile: Manufacturer's standard compatible with roofing system.
2.
Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch-thick glass-fiber board insulation.
3.
Liner: Same material as equipment support, of manufacturer's standard thickness and
finish.
4.
Nailer: Factory-installed continuous wood nailers 5-1/2 inches wide on top flange of
equipment supports, continuous around support perimeter.
5.
Wind Restraint Straps and Base Flange Attachment: Provide wind restraint straps,
welded strap connectors, and base flange attachment to roof structure at perimeter of
curb of size and spacing required to meet wind uplift requirements.
6.
Platform Cap: Where portion of equipment support is not covered by equipment,
provide weathertight platform cap formed from 3/4-inch thick plywood covered with
metal sheet of same type, thickness, and finish as required for curb.
7.
Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same
metal and finish as equipment support.
8.
Fabricate equipment supports to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface
9.
Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate each support with height to
accommodate roof slope so that tops of supports are level with each other. Equip
supports with water diverters or crickets on sides that obstruct water flow.
10. Security Grille: Provide where indicated on Drawings.
ROOF HATCH
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated double-walled curbs, welded
or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing
and weathertight perimeter gasketing, straight sides, integral metal cant, and integrally
formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.
Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 36 by 36 inches.
Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. external live load and 20-lbf/sq. ft. internal uplift load.
Hatch Material: Aluminum sheet.
1.
Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness for hatch size indicated.
2.
3.
Construction:
1.
Insulation: Glass-fiber board.
a.
R-Value: 12.0 according to ASTM C 1363.
2.
Nailer: Factory-installed wood nailer continuous around hatch perimeter.
3.
Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard
metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid.
4.
Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal curb.
5.
Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless
6.
Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter
curb height that is constant. Equip hatch with water diverter or cricket on side that
obstructs water flow.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 4

Phase 2
F.
G.
2.5
PIPE AND DUCT SUPPORTS

A.
B.
2.6
Fixed-Height Cradle-Type Pipe Supports: Polycarbonate pipe stand accommodating up to

1-1/2-inch-diameter pipe or conduit; with provision for pipe retainer and with
manufacturer's support pad or deck plate as recommended for penetration-free installation
over roof membrane type; as required for quantity of pipe runs and sizes.
Fixed-Height Roller-Bearing Pipe Supports: Polycarbonate pipe stand with stainless-steel
roller carrying assembly accommodating up to 7-inch-diameter pipe or conduit; with
provision for pipe retainer and with manufacturer's support pad or deck plate as
recommended for penetration-free installation over roof membrane type; as required for
quantity of pipe runs and sizes.
PREFORMED FLASHING SLEEVES

A.
B.
2.7
Hardware: Spring operators, hold-open arm, stainless-steel spring latch with turn handles,
stainless-steel butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.
1.
Provide two-point latch on lids larger than 84 inches.
2.
Provide remote-control operation.
Safety Railing System: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard system including rails, clamps,
fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a complete
installation; attached to roof hatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements and
1.
Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck.
2.
Posts and Rails: Galvanized-steel pipe, 1-1/4 inches in diameter or galvanized-steel
tube, 1-5/8 inches in diameter.
3.
Flat Bar: Galvanized steel, 2 inches high by 3/8 inch thick.
4.
Maximum Opening Size: System constructed to prevent passage of a sphere
21 inches in diameter.
5.
Chain Passway Barrier: Galvanized proof coil chain with quick link on fixed end.
6.
Self-Latching Gate: Fabricated of same materials and rail spacing as safety railing
system. Provide manufacturer's standard hinges and self-latching mechanism.
7.
Post and Rail Tops and Ends: Weather resistant, closed or plugged with
prefabricated end fittings.
8.
Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of
handrail and railing members.
9.
Fabricate joints exposed to weather to be watertight.
10. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, finished to match railing system.
11. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
a.
Exhaust Vent Flashing: Double-walled metal flashing sleeve or boot, insulation filled, with
integral deck flange, 12 inches high, with removable metal hood and slotted metal collar.
Vent Stack Flashing: Metal flashing sleeve, uninsulated, with integral deck flange.
A.
03798614
03/15
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 5

Phase 2
2.8

A.
B.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.
Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without warping,
jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
2.
Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated
loads.
3.
Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
4.
Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling,
leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals.
Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals
from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1.
Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating
where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2.
Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's
recommended slip sheet.
3.
Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers
of roof accessories for waterproof performance.
Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level.
Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with
each other.
Roof-Hatch Installation:
1.
Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating
mechanism and hardware.
2.
Attach safety railing system to roof-hatch curb.
3.
Attach ladder-assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 6

Phase 2
F.
G.
3.3
Pipe Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-89. Install supports and
attachments as required to properly support piping. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of
horizontal piping, and support together.
1.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Space supports for smallest pipe size or install intermediate
supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.
Preformed Flashing-Sleeve Installation: Secure flashing sleeve to roof membrane
according to flashing-sleeve manufacturer's written instructions; flash sleeve flange to
surrounding roof membrane according to roof membrane manufacturer's instructions.
REPAIR AND CLEANING

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
galvanizing according to ASTM A 780/A 780M.
Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting
according to Section 09911 - Exterior Painting.
Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Clean off excess sealants.
Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 7

Phase 2
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3
D.
Section 08110 - Steel Door Frames: Sealants used in conjunction with steel frames.
Section 08800 - Glazing: Sealants used in conjunction with glazing methods.
Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Sealants used in conjunction with sound rated
partitions.
Section 09300 - Tile: Sealants used in conjunction with tile.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
1.5
Preparing sealant substrate surfaces.

Sealant and backing.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.4

AAMA 803.3 - Voluntary Specification for Narrow-Joint Seam Sealer.

AAMA 808.3 - Voluntary Specification for Exterior Perimeter Sealing Compound.
ASTM C719 - Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement.
ASTM C792 - Effects of Heat Aging on Weight Loss, Cracking, and Chalking of Elastomeric
Sealants.
ASTM C570 - Oil and Resin - Base Caulking Compound for Building Construction.
ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds.
ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
ASTM C1311 - Solvent Release Sealants.
ASTM C1193 - Use of Joint Sealants.
ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
ASTM D1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers
(Closed-Cell Foam).
SUBMITTALS
A.
03798614
03/15
Product Data
1.
Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria,
limitations and color availability.
2.
Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions.
JOINT SEALERS
07900 - 1

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
1.6
Samples: Submit four sample kits in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting
of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to
view.
Mockup
1.
Construct field sample panel illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface.
2.
Locate where directed.
3.
Accepted sample may not remain as part of the Work.
Certificates
1.
Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements
and are suitable for use indicated.
2.
Joint sealant manufacturer's certification that sealants, primers, and cleaners required for
sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic
compounds.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section

with minimum ten years documented experience.
Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum five
years documented experience.
Conform to ASTM C1193 requirements for materials and installation.
1.
Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product
required.
2.
Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with
one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test sealant adhesion
to joint substrates as follows:
1.
Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2.
Conduct field tests for each type of elastomeric and non-elastomeric sealant joint
substrate indicated.
3.
Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be
erected.
4.
Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand pull method described below:
a.
Install joint sealants in 5-foot joint lengths using same materials and methods for
joint preparation and joint sealant installation required for completed Work.
Allow sealants to cure fully before testing.
b.
Make knife cuts horizontally from one side of joint to other followed by 2
vertical cuts approximately 2 inches long at side of joint and meeting horizontal
cut at top of 2-inch cuts. Place mark 1 inch from top of 2-inch piece.
c.
Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant just above 1-inch mark; pull firmly
down at a 90-degree angle or more while holding a ruler along side of sealant.
Pull sealant out of joint to distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for
testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum
movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds.
5.
Report whether or not sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion, failed to adhere
to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type
of product and joint substrate.
JOINT SEALERS
07900 - 2

Phase 2
6.
E.
F.
1.7

A.
B.
1.8
Environmental Requirements
1.
Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.
2.
Do not install sealants when joint substrates are wet.
3.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during
and after installation.

A.
1.10
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot
life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent
their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing,
in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered
satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.
Field-Constructed Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants
as follows to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects as well as qualities of materials and execution:
1.
Joints in field-constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are
indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants specified in this Section.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
Provide five-year warranty.

Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight
and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
03798614
03/15
Elastomeric Sealants
1.
General: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, urethane, polyurethane, or
polysulfide polymer based elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920.
2.
Types
S-1: Type M, Grade P, Class 25.
a.
b.
S-2: Type S, Grade P, Class 25.
JOINT SEALERS
07900 - 3

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
c.
S-3: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25.
d.
S-4: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.
3.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors.
4.
Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section.
Latex Sealants
1.
General: Manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable latex
sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on
interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage
change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or
cohesively.
2.
Types
a.
S-5; Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant
1)
Composition: Manufacturer's standard product accommodating joint
movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression
for a total of 10 percent.
2)
Conformance: ASTM C 834
b.
S-6; Silicone Emulsion Sealant
1)
Composition: Manufacturer's standard product that accommodates joint
movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression
for a total of 50 percent.
2)
Conformance: ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per
ASTM C 792, ASTM C 920.
3)
Special Properties: Fungus and mildew resistant.
3.
4.
Type S-7; Acrylic Sealant
1.
General: Manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing acrylic
terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3, with capability to withstand
15 percent maximum cyclic movement (7-1/2 percent movement in both extension and
compression) at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated for
Project without failing cohesively when tested for adhesion and cohesion per
ASTM C 719.
2.
3.
Type S-8; Butyl Sealant
1.
General: Manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, nonstaining, paintable,
solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with minimum of
75 percent solids and tack-free time of 24 hours or less, complying with ASTM C 1311.
2.
3.
Type S-9; Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant
1.
General: Manufacturer's standard, solvent-release-curing, pigmented synthetic rubber
sealant formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch or smaller in width, complying with
AAMA 803.3
2.
3.
JOINT SEALERS
07900 - 4

Phase 2
F.
Accessories
1.
Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
2.
Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant
manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
3.
Joint Backing: ANSI/ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod;
oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
4.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
5.
Masking Tape: Non-staining, non-absorbing type as recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
Install masking tape where required to protect adjacent finished surfaces.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.4
Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on
Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer.
Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions and substrate.
Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturer's written instructions.
Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/2 the joint width.
Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
Remove and replace joint backing which has become wet, dirty, or exposed to weather for
extended period of time.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer
when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
Tool joints concave in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturer's written instructions.
CLEANING AND REPAIRING

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in
which joints occur.
Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.
Cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants and repair so that repaired areas are
indistinguishable from original work.
JOINT SEALERS
07900 - 5

Phase 2
3.5
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A.
3.6
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they
are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion.
SCHEDULE
A.
B.
Exterior Joints
1.
Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or S-2.
2.
Horizontal traffic joints exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or S-2.
3.
Horizontal non-traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, S-2,
S-3, or S-4.
4.
Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3 or S-4.
5.
Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall penetrations:
Sealant types S-3 or S-4.
6.
Threshold Bedding: Sealant type S-8.
7.
Joints in Masonry Flashing: Sealant type S-9.
8.
Joints in Sheet Metal Flashing: Sealant type S-9.
Interior Joints
1.
Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or S-2.
2.
Horizontal non-traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, S-2,
S-3, or S-4.
3.
Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3 or S-4.
4.
Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall penetrations:
Sealant types S-3, S-4, or S-6.
5.
Non-structural hollow metal doors and borrowed lites. Sealant types S-3, S-4, S-5, S-6
or S-7.
6.
Non-structural perimeter seals around plumbing fixtures, joints between ceramic tile
and joints between ceramic tile and dissimilar materials: Sealant type S-6.
7.
Non-structural perimeter seals at joints between countertops, backsplashes and walls:
Sealant type S-7.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
JOINT SEALERS
07900 - 6

Phase 2
SECTION 08110
STEEL DOOR FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.7
Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to

NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
COORDINATION
A.
1.6
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware: Door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

Section 13090 - Radiation Protection.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.5
Hollow-metal work.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
1.4

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses,
preparations for hardware, and other details.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers
for details and openings as those on Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated.
Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that
are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
STEEL DOOR FRAMES
08110 - 1

Phase 2
C.
1.8

A.
B.
C.
1.9
jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257
or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.
Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.
Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during

transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.
1.
Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.
Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack
welded to jambs and mullions.
Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on
minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each
stacked door to permit air circulation.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide manufacturers five-year warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
Amweld Building Products, LLC.
2.
Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation.
3.
Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
4.
Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
5.
Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.
6.
Firedoor Corporation.
7.
Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company.
8.
Habersham Metal Products Company.
9.
Kewanee Corporation (The).
10. Mesker Door Inc.
11. Pioneer Industries, Inc.
12. Security Metal Products Corp.
13. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
14. Windsor Republic Doors.
A.
03798614
03/15
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and
temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to
NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1.
Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and
labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to
STEEL DOOR FRAMES
08110 - 2

Phase 2
B.
2.3
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.4
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed
applications.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum A40 (ZF120) metallic coating.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I.
Glazing: Section 08800 - Glazing.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil
dry film thickness per coat.
STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.5
authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed

in compliance with NFPA 105.
Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fireprotection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.
General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
1.
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2.
Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet.
Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is
indicated.
1.
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2.
Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet.
4.
Frames for Wood Doors: 0.042-inch-thick steel sheet.
5.
Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.042-inch-thick steel sheet.
Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.
FRAME ANCHORS
A.
03798614
03/15
Jamb Anchors:
1.
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size,
not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than
2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
2.
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than
0.042 inch thick.
3.
Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
4.
Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum
3/8-inch-diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from
STEEL DOOR FRAMES
08110 - 3

Phase 2
B.
2.6
STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A.
B.
2.7
Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch
high unless otherwise indicated.
Provide hospital stop in locations scheduled.
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
2.8
frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor
location.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and
as follows:
1.
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
2.
Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at
finish floor surface.
Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical
anchors.
Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or
angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
1.
Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make
smooth, flush, and invisible.
2.
Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible
face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members
at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
3.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
5.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four
spot welds per anchor.
6.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom
of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1)
Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2)
Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3)
Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
4)
Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each
24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
b.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom
of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches) o.c. and as follows:
1)
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2)
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3)
Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
STEEL DOOR FRAMES
08110 - 4

Phase 2
4)
C.
D.
E.
2.9
Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each
24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
5)
Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and
mounted in metal-stud partitions.
c.
Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb.
d.
Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from
top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
7.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door
silencers.
a.
Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers.
b.
Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware.
1.
Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted
door hardware.
3.
Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/
DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
4.
Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with
Division 16 electrical Sections.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated.
Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1.
Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of
hollow metal work.
2.
Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each
glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
3.
Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior
doors and frames.
4.
Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.
5.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing
and type of installation indicated.
Terminated Stops: Terminate stops 6 inches above finish floor with a 45-degree angle cut,
and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame
with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame.
STEEL FINISHES
A.
03798614
03/15
Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and
pretreating.
1.
Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10.
STEEL DOOR FRAMES
08110 - 5

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
03798614
03/15
Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1.
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary
braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
b.
Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint
continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
c.
Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
d.
Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have
been properly set and secured.
f.
Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed.
Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g.
Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
2.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to
floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a.
Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of
postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop
Drawings.
3.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
4.
Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with grout.
5.
Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take
precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or
damaged by grout forces.
6.
In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with
postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth,
flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
7.
In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill
and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
8.
Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead
structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or
to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact
for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted
anchorage to frame jamb members.
9.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
STEEL DOOR FRAMES
08110 - 6

Phase 2
c.
B.
3.2
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08800 - Glazing and with
hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly
not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.

A.
B.
C.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise
unacceptable.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
STEEL DOOR FRAMES
08110 - 7

Phase 2
SECTION 08210
IMPACT RESISTANT WOOD DOORS (FLUSH)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SCOPE
A.
1.3
All labor, material, equipment, and related services necessary to furnish and install all high
impact resistant non-rated and fire-rated Acrovyn Door Systems doors with flush faces as
shown on the drawings or specified herein.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.4

Section 06105 - Miscellaneous Carpentry.

Section 06402 - Interior Architectural Woodwork.
Section 08110 - Steel Door Frames.
Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass view panels in flush wood doors.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
03798614
03/15
ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests and Door Assemblies.

NFPA 252 - Standard methods of fire tests of door assemblies, National Fire Protection
Association.
UL-10C - Positive Pressure fire tests of door assemblies, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code, National Fire Protection Association.
MBDC C2C - McDonough Braungart Design Chemistry Cradle to Cradle.
CARB Emission Standards Section 93120.2 (a), California Air Resources Board.
GGHC Title EP 4.1 PBT Elimination: Dioxins, Green Guide for Health Care v 2.2 07.
Quality Test Standards:
1.
WDMA Industry Standard I.S.1A-04
a.
WDMA TM-7 - Test method to determine the physical endurance of wood
doors and associated hardware connections under accelerated operating
conditions, Window and Door Manufacturers Association.
b.
WDMA TM-8 - Test methods to determine hinge loading resistance of wood
door stiles, Window and Door Manufacturers Association.
c.
WDMA TM-10 - Test method to determine the screw holding capacity of
wood door stiles, Window and Door Manufacturers Association.
2.
WDMA I.S. 10-05 - Industry Specification for Testing Cellulosic Materials for Use
in Fenestration Products.
3.
ANSI/BHMA A156.115-W-2006 - American National Standard for Hardware
Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames.
4.
FSC - Forest Stewardship Council.
08210 - 1

Phase 2
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
1.7
Submit in accordance with Section 01330.

Product Data: For each type of door, submit manufacturers data sheets including details of
core and edge construction.
Shop Drawings: Submit complete schedule indicating location, size, hardware sets, swing
of each door; elevation of each type of door and construction details not covered in product
data and other pertinent information. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and
holes for hardware, fire ratings, and location of cutouts for glass.
Samples for verification of edge wrapping and edge replaceability. Banded edges will not
be approved.
Certification: Submit certification that doors and frames comply with UL10c, Positive
Pressure Fire Door Test Method.
Manufacturers lifetime warranty.
Source Limitations: Obtain high impact resistant Acrovyn Door Systems flush doors
through one source from a single manufacturer.
Quality Standard: Comply with WDMA Industry Standard (I.S. 1A-04 Architectural
Wood Flush Doors).
1.
Doors shall meet performance attributes for the following performance duty level:
Extra Heavy Duty.
2.
Tolerances for warp, telegraphing, squareness and prefitting dimensions as per the
latest edition of WDMA I.S.1A-04.
Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-ratings
indicated, based on testing according to UBC Standard 7-2, UL-10C Positive Pressure and
NFPA 252.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING AND SITE CONDITIONS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
03798614
03/15
Deliver, store, protect and handle products under guidelines of WDMA and manufacturers
care and handling instructions.
Package doors individually using foam interleaf and stack on pallet, not exceeding 15
doors per pallet.
Mark each door with opening number used on shop drawings.
Accept doors on site in manufacturers standard packaging. Inspect for damage.
Do not store doors in damp or wet areas. HVAC systems should be operating and balanced
prior to arrival of doors. Acceptable humidity shall be no less than 25% or greater than
55%.
Do not subject doors to extreme conditions or changes in heat, dryness or humidity in
accordance with the latest edition of WDMA I.S.1A-04.
Protect doors from exposure to natural and artificial light after delivery.
Doors should be lifted and carried when being moved, not dragged across one another.
08210 - 2

Phase 2
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
1.9
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver store, or install doors until building is enclosed,
wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and
relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
HVAC systems should be operating and balanced prior to arrival of doors. Acceptable
humidity shall be no less than 25% or greater than 55%. Note: Any claim for warp, bow,
twist, or telegraphing may be denied if required humidity requirements are not maintained.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace doors that are deemed defective in materials or workmanship. Conditions are
subject to the terms set forth in the manufacturers warranty.
1.
Solid-Core Interior Doors: provide manufacturers limited lifetime written warranty
guarantee against warp, delamination and defects in materials and workmanship.
2.
Edge of a Lifetime Warranty: If an Acrovyn edge cover is ever damaged,
Construction Specialties shall supply a replacement Acrovyn cover at no cost to the
Owner. This special Warranty begins 1 month after the original installation date.
Labor not included. Stainless Steel edges not included. Refer to our warranty for full
details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
2.2
Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide the following:

1.
Construction Specialties, Inc. Acrovyn Door.
MATERIALS
A.
03798614
03/15
Door Construction
1.
Non Fire Rated Doors and 20-minute interior flush doors conforming to WDMA
I.S.1A-04 and the following:
a.
Thickness: 1-3/4 (+/- 1/16).
b.
Core: Solid. Interior stiles and rails bonded. Tops and bottoms factory sealed
with an approved sealer to prevent moisture intrusion.
1)
Structural Composite Lumber, 39 lb/ft3 density - no added urea
formaldehyde content.
c.
Crossbanding: FSC certified.
d.
Replaceable door stiles: 3/4 replaceable stiles shall be field replaceable if
ever damaged by impact.
e.
Replaceable door edges: Fully wrapped and rounded Acrovyn or stainless
steel door edges shall be field replaceable if ever damaged by impact,
exclusive of fasteners to improve appearance.
1)
Subject to the terms and conditions of our Limited Warranty for the
lifetime of the doors, the manufacturer shall supply replacement
Acrovyn edge covers AT NO COST to the Owner.
f.
WDMA I.S.1A-04 Performance Duty Level: Extra Heavy Duty.
08210 - 3

Phase 2
g.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Durability Performance: Cycle Slam WDMA TM-7, 1990 Extra Heavy Duty2,000,000 cycles to insure durability of entire door construction.
2.
45 and 60-minute interior flush fire rated doors conforming to WDMA I.A. 1-A and
the following:
a.
Thickness: 1-3/4 (+/- 1/16).
b.
Cores: Solid. Interior stiles and rails bonded. Non-combustible mineral
composite, 25-32 lb/ft3 density - no added urea formaldehyde content. Tops
and bottoms factory sealed with an approved sealer to prevent moisture
intrusion.
c.
Crossbanding: FSC certified
d.
Replaceable door stiles: 3/4 replaceable stiles shall be field replaceable if
ever damaged by impact.
e.
1)
Subject to the terms and conditions of our Limited Warranty for the
lifetime of the doors, the manufacturer shall supply replacement
Acrovyn edge covers AT NO COST to the Owner.
f.
g.
Durability Performance: Cycle Slam WDMA TM-7, 1990 - 1,000,000 cycles
to insure durability of entire door construction.
3.
90-minute interior flush fire rated doors conforming to WDMA I.S.1A-04 and the
following:
a.
Thickness: 1-3/4 (+/- 1/16).
b.
Core: Solid. Interior stiles and rails bonded, non-combustible mineral
composite construction 25-32 lb/ft3 density - no added urea formaldehyde
content. Tops and bottoms factory sealed with an approved sealer to prevent
moisture intrusion.
c.
Crossbanding: mineral composite.
d.
e.
f.
Durability Performance: Cycle Slam WDMA TM-7, 1990 1,000,000 cycles
to insure durability of entire door construction.
Door Faces:
1.
Finish: Chameleon wood grain or solid color impact resistant, PVC-free Acrovyn.
See Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
2.
Face material base color must be integral throughout to eliminate discoloration
caused by scratching.
3.
Face Veneer Wear Index - Abrasion Resistance Testing - ASTM D4060-90: 28,000
cycles to prove out resistant to scuffing and scratching.
4.
Face Veneer Impact Resistance - ASTM D-4226: 86 in./lb. to confirm impact
resistance of face finish.
Door stiles to meet or exceed the following performance testing to ensure hardware
fastener holding strength:
1.
WDMA TM-8 - "Hinge Loading Resistance" Extra Heavy Duty.
2.
WDMA TM-10 - Screw Holding Capacity" Extra Heavy Duty.
08210 - 4

Phase 2
D.
E.
2.3
Door Edges:
1.
Finish: Edges of door to be PVC-Free high impact resistant engineered Acrovyn
4000 finish containing no persistent bio-accumulative toxicants (PBTs): same as
panel finish.
2.
Edges are covered by our Edge of a Lifetime Lifetime Limited Warranty from
Construction Specialties Acrovyn Door Systems against damage, and begins 1
month following original installation. Refer to our warranty for full details.
3.
Edges are to fully wrap the door vertical stiles to eliminate banded edges thus
improving durability and impact resistance.
4.
Replaceable edges to be thick for proper edge and face protection.
5.
Door edges shall be exclusive of fasteners to improve appearance.
6.
Edges must be flush with face of door thus eliminating raised edges that could be
torn off.
7.
Edges to include radius edges to improve impact deflection. Square or banded
edges should not be permitted.
8.
Edges are to be extruded (not formed) to ensure correct appearance and proper door
fit.
9.
Edges to be provided as part of the construction of the door from single source
manufacturer.
Adhesives:
1.
Crossbanding to core adhesives shall be Type II, urea formaldehyde free I to
improve structural integrity of door.
2.
Door faces are to be applied to the crossbanded core using Type I, urea
formaldehyde free adhesives to eliminate delamination.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
03798614
03/15
Doors shall be prefit and beveled at the factory to fit the openings to reduce handling an
onsite labor costs. Prefit tolerances shall be in accordance with the requirements of
WDMA I.S.1A-04, latest edition.
For fire rated doors comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for
fitting in accordance with requirements listed in NFPA 80.
Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames. Contractor or door
distributor to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Comply with final
hardware schedules, door frame shop drawings, and hardware templates.
Light openings must be cut by the manufacturer or by a certified machining distributor.
To ensure proper fit of the doors bevel on both strike and hinge edges to be 1/8 in 2.
Top and bottom rails shall be factory sealed with an approved wood sealer to eliminate
moisture from entering into core thus eliminating warp.
Blocking: provide blocking approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated as needed to
eliminate through-bolting for surface applied hardware.
08210 - 5

Phase 2
2.4
ACCESSORIES
A.
Glazing Stops:
1.
Non Rated
a.
Acrovyn Vision Panel Covers
1)
Acrovyn, molded to fit over an All Metal Stamping Model 110 metal
vision frame.
2)
Adhered to frame with double sided tape- removable to allow
frame/glass access.
3)
Acrovyn Panel cover finish matches Acrovyn door face finish (or
choose alternative Acrovyn color for contrast).
2.
Fire Rated: Acrovyn Vision Panels (20, 45, and 60-minute only).
3.
Glass: Refer to Section 08800 for glass types.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
Inspect all doors prior to hanging. Repair noticeable marks or defects that may have
occurred from improper storage or handling. Field repairs and touchups are the
responsibility of the installing contractor upon completion of the initial installation. Field
touchup shall include repair of job inflicted mars and final cleaning of finished doors.
Examine door frames and verify that they comply with indicated requirements for type,
size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and
plumb jambs.
Adjust frames to plumb condition before door installation. Tolerances for warp, squareness
and pre-fitting dimensions shall be as per latest edition of WDMA I.S.1A-04.
Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out of tolerance for size or
alignment.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
Handle doors in accordance with recommendations of WDMA I.S.1A-04 Care and

Installation at Job Site.
Condition doors to average temperature and humidity in area of installation for not less
than 48 hours prior to installation.
Install doors to comply with manufacturers written instructions, referenced quality
standard and as indicated.
1.
Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA-80 and
ITS/WH requirements.
Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
Set doors plumb, level, square and true.
In the field trimming:
1.
Trim door height by cutting door bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 per NFPA 80.
2.
Trimming of fire rated doors in width can only be done by the manufacturer or a
certified machining distributor under special guidance of the manufacturer.
Drill pilot holes for screws and bolts using templates provided by hardware manufacturer.
08210 - 6

Phase 2
H.
I.
J.
K.
3.3
Exercise caution when drilling pilot holes and installing hinges so that pilot holes are not
over drilled and screws are not over torqued. Follow manufacturers installation
instructions.
Reseal exposed tops and bottom rails of any doors that required site alteration with an
approved wood sealer.
Hardware installation: See Section 08710 - Finish Hardware.
Clean prefinished doors with a rag in concert with water or household cleaners such as
Fantastik, Formula 409, or equivalent. Following use of the cleaner, the cleaned surface
should be rinse wiped with clean water and wiped dry to remove any remaining residue.
ADJUSTING
A.
B.
Operating: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be
repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair
or refinishing.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
08210 - 7

Phase 2
SECTION 08311
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3

Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.

1.
components and profiles, and finishes.
Samples: For each type of access door and frame and for each finish specified, complete
assembly minimum 6 by 6 inches in size.
Product Schedule: For access doors and frames. Use same designations indicated on
Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1

A.
2.2
Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:

1.
Description: Face of door flush with frame; with concealed flange for gypsum board
installation and concealed hinge.
2.
Locations: Wall and ceiling.
3.
Door Size: As indicated on Drawings.
4.
Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage, factory primed.
5.
Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door.
6.
Latch and Lock: Cam latch, hex-head wrench operated.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
03798614
03/15

Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled
steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS),
exposed.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer
and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.
Frame Anchors: Same material as door face.
08311 - 1

Phase 2
G.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.4
Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/
A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready
for installation.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed
pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish
mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to
types of supports indicated.
1.
For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum panels
securely attached to perimeter of frames.
Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on
aluminum that will come in contact with concrete.
FINISHES
A.
B.
C.
D.
Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,
conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
1.
Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal
primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.

END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
08311 - 2

Phase 2
SECTION 08410
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.6
Section 08462 - Sliding Automatic Entrances.
A.
1.5
Exterior and interior storefront framing

Storefront framing for window walls.
Storefront framing for punched openings.
Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

Aluminum entrances and storefront system includes tubular aluminum sections shop
fabricated, factory pre-finished, vision glass, related flashings, anchorage, and attachment
devices.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
03798614
03/15
Design and size components to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by positive and
negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with
ASCE 7-05 and as measured in accordance with ASTM E330.
Limit mullion deflection to flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials.
System to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement
within system, movement between system and peripheral construction, dynamic loading and
release of loads, deflection of structural support framing.
Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.06 cfm/min/sq. ft. of wall area, measured at a
reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with
ANSI/ASTM E283.
Vapor Seal: Limit vapor seal with interior atmospheric pressure of 1 inch sp, 72 degrees F,
40 percent RH: no failure.
Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a test pressure
difference of 20 percent of design pressure, with a minimum differential of 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. and
a maximum of 12.0 lbf/sq. ft.
08410 - 1

Phase 2
G.
H.
I.
1.7
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.8
B.
B.
General
1.
Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM-1 and AAMA-Metal Curtain Wall,
Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual.
Qualifications
1.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with
minimum three years experience.

A.
B.
C.
1.11
Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance

manuals.
Maintenance Data for Structural Sealant: For structural-sealant-glazed storefront to include in
maintenance manuals. Include ASTM C 1401 recommendations for post-installation-phase
quality-control program.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.10
Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions; framed opening requirements and tolerances;
affected related work and expansion and contraction joint location and details.
Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,
anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware and internal drainage details.
Samples: Submit four samples 6 inches long illustrating pre-finished aluminum.
Certificates: Manufacturers' Certificates certifying the Products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.9
Thermal Transmittance of assembly (Excluding Entrances): Maximum U value of

0.69 Btu/sq. ft. per hour per deg F when measured in accordance with AAMA 1503.1.
System to provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a
cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12-hour period without causing detrimental
effects to system components.
Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels or migrating moisture
occurring within system to the exterior by a weep drainage network.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
Handle work of this Section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
Protect pre-finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed
coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
03798614
03/15
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
08410 - 2

Phase 2
1.12
WARRANTY
A.
B.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed

entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
a.
Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b.
Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
c.
Deterioration of metal, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
d.
Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
e.
Failure of operating components.
2.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or
replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
1.
Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b.
c.
2.
Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
Aluminum Products
1.
Indal LTD, Tubelite Division; Reed City, MI.
2.
Kawneer Co., Inc.; Niles, MI.
3.
Vistawall Architectural Products; Terrell, TX.
Extruded Aluminum: ANSI/ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper.

Sheet Aluminum: ANSI/ASTM B209; 3003 alloy, H14 temper.
Fasteners
1.
Concealed: Stainless or galvanized steel.
2.
Exposed: Stainless steel or aluminum.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer for Steel Components: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide.
COMPONENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Frame: 1-3/4 x 4-1/2 inch nominal dimension; flush glazing stops; drainage holes; internal
weep drainage system.
Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick, 3-1/2 inch nominal wide top rail, 3-1/2 inch nominal wide vertical
stiles, 6-1/2 inch nominal wide bottom rail; beveled glazing stops.
Flashings: .040 inch thick aluminum; finish to match mullion sections where exposed.
Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
08410 - 3

Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.5
Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08800 - Glazing.

Bituminous Paint: As specified in Division 9.
Weatherstripping: Manufacturers standard wool pile, continuous and replaceable.
Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, of neoprene compound.
Hardware
1.
Provide hardware components as indicated in paragraph HARDWARE SCHEDULE at
end of this section.
2.
Refer to Section 08710 - Finish Hardware for quality requirements.
3.
Schedule is based on products manufactured by Adams Rite, Elmes, Hager, LCN,
Pemko, Rockwood, Triangle Brass, and Von Duprin components of other
manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with standards specified in
4.
Regardless of whether or not the HARDWARE SCHEDULE, at the end of this section,
has every door and every component scheduled for each opening, provide all
components required to make every opening functional based on hardware scheduled
for similar openings and the referenced codes.
Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware.
FINISHES
A.
B.
C.
D.
Color Anodic Finish: Conforming to AA Class I, M12C22A42/A44 and AAMA 607.1.

1.
Color: Champagne.
Concealed Steel Items: Primed with iron oxide paint.
Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with
cementitious or dissimilar materials.
Hardware
1.
Painting of primed surfaces: Specified in Division 9.
2.
Plated or Exposed Metal: As indicated in HARDWARE SCHEDULE at end of this
Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Verify site opening conditions under provisions of Section 01300.

Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of
this Section.
08410 - 4

Phase 2
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
3.3
TOLERANCES
A.
B.
3.4
Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.

Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.
CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
3.6
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 feet non-cumulative or 1/16 inch per
10 feet, whichever is less.
Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.
ADJUSTING
A.
B.
3.5
Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AAMA - Metal Curtain
Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual.
Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and
other irregularities.
Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of
thermal barrier.
Install flashings.
Set thresholds in bed of sealant and secure.
Install hardware using templates provided. Refer to Section 08710 for installation
requirements.
Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, to glazing method required to achieve
performance criteria.
Install backing materials and perimeter sealant to method required to achieve performance
criteria and installation criteria, in accordance with Section 07900.
Clean work under provisions of 01700.

Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean
wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Protect finished Work under provision of Section 01500.

Protect finished Work from damage.
08410 - 5

Phase 2
3.7
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
HEADING NO. 1
Each Door to have:
1.5 pr.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinges
BB1191 4.5 x 4.5
Deadlatch
4722AN05-602-628 x 4568 Lever x US32D
Cylinder
Specified in Section 08700
Closer
P4041
Pull
112 x US32D x Type 6 or 7 mounting
Stop
1276CS
Threshold
170A
Push
Weatherstripping
Weather Sweeps
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
08410 - 6

Phase 2
SECTION 08462
SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
C.
D.
E.
AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers.

Activation Device: A control that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door
operator to open the door.
IBC: International Building Code.
Safety Device: A control that, to avoid injury, prevents a door from opening or closing.
For automatic door terminology, refer to BHMA A156.10 for definitions of terms.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.6
Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Installing recessed metal frames for control mats
in concrete and forming recesses in concrete for recessed thresholds.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.5
Exterior and interior, sliding, power-operated automatic entrances.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

Coordinate sizes and locations of recesses in concrete floors for recessed sliding tracks and
recessed control mats that control automatic entrances. Concrete, reinforcement, and
formwork requirements are specified elsewhere.
Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared
for installing automatic entrances.
Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness,
hand, function, and finish. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrances with hardware
required for rest of Project.
Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrances
with connections to power supplies and access-control system.
A.
03798614
03/15
08462 - 1

Phase 2
1.7
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.

1.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.8
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.9
Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

Product Certificates: For each type of automatic entrance. Include emergency-exit features
of automatic entrances serving as a required means of egress.
Product Test Reports: For each type of automatic entrance, for tests performed by a
qualified testing agency.
Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.10

components and profiles, and finishes for automatic entrances.
2.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
Shop Drawings: For automatic entrances.
1.
Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware mounting heights, and attachment
details.
2.
Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.
3.
Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
4.
Indicate locations of activation and safety devices.
5.
Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities, and
locations.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color and metal-clad finishes.
1.
Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving color or finish selection.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's
standard sizes.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For automatic entrances.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For automatic entrances, safety devices, and control
systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADM

indicating that manufacturer has a Certified Inspector on staff.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
1.
Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from
Installer's place of business to Project site.
Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by AAADM.
08462 - 2

Phase 2
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
B.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic

entrances that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
a.
b.
Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware.
c.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
2.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which
finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
ASTM D 2244.
b.
c.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE ASSEMBLIES

A.
B.
C.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain sliding automatic entrances from single source from single
manufacturer.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
03798614
03/15

"Quality Requirements," to design automatic entrances.
Structural Performance: Automatic entrances shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according
to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Automatic entrances shall pass small-missile-impact
and cyclic-pressure tests of ASTM E 1996 according to the IBC for Wind Zone 3.
changes.
1.
Operating Temperature Range: Automatic entrances shall operate within minus 20 to plus
122 deg F.
Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of
1.25 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed entrance-system area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a
minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
08462 - 3

Phase 2
G.
H.
2.3
Opening Force:
1.
Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbf required to manually set door in
motion if power fails, and not more than 15 lbf required to open door to minimum
required width.
2.
Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbf required for a
breakaway door or panel to open.
Entrapment-Prevention Force:
1.
Power-Operated Sliding Doors: Not more than 30 lbf required to prevent stopped
door from closing.

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances including doors, sidelites,

framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, controls, and accessories
required for a complete installation.
Sliding Automatic Entrance:
1.
Biparting-Sliding Units:
2.
Configuration: Biparting-sliding doors with two sliding leaves, transom sidelites on
each side.
a.
Traffic Pattern: Two way.
b.
Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaves and sidelites.
c.
Mounting: Surface.
3.
Operator Features:
a.
Power opening and closing.
b.
Drive System: Chain or belt.
c.
Adjustable opening and closing speeds.
d.
Adjustable hold-open time between zero and 30 seconds.
e.
Obstruction recycle.
f.
On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator, key operated.
4.
Sliding-Door Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Carrier assembly that
allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon- or delrin-covered, ball-bearingcenter steel wheels operating on a continuous roller track, or ball-bearing-center
steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered, continuous roller track.
Support doors from carrier assembly by cantilever and pivot assembly.
a.
Rollers: Minimum of two ball-bearing roller wheels and two antirise rollers
for each active leaf.
5.
Sliding-Door Threshold: Threshold members and bottom-guide-track system with
stainless-steel, ball-bearing-center roller wheels.
6.
Controls: Activation and safety devices as indicated on Drawings and according to
BHMA standards.
a.
Activation Device: Motion sensor mounted on each side of door header to
detect pedestrians in activating zone and to open door.
b.
Safety Device: Presence sensor mounted to underside of door header and two
photoelectric beams mounted in sidelite jambs on one side of the door to
detect pedestrians in presence zone and to prevent door from closing.
7.
Finish: Finish framing, door(s), and header with Class I, color anodic finish.
a.
densities.
08462 - 4

Phase 2
2.4
ENTRANCE COMPONENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.5
Framing Members: Extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch thick and reinforced as
required to support imposed loads.
1.
Nominal Size: 1-3/4 by 4-1/2 inches.
2.
Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum 0.062-inch wall thickness.
Stile and Rail Doors: 1-3/4-inch-thick, glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch-thick,
extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. Mechanically fasten corners with
reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full length
of top and bottom rails.
1.
Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and
preformed gaskets.
2.
Stile Design: Narrow stile, 2-1/8-inch nominal width.
3.
Rail Design: 5-inch nominal height.
4.
Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail member for each door; match stile design and
finish.
Sidelite(s) and Transom: 1-3/4-inch-deep sidelite(s) and transom with minimum
0.125-inch-thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members matching door design.
1.
Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Same materials and design as for stile and rail door.
2.
Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and
preformed gaskets.
3.
Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail members for each sidelite; match stile design.
Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch-thick extruded aluminum and extending
full width of automatic entrance units to conceal door operators and controls. Provide
hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and
controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access.
1.
Mounting: Surface mounted.
2.
Capacity: Capable of supporting doors up to 175 lb per leaf over spans up to 14 feet
without intermediate supports.
a.
Provide sag rods for spans exceeding 14 feet.
Brackets and Reinforcements: High-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims
for aligning system components.
Signage: As required by cited BHMA standard.
1.
Application Process: Door manufacturer's standard process.
2.
Provide sign materials with instructions for field application after glazing is
installed.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1.
Extrusions: ASTM B 221.
2.
Sheet: ASTM B 209.
Steel Reinforcement: Reinforcement with corrosion-resistant primer complying with
SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
Use surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and
prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled
standard of flatness, in entrance manufacturer's standard thickness.
08462 - 5

Phase 2
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2.6
DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.7
Glazing: As specified in Section 08800 - Glazing.

Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining
grout; complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; of consistency suitable for application.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
Fasteners and Accessories: Corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and
accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
General: Provide operators and controls, which include activation and safety devices,
according to BHMA standards, for condition of exposure, and for long-term, maintenancefree operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated.
Door Operators: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door
size, weight, and movement.
1.
Door Operator Performance: Door operators shall open and close doors and maintain
them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind loads.
2.
Electromechanical Operators: Concealed, self-contained, overhead unit powered by
fractional-horsepower, permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled
mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with
solid-state microprocessor controller; UL 325; and with manual operation with
power off.
Motion Sensors: Self-contained, K-band-frequency, microwave-scanner units; fully
enclosed by its plastic housing; adjustable to provide detection-field sizes and functions
required by BHMA A156.10.
1.
Provide capability for switching between bidirectional and unidirectional detection.
2.
For one-way traffic, sensor on egress side shall not be active when doors are fully
closed.
Presence Sensors: Self-contained, active-infrared scanner units; adjustable to provide
detection-field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10. Sensors shall remain
active at all times.
Photoelectric Beams: Pulsed infrared, sender-receiver assembly for recessed mounting.
Beams shall not be active when doors are fully closed.
Key Switch: Recess-mounted, door-control switch with key-controlled actuator; enclosed
in 2-by-4-inch junction box. Provide faceplate engraved with letters indicating switch
functions.
1.
Face-Plate Material: Stainless steel as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
2.
Functions: On-off, momentary contact.
3.
Mounting: Recess mounted in door jamb.
Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits,
provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched,
or bolted.
HARDWARE
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and
hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match
door finish unless otherwise indicated.
Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Device that allows door to swing out in
direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any operating position. Maximum force to open
08462 - 6

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
2.8
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
2.9
door shall be as stipulated in "Performance Requirements" Article. Interrupt powered

operation of door operator while in breakaway mode.
Deadlocks: Deadbolt operated by exterior cylinder and interior thumb turn, with minimum
1-inch-long throw bolt; BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
1.
Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, six-pin mortise type, as specified in
a.
Keying: Integrate into building master key system.
2.
Deadbolts: Laminated-steel hook, mortise type, BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
3.
Two-Point Locking for Stile and Rail Sliding Doors: Mechanism in stile of active
door leaf that automatically extends second lockbolt into threshold.
Dustproof Strikes for All-Glass Sliding Doors: Recessed, floor-type, BHMA A156.16,
Grade 1, to receive deadbolt.
Weather Stripping: Replaceable components.
1.
Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with
nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.
Guide Rails: Anodized aluminum, fabricated from bars or tubing, minimum 30 inches
high, and finished to match doors unless otherwise indicated; positioned and projecting
from face of door jamb for distance as indicated, but not less than that required by
BHMA A156.10 for type of door and direction of travel; with filler panel.
1.
Filler Panel: Expanded aluminum mesh.
a.
Orient expanded aluminum mesh with long dimension of diamonds parallel to
top rail.
b.
2.
Mounting: Jamb and floor.
3.
Aluminum Finish: Class I, color anodic finish.
a.
densities.
Guide Rails: See Section 05521 - Pipe and Tube Railings.
FABRICATION
A.
03798614
03/15
General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and

thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards.
1.
Form aluminum shapes before finishing.
2.
Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or
discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed
surfaces by descaling or grinding.
3.
Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are
required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to match
framing.
a.
Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and
structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.
b.
Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
4.
Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended
by manufacturer for this purpose.
08462 - 7

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.10
Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. Complete fabrication,

assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to Project site.
1.
Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with welded or mechanical joints.
Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support
required loads.
2.
Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish
surfaces.
3.
Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
4.
Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.
5.
Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to
produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
6.
Fabricate exterior components to drain condensation and water passing joints within
system to the exterior.
7.
Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from
building structure.
8.
Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units.
Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to
support imposed loads and for installing hardware.
Metal Cladding: Factory-fabricated and installed metal cladding, completely covering all
visible surfaces as part of prefabricated entrance assembly before shipment to Project site.
1.
Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish
surfaces.
2.
Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
3.
Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.
4.
Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to
produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
5.
Fabricate exterior components to drain water passing joints and condensation and
moisture occurring or migrating within system to the exterior.
6.
Allow for thermal expansion at exterior entrances.
Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and
testing.
Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type
of glazing indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual."
Hardware: Factory install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as required for
final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut, drill, and
tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.
1.
Provide sliding-type weather stripping, mortised into door, at perimeter of doors and
breakaway sidelites.
Controls:
1.
General: Factory install activation and safety devices in doors and headers as
required by BHMA A156.10 for type of door and direction of travel.
2.
Install photoelectric beams in vertical jambs of sidelites, with dimension above
finished floor as follows:
a.
Top Beam: 48 inches.
b.
Bottom Beam: 24 inches.

A.
03798614
03/15

08462 - 8

Phase 2
B.
C.
2.11
Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise
indicated.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
3.2
Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of
automatic entrances.
Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections
before automatic entrance installation.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
03798614
03/15
General: Install automatic entrances according to manufacturer's written instructions and

cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel, including signage, controls,
wiring, and connection to the building's power supply.
1.
Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free
of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.
2.
Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended
by manufacturer for this purpose.
3.
Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating.
Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines
and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place.
1.
Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent
possible.
2.
Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true
to location with anchorage for permanent support.
3.
Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within
framing members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior.
4.
Level recesses for recessed thresholds using nonshrink grout.
Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system.
Access-Control Devices: Connect access-control devices to access-control system.
Controls: Install and adjust activation and safety devices according to manufacturer's
written instructions and cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travelGuide
Rails: Install rails according to BHMA A156.10, including Appendix A, and
manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.
Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Section 08800 - Glazing.
08462 - 9

Phase 2
G.
H.
I.
3.3

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.4
B.
C.
Adjust hardware, moving parts, door operators, and controls to function smoothly, and
lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of applicable
BHMA standards.
1.
Adjust exterior doors for weathertight closure.
Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation
equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles).
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours
for this purpose.
CLEANING
A.
3.6
Certified Inspector: Engage a Certified Inspector to test and inspect components,

assemblies, and installations, including connections.
Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized
service representative:
1.
Test and inspect each automatic entrance, using AAADM inspection forms, to
determine compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards.
Automatic entrances will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.5
Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers to provide
weathertight installation.
1.
Set thresholds, bottom-guide-track system, framing members, and flashings in full
sealant bed.
2.
Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.
Signage: Apply signage on both sides of each door and breakaway sidelite as required by
cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel.
Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to
terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations on
bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.
Clean glass and metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and
sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original
finish.
1.
Comply with requirements in Section 08800 - Glazing for cleaning and maintaining
glass.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
03798614
03/15
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service

shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of automatic entrance
Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or
defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper automatic
08462 - 10

Phase 2
B.
3.7
entrance operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts
and supplies.
1.
Engage a Certified Inspector to perform safety inspection after each adjustment or
repair and at end of maintenance period. Furnish completed inspection reports to
Owner.
2.
Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working
hours.
3.
Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week, emergency callback service.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrances.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
08462 - 11

Phase 2
SECTION 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Coordinating finish among

aluminum fenestration units.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
C.
1.5
Aluminum windows for exterior locations.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

Windows: Tubular aluminum sections, shop fabricated, factory finished, with vision glass.
Configuration: Inward projecting equal legs for installation in masonry openings,
anchorage, and attachment devices.
Glazing: Interior.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Design Requirements
1.
Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and
negative wind pressure acting normal to plan of wall as calculated in accordance
with ASCE 7-95, Section 6, to a design pressure of 20 lb./sq. ft. as measured in
accordance with ASTM E330.
Performance Requirements
1.
Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass; with full recovery of glazing
materials.
2.
System to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals,
movement between window and perimeter framing, deflection of lintel.
3.
Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.15 cfm ft. of crack length measured at a
reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in
accordance with ASTM E283.
4.
Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a test
pressure difference of 12.00 lbf/sq. ft. with a water rate of 5 gal./hr.
5.
Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout assembly, primarily in line
with pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound.
6.
Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or
migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage
network.
7.
Condensation Factor: 48.
8.
Thermal Transmittance: Provide window units with a U-value maximum.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08520 - 1

Phase 2
9.
1.6
A.
1.7
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

1.
Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for
aluminum windows.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens,
operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant
installation.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 2 by 4 inches in size.
1.
Include similar Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection.
Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required, showing full
range of color variations for finishes, and prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
1.
Exposed Finishes: 2 by 4 inches.
2.
Exposed Hardware: Full-size units.
Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.9

1.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
2.
Review and discuss the finishing of aluminum windows that is required to be
coordinated with the finishing of other aluminum work for color and finish
matching.
3.
Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of aluminum windows with
other exterior wall components. Include provisions for anchorage, flashing, sealing
perimeters, and protecting finishes.
4.
Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and
weathertight exterior building envelope.
5.
Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed
by other trades.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.8
Conformance: Provide complete window assembly complying with AAMA101

classification H-C35.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer.

Product Test Reports: For each type of aluminum window, for tests performed by a
qualified testing agency.
Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
03798614
03/15
Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows

that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this
performance by test reports, and calculations.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08520 - 2

Phase 2
B.
C.
1.10
Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for

installation of units required for this Project.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.
2.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
Alenco.
EFCO Corp.
Kawneer Co., Inc.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper.

Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209; 5005 alloy, H14 temper.
Concealed Fasteners: Stainless steel.
Exposed Fasteners: Aluminum; finish to match window frame.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC 20, zinc rich type.
Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08800.
Protective Backing Paint: Bituminous type as specified in Division 9.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
General
1.
Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter
of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
2.
Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and
weatherproof.
3.
Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
4.
Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view.
Window Frames
1.
Minimum 2-3/8 inch deep profile, of 0.50 inch thick section; thermally broken with
interior portion of frame insulated from exterior portion.
2.
Flush glass stops of snap-on type.
3.
Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08520 - 3

Phase 2
2.4
FINISHES
A.
B.
C.
Class II, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A32/34 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as

fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class
II, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.010 mm or thicker)
complying with AAMA 611.
1.
densities.
Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A386 to 2.0 oz/sq ft.
Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact
with cementitious or dissimilar materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware,

accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not
addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in
ASTM E 2112.
Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall
flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.
Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, to glazing method required to achieve
performance criteria.
Install perimeter gaskets to method required to achieve performance criteria specified.
TOLERANCES
A.
B.
3.4
Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.
Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in
components to ensure weathertight window installation.
Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft. non-cumulative or
0.5 inches per 100 ft., whichever is less.
Maximum misalignment of two adjoining members abutting in plane: 1/32 inch.
ADJUSTING
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.

Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08520 - 4

Phase 2
3.5
CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
Clean work under provisions of 01700.

Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft,
clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08520 - 5

Phase 2
SECTION 08630
METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Section includes skylights with metal framing.
A.
1.4

ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
03798614
03/15

1.
components and profiles, and finishes for metal-framed skylights.
Shop Drawings: For metal-framed skylights.
1.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2.
Indicate structural loadings and reactions to be transmitted to supporting curbs.
3.
Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for
draining moisture within the assembly to the exterior.
4.
Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of
assembly, showing the following:
a.
Joinery including concealed welds.
b.
Anchorage.
c.
Expansion provisions.
d.
Glazing.
e.
Flashing and drainage.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's
standard sizes.
Fabrication Sample: Of each framing intersection of assemblies, made from 12-inch
lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:
1.
Joinery including concealed welds.
2.
Anchorage.
3.
Expansion provisions.
4.
Glazing.
5.
Flashing and drainage.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-framed skylights indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
08630 - 1

Phase 2
1.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.7

Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: For structural-sealant-glazed skylights, test
reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that joint sealants have been tested for each
material that will come in contact with sealants.
Product Test Reports: For metal-framed skylights, for tests performed by a qualified testing
agency.
Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and

approved for installation of metal-framed skylights required for this Project.
Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1401, "Guide for
Structural Sealant Glazing," for joint design and quality-control procedures.
1.
Joint designs are reviewed and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer.
2.
Quality-control program development and reporting comply with ASTM C 1401
recommendations for material qualification procedures, preconstruction sealanttesting program, and procedures and intervals for fabrication and installation reviews
and checks.
3.
Perform manufacturer's standard tests for compatibility and adhesion of sealants
with each material that will come in contact with sealants.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal

framed skylights that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
a.
b.
Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
c.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
d.
Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.
e.
Water leakage.
2.
Special Aluminum-Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components
on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal
weathering.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, checking, crazing, peeling, chalking, and
fading of finishes.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
03798614
03/15

"Quality Requirements," to design metal-framed skylights.
08630 - 2

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
03798614
03/15
Structural Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:
1.
Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction
perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding L/175 of the glass edge length for each
individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual
glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.
2.
Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which
reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which
reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed
components to less than 1/8 inch.
Lateral Bracing of Framing Members: Compression flanges of flexural members are
laterally braced by cross members with minimum depth equal to 50 percent of flexural
member that is braced. Glazing does not provide lateral support.
Structural-Test Performance: Metal-framed skylights tested according to ASTM E 330, as
follows:
1.
When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified deflection limits.
2.
When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural
distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding
0.2 percent of span.
3.
Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Metal-framed skylights that pass
missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and
testing information in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 3.
1.
Large-Missile Test: For glazed openings located within 30 feet of grade.
2.
Small-Missile Test: For glazed openings located more than 30 feet above grade.
Air Infiltration: Metal-framed skylights with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing
and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a
minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Metal-framed skylights that do not evidence water
penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331
at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design
pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
changes.
1.
Condensation Resistance: Metal-framed skylights with fixed glazing and framing areas
having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45 when tested according to
AAMA 1503.
1.
Haze Factor: Greater than 90 percent when tested according to ASTM D 1003.
Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed without
failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and
compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure.
08630 - 3

Phase 2
L.
2.2
Energy Performance: Provide metal-framed skylights with performance properties

specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated
below and certified and labeled according to NFRC:
1.
Thermal Transmittance (U-Factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have
U-factor of not more than 0.80 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F, as determined according to
NFRC 100.
2.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat
gain coefficient of no greater than 0.6 as determined according to NFRC 200.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
03798614
03/15
Metal-Framed Skylights: Glazed skylight assemblies supported by aluminum framing.

1.
Bristol Skylights; Santa Ana, CA.
2.
Exarc Skylights Inc.; Chamblee, GA.
3.
Lubbock Skylight Manufacturing; Lubbock, TX.
4.
Old Castle Glass, Naturalite Skylights; Terrell, TX.
5.
Sunglo Skylight Products; Kansas City, MO.
6.
VELUX America, Inc.; Greenwood, SC.
7.
Wasco Products, Inc.; Sanford, ME.
8.
Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Products Requirements.
Aluminum Framing Systems: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum members of
thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper as recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of use
and finish indicated.
1.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
2.
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
3.
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
4.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically retain
glazing.
1.
Include snap-on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners.
Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning skylight components.
Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1.
At pressure caps, use ASTM A 193/A 193M stainless-steel screws.
2.
Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
3.
Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
4.
Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match
framing system, fabricated from Series 300 stainless steel.
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts
complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, galvanized steel.
Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
Exposed Flashing and Closures: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components not less
than 0.030 inch thick.
Framing Sealants: As specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
08630 - 4

Phase 2
L.
2.3
GLAZING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.4
Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film
thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
Glazing: As specified in Section 08800 - Glazing.

Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,
resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.
Glazing Sealants: As recommended in writing by manufacturer.
Structural Glazing Sealants:
1.
Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible
with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and
tested for use as structural sealant, and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer
for use in metal-framed skylights indicated.
a.
2.
Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A,
and O; neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with structural sealant and
other components with which it comes in contact; and recommended in writing by
structural- and weatherseal-sealant and metal-framed skylight manufacturers for this
use.
a.
Color: Matching structural sealant.
3.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard tetrafluoroethylene-fluorocarbon or
polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
03798614
03/15
Where practical, fit and assemble metal-framed skylights in manufacturer's plant. To

ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently
factory assembled before shipment.
Fabricate aluminum components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1.
Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2.
Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3.
Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing joints and moisture
migrating within skylight to exterior.
4.
Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5.
Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
Fabricate aluminum sill closures with weep holes and for installation as continuous
component.
Reinforce aluminum components as required to receive fastener threads.
Factory-Glazed, Metal-Framed Skylights:
1.
Factory install glazing to comply with requirements in Section 08800 - Glazing.
After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according
to Shop Drawings.
08630 - 5

Phase 2
2.5
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
2.6

1.
densities.

A.
Structural-Sealant Glazing: Perform quality-control procedures complying with

ASTM C 1401 recommendations including, but not limited to, material qualification
procedures, sealant testing, and fabrication reviews and checks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1.
Do not install damaged components.
2.
Fit joints between aluminum components to produce hairline joints free of burrs and
distortion.
3.
Rigidly secure non-movement joints.
4.
Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and
electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
5.
Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar materials, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with protective coating or by installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended in writing by manufacturer for this purpose.
Install continuous aluminum sill closure with weatherproof expansion joints and locked
and sealed or welded corners. Locate weep holes at rafters.
Install components to drain water passing joints, and moisture migrating within skylight to
exterior.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and elevations.
Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Section 08800 - Glazing.
Structural-Sealant Glazing:
1.
Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to structural-sealant
manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation
includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
2.
Install weatherseal sealant according to weatherseal-sealant manufacturer's written
instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind weatherseal
sealant as recommended in writing by weatherseal-sealant manufacturer.
08630 - 6

Phase 2
H.
3.3

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.4
Erection Tolerances: Install metal-framed skylights to comply with the following

maximum tolerances:
1.
Alignment: Limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch where surfaces abut in
line, edge to edge, at corners, or where a reveal or protruding element separates
aligned surfaces by less than 3 inches; otherwise, limit offset to 1/8 inch.
2.
Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in
12 feet but no greater than 1/2 inch over total length.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
1.
Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, skylights shall
be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.
2.
Structural-Sealant Glazing Inspection: After installation of metal-framed skylights is
complete, structural-sealant glazing shall be inspected and evaluated according to
ASTM C 1401 recommendations for quality-control procedures.
Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply
with specified requirements.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

A.
B.
C.
Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing skylights. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other
substances.
Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during construction period.
Protect skylights from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If contaminating substances do contact skylight surfaces, remove contaminants
immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
08630 - 7

Phase 2
SECTION 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
Provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled
on the drawings and/or herein, including all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals
necessary and required for their completion. Any item of finish hardware not specifically
mentioned, but which is necessary for proper completion of the work shown on the
Drawings shall be provided without additional cost to owner. Any omissions shall be
called to the attention of the Architect prior to bid opening; otherwise the Drawings and
Specifications will be considered complete.
Mechanical door hardware for the following:
1.
Swinging doors.
2.
Sliding doors.
3.
Folding doors.
Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.
Electrified door hardware.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.4

Section 06410 - Custom Casework: Casework hardware.

Section 08210 - Impact Resistance Wood Doors (Flush).
Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Hardware for same except
cylinders.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in
the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and
the methods needed for proper performance of the work of the Section.
Where items of hardware herein are specified by reference numbers, they are taken from
the current catalogs of manufacturers listed on the schedule. Refer to the general
contractor's limited options for acceptable items of hardware and suppliers. Finishes and
sizes shall be as specified on the Hardware Schedule, subject to the stated permissible
option.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 1

Phase 2
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.6
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
1.7
Comply with pertinent provisions of Supplementary General Conditions.

Within twenty (20) calendar days after the contractor has received the owners notice to
proceed submit six (6) copies of the hardware schedule covering all finished hardware for
the building. Resubmittals will be required until complete architectural approval is
obtained. Schedule shall include the specified or approved optional hardware, keying and
template information. Keying codes shall be noted on the left margin of the schedule
opposite each item of hardware requiring mortising or internal reinforcing of metal doors
and/or frames. Degrees of opening and handling information shall also be listed. No
hardware shall be ordered or templates issued until complete architectural approval is
obtained.
On receipt of the approved schedule, contractor shall issue sufficient copies as required by
the general contractor for his distribution to the trades designing them, and his own use.
Copies for use by other trades shall include all blueline template sheets necessary to those
trades.
It shall be the contractor's responsibility to secure approval of the Keying Schedule from
the Owner and the Architect before ordering any hardware. When a key cabinet and
construction Master Keying is specified, no permanent keys shall be permitted on the job
site until after Owner acceptance of the project. At that time, the hardware subcontractor
shall make personal delivery of the permanent keys, tagged and pre-hung in the cabinet, to
the Owner in converting the construction system to the permanent system, fully explaining
the keying system and making recommendations for its maintenance and control.
Copy of Schedule for use at the job site shall include a draw list of all hardware included in
the approved schedule to assist the general contractor for checking all incoming
merchandise for completeness. Shortages shall be immediately reported for possible
replacement if lost or damaged in shipment.
Hardware shall be adequately wrapped for protection in shipment. All hardware shall be
labeled with the manufacturer's name, catalog number, finish, size and screw information.
Additionally, butt hinges, closer, locksets, latches and all handed hardware shall be
cartoned individually and marked with heading (on item) number, door number, hand and
keying information where applicable, to correspond with the approved schedule. Partial
shipments shall be accompanied with a packing list to assist in checking.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Floor-Recessed Door Hardware: Coordinate layout and installation with floor construction.
1.
Cast anchoring inserts into concrete.
Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory
prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are
made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with
Owners security consultant.
Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door
hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.
Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing
construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify
FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 2

Phase 2
existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions
and to provide proper door operation.
1.8
A.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
1.10

1.
Conference participants shall include Installers Architectural Hardware
Consultant and Owners security consultant.
2.
Incorporate conference decisions into keying schedule after reviewing door
hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
Flow of traffic and degree of security required.
b.
Preliminary key system schematic diagram.
c.
Requirements for key control system.
d.
Requirements for access control.
e.
Address for delivery of keys.
Provide five-year warranty for door closers.
EXTRA MATERIAL
A.
B.
Blank keys: Provide 25 total.

Provide 10 extra cylinder cores for each master key group.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FINISH HARDWARE, GENERAL

A.
03798614
03/15
Items specified are to establish design, grade quality and function standards; the following
are acceptable limited options:
1.
Hinges:
Equal products manufactured by Hager or Stanley
2.
Lockset:
Corbin/Russwin ML200
Sargent 10 Line
Schlage L Series
3.
Closer:
LCN Series 4041
Norton Series 7500
SGT Series 350
4.
Exit Device:
Von Duprin Series 98 x 696
Sargent 8800
5.
OH Holders:
Equal products manufactured by Corbin/Russwin, Glynn
Johnson, Norton, Rixson and Yale
6.
Misc. Trim:
Equal products manufactured by Hager, Quality, Rockwood and
Trego are acceptable.
7.
Weather Seals:
Equal products manufactured by A.J. May, Hager, and National
Guard Products are acceptable.
8.
Auxiliary Items: Equal products manufactured by Corbin/Russwin, Schlage, Yale
are acceptable.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 3

Phase 2
2.2
LIMITATIONS OF HARDWARE SPECIFICATION

A.
2.3
HARDWARE LOCATIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.4
Hardware subcontractor shall examine the drawings and specifications to determine the
extent of hardware quantities required. Should any particular door or item be omitted in
any scheduled hardware group, provide such door or item with hardware similar to that
required for similar conditions on the project.
Locks, latches: Finish floor to C/L of knobs, 40-5/16".

Deadlocks: Finish to C/L of cylinder, 48".
Push/Pull Plates: Finish floor to C/L of plate, 42" pull, 45 push.
Flushbolts: C/L of bolt face to top (and bottom) edge of floor, 12".
Exit Devices: Per template and installation instructions; Rails shall not conflict with door
lites, mounting heights shall be adjusted to center exit rail on appropriate door rail
Closer, O/H Holders: Per template and installation instructions.
Stops: To protect doors and hardware from contact with parts of the building or other
conflicting doors
Butt Hinges:
1.
Top anchor butt - per template instructions.
2.
Top butt hinge - top edge of butt leaf to rabbet, 5".
3.
Bottom butt hinge - bottom edge of butt leaf to finish floor, 10".
4.
Intermediate butt hinge - equal distant between top and bottom butts.
ACCESSIBILITY PROVISIONS
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Door Hardware: Handles, knobs, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices on
accessible doors shall be mounted no higher than 48 inches above the floor or ground
surface and shall have a shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight
grasping, tight pinching, or severe twisting to operate. The force required to activate door
hardware shall be no greater than five lb. Designs include lever-operated mechanisms,
push-type mechanisms and U-shaped handles. When sliding doors are fully open, operating
hardware shall be exposed and usable from both sides. Doors to hazardous areas such as
loading platforms, boiler rooms, mechanical and electrical rooms, and to other areas that
might be dangerous to a blind person, shall be made identifiable to the touch by a textured
surface on the door handle, knob, pull or other operating hardware. This textured surface
maybe made by knurling or roughening or by a material applied to the contact surface.
Such textured surfaces shall not be provided for emergency exit doors or any doors other
than those to hazardous areas.
Door Closer: If a door has a closer, then the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so
that from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least three (3) seconds to
move to an open position of approximately 12 degrees.
Door Opening Force: The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall comply
with this paragraph. For hinge doors, the force shall be applied perpendicular to the door at
the door opener or 30 inches from the hinged side, whichever is farther from the hinge. For
sliding or folding doors, the force shall be applied parallel to the door at the door pull or
latch.
1.
Exterior hinged doors shall not exceed 8.5 lb. Slight increases in opening force shall
be allowed where 8.5 lb. is insufficient to compensate for air pressure differentials.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 4

Phase 2
2.
D.
E.
F.
2.5
GUARANTEES
A.
2.6
Sliding doors, folding doors, and interior hinged doors shall not require a force
exceeding five lbs.
3.
Fire doors may be adjusted to meet the minimum opening force allowed by the
governing authority or applicable building code.
4.
These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage
other devices that may hold the door in a closed position.
5.
Forces for pushing or pulling doors open are measured with a push-pull gauge under
the following conditions.
a.
Hinged Doors: Force applied perpendicular to the door opener or 30 in. from
the hinged side, whichever is farther from the hinge.
b.
Sliding or Folding Doors: Force applied parallel to the door at the door pull or
latch.
c.
Application of Force: Apply force gradually so that the applied force does not
exceed the resistance of the door. Air-pressure differentials may require a
modification of this specification in order to meet the functional intent.
Door closers shall be mounted parallel arm unless specifically approved otherwise by the
Architect.
Thresholds: The height of any floor level change plus the height of any applied threshold at
doorway sills shall not exceed 1/2" and shall be beveled with a slope no greater than 1"
in 2".
Hardware for all opening shall meet requirements of The Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA) and the Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). In case of conflict materials of
equivalent quality and design required by ADA or TAS shall be provided.
Provide guarantees for all hardware furnished under this division to the general contractor
for this transmittal to the Owner. Guarantees shall be for a period of one (1) year (five [5]
years for closer) from date of Owner acceptance, against defects in material and
workmanship of the merchandise. Guarantees shall include the names, address and
telephone number of the hardware subcontractor, as well as the manufacturer's.
CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the
following:
1.
Cylinders: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.
Cylinder Grade: BHMA Grade 1.
Cylinders: Manufacturers standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze,
stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:
1.
Number of Pins: Six.
2.
Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam.
3.
Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and
raised trim ring.
4.
Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
Keying System: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a factory-registered keying system
complying with the following requirements:
1.
Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key and a master key.
a.
Cylinders shall be master keyed.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 5

Phase 2
E.
Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys complying with the following

1.
Cylinder Change Keys: Two.
2.
Master Keys: Six.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
B.
C.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on
shop drawings.
Verify that power supply is available to power operated devices.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
The contractor shall install all finished hardware plump, square, true, and in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions, using the best practices as approved by Architect.
Hardware shall be fitted and operated prior to painting, then removed and painting
completed before final installation. All hardware must be thoroughly cleaned, free from
mars and blemishes, and in perfect operating condition when turned over to the Owner.
Damaged or malfunctioning hardware will not be acceptable.
No extra costs will be allowed to facilitate proper installation of any hardware. The general
contractor shall be responsible for the proper fabrication of all materials and work to
receive hardware.
Finish hardware shall be furnished with all necessary screws, bolts, or other fastenings of
suitable size use and long life and shall harmonize with the hardware as to material and
finish. These fastenings shall be furnished where necessary with expansion shield, security
bolts, toggle bolts or other approved anchors according to the material to which it is
applied and recommended by the manufacturer. All hardware fastened to concrete shall be
furnished with machine screws and lead shields.
Extension flushbolts shall be edge mounted in all cases. Wrought box strikes shall be
furnished where strikes are mortised into wood. Strikes shall have sufficiently extended
lips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch-bolts, but no more than
necessary. Strikes for pairs of doors shall have 1" lips to center. All backsets of locks and
latches shall be 2-3/4" from the door edge unless otherwise indicated.
Hardware for fire doors shall conform to the requirements for NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. In
case of conflict between the type of hardware specified in these specifications or the type
required for fire protection, materials of equal quality and design without additional cost to
Owner, required by NFPA shall be furnished.
ADJUSTMENT AND MAINTENANCE

A.
03798614
03/15
Within thirty (30) days after Owner Acceptance of the Project, the subcontractor shall meet
with the Owner's maintenance foreman and thoroughly instruct him in the care and
adjustment of all movable hardware furnished under this division. Provide him with a
Manufacturer's Parts List for all locks, exits and closer, a Bound Care and Adjustment
Manual, and an adjustment tool for each type of adjustable hardware. Included shall be a
copy of an approved Hardware Schedule.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 6

Phase 2
3.4
COMPLIANCE
A.
B.
3.5
The Owner reserves the right to request and pay for an inspection by a representative of the
referenced organization to determine that the work of this Section has been performed in
accordance with the specified requirements.
In the event such inspection determines that the work of this Section does not comply with
the specified requirements, immediately remove the non-complying items and immediately
replace them with items complying with the specified requirements, all at no additional
cost to the Owner, and reimburse the Owner for the cost of the inspection.
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
To be issued at a later date.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 7

Phase 2
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
Glass glazing for Sections referencing this Section for products and installation.
Glass and hollow metal frame work.
Glass for aluminum windows.
Unframed mirrors.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.4

Section 08110 - Steel Door Frames: Glazed doors and sidelites.

Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts.
Section 08462 - Sliding Automatic Entrances.
Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows: Glazed windows.
Section 08630 - Metal-Framed Skylights.
Section 10801 - Toilet and Bath Accessories: Framed mirrors.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
03798614
03/15
ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors
by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used
in Buildings.
ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures.
ASTM C864 - Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal, Gaskets, Setting Blocks and Spacers.
ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass.
ASTM C1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.
ASTM C1172 - Laminated Architecture Flat Glass.
ASTM C1281 - Preformed Tape Sealants for Glazing Applications.
ASTM C1311 - Solvent Release Sealants.
ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
ASTM E546 - Test Method For Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
ASTM E576 - Test Method For Dew/Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in Vertical
Position.
ASTM E773 - Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
ASTM E774 - Classification of this Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
ASTM E2010 - Standard Test Method for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.
GLAZING
08800 - 1

Phase 2
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
W.
ASTM E4802 - Poly (Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic Sheet.

ASTM F1233 - Standard Test Method for Security Glazing Materials and Systems.
GANA - Glazing Manual.
GANA - Laminated Glass Design Guide.
GANA - Sealant Manual.
FS TT-C-00598 - Caulking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type.
FS TT-G-410 - Glazing Compound, Sash (Metal) for Back Bedding and Face Glazing (Not for
Channel or Stop Glazing).
X.
NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
Y.
NFPA 257 - Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.
Z.
SIGMA - Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association.
AA. UL 9 - Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.
BB. UL 752 - Bullet Resisting Equipment.
CC. UL 972 - Burglary Resistant Glazing.
1.5
A.
B.
C.
1.6
Provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier:

1.
In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
2.
Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass pane
to heel bead of glazing sealant.
Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane
of glass as calculated in accordance with ASCE 7-95 code to a design pressure of 20 lb./sq. ft.
as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330.
Limit glass deflection to 1/200 flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials,
whichever is less.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Product Data
1.
Glass:
a.
Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations,
special handling or installation requirements.
b.
Polycarbonate material manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning materials
and methods.
c.
Provide copy of manufacturers sample warranty.
2.
Glazing Sealants, Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and
environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required.
Samples:
1.
Submit four samples, minimum 6 x 6 inch in size, illustrating glass units, coloration and
design. Mark each sample to match glazing legend.
Submit 3 inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as scheduled.
2.
Manufacturer's Certificates
1.
Certify that glass meets or exceeds requirements of CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 for
Category I and II materials.
2.
Certify that sealed insulating glass units meet or exceed specified requirements.
3.
Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating
that glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials
including sealants, glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks.
GLAZING
08800 - 2

Phase 2
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
1.8
A.
B.
1.9
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings.
COORDINATION
A.
1.11
Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.

Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of
glazing compounds.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.10
Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual, SIGMA
and GANA Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation
methods.
Provide each lite of safety glazing with permanent marking indicating compliance with
specified standard(s).
Provide each lite of fire-rated glazing with permanent marking indicating compliance with
specified standard(s).
Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to
adjacent Work.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
C.
Provide Warranties in accordance with Division 1 sections.

Ten-year manufacturer's warranty:
1.
Include coverage for plastic film from coating failure, fading or cracking for 5 years.
2.
Include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and replacement of same.
3.
Include coverage for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same.
Five-year manufacturer's warranty:
1.
Insulating Glass Units: Include coverage for from seal failure, interpane dusting or
misting, and replacement of same.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Flat Glass Materials

1.
Libbey-Owens-Ford Co.
2.
Old Castle Glass (Superlite I-XL, fire safety glass).
3.
PPG Industries, Inc.
4.
Spectrum Glass Products, Inc.
Viracon.
5.
Lead Glass Materials
1.
AMEROPE Enterprises, Inc.; Bayton Beach, FL.
GLAZING
08800 - 3

Phase 2
C.
D.
2.2
2.
Radiation Protection Products; Waysata, MN.
3.
Shielding International; Madras, OR.
Glazing Compounds
1.
Dow Corning Corp.
2.
GE Silicones.
3.
Norton Co.
4.
Pecora Corp.
5.
Tremco Mfg. Co.
6.
VIP Enterprises, Inc.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1 sections.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Glazing Compounds
1.
Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1085; Shore A hardness of 10-20 color as selected by Architect;
non-skinning.
2.
Silicone Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class and Use suitable for
glazing application indicated; single component; chemical solvent curing; capable of
water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining, cured Shore A
hardness of 15 to 25.
a.
Color: As selected.
b.
Structural Silicone: Provide high-modulus structural silicone glazing materials
where sealant bonds glass to substrate.
3.
Polysulfide Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class and Use suitable
for glazing application indicated; two component; chemical curing, non-sagging type;
cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25.
a.
Color: As selected.
4.
Polyurethane Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class and Use suitable
for glazing application indicated; single component, chemical curing, non-staining, nonbleeding, Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35.
a.
Type: GC-E.
b.
Color: As selected.
5.
Acrylic Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class and Use suitable for glazing
application indicated; single component, solvent curing, non-bleeding; cured Shore A
hardness of 15 to 25.
a.
Color: As selected.
Glazing Accessories
1.
Setting Blocks: Type as recommended by glazing manufacturer for compatability with
edge seal of insulating glazing units Neoprene, EPDM, Silicone, 80 - 90 Shore A
durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum
4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method
and pane weight and area.
2.
Spacer Shims: Neoprene, Silicone, 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum
3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self
adhesive on one face.
3.
Glazing Tape: ASTM C1281, preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube
spacing device; 10 - 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; size as
required for glazing channel; black color.
GLAZING
08800 - 4

Phase 2
4.
5.
Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C864 Resilient type as recommended by glazing manufacturer

for framing system furnished with extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot;
color as selected by Architect.
Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
3.3
Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to
receive glazing.
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.

Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturers
instructions.
INSTALLATION
A.
03798614
03/15
General
1.
Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,
and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated,
including those in referenced glazing publications.
2.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar
characteristics.
3.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
4.
Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as
follows:
a.
Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct
size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances and comply with system performance requirements.
b.
Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to
sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final
compressed thickness of tape.
5.
Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications,
unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer.
6.
Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with
referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set
blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
GLAZING
08800 - 5

Phase 2
B.
C.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
3.5
Exterior Glazing
1.
Dry method as indicated in Figure 18 of GANA Glazing Manual and as recommended
by glazing manufacturer for framing system furnished.
Interior Glazing
1.
Dry Method (Tape and Tape)
a.
Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch
above sight line.
b.
Place setting blocks at location as recommended by glazing manufacturer with
edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
c.
Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter
of pane or unit.
d.
Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.
e.
Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for
full continuous contact.
f.
Knife trim protruding tape.
2.
Dry method as indicated in Figure 18 of GANA Glazing Manual and as recommended
by glazing manufacturer for framing system furnished.
Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.

Remove labels after work is complete.
Clean glass and mirrors.

A.
After installation, mark pane with an X by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not
mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
GLAZING
08800 - 6

Phase 2
SECTION 08816
RESINOUS GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Resinous wall panels.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.4

General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contact and Division 1
specification Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers product data; include product description, fabrication
information, and compliance with specified performance requirements.
Submit product test reports from a qualified independent 3rd party testing agency
indicating each type and class of panel system complies with the project performance
requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. Previously completed
test reports will be acceptable if for current manufacturer and indicative of products used
on this project.
1.
Test reports required are:
a.
Rate of Burning (ASTM D 635).
b.
Self-Ignition Temperature (ASTM D 1929).
c.
Density of Smoke (ASTM D 2843).
d.
Flame spread and Smoke developed testing (ASTM E 84).
e.
Room Corner Burn Test (NFPA 286).
f.
Extent of Burning (UL 94).
g.
Impact strength (ASTM D 3763).
h.
Safety glazing impact resistance (ANSI Z97.1-2004).
i.
UPITT Test for Combustion Product Toxicity.
j.
Dynamic environmental testing (ASTM standards D 5116 and D 6670).
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, panel dimensions, details, and
attachments to other work.
Samples for Verification:
1.
Submit minimum 4-inch by 4-inch, maximum 9-inch x 12-inch, sample for each
type, texture, pattern and color of solid plastic fabrication.
Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturers care and maintenance data, including care,
repair and cleaning instructions. Include in Project closeout documents.

A.
03798614
03/15
Deliver Translucent Panels, systems and specified items in manufacturers standard

protective packaging.
RESINOUS GLAZING
08816 - 1

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.6
Do not deliver Translucent Panels, system, components and accessories to Project site until
areas are ready for installation.
Store materials in a flat orientation in a dry place that is not exposed to exterior elements.
Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide protective coverings to
prevent damage or staining following installation for duration of project.
Before installing Plastic Fabrications, permit them to reach room temperature.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install panels until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, and ambient temperatures and humidity conditions are maintained at the
levels indicated for project when occupied for its intended use.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
C.
Manufacturers Special Warranty on Translucent Panels: Manufacturers standard form

agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in material or workmanship within the specified
warranty period.
Warranty Period: One (1) year after the date of substantial completion.
The warranty shall not deprive the owner of other rights or remedies the Owner may have
under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in addition to and runs
concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
2.3
Acceptable Manufacturer: 3form, Inc.; Salt Lake City, UT; (801) 649-2500.
As specified in Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
General: Fabricate Translucent Panels to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to
comply with indicated standards. Sizes, profiles and other characteristics are indicated on
the drawings.
Comply with manufacturers written recommendations for fabrication.
Machining: Acceptable means of machining are listed below. Ensure that material is not
chipped or warped by machining operations.
1.
Sawing: Select equipment and blades suitable for type of cut required.
2.
Drilling: Drills specifically designed for use with plastic products.
3.
Milling: Climb cut where possible.
4.
Routing.
5.
Tapping.
RESINOUS GLAZING
08816 - 2

Phase 2
D.
E.
2.4
Forming: Form products to shapes indicated using the appropriate method listed below.
Comply with manufacturers written instructions.
1.
Cold Bending.
2.
Hot Bending.
3.
Thermoforming: Acceptable only on uncoated material.
4.
Drape Forming.
5.
Matched Mold Forming.
6.
Mechanical Forming.
Laminating: Laminate to substrates indicated using adhesives and techniques
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape required for application indicated,
and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
Cleaner: Type recommended by manufacturer.
Fasteners: Use screws designed specifically for plastics. Self-threading screws are
acceptable for permanent installations. Provide threaded metal inserts for applications
requiring frequent disassembly such as light fixtures.
Bonding Cements: May be achieved with solvents or adhesives, suitable for use with
product and application.
Provide hardware as detailed and described in Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend and
per drawing details.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of Plastic Fabrications will
occur, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturers requirements. Verify that
substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with requirements
specified.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
General: Comply with manufacturers written instructions for the installation of

Translucent Panels.
Manufacturers shop to fabricate items to the greatest degree possible.
Utilize fasteners, adhesives and bonding agents recommended by manufacturer for type of
installation indicated. Material that is chipped, warped, hazed or discolored as a result of
installation or fabrication methods will be rejected.
Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with
approved shop drawings and product data.
Form field joints using manufacturers recommended procedures. Locate seams in panels
so that they are not directly in line with seams in substrates.
RESINOUS GLAZING
08816 - 3

Phase 2
3.3

A.
Protect surfaces from damage until date of substantial completion. Repair work or replace
damaged work, which cannot be repaired to Architects satisfaction.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
RESINOUS GLAZING
08816 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 08911
FIXED LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
B.
Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501
apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it
to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from
opening.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4


1.
For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing
specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.
Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and
spacing.
1.
Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water
intrusion.
2.
Show mullion profiles and locations.
Samples: For each type of metal finish required.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural[ and seismic]
performance requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according to

AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a
qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with
performance requirements specified.
Windborne-debris-impact-resistance test reports.
FIXED LOUVERS
08911 - 1

Phase 2
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7

1.
2.
AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
3.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before

fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.3
Source Limitations: Obtain louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where
indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.
Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

qualified professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without
permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louverblade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall
be considered to act normal to the face of the building.
1.
Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of 20 lbf/sq. ft., acting
inward or outward.
Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Louvers located within 30 feet of grade shall pass
basic-protection, large-missile testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 3
when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and
length than louvers indicated for use on Project.
Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as
demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for
length and width according to AMCA 500-L.
changes.
1.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A.
03798614
03/15
Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver:

1.
Louver Depth: 4 inches.
2.
Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch for blades and 0.080
inch for frames.
3.
Mullion Type: Exposed.
FIXED LOUVERS
08911 - 2

Phase 2
4.
5.
2.4
LOUVER SCREENS
A.
B.
2.5
Uninsulated, Blank-Off Panels: Metal sheet attached to back of louver.

1.
Aluminum sheet for aluminum louvers, not less than 0.050-inch nominal thickness.
2.
Panel Finish: Same finish applied to louvers.
3.
Attach blank-off panels with sheet metal screws.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.7
General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.

1.
Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.
2.
Screening Type: Bird screening.
Secure screen frames to louver frames with machine screws with heads finished to match
louver, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c.
BLANK-OFF PANELS
A.
2.6
Louver Performance Ratings:

a.
Free Area: Not less than 7.0 sq. ft. for 48-inch-wide by 48-inch-high louver.
b.
Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 900 fpm.
c.
Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg static pressure drop at 700-fpm
free-area exhaust velocity.
d.
Air Performance: Not more than 0.15-inch wg static pressure drop at 900-fpm
free-area intake velocity.
AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming,
or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
1.
Use tamper-resistant screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
2.
For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
3.
For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors,
made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load
equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed for masonry,
as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent
testing agency.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling
limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs
and mullions, reinforced with splice plates.
1.
Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade-spacing
pattern unless horizontal mullions are indicated.
FIXED LOUVERS
08911 - 3

Phase 2
2.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.8
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
B.
2.9
Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints unless continuous vertical

assemblies are indicated.
Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at
head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.
Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances,
and perimeter sealant joints.
1.
Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated.
Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than is
recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less.
Provide subsills made of same material as louvers.
Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed
from view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections
between frame members necessary.
Finish louvers after assembly.

1.
densities.
GALVANIZED-STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A.
B.
Finish louvers after assembly.

Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil
and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating compatible with the
organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded
areas and repair according to ASTM A 780.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for

installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction.
Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws
where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
FIXED LOUVERS
08911 - 4

Phase 2
D.
E.
F.
3.4
Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with
concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a
heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or
nonmetallic flashing.
Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation
progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 07900 Joint Sealers for sealants applied during louver installation.

A.
B.
C.
Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove
fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during
Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not
harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of
corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect,
remove damaged units and replace with new units.
1.
Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and
gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
FIXED LOUVERS
08911 - 5

Phase 2
SECTION 09000
FINISH MATERIAL LEGEND
(PARTIAL LIST)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2

SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Finish material/colors legend.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1.3
MANUFACTURED CASEWORK (Section 06402)

A.
Plastic Laminate Faced Casework

LAM-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Location:
Note:
LAM-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
LAM-3
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
03798614
03/15
Nevamar
(800) 638-4380
Ventura, Texas, and Orange County Sales Representative
TM 2001
Ochre Tempura
Utility Room Casework
Provide fire rated substrate and adhesive to maintain or
obtain Class A fire rating where required by code. Provide
radius exposed edges for casework.
Wilsonart
(800) 433-3222
7953-38
Harvest Maple
Fine Velvet Texture
Treatment, Exam Room, Waiting Casework
radius exposed edges for casework and bullnose edge at
work counter
Wilsonart
(800) 433-3222
4861-07

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 1

Phase 2
LAM-4
Color:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
Gold Alchemy
Textured Gloss
Casework
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Wilsonart
(800) 433-3222
7935K-07
Shaker Cherry
Textured Gloss
Casework and Elevator Wall Panels
radius exposed edges for casework and bullnose edge at
workcounter
Pattern:
Color:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
LAM-5
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
LAM-6
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
B.
Wilsonart
(800) 433-3222
7919-38
Amber Cherry
Premium
Casework at Infusion
Tackable Surface Material

TB-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Width:
Content:
03798614
03/15
Wilsonart
(800) 433-3222
D30-60
Natural Almond
Matte
Plumbing Apron
Guilford of Maine
(800) 544-0200
Drift 2539
Sprout 030
66
51% Post-Consumer Recycled Polyester,

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 2

Phase 2
49% Pre-Consumer
Recycled Polyester
9.6V, 14H
Work Area Casework
Fabric wrapped homosote board butt jointed
panels with seamless fabric application over top, provide
backing on fabric.
Repeat:
Location:
Note:
C.
Solid Surface Material

SSM-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Color:
Finish:
Size:
ADA Sink:
Location:
Note:
SSM-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Finish:
Size:
ADA Sink:
Location:
Note:
SSM-3
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
Size:
Location:
Note:
SSM-4
03798614
03/15
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Cambria
(952) 944-1676
Hyde Park 2150
Polished
or Thick
Solid Surface under counter mount LG Hi-Macs
Color: Cream
Nurse Stations, Work Areas, Conference Room, Chapel
Provide with 1.5 bullnose or waterfall edge as noted in
details and elevations and 6H finger-coved backsplash.
Provide bullnose edge at sink side.
LG Hi-Macs
(877) 353-1805
Volcanics
Basil VG22
Satin
or Thick
Solid Surface under counter mount Color: Cream
Exam Room, Toilet Room, and Back of House
Provide with 1.5 waterfall edge as noted in details and
elevations and 6H finger-coved backsplash.
Corian
(800) 436-6072
Cottage Lane
Satin
or Thick
Work Areas
Provide with 1.5 waterfall edge as noted in details and
elevations and 6H finger-coved backsplash.
Meganite
(800) 533-3030

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 3

Phase 2
Pattern:
Finish:
Size:
ADA Sink:
Location:
Note:
D.
Surfing Safari 419

Satin
or Thick
Solid Surface under counter mount Color: Corian Bone
Infusion Countertop
Provide with 1.5 bullnose or waterfall edge as noted in
details and elevations and 6H finger-coved backsplash.
Resin Panel (Section 08840)

RES-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
Size:
Location:
Note:
E.
Metal (Section 06402, 14240, 05700)

MTL-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
Size:
Location:
Note:
Fryreglet
(800) 237-9773
Reveal Channel Screed DCS-50-50
Satin Anodized Aluminum
x , 2 x , 1 x
Reveals
As noted in Elevations.
MTL-2
Pattern:
Finish:
Size:
Location:
Flat Stock Aluminum

Brushed Aluminum
W
Reveals
MTL-3
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Moz Metal
(510) 632-0853
And Orange County Sales Representative
Fog
Dura Film - Satin
Clear
Column Covers
As noted in Elevations
Pattern:
Finish:
Color:
Location:
Note:
MTL-4
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
03798614
03/15
Lumicor
CPS/Garten Corporation (949) 455-1600
Lumiclear Meadow/Sedona Crush
Front: Gloss, Back: Matte
48W x 96H x 3/4 thick
Reception Desk, Nurse Station
Provide with Fire Polished exposed edges.
Gage
(415) 541-0969
GC123 Vertical Surfacing
Bronze (BZ)

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 4

Phase 2
SS-1
F.
Location:
Note:
Chapel
As noted in Elevations
Manufacturer:
Finish:
Location:
Per Elevator Manufacturer

Stainless Steel Metal #4 Finish l
Elevator, Control Panel and Doors
Moulding (Section 06402)

CHR-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Style:
Color:
Size:
Location:
Note:
CHR-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Style:
Color:
Size:
Location:
Note:
MLD-1
G.
Spectrim
Adam Clark (800) 437-0557
TCR-311 Medium
Honduras Mahogany (Confirm)
D x 3 H
Transition at the top of the Wainscot (High Impact
Wallcovering) in Corridors
Height of chair rail to be coordinated with height of
casework and window sills. Film to be applied to a noncombustible surface to obtain Class A fire rating.
Style:
Finish:
Size:
Location:
Superior Moulding or equal

(818) 376-1415
Ventura, Texas and Orange County Sales Representative
Chair Rail Half Round (Maple species)
Natural Maple Stained to match HIC-6
1/2H x 1/4D
Wallcovering) HIC transition as noted in Finish Plans.
casework, window sills and backsplash.
Manufacturer:
Type:
Finish:
Location:
Notes:
Custom Wood Work

Solid Maple Wood
Stained to match LAM-4
Feature Wall Shelf
See Elevations and Details for additional information.
Wood
WD-1
03798614
03/15
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Spectrim
Adam Clark (800) 437-0557
TCR-311 Medium
Maple (13) (Confirm)
D x 3 H
Wallcovering) in Patient Care Areas per Finish Plan.
casework, windowsills and backsplash. Film to be applied
to a non-combustible surface to obtain Class A fire rating.

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 5

Phase 2
1.4
WD-2
Manufacturer:
Type:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
Custom Wood Work

Solid Maple Wood
Stained to match LAM-2
Screen Surround and Wall Shelf
See Elevations and Details
WD-3
Manufacturer:
Type:
Finish:
Location:
Custom Wood Work

Solid Maple Wood
Stained to match LAM 2
Stringers and Stair Walls
GLAZING (Section 08816)

A.
Glazing
GL-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Size:
Location:
Note:
GL-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Size:
Thickness:
Location:
Note:
03798614
03/15
Ultraglass
(800) 777-2332
Swirl
See Elevations
Screen
Glass to be curved panel. Provide with sealed polished
exposed edges, pattern to be vertical.
Skyline Design
(888) 278-4660
To match H. Wildflower 1D Henry Domke Image
See Elevation
1/2 thick
Feature Wall First Floor Waiting
Provide with Polished Exposed Edges. Digital Image
to be protected between two layers of glass. Provide
with 1 diam. stand-offs in anodized aluminum finish.
GL-3
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Thickness:
Location:
Note:
Photomation
(714) 236-2121
To match Henry Domke Orchard Grass 8606
See Elevation
1/2 thick
Meditation Screen Wall, Second Floor Screen Wall
Provide with Polished Exposed Edges. Digital Image
on slick to be protected between two layers of glass. See
elevations and details for more information.
GL-4
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Thickness:
Nathan Allan Glass Studios

(269) 767-7534
Stax Flex
See Elevation
1.5

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 6

Phase 2
GL-5
1.5
Location:
Note:
Feature Wall
Polish all exposed edges
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Thickness:
Location:
Art Glass
To be determined
See Elevation
TBD
Chapel
TILE (Section 09300)

A.
Porcelain Paver Tile

PPT-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Epoxy Grout:
Location:
Note:
PPT-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Finish:
Size:
Epoxy Grout:
Location:
Note:
PPT-3
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Epoxy Grout:
03798614
03/15
Arizona Tile
(818) 742-4750
Misingi
Teka
5 x 32
Custom Building Products 100% Epoxy Grout
Color: 35 Chaparal
Reception Field Floor Tile
Provide minimal grout joint no greater than 1/16
and all required base and trim.
Crossville
(931) 484-2110
Bluestone AV201
Colorado Buff
Honed
6x24, 12x12, 12x24, 24x24
Color: 145 Light Smoke
Field Floor Tile
and all required base and trim. See floor pattern plan for
random pattern installation.
Dal TIle
(310) 453-9112
City View CY04
Downtown Night
12x12
Color: 185 New Taupe

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 7

Phase 2
PPT-4
Location:
Note:
Toilet Room Floor Tile

Manufacturer:
Contact:
Dal Tile
(310) 453-9112
Monticito
Crema MI20
12 x 24
Color: 122 Linen
Toilet Room Wall Tile
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Epoxy Grout:
Location:
Note:
PPT-5
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Epoxy Grout:
Location:
Note:
PPT-6
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Finish:
Size:
Epoxy Grout:
Location:
Note:
PPT-7
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Finish:
Size:
Epoxy Grout:
03798614
03/15
Tileshop
(818) 994-9586
Campogalliano - Strand
Beige CGSDBE
12 x 24
Color: 382 Bone
Feature Walls
Crossville
(931) 484-2110
Bluestone AV201
Colorado Buff
Honed
12x12
Elevator Cab Floor Tile
and all required base and trim. See Floor Pattern Plan.
Crossville
(931) 484-2110
Bluestone AV201
Colorado Buff
Honed/Unpolished
(Mesh Mounted)

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 8

Phase 2
PPT-8
Location:
Note:
Ramps
Must comply with coefficient requirements for a ramp.
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Finish:
Size:
Epoxy Grout:
Longust
Julie Duenas Whalen (800) 352-0521
Casa Dolce Casa 19 Tohidea A,B
Hyde Park Todi
Matte
15 x 31
Color 380 Haystack
Womens Center Reception
Location:
B.
Porcelain Tile Base

PTB-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Epoxy Grout:
Location:
Note:
C.
Glass Tile
GT-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Epoxy Grout:
Location:
Note:
GT-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Epoxy Grout:
03798614
03/15
Dal Tile
Donna Apcar (310) 453-9112
Monticito S-3639T Cove Base
Crema MI20
6 x 12 Cove Base
Color: 122 Linen
Where PPT-4 is used.
Face of finish to be flush with adjacent finish. Provide with
all required trim pieces. Cut bullnose edge to allow for wall
tile to be stacked as required.
Stone and Pewter

(415) 367-5616
Tozen Mosaic
Strontium Natural
1x1 Mosaic
Color: 311 Moss
Feature Wall Accent
Provide minimal grout joint no greater than 1/16.
Stone and Pewter
(415) 367-5616
Sumi-e Tresse
Music Silk
Tresse Mosaic x 1, 1 x 4
Color: 122 Linen

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 9

Phase 2
GT-3
Location:
Note:
Toilet Room Accent

Provide minimal grout joint no greater than preset mosaic
spacing.
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Stone and Pewter

(415) 367-5616
Sumi-e Japonaise
Music Silk
Japonaise Mosaic x 1, 1 x 1
Color: 122 Linen
Toilet Room Accent
Provide minimal grout joint no greater than preset mosaic
spacing.
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Epoxy Grout:
Location:
Note:
D.
Natural Stone (Section 09751)

NS-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Style:
Finish:
Size:
Color:
ADA Sink:
Location:
Note:
NS-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Style:
Color:
Size:
Epoxy Grout:
Location:
Note:
NS-3
Arizona Tile
(818) 742-4750
Stackstone Mosaic
Golden Gate
11.75 x 11.75 Stackstone Mesh
Feature Wall Accent
See Elevations and Details.
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Style:
Size;
Location:
Note:
03798614
03/15
Arizona Tile
(818) 742-4750
Granite Slab
Polished
Thick
Seafoam Green
Corian Color Bone
Countertop
Provide with 1 bullnose or eased edge. See elevations
and details.

Match Exterior Stone
Match Existing Size
Entry Vestibule

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 10

Phase 2
NS-4
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Style:
Finish:
Epoxy Grout:
Location:
Note:
E.
Wood Tile
WT-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Style:
Color:
Size:
Epoxy Grout:
Location:
Note:
F.
Stone and Pewter

(415) 367-5616
Falling Water
Amberwood
12 x 12 Mesh Mosaic
Laticrete 100% Epoxy Grout
Color: 55 Tawny
Meditation Accent Wall
Grout size to match preset mosaic spacing.
Ceramic Tile
CT-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Style:
Color:
Size:
Epoxy Grout:
Location:
1.6
Dal Tile
Donna Apcar (310) 453-9112
Crema Marfil Slab
Honed
Color: 122 Linen
Art Niche Ledge
Dal Tile
Donna Apcar (310) 453-9112
K165
Almond
4 x 4
Color: 122 Linen
Utility Room Wet Wall
ACOUSTIC TREATMENT (Section 09511)

A.
Acoustic Ceiling Tile

ACT-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Grid System:
Location:
03798614
03/15
USG
(800) 950-3839
Olympia Micro Tegular
White
2 x 2, 2 x 4
15/16, Suprafine Heavy Duty, Color: White;
Provide all necessary trim
General Ceiling Tile

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 11

Phase 2
ACT-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Edge Detail:
Color:
Size:
Grid System:
Location:
1.7
USG
(800) 950-3839
Clean Room Clima Plus
Square Lay-In
White
24 x 24 x 5/8 or 24 x 48 x 5/8
15/16 Prelude Heavy Duty System Exposed Tee Grid
Color: White. Provide all necessary trim pieces.
Wet Environments, Sterile Environments, Utility Rooms
where required by code
SPECIAL CEILING SURFACES (Section 09545)

A.
Ceiling Transparency
TRN-1 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Location:
Note:
TRN-2 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Location:
Note:
TRN-3 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Location:
Note:
TRN-4 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
03798614
03/15
Sky Factory
(866) 759-3228
6eo_md04
Coordinate with existing fixture location
Lin AC
Must use Sky Factory light fixture, which is to be on
dimmers. Image orientation to be coordinated with
patient orientation.
Sky Factory
(866) 759-3228
4ex
Lin AC
Sky Factory
(866) 759-3228
4fi
Lin AC
Sky Factory
(866) 759-3228
6bh_01

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 12

Phase 2
Size:
Location:
Note:

Lin AC
TRN-5 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Location:
Note:
TRN-6 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Location:
Note:
TRN-7 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Location:
Note:
TRN-8 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Location:
Note:
TRN-9 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
03798614
03/15
Sky Factory
(866) 759-3228
00s06
Imaging
Sky Factory
(866) 759-3228
3cdA
Mammo
Sky Factory
(866) 759-3228
4gn
Mammo
Sky Factory
(866) 759-3228
6tt_md01
Mammo
Sky Factory
(866) 759-3228
6tk

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 13

Phase 2
Size:
Location:
Note:

Mammo
TRN-10 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Location:
Note:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Location:
Note:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Location:
Note:
1.8
Sky Factory
(866) 759-3228
4hp
Womens Ultrasound
Sky Factory
(866) 759-3228
Womens Ultrasound
Womens Ultrasound
Sky Factory
(866) 759-3228
Womens Bone Density
RESILIENT FLOORING (Section 09651)

A.
Resilient Tile Flooring

RTF-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Adhesive:
Location:
Note:
03798614
03/15
Armstrong Flooring
(877) 276-7876
Natural Creations Earthcuts
Durango Beige TP508
16 x 16
Per SJH Standards and Manufacturers Recommendation
Field and Accent Resilient Floor Tile
See Floor Pattern Plans. Prepare sub-floor per
SJH Standards. Must have Square Edges.

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 14

Phase 2
RTF-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Adhesive:
Location:
Note:
RTF-3
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Adhesive:
Location:
Note:
RTF-4
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Adhesive:
Location:
Note:
RTF-5
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Adhesive:
Location:
Note:
03798614
03/15
Armstrong Flooring
(877) 276-7876
Natural Creations Mystix
Kinderloy Bronze Patina TP707
12 x 24
Accent Resilient Floor Tile
SJH Standards. Must have Square Edges. Vine to be laser
cut @ Factory and standard inlay template is to be provided
to the field installer
Armstrong Flooring
(877) 276-7876
Natural Creations Earthcuts
Rock Solid Sandstone TP549
18 x 18
Field and Accent Resilient Floor Tile
Armstrong Flooring
(877) 276-7876
Natural Creations ArborArt
Alder Mid TP018
4 x 36
Field Resilient Floor Tile
Armstrong Flooring
(877) 276-7876
Natural Creations ArborArt
Walnut Medium TP020
4 x 36

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 15

Phase 2
RTF-6
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Adhesive:
Location:
Note:
1.9
Armstrong Flooring
(877) 276-7876
Natural Creations Arbour Art
TP010 Wild Cherry Medium
4 x 36
Per SJH Standards and Manufacturers
Recommendation
SHEET FLOORING (Section 09652) (For Reference Only If Needed)

A.
Linoleum Seamless Sheet Flooring

LIN-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Finish:
Size:
Adhesive:
Welding Rod:
Location:
Note:
LIN-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Finish:
Size:
Adhesive:
Welding Rod:
Location:
Note:
LIN-3
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Finish:
Size:
Adhesive:
03798614
03/15
Forbo
(800) 342-0604
Marmoleum Real
3120 Rosato
Top Shield
79W x 2.5mm
To match per Manufacturers Recommendation
Field Linoleum Floor
Deduct Alternate for Resilient Tile. (Adhesive and Sub
Floor preparation per manufacturer specifications)
Forbo
(800) 342-0604
Marmoleum Striato
5229 Fresh Walnut
Top Shield
79W x 2.5mm
Accent Linoleum Floor
Forbo
(800) 342-0604
Marmoleum Real
2707 Barley
Top Shield
79W x 2.5mm

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 16

Phase 2
LIN-4
Welding Rod:
Location:
Note:

Manufacturer:
Contact:
Forbo
(800) 342-0604
Marmoleum Real
3234 Forest Ground
Top Shield
79W x 2.5mm
Pattern:
Color:
Finish:
Size:
Adhesive:
Welding Rod:
Location:
Note:
B.
Seamless Sheet Vinyl

SMV-1
Manufacturer:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Adhesive:
Welding Rod:
Location:
SMV-2
Manufacturer:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Adhesive:
Welding Rod:
Location:
SMV-3
Manufacturer:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Adhesive:
Welding Rod:
Location:
03798614
03/15
Armstrong
(877) 276-7876
Rejuvenations Stone Run
Sidecar 34352 Bagel
72W x 0.080 thk.
Per SJH standards and Manufacturers Recommendation
Biopsy
Armstrong
(877) 276-7876
Rejuvenations Timberline Maple
37351 Knock on Wood
72W x 0.080 thk.
Biopsy
Armstrong
(877) 276-7876
Rejuvenations Timberline Cherry
37362 Ruddy Cheeks
72W x 0.080 thk.
Biopsy

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 17

Phase 2
SMV-4
Manufacturer:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Adhesive:
Welding Rod:
Location:
C.
Rubber Seamless Flooring

RUB-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Welding Rod:
Adhesive:
Location:
Note:
RUB-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Welding Rod:
Adhesive:
Location:
Note:
RUB-3
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Welding Rod:
Adhesive:
Location:
Note:
03798614
03/15
Armstrong
(877) 276-7876
Rejuvenations Lithos Stone
34330 Lithos Andesite
72W x 0.080 thk.
Biopsy
Nora Systems, Inc.

(800) 336-5096
Environcare
Moor Grass 2967
3.0mm x 4-0W
Per CH Standards or Nora Plan NTX
Field Flooring
See Floor Pattern Plans. (Adhesive and Sub Floor
preparation per SJH and manufacturer specifications).
Nora Systems, Inc.
(800) 336-5096
Environcare
Lotus Flower 2944
3.0mm x 4-0W
Accent Flooring
Nora Systems, Inc.
(800) 336-5096
Environcare
Satin Wood 2785
3.0mm x 4-0W
Accent Flooring

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 18

Phase 2
RUB-4
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Welding Rod:
Adhesive:
Location:
Note:
1.10
Nora Systems, Inc.

(800) 336-5096
Environcare
2962 Cinnamon Bark
3.0mm x 4-0W
Red Line
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES (Section 09653)

A.
Resilient Base and Accessories

RTS-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Base:
Color:
Size:
Adhesive:
Location:
RTS-2
176 Brass
4 H
Per manufacturers recommendation
Field Resilient Base Throughout
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Adhesive:
Location:
RTS-3
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Adhesive:
Location:
B.
Johnsonite
Ellen Wren (800) 899-8916
Traditional Top Set Rubber Wall Base
49 Beige
4 H
Back of House Wall Base for future improvement.
Johnsonite
Ellen Wren (800) 899-8916
Millwork Emissary MW 49-P
Beige 49
4-1/2 H
Infusion
Transition Strip
TS-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
03798614
03/15
Johnsonite
Ellen Wren (800) 899-8916
Millwork Wallbase Diplomat MW-176-A Rubber Topset
Schluter
(800) 472-4588
Shiene - As required per flooring condition

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 19

Phase 2
Finish:
Size:
Brushed Stainless Steel

Profile to be verified by Flooring Contractor
Location:
All flooring transition strips as required for various material

transitions.
Face of finish floor to be flush with one another
Note:
C. Self-Cove Base
SCB-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Finish:
Size:
Adhesive:
Welding Rod:
Location:
Note:
SCB-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Adhesive:
Welding Rod:
Location:
Note:
SCB-3
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Adhesive:
Welding Rod:
Location:
Note:
1.11
Forbo
(800) 342-0604
Ventura, Texas, County Sales Representative
Marmoleum
To match adjacent floor
Top Shield
6H self cove base as required by code
Per SJH Standards and Manufacturers
Recommendation
Toilet Room
Provide with Aluminum Top Cap
Armstrong
(877) 276-7876
Rejuvenations Stone Run
4H or 6H self cove base as required by code
As noted in Room Finish Schedule.
Nora
(800) 336-5096
Environcare
4H or 6H self cove base as required by code
As noted in Room Finish Schedule.
CARPET (Section 09681)

A.
Carpet
CPT-1
03798614
03/15
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Lees Carpet
(800) 523-5647

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 20

Phase 2
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Installation Method:
Pad:
Adhesive:
Weight:
Yarn:
Location:
Note:
CPT-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
CPT-3
Manufacturer:
Contact:
CPT-4
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Lees Carpet
(800) 523-5647
Pattern:
First Day of Spring GT131
Color:
635 Renewal
Size:
24 x 24
Installation Method: Vertical Ashlar
Pad:
None (direct glue)
Adhesive:
Per SJH Standards and Manufacturers Recommendation.
Weight:
26 oz.
Yarn:
Smartstrand Contract made with DuPont Sorona Triexta
Location:
Offices, Dressing, Conference, Family Resource Center,
Consultation
Note:
Prepare sub-floor per SJH Standards.
Lees Carpet
(800) 523-5647
Pattern:
Endless Horizon GT130
Color:
635 Renewal
Size:
24 x 24
Installation Method: Vertical Ashlar
Pad:
None (direct glue)
Adhesive:
Weight:
26 oz.
Yarn:
Location:
Corridor, Sub Waiting, and Nurse Station
Note:
Face of insert carpet to be flush with adjacent floor finish.
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Pad:
03798614
03/15

Ray of Sunshine GT127
635 Renewal
24 x 24
Vertical Ashlar
None (direct glue)
26 oz.
Waiting, Reception
Karastan
(800) 523-5647
Sonic Cadence KC156
158 Interlude
12W
KC 156

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 21

Phase 2
Adhesive:
Weight:
Yarn:
Pattern Repeat
Location:
Note:
1.12

32 oz.
Color Strand Solution Dyed Nylon
18W x 23L
Chapel
Face of insert carpet to be flush with adjacent floor
finish. Prepare sub-floor per SJH Standards.
PAINTING (Section 09912)

A.
Interior Paint Eggshell Finish

PTE-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Color:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
PTE-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Color:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
PTE-3
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Color:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
PTE-4
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Color:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
03798614
03/15
Dunn Edwards
(310) 367-6422
Sand Castle DEC740
Eggshell
Field Wall Paint Throughout
Must have low VOC emissions and comply with current air
quality safety standards.
Benjamin Moore
(888) 854-9889
Saddle Tan 1124
Eggshell
Accent Wall Paint
Dunn Edwards
(310) 367-6422
Northgate Green DE6235
Eggshell
Accent Wall Paint
Dunn Edwards
(310) 367-6422
Graham Cracker DE6144
Eggshell
Reading Room above Wainscot

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 22

Phase 2
B.
Interior Paint Semi-Gloss Finish

PTS-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Color:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
PTS-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Color:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
C.
Dunn Edwards
(310) 367-6422
Sandcastle DEC740
Semi-gloss
Back of House for future improvement
Interior Paint Flat Finish

PTF-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Color:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
PTF-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Color:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
PTF-3
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Color:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
03798614
03/15
Dunn Edwards
(310) 367-6422
Babys Breath DEW342
Semi-gloss
Ceiling
Dunn Edwards
(310) 367-6422
Babys Breath DEC342
Flat
Field Ceiling
quality safety standards. See Reflected Ceiling Plan.
Frazee
(800) 826-9048
8184M Moselle
Flat
Accent Soffit
Benjamin Moore
(888) 854-9889
Saddle Tan 1124
Flat
Accent Soffit

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 23

Phase 2
PTF-4
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Color:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
1.13
Dunn Edwards
(310) 367-6422
Almond Latte DE6143
Flat
Accent Soffit
WALLCOVERING (Section 09720)

A.
Vinyl Wallcovering
VWC-1 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Content:
Pattern Repeat:
Location:
VWC-2 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Content:
Pattern Repeat:
Location:
VWC-3 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Content:
Pattern Repeat:
Location:
VWC-4 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
03798614
03/15
Trikes
(800) 200-8120
Lanark Code R2-CX-11
Cache
53/54W
100% Recycled Polyester
N/A
Family Resource, Womens Dressing
Trikes
(800) 200-8120
Lanark Tableau L2-TA-17
Irish Linen
53/54W
Type II Vinyl
26H, N/A V
Consult, Sub-Wait Accent, Registration, Mens
Waiting/Dressing
Wolf Gordon
(800) 347-0550
Linnea Flower G7128843
Esquise
52W
Type II Vinyl
52H, 24V
Womens Waiting, Adult Cancer Center and Womens
Dressing Room
Wolf Gordon
(800) 347-0550
Legacy G7104508
Sorrel

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 24

Phase 2
Size:
Content:
Pattern Repeat:
Location:
VWC-5 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Content:
Location:
1.14
54W
Type II Vinyl
Random
Chapel, Family/Resource Center
Trikes Tower Wallcovering
Jamalle French (818) 919-1680
Trixie
Corn Silk TR-TR-14
54W
Type II Vinyl
Appearance Center
IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION (Section 10265)

A.
Corner Guards
CG-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Location:
Note:
CG-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
Size:
Location:
Note:
B.
CS Acrovyn
(626) 665-1321
SMWS-20
#053 Honey Beech with Stainless Steel Guard
2 3/4 x 2 3/4 Full Height
Patient and Public Areas
As noted on Room Finish Schedule and Architectural Plans.
Provide with all trim pieces and end caps. Corner Guards to
go to the floor unless otherwise required by code.
High Impact Wallcovering

HIC-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern/Color:
Size:
Location:
Note:
03798614
03/15
CS Acrovyn
(626) 665-1321
SSM-20
997 Irish Cream
2 x 2 Full Height
Back of House for future improvement
Provide with all trim pieces and end caps. Corner Guards to
go to the floor unless otherwise required by code.
Korogard
(800) 935-9359
Orleans Goblet TP-R921-82
4 x 8 sheets, .030 thick
Exam Rooms and 2nd Floor Corridors
To be railroaded. Provide silicone butt joint seams. Top of
wainscot to receive wood trim. Wainscot height per Room
Finish Schedule.

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 25

Phase 2
HIC-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Color:
Size:
Location:
Note:
HIC-3
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Color:
Size:
Location:
Note:
C.
1.15
CS Acrovyn
(626) 665-1321
997 Irish Cream
.040 thick
1st Floor Corridors and Back of House for future
improvement
To be railroaded. Provide with silicone butt joint seams.
48H sheet to be installed at top of base.
Spectrim
(800) 437-0557
08 Honduras Mahogany
.040 thick
Elevator Lobby, Waiting
Provide with Aluminum Reveals and
silicone butt joint seams. See elevations and details.
Handrail
HDR-1
Manufacturer:
Style:
Size:
Finish:
Location:
Per Elevator Manufacturer

Tube Handrail
1 Diameter
Stainless Steel
Elevator Cab
HDR-2
Manufacturer:
Glass:
Metal Finish:
Location:
TBD
Ultra Glass Rain
Brushed Stainless
Open Stair
HDR-3
Manufacturer:
Style:
Size:
Metal Finish:
Wood:
Location:
Acrovyn
HRWS 6C
3W x 5-1/4H
Stainless Bracket
Honey Maple 004
Ramp
FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES (Section 12484)

A.
Floor Mats
MAT-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
03798614
03/15
Lees Carpet
(800) 523-5647
Tuff Stuff Step In Style GT066
Woodland Brown 524
24 x 24

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 26

Phase 2
Installation Method:
Pad:
Adhesive:
Weight:
Yarn:
Location:
Note:
1.16
Brick Ashlar
None (direct glue)
32 oz.
Fortis Nylon
Entry Vestibule
Prepare sub-floor per SJH Standards. Provide Schluter
transition strip.
MISCELLANEOUS
A.
Decorative Light Fixtures (Section 16510)

FIX-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Style:
Finish:
Size:
Lamping:
Location:
Note:
FIX-2
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Style:
Finish:
Size:
Lamping:
Location:
Note:
FIX-3
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
Glass Diffuser:
Size:
Lamping:
Location:
Note:
FIX-4
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Style:
03798614
03/15
Minka Lavery
(951) 735-9220
6374-77 4 Light Bath
Chrome with Etched White Glass
28W x 5H x 4.75 Ext.
4-100W
Toilet Room Vanity Light
UL Listed
Hubbardton Forge
(802) 468-3090
135001D
82 Vintage Platinum
16-116H x 5.5 Canopy
LED
Pendant
UL Listed
Hubbardton Forge
(802) 468-3090
Dune 204795
17 Opaque Dark Smoke
White Art
23.6H x 5.3W x 4D
Per Electrical Engineer
Consult Room, Corridor, Chapel, Conference Appearance
Sub Waiting
To be mounted 66 A.F.F. to center. UL Listed
Bruck Lighting
Performance Lighting Systems (800) 382-3055
Ciro LED Down Pendant Light

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 27

Phase 2
Number/Finish:
Size:
Lamping:
Location:
Note:
FIX-5
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Style:
Finish:
Size:
Lamping:
Location:
Note:
FIX-6
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
Lamping:
Size:
Location:
Note:
FIX-7
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Style:
Finish:
Lamping:
Size:
Location:
Note:
FIX-8
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Style:
Finish:
Lamping:
Size:
Location:
Note:
03798614
03/15
222119mc/MP2 CO#35 Matte Chrome, White Fritted Glass

3 5/8 Diam. x 8 3/4H with 12 1/2" stem and with 36"
stem.
Nurse Station and Reception/Registration
UL Listed. See Elevations for mounting heights.
Eureka Lighting
CLS (818) 893-6599 x 176
Mirach 3611C
Satin Chrome (SC) with White Diffuser (WH)
21.25H x 5W x 2.55Proj.
Lin Accel. Wall Sconce
UL Listed. Center of fixture to be mounted 66 A.F.F.
Hubbardton Forge
(802) 468-3090
217653 Gallery Wall Sconce
Glass: Decaf Acrylic
Metal: 17 Opaque Dark Smoke
59.2H x 4.3W x 3.2 Projection ADA compliant
Gallery, Womens Waiting
UL Listed, Mount horizontally per Elevation.
Lithonia
(805) 642-7714
VT Series 2VTL
Matte Satin White
LED per Electrical Engineer
2 x 2 or 2 x 4
General Ambient Lighting
UL Listed, Provide Dimmers in Reading Room
Phillips Lightolier
(800) 937-5483
Vetro LED DA6A03 with double frosted opal glass ring
Matte White
5-1/8 6-1/4 Diam.
General Down Light
UL Listed

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 28

Phase 2
FIX-9
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Style:
Finish:
Size:
Lamping:
Location:
Note:
FIX-10
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
Lamping:
Size:
Location:
Note:
FIX-11
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
Lamping:
Size:
Location:
Note:
FIX-12
Manufacturer:
Contact:
03798614
03/15
Bartco Lighting
(714) 230-3200
Essence Collection IPR5S Square Top Fixture with Lens
White, Prismatic Lens
Per Facility
1 7/16W x 3D x 48/72/96H
Lobby
UL Listed, Pendant Mount
Chapel Cross
UL Listed
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
Lamping:
Size:
Location:
Note:
Hubbardton Forge
(802) 468-3090
137901 Pendant (Aperture Linear Suspension Light)
17 Opaque Dark Smoke
37.3W x 27-76H x 5.3D
Gallery
UL Listed

Cove Strip Light
White
LED
Pattern:
Finish:
Lamping:
Size:
Location:
Note:
FIX-13
Pathway or Focal Point (1 x 1 Equation)

(860) 388-6881
Park Avenue from Coventry Architectural Series
Clear, Reflector: Aluminum, Flange: Matte White
6Diam.
Toilet Room
UL Listed. For Wet Locations

LED Linear Strip Light
White
LED
UL Listed

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 29

Phase 2
FIX-14
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
Lamping:
Size:
Location:
Note:
FIX-15
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
Lamping:
Size:
Location:
Note:
FIX-16
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
Lamping:
Size:
Location:
Note:
FIX-17
Manufacturer:
Contact:
03798614
03/15
Focal Point
(949) 622-3000
Seem 4 Flush Linear Strip
Matte White
4
Infusion wood soffit
UL Listed
Per electrical engineer
UL Listed
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
Lamping:
Size:
Location:
Note:
Hubbardton Forge
(802) 468-3090
18453
Dark Smoke 17 Spun Frost Glass Shade 66
8 Diam. X 12H x 35.1 56.8L
Pendant @ Womens Subwaiting
UL Listed

Adjustable Down Light
Matte White
Pattern:
Finish:
Lamping:
Size:
Location:
Note:
FIX-18
Hubbardton Forge
(802) 468-3090
Forged Reed Sconce 205710 (check #)
Opaque Dark Smoke #17, White Art Glass
12H x 9W x 4D
Mammo Exam Room Entry
UL Listed
Amerlux
(281) 997-5400
Drama LED Wall Grazer
Matte White
4 W x 3 5/8 H x 8
UL Listed, to be pig tailed

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 30

Phase 2
B.
Window Treatment (Section 12494)

SHD-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish/Color:
Openness Factor:
Location:
Note:
VAL-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish/Color:
Wood Trim:
Resin Sheet Size:
Valance Size:
Location:
Note:
C.
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Content:
Width:
Repeat:
Location:
Note:
Carnegie
(800) 727-6770
Affirmation II 4458
24
100% Post Consumer Recycled Polyester
72W
27.5V, 37.75H
Exam Rooms
Provide with grommets 6 O.C. and 18 mesh Color: Beige
Murals
MUR-1 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Content:
Location:
Note:
03798614
03/15
Lumicor
(949) 455-1600
Custom Valance
Pearl Milan
To match LAM-2
48 x 96 x
10H x 9D Width to be field verified with existing
window conditions. Valance to conceal attachment
hardware
Patient Areas unless drapery pockets are provided
See Details for additional information
Cubicle Curtain
CUB-1
D.
MechoShade Systems
(718) 729-2020
6000 Series Twill Weave Roller Shade System
6004 Sand
3% with Black out roller shade behind Pattern: 7100-P04
White Bone
Exterior Windows
Continuous Clutch System
Photomation
Karen Adkins (714) 236-1826
Henry Domke Indian Grass 13548
See Accent Wall Finish Plan
Type II Vinyl
Lin Accel.
Confirm image numbers with vendor

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 31

Phase 2
E.
MUR-2 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Content:
Location:
Note:
Photomation
Henry Domke Orchard Grass 8606
Type II Vinyl
Lin Accel.
MUR-3 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Content:
Location:
Note:
Photomation
Henry Domke Big Bluestream 7885
Type II Vinyl
Lin Accel.
MUR-4 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Content:
Location:
Note:
Photomation
TBD
Type II Vinyl
Lin Accel
MUR-5 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Content:
Location:
Note:
Photomation
TBD
Type II Vinyl
TBD
MUR-6 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Image:
Size:
Content:
Location:
Note:
Photomation
TBD
Type II Vinyl
TBD
Signage
SGN-1
03798614
03/15
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Style:
Font:
Finish:
Size:
Location:
Note:
Photomation
Pin Mounted Raised Lettering
Apple Chancery
Brushed Stainless Steel Finish
2 H
Waiting Feature Screen Wall
See Elevations.

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 32

Phase 2
F. Mirror (Section 10801)
MIR-1
G.
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Size:
Location:
American Specialties
8287 with 1 bevel
Per elevations
Toilet Rooms
Specialty Ceilings
MC-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
WC-1
Ceilings Plus
(800) 822-3411
Illusions Micro Perforated .040 Aluminum
Arboreal Annigre
Nurse Station, Reception
Suspended ceiling to be provided with acoustic backer.
Provide with all necessary hardware and trim pieces as
shown in details. Provide with perimeter edging. Trim
finish to match
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
Location:
Note:
Armstrong or Ceilings Plus

Barz Linear Wood Suspended Ceiling System
Annigre
Entry Gallery
Non-combustible aluminum
Provide with all necessary hardware and trim pieces as
shown in details. Provide with perimeter edging. Trim
finish to match
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Size:
Location:
Kravet
H. Hardware
HW-1
I.
Lockers
LKR-1
03798614
03/15
Drapery Tie Back HDW20010.66

Dark Walnut
4 Diam x 5L
Dressing Room
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Color:
Finish/Type:
Republic
(800) 477-1255
Standard Metal Lockers
52 Canyon
Standard Powdercoat Finish on all parts of
Locker
Standard ventilation in door panel only
Standard handle type, uses lock by Owner

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 33

Phase 2
Location:
Note:
Staff Lounge/Locker
See Architectural Details for additional information.
Configuration per user group requirements
J. Sliding Door
DR-1
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
Wood Finish:
Size:
Location:
Note:
DR-1
(Alternate)
Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Finish:
Wood Finish:
Size:
Location:
Note:
K.
Slat Wall System

SLT-1 Manufacturer:
Contact:
Pattern:
Laminate Finish:
Metal Finish:
Accessories:
Size:
Location:
OH Line
(310) 327-4630
S-21, S-14 Sliding Shoji Screen
Lumicor Colorways Desert Crush AC841.102LL
To match LAM-2
Per architectural plans
Admitting
Ceiling mounted track with floor glide
3 Form
(310) 824-3396
100.08 Header Mount Sliding Door with Stiffener Handle
Hush Natural Sandstone Front and Back
To match LAM-2
Per architectural plans
Admitting
Ceiling mounted track with floor glide, polished exposed
edges
Palay Display Industries or equal

Slat Wall System
LAM-4
Anodized Aluminum
TBD
8-0 x 10-0
Display
General Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Adhere to the SJH Finish and Construction Standards dated July 2006, including, but not
limited to, the Casework Details, Lighting, Signage and Ergonomic Standards.
All supply and return grill finishes to match finish of adjacent surface where it will be installed.
Hollow metal doors and frames to be painted with semi-gloss paint, color to match adjacent wall.
Door vision panels are to be painted to match the door in a semi-gloss finish unless noted
otherwise.
Wood doors to be Acrovyn Finish: Chameleon Collection 373 Amber Cherry
Solid surface countertop to have a 1-1/2" Bullnose or Waterfall edge and 4"H backsplash unless
noted otherwise. Provide 6"H backsplash at Wet Areas unless noted otherwise. Omit backsplash
where tack board occurs. If budget permits full height backsplashes are preferred.
All casework edges to be radius, vertically and horizontally.
03798614
03/15

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 34

Phase 2
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
When a countertop height drops the backsplash should remain the same height.
Provide fabric wrapped homosote board at all Work Areas between countertop and overhead.
Backsplash is not required unless noted otherwise.
Provide under cabinet task lights at all Work Areas.
If countertop at sink is solid surface material, adjacent countertop to be the same finish unless
noted otherwise.
Countertop where articulating keyboard tray occurs to be flush and level without depression.
Plastic laminate countertop wherein a knee space is provided is to have 1-1/2" bullnose
edge for ergonomic compliance (on the User side). Bullnose to be wood at plastic laminate
countertops and solid surface at solid surface countertops. Wood bullnose edge to be
Natural Maple with a stain to match countertop finish unless noted otherwise.
All doors in high traffic areas to have full height stainless steel vertical U channel on both
hinge and strike sides of door. Door frames to have 48"H stainless steel protectors (see
Architectural Detail as required). Kick plates to be provided on high traffic doors per SJH
Standards.
Casework to have plastic laminate soffits above the overhead cabinets.
Schluter transition strips are to be provided at all floor material transitions including Toilet
Rooms unless solid surface thresholds are required. Transition where same finishes meet in
different color or pattern do not require transition strip unless noted otherwise.
All resilient flooring is to be installed with adhesive per SJH Standards and guaranteed against
bubbling due to, but not limited to, moisture and heavy rolling traffic.
Elevator Cab finishes as noted in the Room Finish Schedule.
All Linoleum flooring to be provided with Top Shield finish.
Toilet Room down light fixture to be Pathway Coventry Architectural
Series Park Avenue unless noted otherwise.
Provide with a lens in all Wet Areas, and without in all Dry Areas.
All carpet backing is to include a moisture barrier and is to have the appropriate seams to
prohibit moisture from penetrating the surface.
Integral Pendaflex rails are to be provided in all casework file drawers.
Toilet Room mirrors to have 1 beveled edge and to be frameless.
High Impact Wallcovering to have CHR-1/2 chair rail (approximately 36"H) that aligns and is
coordinated with the bottom of headwall and/or backsplash and windowsill.
(see specifications for CHR-1/2).
Concealed sprinkler heads to be white unless they are located in the wood ceiling or accent soffits
which are to be chrome.
Drywall pony walls at Nurse Stations are not allowed.
All window sills to be solid surface material, Color: Corian - Cottage Lane.
Under counter refrigerators to have plastic laminate front face panels and are to fit under
the ADA compliant countertop. Plastic laminate fronts to match adjacent casework.
All Patient and Public Area sinks are to be solid surface material ADA Compliant under
counter mount as noted in specifications. Stainless Steel or Porcelain sinks can be utilized in
Utility Rooms.
Access panels to be painted to match adjacent surface semi-gloss finish.
Exit devise finish to be satin chrome with green text.
Devise and cover plates to be white unless code requires otherwise.
Grommets to be 2"Diam. Chrome finish. For location and quantity follow Architectural drawings.
03798614
03/15

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 35

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15

(PARTIAL LIST)
09000 - 36

Phase 2
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.3
Metal stud wall framing.

Metal shaft wall framing.
Metal channel ceiling framing.
Framing accessories.
Acoustical sealant.
Gypsum board.
Gypsum Sheathing
Cementitious backer board.
Taped and sanded joint treatment.
Texture finish.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
03798614
03/15
ASTM B221 - Aluminum-alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard.
ASTM C79 - Treated Core and Nontreated Core Gypsum Sheathing Board.
ASTM C475 - Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.
ASTM C514 - Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board.
ASTM C630 - Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
ASTM C645 - Nonstructural Steel Framing Members.
ASTM C754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum
Panel Products.
ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
ASTM C919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.
ASTM C954 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases
to Steel Studs from 0.033 inches to 0.112 inches in Thickness.
ASTM C1002 - Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel
Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.
ASTM C1007 - Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related
Accessories.
ASTM C1047 - Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base.
ASTM C1177 - Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing.
ASTM C1280 - Application of Gypsum Sheathing.
09250 - 1

Phase 2
Q.
R.
S.
T.
ASTM C1311 - Solvent-Release Sealants.

ASTM C1325 - Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cement Substrate Sheets.
ASTM D3678 - Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Interior Profile Extrusions.
ASTM D4397 - Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial and Agricultural
Applications.
U.
ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
V.
ASTM E90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of
Building Partitions.
W. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
X.
ASTM E119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
Y.
ASTM E497 - Installing Sound-Isolating Lightweight Partitions.
Z.
ASTM E1190 - Strength of Power-Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members.
AA. FM 1-21 - Fire Resistance of Building Assemblies.
BB. FS FF-P-395 (Rev. C) - Pin, Drive Guided and Pin Driver, Powder Actuated (Fasteners for
Powder Actuated and Hand Actuated Fastening Tools).
CC. GA-214 - Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.
DD. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual.
EE. UL - Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory.
FF. WHI - Certification Listings.
1.5
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Acoustical Attenuation for Identified Interior Partitions: STC 45RO49 in accordance with
ASTM E90.
Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural
members, and clearances of intended openings.
Partition Component Sizes and Spacings: Provide steel framing members as indicated but not
less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the following maximum deflection
and lateral loading conditions:
1.
Exterior Non-Axial Load Bearing Components
a.
Maximum Deflection: L/600 at 20 lbf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center
2.
Interior Partitions
a.
Maximum Deflection: L/120 at 5 lbf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center
3.
Ceiling Component Sizes and Spacings: As indicated but not less than that required to
comply with ASTM C 754, maximum deflection of L/240 and deadload of 5 lbf per
sq. ft. minimum, spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated.
Shaft Wall: Perform to the following:
1.
Air Pressure Within Shaft: 10 psf with maximum mid-span deflection of 1/240.
Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 26 gage thick (unless
otherwise specified or required by partition height for loading specified in SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION AND PERFORMANCE), C/H shape.
09250 - 2

Phase 2
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.8
Submit following in accordance with provisions of Section 01330:

1.
Shop Drawings
a.
Non-Axial Load Bearing Metal Framing: Provide drawings indicating locations
for various gages of metal studs and tracks and provide details of all connections
within the metal framing system and details of connections to the surrounding
construction.
b.
Interior Metal Framing: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and
acoustical seals.
2.
Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape, joint
compounds and decorative finish.
3.
Samples: Submit two each samples 24 x 24 inch in size illustrating wall and ceiling
texture.
Qualifications
1.
Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum
10 years documented experience.
Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies and as follows:
1.
Fire Rated Partitions: Listed assembly by UL No. U419.
2.
Fire Rated Ceiling: Listed assembly by UL No. P510.
3.
Fire Rated Structural Column Framing: Listed assembly by UL No. X701.
4.
Fire Rated Structural Beam Framing: Listed assembly by UL No. S701.
Field Samples: On actual gypsum board assemblies, prepare field samples of at least 100 sq. ft.
in surface area for the following applications. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review
of in-place unit of Work.
1.
Wall surfaces indicated to receive non-textured paint finishes.
2.
Ceiling surfaces indicated to receive non-textured paint finishes.
3.
Surfaces indicated to receive textured paint finishes.
4.
Surfaces indicated to receive textured finishes specified in this Section.
Material Compatibility: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that
supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum
board manufacturer.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
Store materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from weather,
direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces.
Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.
09250 - 3

Phase 2
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Conditions
1.
General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing
gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's
recommendations.
2.
Room Temperatures
a.
For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than
40 deg F.
b.
For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than
50 deg F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry.
c.
Do not exceed 95 deg F when using temporary heat sources.
3.
Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials.
Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too
rapidly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Metal Studs
1.
Alabama Metals Corp.
2.
Celotex Building Products.
3.
Dale Industries.
4.
Dietrich.
5.
G-P Gypsum Corp.
6.
National Gypsum Co.
7.
Unitech.
8.
United States Gypsum Co.
Gypsum Board
1.
2.
G-P Gypsum Corp.
3.
National Gypsum Co.
4.
Perma Base.
5.
Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Board
1.
BPB America Inc.; Tampa, FL.
2.
G-P Gypsum Corp.
3.
National Gypsum Co.
4.
Cement Backer Board
BED-ROC Industries, British Columbia, Canada.
1.
2.
Select Engineering, Inc.; Bakersfield, CA.
3.
Smartboard Building Products, Inc; Ontario, Canada.
4.
U.S. Architectural Products; Lincoln, RI.
Insulation
1.
2.
G-P Gypsum Corp.
3.
National Gypsum Co.
4.
09250 - 4

Phase 2
F.
G.
2.2
Accessories
1.
2.
Fire Trak Corp.; Kimball, MN.
3.
Flex-Ability Concepts; Edmond, OK.
4.
G-P Gypsum Corp.
5.
National Gypsum Co.
6.
The Steel Network, Inc.; Raleigh NC.
7.
Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
MATERIALS
A.
03798614
03/15
Interior Framing
1.
Studs
a.
To Receive Gypsum Board: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage thick
(unless otherwise specified or required by partition height for loading specified),
C shape, with knurled faces. Double 20 gage studs at door frame jambs.
b.
To receive Plaster: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 22 gage thick unless
otherwise indicated, C shape, with knurled faces.
2.
Bottom Tracks: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, same as studs, C shape, with
knurled faces. Provide shop fabricated flexible track for curved and radiused partitions.
3.
Top Tracks
a.
Partitions Extending to Bottom of Deck or Structure: At contractors option,
provide shop fabricated deflection track or deep leg track with deflection clips
complying with the following;
1)
Deflection Track: Galvanized sheet steel, same gage as metal studs,
C shaped, with minimum 3 inch legs offset 5/8 inch at the midpoint. Track
equal to "Shadowline" design by Fire Track.
2)
Deep Leg Track: Stud manufacturers galvanized sheet steel, same gage as
metal studs, C shaped, with minimum 3 inch legs.
3)
Deflection Clips: Galvanized sheet steel, same gage as metal studs,
L shaped, with 2 or 3 slots as required by stud depth with allowance for
inch maximum vertical deflection. Clips equal to Steel Network SL or
SLD series.
4.
Furring, Framing and Accessories: ASTM C645.
5.
Interior Channels: ASTM C645; Hot or Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A525 G-60, hot
dipped galvanized coating.
6.
Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C645, manufacturer's standard
direct-hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring
members that interlock to form a modular supporting network.
7.
Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce
sound transmission, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 525 or
ASTM A 568 to form 1/2-inch-deep channel of the following configuration:
a.
Single-Leg Configuration: Asymmetric-shaped channel with face connected to a
single flange by a single slotted leg (web).
b.
Double-Leg Configuration: Hat-shaped channel, with 1-1/2-inch-wide face
connected to flanges by double slotted or expanded metal legs (webs).
Configuration: Either configuration indicated above.
c.
8.
Firestop Tracks: Provide firestop track at head of shaft wall on each floor level.
09250 - 5

Phase 2
9.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Elevator Hoistway Entrances: Manufacturers standard J-profile jamb strut with longleg length of 3 inches, matching studs in depth, and not less than 0.033 inch thick.
Gypsum Board
1.
Standard Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled,
maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered square edges.
2.
Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick
except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut,
tapered square edges.
3.
Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C630; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise
scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered square edges.
4.
Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C79; moisture resistant and fire resistant type;
5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends
square cut edges; water repellent paper faces and edges.
5.
Fire Rated Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C79; moisture resistant and fire resistant
type; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length;
ends square cut, square edges; water repellent paper faces and edges.
6.
Cementitious Backing Board: ASTM C 1325/ANSI A 118.9, high density, glass fiber
reinforced, 1/2 inch thick.
7.
Gypsum Core Board - Type X: ASTM C1396; 1 inch thick, maximum permissible
length; square edges, ends square cut.
Accessories
1.
Acoustical Sealant: ASTM C1311; Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction
with gypsum board; black in concealed locations; color as selected from manufacturer's
standard in exposed locations.
2.
Trim:
a.
Corner Beads: ASTM C1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces, 1-1/4 inch
wide flanges.
b.
Edge Trim: ASTM C1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces, types as
indicated.
3.
Furring Brackets: ASTM C645; galvanized steel. Serrated-arm type, adjustable,
minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch, designed for screw
attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring.
4.
Joint Materials: ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water.
5.
Wall and Ceiling Texture: Latex based aggregated texturing material.
6.
Cementitious Backing Board Tape: Manufacturer's standard 2 inch wide, coated glass
fiber tape for joints and corners.
7.
Fasteners
a.
Framing to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws and other metal supports, of type
and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.
b.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: FS FF-P-395 (Rev. C), size and type
recommended by framing manufacturer.
c.
Metal Framing to Metal Framing: Manufacturer's standard screw attachments.
d.
Gypsum Board to Metal Framing
1)
Screws complying with ASTM C954; type as required for substrate
indicated.
Adhesive: ASTM C557.
2)
e.
Gypsum Board to Wood Framing: Nails complying with ASTM C514.
8.
Tie and Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction,
as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.
09250 - 6

Phase 2
9.
Refer to Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend for specific accessories.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
3.2
Verify site conditions under provisions of Division 1 Sections.

Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and substrates to which gypsum board
assemblies attach comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Metal Studs
1.
General
a.
Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754. and manufacturer's instructions.
b.
Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center (regardless of fire rated partition
allowances for wider spacings otherwise indicated.
2.
Form all corners and intersections using conventional three stud framing.
3.
Interior Partition
a.
Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending through the ceiling
bracing and for partitions extending through the ceiling structure above.
b.
Non-Fire Rated Partitions: Brace partitions , extending above ceiling only, with
runner track running diagonally from top of partition to underside of roof or floor
deck above and space alternately at 4 feet on center maximum.
c.
Fire Rated Partitions
1)
Where open web steel joints are used as the framing members. Maintain
clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to
studs.
2)
Provide deflection track at head of all full height partitions and install in
accordance with manufacturers written instructions.
3)
Frame all sides of openings for ducts of any size.
4)
Frame all sides of openings for fire dampers, smoke dampers and
combination fire/smoke dampers in accordance with damper
manufacturers listed assembly.
4.
Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on
each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs.
5.
Blocking: Screw wood blocking to studs. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. Install
blocking for support of finish carpentry items, plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall
cabinets, toilet accessories and hardware.
6.
Coordinate installation of wood bucks, anchors, and wood blocking with electrical and
mechanical work to be placed within or behind stud framing.
Ceiling Framing
1.
Install in accordance with ASTM C754, UL, and manufacturer's instructions.
Coordinate location of hangers with other work.
2.
3.
Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work.
09250 - 7

Phase 2
4.
C.
D.
E.
F.
03798614
03/15
Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying

channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24
inches past each end of openings.
5.
Laterally brace entire suspension system.
Acoustical Accessories
1.
Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind
and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to
items passing through partitions.
2.
Install acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with ASTM C919, ASTM
E497, and manufacturer's instructions.
3.
Caulk all penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, duct work, and rough-in boxes, in
conformance with ASTM E497.
Gypsum Board
1.
Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840 and manufacturer's instructions.
2.
Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and
edges occurring over firm bearing.
3.
Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring
over firm bearing.
4.
Erect exterior gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends
occurring over firm bearing.
5.
Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing.
6.
Use nails or screws when fastening gypsum board to wood furring or framing.
7.
Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit
board with sealant.
8.
Control Joints
a.
Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as required by
ASTM C840.
b.
Install control joints centered above each jamb of all door frames. Extend control
joint from top of frame head to a minimum of 6 inches above finished ceiling.
9.
Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim
where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials at all exposed locations. Leave a 1/4
inch space between edge trim and dissimilar material. Seal joint with sealant specified
in Section 07900.
10. Install backing board over metal studs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
11. Apply gypsum board to curved walls in accordance with ASTM C840.
Joint Treatment
1.
Gypsum Board: Install joint treatment in conformance with ASTM C840 and to level as
defined by GA-214 and as scheduled at the end of this Section.
2.
Cementitous Backing Board: Tape joints and corners in accordance with manufacturer's
Gypsum Sheathing
1.
Install gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over
framing members.
2.
Stagger vertical joints.
3.
Install sheathing with minimum width of two framing spaces.
4.
Apply sheathing tape to all horizontal and vertical joints in accordance with
manufacturers written instructions.
09250 - 8

Phase 2
G.
H.
I.
3.3
TOLERANCES
A.
3.4
Texture Finish
1.
Walls: Apply texture to match Owners standards and finish texture coating in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved sample, to all surfaces
scheduled to receive paint.
2.
Ceilings: Apply texture to match Owners standards and finish texture coating in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved samples.
Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft wall assemblies around openings and as
required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment,
services, heavy trim, furnishings, wall-mounted door stops, and similar items that cannot be
supported directly by shaft wall assembly framing.
1.
Elevator Hoistway: At elevator hoistway-entrance door frames, provide jamb struts on
each side of door frame.
2.
Reinforcing: Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft wall assemblies,
provide galvanized steel reinforcing strip with 0.033-inch minimum thickness of base
metal (uncoated), accurately positioned and secured behind at least one layer of face
panel.
Cant Panels: At projections into shaft exceeding 4 inches, install 1/2- or 5/8-inch-thick gypsum
board cants covering tops of projections.
1.
Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels in
adhesive and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches o.c. with screws fastened to
shaft wall framing.
2.
Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at
24 inches o.c. and extend studs from the projection to shaft wall framing.
Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from plumb and true Flatness: 1/8
inch in 10 feet in any direction.
JOINT TREATMENT SCHEDULE

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Level 1: All gypsum board surfaces concealed above ceilings.

Level 2: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive ceramic tile and behind fixed
millwork.
Level 3: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive spray applied texture and Type I wall
coverings.
Level 4: All gypsum board surface scheduled to receive Type II wall coverings.
Level 5: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive paint.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
09250 - 9

Phase 2
SECTION 09300
TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Control joint components.

Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems.
Section 10801 - Toilet and Bath Accessories: Mounting of accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.5
Ceramic tile using the thin set application method.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.4

ANSI/TCNA A108.4 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Water Resistant Organic Adhesive.
ANSI 118.6 - Ceramic Tile Grout.
ANSI/TCNA A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile, Type 1 and Type 2.
ANSI/TCNA A137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
TCNA (Tile Council of America) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
ASNI A108.10 - Installation of Grout in Tile work.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Shop Drawings and Product Data

1.
Submit shop drawings indicating tile layout, perimeter conditions, junctions with
dissimilar materials, and setting details.
2.
Submit product data indicating material specifications, characteristics, and instructions
for using adhesives and grouts.
3.
4.
Submit maintenance data including recommended cleaning and stain removal methods,
cleaning materials, and polishes and waxes.
Samples
1.
Each type of tile to indicate pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.
Certificates
1.
Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
TILE
09300 - 1

Phase 2
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.7

A.
1.8
Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
A.
B.
1.9
Manufacturer Qualifications
1.
Company specializing in the manufacture of products specified in this Section with
minimum five (5) years experience.
2.
Conform to ANSI/TCNA A137.1
Installer Qualifications
1.
Conform to TCNA Handbook for Ceramic and Glass Wall Tile Installation.
2.
Installer: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum
five (5) years documented experience.
Do not install adhesives in a closed, unventilated environment.

Maintain 50 degrees F. during installation of mortar materials.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Provide full boxes equal to 5% of each material type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIAL
A.
B.
C.
2.2
Supply Products as indicated on Drawings I-100.

Thinset Mortar: ANSI/TCNA A 118.4, Portland cement, sand, latex additive, and water.
Grout: As scheduled in Section 09000 - Finish Materials Legend.
MIXES
A.
Thinset and Grout: Mix and proportion pre-mix bond coat and grout materials in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing substrate.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration.

Vacuum clean existing substrate and damp clean.
TILE
09300 - 2

Phase 2
C.
D.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.4
General
1.
Install adhesive, tile, and grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.
Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
3.
Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile.
4.
Form corners and bases neatly.
5.
Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size.
Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.
6.
Keep control joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
7.
Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting
8.
Grout tile joints (except as noted below) and damp cure for minimum of 72 hours after
installation.
9.
Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials, inside corners and at junction
of dissimilar planes.
Wall Tile: Install in accordance with ANSI 108-4 and TCNA Handbook number W242.
Floor Tile: Install in accordance with ANSI 118.3 and TCNA F116-07.
Accessories: Schluter Reno TK - annodized aluminum finish.

A.
B.
3.5
Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness
tolerances.
Apply conditioner to surfaces as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
Sound tile after setting.

Replace hollow sounding units.

A.
B.
C.
D.
Wash tile thoroughly to remove all residue.

Use of acid in cleaning solutions is prohibited.
Replace all broken chipped or otherwise damaged tile.
Remove and replace tiles that do not conform to specified tolerances.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
TILE
09300 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 09355
GLASS TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A.
1.6
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Glass tile.
Tile backing panels.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1.
Tile Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed
for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
Installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association or a
Trowel of Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America.
2.
Installer's supervisor for Project holds the International Masonry Institute's Foreman
Certification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
ANSI Glass Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade glass tile that complies with
ANSI A137.2 for types and other characteristics indicated.
ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with
ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards
referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other
requirements specified.
GLASS TILING
09355 - 1

Phase 2
2.2
TILE PRODUCTS
A.
2.3
TILE BACKING PANELS

A.
2.4
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4; white, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive at Project
site.
2.
For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
GROUT MATERIALS
A.
B.
2.6
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, Type A.

1.
Thickness: 5/8 inch.
SETTING MATERIALS
A.
2.5
Glass Tile Type:

1.
Manufacturer: Per Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, consisting of white or gray cement and
white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.
Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.
A.
B.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cementbased formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for
installations indicated.
Metal Edge Strips: To allow TAS compliance. Reference Section 09000 - Finish Material
Legend for selections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
1.
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other
substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness
tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
2.
Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply
with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
PREPARATION
A.
03798614
03/15
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and
packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken
GLASS TILING
09355 - 2

Phase 2
from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to
manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
3.3
GLASS TILE INSTALLATION

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.4
Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for
TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of
the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced
in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of
setting and grouting materials used.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form
complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly
at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and
other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting bed thickness so that tiles
are flush.
Jointing Pattern: Install pattern per interior elevations.
Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1.
Mosaic Glass Tile: 1/16 inch.
2.
Miniature Mosaic Glass Tile: 1/16 inch.
Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated and between all transitions from tile to
adjacent surface.
Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's
written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess
sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written
instructions for type of application indicated.
INTERIOR GLASS TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A.
Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring:

1.
Glass Tile Installation: TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F; thinset mortar on
cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board.
a.
Glass Tile Type: As scheduled in Section 09000.
b.
Thinset Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar.
c.
Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
GLASS TILING
09355 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 09511
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
B.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and ceiling

panels with five years minimum experience.
Installer: Company with three years minimum documented experience.
A.
B.
C.
1.6
Section 08800 - Glazing: Channel Flange to Support Ceiling System.

Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend: Products.
Section 15325 - Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system.
Section 15850 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system.
Section 16510 - Interior Luminaires: Light fixtures in ceiling system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Suspended metal grid ceiling system.

Dry wall suspension system.
Suspension trim.
Acoustical tile.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.4

Conform to local building code for fire rated assembly and combustibility requirements for
materials.
Provide acoustical tile with the following surface burning characteristics as determined by
testing identical products per ASTM E 84:
1.
Flame Spread: Class I, 0-25.
2.
Identify acoustical tile with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
organization.
SUBMITTALS
A.
03798614
03/15
Product Data
1.
Provide product data on metal grid system components, acoustic units, accessories.
2.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09511 - 1

Phase 2
B.
1.7

A.
B.
C.
1.8
Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and humidity of 20 to 40 percent

prior to, during, and after installation.
SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
A.
B.
1.10
Deliver acoustical units to project site in original unopened packages.

Store materials in enclosed space protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight and
surface contamination.
Handle acoustic units carefully to avoid chipping edges or surface finish.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Samples
1.
Submit samples for verification illustrating material and finish of acoustic units:
Maximum size 9 x 12 inches, minimum size 4 x 4 inches.
2.
Submit samples maximum 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross
runner and edge trim.
Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust
generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.
Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Provide full boxes equal to 5% of each material used of each type acoustical ceiling unit
specified to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
03798614
03/15
Suspension Systems
1.
Grid
a.
Conformance: ASTM C635, light duty, as required for ceiling tile scheduled.
b.
Type: T as indicated, but not limited to the products listed in Appendix A.
c.
Finish: Factory applied baked enamel.
d.
Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating.
2.
Suspension Trim
a.
Type: As indicated, but not limited to the products listed in Section 09000 Finish Material Legend.
b.
Finish: Factory applied baked enamel.
3.
Drywall Suspension System
Conformance: ASTM C 636.
a.
b.
Materials: Double Web Tee, Galvanized Steel.
4.
Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, edge moldings and hold down clips as
required for suspended grid system.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09511 - 2

Phase 2
5.
B.
C.
Additional Support: Provide as necessary for cove light furring spine, cable support
from suspension system to structure above.
Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized; size and type to suit application, to rigidly secure
acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with
maximum deflection of 1/360.
Acoustic Units
1.
Conformance: ASTM E1264.
2.
Refer to products scheduled in Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work.

Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
Verify that walls and partitions are plumb and straight within specified tolerances.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Suspension System
1.
Install system in accordance with ASTM C636, manufacturer's instructions and as
supplemented in this Section.
2.
Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum.
3.
Install after major above ceiling work is complete.
4.
Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.
5.
If metal deck is not supplied with hanger tabs, coordinate the installation of hanger clips
during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required.
6.
Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying
members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
7.
Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the
nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
8.
Center system on room axis leaving equal border units no less than 50 percent of
acoustical unit size in accordance with reflected ceiling plan.
9.
Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead
load to exceed deflection capability.
10. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner;
or support components independently.
11. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners.
12. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest
practical lengths. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions.
Acoustic Units
1.
Fit in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and
function.
2.
Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces.
3.
Install level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents.
4.
Rabbet edges of field cut reveal edge border tile to match factory edges. Paint field cut
edges to match factory finish.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09511 - 3

Phase 2
3.3
TOLERANCES
A.
B.
3.4
Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 ft.

Maximum variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees
maximum.
CLEANING
A.
B.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for cleaning
and touchup of minor finish damage.
Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09511 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 09540
MODULAR METAL CEILING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.3
Perforated and un-perforated metal ceiling panels.

Acoustical backing.
Suspension assemblies.
Accessories; provide other necessary items including devices for attachment overhead
construction, secondary members, splines, splices, connecting clips, wall connectors, wall
angles, and other devices required for a complete installation.
Supplemental support framing: Provide fully engineered secondary framing as required to
meet code, conforming to layout shown in drawings, to support direct-hung metal ceilings
suspension system.
Coordinate layout and installation of items penetrating or being installed in ceiling systems
with responsible trades.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.4

Section 09900 - Finish Materials Legend.

Section 09511 - Acoustical Ceilings.
Section 09912 - Interior Painting: Paintings and coatings.
REFERENCES
A.
03798614
03/15
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1.
E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
2.
E 488 - Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry
Elements.
3.
B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.
4.
C 423 - Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by Reverberation
Room Method.
5.
E 580 - Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic Restraint.
6.
C 635 - Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
7.
C 636 - Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspensions
Systems for Acoustical and Lay-in Panels.
8.
A 641 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
09540 - 1

Phase 2
9.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.6
A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip process.
10. E 1264 - Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
11. E 1477 - Standard Test Method for Luminous Reflectance factor of Acoustical
Materials by use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers.
12. D 1044 - Practice for Abrasion Resistance.
13. D 1002 - Practice for Adhesion Resistance.
Architectural Woodworking Institute (AWI) and or WIC requirements shall be met for
woodworking materials.
NEMA Standard 11-14-95 for Chemical Resistance.
Local Building Code (IBC), current edition requirements.
Product Data: Manufacturers product data for each type of product specified in this section.
Product Certification: Manufacturers certifications that products comply with specified
requirements and governing codes including product data, laboratory test reports and
research reports showing compliance with specified standards.
Shop (Coordination) Drawings: Submit shop drawings for reflected ceiling plans (RCPs),
drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and ceiling mounted items. Show the
following details:
1.
Reflected ceiling plan including joint patterns and details.
2.
Metal ceiling suspension system plan with appropriate components, suggested
hanger locations and details.
3.
Method of attaching suspension system hangers to building structure.
4.
Ceiling-mounted items including: light fixtures, air outlets and inlets, speakers,
sprinklers, and other interfaces.
5.
Special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures of acoustical
ceilings with adjoining construction.
6.
Framing and support details for work supported by ceiling suspension system.
7.
List of materials, dimensions, hanger fastenings and any special details.
8.
Minimum drawing scale: 1/8 = 1-0.
9.
Provide full scale drawings of perforation patterns. Provide minimum 1=1-0 scale
layout for each panel type showing perforation layout and orientation as required.
Samples for Verification: Full-size units (or as specified below) of each type of ceiling
assembly indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full
range of variations expected in these characteristics. Submit samples for each type
specified.
1.
12-inch square, (acoustical) metal pan units.
2.
12-inch long samples of each exposed molding or trim.
3.
12-inch long samples of each suspension component.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" (Section 1.6).
Provide documents to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of at least
5 completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects
and employers, and other information specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
03798614
03/15
Unless accepted otherwise by the Architect, use manufacturer and installers that employ a
Quality Management System complying with the program described in ISO 9001-2000, or
similar system.
09540 - 2

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.7
Installer
1.
To certify a minimum 5 years experience installing similar systems and scope to
those specified.
2.
Provide list of at least 5 successful installations with similar products and scope.
Include names and contact numbers of Architect and employer for reference.
Manufacturer
1.
To certify a minimum of 5 years experience manufacturing similar products to
those specified.
2.
Provide support documentation including name and date of project completion.
Include names and contact numbers of Architect and employers for reference.
3.
Manufacturer shall be single source and shall be the fabricator and supplier of
appropriate major components.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical metal pan ceilings that comply with
one of the following requirements:
1.
Fire-response tests performed by UL, ITS/Warnock Hersey, or another independent
testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
that performs testing and follow-up services.
2.
Surface-burning characteristics of acoustical metal pan ceilings comply with
ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per
ASTM E 84.
Mock-Ups: Before releasing acoustical metal ceilings, if requested, construct mock-ups for
each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
Build mock-up to comply with the following minimum requirements, using materials
indicated for completed work:
1.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will
be constructed.
2.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
3.
Maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed work.
a.
Approved mock-ups in an undisturbed condition at the time of initial
Acceptance may become part of the completed work, subject to Architect/
Employer approval.

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Deliver acoustical metal ceiling units and suspension system components in original,
unopened packages clearly labeled with the following information: name of manufacturing
source and location; product type, description and quantity; clients name and shipping
address.
Panels protective layer to be removed only after installation is complete to help prevent
panel surface damage.
Store components in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against physical
damage from direct moisture, significant change in humidity, direct sunlight, significant
change in temperature, surface contamination, and any other preventable cause.
Exercise care in handling components to prevent damage to the surfaces and edges and
prevent distortion or other physical damage. Comply with prescribed stacking instructions
to prevent damage to these components.
09540 - 3

Phase 2
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.10
Environmental Limitations
1.
Do not install acoustical metal pan ceilings until after spaces are enclosed and
weather tight and after wet work and work above ceilings is complete and accepted
by project Architect.
2.
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within
limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products
under environmental conditions outside manufacturers absolute limits. Allow
materials to reach ambient temperature and humidity for a minimum of 24 hours
(48 hours recommended), prior to starting installation.
3.
Coordinate with other work supported by, adjacent to or penetrating through the
ceiling system.
Do not install products in exterior space unless the system has been specifically designed
and approved for exterior application.
If the project is located within range of moisture associated with large bodies of water
(fresh or salt), necessary materials shall be finished with coatings appropriate to condition
of use.
Provide specified manufacturers warranty against defects in workmanship, discoloration,

or other defect considered undesirable by the Architect or Employer.
This warranty shall remain in effect for a minimum period of five (5) years from date of
initial acceptance.
MAINTENANCE AND EXTRA MATERIALS

A.
B.
Maintenance Instructions: Provide manufacturers standard maintenance and cleaning

instructions for finishes provided.
Extra Materials: Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are
packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing
contents. Only typical system components are included with attic stock.
1.
Acoustical Metal Ceiling Pan Units: Full-size units equal to 1-1/2 percent of amount
installed.
2.
Ceiling Suspension System Components: Quantity of each grid and exposed
component equal to 1-1/2 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Basis-of-Design: Ceilings Plus, 6711 E. Washington Blvd., Los Angeles, CA 90040;

800-822-3411; www.ceilingsplus.com.
Supply specified item or comply with Section 01600 - Product Requirements. Specified
manufacturers standard of quality and manufacturing tolerances shall be the criteria for
evaluating equivalent products. Substitution shall be equal to or of better quality than the
specified product in the opinion of the Architect and/or Owner.
09540 - 4

Phase 2
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
2.3
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS. GENERAL

A.
B.
2.4
Refer to Section 09000.
Metal Suspension Standard: Provide panel manufacturer's metal suspension systems of

types, structural classifications, materials, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.
1.
Concealed System with Integral Clips.
2.
Main and cross runners to be Standard Heavy Duty tee bar (as per ASTM C 635).
3.
Face of main and cross runners to be factory finished matte black unless known
otherwise.
4.
Provide suspension system made from steel sheet with an average recycled content
such that post-consumer recycled content plus one half or pre consumer content is
not less than 25 percent.
Suspension Systems: Provide complete suspensions systems with main runners, cross
runners, hangers, trim molding, seismic retention clips, load resisting struts and other
suspension components required to support ceiling and other ceiling supported
construction.
1.
Direct-Hung Suspensions Systems: System composed of main runners supported
by hangers attached directly to building structure.
a.
Hangers: Type and metal standard with ceiling system manufacturer, sized to
comply with structural classification indicated.
b.
Wire Hangers, where applicable, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying
with the following requirements:
1)
Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M),
Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
2)
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of
wire, but provide not less than 2mm diameter wire.
3)
Extruded Aluminum members shall comply with ASTM B209.
c.
Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
d.
Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
e.
Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 22 mm wide, formed with
1 mm thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G90 coating designation, with bolted connections.
PERIMETER TRIM
A.
Perimeter trim
1.
Provide factory perimeter metal trim for transitions.
2.
Provide trim in depth as required by Reflected Ceiling Plan.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
03798614
03/15
Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical metal panels attach or abut,
with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other
09540 - 5

Phase 2
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
3.3
Sections that affect installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting performance
of metal panel ceilings.
Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors
whose installation is specified in other Sections.
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical metal pan units to balance
border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width units at
borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
Survey substrate for wall attachment to assure squareness and proper elevation for wall
panel installation.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
General: Install acoustical metal pan ceilings, per manufacturers shop drawings provided,
per manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with publications referenced below.
1.
ClSCA - Ceiling Systems Handbook.
2.
Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations - ASTM C 636.
3.
Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint ASTM E 580.
4.
IBC (International Building Code) standard for Seismic Zone for local area.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's approved structural substrates and as follows:
1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension
system.
2.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal
forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means.
3.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produce hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacing required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and
hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension
members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established
by referenced standards and publications.
4.
Where used secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports
above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to
structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure; that are
appropriate for substrate; and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age,
corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5.
Space hangers not more than 48 inches on center, along each member supported
directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more
than 8 inches from ends of each member.
6.
Fine level grid to 1/8 inch in 10 feet from specified elevation(s), square and true.
7.
Adjust suspension system runners so they are square (within 0.5 degree from
90 degrees) and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented,
bent, or kinked members.
Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports acceptable to
Architect/Engineer and or inspector. Suspend bracing from building's structural members
and/or structural deck, as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal
forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs (unless directed otherwise).
09540 - 6

Phase 2
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.4
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical metal pan. Method of edge trim attachment
and design of edge trims to be approved by Architect.
1.
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 18 O.C. and not more
than 6 from ends, leveling with ceding suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 in
10. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
2.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim
without prior written approval. Or unless detailed otherwise.
Scribe and cut acoustical metal panel units for accurate fit at penetrations by, other work
through ceilings. Stiffen edges of cut units as required to eliminate evidence of buckling or
variations in flatness exceeding referenced standards for stretcher-leveled metal sheet.
Install acoustical metal panel units in coordination with suspension system.
1.
Align joints in adjacent courses to form uniform, straight joints parallel to room axis
in both directions, unless otherwise indicated. Install directionally patterned or
textured panels in directions indicated on approved shop drawings. Panel-joints shall
flow smoothly and in a straight line within 1/8 in 10. Intersections shall be
continuous.
2.
Fit adjoining units to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut units for accurate fit at
borders and around construction penetrating ceiling.
3.
Remove protective film from panels only when space is completely clean and free of
airborne particles. Use white cotton gloves for final installation of panels into grid
system.
Install perimeter trim around modular metal ceiling where it is exposed.
1.
Install free of ridges or buckles, and with lengths as long as possible.

A.
B.
C.
Adjust ceiling components to provide a consistent finish and appearance in conformity

with established tolerances and requirements.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical metal panel ceilings and walls. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.
Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently
eliminate evidence of damage, including dented and bent units.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
09540 - 7

Phase 2
SECTION 09651
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Solid vinyl floor tile.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.4


Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns,
doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
1.
Show details of special patterns.
Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE (RESILIENT TILE FLOORING - RTF)

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.3
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
Manufacturer: Armstrong Industries.

Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700.
1.
Class: Class III, printed film vinyl tile.
2.
Type: B, embossed surface.
Thickness: 0.125 inch.
Size: Sizes as indicated by Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
Colors and Patterns: As indicated by Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
03798614
03/15
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile
manufacturer for applications indicated.
09651 - 1

Phase 2
B.
C.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to

suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. If areas are occupied by hospital, use
Armstrong recommended Low VOC adhesive.
Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure

adhesion of resilient products.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within
range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing.
4.
Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing
according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to
be installed.
Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by
resilient floor tile.
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid
using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1.
Lay VCT tiles square with room axis. LVT: Installation per floor finish patterns.
Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence
as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or
deformed tiles.
Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent
fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor
tiles to center of door openings.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent marking device.
Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint
covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and
pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile
edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
09651 - 2

Phase 2
H.
3.3
Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate
to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at
joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

A.
B.
C.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.
Floor Polish: For VCT, remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces
before applying liquid floor polish.
1.
Apply two coats.
Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
09651 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 09653
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTIONS INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product specified.

Samples for Verification: Permanently labeled units of each product color and pattern
specified, maximum size 12 inches long; minimum size 4 inches long.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
1.5
Resilient contour milled wall base.

Resilient accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.4

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who
has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and
with a 5-year record of successful in-service performance.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type and color of product specified from one source with
resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
without delaying the Work.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648.
2.
Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per
ASTM E 662.

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers,
each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and
handling instructions.
Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures
maintained between 50 and 90 deg F.
Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation,
unless longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.
09653 - 1

Phase 2
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.7
Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive
resilient products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least
48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer time
periods. After post-installation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F or
more than 95 deg F.
Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
Coordinate resilient product installation with other construction to minimize possibility of
damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. Install resilient products after
other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each
different type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
RESILIENT WALL BASE (RTS)

A.
2.3
Contour Milled Wall Base: ASTM F-1861, Type TP, Group 1.

1.
Color and Pattern: As per Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
2.
Style: Perceptions; recessed straight rubber topset base.
3.
Thickness: 3/8 inch at thickest point.
4.
Height: 4.25 inches.
5.
Lengths: 8 feet 0 inches.
6.
Outside Corners: Job formed, miter cut and fitted.
7.
Inside Corners: Job formed, miter cut and fitted.
8.
Surface: Smooth.
RESILIENT ACCESSORIES
A.
2.4
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated for each
designation on Drawings.
Edge Strips to match base.
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based

formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
09653 - 2

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates
indicated to receive resilient products.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible
with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing resilient
products. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
3.4
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur,
with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including those for
maximum moisture content. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient
product installation and comply with requirements specified. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
General: Install resilient base products to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in
toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required, according
to manufacturer's written installation instructions.
1.
Do not stretch base during installation.
2.
Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between
joints.
3.
Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces.
4.
Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
5.
Spread adhesive over entire height of base, press firmly to substrate.
6.
Contour milled base corners, inside and outside corners shall be miter cut and fitted
using a compound miter saw in the field.
Place resilient products so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with
adhesive.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products:

1.
Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient
product manufacturers.
2.
Sweep or vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.
Do not wash resilient products until after time period recommended by resilient product
3.
manufacturer.
4.
Damp-mop or sponge resilient products to remove marks and soil.
Protect resilient products against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of
09653 - 3

Phase 2
construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by resilient
product manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
09653 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 09654
LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Linoleum sheet flooring.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.4


Shop Drawings: For each type of linoleum flooring. Include flooring layouts, locations of
seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and
cutouts.
1.
Show details of special patterns.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and pattern specified in
manufacturer's standard size.
1.
Heat-Welding Bead: Include manufacturer's standard-size Samples of each color
required.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For linoleum flooring, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING (LIN)

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Manufacturer: Forbo North America.

Linoleum Sheet Flooring: ASTM F 2034, Type I, linoleum sheet with backing.
1.
Roll Size: In manufacturer's standard length but not less than 78 inches wide.
Thickness: 2.5 mm.
Heat-Welding Bead: For seamless installation, solid-strand product of linoleum flooring
manufacturer.
1.
Color: Refer to Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
09654 - 1

Phase 2
E.
F.
2.3
Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:
1.
Cove Strip: 1-inch radius provided or approved by manufacturer.
2.
Cove-Base Cap Strip: Square metal provided or approved by manufacturer.
Colors and Patterns: As indicated per Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
B.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by linoleum flooring
manufacturer for applications indicated.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to
suit products and substrate conditions indicated. Installer shall use manufacturer
recommended epoxy adhesive under hospital beds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
Prepare substrates according to linoleum flooring manufacturer's written instructions to

ensure adhesion of flooring.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with flooring
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by linoleum flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by linoleum flooring
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within
range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing.
4.
Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by linoleum flooring manufacturer.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
Do not install flooring until it is the same temperature as space where it is to be installed.
Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by
flooring.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing flooring.

Scribe and cut flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures,
and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.
Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
cutting by repeating on flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent
marking device.
Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished
floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring
installed on covers and adjoining flooring. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that
abut covers and to cover perimeters.
09654 - 2

Phase 2
F.
G.
3.3
LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION

A.
B.
C.
3.4
Adhere flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce
a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
Heat-Welded Seams: For seamless installation, comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints
and heat weld with welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring.
Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.
Unroll linoleum sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
Lay out linoleum sheet flooring as follows:
1.
Maintain uniformity of flooring direction.
2.
Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at
least 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
3.
Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams.
4.
Avoid cross seams.
5.
Eliminate deformations that result from hanging method used during drying process
(stove bar marks).
6.
Install epoxy adhesive under hospital beds in patient rooms.
Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove flooring 6 inches up vertical surfaces. Support flooring at
horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip.

A.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting linoleum
flooring.
After allowing drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) to disappear,
cover linoleum flooring until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
09654 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 09681
TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
B.
C.
D.

1.
Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade
resistance.
2.
Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.
Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label
each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and
designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1.
Carpet Tile: Maximum 24 x 24 inches.
Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the
following:
1.
Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products
and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2.
Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet
tile.

A.
1.6

Section 09653 - Resilient Wall Base and Installation Accessories: Resilient wall base and
accessories installed with carpet tile.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Modular, tufted carpet tile.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
1.4

Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type
indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
03798614
03/15
Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of

assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
TILE CARPETING
09681 - 1

Phase 2
1.7

A.
1.8
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.9
Comply with CRI 104.
Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed
and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and
humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry
to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet
tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual
traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
2.
Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CARPET TILE
A.
2.2

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed as per Section
09000 - Finish Material Legend.
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based

formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit
products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements
for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable
installation.
1.
Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.
Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
TILE CARPETING
09681 - 2

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and
other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color,
pattern, and potential defects.
Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the
following:
1.
Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
2.
Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with
carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated
to receive carpet tile installation.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level
cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch
unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible
with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use
mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile
manufacturer's written installation instructions.
Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer and by
Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal
cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
TILE CARPETING
09681 - 3

Phase 2
3.4

A.
B.
C.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1.
Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
2.
Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
3.
Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor
Installations."
Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of
equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection
methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
TILE CARPETING
09681 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 09720
WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
B.
C.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for wall covering.
Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals.

A.
1.7
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on physical characteristics,
durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics.
Samples for Verification: Maximum 9 x 12 inches.
A.
B.
1.6

Section 09912 - Interior Painting: Priming wall surfaces.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Vinyl wall covering.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
1.4

Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Wall-Covering Materials: For each type, full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount
installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
03798614
03/15
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings

applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by
a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing agency.
1.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84:
a.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
b.
Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
WALL COVERINGS
09720 - 1

Phase 2
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is
complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature
and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction
period.
Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a permanent level of lighting is provided on the
surfaces to receive wall covering.
Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the
time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
WALL COVERINGS
A.
2.3
Vinyl Wall-Covering Standards: Provide mildew-resistant products complying with the

following:
1.
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in Section
WOOD-VENEER WALL COVERING

A.
2.5
General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from same print run or dye lot.
VINYL WALL COVERING

A.
2.4
Low-Emitting Materials: Wall covering system shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
General:
1.
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed in Section
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall
covering and substrate application; as recommended in writing by wall-covering
manufacturer.
Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, complying with requirements in Section 09912 - Interior
Painting and recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer for intended
substrate.
WALL COVERINGS
09720 - 2

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.3
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil,
grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers.
Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of
flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.
1.
Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete
masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter.
2.
Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer
manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.
Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture
trims, and similar items.
Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation
areas not less than 24 hours before installation.
Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall-covering manufacturer.
Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall-covering
installation until wall liner has dried.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.4
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions

applicable to products and applications indicated except where more stringent requirements
apply.
Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks
and corners.
Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible
shrinkage.
Match pattern 72 inches above the finish floor.
Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from
inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are
permitted.
Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other
defects.
Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams
without any overlay or spacing between strips.
CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.
Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.
Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.
WALL COVERINGS
09720 - 3

Phase 2
D.
Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture
trims, and similar items.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
WALL COVERINGS
09720 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 09911
EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
B.
C.
Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified
in this Section.
Section 09000 - Material Finish Legend.
Section 09912 - Interior Painting: Surface preparation and the application of paint systems
on interior substrates.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.5
Surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior
substrates:
1.
Steel.
2.
Galvanized metal.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523, a matte flat finish.
Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523, a high-side sheen flat, velvet-like finish.
Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523, an eggshell finish.
Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523, a satin-like finish.
Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a semi-gloss finish.
Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a gloss finish.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of
topcoat.
1.
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
2.
Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3.
Label each coat of each Sample.
4.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09911 - 1

Phase 2
C.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
contents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.9
Coating Maintenance Manual: Provide coating maintenance manual including area

summary with finish schedule, area detail designating location where each
product/color/finish was used, product data pages, material safety data sheets, care and
cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish
used.

A.
1.8
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1.
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2.
VOC content.
Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish
selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application
of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a.
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.
b.
Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2.
Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of
additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
3.
4.

A.
03798614
03/15
Delivery and Handling: Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in

manufacturer's original sealed containers, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Packaging shall bear the
manufactures label with the following information:
1.
Product name and type (description).
2.
Batch date.
3.
Color number.
4.
VOC content.
5.
Environmental handling requirements.
6.
Surface preparation requirements.
7.
Application instructions.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09911 - 2

Phase 2
B.
1.10
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with
ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1.
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures
are between 50 and 95 deg F.
Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent;
at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
Work.
1.
If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Architect and Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
2.2
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide SherwinWilliams Company products indicated or comparable product from one of the following:
1.
Benjamin Moore & Co.
2.
Dunn Edwards.
3.
Glidden Professional, Division of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
4.
Kelly Moore.
5.
Kwal, Division of Sherwin-Williams.
6.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
Source Limitations: Obtain paint materials from single source from single listed
manufacturer.
1.
Manufacturer's designations listed on a separate color schedule are for color
reference only and do not indicate prior approval.
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Standards: Provide products that comply with Manufactures Premium 1st Quality
standards indicated and like VOC limits.
Material Compatibility:
1.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09911 - 3

Phase 2
2.3

A.
Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1.
Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint
materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples
are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may
be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing
agency.
2.
Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3.
Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials
being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove
noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces
painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected
materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying
materials, the two paints are incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility
with existing finishes and primers. Where acceptability of substrate conditions is in
question, apply samples and perform in-situ testing to verify compatibility, adhesion, and
film integrity of new paint application.
1.
Report, in writing, conditions that may affect application, appearance, or
performance of paint.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected;
application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"

applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and
are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of
item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or
apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.
Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture
content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09911 - 4

Phase 2
F.
G.
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
B.
C.
3.4
Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1.
Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2.
If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with
paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and
apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with
paint manufacturer's written recommendations.

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.6
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in

"MPI Manual."
1.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2.
Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
3.
Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior
door frames.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured
film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp
lines and color breaks.

A.
3.5
Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using
methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer, but not less than the following:
1.
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to
comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials
from Project site.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A.
03798614
03/15
Ferrous Metal, Galvanized-Metal, and Aluminum Substrates:

1.
Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, water-based, anti-corrosive for metal: S-W Pro Industrial
Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series, 5.0 to 10.0 mils wet, 2.0 to
4.0 mils dry.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09911 - 5

Phase 2
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified.

Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching
topcoat.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, eggshell (Gloss
Level 3): S-W Pro Industrial Eg-Shel Acrylic B66-660 Series, at 2.5 to
4.0 mils dry, per coat.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5): S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series, at
2.5 to 4.0 mils dry, per coat.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (Gloss Level 6):
S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Gloss Coating, B66-600 Series, at 2.5 to 4.0 mils
dry, per coat.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09911 - 6

Phase 2
SECTION 09912
INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523, a matte flat finish.
Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523, a high-side sheen flat, velvet-like finish.
Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523, an eggshell finish.
Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523, a satin-like finish.
Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a semi-gloss finish.
Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a gloss finish.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.5
Surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior
substrates:
1.
Steel.
2.
Galvanized metal.
3.
Gypsum board.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4

Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of
topcoat.
1.
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
2.
Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3.
Label each coat of each Sample.
4.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
03798614
03/15
Coating Maintenance Manual: Provide coating maintenance manual including area

summary with finish schedule, area detail designating location where each
product/color/finish was used, product data pages, material safety data sheets, care and
INTERIOR PAINTING
09912 - 1

Phase 2
cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish
used.
1.6

A.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.8
Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish
selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application
of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a.
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.
b.
Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2.
Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of
additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
3.
4.

A.
B.
1.9
contents.
1.
Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
Delivery and Handling: Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in

manufacturer's original sealed containers, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Packaging shall bear the
manufacturers label with the following information:
1.
Product name and type (description).
2.
Batch date.
3.
Color number.
4.
VOC content.
5.
Environmental handling requirements.
6.
Surface preparation requirements.
7.
Application instructions.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with
ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1.
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
03798614
03/15
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures
are between 50 and 95 deg F.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09912 - 2

Phase 2
B.
C.
Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than
5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
Lead Paint: It is not expected that lead paint will be encountered in the Work.
1.
If suspected lead paint is encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect
and Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
2.2
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
2.3
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide SherwinWilliams Company products indicated or comparable product from one of the following:
1.
Benjamin Moore & Co.
2.
Dunn Edwards.
3.
Glidden Professional, Division of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
4.
Kelly Moore.
5.
Kwal, Division of Sherwin-Williams.
6.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
Source Limitations: Obtain paint materials from single source from single listed
manufacturer.
1.
Manufacturer's designations listed on a separate color schedule are for color
reference only and do not indicate prior approval.
2.
Refer to Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
Standards: Provide products that comply with Manufactures Premium 1st Quality
standards indicated and like VOC limits.
Material Compatibility:
1.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
Colors: As selected in Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.

A.
03798614
03/15
Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1.
Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint
materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples
are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may
be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing
agency.
2.
Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3.
Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials
being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove
noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces
painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected
INTERIOR PAINTING
09912 - 3

Phase 2
materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying
materials, the two paints are incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
3.2
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility
with existing finishes and primers. Where acceptability of substrate conditions is in
question, apply samples and perform in-situ testing to verify compatibility, adhesion, and
film integrity of new paint application.
1.
Report, in writing, conditions that may affect application, appearance, or
performance of paint.
Substrate Conditions:
1.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic
moisture meter as follows:
a.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
2.
Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
3.
Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected;
application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"

applicable to substrates indicated.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and
are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of
item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or
apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using
methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to
comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces
that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09912 - 4

Phase 2
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in

"MPI Manual."
1.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
3.
Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5.
Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory
primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats
of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured
film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp
lines and color breaks.
Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic
Safety and Security Work:
1.
Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:
a.
Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear.
b.
Uninsulated metal piping.
c.
Uninsulated plastic piping.
d.
Pipe hangers and supports.
e.
Metal conduit.
f.
Plastic conduit.
g.
Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
h.
Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation
covering or other paintable jacket material.
2.
Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a.
Equipment, including panelboards.
b.
Uninsulated metal piping.
c.
Uninsulated plastic piping.
d.
e.
Metal conduit.
f.
Plastic conduit.
g.
Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation
covering or other paintable jacket material.
h.
Other items as directed by Architect.
3.
Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09912 - 5

Phase 2
3.4

A.
3.5

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.6
Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1.
Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2.
If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with
paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and
apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with
paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials
from Project site.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A.
B.
Metal Substrates (Aluminum, Steel, Galvanized Steel):

1.
Acrylic/Alkyd System:
a.
Prime Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series, at
5.0 to 10.0 mils wet, 2.0 to 4.0 mils dry.
b.
Intermediate Coat: Water-based acrylic-alkyd, interior, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Water-based acrylic-alkyd, semi-gloss, interior: S-W ProMar 200
Waterbased Acrylic-Alkyd Semi-Gloss, B34-8200 Series, at 4.0 mils wet,
1.7 mils dry, per coat.
Gypsum Board and Spray-Texture Ceiling Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, latex, interior: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer,
B28W2600, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry.
b.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1): S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC
Latex Flat, B30-2600 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry, per coat.
d.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell (Gloss Level 3): S-W ProMar 200 Zero
VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry, per coat.
e.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 4): S-W ProMar 200 Zero
VOC Latex Semi-Gloss, B31-2600 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry, per
coat.
f.
See Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend for placement of sheen.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
INTERIOR PAINTING
09912 - 6

Phase 2
SECTION 10100
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.3
ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard.

ANSI/ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes.
APA - American Plywood Association.
ASTM A424 - Steel Sheets for Porcelain Enameling.
ASTM B209 - Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard.
ASTM C208 - Insulation Board (Cellulose Fiber) Structural and Decorative.
FS LLL-B-810 - Building Board, (Hardboard) Hard Pressed, Vegetable Fiber.
A.
1.6
Section 09250 - Gypsum Board System: Substrate construction behind markerboards and
tackboards.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.5
Metal surfaced markerboards.

Tackboards
Trim, marker rail and accessories.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

Conform to applicable codes for flame spread/smoke development ratings of for markerboards
and tackboards in accordance with ASTM E84.
SUBMITTALS
A.
03798614
03/15

1.
Indicate on shop drawings, wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations special anchor
details.
2.
Provide product data on markerboards, tackboards, trim and accessories. Include
maintenance information on regular cleaning and stain removal.
3.
Submit samples illustrating materials and finish, color, and texture of markerboard trim
and tackboard surfacing.
Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
4.
10100 - 1

Phase 2
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
B.
Provide life time warranty under provisions of Section 01700.

Warranty: Include coverage of markerboard surface from discoloration due to cleaning,
crazing, cracking or staining.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
Steel Sheet: ASTM A424, Type I, 24 gage commercial quality.

Aluminum Extrusions: ANSI/ASTM B221, 6061 T-5 alloy.
Cork: Fine grain natural cork, homogeneous composition.
Hardboard: FS LLL-B-810; tempered, smooth face.
Foil Backing: Aluminum foil sheet 0.002 inch thick.
Tackboard Covering: As scheduled in Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
Adhesives: Type recommended by manufacturer.
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.4
Best-Rite.
Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc.
Greensteel Division.
Provide 10 assorted markers and 2 erasers for each markerboard.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Markerboard
1.
Trim: 5/8 inch wide x 0.062 inch thick extruded aluminum.
2.
Tray: 2 5/8 inch deep extruded aluminum, with rounded and smooth polished ends;
thru-bolted to writing surface. One piece, full length of markerboard; concealed
fasteners.
3.
Writing Surface: 24 steel with baked-on porcelain enamel surface.
4.
Backing: 3/8 inch thick fiberboard with 0.002 inch thick foil backing.
5.
Size and Configuration: As indicated on drawings.
6.
Acceptable Product: Claridge Series 4.
Tackboards
1.
Trim: 5/8 inch wide x 0.062 inch thick extruded aluminum.
2.
Outer Facing: Vinyl fabric.
3.
Tack Surface: Cork, 1/4 inch thick.
4.
Size and Configuration: As indicated on drawings.
5.
Core: Hardboard 3/16 inch thick.
10100 - 2

Phase 2
6.
7.
2.5
Acceptable Product: Claridge Series 4 with Fabricork surface on 3/8 inch thick
Duracore.
Backing Surface: Aluminum foil, 0.002 inch thick.
FINISHES
A.
B.
C.
Marker Surface: White porcelain.

Tackboard Surface: Color as selected from manufacturer's standard range.
Aluminum Frame and Accessories: Clear anodized aluminum, satin finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
B.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
3.3
Verify that surfaces and internal wall blocking are ready to receive work, and opening
dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate construction.
Install markerboards and tackboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Secure units level and plumb.
Butt markerboard panels to tackboards tight with concealed spline to hairline joint.
CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
Clean markerboard surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Cover markerboard and tackboard surfaces with protective cover, taped to frame.
Remove protective cover at Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
10100 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 10191
CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
C.
D.

Shop Drawings: Show layout of cubicles, sizes of curtains, number of carriers, anchorage
details, and accessories.
Samples: For each type of curtain.
Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Curtain tracks and carriers.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.4

Operation and maintenance data.

A.
Furnish extra materials described below.

1.
Curtain Carriers and Track End Caps: Full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed.
2.
Curtains: Full-size units equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
Curtains: Provide curtain fabrics with the following characteristics:

1.
Launderable to a temperature of not less than 160 deg F.
2.
Flame resistant and identical to those that have passed NFPA 701 when tested by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
SUPPORT-SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS
A.
03798614
03/15
Manufacturers:
1.
Basis-of-Design: As listed per Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
10191 - 1

Phase 2
2.3
CURTAIN SUPPORT SYSTEMS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.4
Extruded-Aluminum Curtain Track: Not less than 1-1/4 inches wide by 3/4 inch high with
manufacturer's standard wall thickness.
1.
Curved Track: Factory-fabricated, radius bends.
2.
Finish: Clear anodized.
Curtain Track Accessories: Fabricate from same material and with same finish as track.
Curtain Carriers: Two nylon rollers and nylon axle with aluminum hook.
Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel.
Concealed Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized.
CURTAINS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Cubicle Curtain Fabric: Curtain manufacturer's standard, 100 percent polyester, inherently
and permanently flame resistant, stain resistant, and antimicrobial.
1.
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to those indicated in
Curtain Grommets: Nickel-plated brass; spaced not more than 6 inches o.c.; machined into
top hem.
Mesh Top: Not less than 20-inch-high nylon mesh.
Fabricate curtains as follows:
1.
Width: Equal to track length from which curtain is hung plus 5 percent added
fullness.
2.
Length: Equal to floor-to-ceiling height, minus depth of track and carrier at top, and
minus clearance above the finished floor as follows:
a.
Cubicle Curtains: 15 inches.
Vertical Seams: Not less than 1/2 inch wide, double turned and double stitched.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
General: Install tracks level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Up to 20 feet in length, provide track fabricated from single continuous length.
1.
Curtain Track Mounting: Surface.
Surface-Track Mounting: Fasten tracks to ceilings at intervals recommended by
manufacturer. Fasten tracks to structure at each splice and tangent point of each corner.
Center fasteners in track to ensure unencumbered carrier operation.
Track Accessories: Install splices, end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling and joining
sleeves, and other accessories as required for a secure and operational installation.
Curtain Carriers: Provide curtain carriers adequate for 6-inch spacing along full length of
curtain plus an additional carrier.
Curtains: Hang curtains on each curtain track.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
10191 - 2

Phase 2
SECTION 10210
METAL WALL LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
Fixed louvers and frames.

Bird screening.
Insect Screening
Blank out sheeting.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.4


Division 9 Sections - Painting: Field painting.
Division 15 Section - Fans: Ductwork attachment to louver.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
03798614
03/15
AA - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes

AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural
Extrusions and Panels.
AAMA 606.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for
Architectural Aluminum.
AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for
Architectural Aluminum.
AAMA 608.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color
Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum.
AMCA 500 (Air Movement Control Association) - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and
Shutters.
ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed
and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips.
ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars.
ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
ASTM A653/A653M - Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated by
the Hot-Dip Process, Lock-Forming Quality.
ASTM A740 - Hardware Cloth (Woven or Welded Galvanized Steel Wire Fabric).
ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube.
FS RR-W-360A - Wire Fabric, Industrial
FS RR-W-365A - Wire Fabric (Insect Screening).
METAL WALL LOUVERS
10210 - 1

Phase 2
1.5
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A.
B.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of AMCA certified louvers with three

years experience.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.8
Fixed Louver Section

1.
Installed louver to permit passage of air velocity of 750 ft./min. without blade vibration
or noise, with maximum static pressure loss of 0.10 inches.
2.
Fabricate louver to permit minimum 50 percent free area.
Operable Louver Section
1.
Installed louver to permit passage of air velocity of 1000 ft./min. without blade
vibration or noise, with maximum static pressure loss of 0.195 inches.
2.
Fabricate louver to permit 74 percent free area.

1.
Indicate on shop drawings, layout, elevations, dimensions and tolerances; head, jamb
and sill details; blade configuration, screening; and frames.
2.
Provide product data on preassembled louvers describing design characteristics,
maximum recommended air velocity, free area, materials and finishes.
3.
Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
4.
Submit operation and maintenance data including lubrication schedules and adjustment
requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
Coordinate work of this Section with installation of exterior wall.

Coordinate work of this Section with mechanical ductwork and electrical services to motorized
devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
Cesco Products; Minneapolis, MN.

Louvers and Dampers, Inc.; Cincinnati, OH.
Ruskin Manufacturing; Grandview, MO.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy 6063-T5.

Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A527, galvanized to G90 zinc coating, factory primed for field painting.
Steel Shapes: ASTM A283, galvanized to G60 zinc coating.
METAL WALL LOUVERS
10210 - 2

Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.4
Fasteners and Anchors: ASTM A307, galvanized steel type.

Accessories
1.
Linkage: Concealed in jamb.
2.
Operator
a.
Control circuit: 2 wire, 120 volt, 60 hertz.
b.
Return: Automatic spring powered upon power interruption.
c.
Case: Die cast aluminum, NEMA Type I.
d.
Operating environment: -40 to 136 degrees F.
e.
Accessories: Splined crank arm, linkage connector as required by conditions and
dustproof cover.
Bird Screen: Interwoven wire mesh of galvanized steel, 0.063 inch diameter wire, 1/2 inch
open weave, square design.
Primer: Manufacturer's standard baked on type.
Flashings: Of same material as louver frame.
Sealants: Type specified in Section 07900.
Louver Size: 6 inches deep, face measurements as indicated or required to cover cavity
between wythes of walls.
Louver Blade Design:
1.
Fixed Louver Section:
a.
0.081 inch thick extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T5 sloped at 45 degrees; Kstyle; integral waterstops on blade.
2.
Operable Louver Section
a.
0.081 inch thick extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-5 with extruded vinyl blade
edge seals and flexible compressible jamb seals.
b.
Axle, hex shaped galvanized steel with stainless steel bearings.
Louver Frame
1.
General
a.
Channel shaped with welded corner joints.
b.
Fixed and operable sections to mesh tightly to form rigid waterproof mullion
with no exposed fasteners.
2.
Fixed Louver Section: 0.125 inch thick extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T5.
3.
Operable Louver Section: 0.125 inch thick extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T5.
Sill Flashings: One piece per louver; roll formed to shape indicated on drawings or if not
indicated as required in conformance with SMACNA 7-3 B.
Screens: Permanently install screen mesh in shaped frame with reinforced corner construction;
screw to louver frame.
Blank Out Sheeting: Same material as louver and frame.
FINISHES
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Exterior Aluminum Surfaces and Exterior Surface of Blank-Out Sheeting: 0.7 mil thick
anodized coating complying with AA C22A31.
Interior Aluminum Surfaces, Screens and Blank-Out Sheeting: 0.7 mil thick anodized coating
complying with AA C22A31.
METAL WALL LOUVERS
10210 - 3

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
B.
C.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
Verify that prepared openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as
indicated on shop drawings and as instructed by the louver manufacturer.
Verify that proper power supply is available.
Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Install louvers level and plumb.
Secure louvers in opening framing with concealed fasteners.
Align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to
exterior.
Install bird screening to interior of louver.

A.
B.
Adjust operable louvers for freedom of movement with actual control; lubricate operating
joints.
Clean surfaces and components.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
METAL WALL LOUVERS
10210 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 10265
WALL PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.3
36 CFR 1191 - Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities.

A.
B.
1.6

Section 09653 - Resilient Wall Base and Installation Accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
1.5
Corner guards.
End-wall guards.
High impact wall coverings.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.4

Installed wall guards and attachments to resist lateral force of 75 lbs. at any point without
damage or permanent set.
Corner guards to resist lateral impact force of 100 lbs at any point without permanent damage.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Shop Drawings: Provide plans indicating locations for wall guards, handrails, corner guards
and end-wall guards. Indicate attachment details and recommended spacing for all
components. Incorporate schedule indicating locations for different size wall guards located on
the same wall.
Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, system features, wall mounting brackets with
mounting measurements, anchorage details, and rough-in measurements.
Samples: Submit section of each wall guard, corner guard and end-wall guard, 9 inches long
illustrating component design, configuration, color and finish.
Installation Instructions: Indicate installation rough-in measurements and instructions.
Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed flame spread rating of 25 and smoke
development of 450 in accordance with ASTM E84 for surface finish.
WALL PROTECTION
10265 - 1

Phase 2
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.8
A.
B.
C.
1.9
Conform to 36 CFR 1191 requirements for the physically handicapped.

Conform to applicable codes indicated on Life Safety Plans for combustibility requirements
for materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 as follows:
1.
Flame Spread: Class I, 0-25.
2.
Identify wall guards and corner guards with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting organization.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.10
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section

with minimum ten years documented experience.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate work with wall or partition Sections for installation of concealed blocking or
anchor devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
Institution Product Corp.; Muskego, WI.

Construction Specialties; Muncy, PA.
COMPONENTS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Corner Guard (CG)

1.
Manufacturer: C/S Acrovyn.
2.
Style: Refer to Section 09000.
3.
Finish: Per Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
4.
Size: As scheduled in 09000.
5.
Trim Pieces: Provide all trim pieces and end caps.
High Impact Wallcovering (HIC)
1.
Material: High impact rigid vinyl sheet.
2.
Outside Corner: Covered with corner guard.
3.
Inside Corner: 580 vinyl seal.
4.
Side Seam: Butt joint with 580 vinyl seal.
5.
Top Edge: Will be covered by chair rail.
Thickness: 0.040 inches.
6.
7.
Size: Material standard 4 x 8 sheet. Cut as indicated on drawings.
8.
Acceptable Product: Per Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
WALL PROTECTION
10265 - 2

Phase 2
C.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
2.4
Accessories
1.
Mounting Brackets and Attachment Hardware: Appropriate to component and substrate.
Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams.

Predrill holes for attachment.
Form end trim closure by capping and finishing smooth.
FINISHES
A.
B.
Manufacturers standard matte finish, pebble grain texture on all exposed surfaces.
Colors: Per Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
3.3
Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured
rigidly in position. Install with manufacturers recommended full-spread adhesive for high
impact rigid wall covering.
Position corner guard at wall base and extend to ceiling (full height).
Install end-wall guards full height from floor to ceiling.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
3.4
Verify that rough-in for components are correctly sized and located.
Wall Guards
1.
Maximum Variation from Required Height: 1/4 inch.
2.
Maximum Variation from Level for Visible Length: 1/4 inch.
SCHEDULE
A.
Reference Interior Drawings for types and locations.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
WALL PROTECTION
10265 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 10400
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SCOPE
A.
1.3
C.
D.
Manufacturer specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with

minimum five years experience. Obtain signs from one source and a single manufacturer.
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
1.7
Signage schedule in manufacturer's format for verification of text/copy.

Approval drawings showing materials, construction detail, lay-out, copy, size and
mounting methods.
Engineering drawings for each sign type.
Sample of one sign type for verification of materials, color, pattern, overall quality, and for
adherence to drawings and requirements indicated.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.6
Signs and their installation shall comply with applicable provisions of the latest edition of
the following standards and with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction:
1.
Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS).
2.
International Code Council/American National Standards Institute A117.1-Standard
on Accessible and Usable Buildings Facilities.
3.
National Fire Protection Association 101 Life Safety Code.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.5
Furnish all material, labor, and engineering services necessary to program facility and to
fabricate and install signage.
REFERENCES
A.
1.4

Bidder must obtain prior written approval from the Interior Designer and/or Owner to bid
alternates or substitutions to the specification.
WARRANTY
A.
03798614
03/15
Provide manufacturers warranty against defects in materials or workmanship for

minimum 5 years.
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
10400 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
2.2
SIGN STANDARDS
A.
B.
2.3
Signage shall be Fusion as manufactured by Takeform, 1.800.528.1398, or Interior

Designer approved equal.
It is the intent of these specifications to establish a sign standard for the Owner including
exam room signs and restroom signs.
Typography
1.
Type style: Futura - Heavy. Copy shall be a true, clean, accurate reproduction of
typeface(s) specified. Upper and lower case or all caps shall be as indicated in Sign
Type drawings and Signage Schedule. Letter spacing to be normal and interline
spacing shall be set by manufacturer.
2.
Grade II Braille utilizing perfectly round, clear insertion beads.
SIGNS
A.
B.
C.
Standard Colors
1.
Color Selections:
a.
Face Material:
1)
Wilsonart: 7924 07 Biltmore Cherry.
b.
Backer Material:
1)
3-Form: Ting Ting.
c.
Typography:
1)
Futura Heavy FB103.
2)
Dove: White C0104.
d.
Metal Accent:
1)
Natural.
Construction
1.
The laminates (front and back) shall be pressure laminated and precision machined
together to a 90-degree angle. Edges shall be smooth, void of chips, burrs, sharp
edges, and marks.
2.
Braille dots shall be half hemispherical domed and protruding a minimum 0.025.
3.
The signage shall utilize a pressure activated adhesive. The adhesive shall be
nonhazardous and shall allow for flexing and deflection of the adhered components
due to changes in temperature and moisture without bond failure.
4.
All signs shall be provided with appropriate mounting hardware. Hardware shall be
finished and architectural in appearance and suitable for the mounting surface.
Quantities
1.
Quantities by render
Sign Type
Sign Type E.2
Sign Type E.3
Sign Type G
Sign Type H
03791011
03/13
Restrooms
Misc. Room ID (Conference and Storage)
Medium Room ID (Exam)
For Offices
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
10400 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CODE COMPLIANCE
A.
3.2
DELIVERY, STORAGE, PROTECTION

A.
3.3
Installer shall examine signs for defects, damage and compliance with specifications.
Installation shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
3.5
Package to prevent damage or deterioration during shipment, handling, storage and

installation. Products should remain in original packaging until removal is necessary. Store
products in a dry, indoor location.
EXAMINATION
A.
3.4
It shall be the responsibility of the successful bidder to meet any and all local, state, and
federal code requirements in fabricating and installing signs.
General: Installation locations shall be in accordance with TAS guidelines. Locate signs
where indicated using mounting methods in compliance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
The signage contractor shall coordinate installation schedules with the Construction
Manager.
2.
Installation shall be performed by manufacturers personnel trained and certified in
manufacturers methods and procedures.
3.
The signage contractor shall submit a CAD generated location plan noting the
location of all signage and cross referenced to message schedule or plots for Interior
Designers approval.
4.
Signs shall be level, plumb, and at heights indicated with sign surfaces free from
defects.
5.
Upon completion of the work, signage contractor shall remove unused or discarded
materials, containers and debris from site.
STANDARDS MANUAL
A.
Manufacturer shall provide a comprehensive Standards Manual in both a paper and PDF
format. The manual shall include all graphic standards, sign type descriptions, renderings
showing color, pattern and finish, engineering drawings, location plans, plots, artwork,
insert templates, mounting detail, and reorder information.
END OF SECTION
03791011
03/13
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
10400 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 10500
METAL WARDROBE LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold-rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.5
Locker units with hinged doors.

Edge trim moldings.
Hooks, latches, and hardware.
Attachment hardware.
REFERENCES
A.
1.4

Shop Drawings: Indicate locker types, sizes, configurations, layout of groups of lockers,
accessories, trim and numbering plan.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions.
Samples: Provide two samples, 3 x 6 inches, of manufacturers full range of colors, on actual
base material for selection by Architect.

A.
Protect locker finishes and adjacent surfaces from damage during installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
As indicated per Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
MATERIALS
A.
03798614
03/15
Sheet Steel: Mild, cold-rolled, stretcher leveled steel.

1.
Body and Shelf: 24 gage.
2.
Doors: 16 gage.
3.
Door Frames: 16 gage.
4.
Trim: 22 gage.
10500 - 1

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
B.
2.4
Fasteners: Cadmium, zinc, or nickel-plated steel with self locking nuts or lock washers for nuts
on moving parts.
Hinges: 14 gage, 5 knuckle, non-removable pins, loop style, minimum 2 inches high.
Door Handles: Chrome plated die-cast zinc alloy or steel.
Accessories
1.
Coat Hooks: Cadmium-plated or zinc plated steel.
2.
Number Plates: Aluminum, zinc alloy, or stainless steel.
General
1.
Provide end panels, filler panels and trim pieces to close off all openings.
2.
Size and configuration per Drawings.
3.
Do not expose bolts or rivet heads on front of locker doors or frames.
4.
Provide number plates and number lockers consecutively beginning with "1" in each
space.
5.
Door Handle: ADA compliant recessed type with latch, lifter and padlock eye as one
integral unit.
6.
Locking Mechanism: Three point, positive automatic locking, capable of being locked
before closing.
7.
Number Plates: Raised or recessed numerals at least 3/8 inch high. Fasten to doors,
centered near top, with two fasteners.
8.
Factory fabricate and fully assemble lockers; do not knock down for shipping.
9.
Make lockers square with rigid joints, without dents or warped surfaces.
Solid Body Lockers
1.
Bodies and Shelf: 24 gage sheet steel, formed and flanged with stiffener ribs;
electrically spot welded.
2.
Door Frame: 16 gage sheet steel, formed channel shape, welded and ground flush,
welded to body.
3.
Doors: 16 gage sheet steel, 1-3/16 inch thickness; channel reinforced sides and 90
degree flanged top and bottom with minimum of three ventilation louvers at top and
bottom of each door.
4.
Trim
a.
22 gage sheet steel, with concealed fasteners.
b.
Recessed Lockers: Two piece male/female type with integral backbend to rest
against adjacent construction.
c.
Flush Lockers: Single piece, overlapping type trim with integral backbend to rest
against adjacent construction.
5.
Hinges: Weld securely to unit body and concealed rivet to inside of door flange.
FINISHES
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Clean, degrease, and neutralize metal; prime and finish with two coats of powder coat.
Paint locker doors and bodies in color as selected from manufacturer's standard.
10500 - 2

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
Verify bases and recesses are properly sized and located.
Install lockers secure, plumb, square, and in line. Set on prepared base provided.
Anchor lockers with appropriate anchor devices to suit materials encountered.
Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation.
Install end panels and trim to completely close off openings.

A.
B.
Touch up minor scratches with matching paint furnished by locker manufacturer.

Lockers with large or multiple scratches shall be replaced.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
10500 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 10520
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.3
NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers.

UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.7
Conform to NFPA 10 requirements for extinguishers.

Provide extinguishers labeled by UL.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
1.6
Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Roughed-in wall openings.

Section 09912 - Interior Painting: Field paint finish.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.5
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets.

Fire Extinguishers.
Accessories.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
1.4

Shop Drawings
1.
Indicate physical dimensions, operational features, color and finish, wall mounting
brackets with mounting measurements, anchorage details, rough-in measurements,
location, and details.
Product Data
1.
2.
Submit manufacturer's standard printed operation and maintenance data.
a.
Include test, refill or recharge schedules, procedures, and re-certification
requirements.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
03798614
03/15
Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperatures may cause freezing.
10520 - 1

Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
EQUIPMENT
A.
B.
C.
2.3
Fire Extinguishers
1.
Fire Class: A,B,C.
2.
Type: Multi-purpose Dry Chemical.
3.
Capacity: 10 pounds.
4.
UL Rating: 4A 60B:C.
5.
Shell Material: Enameled Steel.
6.
Weight: 18 lbs.
Cabinets
1.
Cabinet Box: Formed 18 gage galvanized sheet steel, semi-recessed type, size to
accommodate extinguishers and bracket.
2.
Trim: Maximum 2-1/2 inch rolled edge return to wall surface, 1-1/4 inch wide face,
steel.
3.
Door: Full acrylic bubble (clear) with steel.
4.
Acceptable Cabinet: Larsens Model No. C2409-6R.
5.
Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet.
6.
Cabinet Hardware: Equal to Larsens "Larsen-Loc" lockable cabinet door with handle
and red letters.
7.
Cabinets located within fire rated wall assemblies shall be fire rated for the resistance
rating of the partition and be UL listed Larsens Model No. FS-C2409-6R.
8.
Maximum recess is 4". Contractor shall verify cabinet depth for each location. Notify
Architect on shop drawing of any installation depth or clearance discrepancies.
9.
Color selected by Architect.
Fire Extinguisher Brackets: Manufacturer's standard as required to fit extinguisher specified
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.4
Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Brackets

1.
J. L. Industries; Bloomington, MN.
2.
Larsen's Manufacturing Co.; Minneapolis, MN.
3.
Potter-Rommer, Inc.; Cerritos, CA.
Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600.
Form body of cabinet with tight inside corners and seams.

Predrill holes for anchorage.
Form perimeter trim and door stiles by welding, filling, and grinding smooth.
Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon catch and
pull handle.
FINISHES
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Extinguishers: Red enamel.

Cabinet Interior: White baked enamel.
10520 - 2

Phase 2
C.
D.
Cabinet Trim and Door Frame:

Brackets: Red enamel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
B.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
3.3
Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
Cabinets
1.
Install one cabinet at each location scheduled and noted on the drawings. Contractor to
provide block-outs in masonry or drywall construction as required to install cabinets in
new or existing walls. Tooth-in matching adjacent masonry as required.
2.
Install plumb and level in wall openings.
3.
Install bracket inside cabinet to support fire extinguisher.
4.
Mounting height from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet as detailed on
drawings.
5.
Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Brackets
1.
In stall one bracket at each location scheduled and noted on drawings.
2.
Install plumb and level.
3.
Mounting height from finished floor in accordance with NFPA 10.
SCHEDULE
A.
B.
Type I fire extinguisher with cabinet. Refer to drawings for locations.

Type I fire extinguisher with bracket. Refer to drawings for locations.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
10520 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 10750
TELEPHONE SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3

Product Certificates: For each type of telephone specialty.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6

Shop Drawings: For each telephone specialty.
1.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.
2.
3.
Include setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for anchor bolts and
other anchorages and for power and communication services. Indicate concealment
of embedded items from view.
A.
B.
1.5
Telephone charging kiosks.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.4

Maintenance Data: For telephone specialties to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PHONE CHARGING KIOSK

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Refer to Section 06402 for the countertop on which the kiosk will be installed.
Description:
1.
Tabletop charging stations that feature an integral lightbox (with static image) and
multiple charging tops.
a.
InVolt Lite as manufactured by InCharged, Inc., or approved equal.
b.
Height: 14.9 inches.
c.
Weight: 6 lbs.
10750 - 1

Phase 2
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.2
Charging Tips: 10, styles to be selected.

Static Lightbox Size: 15 inches.
Power Input: 108 - 132V AC, 5A max, 60 Hz.
Power Output: 5V/2.1A, 10.5W maximum per port (105W total, all ports).

A.
B.
C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
3.3
Install telephone specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install units

level and plumb, with tight joints and uniform appearance, and free of deformation and
surface and finish irregularities.
Install telephone specialties after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
ADJUSTING
A.
B.
3.4
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for proper locations of
power and communication connections and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
Adjust hardware and moving components to operate smoothly, and lubricate as

Switches: Adjust field-adjustable switches and devices to properly control operation of
electrically powered components.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain telephone-booth doors and interfaces.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
10750 - 2

Phase 2
SECTION 10801
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
Section 09300 - Tile: For ceramic toilet and bath accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
Public-use washroom accessories.

Underlavatory guards.
Custodial accessories.
Owner-Furnished Material:
1.
Owner will furnish Vendor supplied accessories to Contractor for installation which
includes, but not limited to:
a.
Toilet Paper Dispensers.
b.
Soap Dispensers.
c.
Waterless Cleaner Dispensers (hand sanitizer).
d.
Paper Towel Dispensers.
Owner Furnished, Owner Installed: Trash Cans.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1.
Construction details and dimensions.
2.
Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other
work and substrate preparation.
3.
Material and finish descriptions.
4.
Features that will be included for Project.
5.
Manufacturer's warranty.
Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of
each accessory required.
Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
03798614
03/15
Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products
from single source from single manufacturer.
10801 - 1

Phase 2
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
B.
1.7
Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances
required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment,
operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
2.2
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and
tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm
thick.
WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15

following:
1.
A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
2.
American Specialties, Inc.
3.
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4.
Bradley Corporation.
5.
GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
6.
Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.
Specimen Pass-Through Cabinet:
1.
Description: With self-closing doors on both sides, lock that prevents doors from
both being opened at same time, and removable stainless-steel tray.
2.
Nominal Wall Opening: 12 by 11-1/4 inches width by height.
3.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Grab Bar:
1.
Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
2.
Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.
a.
Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip
area.
3.
Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches.
4.
Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
10801 - 2

Phase 2
D.
E.
F.
2.3
UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A.
B.
2.4
Mirror Unit:
1.
Style: Per Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
2.
Size: As indicated on Drawings.
Toilet Paper OFCI.
Paper Towel OFCI.

following:
1.
Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.
2.
Truebro by IPS Corporation.
Underlavatory Guard:
1.
Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that
prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without
removing coverings.
2.
Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white, paintable.
CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Source Limitations: Obtain custodial accessories from single source from single
manufacturer.
Utility Shelf:
1.
Description: With exposed edges turned down not less than 1/2 inch and supported
by two triangular brackets welded to shelf underside.
2.
Size: 16 inches long by 6 inches deep.
3.
Material and Finish: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel, No. 4
finish (satin).
Mop and Broom Holder:
1.
Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf.
2.
Length: 36 inches.
3.
Hooks: Four.
4.
Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.
5.
a.
Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel.
b.
Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch-diameter stainless steel.
Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser:
1.
Mounting: Surface mounted.
2.
Minimum Capacity: 400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels.
3.
4.
Lockset: Tumbler type.
5.
Refill Indicator: Pierced slots at sides or front.
Liquid-Soap Dispenser:
1.
Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form.
2.
Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted.
3.
Capacity: 16 oz.
4.
Lockset: Tumbler type.
5.
Refill Indicator: Window type.
10801 - 3

Phase 2
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
B.
General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors
and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage
and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and
resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
3.2

A.
B.
C.
3.3
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners

appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units
level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according
to ASTM F 446.
Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective

items.
Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
SCHEDULE (REFER TO DRAWINGS)

A.
Single User Toilets (Non-Patient):

1.
Each to have:
a.
1 Mirror.
b.
Grab bar 36 long (ref. floor plan).
c.
d.
Soap dispenser (OFCI).
e.
Paper towel dispenser (OFCI).
f.
Toilet paper dispenser (CFCI).
2.
Single User Toilets (Patient Toilets):
a.
Each to have:
1)
1 Mirror.
2)
3)
4)
Soap dispenser (OFCI).
5)
Paper towel dispenser (OFCI).
6)
Toilet paper dispenser (CFCI).
7)
1 Stainless steel shelf (ref. floor plan for location).
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
10801 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 11132
PROJECTION SCREENS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
D.
E.
Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of projection screen from a single
manufacturer as a complete unit, including accessory mounting hardware and accessories.

A.
1.7
Submit under provisions of Section 01330.

Shop Drawings: Submit complete wiring diagrams for electrically operated screens.
Product Data: Provide data on equipment; indicate configuration, sizes, materials, finishes,
locations, and locations of seams in viewing surfaces.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate standard procedures, and conditions requiring
special attention.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed UL specified requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Division 16 Section: Electrical service and connection to projection screen.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.5
Electrically operated front projection screens.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
COORDINATION
A.
03798614
03/15
Coordinate the layout and installation with location and placement of utilities and other
construction supported by, or penetrating through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment and partitions.
PROJECTION SCREENS
11132 - 1

Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
Da-Lite Screen Company, Inc.

Draper Shade and Screen Company, Inc.
Stewart Filmscreen Corporation.
PROJECTION SCREEN
A.
Electrically Operated
1.
Motor
a.
Type: UL listed, gear reduction type with automatic thermal overload protection.
b.
Electrical Characteristics: 120V, 60hz, 2.5A.
c.
Mounting: Mount in metal enclosure on end of screen housing with access from
below.
2.
Controls: Manufacturers standard flush mount three position (up, down and off) wall
switch with adjustable up and down stop positions and automatic cut-off.
3.
Roller Assembly: Manufacturers standard support rod or tube support and end
bearings.
4.
Screen Case: Manufacturers standard 22 gage steel with flat baked enamel finish.
5.
Brackets: Attached to end caps for above ceiling mounting by means of slotted screw
holes.
6.
Screen Fabric
a.
Type: Glass beaded with minimum grain characteristics.
b.
Conformance: Comply with FS GG-S-00172D(1) for Type A screen surface;
mildew resistant, FS 191A/5760; flame resistant, NFPA 701.
c.
Construction: Seamless.
d.
Edge Treatment: Black masking borders.
e.
Size: 60 x 60 inches.
f.
Mounting: Top edge mounted on and securely anchored to metal roller system
without tape.
g.
Bottom of fabric looped with steel bar or rod counterweight, black baked enamel
finish with plastic end caps for protection.
7.
Acceptable Product: Da-Lite Senior Electrol.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
Verify site conditions.

Verify supports are correct and in required location.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

Install with screen cases in position and relationship to adjoining construction as indicated.
PROJECTION SCREENS
11132 - 2

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
3.3
PROTECTION
A.
B.
C.
3.4
Securely anchor to supporting substrate, and in manner that provides a smooth operating
screen with plumb and straight vertical edges.
Test units to verify that screen operating components are in optimum functioning condition.
Use anchoring devices appropriate for equipment and expected usage.
Protect projection screen after installation from damage during construction.

Replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units in their original,
undamaged condition.
Remove masking or protective covering from stainless steel and other finished surfaces.

A.
Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
PROJECTION SCREENS
11132 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 12365
PHARMACY CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3

Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Incorporate keying conference
decisions into final keying requirements.
Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for support of healthcare
casework.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.7
Wood blocking for anchoring healthcare
COORDINATION
A.
1.6
Section 06105 - Miscellaneous Carpentry:

casework.
A.
B.
1.5
Stainless-steel healthcare casework.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4


Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
1.
Indicate locations of blocking and reinforcements required for installing healthcare
casework.
2.
Indicate hardware locations.
3.
Indicate locations of and clearances from adjacent walls, doors, windows, other
building components, and equipment.
4.
Include coordinated dimensions for equipment specified in other Sections.
Keying Schedule: Include schematic keying diagram, and index each key set to unique
designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed hardware indicated, in full-size units.

A.
03798614
03/15
Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of healthcare casework provided.
Include fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs
to damaged casework finish.
PHARMACY CASEWORK
12365 - 1

Phase 2
1.8

A.
Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of
polyethylene film or other suitable material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
2.2
CASEWORK MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.3
Source Limitations: Obtain healthcare casework from single source from single
manufacturer.
Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes and configurations of healthcare casework
by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' metal
healthcare casework of similar sizes, of similar door and drawer configurations, and
complying with the Specifications may be considered. See Section 01600 - Product
Requirements.
Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled commercial steel sheet, complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M;
matte finish; suitable for exposed applications.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of
flatness.
Nominal Stainless-Steel Thicknesses for Stainless-Steel Healthcare Casework:
1.
Sides, Ends, Fixed Backs, Bottoms, Cabinet Tops, Soffits, and Items Not Otherwise
Indicated: 0.050 inch. Bottoms may be 0.038 inch if reinforced.
2.
Back Panels, Doors, Drawer Fronts and Bodies, and Shelves: 0.038 inch except
0.050 inch for unreinforced shelves more than 36 inches long.
3.
Intermediate Horizontal Rails, Center Posts, Tubular Legs, and Top Gussets:
0.062 inch.
4.
Drawer Runners and Hinge Reinforcements: 0.078 inch.
5.
Leveling and Corner Gussets: 0.109 inch.
Glass for Glazed Doors: Clear tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1048, Kind FT,
Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality-Q3; not less than 5.0 mm thick.
Pegboard: Perforated stainless-steel sheet, 0.050-inch nominal thickness.
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
CABINET FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
General: Assemble and finish units at point of manufacture. Use precision dies for
interchangeability of like-size drawers, doors, and similar parts. Perform assembly on
precision jigs to provide units that are square. Reinforce units with angles, gussets, and
channels. Integrally frame and weld to form a dirt- and vermin-resistant enclosure.
Maintain uniform clearance around door and drawer fronts of 1/16 to 3/32 inch.
Metal Flush Doors: Outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with full-height
channel reinforcements at center of door. Fill doors with noncombustible, sound-deadening
material.
Glazed Doors: Hollow-metal stiles and rails of similar construction as flush doors, with
glass held in resilient channels or gasket material.
PHARMACY CASEWORK
12365 - 2

Phase 2
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.4
SPECIALTY CABINETS
A.
2.5
Pass-Through Cabinets: Construct of stainless steel as through-wall units with doublewalled construction and smooth interior. Provide with double-pan flush doors with
interlocking hardware that prevents each door from being opened when the other door is
open. Provide with removable, stainless-steel spill tray and trim flanges for both faces
where indicated.
1.
Type 1 24 x 24 x 12.
2.
Type 2 12 x 12 x 12.
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISH
A.
2.6
Hinged Doors: Mortise doors for hinges and reinforce with angles welded inside inner pans
or hollow-metal stiles at hinge edge.
Metal Drawers: Fronts made from outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with
no raw metal edges at top. Sides, back, and bottom fabricated in one piece with rolled or
formed top of sides for stiffening and comfortable grasp for drawer removal.
Metal Shelves: Front, back, and ends formed down, with edges returned horizontally at
front and back to form reinforcing channels. Provide clips, brackets, pilasters, or other
means to support shelves from cabinet ends and to allow height of shelves to be adjusted in
increments of not more than 2 inches.
Toe Space: Unless casework is built-in, provide metal toe space, fully enclosed, 4 inches
high by 3 inches deep, with no open gaps or pockets.
Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and
indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as cabinets and
with hemmed or flanged edges.
Trim Flanges: Formed metal trim fabricated from same material and with same finish as
cabinets. Provide at perimeter of recessed cabinets.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional-satin finish matching No. 4
finish, with no evidence of welds and free of cross scratches. Run grain with long
dimension of each piece. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces.
Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces clean.
CABINET HARDWARE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
General: Provide healthcare casework manufacturer's standard, commercial-quality, heavyduty hardware complying with requirements indicated for each type.
Hinges: Stainless-steel, five-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with
antifriction bearings and hospital tips. Provide two hinges for doors 48 inches high or less,
and provide three for doors more than 48 inches high.
Continuous Hinges: Stainless-steel continuous hinges complying with BHMA A156.9,
Grade 1. Provide for pass-through cabinets.
Hinged Door and Drawer Pulls: Back-mounted pulls of solid aluminum, stainless steel, or
chrome-plated brass.
1.
Design: Wire pulls.
2.
Overall Size: 1 by 4-1/2 inches.
Door Catches: Dual, self-aligning, permanent magnet catches. Provide two catches on
doors more than 48 inches high.
PHARMACY CASEWORK
12365 - 3

Phase 2
F.
G.
H.
I.
Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, epoxy-coated-steel, self-closing, ball-bearing drawer slides;

designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; complying with BHMA A156.9,
Type B05091.
1.
Provide Grade 1 for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24 inches wide.
2.
Provide Grade 1HD-100 for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches wide.
3.
Provide Grade 1 for computer keyboard drawers.
4.
Provide full-extension type where Grade 1 is indicated.
5.
Provide full-extension type where Grade 1HD-100 or Grade 1HD-200 is indicated.
Label Holders: Stainless steel, aluminum, or chrome plated; sized to receive standard label
cards approximately 1 by 2 inches, attached with screws or rivets. Provide where indicated.
Locks: Cam or half-mortise type with five-pin tumbler; brass with chrome-plated finish;
complying with BHMA A156.11, Type E07281, E07261, E07111, or E07021.
1.
Provide minimum of two keys per lock and two master keys.
2.
Provide locks on all drawers and doors.
3.
Keying: Key locks as directed.
4.
Master Key System: Key all locks to be operable by master key.
Sliding-Door Hardware Sets: Healthcare casework manufacturer's standard, to suit type
and size of sliding-door unit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, location of reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of
healthcare casework.
INSTALLATION OF CABINETS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Install cabinets level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where
healthcare casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit,
with fasteners concealed where practical. Do not exceed the following tolerances:
1.
Variation of Tops of Base Cabinets from Level: 1/16 inch in 10 feet.
2.
Variation of Bottoms of Upper Cabinets from Level: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
3.
Variation of Faces of Cabinets from a True Plane: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
4.
Variation of Adjacent Cabinet Surfaces from a True Plane (Lippage): 1/32 inch.
5.
Variation in Alignment of Adjacent Door and Drawer Edges: 1/16 inch.
Base Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in
partitions with fasteners spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. Bolt adjacent cabinets
together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.
Wall Cabinets: Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, partition framing, blocking, or
reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each cabinet through the back, near the top, at not less
than 16 inches o.c.
Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises.
Adjust healthcare casework and hardware so doors and drawers align and operate smoothly
without warp or bind and so contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating hardware
as recommended by manufacturer.
PHARMACY CASEWORK
12365 - 4

Phase 2
3.3

A.
Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled
areas to match original factory finish as approved by Architect.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
PHARMACY CASEWORK
12365 - 5

Phase 2
SECTION 12484
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
B.
C.

1.
components and profiles, and finishes for floor mats and frames.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Items penetrating floor mats and frames, including door control devices.
2.
Divisions between mat sections.
3.
Perimeter floor moldings.
4.
Custom Graphics: Scale drawing indicating colors.
Samples: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:
1.
Floor Mat: Assembled sections of floor mat.
2.
Frame Members: Sample of each type and color.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete to receive floor mats and frames.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Resilient-tile entrance mats.
COORDINATION
A.
1.4

Maintenance Data: For floor mats and frames to include in maintenance manuals.

A.
03798614
03/15
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Resilient-Tile Entrance Mats: Full-size tile units equal to 2 percent of amount
installed, but no fewer than 5 units.
12484 - 1

Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL

A.
B.
2.2
RESILIENT-TILE ENTRANCE MATS

A.
2.3
Carpet-Type Tiles: Nylon carpet bonded to 1/8- to 1/4-inch-thick, flexible vinyl backing to
form mats 3/8 or 7/16 inch thick with nonraveling edges.
1.
Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As scheduled in Section 09000 - Finish Material
Legend.
2.
Tile Size: 24 x 24 inches.
FRAMES
A.
2.4
Structural Performance: Provide mats and frames capable of withstanding the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
Uniform floor load of 300 lbf/sq. ft.
2.
Wheel load of 350 lb. per wheel.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities.
Surface-Mounted Frames:
1.
Tapered Frames: Tapered frame members, with welded mitered corners.
a.
Vinyl Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
b.
Provide Schluter transition strip.
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance
and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from
normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide
prefabricated corner units without joints.
Surface-Mounted Frames: As indicated for permanent surface-mounted installation,
complete with corner connectors, splice plates or connecting pins, and postinstalled
expansion anchors.
Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum frames that contact cementitious material with
manufacturer's standard protective coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location,
sizes, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames.
12484 - 2

Phase 2
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
3.3
Set mat tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action;
coordinate tops of mat surfaces with bottoms of doors that swing across mats to provide
clearance between door and mat.
1.
Install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location, and secure
attachment of frames.
2.
Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at proper
elevations, in recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth and level.
Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations
indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns.
1.
Anchor fixed surface-type frame members to floor with devices spaced as
PROTECTION
A.
After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of
plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring.
Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
12484 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 12491
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3

Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
A.
B.
1.5
Horizontal louver blinds with polymer slats.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.4

Product certificates.
Product test reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS - HLB

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Manufacturer Basis-of-Design: Refer to Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.

Polymer Slats: Lead free, UV stabilized.
1.
Width: 2 inches.
2.
Profile: Manufacturer's standard.
3.
Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701; testing by a qualified testing
agency.
4.
Manual Lift Mechanism:
a.
Lift-Cord Lock: Variable; stops lift cord at user-selected position within blind
full operating range.
b.
Operator: Extension of lift cord(s) through lift-cord lock mechanism to form
cord pull.
5.
Manual Tilt Mechanism: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism and linkage rod that
adjusts ladders.
a.
Tilt: Full.
b.
Tilt: Two-direction.
c.
Operator: Dual cord.
6.
Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Lengths: Manufacturer's standard.
12491 - 1

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.2
Bottom Rail: Matching slats.

Ladders: Braided cord.
Valance: 3-1/4 inch Fauxwood Decorative Valance.
Mounting Brackets: With spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment
indicated.
1.
Type: Wall.
2.
Intermediate Support: Provide intermediate support brackets to produce support
spacing recommended by blind manufacturer for weight and size of blind.
Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard.
Side Channels and Perimeter Light Gap Seals: Manufacturer's standard.
Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss:
1.
Slats: Reference Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
2.
Components: Reference Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend.
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION

A.
B.
Product Safety Standard: Fabricate horizontal louver blinds to comply with

WCMA A 100.1 including requirements for corded, flexible, looped devices; lead content
of components; and warning labels.
Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured
at 74 deg F:
1.
Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of
opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total, plus or
minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head-to-sill dimension of opening in which blind is
installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch.
2.
Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations
between blinds of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined
vertical separations between openings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions
affecting performance.
1.
Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and
aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Locate so exterior slat edges are not closer than 2 inches from interior faces of glass
and not closer than 1-1/2 inches from interior faces of glazing frames through full
operating ranges of blinds.
2.
Install mounting and intermediate brackets to prevent deflection of headrails.
3.
Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds, adjacent
construction, and operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments,
and similar building components and furnishings.
Electrical Connections: Connect motorized operators to building electrical system.
Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through full
operating ranges.
12491 - 2

Phase 2
E.
Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
12491 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 12494
ROLLER SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3
B.
Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Coordination with gypsum board assemblies for
installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories.
Section 09511 - Acoustical Ceilings: Coordination with acoustical ceiling systems for
installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
1.5
Manually operated sunscreen roller shades.

Manually operated double-roller sunscreen and room-darkening shades.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric

Materials to Fungi.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
NFPA 701-99 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15

Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.
Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles,
features, finishes and operating instructions.
3.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4.
Mounting details and installation methods.
5.
Typical wiring diagrams including integration of motor controllers with building
management system, audiovisual and lighting control systems as applicable.
Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, product details, installation details, operational
clearances, wiring diagrams and relationship to adjacent work.
1.
Prepare shop drawings on Autocad or Microstation format using base sheets
provided electronically by the Architect.
Window Treatment Schedule: For all roller shades. Use same room designations as
indicated on the Drawings and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details.
Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, one complete set of shade
components, unassembled, demonstrating compliance with specified requirements.
ROLLER SHADES
12494 - 1

Phase 2
F.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.7
Deliver shades in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name,
fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations
indicated on Drawings and in the Window Treatment Schedule.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single
manufacturer with a minimum of twenty (20) years experience in manufacturing products
comparable to those specified in this section.
Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum
of ten (10) years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this
section.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large-scale vertical
burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use.
Anti-Microbial Characteristics: No Growth per ASTM G 21 results for fungi
ATCC9642, ATCC 9644, ATCC9645.

A.
1.8
Shadecloth sample and aluminum finish sample as selected. Mark face of material to
indicate interior faces.
Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning
materials and methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls.
Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work including painting is
complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels
indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
Roller Shade Hardware, Chain and Shadecloth (except EcoVeil): Manufacturer's

standard non-depreciating twenty-five year limited warranty.
1.
EcoVeil standard non-depreciating 10-year limited warranty.
Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including
scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Acceptable Manufacturer: MechoShade Systems, Inc.

4203 35th Street
Long Island City, NY 11101
ASD. Tel: (718) 729-2020
Fax: (718) 729-2941
Email: info@mechoshade.com, www.mechoshade.com
Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of
Section 01600.
ROLLER SHADES
12494 - 2

Phase 2
2.2
SHADE CLOTH
A.
B.
2.3
SHADE BAND
A.
2.4
Visually Transparent Single-Fabric Shadecloth: MechoShade Systems, Inc., ThermoVeil

group, single thickness non-raveling 0.030-inch thick vinyl fabric, woven from 0.018-inch
diameter extruded vinyl yarn comprising of 21 percent polyester and 79 percent reinforced
vinyl, in colors selected from manufacturer's available range.
1.
Dense Basket Weave: "1300 series", 5 percent open, 2 by 2 dense basket-weave
pattern.
Vinyl Room Darkening Shadecloth (Single-Fabric): MechoShade Systems, Inc.,
"0700 series", blackout material, washable and colorfast laminated and embossed vinyl
coated fabric, 0.012 inches thick blackout material and weighing 0.81 lbs. per square yard,
with a minimum of 62 threads per square inch in colors selected from manufacturer's
available range.
1.
Color: As selected per Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend. Room darkening
(PVC Free) Shadecloth with opaque acrylic backing: MechoShade Systems, Inc.,
"Equinox 0100 series", 0.008 inches thick blackout material and weighing .94 lbs.
per square yard, comprising of 53% fiberglass, 45% acrylic, 2% poly finish.
2.
Color: As selected in Drawings: Finish Legend.
Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the hem weight, hem-pocket,
shade roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and
open hem pockets are not acceptable.
1.
Hem Pockets and Hem Weights: Fabric hem pocket with RF-welded seams
(including welded ends) and concealed hem weights. Hem weights shall be of
appropriate size and weight for shade band. Hem weight shall be continuous inside a
sealed hem pocket. Hem pocket construction and hem weights shall be similar, for
all shades within one room.
2.
Shade band and Shade Roller Attachment:
a.
Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of:
adhesive, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets are not acceptable.
SHADE FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb,
unless specifically indicated otherwise.
Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat-sealed
trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth
to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch in either direction per
8 feet of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design. Fabricate hem as follows:
1.
Concealed hemtube.
Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform
rolling of the shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-height
(W:H) ratios shall not exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such standards,
shall be responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and
rolling of the shadecloth within specified standards. Battens shall be roll-formed stainless
steel or tempered steel, as required.
ROLLER SHADES
12494 - 3

Phase 2
2.5
COMPONENTS
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Access and Material Requirements:

1.
Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets
without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center
supports to be removed.
2.
Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands
without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets.
3.
Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade
hardware. Styrene based plastics, and /or polyester, or reinforced polyester will not
be acceptable.
Manual Operated Chain Drive Hardware and Brackets:
1.
Provide for universal, regular and offset drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall
at front, rear or non-offset for all shade drive end brackets. Universal offset shall be
adjustable for future change.
2.
Provide hardware capable for installation of a removable fascia, for both regular
and/or reverse roll, which shall be installed without exposed fastening devices of any
kind.
3.
Provide shade hardware system that allows for removable regular and/or reverse roll
fascias to be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without
requiring exposed fasteners of any kind.
4.
Provide positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube.
Friction fit connectors for drive mechanism connection to shade roller tube are not
acceptable
5.
Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch thick plated steel or
heavier as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade.
6.
Drive Bracket/Brake Assembly:
a.
MechoShade Drive Bracket model M5 shall be fully integrated with all
MechoShade accessories, including, but not limited to: SnapLoc fascia, room
darkening side/sill channels, center supports and connectors for multi-banded
shades.
b.
M5 drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a
welded 3/8 inch steel pin.
c.
The brake shall be an over-running clutch design which disengages to
90 percent during the raising and lowering of a shade. The brake shall
withstand a pull force of 50 lbs. in the stopped position.
d.
The braking mechanism shall be applied to an oil-impregnated hub on to
which the brake system is mounted. The oil impregnated hub design includes
an articulated brake assembly, which assures a smooth, non-jerky operation in
raising and lowering the shades. The assembly shall be permanently
lubricated. Products that require externally applied lubrication and or not
permanently lubricated are not acceptable.
e.
The entire M5 assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket,
and fully independent of the shade tube assembly, which may be removed and
reinstalled without effecting the roller shade limit adjustments.
Drive Chain: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 lb. minimum breaking strength.
Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted.
ROLLER SHADES
12494 - 4

Phase 2
2.6
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
Roller Shade Pocket for recessed mounting in acoustical tile, or drywall ceilings
1.
Provide either extruded aluminum and or formed steel shade pocket, sized to
accommodate roller shades, with exposed extruded aluminum closure mount, tile
support and removable closure panel to provide access to shades.
a.
Provide "Vented Pocket" such that there will be a minimum of four 1-inch
diameter holes per foot allowing the solar gain to flow above the ceiling line.
Fascia
1.
Continuous removable extruded aluminum fascia that attaches to shade mounting
brackets without the use of adhesives, magnetic strips, or exposed fasteners.
2.
Fascia shall be able to be installed across two or more shade bands in one piece.
3.
Fascia shall fully conceal brackets, shade roller and fabric on the tube.
4.
Provide bracket/fascia end caps where mounting conditions expose outside of roller
shade brackets.
5.
Notching of Fascia for manual chain shall not be acceptable.
Room Darkening Side and/or Sill Channels
1.
Extruded aluminum with polybond edge seals and SnapLoc-mounting brackets and
with concealed fastening. Exposed fasting is not acceptable. Channels shall accept
one-piece exposed blackout hembar with vinyl seal to assure side light control and
sill light control.
a.
MechoShade side channels, 1-15/16 inches wide by 1-3/16 inches deep,
two-band center channels, 2-5/8 inches wide by 1-3/16 inches deep.
The 2-5/8 inch double-center channels may be installed at center-support
positions of multi-band-shade ElectroShades. MechoShade side channels
2-5/8 inch may be used as center supports for ElectroShades; shadebands up
to 8 high. For shadebands over 8 feet, provide ElectroShade side channels.
b.
Color: Submit for selection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
3.3
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written
instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass.
Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware.
Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding
or malfunction throughout entire operational range.
ROLLER SHADES
12494 - 5

Phase 2
C.
D.
3.4
Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain
roller shade systems.
PROTECTION
A.
B.
Protect installed products until completion of project.

Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
ROLLER SHADES
12494 - 6

Phase 2
SECTION 13090
RADIATION PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
Lead Equivalence: The thickness of lead that provides the same attenuation (reduction of
radiation passing through) as the material in question under the specified conditions.
1.
Lead equivalence specified for materials used in diagnostic rooms is as measured at
100 kV unless otherwise indicated.
A.
1.6
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Steel framing members for bracing lead-brick wall
shielding.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.5
Lead sheet, strip, and plate.

Lead bricks.
Lead-lined, hollow-metal doors and frames.
Informational signs.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4


1.
Review methods and procedures related to radiation protection including, but not
limited to, the following:
a.
Sequence and schedule of radiation protection work in relation to other work.
b.
Supplementary lead shielding at duct, pipe, and conduit penetrations of
radiation protection.
c.
Methods of attaching other construction and equipment to lead-lined finishes.
d.
Notification procedures for work that requires modifying radiation protection.
e.
Requirements for field quality control.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15

Shop Drawings: Show layout of radiation-protected areas. Indicate lead thickness or lead
equivalence of components. Show components and installation conditions not fully
dimensioned or detailed in product data.
1.
Show ducts, pipes, conduit, and other objects that penetrate radiation protection;
include details of penetrations.
13090 - 1

Phase 2
2.
C.
D.
1.7
A.
B.
C.
1.8
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

Testing Agency Qualifications: Licensed by authorities having jurisdiction to perform
radiation shielding surveys.

A.
1.11
Operation and Maintenance Data: For neutron-shielding doors to include in operation and
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.10
Qualification Data: For door manufacturer and testing agency.

Sample Warranty: For warranty.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.9
Show details of neutron-shielding doors and frames, including anchorage to and

coordination with other work. Show locations of electrical conduit and boxes for
connecting door operators, door operator switches, and door interlock switches.
a.
Product Schedule: For doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,
using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate
with final door hardware schedule.
Lead-Lined, Hollow-Metal Doors and Frames: Deliver doors and frames cardboard
wrapped or crated to provide protection during delivery and storage. Inspect for damage on
delivery. Minor damage may be repaired provided the refinished repair matches new work
and is approved by Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install radiation protection until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC
system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before
fabrication.
13090 - 2

Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.3
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of radiation protection product from single source
from single manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.4
Provide materials and workmanship, including joints and fasteners, that maintain
continuity of radiation protection at all points and in all directions equivalent to materials
specified in thicknesses and locations indicated.
1.
Materials, thicknesses, and configurations indicated are based on radiation
protection design prepared by Owner's radiation health physicist. This design is
available to Contractor on request.
Lead-Lined Assemblies: Unless otherwise indicated, provide lead thickness in doors, door
frames, window frames, penetration shielding, joint strips, film transfer cabinets, and other
items located in lead-lined assemblies not less than that indicated for assemblies in which
they are installed.
Lead Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM B 749, Alloy UNS No. L51121 (chemical-copper
lead).
Lead Bricks: Interlocking cast- or extruded-lead bricks with tongues and grooves on
adjoining edges, made from pig lead complying with ASTM B 29 with 1/2 percent
antimony added.
Grout: ASTM C 476, with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
1.
For grouting frames of neutron-shielding doors, use coarse grout made with
aggregate having a density not less than that used for concrete walls in which frames
are installed.
Accessories and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard fasteners and accessories as required
for installation, maintaining same lead equivalence as rest of system.
Asphalt Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
Asphalt Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M.
LEAD-LINED, HOLLOW-METAL DOORS

A.
03798614
03/15
General: Steel doors complying with NAAMM-HMMA 861, except with a single
continuous sheet of lead of thickness not less than that required for partition in which door
is installed extending from top to bottom and edge to edge, installed either between backto-back stiffeners or between stiffeners and stop face of door.
1.
Line inverted channels at top and bottom of doors with lead sheet of same thickness
used in door and close with filler channels to provide flush top and bottom edges.
2.
Shield cutouts for locksets with lead sheet of same thickness used in door. Lap lining
of cutouts with door lining 1 inch.
3.
Prepare doors to receive observation windows and louvers; cut and trim openings
through doors in factory. Furnish removable stops for glazed openings.
4.
Furnish lead-lined astragals for pairs of doors.
13090 - 3

Phase 2
5.
6.
2.5
LEAD-LINED, HOLLOW-METAL DOOR FRAMES

A.
2.6
General: Fabricate from 0.043-inch-thick, formed-steel sheet or 0.064-inch-thick aluminum

extrusions with mitered corners, welded or bolted with concealed fasteners.
1.
Line with lead sheet formed to match frame contour, continuous in each jamb and
across head and sill, lapping the stops, and fabricated wide enough to maintain an
effective lap with lead of adjoining assemblies.
2.
Construct so lead lining overlaps glazing material perimeter by at least 3/8 inch and
furnish removable stops.
3.
Form sill with an opening for sound transmission. Offset sound passage to make
opening lightproof and to maintain required lead equivalence at all points and in all
directions.
NEUTRON-SHIELDING DOORS AND FRAMES

A.
2.8
General: Steel door frames complying with NAAMM-HMMA 861, lined with lead sheet of
thickness not less than that required for doors and walls where frames are used.
1.
Furnish with additional reinforcements and internal supports to adequately carry the
weight of lead-lined doors. Install reinforcements and supports before installing lead
lining.
2.
Form lead sheet to match frame contour, continuous in each jamb and across the
head, lapping the stops. Form lead shields around areas prepared to receive
hardware. Fabricate lead lining wide enough to maintain an effective lap with lead
of adjacent shielding.
3.
Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and
pretreating.
a.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
LEAD-LINED, OBSERVATION-WINDOW FRAMES

A.
2.7
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated with 1/16-inch clearance at
heads and jambs and minimum clearance at bottom.
Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and
pretreating.
a.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Door Interlock Switch: Provide electric switch in frame jamb to prevent operation of
radiation therapy equipment when door is open and to shut off power to equipment if door
is opened while equipment is in use.
1.
Provide rough box for installing switch, fabricated from 1/4-inch-thick steel plate
welded to frame and lined on all sides with 1/4-inch-thick lead plate.
INFORMATIONAL SIGNS
A.
03798614
03/15
Informational Signs: High-pressure-laminate engraving stock with contrasting face and

core, machine engraved from master templates for accurately formed letters, numbers, and
symbols.
1.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
2.
Provide copy indicated or as directed.
3.
Indicate lead equivalence in millimeters and heights of radiation protection in
inches.
13090 - 4

Phase 2
B.
2.9
Rooms Where the Level of Protection Is Uniform Throughout: Provide one sign for each
room indicating lead equivalence of partitions, ceilings, floors, doors, and other portions of
radiation protection enclosure. Indicate height of radiation protection above floor or
indicate that partitions are radiation protected to full height.
DOOR AND DOOR FRAME FABRICATION

A.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare doors and frames to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the
Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 08710 - Finish
Hardware.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF LEAD SHEETS IN CONCRETE FLOOR SLABS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.3
Examine substrates in areas to receive radiation protection, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance of radiation protection.
Proceed with installation only after concrete surfaces are clean, dry, and free of depressions
and sharp projections that could damage or penetrate lead sheet.
Apply a coat of asphalt mastic or paint to concrete surfaces before installing lead sheet.
Before installing floor lead sheet, place lead strips not less than 7 inches wide under the
base of vertical wall protection. Extend lead strips approximately 3 inches into the shielded
room area.
Lead Sheet, 1/8 Inch Thick or Less: Install in a single layer with a 2-inch minimum lap at
joints.
Lead Sheet More Than 1/8 Inch Thick: Install in two or more layers with a 2-inch
minimum lap at joints, or in a single layer with joints butted and covered with a
4-inch-wide lead strip of same thickness.
Extend lead sheet at least 12 inches beyond radiation protection in walls of room.
In floor slabs above shielded rooms where lead sheet is indicated, extend lead sheet at least
12 inches beyond radiation protection in walls of room below; verify existing.
At door openings, extend lead sheet at least 12 inches beyond radiation protection in walls
and at least 12 inches beyond door opening on both sides except where lead-lined
thresholds are provided.
After installation, apply two coats of asphalt coating on top surface of lead sheet and
protect from damage until concrete topping is placed.
INSTALLATION OF LEAD BRICKS

A.
03798614
03/15
Remove projections from concrete surfaces to receive lead bricks, and apply one layer of
asphalt felt to prevent contact between lead bricks and concrete.
1.
At recesses in concrete floors to receive lead bricks, turn up asphalt felt at perimeter
of recess.
13090 - 5

Phase 2
B.
C.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF LEAD-LINED DOORS AND DOOR FRAMES

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.5
Install lead bricks to dimensions indicated, tightly fitted together, with joints offset in
succeeding courses. Cut bricks neatly at joints with adjacent materials for a snug fit, with
edges straight and true and at right angles.
1.
Calk joints between lead bricks and support framing with lead wool.
2.
Install lead strips as indicated at joints between lead bricks and support framing.
3.
Secure lead bricks to walls as indicated with steel flat bars fastened with steel lag
bolts driven into lead plugs.
After installation, apply asphalt coating to surfaces of lead bricks that will receive concrete.
Install lead-lined steel doors and door frames according to Section 08110 - Steel Door
Frames.
1.
Apply a coat of asphalt mastic or paint to lead lining in door frames where lead
comes in contact with masonry or grout.
Frames: Comply with HMMA 840 unless otherwise indicated. Except for frames located in
existing walls or partitions, place frames before constructing walls. Set frames accurately
in position, plumb, and brace securely until permanent anchors are set.
1.
Provide three anchors per jamb, located adjacent to hinge on hinge jamb and at
corresponding heights on strike jamb.
2.
In masonry construction, use wire or T-strap anchors and apply a coat of asphalt
mastic or paint to lead lining where lead comes in contact with masonry or grout.
3.
In metal stud construction, use wall anchors attached to studs with screws.
4.
In wood stud construction, use strap anchors attached to studs with screws.
Lap lead lining of frames over lining in walls at least 1 inch.
Lead Lining of Frames: Line inside of frames with lead of thickness not less than that
required in doors and walls where frames are used. Form lead to match frame contour,
continuous in each jamb and across the head, lapping the stops. Form lead shields around
areas prepared to receive hardware. Lap lining over lining in walls at least 1 inch.
Install doors in frames level and plumb, aligned with frames and with uniform clearance at
each edge.
Hardware: Line covers, escutcheons, and plates to provide effective shielding at cutouts
and penetrations of frames and doors. See Section 08710 - Finish Hardware for other
installation requirements.
Touch up damaged finishes with compatible coating after sanding smooth.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. Check and readjust
operating hardware items, leaving doors and frames undamaged and in proper operating
condition.
INSTALLATION OF LEAD-LINED OBSERVATION WINDOWS

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Install observation windows according to manufacturer's written installation instructions.

1.
Apply a coat of asphalt mastic or paint to lead lining in frames where lead comes in
contact with masonry or grout.
Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, and anchored securely in place to
structural support.
Install leaded side of frame on radiation side of wall. Lap lead lining of frames over lining
in walls at least 1 inch.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08800 - Glazing and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
13090 - 6

Phase 2
3.6
INSTALLATION OF PENETRATING ITEMS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.7

A.
B.
C.
3.8
At penetrations of lead linings, provide lead shields to maintain continuity of protection.

Provide lead linings, sleeves, shields, and other protection in thickness not less than that
required in assembly being penetrated.
Secure shields at penetrations using adhesive or wire ties but not penetrating fasteners
unless indicated on Drawings.
Outlet Boxes and Conduit: Cover or line with lead sheet lapped over adjacent lead lining at
least 1 inch. Wrap conduit with lead sheet for a distance of not less than 10 inches from
box.
Duct Openings: Unless otherwise indicated, line or wrap ducts with lead sheet for distance
from partition/ceiling equal to three times the largest opening dimension. Lap lead sheet
with adjacent lead lining at least 1 inch.
Piping: Unless otherwise indicated, wrap piping with lead sheet for a distance of not less
than 10 inches from point of penetration.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections after
radiology equipment has been installed and placed in operating condition.
Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace radiation protection that inspection reports
indicate does not comply with specified requirements.
PROTECTION
A.
Lock radiation-protected rooms once doors and locks are installed, and limit access to only
those persons performing work in the rooms.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
13090 - 7

Phase 2
SECTION 14212
MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Machine room-less electric traction passenger elevators as shown and specified. Elevator
work includes:
1.
Gearless electric traction passenger elevators.
2.
Elevator car enclosures, hoistway entrances and signal equipment.
3.
Operation and control systems.
4.
Accessibility provisions for physically disabled persons.
5.
Equipment, machines, controls, systems and devices as required for safely operating
the specified elevators at their rated speed and capacity.
6.
Materials and accessories as required to complete the elevator installation.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.4

Division 3 - Concrete: Installing inserts, sleeves and anchors in concrete.

Division 5 - Metals:
1.
Providing hoist beams, pit ladders, steel framing, auxiliary support steel and divider
beams for supporting guide-rail brackets.
2.
Providing steel angle sill supports and grouting hoistway entrance sills and frames.
Division 9 - Finishes: Providing elevator car finish flooring and field painting unfinished
and shop primed ferrous materials.
1.
Section 09000 - Finish Material Legend: Schedules lab interior wall, floor, and
ceiling materials and finishes.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Product data: The elevator contractor will provide standard cab, entrance and signal fixture
data to describe product for approval.
Shop drawings:
1.
Show equipment arrangement in the control closet, corridor, pit and hoistway.
Provide plans, elevations, sections and details of assembly, erection, anchorage, and
equipment location.
2.
Indicate elevator system capacities, sizes, performances, safety features, finishes and
other pertinent information.
3.
Show floors served, travel distances, maximum loads imposed on the building
structure at points of support and all similar considerations of the elevator work.
4.
Indicate electrical power requirements and branch circuit protection device
recommendations.
14212 - 1

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.6
Powder Coat paint selection: Submit manufacturers standard selection charts for exposed
finishes and materials.
Plastic laminate selection: Submit manufacturers standard selection charts for exposed
finishes and materials.
Metal Finishes: Upon request, standard metal samples provided.
Operation and maintenance data. Include the following:
1.
Owners manuals and Wiring diagrams.
2.
Parts list, with recommended parts inventory.
Manufacturer Qualifications: An approved manufacturer with minimum 15 years

experience in manufacturing, installing, and servicing elevators of the type required for the
project.
1.
The manufacturer of machines, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators cabs,
entrances, and all other major parts of elevator operating equipment.
a.
The major parts of the elevator equipment shall be manufactured by the
installing company, and not be an assembled system.
2.
The manufacturer shall have a documented, on-going quality assurance program.
3.
ISO-9001:2000 Manufacturer Certified.
4.
ISO-14001:2004 Environmental Management System Certified.
Installer Qualifications: The manufacturer or an authorized agent of the manufacturer with
not less than 15 years of satisfactory experience installing elevators equal in character and
performance to the project elevators.
Regulatory Requirements:
1.
ASME A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, latest edition or as required
by the local building code.
2.
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
3.
NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows.
4.
Americans with Disabilities Act - Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).
5.
Section 407 in ICC A117.1, when required by local authorities.
6.
CAN/CSA C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code.
7.
CAN/CSA B44 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.
Fire-rated entrance assemblies: Opening protective assemblies including frames, hardware,
and operation shall comply with ASTM E2074, CAN4-S104 (ULC-S104), UL10(b), and
NFPA Standard 80. Provide entrance assembly units bearing Class B or 1 1/2 hour label by
a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (2 hour label in Canada).
Inspection and testing:
1.
Elevator Installer shall obtain and pay for all required inspections, tests, permits and
fees for elevator installation.
2.
Arrange for inspections and make required tests.
3.
Deliver to the Owner upon completion and acceptance of elevator work.

A.
03798614
03/15
Manufacturing will deliver elevator materials, components and equipment and the
contractor is responsible to provide secure and safe storage on job site.
14212 - 2

Phase 2
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
1.9
Temporary Use:
1.
Provide all necessary protection to prevent damage to each elevator used for
construction purposes before Substantial Completion.
2.
Provide temporary enclosures, coverings, guards, barriers and other devices required
to protect the elevator car enclosures, hoistway entrances, signal fixtures and related
materials, components and finishes from damage. Protective materials, methods and
procedures shall be approved by the elevator manufacturer and paid for by the user.
3.
Maintenance during use, including cleaning, lubricating and adjusting equipment
and components for proper elevator operation shall be performed only by the
elevator manufacturer. Cost for maintenance shall be paid by the user.
4.
Elevators shall be free of damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
Cost to repair damaged materials and finishes and replace worn or defective
components to restore elevators to their original condition shall be paid by the user.
5.
Contractor to sign elevator contractor standard temporary use contract form and
agree to pay daily/monthly charge billed monthly.
Warranty: Submit elevator manufacturer's standard written warranty agreeing to repair,

restore or replace defects in elevator work materials and workmanship not due to ordinary
wear and tear or improper use or care for 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.
MAINTENANCE
A.
Furnish maintenance and call back service for a period of 12 months for each elevator
during normal working hours excluding callbacks from date of Substantial Completion.
1.
Service shall consist of periodic examination of the equipment, adjustment,
lubrication, cleaning, supplies and parts to keep the elevators in proper operation.
Maintenance work, including emergency call back repair service, shall be performed
by trained employees of the elevator contractor during regular working hours.
2.
Submit parts catalog and show evidence of local parts inventory with complete list
of recommended spare parts. Parts shall be produced by manufacturer of original
equipment.
3.
Manufacturer shall have a service office and full time service personnel within a 100
mile radius of the project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturer: Design based around ThyssenKrupp Elevators Synergy Building-Supported

Standard Series Machine Room-Less elevator.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
03798614
03/15
Colors, patterns, and finishes: As scheduled in Section 09000.
14212 - 3

Phase 2
2.3
HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
03798614
03/15
Platform: Fabricated frame of formed or structural steel shapes, gusseted and rigidly
welded with a wood sub-floor. Underside of the platform shall be fireproofed. The car
platform shall be designed and fabricated to support one-piece loads weighing up to 25%
of the rated capacity.
Sling: Steel stiles bolted or welded to a steel crosshead and bolstered with bracing
members to remove strain from the car enclosure.
Deflector Sheaves: Optamid, Yellow Cast Polyamide material, pressed roller bearings,
with removable steel shafts.
Guide Rails: Dry, non-lubricated steel, fastened to the building with steel brackets.
Guides: Roller guides, with a minimum of three tires, shall be mounted on top and bottom
of the car and counterweight frame and be held in contact with the guide rail by adjustable
devices.
Buffers: Provide substantial buffers in the elevator pit. Mount buffers on continuous
channels fastened to the elevator guide rail or securely anchored to the pit floor. Provide
extensions if required by project conditions.
Machine: The hoisting machine shall be a compact energy efficient permanent magnet
Gearless traction type flat pancake style, consisting of PMAC motor, brake and driving
sheave mounted on a rigid bedplate in the top of the hoistway. A solid, forged shaft shall
serve as a support for the motor rotor assembly and for the removable drive sheave and
brake system. It shall be supported by roller bearings mounted in the machine housing.
Drive System:
1.
The drive system shall be of the Variable Voltage Variable Frequency (VVVF) Non
Regenerative.
2.
The system shall be a vector controlled pulse-width modulated AC drive. The
variable voltage variable frequency drive shall convert the AC power supply using a
two step process to a variable voltage variable frequency power supply for use by
the hoist motor.
3.
The speed control shall be by means of vector control providing direct torque and
field excitation automatically provided by permanent magnet. A digital absolute
velocity encoder shall be provided giving feedback to the controller on armature
position and motor speed.
Motor/Machine: The motor shall be PMAC, totally enclosed, non-ventilated with class "F"
insulation. The motor armature shall be dynamically balanced and supported by roller
bearings of ample capacity. The armature and driving sheave shall be properly balanced for
smooth, high-speed elevator performance. The PM pancake-shape machine shall be
mounted horizontally in the top of the hoistway in a unitized formed steel structure on
bearing plates furnished by the elevator installer. The unitized formed steel structure shall be
securely fastened to the supports supplied by other trades.
Brake: The brake shall be a spring applied electric brake; held open by an electro-magnet
actuated by a digital brake controller and designed to make smooth, positive stops. The
Brake shall be designed to automatically apply in the event of interruption of power supply
from any cause. Operation and control of the brake shall be all digital. The setting and
lifting of the brake shall be software based and all electronic. All adjustments and setup of
the brake shall be made using a PC interface. No contactors or resistors shall be used in the
actuation of the brake.
Ropes:
1.
Provide Steel hoist cables of size and number to ensure proper wear qualities shall
be used. Special wedge shackles shall be used.
14212 - 4

Phase 2
2.
3.
L.
M.
N.
O.
2.4
HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.5
Governor ropes shall be of iron construction.

Any special tools, devices, software or equipment required for monitoring the wear
of any means of suspension other than standard elevator steel cables shall be
included with the installation of the equipment and become the property of the
owner at time of elevator completion. This includes special ongoing monitoring
systems, special tools and instruction needed to monitor the suspension system.
Counterweight: Counterbalance each elevator for smooth and economical operation by
using iron or steel plate weights securely fastened in a steel counterweight frame.
Counterweight shall equal the weight of the complete elevator car and approximately 50
percent of the specified capacity load.
Safety and Governor: Car safety shall be mounted on the bottom members of the car frame
and be operated by a centrifugal speed governor. The governor shall be designed to cut off
power to the motor and apply the brake whenever the governor indicates the car has
excessive speed. The governor shall function when the car over speeds.
Emergency Terminal Limits: Place electric limit switches in the hoistway near the terminal
landings. Limit switches shall be designed to cut off the electric current and stop the car if
it runs beyond either terminal landing.
Automatic Self-Leveling: Provide each elevator car with a self-leveling feature to
automatically bring the car to the floor landings and correct for over travel or under travel.
Self-leveling shall, within its zone, be automatic and independent of the operating device.
The car shall be maintained approximately level with the landing irrespective of its load.
Doors and Frames: Provide complete hollow metal type hoistway entrances at each
hoistway opening bolted\knock down construction.
1.
Manufacturer's standard entrance design consisting of hangers, doors, hanger
supports, hanger covers, fascia plates, sight guards, and necessary hardware.
2.
Main landing door & frame finish: Stainless steel panels, no. 4 brushed finish.
3.
Typical door & frame finish: Stainless steel panels with no. 4 brushed finish.
Interlocks: Equip each hoistway entrance with an approved type interlock tested as
required by code. Provide door restriction devices as required by code.
Door Hanger and Tracks: Provide sheave type two point suspension hangers and tracks for
each hoistway horizontal sliding door.
1.
Sheaves: Polyurethane tires with ball bearings properly sealed to retain grease.
2.
Hangers: Provide an adjustable device beneath the track to limit the up-thrust of the
doors during operation.
3.
Tracks: Drawn steel shapes, smooth surface and shaped to conform to the hanger
sheaves.
Hoistway Sills: Extruded metal, with groove(s) in top surface. Provide mill finish on
aluminum.
PASSENGER ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURE

A.
03798614
03/15
Car Enclosure:
1.
Walls: Cab type TKLP, durable wood core finished on both sides with high pressure
plastic laminate.
2.
Canopy: Cold-rolled steel with hinged exit.
3.
Ceiling: Downlight type, metal pans with suspended LED downlights.
4.
Cab Fronts, Return, Transom, Soffit and Strike: Provide panels faced with brushed
stainless steel.
14212 - 5

Phase 2
5.
B.
2.6
Doors: Horizontal sliding car doors reinforced with steel for panel rigidity. Hang
doors on sheave type hangers with polyurethane tires that roll on a polished steel
track and are guided at the bottom by non-metallic sliding guides.
a.
Door Finish: Stainless steel panels: No. 4 brushed finish.
b.
Cab Sills: Extruded mill finish.
6.
Handrail: Provide 6'' flat metal bar on side and rear walls on front opening cars and
side walls only on front and rear opening cars. Handrails shall have a stainless steel,
no. 4 brushed finish.
7.
Ventilation: Manufacturers standard exhaust fan, mounted on the car top.
Car Top Inspection: Provide a car top inspection station with an Auto-Inspection switch,
an "emergency stop" switch, and constant pressure "up and down" direction and safety
buttons to make the normal operating devices inoperative. The station will give the
inspector complete control of the elevator. The car top inspection station shall be mounted
in the door operator assembly.
DOOR OPERATION
A.
03798614
03/15
Door Operation: Provide a direct or alternating current motor driven heavy duty operator
designed to operate the car and hoistway doors simultaneously. The door control system
shall be digital closed loop and the closed loop circuit shall give constant feedback on the
position and velocity of the elevator door. The motor torque shall be constantly adjusted to
maintain the correct door speed based on its position and load. All adjustments and setup
shall be through the computer based service tool. Door movements shall follow a field
programmable speed pattern with smooth acceleration and deceleration at the ends of
travel. The mechanical door operating mechanism shall be arranged for manual operation
in event of power failure. Doors shall automatically open when the car arrives at the
landing and automatically close after an adjustable time interval or when the car is
dispatched to another landing. AC controlled units with oil checks, or other deviations are
not acceptable.
1.
No Un-Necessary Door Operation: The car door shall open only if the car is
stopping for a car or hall call, answering a car or hall call at the present position or
selected as a dispatch car.
2.
Door Open Time Saver: If a car is stopping in response to a car call assignment only
(no coincident hall call), the current door hold open time is changed to a shorter field
programmable time when the electronic door protection device is activated.
3.
Double Door Operation: When a car stops at a landing with concurrent up and down
hall calls, no car calls, and no other hall call assignments, the car door opens to
answer the hall call in the direction of the car's current travel. If an onward car call is
not registered before the door closes to within 6 inches of fully closed, the travel will
reverse and the door will reopen to answer the other call.
4.
Nudging Operation: The doors shall remain open as long as the electronic detector
senses the presence of a passenger or object in the door opening. If door closing is
prevented for a field programmable time, a buzzer will sound. When the obstruction
is removed, the door will begin to close at reduced speed. If the infra-red door
protection system detects a person or object while closing on nudging, the doors will
stop and resume closing only after the obstruction has been removed.
5.
Limited Door Reversal: If the doors are closing and the infra-red beam(s) is
interrupted, the doors will reverse and reopen partially. After the obstruction is
cleared, the doors will begin to close.
14212 - 6

Phase 2
6.
B.
2.7
CAR OPERATING STATION

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.8
Door Open Watchdog: If the doors are opening, but do not fully open after a field
adjustable time, the doors will recycle closed then attempt to open six times to try
and correct the fault.
7.
Door Close Watchdog: If the doors are closing, but do not fully close after a field
adjustable time, the doors will recycle open then attempt to close six times to try and
correct the fault.
8.
Door Close Assist: When the doors have failed to fully close and are in the recycle
mode, the door drive motor shall have increased torque applied to possibly
overcome mechanical resistance or differential air pressure and allow the door to
close.
Door Protection Device: Provide a door protection system using microprocessor controlled
infra-red light beams. The beams shall project across the car opening detecting the
presence of a passenger or object. If door movement is obstructed, the doors shall
immediately reopen.
Car Operating Station, General: The main car control in each car shall contain the devices
required for specific operation mounted in an integral swing return panel requiring no
applied faceplate. Swing return shall have a brushed stainless steel finish. The main car
operating panel shall be mounted in the return and comply with handicap requirements.
Pushbuttons that illuminate using long lasting LEDs shall be included for each floor served,
and emergency buttons and switches shall be provided per code. midmicroban Switches for
car light and accessories shall be provided.
Emergency Communications System: Integral phone system provided.
Auxiliary Operating Panel: Not Required.
Column Mounted Car Riding Lantern: A car riding lantern shall be installed in the elevator
cab and located in the entrance. The lantern, when illuminated, will indicate the intended
direction of travel. The lantern will illuminate and a signal will sound when the car arrives
at a floor where it will stop. The lantern shall remain illuminated until the door(s) begin to
close.
Special Equipment: Code Blue Operation: Hospital Emergency service keyswitch to
commandeer the elevator for Code Blue Operation.
CONTROL SYSTEMS
A.
03798614
03/15
Controller: The elevator control system shall be microprocessor based and software
oriented. The system shall operate in real time, continuously analyzing the car(s) changing
position, condition, and work load. All controller and operational circuits including the
brake control and drive system shall be digital. Control of the elevator shall be automatic in
operation by means of push buttons in the car numbered to correspond to floors served, for
registering car stops, and by "up-down" push buttons at each intermediate landing and
"call" push buttons at terminal landings.
1.
Momentary pressing of one or more buttons shall dispatch the car to the designated
landings in the order in which the landings are reached by the car, irrespective of the
sequence in which the buttons are pressed. Each landing call shall be canceled when
answered.
2.
When the car is traveling in the up direction, it shall stop at all floors for which car
buttons or "up" hall buttons have been pressed. The car shall not stop at floors where
"down" buttons have been pressed, unless the stop for that floor has been registered
by a car button or unless the down call is at the highest floor for which any buttons
14212 - 7

Phase 2
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
have been pressed. Pressing the "up" button when the car is traveling in the down
direction shall not intercept the travel unless the stop for that floor has been
registered by a car button or unless the up call is the lowest for which any button has
been pressed.
3.
When the car has responded to its highest or lowest stop, and stops are registered for
the opposite direction, its direction of travel shall reverse automatically and it shall
then answer the calls registered for that direction. If both up and down calls are
registered at an intermediate floor, only the call corresponding to the direction of car
travel shall be canceled upon the stopping of the car at the landing.
4.
A car that is stopping for the last hall call in the preference direction, and that hall
call is for the opposite direction with no onward car calls, shall reverse preference
when the selector position advances to the landing at which the car is committed to
stop. A car that is stopping for the last hall call in the preference direction, and that
hall call is for the same direction, shall hold its preference until the door is almost
closed allowing time for a passenger to register an onward car call which will
maintain the preference. If no car call is registered before the door is almost closed,
the car will lose its preference and shall be available to accept calls in either
direction.
Operation: Selective Collective - ETA based. The system is optimized to get a car to the
floor where a hall call has been registered, in the shortest time. The system receives input
information from standard call pushbuttons located in the hall, car position and car load
information from individual car Loadweighers.
When group operation is required, the group supervisory operation shall be embedded
within selected car controllers. No separate group controller shall be supplied. The
microprocessor shall constantly scan the system for hall calls. When hall calls are
registered, the control system shall immediately calculate the estimated time for arrival
using such information as, number of floors to travel from the current position, the time it
takes to travel one floor at top speed, calls assigned to a car, and car reversal time to
respond to a call in the opposite direction of travel. When a cars status changes or
additional hall calls are registered, the estimated time of arrival shall be recalculated and
calls reassigned if necessary.
1.
Traffic Pattern: The microprocessor shall provide flexibility to meet well defined
patterns of traffic, including up peak, down peak, and heavy interfloor demands, and
adjust for indeterminate variations in these patterns which occur in buildings.
2.
Artificial Intelligence: Artificial Intelligence shall be an integral part of the group
control system software. The enhanced artificial intelligence will optimize the
interfloor traffic performance. Inputs for the artificial intelligence shall include
accurate passenger load from an electronic loadweigher, probable car calls generated
from each hall call, type of building and observed traffic patterns.
Load Weighing Device: Provide a load weighing device on each car which, when the
particular car is filled to an adjustable percentage of the capacity load, shall cause the car to
bypass landing calls but not car calls. The passed landing calls shall remain registered for
the next following car.
1.
The device shall be unaffected by the action of compensating chain or rope. The
device shall detect a 50 pound load change under all conditions.
2.
The load sensor shall use a linear variable differential transformer to accurately
measure the weight in the car. The information shall be transferred via a serial link
to the elevator controller.
14212 - 8

Phase 2
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
2.9
Anti-Nuisance Call Control: The microprocessor control system shall evaluate the number
of people on the car and compare that value to the number of car calls registered. If the
number of car calls exceeds the number of people by a field programmable value, the car
calls shall be canceled after the first call has been answered.
Position Selector: The position selector shall be part of the microprocessor system. The car
position in the hoistway shall be digitized through a primary position encoder. The
microprocessor control system shall store the floor position and slow down points in
memory.
Motion Control: The drive control system shall be dual-loop feedback system based
primarily on car position. The velocity profile shall be calculated by the microprocessor
control system producing extremely smooth and accurate stops. The velocity encoder shall
permit continuous comparison of machine speed to velocity profile and to actual car speed.
This accurate position/velocity feedback shall permit a fast and accurate control of
acceleration and retardation.
Motor Pre-Torque: Current shall be applied to the elevator drive before the brake is
released and the speed pattern is dictated to eliminate roll back and sling shot effects of
unbalanced loads in the car. The electronic loadweigher shall determine the load on the car
determining a pre-torque reference to send to the drive.
Emergency Power Operation: (Group 10-D4A) Upon loss of normal power, buildingsupplied standby power is available to the elevator on the same wires as the normal power.
Once the loss of normal power has been detected and standby power is available, one
elevator at a time from each group will be lowered to a pre-designated landing and will
open the doors. After passengers have exited the elevator, the doors are closed and the car
shuts down. The next available car in the group will then be selected to lower, allow
passengers to exit, close the doors and shutdown. This process is repeated until all cars in
the group have been lowered and parked. At this time, an elevator is automatically allowed
to continue service using the building-supplied standby power. A manual selection switch
is available to override the automatic selection and allow and car in the group to provide
service to the building. When normal power is restored, the elevators automatically resume
operation.
Destination Dispatch: Not Applicable.
Automatic Light and Fan shut down: The control system shall evaluate the system activity
and automatically turn off the cab lighting and ventilation fan during periods of inactivity.
The settings shall be field programmable.
Special Operation: Code Blue Operation: Code Blue operation allows authorized personnel
to obtain an elevator during a medical emergency. Each landing shall have a Code Blue
key switch mounted in the Hall Station. The activation of the key switch will select an
elevator. The selected elevator will immediately cancel all car calls and be prevented from
answering normal hall calls. If the selected elevator is traveling away from the Code Blue
floor it shall stop at the next floor and reverse direction. Upon arrival at the Code Blue
floor the elevator shall park with the doors open for an adjustable time or until the elevator
is commandeered from the inside the elevator by use of the Hospital Emergency operations
key switch.
HALL STATIONS
A.
03798614
03/15
Hall Stations, General: Provide buttons with red-illuminating LED halos to indicate that a
call has been registered at that floor for the indicated direction. Provide 1 set of pushbutton
risers.
Provide one pushbutton riser with faceplates having a brushed stainless steel finish.
14212 - 9

Phase 2
1.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.10
Phase 1 firefighters service key switch, with instructions, shall be incorporated into
the hall station at the designated level.
Floor Identification Pads: Provide door jamb pads at each floor. Jamb pads shall comply
with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.
Hall Position Indicator: Not Applicable.
Hall lanterns: Not Applicable.
Special Equipment: Code Blue key switch at specified landings.
CONTROL CLOSET
A.
B.
A control closet shall be provided adjacent to the hoistway.

1.
The control closet for simplex cars shall be 5-6 x 6-4 x 7-6 high minimum
size. For two-car group operation, the control closet shall be 8-0 x 5-6 x 76
high minimum. The control closet must be within 150-0 of machine.
2.
The control closet shall have a 3-0 wide door minimum.
A disconnect shall be provided for each elevator in the control closet by others.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
Before starting elevator installation, inspect hoistway, hoistway openings, pits and machine
rooms, as constructed, verify all critical dimensions, and examine supporting structures and
all other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Do not proceed with
elevator installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the installer.
Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory
performance.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Install elevator systems components and coordinate installation of hoistway wall

construction.
1.
Work shall be performed by competent elevator installation personnel in accordance
with ASME A17.1, manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop
drawings.
2.
Comply with the National Electrical Code for electrical work required during
installation.
Perform work with competent, skilled workmen under the direct control and supervision of
the elevator manufacturer's experienced foreman.
Supply in ample time for installation by other trades, inserts, anchors, bearing plates,
brackets, supports, and bracing including all setting templates and diagrams for placement.
Welded construction: Provide welded connections for installation of elevator work where
bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation,
adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS
standards for workmanship and for qualification of welding operators.
Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with the work of other trades, for proper time and
sequence to avoid construction delays. Use benchmarks, lines, and levels designated by the
Contractor, to ensure dimensional coordination of the work.
14212 - 10

Phase 2
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.3

A.
B.
3.4
B.
Before final acceptance, remove protection from finished surfaces and clean and polish
surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for type of material and
finish provided. Stainless steel shall be cleaned with soap and water and dried with a nonabrasive surface; it shall not be cleaned with bleach-based cleansers.
At completion of elevator work, remove tools, equipment, and surplus materials from site.
Clean equipment rooms and hoistway. Remove trash and debris.
PROTECTION
A.
3.7
Make necessary adjustments of operating devices and equipment to ensure elevator

operates smoothly and accurately.
CLEANING
A.
3.6
Acceptance testing: Upon completion of the elevator installation and before permitting use
of elevator, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by Code and governing
regulations or agencies. Perform other tests, if any, as required by governing regulations or
agencies.
Advise Owner, Contractor, Architect, and governing authorities in advance of dates and
times tests are to be performed on the elevator.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.5
Install machinery, guides, controls, car and all equipment and accessories to provide a
quiet, smoothly operating installation, free from side sway, oscillation or vibration.
Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator
guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay final
adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum
safe, workable dimensions at each landing.
Erect hoistway sills, headers, and frames before erection of rough walls and doors; erect
fascia and toe guards after rough walls finished. Set sill units accurately aligned and
slightly above finish floor at landings.
Lubricate operating parts of system, including ropes, as recommended by the manufacturer.
At time of Substantial Completion of elevator work, or portion thereof, provide suitable

protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other such methods or procedures to
protect elevator work from damage or deterioration. Maintain protective measures
throughout remainder of construction period.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators.
Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed
at time of failure in operation and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in
normal procedures to be followed in checking for sources of operational failures or
malfunctions.
Make a final check of each elevator operation, with Owner's personnel present,
immediately before date of substantial completion. Determine that control systems and
operating devices are functioning properly.
14212 - 11

Phase 2
3.8
ELEVATOR SCHEDULE
A.
Elevator Qty. 2
1.
Elevator Model: Synergy Building-Supported Standard Series.
2.
Elevator Type: Gearless Traction Machine Room-Less, Passenger.
3.
Rated Capacity: 2500 lbs.
4.
Rated Speed: 200 ft./min.
5.
Operation System: TAC50.
6.
Travel: 14-0.
7.
Landings: 2 total.
8.
Openings:
a.
Front: 1.
b.
Rear: 0.
9.
Clear Car Inside: 6' - 8' wide x 4' - 3" deep.
10. Cab Height: 7' - 10'' nominal.
11. Hoistway Entrance Size: 3' - 6' wide x 7'-0'' high.
12. Door Type: Single Speed.
13. Power Characteristics: 460 volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hz.
Note: Isolation Transformer required for jobs with less than 480vac, 3 Phase
building power.
14. Seismic Requirements: Zone 1.
15. Hoistway Dimensions: 8' - 4" wide x 6' - 8" deep.
16. Pit Depth: 5' - 0''.
17. Button & Fixture Style: Signa4 Signal Fixtures.
18. Special Operations: Code Blue Operation as detailed here in.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
14212 - 12

Phase 2
SECTION 15000
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
C.
1.3

Work covered by this Division shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and
materials and in performing all operations necessary for the installation of complete and
operating mechanical systems as required by these specifications and/or shown on the drawings,
subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The work shall also include the completion
of such mechanical and electrical details not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the
successful operation of all systems described on the drawings or required by these
specifications; this includes furnishing all materials for filling the systems to make them
operable, including water, refrigerant, oil and grease. Prove satisfactory operation of all
equipment and controls to the Engineer on request.
Work Not Included: Certain labor, material and equipment may be furnished and/or installed
under other divisions of these specifications. This Contractor shall coordinate with other trades
and arrange his work to make the part fit together. The following items are to be accomplished
under other divisions of these specifications:
1.
Temporary Heat: Refer to paragraph in this Section.
2.
Temporary Water and Toilet: Refer to General Conditions.
3.
Roof Curbs: Refer to paragraph in this Section.
4.
Electrical Equipment and Wiring: Refer to paragraph in this Section.
5.
Concrete: Refer to paragraph in this Section.
Equipment Furnished by Owner: Rough-in services pipes to locations as required by
architectural and mechanical drawings and equipment shop drawings. Provide service valves on
all pipes except waste and vent pipes. Final Connection to equipment will be made by this
Contractor.
BIDDING
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
All mechanical equipment shall be new unless specified otherwise in the specifications or on
the drawings.
All bids must be based only on the equipment and materials as scheduled on the drawings and
as specified or on equivalent equipment and materials. Any Contractor who assumes
equivalence of products and who bases his proposal on that assumption does so at his own risk.
A listing of approved alternative manufacturers does not mean that all products of a particular
alternative manufacturer are acceptable alternative to the scheduled items. All fixtures and
devices must still be submitted according to the prescribed procedures. In addition, some items
that have an important visual affect, e.g., electric water coolers, may be required to receive
Owners or Architectural approval also.
15000 - 1

Phase 2
1.4
EXISTING UTILITIES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
CODES, PERMITS, AND FEES

A.
1.6
Temporary heat will be furnished by the General Contractor. Use of the permanent heating
system will not be allowed without written authorization from the Engineer, Architect and
Owner. In case the permanent heating system is used for temporary heat, the General Contractor
shall pay all the costs until acceptance by the Owner. Warranty of equipment shall not start until
acceptance by the Owner.
DRAWINGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.8
Contractor shall comply with all local, state and national codes and shall pay for all applicable
costs, fees, permits, licenses and inspections for this division.
TEMPORARY HEAT
A.
1.7
The drawings indicate the locations, type and sizes of various utilities within the site where
known. These utilities are indicated as accurately as possible. If the Contractor encounters any
utilities during construction which are not shown on the drawings, they shall ask for written
instructions from the Architect. Any relocation or remodeling required will then be directed by
a change order. This Contractor shall assume all responsibility for protection of all utilities,
shown or not, and for repair required by this construction.
Contractor shall verify location, size, elevation, pressure and any other pertinent data of the
existing utilities. Additional costs incurred due to failure to verify such data and to coordinate
associated work with respective utility providers shall not be the Owners responsibility but
shall be borne by the Contractor.
All costs associated with providing utilities including, but not limited to, connection fees,
boring under roads, etc., shall be included in the Contractors proposal price whether such costs
are incurred by Contractor or charged by the utility company.
Submission of a proposal by the Contractor shall be considered an acknowledgment by the
contractor of his compliance with this section.
Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and are not intended to be scaled for dimensions. All
dimensions shall be taken from Architectural drawings, certified equipment drawings and from
the structure itself before fabricating and work. All space requirements and equipment locations
shall be verified, coordinated with other trades, as it is responsibility of the various contractors
to install the systems complete in the space provided without extra charges to the Owner.
It is intended that anything, whether labor and materials, which is usually furnished as part of
any equipment specified and which is necessary for operation shall be furnished as part of the
Contract without additional cost, whether or not shown or described.
All piping in finished areas of the building shall be concealed except where otherwise noted on
the drawings.
All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers recommendations, unless
approval is given in writing by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer for deviation.
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A.
03798614
03/15
The mechanical work shall be performed in strict accordance with the local and state codes,
ordinances, and regulations governing the particular work involved. Furnish, without extra
15000 - 2

Phase 2
charge, any additional material and labor when and where required to comply with these Rules
and Regulations, though the work is not mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the
Drawings. When the Specifications or Drawings call for or describe materials or construction of
a better quality or larger sizes than required by the above mentioned Rules and Regulations, the
provisions of these Specifications and accompanying Drawings shall take precedence.
1.9
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.10
WARRANTY
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.11
All materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise specified.

Guarantee all workmanship, material and equipment and replace any found defective without
cost to the Owner, for ONE year after final acceptance, as defined in General Conditions.
Each warranty for longer than one year as described above (that comes with equipment used on
the job) shall be passed into the Owner in the Operation and Maintenance Manual, along with
the dates of start and end of warranty.
Refer to General Conditions for additional information regarding specific warranty
requirements.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A.
1.12
All mechanics shall be capable journeymen, skilled in the work assigned to them with licensing
required by the inspecting authority. All welders must have been certified within the past three
years to perform the work, which they are doing.
Before final payment, provide the Architect with one clean set of drawings and specifications
corrected up-to-date as job progress. These documents shall reflect the As-Built conditions.
Refer to General Conditions for additional information.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
The intent of this section is to give general submittal information, refer to specific submittal
information in the subsequent mechanical sections. Refer to Specification Section 01330 for
further submittal procedure information.
Sale of Electronic CADD Files
1.
Refer to Architectural specification Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures OR call the
Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. office issuing this project and request the pricing for
electronic files.
Within 10 days after award of the contract, and before orders are placed, Contractor shall
submit specific information on list of equipment and principal materials specified. Contractor
shall indicate and/or provide names of manufacturers, catalog and model numbers, cut sheets,
and such other supplementary information as necessary for evaluation.
Requirements For Each Submittal:
1.
Provide all Division 15 submittals for project in pdf format at one time. Refer to
Section 01330.
2.
Submittals must bear a dated stamp or specific written indication that the Contractor has
reviewed and approved all submittal prior to submission to Engineer.
3.
Submittals must have all information deleted by Contractor that pertains to the means
and methods of construction or to fabrication, assembly, installation, or erection
(approval by Engineer shall not extend to these areas unless specifically noted by
Engineer).
15000 - 3

Phase 2
4.
5.
SUBMITTALS MUST BE CLEARLY AND SPECIFICALLY MARKED AS TO

WHICH SPECIFIC PIECE OF EQUIPMENT IS BEING SUBMITTED, BYE USE OF
A PERMANENT MARKER, STAMP, ETC., SO AS TO DISTINGUISH IT FROM
OTHER PIECES OF EQUIPMENT THAT MAY OCCUR ON THE SAME PAGE.
SUBMITTALS MUST BE CLEARLY MARKED AS TO WHICH AVAILABLE
OPTIONS ARE BEING SUBMITTED THAT ARE ASSOCIATED WITH A PIECE
OF EQUIPMENT, AND SUBMITTALS MUST BE COMPLETE WITH RESPECT
TO QUANTITIES, DIMENSIONS, SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE, MATERIALS AND
SIMILAR DATA TO ENABLE THE ENGINEER TO REVIEW THE PROPOSED
EQUIPMENT.
OMISSION BY CONTRACTOR OF ANY OF THE ABOVE REQUIREMENTS OR

SUBMITTALS WILL SUBJECT SUBMITTAL TO AUTOMATIC REJECTION
WITHOUT REVIEW.
E.
1.13
SUBSTITUTED PRODUCTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.14
Any submittals received by Engineer that were not requested shall be returned without review
of any kind.
Installation Instructions: For certain products or systems as identified in subsequent
specifications sections or on the drawings, the Contractor shall be required to provide copies of
manufacturers installation instructions with the submittal. When required as such, the
installation instructions are considered part of the submittal and their omission may result in
automatic rejection of the submittal. Where more than one identical device are scheduled, only
one set of installation instructions needs to be submitted, e.g., if seven five-ton split systems air
conditions are scheduled, only one five-ton unit installation instruction needs to be submitted.
Similarly, if one set of installation instructions is identified by the manufacturer and on the
instructions to be applicable to more than one type or size of devices, e.g., if one set of air
conditioner instructions is good for three, four, five-ton units, then only one instruction set is
required for these devices.
Material or equipment specified by Manufacturers name is being used as a basis of standard,

unless otherwise noted. The Engineer will be the sole judge on the equivalence of substituted
equipment and materials.
It shall be the Contractors responsibility to verify that submitted substitute equipment will fit in
space available. The contractors submittal for acceptance of the substitute shall include a
written statement of whether or not such acceptance would require any subsequent or associated
changes to the drawings or specifications. Any such changes shall be described in writing,
briefly but complete.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any such modifications due to substitution
of materials or equipment for that which was specified or scheduled. The cost shall be
complete, that is, it shall include the cost effect of any and all other trades.
The Engineer may request detailed shop drawing or plan layouts of mechanical rooms or
systems of the substituted equipment.
SAFETY
A.
03798614
03/15
General: Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the work, and Contractor shall comply with all
15000 - 4

Phase 2
B.
1.15
LABELING
A.
1.16
Each device for which an independent testing authority has established a standard shall have
affixed a label indicating its compliance and listing. Refer to General Conditions for list of such
independent testing authorities.
SITE VISIT REPORTS

A.
1.17
laws governing safety, specifically the Occupational Safety and Health Standards and the
Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, state and federal.
According to OSHA, a hazardous chemical is any chemical, which is a physical hazard or a
health hazard. This may include items such as paints, solvents, adhesives, sealants, cleaners,
etc. If a contractor produces, uses, or stores hazardous chemicals at the workplace, the
contractor shall develop, implement, and maintain a hazard communication program in
compliance with the latest OSHA requirements. In projects with multiple tenants in which the
building is partially occupied during all or part of the project, Contractor shall inform the
building manager or Owner, according to OSHA guidelines, of any hazardous chemicals being
produced, stored, or used in the building so that other tenants may be notified. Contractor shall
employ required methods of training, information, handling, ventilation, labeling, storing,
disposal, and removal of hazardous chemicals.
During the course of the job, the Engineer will make site visits to observe work in progress and
will subsequently prepare a written site visit report, which will be sent to the Contractor and to
whomever else the Engineer desires. The Contractor shall prepare a written and typed response
within seven (7) calendar days of his receiving the site visit report. The General Contractor
shall include in his response the following information.
1.
Date of site visit by the Engineer.
2.
Date of receipt of the site visit report.
3.
Name and title of the preparer of the response.
4.
An item number referenced to the site report.
5.
A brief three or four word description of the item.
6.
The Contractor or Subcontractor affected.
7.
The proposed course of action.
8.
An expected time of completion of the action.

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
No joists, beams, girders, columns, slabs, or other structural elements shall be cut, drilled, or
altered in any way by the Contractor without first obtaining written permission and instructions
from the Engineer and Architect.
Where it is necessary to cut through any non-structural elements of walls, floors, or ceilings to
permit the installation of any work under this contract, or to repair any defects that may appear
up to the expiration of the guarantee, such cutting shall be done by Contractor with as little
damage as reasonably possible to the element being cut or to adjacent elements.
After the necessary work has been completed, the damage shall be repaired by the respective
Contractor, who shall pay all costs of such cutting, repairs and patching. All patching or sealing
of cuts, penetrations, etc., including final appearance of same, shall be done to the approval of
the Engineer and Architect.
15000 - 5

Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
2.2
EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
A.
B.
2.3
Equipment capacities as scheduled on the drawings are at project site altitude. Capacities of
submitted equipment must be corrected for project site altitude unless otherwise noted.
WORKMANSHIP
A.
2.5
All equipment major items are specified in the equipment schedules on the drawings and shall
be new and furnished complete with all accessories normally supplied with the catalog item
listed and all other accessories necessary for a complete and satisfactory installation.
Equipment items so noted will require start-up by factory trained personnel. Equipment items
so noted will require factory approved service personnel who shall provide all service,
including all parts and all labor, as requested by the Owner, during the full period of equipment
warranty.
EQUIPMENT RATINGS
A.
2.4
All materials shall be new and of specified quality, unless specifically noted otherwise.
Materials shall be free from defects. Where manufacturer names are mentioned in the
specifications or on the drawings, it has been done in order to establish a standard of quality
and construction.
Contractor will be responsible for transportation of his material to and from the job site, and
will be responsible for the storage and protection of his materials and work until the final
acceptance of the job. At the end of each day of work, each Contractor is responsible for
covering or protecting his work and/or materials that may be susceptible to damage even if such
damage is the result of unforeseen causes, e.g., an overnight thunderstorm. Failure to do so will
be sufficient cause for rejection of any item in question, and any such item shall be replaced by
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
Contractor shall verify that all pieces of equipment will fit through available openings in the
building and that all equipment can be installed without modification of building structure.
The workmanship shall, in all respects, be of the highest grade, and all construction shall be
done according to the best practices of the trade. Piping, ducting and conduit shall be concealed
unless otherwise noted, and installed square to the building lines. Any work not meeting this
requirement shall be replaced or rebuilt without extra expense to the Owner.
V-BELT DRIVES
A.
03798614
03/15
V-belt drives shall be of fabric and rubber construction of approved manufacture. Multiple belts
shall be matched and all belts shall be adjusted to drive the apparatus properly and to prevent
slippage and undue wear in starting motor nameplate rating.
15000 - 6

Phase 2
2.6
BELTGUARDS
A.
2.7
ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.8
The Contractor shall provide for each V-belt drive a painted steel belt guard, which shall be
constructed around an angle iron frame, securely bolted to the floor or apparatus. The guard
shall completely enclose drives and pulleys and be constructed to comply with all safety
requirements. Hinged access doors not less than 6" x 6" shall be provided for access to motors
and fan shaft for test purposes.
All disconnects, motor starters, relays, wiring, etc. shall comply with all requirements of 16000
Sections of the electrical specifications.
The Mechanical Contractor must refer to the electrical control equipment and wiring shown on
the Electrical Drawings. Any changes or additions required by specified or substituted
equipment furnished shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor furnishing the
equipment.
All electrical equipment characteristics (voltage, etc.) must be VERIFIED by the Mechanical
Contractor prior to ordering. It is imperative that voltage and phase characteristics are checked
with the electrical drawings.
All motors shall be built in accordance with the current applicable IEEE, ASA, and NEMA
standards. All general-purpose motors shall be open drip-proof machines for installation
indoors and/or in protected locations. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motors shall be used
in all areas of exposure to weather or other environmental contamination. Motors shall be rated
explosion-proof when located in hazardous atmospheres. Type II weather-protected motors may
be used in lieu of TEFC motors on roof fan units and similar equipment. Motors mounted in
direct sun shall be provided with a shield to forbid direct radiation from the sun when the sun is
45 degrees or greater above the horizon.
Unless indicated otherwise, motors shall be NEMA design B with a service factor of 1.15 with
40o C rise and total temperature rise of 65o C ambient and when powered from the system
voltage feeding the motor. TEFC motors shall have a service factor of 1.00 with total
temperature rise of 65o C in the above conditions. Single-phase motors shall be NEMA Type N
split phase induction motors with built-in thermal protectors. Single-phase motors connected on
loads requiring high starting torque shall be capacitor-start induction motors.
All motors shall be all copper wound, high power factor, high efficiency motors. Electric
motors shall be an energy efficient type as defined in the latest edition of NEMA document no.
MG1. Motor efficiency shall be made available to the Engineer as required.
EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SUPPORTS

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
All supporting systems for piping, equipment, and materials supported by the building structure
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to purchase and installation.
Roof Supports
1.
Contractor shall provide and install roof supports for all uninsulated piping routed on
the roof.
a.
For single pipes through 4-inches in size, such as gas pipes, etc., the roof support
shall be a MIRO Model 4-RAH which consists of a one piece combination roof
deck base, adjustable height pipe supports, roller housing of polycarbonate resin
and a self-lubricating roller.
15000 - 7

Phase 2
b.
2.9
Manufacturers installation recommendations vary depending on roof types, but

the Contractor is responsible for verifying the roof type and adhering strictly to
the appropriate set of manufacturers installation instructions.
ROOF PENETRATIONS
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Piping
1.
Penetration shall be accomplished with factory-made assemblies designed specifically
for the purpose. The use of pitch pans or pitch pockets is not allowed. Contractor shall
refer to architecturals for directions or provide a factory-made penetration assembly as
follows:
a.
For pipes, conduits, etc., up to 3 inches in diameter that can or are intended to be
turned to horizontal after passing through the roof (e.g., small electrical conduit,
gas piping, refrigerant lines, water pipes, etc.) the device shall consist of a curb
assembly with a welded 18 gauge galvanized steel shell and base, 1-1/2 inches
thick 3 pcf rigid insulation, 0.50 inch aluminum or 20 gauge galvanized cap with
minimum 3 inch over hang and 1-inch rigid insulation, and 2 x 6 wood nailer.
Product shall be Custom Curb Model CPC, ThyCurb Model RP-2 with TC-1, 2,
or 3 curb, or approved equivalent. This method not suitable for metal roofing
systems.
b.
EPDM pipe boots for watertight flashing of metal roof & wall systems. EPDM
boots shall be designed in a multitude of sizes to accommodate penetrations from
1/8" to 26" round and work in conjunction with any configuration of metal
roofing or siding panel. The EPDM pipe boot shall be engineered with an
aluminum flanged base that can be bent by hand to conform to the roof profile,
irregularities, or slopes. The aluminum flange shall be bonded to the flexible boot
during the molding process and is completely isolated from the underside of the
boot to prevent any potential galvanic corrosion such as happens with solid metal
flashings. Install with manufacturer approved sealant on the underside and
stainless fasteners. Provide adapter rings as required to further extend the
capabilities of the EPDM pipe boot to seal unusual shapes such as angle irons and
square tubes.
Ductwork without Equipment
1.
Penetration shall be accomplished with a factory-made insulated roof curb. Curb shall be
made of welded 18 gauge galvanized steel shell and base plate, shall be lined with
1-1/2 inch 3 pcf rigid insulation, shall have minimum 2 x 2 wood nailer, and shall be
reinforced with 1 x 1 x 18 steel angle on sides 24 inches and larger. Product(s) shall
be manufactured by Custom Curb, Inc., ThyCurb, Roof Products and Systems, Pate, or
approved equivalent.
Ductwork with Equipment
1.
Each piece of roof mounted equipment such as exhaust or supply fans, relief or intake
hoods, packaged rooftop air conditioners, air handlers, etc., shall be provided and
installed with an insulated roof curb designed to mate with the equipment and provide a
weatherproof enclosure. In the event that a preinsulated curb is not available, an
uninsulated curb is acceptable if the Contractor provides and installs field insulation per
the manufacturers instructions. Contractor shall provide the roof curb(s) to the Roofing
Contractor for installation.
15000 - 8

Phase 2
D.
2.10
ACCESSIBILITY
A.
B.
2.11
Access Panels
1.
Access panels shall be provided wherever necessary for possible future replacement,
adjustment, or maintenance of operating devices such as machinery, valves, dampers,
switches, relays, etc., or to other critical non-operating devices such as pull boxes,
inspection parts, gauges, etc. Such access panels shall be provided and install by
Contractor, whether or not shown on the drawings, and shall be brought to the attention
of the Engineer for approval of type, color, etc. Where access is provided in rated
members, the access panels shall be of a type that maintains the integrity of the member
penetrated.
Access to Equipment
1.
All pipes, tubing, conduit, etc., including, but not limited to, draining piping of any type,
electrical conduit, wiring not in conduit, and pneumatic control tubing shall be installed
in such a way so as not to prevent and/or not to make necessary difficult the removal,
operation, use, or maintenance of equipment, access panels or doors, pathways
(especially in attics or crawlspaces), observation ports, measurement or balancing
devices, junction boxes.
2.
If access for these purposes is prevented or made unreasonably difficult in the opinion of
the Engineer, then the Contractor shall make modifications or repairs at no cost to
anyone except the Contractor. Such modifications or repairs shall be considered neither
complete nor adequate until the Engineer is satisfied that access for the above purpose is
achieved.
PROTECTION OF PENETRATION
A.
B.
2.12
General
1.
All roof flashing assemblies and roof curbs shall be closely coordinated with other work
through the Roofing Contractor to insure that the flashing, canting, insulation type and
location, etc., is correct and appropriate for the particular roof construction type.
2.
Each roof curb shall be selected and provided so that the top of the curb shall be level
after installation. The curb shall provide a minimum clearance of 10 inches between the
top of the finished roof surface and the top of the wood nailer, continuous around the
curb perimeter.
3.
Each roof penetration location shown on the drawing is approximate. Refer to the
Architectural and Structural drawing for the structural openings. Refer to CUTTING
AND PATCHING section of this specification for more information.
4.
Provide each roof curb with other options as scheduled on the drawings.
All penetrations of fire or smoke barriers shall be sealed, sleeves (if any), insulation (if any),
and vibration isolation (if any) that maintain the fire or smoke resistance of the barrier in
accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.
Contractor shall verify locations and type of all partitions penetrations from the drawings.
Sealing material and methods shall be per UL recommendations.
BEDDING COURSE
A.
03798614
03/15
Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch
sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
15000 - 9

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
STORAGE
A.
B.
3.2
INSTALLATION AND ARRANGEMENT

A.
B.
3.3
B.
Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for protection thereof, whether or not such
facility is to be removed or relocated or remain as installed. Moving or removing any facility
must be done so as not to cause interruption the work or Owners Operation.
All pipe and duct openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. All fixtures
shall be covered and protected against injury. At final completion, all work shall be cleaned and
delivered in an unblemished condition, or refinished and repainted at the discretion of the
Architect.
CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK

A.
3.5
Install all work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of coils, heat exchanger
bundles, boiler tubes, fan shafts and wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives and all other
parts which might require periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes, ducts and
equipment to permit ready access to valves, traps, starters, motors, control components and to
clear opens of doors and of access panels.
Offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipes and ducts shall be made as required to
maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping pipes whether or not indicated on the drawings.
Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, etc., as required to effect these offsets,
transitions and changes in direction.
PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY

A.
3.4
Provide for proper storage of all materials and equipment and assume responsibility for losses
due to any cause. All storage shall be within the contract limits of the building site or in a
bonded warehouse. All equipment and materials must be covered and stored out of the
elements; any item, which has become rusted, will not be permitted to be used.
Each Contractor shall provide temporary storage facilities suitable for equipment stored at the
job site. Storage facilities shall be rainproof and lockable as required. Materials or equipment
stored on site but not in a lockable rainproof storage facility shall be stored above ground or
above slab. Contractor shall take necessary precautions to prevent entry of and/or damage from
dirt, trash, water, or vermin. Equipment not properly stored and protected shall be, at the
discretion of the Engineer, replaces at no cost to the Owner. Roofs are not acceptable storage
areas unless specifically allowed in writing by the Engineer.
Concealed is intended to mean within such spaces as pipe chases, pipe trenches, above plaster
ceilings, in walls and buried pipe is inaccessible when building is completed. Exposed is
intended to be within equipment rooms, unfinished spaces, above pushup ceilings, accessible
pipe tunnels, etc., where pipe is accessible.
CONCRETE
A.
03798614
03/15
Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate all requirements for concrete. All concrete shall be
furnished under the Architectural Divisions of these specifications.
15000 - 10

Phase 2
3.6
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
3.7
LUBRICATION
A.
3.8
The Contractor shall install all equipment in strict accordance with all directions and
recommendations furnished by the manufacturer. Where such directions are in conflict with the
plans and specifications, the Contractor shall report such conflicts to the Engineer who shall
make changes deemed necessary and desirable.
FLUSHING, CLEANING, AND STERILIZING

A.
B.
3.10
The Contractor shall provide all oil and grease for the operating of all equipment until
acceptance. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage to bearings while the
equipment is being operated by him up to the date of acceptance of the equipment. The
Contractor shall protect all bearings and shafts during installation and shall thoroughly grease
the steel shafts to prevent corrosion.
MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTION
A.
3.9
The Contractor shall verify the dimensions and conditions governing work at the project site.
He shall examine adjoining work on which his work is dependent, for perfect efficiency, and
shall report any work, which must be corrected.
Before final connections are made in the piping systems, all piping shall be blown out with air
and then completely washed out with cleaning compounds. The systems shall be flushed for
complete removal of all foreign materials. Furnish all temporary connections, valves, etc.,
required for this purpose.
After flushing, sterilize the domestic water systems with an approved chlorinating agent to
provide a dosage on not less than 50 ppm. After minimum contact period of eight (8) hours, the
system shall be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine is no greater than the city
water.
TESTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
Test all new storm drain, vent and waste lines with standing water test of 12 feet of head. Test
to be held for a minimum of two (2) hours.
Test all new heating water and chilled water piping before connecting to the units at 150 psig
hydrostatic pressure. Test to be held for a minimum of two (2) hours.
Test all new domestic cold, hot and re-circulating hot water service lines at 50 psig above
operating pressure, without exceeding the pressure rating of the piping materials. Test to be
held for a minimum of two (2) hours.
Test fire protection at 200 psig. Test to be held for a minimum of two (2) hours.
Test all new gas lines under 60 psig air pressure. Test to be held for a minimum of two
(2) hours.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Engineer and the local authority having
jurisdiction before covering or insulating. The satisfactory operation of blowers, pumps and
other equipment with moving parts shall be demonstrated to the Engineer. Equipment without
movable parts shall have pressure or other tests performed by the Contractor to demonstrate
satisfactory operation.
15000 - 11

Phase 2
H.
I.
3.11
PAINTING
A.
3.12
C.
D.
E.
F.
All ducts, pipes, equipment, controls, etc., shall be cleaned of plaster and other foreign debris
Before final acceptance, all strainers shall be thoroughly cleaned or replaced, all bearings shall
be oiled or greased and all drains shall be cleaned out and primed. All permanent filters shall be
cleaned; throwaway type filters shall be replaced with new filters.
The systems shall be placed in operation.
The Contractor shall verify that all controls are set to meet operating conditions specified.
1.
Example: Boiler operating control set at 180 F. Limit control set at 200 F.
The Contractor shall verify that all pieces of equipment are operable and that all sequence of
controls are being met.
Contractor to adjust seating through the first (1st) year as required by Engineer.
BALANCING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING THE MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

A.
3.15
The contractor shall attempt to schedule delivery of all large equipment requiring special
openings for installation prior to enclosing of area. Where this is not possible written notice of
required openings which must be provided shall be listed by size and location and submitted to
the General Contractor prior to enclosing of areas involved. Work required to construct
openings and the associated cost of enclosing them shall be done at no additional cost to the
Owner.
PLACING IN OPERATION
A.
B.
3.14
Surfaces of all equipment and material not provided with a factory finish coat shall be
thoroughly cleaned, primed (if not factory primed) and finish coated with a high quality alkyd
industrial enamel of a color chosen by the Owner.
SPECIAL OPENINGS
A.
3.13
Furnish all instruments, pumps, blowers and equipment required for the testing.
Provide written copies of these test reports for inclusion on the Operations and Maintenance
Manuals and submit one copy to Mechanical Engineer.
Balancing the mechanical systems shall be part of this contract, refer to subsequent mechanical
specification section for details. This Contractor is to include in their proposal the cost of
balancing, testing and adjusting.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Contractor shall prepare and provide four (4) copies of operating and maintenance manuals.
Contractor shall deliver four bound sets to the Engineer for approval. Each manual shall be in a
ring binder and shall be indexed with dividers for each section. Delivery of required documents
is a condition of final acceptance.
Each manual shall contain, but not limited to, the following general sections:
1.
Certificates of acceptance from the inspecting authorities.
2.
Waiver of all liens.
3.
Warranties with starting dates and end dates for each pieces of equipment and/or for
each system (warranties shall begin on date of substantial completion and acceptance by
the Owner).
15000 - 12

Phase 2
4.
C.
3.16
INSTRUCTIONS TO THE OWNER

A.
B.
C.
3.17
Names, telephone and fax numbers and addresses of all subcontractors, vendors,
manufacturers representatives, and warranties providers.
5.
Certification letters from each Contractor that each system furnished and installed by that
contractor and/or subcontractors is started-up, balanced, adjusted and checked for proper
operation in accordance with the intent of the contract documents.
6.
Spare parts lists for each piece of equipment.
7.
Lubrication charts showing type of lubrication and application methods and frequencies,
8.
Filter cleaning or replacement schedule (on Contractors letterhead stationary),
9.
Preventative maintenance schedule for checking all items such as belt drives, safety
controls, oil and refrigerant charges, and seasonal changer over recommendations.
Cleaning of all strainers, traps, coils, tower pans, tubes, sprays, etc. (on Contractors
letterhead stationary).
10. Water treatment recommendations and instructions for boiler, towers, etc.
11. Normal operating instructions including a sequence of operations (on Contractors
letterhead stationary).
12. Instructions as to procedures to be followed for emergency situations, such as alarms or
safety items being tripped (on Contractors letterhead stationary).
13. Instruction on who to call for service during guarantee period (on Contractors letterhead
stationary).
14. Approved copy of the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Reports.
15. Copies of As-Built drawings on reproducible vellum as produced by a Xerox or
photographic process.
16. Copies of all approved shop drawing submittals including nameplate date, design
parameters, name, telephone and fax numbers, address of vendor, manufacturers
representative and warrantee provider.
Approval will not be given for final payment until the tests, balancing and operating instruction
portions have been completed.
Contractor shall instruct the Owners operating personnel in the operations and maintenance of
all mechanical systems and equipment. There shall be a minimum of four (4) hours of training.
Contractor shall furnish any special servicing tools required for maintenance.
Contractor shall conduct a demonstration of the installation upon completion and final
acceptance of the work. There shall be a minimum four (4) hour demonstration. Prior to this all
work shall have been completed, tested, balanced and placed in operation. Qualified personnel
must be present at the demonstration to operate all the systems and prove the performance of
the equipment. The schedule for this demonstration shall be coordinated with the Engineer.
The onus is on the Owner to either perform routine maintenance on all of the HVAC and
plumbing equipment installed in this project as per the different manufacturers
recommendations or to hire a routine service provider to maintain the equipment. Maintaining
equipment as per manufacturers recommendations is the best way to achieve the longest
service life and most efficient performance capable for the equipment.
EXCAVATION FOR PIPE AND CONDUIT

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12" higher than top of pipe or
conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
15000 - 13

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
03798614
03/15
Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of
pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of
pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp
objects along trench subgrade. Level bottom of all trenches and cover all PVC pipe with
processed chat.
1.
For pipes and conduit less than 6" in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple-duct
conduit units, hand excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an
undisturbed subgrade.
2.
For pipes and conduit 6" or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to
support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand
backfill.
3.
Excavate trenches 4" deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing
material to allow for bedding course.
Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth for material compacted
by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted
by hand-operated tampers.
All piping and conduit trenches across pavement shall be backfilled with two-sack concrete to
within 12 of finished grade.
Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according
to ASTM D 698:
1.
Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12" of
existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent.
2.
Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6" below subgrade and compact each layer
of backfill or fill material at 92 percent.
3.
Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6" below subgrade and compact
each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent.
Install detectable warning tape above conduits and pipe, 12" below finished grade, except
6" below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
Protection
1.
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion.
Keep free of trash and debris.
2.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially
completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to
subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.
a.
Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect;
reshape and recompact.
3.
Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished
surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
a.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent
work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
Disposal of Surplus and Waste Materials
1.
Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory
soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owners property unless otherwise
directed by Owner.
2.
Repair: Any damage to shrubs, grass or structures shall be repaired to previous condition
by Contractor at no additional expense to Owner.
Bracing and Sheeting: Open cut trenches shall be sheeted and braced as required by OSHA and
the requirements of the State of Texas as necessary for the safety of workmen or the protection
of property.
END OF SECTION
15000 - 14

Phase 2
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3
This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement
other Division 15 Sections.
1.
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2.
Concrete equipment base construction requirements.
3.
Equipment nameplate data requirements.
4.
Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment is specified in Division 15
Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" and Identification for
HVAC Piping and Equipment.
5.
Nonshrink grout for equipment installations.
6.
Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports.
7.
Installation requirements common to equipment specification Sections.
8.
Cutting and patching.
9.
Touchup painting and finishing.
Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in piping system Sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.4

Pipe, pipe fittings, and piping include tube, tube fittings, and tubing.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below the roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.
Exposed Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
Exposed Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
Concealed Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
Concealed Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
SUBMITTALS
A.
03798614
03/15
General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
15050 - 1

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.5
Product data for following piping specialties:

1.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
Samples of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
Coordination drawings for access panel and door locations.
Prepare coordination drawings according to Division 1 Section "Submittals" to a 1/4 inch
equals 1 foot (1:48) scale or larger. Detail major elements, components, and systems of
mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and
building components. Show space requirements for installation and access. Show where
sequence and coordination of installations are important to the efficient flow of the Work.
Include the following:
1.
Proposed locations of piping, ductwork, equipment, and materials. Include the
following:
a.
Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve stem
movement.
b.
Planned duct systems layout, including elbow radii and duct accessories.
c.
Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
d.
Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including space for
equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
e.
Equipment service connections and support details.
f.
Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
g.
Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
2.
Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the
building during construction.
3.
Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings
and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
4.
Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and inlets,
light fixtures, communication systems components, sprinklers, and other ceilingmounted items.
5.
Any costs incurred by the Contractor for coordination issues amongst the various trades
due to the failure to supply coordination drawings will be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor and will be of no cost to the Owner. Any spatial conflicts revealed by the
coordination drawings shall have a solution proposed by the Contractor and submitted
to the Engineer for approval. Issues which may arise concerning variations from the
original design will be evaluated on a case-by-case basis.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.
Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series "Code for Pressure Piping."
2.
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of
identification devices.
Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and
ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and
equipment spaces are increased. No additional costs will be approved for these increases, if
15050 - 2

Phase 2
larger equipment is approved. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of the equipment are
specified, the equipment must meet the design requirements and commissioning requirements.
1.6

A.
B.
C.
D.
1.7
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end-caps. Maintain end-caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. When stored
inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor.
Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
Protect stored plastic pipes from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components.

Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to
allow for mechanical installations.
Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning
prior to closing in the building.
Coordinate connection of electrical services.
Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities
and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service
companies, and controlling agencies.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where mechanical items requiring access
are concealed behind finished surfaces.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting where
devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices prior to installing acoustical ceilings
and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

A.
B.
2.2
Refer to individual piping system specification Sections for pipe and fitting materials and
joining methods.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
03798614
03/15
Refer to individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 for special joining
materials not listed below.
15050 - 3

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
2.3
Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for the chemical and thermal conditions of the piping
system contents.
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, except
where thickness or specific material is indicated.
a.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125 cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b.
Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250 cast-iron and steel flanges.
2.
ASME B16.20 for grooved, ring-joint, steel flanges.
3.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, except where other thickness is
indicated; and full-face or ring type, except where type is indicated.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, except where other material is indicated.
Plastic Pipe Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, except where other type or material is indicated.
Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32.
1.
Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Tin (approximately 95 percent) and silver (approximately
5 percent), having 0.10 percent lead content.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
1.
BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys.
2.
BAg1: Silver alloy.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvents complying with the following:
1.
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS): ASTM D 2235.
2.
Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC): ASTM F 493.
3.
Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC): ASTM D 2564.
4.
PVC to ABS Transition: Made to requirements of ASTM D 3138, color other than
orange.
Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.
Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon steel
bolts and nuts.
Couplings: Iron body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of plain-end
pressure pipes.
1.
Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.
2.
Followers: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M), Grade 32510 or ASTM A 536 ductile iron.
3.
Gaskets: Rubber.
4.
Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.
5.
Finish: Enamel paint.
PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
03798614
03/15
Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type where required to
conceal protruding fittings and sleeves.
1.
Inside Diameter: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation.
2.
Outside Diameter: Completely cover opening.
3.
Cast Brass: One-piece, with setscrew.
a.
Finish: Rough brass.
b.
Finish: Polished chrome plate.
4.
Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and setscrew.
a.
Finish: Rough brass.
b.
Finish: Polished chrome plate.
5.
Stamped Steel: One-piece, with setscrew and chrome-plated finish.
15050 - 4

Phase 2
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Stamped Steel: One-piece, with spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, setscrew, and chrome-plated finish.
Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.
Stamped Steel: Split plate, with exposed-rivet hinge, setscrew, and chrome-plated
finish.
10. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with exposed-rivet hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated
finish.
11. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.
Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar
metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.
1.
Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld
neck end types and matching piping system materials.
2.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
3.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly for 250-psig minimum working
pressure at a 180 F temperature.
4.
Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly for 150- or 300-psig
minimum pressure to suit system pressures.
5.
Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly,
full-face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or
polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
a.
Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or
300-psig minimum working pressure to suit system pressures.
6.
Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling, having inert and noncorrosive,
thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300-psig minimum working pressure at
225 F temperature.
7.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple, having inert and noncorrosive
thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and
300-psig working pressure at 225 F temperature.
Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular, watertight mechanical type. Components include
interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and
sleeve. Connecting bolts and pressure plates cause rubber-sealing elements to expand when
tightened.
Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
1.
Steel Sheet Metal: 24-gage or heavier galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
2.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
3.
Cast-Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, having
plain ends and integral water stop, except where other features are specified.
4.
Wall Penetration Systems: Wall sleeve assembly, consisting of housing, gaskets, and
pipe sleeve, with 1 mechanical-joint end conforming to AWWA C110 and 1 plain
pipe-sleeve end.
a.
Penetrating Pipe Deflection: 5 percent without leakage.
b.
Housing: Ductile-iron casting having waterstop and anchor ring, with ductile-iron
gland, steel studs and nuts, and rubber gasket conforming to AWWA C111, of
housing and gasket size as required to fit penetrating pipe.
c.
Pipe Sleeve: AWWA C151, ductile-iron pipe.
d.
Housing-to-Sleeve Gasket: Rubber or neoprene push-on type of manufacturer's
design.
5.
Cast-Iron Sleeve Fittings: Commercially made sleeve having an integral clamping
flange, with clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
15050 - 5

Phase 2
a.
2.4
GROUT
A.
2.5
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.

1.
Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout,
nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
2.
Design Mix: 5000-psi 28-day compressive strength.
3.
Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.
ACCESS DOORS
A.
Flush mounted steel access doors with 16 ga. frame and 14 ga. Panel. Prime coat finish.
Concealed spring hinges, screwdriver cam-lock. Doors in fire rated surfaces shall be U.L.
listed and labeled. Doors to be Milcor or approved equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING SYSTEMS COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
03798614
03/15
General: Install piping as described below, except where system Sections specify otherwise.
Individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 specify piping installation
requirements unique to the piping system.
General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate
general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements
were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated, except where deviations to layout are approved on
coordination drawings.
Install piping at indicated slope.
Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls.
Diagonal runs are prohibited, except where indicated.
Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow
sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.
Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation.
Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Install couplings according to manufacturer's printed instructions.
Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board
partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following:
1.
Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast-brass, one-piece, with setscrew, and polished
chrome-plated finish. Use split-casting escutcheons, where required, for existing piping.
2.
Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast-brass or stamped-steel, with setscrew.
3.
Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
15050 - 6

Phase 2
4.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
03798614
03/15
Insulated Piping: Cast-brass or stamped-steel, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and
chrome-plated finish.
5.
Piping in Utility Areas: Cast-brass or stamped-steel, with setscrew or spring clips.
Sleeves are required for core drilled holes.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, concrete floor and roof
slabs, and where indicated.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
concrete floor and roof slabs, and where indicated.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 4 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve
fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring where specified.
2.
Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses.
3.
Install large enough sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6 inches.
b.
Steel Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6 inches and larger that penetrate gypsumboard partitions.
c.
Cast-Iron Sleeve Fittings: For floors having membrane waterproofing. Secure
flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend
sleeve to 4 inches above finished floor level.
1)
Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
4.
Except for below-grade wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealers."
Above Grade, Exterior Wall, and Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for
installation of mechanical seals.
1.
Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches.
2.
Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves 6 inches and larger.
3.
Assemble and install mechanical seals according to manufacturer's printed instructions.
Below Grade, Exterior Wall, and Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves.
Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals.
1.
Below Grade, Exterior Wall, and Pipe Penetrations: Install ductile-iron wall penetration
system sleeves according to manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing in.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements.
Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in
individual piping system Sections.
1.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
3.
Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS "Soldering Manual," Chapter 22
"The Soldering of Pipe and Tube."
4.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS "Brazing Manual" in the "Pipe and
Tube" chapter.
15050 - 7

Phase 2
5.
W.
3.2
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full inside diameter. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
a.
Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of
internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
b.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads (except where
dry seal threading is specified).
c.
Align threads at point of assembly.
d.
Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being
threaded.
e.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings having threads that are corroded
or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
6.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12 "Recommended Practices
and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe" using qualified processes and
welding operators according to the "Quality Assurance" Article.
7.
Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size,
type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned.
Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and
gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten
bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench.
8.
Plastic Pipe and Fitting Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by
wiping with clean clothe or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the
following standards:
a.
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe handling of solvent-cement and primers.
b.
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS): ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661.
c.
Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC): ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493.
d.
Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure Application: ASTM D 2672.
e.
Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure Application: ASTM D 2855.
f.
PVC to ABS (Non-Pressure) Transition: Procedure and solvent cement described
in ASTM D 3138.
9.
Plastic Pipe and Fitting Heat-Fusion Joints: Prepare pipe and fittings and join with heatfusion equipment according to manufacturer's printed instructions.
a.
Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Butt joining.
b.
Plain-End Pipe and Socket-Type Fittings: Socket joining.
Piping Connections: Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified
below.
1.
Install unions in piping 2 inches and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment having a 2-inch or smaller threaded pipe
connection.
2.
Install flanges in piping 2-1/2 inches and larger adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection.
3.
Dry Piping Systems (Gas): Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
4.
Wet Piping Systems (Water): Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect
piping materials of dissimilar metals.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A.
03798614
03/15
Install equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights are not
indicated.
15050 - 8

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
ACCESS DOORS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.4
Construct concrete equipment bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger
than supported unit in both directions. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting
templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength
concrete and reinforcement.
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A.
B.
3.7
Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting requirements.

Damage and Touch Up: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials
and procedures to match original factory finish.
CONCRETE BASES
A.
3.6
Furnish an access door for each pipe chase for each floor. This includes both toilet plumbing
chases and pipe riser chases. Access doors assembly to be size 16 x 16.
Also, furnish access doors in all non-removable ceiling and in partitions and walls where
necessary access to plumbing cleanouts, shock absorbers, fire dampers, manual dampers,
valves and other mechanical devices requiring access. Size these as required for access with
minimum size of 12 x 12.
Any access doors furnished for installation in fire rated surfaces or assembly shall carry an
approved fire rating for that use.
Any access doors furnished for installation in glued on acoustical surfaces or assembly shall
have recessed door to allow installation of tiles.
Provide all access doors to the General Contractor for them to construct into the building.
PAINTING AND FINISHING

A.
B.
3.5
Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only
in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Architect.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, except where otherwise indicated.
Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of
interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.
Install equipment giving right-of-way to piping systems installed at a required slope.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code Steel."
ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor
mechanical materials and equipment.
Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to
view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting wood members.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
15050 - 9

Phase 2
3.8
DEMOLITION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.9

A.
B.
3.10
Disconnect, demolish, and remove work specified under Division 15 and as indicated.
Where pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove
damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality.
Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety.
Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried pipe abandoned in place, 2 inches beyond the face
of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish.
Removal: Remove indicated equipment from the Project site.
Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational
equipment indicated for relocation.
Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for
mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved.
Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
GROUTING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Install nonmetallic nonshrink grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and
other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's printed
instructions.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
Provide forms for placement of grout, as required.
Avoid air entrapment when placing grout.
Place grout to completely fill equipment bases.
Place grout on concrete bases to provide a smooth bearing surface for equipment.
Place grout around anchors.
Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
15050 - 10

Phase 2
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.3


Hanger rods.
Inserts.
Flashing.
Sleeves.
Formed steel channel.
Firestopping relating to plumbing work.
Firestopping accessories.
Equipment bases and supports.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
American Society of Mechanical Engineers:

1.
ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
2.
ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping.
3.
ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
ASTM International:
1.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
2.
ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials.
3.
ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire
Stops.
4.
ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
5.
ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
American Welding Society:
1.
AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code Steel.
FM Global:
1.
FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By
Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation.
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:
1.
MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.
2.
MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
3.
MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

AND EQUIPMENT
15060 - 1

Phase 2
F.
G.
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.5
B.
Firestopping Materials: ASTM E119, ASTM E814, UL 263, and UL 1479 to achieve fire
ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating.
1.
Ratings may be 3-hours for firestopping in through-penetrations of 4-hour fire rated
assemblies unless otherwise required by applicable codes.
Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components.
A.
B.
1.7
Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or

assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest
movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.6
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:

1.
UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
2.
3.
UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
4.
UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
5.
UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):
1.
WH - Certification Listings.
Firestopping: Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning
characteristics.
Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction
indicating approval of materials used.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15

Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location including critical dimensions, sizes,
and pipe hanger and support locations and detail of trapeze hangers.
Product Data:
1.
Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.
2.
Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation
criteria.
Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items,
and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of
adjacent assembly.
Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support
hangers. Indicate calculations used to determine load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple
pipe, and riser support hangers.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:
1.
Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components.
2.
Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

AND EQUIPMENT
15060 - 2

Phase 2
H.
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.9
B.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section

with minimum three years documented experience.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three
A.
B.
1.11
Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with
0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and
temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1 hour.
1.
Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1 hour.
2.
Floor and Roof Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated
on Drawings, but not less than 1 hour.
a.
Floor Penetrations Within Wall Cavities: T-Rating is not required.
Through Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor and Roof Assemblies:
Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion.
1.
Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items
connecting maximum of three stories.
2.
Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for
penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories.
Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: ASTM E1966 or
UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for assembly in which
joint is installed.
Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM E119 with 0.10 inch
water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant rating as
indicated on Drawings for floor assembly.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
Perform Work in accordance with applicable authority for welding hanger and support
attachments to building structure.
Perform Work in accordance with State of Texas standard.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.10
Firestopping Engineering Judgments: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed

designs, submit judgments by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to
authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements.


A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing,

and protecting products.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
identification.

AND EQUIPMENT
15060 - 3

Phase 2
C.
1.12
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.13
Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on

site.
Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air
is below 60 F.
Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after
installation of firestopping materials.
Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.14
Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing
in original packaging.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for pipe hangers and supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Plumbing Piping DWV:

1.
Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, and MSS SP89.
2.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron or carbon steel, adjustable
swivel, split ring.
3.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
5.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook.
6.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought
steel clamp.
7.
Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
8.
Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and
concrete pier or steel support.
9.
Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, carbon-steel adjustable, ring.
Plumbing Piping Water:
1.
2.
swivel, split ring.
3.
Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4.
Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
5.
Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll,
double hanger.
6.
7.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Steel channels
with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.

AND EQUIPMENT
15060 - 4

Phase 2
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
2.2
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.3
C.
Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet
Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
Sealant: Acrylic.
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A.
2.7
Metal Flashing: 26 gage thick galvanized steel.

Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel.
Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.
Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
SLEEVES
A.
B.
2.6
Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded
connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to
forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
FLASHING
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.5
Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded.
INSERTS
A.
2.4
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook.
steel clamp.
Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and
wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.
Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe
saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable cast iron roll and
stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, Carbon-steel ring.
Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber

links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with
bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened,
providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.
FORMED STEEL CHANNEL

A.
03798614
03/15
Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center.

AND EQUIPMENT
15060 - 5

Phase 2
2.8
FIRESTOPPING
A.
2.9
Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable

as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide
only one type for each similar application.
1.
Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single or multiple component
silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant.
2.
Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single or Multiple component foam compound.
3.
Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound
mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers.
4.
Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral or ceramic fiber
stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping.
5.
Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible
fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with
collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops.
6.
Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure
to surface heat gain.
7.
Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.
FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces

and suitable for required fire ratings.
Dam Material: Permanent:
1.
Mineral fiberboard.
2.
Mineral fiber matting.
3.
Sheet metal.
4.
Alumina silicate fire board.
Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and
other devices required to position and retain materials in place.
General:
1.
Furnish UL listed products.
2.
Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated.
Non-Rated Surfaces:
1.
Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or
ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed.
2.
For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish mechanical sealing device to
continuously fill annular space between piping and cored opening or water-stop type
wall sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before

starting work.
Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.
Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.

AND EQUIPMENT
15060 - 6

Phase 2
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
INSTALLATION INSERTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.4
Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.

Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.
Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches and
larger.
Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt
with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.
INSTALLATION PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
3.5
Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting
bond of firestopping material.
Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.
Install damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
Obtain permission from Architect before using powder-actuated anchors.
Do not drill or cut structural members.
Install in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.5, ASME 31.9, ASTM F708,
MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89.
Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing
between hangers.
Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.
Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze
hangers.
Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl
spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of
insulation.
INSTALLATION EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending
6 inches beyond supported equipment.
Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for
mounting and anchoring equipment.
Construct supports of formed steel channel. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to
structure.
Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.

AND EQUIPMENT
15060 - 7

Phase 2
3.6
INSTALLATION FLASHING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.7
INSTALLATION SLEEVES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.8
Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping penetrates weather or
waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface
with lead worked 1 inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with
24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and
caulk, metal counter-flash, and seal.
Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on
sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device.
Seal floor, shower, and mop sink drains watertight to adjacent materials.
Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars
above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.
Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals.

Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.
Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.
Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe and adjacent
work with firestopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or
escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
INSTALLATION FIRESTOPPING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
03798614
03/15
Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating
sleeves, piping and other items, requiring firestopping.
Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and
substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.
Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke
rating, to uniform density and texture.
Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling cavities and spaces.
Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials.
Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured.
Fire Rated Surface:
1.
Seal opening at floor, wall, partition, ceiling, and roof as follows:
a.
Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on
both sides of building element.
b.
Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building
element.
c.
Pack void with backing material.
d.
Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet
fire rating of structure penetrated.

AND EQUIPMENT
15060 - 8

Phase 2
G.
3.9

A.
B.
3.10
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.

Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

A.
B.
3.12
Section 01700 Execution Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting, and

balancing.
Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.
CLEANING
A.
B.
3.11
Non-Rated Surfaces:
1.
Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition, floor, ceiling, and roof opening
as follows:
a.
b.
element.
c.
Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer.
2.
Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical sealing
device to size of piping and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.
Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations at clean rooms, laboratories, computer
rooms, telecommunication rooms, data rooms, and special procedure/treatment
rooms. Apply sealant to both sides of penetration to completely fill annular space
between sleeve and conduit.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.

Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
SCHEDULES
PIPE HANGER SPACING
PIPE MATERIAL
ABS (All sizes)
Aluminum (All sizes)
Brass
Cast Iron (All Sizes)
Cast Iron (All Sizes) with 10 foot length of pipe
CPVC, 1 inch and smaller
CPVC, 1-1/4 inches and larger
Copper Tube, 1-1/4 inches and smaller
Copper Tube, 1-1/2 inches and larger
Fiberglass
Glass
Polybutylene
03798614
03/15
MAXIMUM
HANGER SPACING
Feet
4
10
HANGER ROD
DIAMETER
Inches
3/8
1/2
5
10
3
4
6
10
4
8
2.67
5/8
5/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/8

AND EQUIPMENT
15060 - 9

Phase 2
PIPE MATERIAL
Polypropylene
PVC (All Sizes)
Steel, 3 inches and smaller
Steel, 4 inches and larger
MAXIMUM
HANGER SPACING
Feet
4
4
12
12
HANGER ROD
DIAMETER
Inches
3/8
3/8
1/2
5/8
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15

AND EQUIPMENT
15060 - 10

Phase 2
SECTION 15061
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
1.3


Hanger rods.
Inserts.
Flashing.
Equipment curbs.
Sleeves.
Formed steel channel.
Firestopping relating to HVAC work.
Firestopping accessories.
Equipment bases and supports.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
03798614
03/15

1.
2.
ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping.
3.
ASTM International:
1.
ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials.
2.
ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire
Stops.
3.
ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
4.
ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
1.
AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
FM Global:
1.
FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By
Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation.
1.
2.
3.
1.
UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
2.
15061 - 1

Phase 2
G.
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.5
B.
Firestopping Materials: ASTM E119, ASTM E814, UL 263, and UL 1479 to achieve fire
ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating.
1.
Ratings may be 3-hours for firestopping in through-penetrations of 4-hour fire rated
assemblies unless otherwise required by applicable codes.
Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components.
A.
B.
1.7
Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or

assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest
movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.6
3.
UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
4.
UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
5.
Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):
1.
WH - Certification Listings.
Firestopping: Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning
characteristics.
Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction
indicating approval of materials used.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
03798614
03/15

Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location including critical dimensions, sizes,
and pipe hanger and support locations and detail of trapeze hangers.
Product Data:
1.
Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.
2.
Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation
criteria.
Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items,
and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of
adjacent assembly.
Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support
hangers. Indicate calculations used to determine load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple
pipe, and riser support hangers.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:
1.
Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components.
2.
Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions.
Firestopping Engineering Judgments: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed
designs, submit judgments by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to
authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements.
15061 - 2

Phase 2
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.9
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
B.
1.10
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section

A.
B.
1.11
Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with
0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and
temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1 hour.
1.
Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1 hour.
2.
Floor and Roof Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated
on Drawings, but not less than 1 hour.
a.
Floor Penetrations Within Wall Cavities: T-Rating is not required.
Through Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor and Roof Assemblies:
Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion.
1.
Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items
connecting maximum of three stories.
2.
Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for
penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories.
Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: ASTM E1966 or
UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on Drawings for assembly in which
joint is installed.
Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM E119 with 0.10 inch
water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire resistant rating as
indicated on Drawings for floor assembly.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.


A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15

identification.
Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing
in original packaging.
15061 - 3

Phase 2
1.12
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.13
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.14

site.
Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air
is below 60 F.
Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after
installation of firestopping materials.
Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
WARRANTY
A.
B.

Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for pipe hangers and supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A.
2.2
Hydronic Piping:
1.
2.
swivel, split ring.
3.
Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4.
Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
5.
Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll,
double hanger.
6.
7.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Steel channels
with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.
8.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hooks.
9.
steel clamp.
10. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and
wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.
11. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
12. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe
saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable cast iron roll and
stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
15. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, carbon steel ring.
ACCESSORIES
A.
03798614
03/15
Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded.
15061 - 4

Phase 2
2.3
INSERTS
A.
2.4
FLASHING
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.5
C.
D.
E.
Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber

links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with
bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened,
providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.
FORMED STEEL CHANNEL

A.
2.9
Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet
Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.
Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood.
Sealant: Acrylic.
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A.
2.8
Fabrication: Welded 18 gage galvanized steel shell and base, mitered 3 inch cant, variable
step to match roof insulation, 1-1/2 inch thick insulation, factory installed wood nailer.
SLEEVES
A.
B.
2.7
Metal Flashing: 26 gage thick galvanized steel.

Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel.
Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.
Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
EQUIPMENT CURBS
A.
2.6
Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded
connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to
forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center.
FIRESTOPPING
A.
03798614
03/15
Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable

as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide
only one type for each similar application.
1.
Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single or multiple component
silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant.
2.
Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single or multiple component foam compound.
3.
Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound
mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers.
4.
Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral or ceramic fiber
stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping.
15061 - 5

Phase 2
5.
6.
7.
2.10
Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible

fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with
collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops.
Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure
to surface heat gain.
Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.
FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces

and suitable for required fire ratings.
Dam Material: Permanent:
1.
Mineral fiberboard.
2.
Mineral fiber matting.
3.
Sheet metal.
4.
Alumina silicate fire board.
Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and
other devices required to position and retain materials in place.
General:
1.
Furnish UL listed products.
2.
Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated.
Non-Rated Surfaces:
1.
Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or
ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed.
2.
For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish mechanical sealing device to
continuously fill annular space between piping and cored opening or water-stop type
wall sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
3.2

starting work.
Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.
Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting
bond of firestopping material.
Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.
Install damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
Obtain permission from Architect before using powder-actuated anchors.
Do not drill or cut structural members.
15061 - 6

Phase 2
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.4
INSTALLATION PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
3.5
Install in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.5, ASME 31.9, ASTM F708,
MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89.
Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
Support vertical piping at every floor.
Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze
hangers.
Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl
spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
insulation.
INSTALLATION EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.6
Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.

Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
larger.
Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending
6 inches beyond supported equipment.
Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for
mounting and anchoring equipment.
Construct supports of formed steel channel. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to
structure.
Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.
INSTALLATION FLASHING
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Provide flexible flashing and metal Counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate
weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms for
sound control.
Provide curbs for roof installations 14 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Flash
and counter-flash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Attach Counterflashing to equipment
and lap base flashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints.
Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars
above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.
15061 - 7

Phase 2
3.7
INSTALLATION SLEEVES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.8
Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals.

Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.
Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.
Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe
or duct and adjacent work with firestopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close
fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
INSTALLATION FIRESTOPPING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating
sleeves, piping, ductwork, and other items, requiring firestopping.
Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and
substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.
Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke
rating to uniform density and texture.
Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling cavities and spaces.
Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials.
Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured.
Fire Rated Surface:
1.
Seal opening at floor, wall, partition, ceiling, and roof as follows:
a.
b.
element.
c.
Pack void with backing material.
d.
Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet
fire rating of structure penetrated.
Non-Rated Surfaces:
1.
Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition, floor, ceiling, and roof opening
as follows:
a.
b.
element.
c.
Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer.
2.
Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical sealing
device to size of piping and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.
Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations at clean rooms, laboratories, computer
rooms, telecommunication rooms, data rooms, and special procedure/treatment
rooms. Apply sealant to both sides of penetration to completely fill annular space
between sleeve and conduit.
15061 - 8

Phase 2
3.9

A.
B.
3.10
CLEANING
A.
B.
3.11

Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

A.
B.
3.12
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting, and

balancing.
Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.

Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
SCHEDULES
A.
Copper and Steel Pipe Hanger Spacing:
PIPE SIZE
Inches
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2 (Note 2)
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
03798614
03/15
COPPER
TUBING
MAXIMUM
HANGER
SPACING
Feet
5
5
6
7
8
8
9
10
12
13
14
16
18
19
22
23
25
27
28
STEEL PIPE
MAXIMUM
HANGER
SPACING
Feet
7
7
7
7
9
10
11
12
14
16
17
19
22
23
25
27
28
30
32
COPPER
TUBING
HANGER
ROD
DIAMETER
Inches
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
5/8
3/4
3/4
3/4
7/8
7/8
1
1
1-1/4
STEEL PIPE
HANGER
ROD
DIAMETER
Inches
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
5/8
5/8
3/4
3/4
7/8
7/8
1
1
1
1-1/4
1-1/4
15061 - 9

Phase 2
B.
Plastic and Ductile Iron Pipe Hanger Spacing:
PIPE MATERIAL
ABS (All sizes)
FRP (All Sizes)
Ductile Iron (Note 2)
PVC (All Sizes)
C.
D.
MAXIMUM
HANGER SPACING
Feet
4
4
HANGER ROD
DIAMETER
Inches
3/8
3/8
3/8
Note 1: Refer to manufacturers recommendations for grooved end piping systems.

Note 2: 20 feet maximum spacing, minimum of one hanger for each pipe section close to
joint behind bell. Provide hanger at each change of direction and each branch connection.
For pipe sizes 6 inches and smaller, subjected to loadings other than weight of pipe and
contents, limit span to maximum spacing for water service steel pipe.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
15061 - 10

Phase 2
SECTION 15075
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.3
B.

1.
ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
National Fire Protection Association:
1.
NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.5
Nameplates.
Tags.
Stencils.
Pipe markers.
Ceiling tacks.
Labels.
Lockout devices.
Provide all plumbing identification to Owners standards within the guidelines of this
Section. Verify exact Owner standards at project site prior to bidding.
REFERENCES
A.
1.4


Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for
mechanical identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number,
location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special
procedures, and installation.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag
numbers.
15075 - 1

Phase 2
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
B.
1.8
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section

A.
B.
1.9
Conform to NFPA 99 requirements for labeling and identification of medical gas piping
systems and accessories.
Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and
accessories.

FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NAMEPLATES
A.
2.2
TAGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light
contrasting background color.
Plastic Tags:
1.
Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter or square.
Metal Tags:
1.
Stainless Steel with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with
finished edges.
Information Tags:
1.
Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size
3-1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties.
Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location plastic laminated.
STENCILS
A.
03798614
03/15
Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:

1.
Up to 2 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1/2 inch high letters.
2.
2-1/2 to 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-inch high letters.
3.
Over 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-3/4 inches high letters.
4.
Ductwork and Equipment: 1-3/4 inches high letters.
15075 - 2

Phase 2
2.4
PIPE MARKERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.5
CEILING TACKS
A.
B.
2.6
Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color-coded head.

Color code as per Owner standards. Verify exact requirements on site.
LABELS
A.
2.7
Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.

Plastic Pipe Markers:
1.
Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe
covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.
Plastic Tape Pipe Markers:
1.
Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed
markings.
Plastic Underground Pipe Markers:
1.
Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by
4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
Description: Aluminum, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive backed with printed
identification.
LOCKOUT DEVICES
A.
B.
Lockout Hasps:
1.
Anodized aluminum hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 7-1/4 x
3 inches.
Valve Lockout Devices:
1.
Plastic device preventing access to valve operator, accepting lock shackle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
B.
3.2
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

Prepare surfaces in accordance with Division 9 for stencil painting.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
03798614
03/15
Apply stencil painting in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.
Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.
Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location.
Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above
buried pipe.
Install piping identification on medical gas systems.
Identify water heaters, pumps, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates
or stencil painting. Identify in-line pumps and other small devices with tags.
15075 - 3

Phase 2
I.
J.
K.
L.
Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic
nameplates.
Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers or stenciled painting.
Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and
pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to
exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at
each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of
panel closest to equipment.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
15075 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 15076
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.3
D.
E.

Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for
mechanical identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number,
location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special
procedures, and installation.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.6

1.
ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.5
Nameplates.
Tags.
Stencils.
Pipe markers.
Ceiling tacks.
Labels.
Lockout devices.
Provide all plumbing identification to Owners standards within the guidelines of this
Section. Verify exact Owner standards at project site prior to bidding.
REFERENCES
A.
1.4


Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag
numbers.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and
accessories.
15076 - 1

Phase 2
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
B.
1.8
A.
B.
1.9


FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NAMEPLATES
A.
2.2
TAGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light
contrasting background color.
Plastic Tags:
1.
Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter.
Metal Tags:
1.
Stainless Steel with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with
finished edges.
Information Tags:
1.
Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size
3-1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties.
Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location in anodized aluminum
frame.
STENCILS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:

1.
Up to 2 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1/2 inch high letters.
2.
2-1/2 to 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-inch high letters.
3.
Over 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-3/4 inches high letters.
4.
Ductwork and Equipment: 1-3/4 inches high letters.
Stencil Paint: Semi-gloss enamel, colors and lettering size conforming to ASME A13.1.
15076 - 2

Phase 2
2.4
PIPE MARKERS
A.
B.
C.
2.5
CEILING TACKS
A.
B.
2.6
Description: Aluminum, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive backed with printed
identification.
UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A.
2.8
Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color-coded head.

Sample color code as follows. Verify Owners standard at project site.
1.
HVAC equipment: Yellow.
2.
Fire dampers/smoke dampers: Red.
3.
Plumbing valves: Green.
4.
Heating/cooling valves: Blue.
LABELS
A.
2.7
Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.

Plastic Pipe Markers:
1.
Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe
covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.
Plastic Tape Pipe Markers:
1.
Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed
markings.
Description: Polyethylene tape with metallic core for detection and location of piping with
metal detector resistant to acids, alkalis and other soil components.
1.
Size: 0.004 inch; 6 inches wide.
2.
Service Marking: Printed text as selected by Architect/Engineer in contrasting color
and repeated at maximum 40 inches intervals.
LOCKOUT DEVICES
A.
B.
Lockout Hasps:
1.
Anodized aluminum hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 7-1/4 x
3 inches.
Valve Lockout Devices:
1.
Plastic device preventing access to valve operator, accepting lock shackle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
B.
3.2
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Apply stencil painting in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.
15076 - 3

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.
Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location.
Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above
buried pipe.
Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment
devices with plastic nameplates or stencil painting. Identify in-line pumps and other small
devices with tags.
Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic
nameplates.
Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags.
Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.
Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers or stenciled painting.
Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and
pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to
exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at
each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
For exposed natural gas lines other than steel pipe, attach yellow pipe labels with "GAS" in
black lettering, at maximum 5 foot spacing.
Identify ductwork with stenciled painting. Identify with air handling unit identification
number and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of
penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate
in corner of panel closest to equipment.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
15076 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 15080
PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3

Plumbing piping insulation, jackets and accessories.

Plumbing equipment insulation, jackets and accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
03798614
03/15
ASTM International:
1.
ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel
Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General
Applications.
2.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic
Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
3.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet
and Plate.
4.
ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet
and Plate (Metric).
5.
ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
6.
ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting
Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
7.
ASTM C450 - Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting
Covers for NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging.
8.
ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal
Insulation.
9.
ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.
10. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
11. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation
for Commercial and Industrial Applications.
12. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation.
13. ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal
Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System).
14. ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular
Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation.
15. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal
Insulation.
16. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact
with Austenitic Stainless Steel.
PLUMBING INSULATION
15080 - 1

Phase 2
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
B.
C.
D.
B.

Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three
A.
B.
1.8
Test pipe insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke
developed index of not exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84.
Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for inner and outer
diameters.
Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.7

Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and
thickness for each service, and location.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature
indicating proper installation procedures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing

Materials for Thermal Insulation.
ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor
Retarders for Thermal Insulation.
ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe, Schedule 40, 80, and 120.
Materials.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials.


A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15

identification, including product density and thickness.
Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage,
by storing in original wrapping.
PLUMBING INSULATION
15080 - 2

Phase 2
1.9
A.
B.
C.
1.10
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.11

site.
Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range
Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum period of
24 hours.
WARRANTY
A.
B.

Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for manmade fiber.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE INSULATION
A.
2.2
TYPE P-1: ASTM C547, molded glass fiber pipe insulation.

1.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 850 degrees F.
3.
Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type I, factory applied reinforced foil kraft
with self-sealing adhesive joints.
4.
Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
PIPE INSULATION JACKETS

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Vapor Retarder Jacket:

1.
ASTM C921, white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film.
2.
Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perms.
PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket:
1.
Product Description: ASTM D1785, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet
material, off-white color.
2.
Thickness: 15 mil.
3.
Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
Aluminum Pipe Jacket:
1.
ASTM B209.
2.
Thickness: 0.025 inch thick sheet.
3.
Finish: Smooth.
4.
Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
5.
Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective
liner.
6.
Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
PLUMBING INSULATION
15080 - 3

Phase 2
2.3
PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.4
EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A.
2.5
Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.

Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter and smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield.
MSS SP-69, Type 40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness.
Piping 2 inches diameter and larger: Wood insulation saddle, hard maple. Inserts length:
not less than 6 inches long, matching thickness and contour of adjoining insulation.
Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with aluminum single
piece construction with self-adhesive closure. Thickness to match pipe insulation.
Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM C449/
C449M.
Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
TYPE E-2: ASTM C612; glass fiber, rigid board, noncombustible with factory applied
kraft aluminum foil jacket.
1.
2.
3.
Density: 3.0 pound per cubic foot.
4.
EQUIPMENT INSULATION JACKETS

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
PVC Plastic Equipment Jacket:

1.
Product Description: ASTM D1785, sheet material, off-white color.
2.
Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F.
3.
Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.
4.
5.
Thickness: 15 mil.
6.
Aluminum Equipment Jacket:
1.
ASTM B209.
2.
3.
Finish: Smooth.
4.
5.
liner.
6.
Canvas Equipment Jacket: UL listed, 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton fabric with fire
retardant lagging adhesive compatible with insulation.
1.
2.
PLUMBING INSULATION
15080 - 4

Phase 2
2.6
EQUIPMENT INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM C449/
C449M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
3.2

conditions.
Verify piping and equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
INSTALLATION PIPING SYSTEMS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and cover seams in least
visible locations.
Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies
having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when
continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:
1.
Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible
connections, and expansion joints.
2.
Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factoryapplied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and
butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and
seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic.
3.
Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and
thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or
PVC fitting covers.
Glass Fiber Board Insulation:
1.
Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation.
Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
2.
Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth
surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement.
3.
Cover wire mesh or bands with cement to a thickness to remove surface
irregularities.
Hot Piping Systems less than 140 degrees F:
1.
Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch
expanding staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied
jacket and butt strips or both.
2.
Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as
adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
3.
Do not insulate unions and flanges at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of
insulation at such locations.
PLUMBING INSULATION
15080 - 5

Phase 2
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
3.3
Inserts and Shields:

1.
Piping 1-1/2 inches Diameter and Smaller: Install galvanized steel shield between
pipe hanger and insulation.
2.
Piping 2 inches Diameter and Larger: Install insert between support shield and
piping and under finish jacket.
a.
Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour
matching adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.
b.
Insert Material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned
temperature range and service.
3.
Piping Supported by Roller Type Pipe Hangers: Install galvanized steel shield
between roller and inserts.
Insulation Terminating Points:
1.
Coil Branch Piping 1 inch and Smaller: Terminate hot water piping at union
upstream of the coil control valve.
2.
Chilled Water Coil Branch Piping: Insulate chilled water piping and associated
components up to coil connection.
3.
Condensate Piping: Insulate entire piping system and components to prevent
condensation.
Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation:
1.
Push insulation on to piping.
2.
Miter joints at elbows.
3.
Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturers recommended adhesive.
4.
When application requires multiple layers, apply with joints staggered.
5.
Insulate fittings and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent
pipe.
Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above
finished floor): Finish with aluminum jacket.
Piping Exterior to Building: Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and
valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass
mesh reinforced vapor retarder cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at
3 or 9 oclock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water
or on bottom side of horizontal piping.
Buried Piping: Insulate only where insulation manufacturer recommends insulation product
may be installed in trench, tunnel or direct buried. Install factory fabricated assembly with
inner all-purpose service jacket with self-sealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh
glass fabric, with 1 mil thick aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of
bituminous compound; outer surface faced with polyester film.
Heat Traced Piping Exterior to Building: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation
of like material, thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size insulation large enough to
enclose pipe and heat tracer. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or
9 oclock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water.
Prepare pipe insulation for finish painting.
INSTALLATION EQUIPMENT
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.

Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface.
On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement.
PLUMBING INSULATION
15080 - 6

Phase 2
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.4
Equipment Containing Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:

1.
Insulate entire equipment surfaces.
2.
3.
4.
Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with aluminum
jacket.
Equipment Located Exterior to Building: Install vapor barrier jacket or finish with glass
mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on
bottom side of horizontal equipment.
Cover glass fiber insulation with aluminum jacket.
Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not cover with
insulation.
Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation for
easy removal and replacement without damage.
Prepare equipment insulation for finish painting.
SCHEDULES
A.
Water Supply Services Piping Insulation Schedule:

INSULATION
TYPE
PIPING SYSTEM
PIPE SIZE
INSULATION
THICKNESS
inches
Domestic Hot Water Supply and

Recirculation
P-1
1-1/4 inches and smaller

1-1/2 inches and larger
0.5
1.0
Domestic Cold Water
P-1 or P-5

0.5
1.0
03798614
03/15
PLUMBING INSULATION
15080 - 7

Phase 2
B.
Drainage Services Piping Insulation Schedule:

INSULATION
TYPE
PIPE SIZE
INSULATION
THICKNESS
inches
Storm Piping (horizontal above

ground within building)
P-1 or P-5
All sizes
1.0
Storm Piping (horizontal and

vertical above ground within
building when PVC pipe is
used)
P-1 or P-5
All sizes
1.0
Sanitary Sewer Piping

(horizontal and vertical above
ground within building when
PVC piping is used)
P-1 or P-5
All sizes
1.0
PIPING SYSTEM
C.
Equipment Insulation Schedule:
EQUIPMENT
INSULATION
TYPE
INSULATION
THICKNESS
inches
Roof Drain Bodies
E-2 or E-8
1.0
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
PLUMBING INSULATION
15080 - 8

Phase 2
SECTION 15081
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3

HVAC piping insulation, jackets and accessories.

HVAC ductwork insulation, jackets, and accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
03798614
03/15
ASTM International:
1.
Applications.
2.
3.
and Plate.
4.
ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet
and Plate (Metric).
5.
ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
6.
ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting
Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
7.
ASTM C450 - Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting
Covers for NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging.
8.
ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal
Insulation.
9.
ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.
10. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
11. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation
for Commercial and Industrial Applications.
12. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation.
13. ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal
Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System).
14. ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular
Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation.
15. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal
Insulation.
16. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact
with Austenitic Stainless Steel.
HVAC INSULATION
15081 - 1

Phase 2
17.
B.
C.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5

Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and
thickness for each service, and location.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature
indicating proper installation procedures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.6
ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing

Materials for Thermal Insulation.
18. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass
Fiber, Duct Lining Material).
19. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor
Retarders for Thermal Insulation.
20. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation
Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts.
21. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
22. ASTM D4637 - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof
Membrane.
23. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials.
24. ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a
Radiant Heat Energy Source.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors:
1.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
1.
UL 1978 - Standard for Safety for Grease Ducts.
Test pipe insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke
developed index of not exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84.
Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for inner and outer
diameters.
Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450.
Duct insulation, Coverings, and Linings: Maximum 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed
index, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, using specimen procedures and
mounting procedures of ASTM E 2231.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15

Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three
HVAC INSULATION
15081 - 2

Phase 2
1.7

A.
B.
C.
1.8
A.
B.
C.
1.9

site.
Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range
Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum period of
24 hours.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.10

identification, including product density and thickness.
Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage,
by storing in original wrapping.
WARRANTY
A.
B.

Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for manmade fiber.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE INSULATION
A.
B.
2.2
TYPE P-1: ASTM C547, molded glass fiber pipe insulation.

1.
2.
3.
Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type I, factory applied reinforced foil kraft
with self-sealing adhesive joints.
4.
TYPE P-5: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular.
1.
2.
Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 70 to 180 degrees F.
PIPE INSULATION JACKETS

A.
B.
03798614
03/15

1.
2.
PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket:
1.
Product Description: ASTM D1785, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet
material, off-white color.
2.
Thickness: 15 mil.
3.
HVAC INSULATION
15081 - 3

Phase 2
C.
2.3
PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.4

Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter and smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield.
MSS SP-69, Type 40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness.
Piping 2 inches diameter and larger: Wood insulation saddle, hard maple. Inserts length:
not less than 6 inches long, matching thickness and contour of adjoining insulation.
Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with stainless steel
jacket single piece construction with self-adhesive closure. Thickness to match pipe
insulation.
Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
DUCTWORK INSULATION
A.
B.
2.5
Aluminum Pipe Jacket:

1.
ASTM B209.
2.
3.
Finish: Smooth.
4.
5.
liner.
6.
7.
Indoor Vapor Retarder Finish:
a.
Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
b.
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.
TYPE D-1: ASTM C1290, Type III, flexible glass fiber, commercial grade with factory
applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket meeting ASTM C1136, Type II.
1.
2.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F.
3.
TYPE D-2: ASTM C612, Type IA or IB, rigid glass fiber, with factory applied all service
facing meeting ASTM C1136, Type II.
1.
2.
DUCTWORK INSULATION JACKETS

A.
03798614
03/15
Aluminum Duct Jacket, where called for on the drawings:

1.
ASTM B209.
2.
3.
Finish: Smooth.
4.
5.
liner.
6.
HVAC INSULATION
15081 - 4

Phase 2
2.6
DUCTWORK INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Vapor Retarder Tape:

1.
Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with
pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
Adhesive: Waterproof type.
Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with press-on head.
Lagging Adhesive: Fire retardant type with maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke
developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage self-adhesive pad.
Membrane Adhesives: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
3.2

conditions.
Verify piping and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.
Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
INSTALLATION PIPING SYSTEMS

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and cover seams in least
visible locations.
Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies
having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when
continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:
1.
Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible
2.
3.
Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and
thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or
PVC fitting covers.
Glass Fiber Board Insulation:
1.
2.
Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth
surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement.
3.
Cover wire mesh or bands with cement to a thickness to remove surface
irregularities.
HVAC INSULATION
15081 - 5

Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
03798614
03/15
Hot Piping Systems less than 140 degrees F:

1.
2.
3.
Do not insulate unions and flanges at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of
insulation at such locations.
Hot Piping Systems greater than 140 degrees F:
1.
2.
3.
Insulate flanges and unions at equipment.
Inserts and Shields:
1.
Piping 1-1/2 inches Diameter and Smaller: Install galvanized steel shield between
pipe hanger and insulation.
2.
Piping 2 inches Diameter and Larger: Install insert between support shield and
piping and under finish jacket.
a.
Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour
matching adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.
b.
Insert Material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned
temperature range and service.
3.
Piping Supported by Roller Type Pipe Hangers: Install galvanized steel shield
between roller and inserts.
Insulation Terminating Points:
1.
Coil Branch Piping 1 inch and Smaller: Terminate hot water piping at union
upstream of the coil control valve.
2.
Chilled Water Coil Branch Piping: Insulate chilled water piping and associated
components up to coil connection.
3.
Condensate Piping: Insulate entire piping system and components to prevent
condensation.
Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation:
1.
Push insulation on to piping.
2.
Miter joints at elbows.
3.
Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturers recommended adhesive.
4.
When application requires multiple layers, apply with joints staggered.
5.
Insulate fittings and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent
pipe.
High Temperature Pipe Insulation:
1.
Install in multiple layers to meet thickness scheduled.
2.
Attach each layer with bands. Secure first layer with bands before installing next
layer.
3.
Stagger joints between layers.
4.
Finish with canvas jacket; this is the standard jacket unless otherwise noted on the
drawings to be the aluminum jacket.
5.
Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping,
where called for on drawings.
HVAC INSULATION
15081 - 6

Phase 2
K.
L.
M.
3.3
Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above
finished floor): Finish with aluminum jacket.
Piping Exterior to Building: Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and
valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass
mesh reinforced vapor retarder cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at
3 or 9 oclock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water
or on bottom side of horizontal piping.
Prepare pipe insulation for finish painting.
INSTALLATION DUCTWORK SYSTEMS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
03798614
03/15
Duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are finished inside dimensions.

Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature:
1.
Provide insulation with vapor retarder jackets.
2.
Finish with tape and vapor retarder jacket.
3.
Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
4.
Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible
Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature:
1.
Provide with or without standard vapor retarder jacket.
2.
Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of
insulation.
Ductwork Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (below 10 feet
above finished floor): Finish with aluminum jacket.
External Glass Fiber Duct Insulation:
1.
Secure insulation with vapor retarder with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor
retarder adhesive or tape to match jacket.
2.
Secure insulation without vapor retarder with staples, tape, or wires.
3.
Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners
where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert
spacers.
4.
Seal vapor retarder penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor retarder
adhesive.
5.
Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow
operation without disturbing wrapping.
Prepare all visible duct insulation for finish painting.
HVAC INSULATION
15081 - 7

Phase 2
3.4
SCHEDULES
A.
Cooling Services Piping Insulation Schedule:
PIPING SYSTEM
INSULATION
TYPE
INSULATION
THICKNESS
inches
PIPE SIZE
Chilled Water Supply and

Return
P-1

1-1/2 inches inch and larger
1.0
Condensate Piping from

Cooling Coils
P-5
All sizes
0.5
Refrigerant Suction
P-5
All sizes
0.5
Refrigerant Hot Gas
P-5
All sizes
0.5
B.
Heating Services Piping Insulation Schedule:
PIPING SYSTEM
INSULATION
TYPE
INSULATION
THICKNESS
Inches
PIPE SIZE
Heating Water Supply and

Return
P-1

1.0
Humidifier Supply Piping
P-1

Humidifier Drain Piping
P-1
All sizes
C.
Ductwork Insulation Schedule:
DUCTWORK SYSTEM
INSULATION
TYPE
INSULATION
THICKNESS
inches
Outside Air Intake
D-2
Equipment Casings
D-2
1.5
Supply Ducts (externally insulated). Thickness indicated is

installed thickness.
D-1, D-2, D-6
1.5
Return Ducts (externally insulated). Thickness indicated is

installed thickness.
D-1, D-2, D-6
1.5
Duct Coils
D-1
1.5
Exhaust Ducts Within 10 feet of Exterior Openings. Thickness

indicated is installed thickness.
D-1, D-2
1.5
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
HVAC INSULATION
15081 - 8

Phase 2
SECTION 15140
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.3

Domestic water piping, within 5 feet of building.

Domestic water piping, above grade.
Unions and flanges.
Valves.
Recessed valve box.
Water hammer arrestors.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
American National Standards Institute:

1.
ANSI Z21.22 - Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems.
1.
ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
2.
ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
3.
ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.
4.
5.
ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element.
6.
ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels.
7.
ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and Brazing
Qualifications.
American Society of Sanitary Engineering:
1.
ASSE 1010 - Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters.
2.
ASSE 1011 - Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
3.
ASSE 1012 - Performance Requirements for Backflow Preventer with Intermediate
Atmospheric Vent.
4.
ASSE 1013 - Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow
Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers.
5.
ASSE 1019 - Performance Requirements for Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants,
Freeze Resistant, Automatic Draining Type.
6.
ASSE 5013 - Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow
Preventers (RP) and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow
Preventers (RFP).
7.
ASSE 5015 - Performance Requirements for Testing Double Check Backflow
Prevention Assemblies (DC) and Double Check Fire Protection Backflow
Prevention Assemblies (RPDF).
15140 - 1

Phase 2
D.
03798614
03/15
ASTM International:
1.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
2.
ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought
Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service.
3.
ASTM A395/A395M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron PressureRetaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures.
4.
ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
5.
ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
6.
ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes.
7.
ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
8.
ASTM B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General
Applications.
9.
Pipe, Schedule 40, 80, and 120.
10. ASTM D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for AcrylonitrileButadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
11. ASTM D2239 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe
(SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameters.
12. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe
(SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.
13. ASTM D2447 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40 and 80, Based on Outside Diameter.
14. ASTM D2464 - Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
15. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 40.
17. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.
18. ASTM D2609 - Standard Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene
(PE) Plastic Pipe.
19. ASTM D2661 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.
20. ASTM D2846/D2846M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems.
21. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.
22. ASTM D3035 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR)
Based on Controlled Outside Diameter.
23. ASTM D3139 - Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using
Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
24. ASTM D 3311 - Standard Specification for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic
Fittings Patterns.
25. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers.
26. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of
Thermometers.
27. ASTM F437 - Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
15140 - 2

Phase 2
28.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl

29. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
30. ASTM F441/F441M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80.
31. ASTM F442/F442M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR).
32. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
33. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
34. ASTM F 891 - Standard Specification for Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe With a Cellular Core.
35. ASTM F1281 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene/Aluminum/
Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX-AL-PEX) Pressure Pipe.
36. ASTM F1282 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene/Aluminum/Polyethylene
(PE-AL-PE) Composite Pressure Pipe.
37. ASTM F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical
Couplings for Use in Piping Applications.
1.
AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.
American Water Works Association:
1.
AWWA C104 - American National Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for DuctileIron Pipe and Fittings for Water.
2.
AWWA C105 - American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for
Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.
3.
AWWA C110 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Grey-Iron
Fittings, 3 in. through 48 in., for Water and Other Liquids.
4.
AWWA C111 - American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for DuctileIron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
5.
AWWA C151 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally
Cast, for Water.
6.
AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains.
7.
AWWA C700 - Cold-Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case.
8.
AWWA C701 - Cold-Water Meters - Turbine Type, for Customer Service.
9.
AWWA C702 - Cold-Water Meters - Compound Type.
10. AWWA C706 - Direct-Reading, Remote-Registration Systems for Cold-Water
Meters.
11. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 in. through 12 in., for
Water Distribution.
12. AWWA C901 - Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1/2 in. through 3 in.,
for Water Service.
13. AWWA C950 - Fiberglass Pressure Pipe.
14. AWWA M6 - Water Meters - Selection, Installation, Testing, and Maintenance.
1.
2.
MSS SP 67 - Butterfly Valves.
3.
4.
MSS SP 70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
5.
MSS SP 71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
15140 - 3

Phase 2
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
H.
I.
J.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
Section 01720 - Contract Closeout Procedures: Closeout procedures.

Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves and equipment.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts list, exploded assembly views and
recommended maintenance intervals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
1.7

Product Data:
1.
Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit
manufacturer's catalog information.
2.
Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for
each service.
3.
Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog information including load
capacity.
4.
Domestic Water Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information, component
sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
5.
Pumps: Submit pump type, capacity, certified pump curves showing pump
performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include
NPSH curve when applicable. Include electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for pumps, valves
and accessories.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.6
MSS SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
MSS SP 85 - Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded.
MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and
Flared Ends.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
Plumbing and Drainage Institute:
1.
PDI WH201 - Water Hammer Arrester Standard.
1.
UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service.
2.
UL 404 - Gauges, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service.
For drinking water service, provide valves complying with NSF 61.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
03798614
03/15

15140 - 4

Phase 2
B.
1.8

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.9

Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.11

Accept valves and equipment on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect
for damage.
Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.
A.
B.
1.10
WARRANTY
A.
B.

Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A.
2.2
Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, annealed.

1.
Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper.
2.
Joints: Compression connection or Brazed, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/
copper alloy with melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, drawn.

1.
Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and
bronze.
2.
Joints: ASTM B32, Alloy Grade Sb5 tin-antimony, or Alloy Grade Sn95 tin-silver,
lead free solder.
Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, drawn, rolled grooved ends.
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast copper alloy, or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and
bronze, grooved ends.
2.
Joints: Grooved mechanical couplings meeting ASTM F1476.
a.
Housing Clamps: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile iron, enamel
coated, compatible with copper tubing sizes, to engage and lock designed to
permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion.
15140 - 5

Phase 2
b.
c.
2.3
UNIONS AND FLANGES

A.
B.
2.4
B.
B.
2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, 400 psi WOG, one piece bronze body, chrome plated
brass ball, full port, teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, solder or threaded ends with union,
extended lever handle.
2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, Class 150, bronze, two piece body, type 316 stainless
steel ball, full port, teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, solder or threaded ends with union,
PLUG VALVES
A.
B.
2.7
2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 150, bronze body, bronze trim, threaded union
bonnet, non-rising stem, hand-wheel, inside screw with back-seating stem, solid wedge
disc, solder or threaded ends.
2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 70, Class 125, cast iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet,
non-rising stem, hand-wheel, outside screw and yoke, solid wedge disc with bronze seat
rings, flanged ends. Furnish chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted
over 8 feet above floor.
BALL VALVES
A.
2.6
Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller:

1.
Ferrous Piping: Class 150, malleable iron, threaded.
2.
Copper Piping: Class 150, bronze unions with soldered or brazed joints.
3.
Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper
solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.
Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger:
1.
Ferrous Piping: Class 150, forged steel, slip-on flanges.
2.
Copper Piping: Class 150, slip-on bronze flanges.
3.
Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets.
GATE VALVES
A.
2.5
Gasket: Elastomer composition for operating temperature range from

-30 degrees F to 180 degrees F.
Accessories: Stainless steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 78, Class 150, semi-steel construction, round port, full pipe
area, pressure lubricated, teflon packing, threaded ends. Furnish one plug valve wrench for
every ten plug-valves with minimum of one wrench.
2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 78, Class 150, semi-steel construction, round port, full
pipe area, pressure lubricated, teflon packing, flanged ends. Furnish wrench-operated.
BUTTERFLY VALVES
A.
03798614
03/15
2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 67, Class 150.

1.
Body: Cast or ductile iron, wafer, lug, or grooved ends, stainless steel stem,
extended neck.
2.
Disc: Chrome plated ductile iron or stainless steel.
3.
Seat: Resilient replaceable EPDM.
4.
Handle and Operator: Infinite position lever handle with memory stop.
15140 - 6

Phase 2
2.8
CHECK VALVES
A.
B.
2.9
RECESSED VALVE BOX

A.
2.10
Refrigerator: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass valves with wheel handle slip in
finishing cover.
WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A.
B.
2.11
Horizontal Swing Check Valves:

1.
2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 150, bronze body and cap, bronze seat,
Buna-N disc, solder or threaded ends.
2.
2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 71, Class 125, cast iron body, bolted cap, bronze
or cast iron disc, renewable disc seal and seat, flanged ends.
Spring Loaded Check Valves:
1.
2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 250, bronze body, in-line spring lift check,
silent closing, Buna-N disc, integral seat, solder or threaded ends.
2.
2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 71, Class 125, wafer style, cast iron body, bronze
seat, center guided bronze disc, stainless steel spring and screws, flanged ends.
ASSE 1010; stainless steel construction, piston type sized in accordance with
PDI WH-201.
Pre-charged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F and
maximum 150 psi working pressure.
IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Casing: Bronze rated for 125 psig working pressure with stainless steel rotor assembly.
Impeller: Bronze.
Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two, oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings.
Seal: Carbon rotating against stationary ceramic seat.
Drive: Flexible coupling.
Electrical Characteristics and Components: Refer to Division 16.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2

conditions.
Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
15140 - 7

Phase 2
3.3
INSTALLATION ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
W.
3.4
Install non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to
walls.
Install piping to maintain headroom without interfering with use of space or taking more
space than necessary.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
insulation and access to valves and fittings.
Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible.
Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush
clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.
Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish
painting.
Install domestic water piping in accordance with ASME B31.9.
Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.
Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing
penetrating sleeves and piping.
Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to
pipe.
Install ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or
vertical risers.
Install ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when functioning to isolate
equipment.
Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.
Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold
water supply piping to lavatories and sinks.
Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of fixtures
(each washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or 3/4 inch minimum, and minimum
18 inches long.
INSTALLATION PUMPS
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Provide pumps to operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and
cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within
25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
Install long radius reducing elbows or reducers between pump and piping. Support piping
adjacent to pump so no weight is carried on pump casings. For close coupled or base
mounted pumps, install supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes
4 inches and over.
Install pumps on vibration isolators.
Install flexible connectors at or near pumps where piping configuration does not absorb
vibration.
15140 - 8

Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.5

A.
3.6
Provide line sized shut-off valve and strainer on pump suction, and line sized soft seat
check valve, balancing valve, and shut-off valve or combination pump discharge valve on
pump discharge.
Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping
adjacent to pump so no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under elbows
on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and larger.
Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.
Provide drains for bases and seals.
Check, align, and certify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up.
Lubricate pumps before start-up.
Test domestic water piping system in accordance with local authority having jurisdiction.
CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.

Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
Verify pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or
soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).
Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder and tablet or gas form, throughout
system to obtain residual from 50 to 80 mg/L.
Bleed water from outlets to obtain distribution and test for disinfectant residual at
minimum 15 percent of outlets.
Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
When final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
Flush disinfectant from system until residual concentration is equal to incoming water or
1.0 mg/L.
Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from
water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
15140 - 9

Phase 2
SECTION 15150
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.3

Sanitary sewer piping buried within 5 feet of building.

Sanitary sewer piping above grade.
Unions and flanges.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
03798614
03/15

1.
ASME A112.14.1 - Backwater Valves.
2.
ASME A112.14.3 - Grease Interceptors.
3.
ASME A112.14.4 - Grease Removal Devices.
4.
ASME A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.
5.
ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
6.
ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
7.
ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings.
8.
ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings (DWV).
9.
ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage
Fittings - DWV.
10. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
ASTM International:
1.
ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.
2.
3.
ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes.
9.
ASTM B43 - Standard Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe, Standard Sizes.
10. ASTM B75 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube.
11. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
12. ASTM B251 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wrought
Seamless Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube.
13. ASTM B302 - Standard Specification for Threadless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes.
14. ASTM B306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).
15150 - 1

Phase 2
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
03798614
03/15
ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert
Pipe.
ASTM C76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain,
and Sewer Pipe.
ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes,
Using Rubber Gaskets.
ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Sections.
ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe
and Fittings.
ASTM C1053 - Standard Specification for Borosilicate Glass Pipe and Fittings for
Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Applications.
ASTM D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for AcrylonitrileButadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDRPR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.
ASTM D2464 - Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
ASTM D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl
ASTM D2661 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.
Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.
ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe
and Fittings.
ASTM D2751 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly
ASTM D2996 - Standard Specification for Filament-Wound Fiberglass (GlassFiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe.
ASTM D2997 - Standard Specification for Centrifugally Cast Fiberglass (GlassFiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
ASTM D3262 - Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer Pipe.
Thermosetting-Resin) Pressure Pipe.
Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer and Industrial Pressure Pipe.
Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe Fittings for Nonpressure Applications.
15150 - 2

Phase 2
40.
C.
D.
E.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.5
ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining
Plastic Pipe.
41. ASTM F628 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe With a Cellular Core.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute:
1.
CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for
Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications.
2.
CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast
Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping
Applications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Flared Ends.
Plumbing and Drainage Institute:
1.
PDI G101 - Standard - Testing and Rating Procedure for Grease Interceptors.

Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes for
sewage-ejectors, and manholes.
Product Data:
1.
manufacturers catalog information.
2.
each service.
3.
capacity.
4.
Sanitary Drainage Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information,
component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
5.
requirements.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for material and
equipment.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15

Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and clean-outs.
15150 - 3

Phase 2
C.
1.6
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
B.
1.7

FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.10

A.
B.
1.9


A.
B.
1.8
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit frequency of treatment required for interceptors.
Include, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for pumps and equipment.
WARRANTY
A.
B.

Furnish five year manufacturer warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A.
B.
2.2
Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight, bell and spigot ends.
1.
Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A74.
2.
Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene
gaskets or lead and oakum.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material, bell and spigot
style solvent sealed joint ends.
1.
Fittings: ASTM D2466, Schedule 40, PVC.
2.
Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 Solvent cement.
SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A.
03798614
03/15
Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight.

1.
2.
Joints: ASTM C564, rubber gasket joint devices or lead and oakum.
15150 - 4

Phase 2
2.3
UNIONS AND FLANGES

A.
B.
C.

1.
2.
PVC Piping: PVC.
1.
2.
PVC Piping: PVC flanges.
3.
PVC Pipe Materials: For connections to equipment and valves with threaded connections,
furnish solvent-weld socket to screwed joint adapters and unions, or ASTM D2464,
Schedule 80, threaded, PVC pipe.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or
caps.
INSTALLATION BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.4

conditions.
Verify connection to existing piping system size, location, and invert are as indicated on
Drawings.
Establish minimum separation from other services piping in accordance with local code.
Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly.
Install pipe on prepared bedding.
Route pipe in straight line.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
03798614
03/15
Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 to 1/16 inch per foot minimum,
where allowed by code. Maintain gradients.
Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with
mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Provide clearances at cleanout for snaking drainage
system.
Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
walls.
15150 - 5

Phase 2
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
3.5
Install piping to maintain headroom. Do not spread piping, conserve space.

insulation.
Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.
painting.
Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.

A.
B.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and

balancing.
Test sanitary waste and vent piping system in accordance with local authority having
jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
15150 - 6

Phase 2
SECTION 15160
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.3

Storm water piping buried within 5 feet of building.

Storm water piping above grade.
Unions and flanges.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
03798614
03/15

1.
ASME A112.21.1M - Floor Drains.
2.
ASME A112.21.2M - Roof Drains.
3.
ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings (DWV).
4.
ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage
Fittings - DWV.
5.
ASTM International:
1.
ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
2.
3.
ASTM B306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).
4.
ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert
Pipe.
5.
ASTM C76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain,
and Sewer Pipe.
6.
ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes,
7.
ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Sections.
8.
ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe
and Fittings.
9.
ASTM C700 - Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength,
Standard Strength, and Perforated.
10. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
11. ASTM D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for AcrylonitrileButadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
15160 - 1

Phase 2
14.
C.
D.
1.4
Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.
and Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping.
16. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe
and Fittings.
19. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
20. ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining
Plastic Pipe.
21. ASTM F679 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) LargeDiameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute:
1.
CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for
Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications.
2.
CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast
Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping
Applications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Flared Ends.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15

Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes for
sump-pumps, catch basins and manholes.
Product Data:
1.
2.
each service.
3.
capacity.
4.
Storm Drainage Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information, component
sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
5.
15160 - 2

Phase 2
D.
E.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.6
B.

FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.10

A.
B.
1.9


A.
B.
1.8

Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and clean-outs.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for
pumps and equipment.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.7

requirements.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for material and
equipment.
WARRANTY
A.
B.

Furnish five year manufacturer warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight, bell and spigot ends.
1.
2.
Joints: ASTM C564, rubber gasket joint devices or lead and oakum.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material, bell and spigot solvent
sealed ends.
1.
Fittings: PVC, ASTM D2729.
2.
Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
15160 - 3

Phase 2
2.2
STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A.
B.
2.3
Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight, bell and spigot ends.
1.
2.
Joints: ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034 SDR 26, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material.
1.
Fittings: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034, PVC.
2.
Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
UNIONS AND FLANGES

A.
B.
C.

1.
2.
PVC Piping: PVC.
1.
PVC Piping: PVC flanges.
2.
PVC Pipe Materials: For connections to equipment and valves with threaded connections,
furnish solvent-weld socket to screwed joint adapters and unions, or ASTM D2464,
Schedule 80, threaded, PVC pipe.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
caps.
INSTALLATION BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS

A.
B.
C.
3.4

conditions.
Drawings.
Install pipe on prepared bedding.
Route pipe in straight line.

A.
03798614
03/15
Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot minimum. Maintain
gradients.
15160 - 4

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
3.5
Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with
mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Provide clearance at cleanout for snaking drainage
system.
Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
Install non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
walls.
Install piping to maintain headroom. Group piping to conserve space.
Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.
insulation.
Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.
painting.
Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

A.
B.

balancing.
Test storm drainage piping system in accordance with local authority having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
15160 - 5

Phase 2
SECTION 15180
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3

Heating water piping, above ground.

Chilled water piping, above grade.
Equipment drains and over flows.
Unions and flanges.
Valves.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15

1.
ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
2.
ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Qualifications.
ASTM International:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ASTM B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General
Applications.
8.
ASTM F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical
1.
2.
American Water Works Association:
1.
AWWA C105 - American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for
Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.
HYDRONIC PIPING
15180 - 1

Phase 2
2.
E.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
1.5
AWWA C110 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Grey-Iron

Fittings, 3 in. through 48 in., for Water and Other Liquids.
3.
AWWA C111 - American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for DuctileIron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
4.
AWWA C151 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally
Cast, for Water.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
MSS SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
7.
8.
MSS SP 85 - Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded.
9.
10. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and
Flared Ends.
Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system
components and joints. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing
dissimilar metals in open systems.
Provide flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges,
and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Do not
use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus.
Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.9,
ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89.
Use ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or
vertical risers.
Use ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
Use spring loaded check valves on discharge of hot water and chilled water pumps.
Use plug valves for throttling service. Use non-lubricated plug valves only when shut-off
or isolating valves are also provided.
Use butterfly valves in heating water systems and in chilled and condenser water systems
interchangeably with gate and globe valves.
Use only butterfly valves in chilled and condenser water systems for throttling and
isolation service.
Use lug end butterfly valves to isolate equipment.
Use 3/4 inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping,
bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. Pipe to nearest floor drain.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15

Product Data:
1.
2.
each service.
HYDRONIC PIPING
15180 - 2

Phase 2
3.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.7
B.
B.
D.

FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.12

Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
installation.
A.
B.
1.11

Fabricator or Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with
minimum three years documented experience.

A.
B.
C.
1.10
Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and
ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.9

Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves, equipment and accessories.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for installation and changing
components, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.8

capacity.
Design Data: Indicate pipe size. Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe,
and riser support hangers.
Manufacturers Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and support methods, joining
procedures and isolation.
Welders Certificate: Include welders certification of compliance with ASME Section IX.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
03798614
03/15

Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for valves excluding packing.
HYDRONIC PIPING
15180 - 3

Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HEATING WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND

A.
B.
C.
2.2
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, 0.375 inch wall for sizes 12 inch and larger,
black.
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234/A234M, forged steel welding
type.
2.
Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inch and smaller; welded for pipe 2-1/2 inches and
larger.
black, rolled grooved ends.
1.
Fittings: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile iron, or ASTM A234/
A234M carbon steel, grooved ends.
2.
a.
Housing Clamps: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile iron, hot
dipped galvanized, compatible with steel piping sizes, rigid or flexible type.
b.
c.
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and
2.
a.
b.
c.
CHILLED WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
black.
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234/A234M, forged steel welding
type.
2.
Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inch and smaller; welded for pipe 2-1/2 inches and
larger.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, black, rolled grooved ends.
1.
Fittings: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile iron, or ASTM A234/
A234M carbon steel, grooved ends.
2.
a.
Housing Clamps: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile iron, hot
dipped galvanized, compatible with steel piping sizes, rigid or flexible type.
b.
c.
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast copper alloy, or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and
HYDRONIC PIPING
15180 - 4

Phase 2
2.
2.3
EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS

A.
2.4
B.
B.
2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, 400 psi WOG, one piece bronze body, chrome plated
brass ball, full port, teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, solder or threaded ends with union,
BUTTERFLY VALVES
A.
2.7

1.
Ferrous Piping: Class 150, malleable iron, threaded.
2.
3.
1.
Ferrous Piping: Class 150, forged steel, slip-on flanges.
2.
3.
BALL VALVES (BA-1, Refer to Section 15212)

A.
2.6
Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, drawn.

1.
Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper.
2.
Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with
melting range 430 to 535 degrees F.
UNIONS AND FLANGES

A.
2.5

a.
b.
c.
2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 67, Class 150.

1.
Body: Cast or ductile iron, wafer or grooved ends, stainless steel stem, extended
neck.
2.
Disc: Nickel-plated ductile iron or stainless steel.
3.
Seat: Resilient replaceable EPDM.
4.
Handle and Operator: Infinite position lever handle with memory stop.
CHECK VALVES
A.
03798614
03/15
Horizontal Swing Check Valves:

1.
2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 150, bronze body and cap, bronze seat,
Buna-N disc, solder or threaded ends.
HYDRONIC PIPING
15180 - 5

Phase 2
2.
B.
2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 71, Class 125, cast iron body, bolted cap, bronze
or cast iron disc, renewable disc seal and seat, flanged ends.
Spring Loaded Check Valves:
1.
2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 250, bronze body, in-line spring lift check,
silent closing, Buna-N disc, integral seat, solder or threaded ends.
2.
2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 71, Class 125, wafer style, cast iron body, bronze
seat, center guided bronze disc, stainless steel spring and screws, flanged ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
caps.
After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.4
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.

Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
larger.
INSTALLATION ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
03798614
03/15
Install heating water and chilled water piping in accordance with ASME B31.9.
Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient.
Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.
Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors.
Install pipe identification in conformance with Owners standards. Verify at Project site.
Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
Slope hydronic piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to
maintain top of pipe aligned.
HYDRONIC PIPING
15180 - 6

Phase 2
K.
L.
M.
N.
3.5
clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.
Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
Insulate piping; refer to Section 15081.

A.
B.

balancing.
Test heating water piping system and chilled water piping system in accordance with
ASME B31.9.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
HYDRONIC PIPING
15180 - 7

Phase 2
SECTION 15212
MEDICAL GAS AND VACUUM SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.3

Medical gas piping.

Valves.
Piping Specialties.
Medical gas outlets.
Installer performed tests.
System verification tests.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15

1.
2.
3.
ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element.
4.
ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels.
5.
Qualifications.
American Society of Sanitary Engineering:
1.
ASSE 6010 - Professional Qualification Standard for Medical Gas and Vacuum
System Installers.
2.
ASSE 6030 - Medical Gas Verifiers Professional Qualification Standard.
1.
2.
AWS B2.2 - Standard for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualifications.
3.
ASTM International:
1.
ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless
Steel Tubing for General Service.
2.
3.
ASTM A403/A403M - Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless
Steel Piping Fittings.
4.
5.
6.
7.
15212 - 1

Phase 2
8.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.4
ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air
Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.
9.
ASTM B819 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Medical Gas
Systems.
10. ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of
Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings.
11. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Compressed Gas Association:
1.
CGA G-4.1 - Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service.
2.
CGA C-7 - Guide to the Preparation for Cautionary Labeling and Marking for
Compressed Gas Containers.
3.
CGA V-1 - Standard for Compressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and Inlet
Connections.
4.
CGA V-5 - Diameter-Index Safety System (Non-Interchangeable Low Pressure
Connections for Medical Gas Applications).
1.
2.
3.
4.
MSS SP 73 - Brazed Joints for Wrought and Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint
Pressure Fittings.
5.
Flared Ends.
1.
1.
NFPA 50 - Standard for Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer Sites.
2.
NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities.
1.
Electrical Construction Equipment.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
03798614
03/15
Level 3 Medical Gas Systems include the following gas types, piping systems and
equipment.
15212 - 2

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
1.5
Gases:
1.
Oxygen.
2.
Medical air.
3.
Medical vacuum.
Piping Systems:
1.
Level 3 positive pressure medical gas piping, above ground.
Equipment:
1.
Medical gas outlets.
2.
Area alarm panels.
3.
Master alarm panel.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
03798614
03/15
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

Shop Drawings:
1.
Indicate piping system schematic with electrical and connection requirements
general assembly of components, mounting and installation details.
2.
Indicate general layout of control and alarm panels.
3.
Indicate detailed medical wall assembly drawings.
Product Data:
1.
Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories.
2.
each service.
3.
capacity.
4.
System Components: Submit manufacturers catalog information including capacity,
component sizes, rough-in requirements, and service sizes. When applicable, include
electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
5.
Compressors: Submit type, capacity, and performance characteristics. Include
6.
Vacuum Pumps: Submit type, capacity, and performance characteristics. Include
Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature with capacity, weight, and electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
Qualifications Data: Submit documentation verifying qualifications for the following:
1.
Brazers and brazing procedures.
2.
Welders and welding procedures.
3.
Medical gas and vacuum system installer.
4.
System verifier.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hoisting and setting requirements, starting
procedures.
Manufacturer's Certificate:
1.
Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
2.
Certify piping materials comply with CGA G-4.1 cleaning requirements.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate systems are complete, zone valves installed, and
alarm systems functional.
Installer's Test Reports:
1.
Submit documentation indicating completion of Installer Performed Tests.
2.
Submit list of each test and when test was completed.
3.
Include documentation required by NFPA 99.
15212 - 3

Phase 2
J.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.7
B.
C.
D.
Furnish piping, valves, pipe fittings, outlets and other piping components cleaned for
oxygen service by manufacturer in accordance with CGA G-4.1.
Furnish documentation certifying installed piping materials comply with CGA G-4.1
cleaning requirements.
Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 99 for installation of piping systems and ASME
Section IX for brazing materials and procedures.
Perform Work in accordance with authority having jurisdiction for welding hanger and
support attachments to building structure.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.9
Section 01720 - Contract Closeout Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment piping, valves, outlets
and components.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit assembly views, lubrication instructions,
replacement part numbers and availability.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.8
Verifier's Test Reports:

1.
Submit testing and inspection report of System Verification Tests.
2.
Submit list of each test and when test was completed.
3.
Include documentation required by NFPA 99.

Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three
1.
ASSE Standard 6010 qualified to install medical gas and vacuum systems.
Brazers and Brazing Procedures: ASME Section IX qualified within previous 12 months
for medical gas and vacuum systems.
Welders and Welding Procedures: AWS D1.1 qualified within previous 12 months for
medical gas and vacuum systems.
System Verifier: Company specializing in performing medical gas system verification with
1.
ASSE Standard 6030 qualified and independent of system installer.

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15

Accept equipment on site in factory fabricated containers with shipping skids and plastic
pipe end protectors in place. Inspect for damage.
Furnish temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
Protect piping from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of
the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.
15212 - 4

Phase 2
1.10
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.11
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service.

Furnish service and maintenance of new components for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.
Provide emergency call back service at all hours for this maintenance period.
Maintain locally, near Project location, adequate stock of parts for replacement or
emergency purposes. Have personnel available to ensure fulfillment of this maintenance
service, without unreasonable loss of time.
Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under supervision and
in direct employ of manufacturer or original installer.
Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or subcontractor without prior
written consent of Owner.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for extra materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LEVEL 3 POSITIVE PRESSURE MEDICAL GAS PIPING, ABOVEGROUND

A.
2.2
LEVEL 3 MEDICAL-SURGICAL VACUUM PIPING

A.
2.3
Copper Tubing: ASTM B819, Type L. Furnish piping identified with manufacturers
markings.
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze or MSS SP 73 wrought and cast
copper.
2.
Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting
temperature range 1190 to 1480 degrees F.
Copper Tubing: ASTM B819, Type L.

1.
copper.
2.
Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpled branch
tube.
3.
Joints: ASTM B32, Alloy Grade Sb5 tin-antimony, or Alloy Grade Sn95 tin-silver,
lead free solder.
RELIEF VALVE VENT PIPING

A.
03798614
03/15
Copper Tubing: ASTM B819, Type L. Furnish piping identified with manufacturers
markings.
1.
copper.
2.
Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting
temperature range 1190 to 1480 degrees F.
15212 - 5

Phase 2
2.4
UNIONS AND FLANGES

A.
B.
2.5
BALL VALVES
A.
B.
2.6
Locks: Furnish padlock with keyway matching existing keying system.
MEDICAL GAS OUTLETS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.7

1.
2.
1.
2.
Style: MEDAES/Ohmeda compatible.

Location: Wall.
Mounting: Flush, recessed.
Furnish outlets with the following features:
1.
Non-interchangeable connectors, automatic valves, secondary check valves (except
vacuum and evacuation outlets), and capped 3/8 inch tubing stubs for supply
connections, color coded and labeled for intended service.
2.
Latch mechanisms designed for one handed, single thrust mounting and one handed
fingertip release of secondary equipment.
3.
Furnish outlets cleaned for oxygen service by manufacturer and labeled, sealed, and
packed for shipping.
Face Plates:
1.
Flush Outlets: Mount in galvanized steel boxes with stainless steel faceplate with
Lexan cover, color coded with embossed labeling.
2.
Surface Outlets: Surface mount with color-coded plastic cover and stainless steel
faceplate with Lexan cover, color-coded with embossed labeling.
Vacuum Bottle Brackets: Stainless steel, chrome-plated metal, or aluminum with finish
matching adjacent outlet.
AREA ALARM PANEL

A.
03798614
03/15
Area Alarm Panels: Modular, self-monitoring type, to monitor the following services:
oxygen, vacuum, and medical air.
1.
Green light for systems normal.
2.
High or low pressure warning:
a.
Green light extinguishes.
b.
Audible warning device sounds.
c.
Red light energizes.
3.
Gage indicates pressure or vacuum.
4.
Switch silences warning device.
5.
Test switch to test light bulbs and audible warning device.
6.
Furnish system with internal switches, gages, control unit, and transformer.
15212 - 6

Phase 2
B.
2.8
MASTER ALARM PANEL

A.
2.9
Monitor the following abnormal conditions:

1.
High line pressure (for each medical gas).
2.
Low line pressure (for each medical gas).
3.
Low medical-surgical vacuum.
4.
Low WAGD vacuum.
5.
Backup medical air compressor in operation.
6.
Backup vacuum pump in operation.
7.
Backup WAGD producer in operation.
Master Alarm Panel:

1.
Closed circuit, self-monitoring type, to monitor medical gas systems.
2.
Green light for systems normal.
3.
For abnormal condition:
a.
Green light extinguishes.
b.
Audible warning device sounds.
c.
Red light energizes.
4.
Gage indicates pressure or vacuum.
5.
Switch silences warning device.
6.
Test switch to test light bulbs and audible warning device.
7.
Furnish system with internal switches, gages, control unit, and transformer.
8.
Design system to allow one, two or more monitors capable of being connected to
single pressure switch.
LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A.
B.
C.
D.
Furnish labeling and identification in accordance with NFPA 99.

Valve Labels:
1.
Label riser valve and service valve in accordance with NFPA 99.
2.
Furnish valve with name of gas or vacuum system or chemical symbol. Label with
room or area served. Label with caution to not open or close valve in an emergency.
3.
When gas system operates at other than standard pressures, label valve with
operating pressure in addition to gas name.
Outlets and Inlets:
1.
Furnish with name of gas or vacuum system or chemical symbol.
2.
When gas system operates at other than standard pressures, include operating
pressure in addition to gas name.
Alarm Panels:
1.
Label indicating condition monitored.
2.
Label each panel for area of surveillance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15

starting work.
15212 - 7

Phase 2
C.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
C.
D.
E.
Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.

Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
larger.
INSTALLATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.5
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
caps.
A.
B.
3.4
Drawings.
Install hangers and supports in accordance with MSS SP 69.

Support horizontal piping in accordance with NFPA 99.
Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent
work.
Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe
movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
Support vertical piping at every floor; maximum 15 feet on center. Support riser piping
independently of connected horizontal piping.
insulation and access to valves and fittings.
INSTALLATION ABOVE GROUND PIPING MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
03798614
03/15
Install medical gas systems in accordance with NFPA 99.

During brazing of pipe connections, purge interior of pipe continuously with nitrogen.
Cut pipe and tubing accurately and install without springing or forcing.
Slope piping in direction of flow.
Make branch connections in accordance with NFPA 99.
Pressure Gages:
1.
Install at locations identified in NFPA 99.
2.
Install capable of being read from standing position.
3.
Install pressure gages located downstream from source valve with demand check
fitting.
Install pipe sleeves where pipes and tubing pass through walls, floors, roofs, and partitions.
Install pipe identification in accordance with this Section.
15212 - 8

Phase 2
I.
J.
3.6
LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A.
3.7
C.
Section 01450 - Quality Control: Requirements for manufacturers field services.

Furnish initial start-up including routine servicing and checkout.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
B.
C.
3.10
Division 1: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

Initial Tests - Level 3 Systems:
1.
Complete tests for each system in accordance with procedures specified in
NFPA 99.
System Verification - Level 3 Systems:
1.
Perform after completion of Initial Tests.
2.
Conduct test by agency independent of system installer.
3.
Complete system verification tests for each system in accordance with procedures
specified in NFPA 99.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A.
B.
3.9
Piping:
1.
Install pipe labels at intervals of not more than 20 feet.
2.
Install minimum of one pipe label in each room.
3.
Install label on each side of wall when penetrated by piping.
4.
Risers: Install minimum of one label for each story traversed by piping.

A.
B.
3.8
Except where indicated or in flush wall mounted cabinets, install manual shut off valves
with stem vertical and accessible for operation and maintenance.
Install locks on valves.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training.

Demonstrate each medical gas system operation and maintenance.
Furnish services of manufacturer's technical representative for one 8 hour day to instruct
Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance.
SCHEDULES
A.
Valve Service:
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Medical Oxygen - Level 3
Medical Compressed Air - Level 3
Medical Vacuum - Level 3
03798614
03/15
SHUTOFF
BA-1
BA-1
BA-1
15212 - 9

Phase 2
B.
Pipe Hanger Spacing:

PIPE HANGER SPACING
PIPE SIZE
Inches
1/4 (8)
3/8 (10)
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2 and Larger
MAXIMUM
HANGER SPACING
Feet
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
HANGER ROD
DIAMETER
Inches
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
15212 - 10

Phase 2
SECTION 15310
FIRE PROTECTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3

Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250,
and 800.
B.
ANSI/ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300.
C.
ANSI/ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250.
D.
ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
E.
ANSI/ASME B16.9 - Factory-made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings.
F.
ANSI/ASME B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded.
G.
ANSI/ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings.
H.
ANSI/ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
I.
ANSI/ASME B16.25 - Buttwelding Ends.
J.
ANSI/ASME B36.10 - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
K.
ANSI/ASME Sec 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
L.
ANSI/ASTM A135 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe.
M. ANSI/ASTM A47 - Malleable Iron Castings.
N.
ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
O.
ANSI/AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.
P.
ANSI/AWWA C110 - Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings.
Q.
ANSI/AWWA C151 - Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast.
R.
ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless.
S.
ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated (Galvanized) Welded and
Seamless, for Ordinary Uses.
T.
ASTM A234 - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
Elevated Temperatures.
U.
ASTM A795 - Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel
Pipe for Fire Protection Use.
V.
ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube.
W. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
X.
ASTM B251 - General Requirements for Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube.
Y.
AWS D10.9 - Specifications for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping
and Tubing.
Z.
NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
AA. NFPA 14 - Standpipe and Hose Systems.
03798614
03/15
15310 - 1

Phase 2
BB.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.5

Maintenance Instructions: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, procedures, and
treatment programs.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
1.7

Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor, and wall
penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and
piping connections.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
Manufacturer's Field Report: Submit under provisions of Section 15000.
Manufacturer's Field Report: Indicate time of start-up of treatment systems and include
analysis of system water after cleaning and treatment.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A.
B.
1.6
NFPA 24 - Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.
Sprinkler Systems: Perform work to NFPA 13.

Welding Materials and Procedures: Perform to ASME Code.
Valves: Bear UL or FM label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating
marked on valve body.

A.
B.
C.
D.
Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 15000.
Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place.
Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SPRINKLER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; ASTM A120; Schedule 40 black.

1.
Steel Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.9, wrought steel, buttwelded.
2.
Cast Iron Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.1, flanges and fittings.
3.
Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock,
"C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for
galvanized pipe.
Copper Tubing: ASTM B88 or ASTM B251; Type L, hard drawn.
1.
Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.18, cast bronze, or ANSI/ASME B16.22, wrought copper
and bronze, solder joint, pressure type.
2.
Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.
3.
Casing: Closed glass cell insulation.
15310 - 2

Phase 2
2.2
GATE VALVES
A.
B.
2.3
BALL VALVES
A.
B.
2.4
Bronze body, stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded ends, extended neck,
handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and built-in tamper proof switch
rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC.
CHECK VALVES
A.
B.
C.
2.6
Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze one piece body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and
stuffing box ring, lever handle, solder or threaded ends with union.
Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals,
lever handle, flanged.
BUTTERFLY VALVES
A.
2.5
Up to and Including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, handwheel, inside
screw, single wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends.
Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, single wedge, flanged
or grooved ends.
Up to and Including 2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, solder or screwed ends.

Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.
Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer or
flanged ends.
DRAIN VALVES
A.
B.
Bronze compression stop with hose thread nipple and cap.

Brass ball valve with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
3.2
Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems.

Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient.
Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work.
15310 - 3

Phase 2
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top
of pipe level.
Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support
members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of
zinc rich primer to welding.
Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.
Provide sleeves when penetrating floors and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to
achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required.
Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or
other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior
to installation.
Provide ball or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service.
Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
15310 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 15325
SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3
C.
D.
E.
F.

Preliminary Shop Drawings: Prior to detailed submission, submit preliminary layout of
finished ceiling areas indicating only head locations coordinated with ceiling installation.
Shop Drawings: Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports,
components and accessories. Indicate system controls.
Product Data: Provide data on sprinkler heads, valves, and specialties, including
manufacturers catalogue information. Submit performance ratings rough-in details, weights,
support requirements, and piping connections.
Submit shop drawings, product data, and hydraulic calculations to authority having
jurisdiction for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect/Engineer.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds code
requirements.

A.
B.
1.7
System to provide coverage for building areas noted.

Provide system to NFPA 13 light hazard occupancy requirements.
Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from water flow test data.
Interface system with existing building fire and smoke alarm system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.6
NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
Wet-pipe sprinkler system.

System design, installation, and certification.
REFERENCES
A.
1.4


Record actual locations of sprinkler heads and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate
drain and test locations.
03798614
03/15
SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15325 - 1

Phase 2
A.
B.
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.9
B.
Hydraulic Calculations, Product Data, Shop Drawings: Bear stamp of approval of authority

A.
B.
1.12
Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this Section with minimum three
documented years experience.
Design sprinkler system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in
design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas.
A.
1.11
Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13.

Equipment and Components: Bear UL and/or FM label or marking.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.10

Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, Record Drawings,
inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of
service depot.
Deliver, store, protect, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 15000.
Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide
temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Furnish under provisions of Section 15000.

Provide extra sprinkler heads under provisions of NFPA 13.
Provide suitable wrenches for each head type.
Provide metal storage cabinet in location designated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SPRINKLER HEADS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Suspended Ceiling:
1.
Type: Standard pendant type with matching escutcheon plate.
2.
Head Finish: Chrome plated.
3.
Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated.
4.
Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.
Exposed Area Type:
1.
Type: Standard upright type with guard.
2.
Head Finish: Brass.
3.
SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15325 - 2

Phase 2
C.
D.
Sidewall Type:
1.
Type: Standard horizontal sidewall type with matching escutcheon plate and guard.
2.
Head Finish: Chrome plated.
3.
Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated.
4.
Guards: Finish to match sprinkler head.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Coordinate work of this Section with other affected work.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.
Center heads in two directions in ceiling tile and provide piping offsets as required.
Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler head cover plates do not
receive field paint finish.
Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.
Hydrostatically test entire system.
Require test be witnessed by Authority having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15325 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
B.
C.
American National Standards Institute:

1.
ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute:
1.
ARI 1010 - Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers.
1.
ASME A112.6.1 - Floor-Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for
Public Use.
2.
ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
3.
ASME A112.19.1M - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures.
4.
ASME A112.19.2M - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
5.
ASME A112.19.4 - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures.
6.
ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
Water closets.
Urinals.
Lavatories.
Sinks.
Service sinks.
REFERENCES
A.
1.4


Product Data: Submit catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility
sizes, trim, and finishes.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation methods and procedures.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15

Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit fixture, trim, exploded view and replacement
parts lists.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15410 - 1

Phase 2
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
B.
1.8


A.
B.
C.
1.9
Provide products requiring electrical connections listed and classified by Underwriters

Laboratories Inc., as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.
Provide plumbing fixture fittings in accordance with ASME A112.18.1 that prevent
backflow from fixture into water distribution system.

Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging
in place to protect fixtures and prevent use.
WARRANTY
A.
B.

Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for plumbing fixtures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule for information on fixtures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2

conditions.
Verify walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
Verify electric power is available and of correct characteristics.
Confirm millwork is constructed with adequate provision for installation of counter top
lavatories and sinks.
PREPARATION
A.
03798614
03/15
Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture
rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15410 - 2

Phase 2
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.4
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A.
3.5
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or
overflow.
CLEANING
A.
B.
3.7
Review millwork shop-drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings
before rough in and installation.
ADJUSTING
A.
B.
3.6
Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers,
and escutcheons.
Install components level and plumb.
Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports or wall carriers and bolts.
Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant, color to match fixture.
Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold
fixture in place.
For ADA accessible water closets, install flush valve with handle to wide side of stall.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.

Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A.
B.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting installed construction.

Do not permit use of fixtures before final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
PLUMBING FIXTURES
15410 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 15721
PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Modular factory fabricated air-handling units and accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.4

American Bearing Manufacturers Association:

1.
ABMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2.
ABMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.:
1.
AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
2.
AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance
Rating.
3.
AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.
4.
AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test
Data.
5.
AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters.
Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute:
1.
ARI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
2.
ARI 430 - Central-Station Air-Handling Units.
3.
ARI 610 - Central System Humidifiers for Residential Applications.
4.
ARI Guideline D - Application and Installation of Central Station Air-Handling
Units.
ASTM International:
1.
ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
1.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
1.
1.
UL 900 - Air Filter Units.
2.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15

Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances,
construction details, field connection details, and electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL-STATION
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
15721 - 1

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.6
B.
C.

Accept units and components on site in factory protective containers, with factory shipping
skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.
Protect units from weather and construction traffic by storing in dry, roofed location.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.10


A.
B.
1.9
Outside Air Damper Leakage: Test in accordance with AMCA 500.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.8

Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for lubrication, filter replacement,
motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
Product Data, Submit the following:

1.
Published Literature: Indicate capacities, ratings, gages and finishes of materials,
and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
2.
Filters: Data for filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter
frames.
3.
Fans: Performance and fan curves with specified operating point plotted, power,
RPM.
4.
Sound Power Level Data: Fan outlet and casing radiation at rated capacity.
5.
Dampers: Include leakage, pressure drop, and sample calibration curves. Indicate
materials, construction, dimensions, and installation details.
6.
Electrical Requirements: Power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for
interlock and control wiring. Indicate factory installed and field installed wiring.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit.

Furnish five-year manufacturer warranty for air handling units.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

Furnish one set of fan belts for each unit.
Furnish one set of filters for each unit.

AIR-HANDLING UNITS
15721 - 2

Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
AIR HANDLING UNITS

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
Configuration: Fan section fan and coil section plus accessories, including:
1.
Cooling coil section.
2.
Heating coil.
3.
Filter section.
4.
Combination filter/mixing box section.
5.
Mixing box section.
Performance Base: 3,250 ft. pressure or altitude.
Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99 and ARI 430.
Roof Curb:
1.
Factory assembled galvanized steel mounting curb designed and manufactured by
unit manufacturer.
2.
Perimeter type with support of air handling sections.
3.
Furnish supply and return opening duct frames as part of curb structure allowing
duct connections to be made directly to curb.
4.
Minimum of 14 inches high and include wood nailer strip.
5.
Furnish gaskets for field mounting.
CASING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
03798614
03/15
Channel base and drain pan of welded steel. Assemble sections with gaskets and bolts.
Outside Casing:
1.
2.
Galvanized Steel: 0.0635 inch.
3.
Seal fixed joints with flexible weather tight sealer. Seal removable joints with
closed-cell foam gasket.
4.
Furnish cap strips over roof flanges. Furnish rain caps and gaskets on access doors.
Outside Casing Finish:
1.
Baked enamel.
2.
Finish exceeds 500 hour salt spray test in accordance with ASTM B117.
3.
Color: As selected by Architect.
Inside Casing:
1.
Aluminum: Solid 0.32 inch thick.
2.
Galvanized Steel: Solid, 0.0276 inch thick.
3.
Stainless Steel: Solid, 0.025 inch thick.
Floor Plate:
1.
Galvanized Steel: 1.382 inch thick.
2.
Insulation: Neoprene coated, glass fiber, applied to internal surfaces with adhesive and
weld pins with exposed edges of insulation coated with adhesive.
1.
K factor at 75 degrees F: Maximum 0.26 Btuh inch/ sq ft/ degrees F.
2.
Density: 1-1/2 inch thick, 1-1/2 lbs/cu ft.
Inspection Doors: 10 x 10 inch of galvanized steel for flush mounting, with gasket, latch,
and handle assembly and 1/4 inch thick Plexiglas inspection window.
Walk-in Access Doors: 24 x 48 inch. Galvanized steel insulated sandwich construction, for
flush mounting, with hinges, gasket, latch, and handle assemblies, and 12 x 12 inch
inspection window of 1/4 inch thick Plexiglas.

AIR-HANDLING UNITS
15721 - 3

Phase 2
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
2.3
FANS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.4
Refer to Division 16 for motor requirements.
BEARINGS AND DRIVES

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.6
Type: Forward curved and plenum type fans.

Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210.
Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300.
Bearings: Self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or roller bearings with lubrication fittings
extended to exterior of casing with copper tube and grease fitting rigidly attached to casing.
Mounting: Locate fan and motor internally on welded steel base coated with corrosion
resistant paint. Factory mount motor on slide rails. Furnish access to motor, drive, and
bearings through removable casing panels or hinged access doors. Furnish built-in inertia
base of welded steel with bottom sheet and reinforcing grid for concrete ballast. Mount
base on vibration isolators.
Fan Modulation: Variable Frequency Drive.
Flexible Connection: Separate unit from connecting ductwork.
MOTORS
A.
2.5
Lights: Located in accessible sections suitable for damp locations with wire guards, factory
wired to weatherproof switch and pilot light and duplex outlet mounted on casing exterior.
Drain Pans: Single thickness galvanized steel with welded corners. Cross break and pitch
to drain connection. Furnish drain pans under cooling coil section.
Bottom Inlet Units: Furnish steel or aluminum walking grate on structural supports.
Strength: Furnish structure to brace casings for suction pressure of 2.5 inch wg, with
maximum deflection of 1 in 200.
Louvers: Adjustable, of galvanized steel, 4 inch deep with plenum, nylon bearings,
1/2 inch mesh, 0.04 inch galvanized wire bird screen in aluminum frame, and bearing
AMCA Certified Ratings Seal in accordance with AMCA 500.
Bearings: Pillow block type, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball bearings, L-50 life at
100,000 hours.
Shafts: Solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-way, and protectively coated
with lubricating oil.
V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts, and
keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheaves for motors 15 hp and under selected so
required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fixed sheave for 20 hp and over,
matched belts, and drive rated as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times
nameplate rating of motor.
Belt Guard: Fabricate to SMACNA Standard; 0.106 inch thick, 3/4 inch diamond mesh
wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan
supports without short circuiting vibration isolation, with provision for adjustment of belt
tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.
COILS
A.
03798614
03/15
Casing with access to both sides of coils. Enclose coils with headers and return bends fully
contained within casing. Slide coils into casing through removable end panel.

AIR-HANDLING UNITS
15721 - 4

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.7
FILTERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.8
Provide economizer components and controls in accordance with ICC IECC.
DAMPERS
A.
B.
2.10
Filter Box: Section with filter guides, access doors from both sides, for side loading with
gaskets and blank-off plates.
Filter Media: UL 900 listed, Class I, approved by local authorities.
Flat: 2 inches deep disposable, extended area panel filters.
Extended Surface: Filter box with holding frames and blank-off sheets, extended surface
high efficiency media filters with 95 percent dust spot efficiency.
Filter Gauges: 3-1/2 inch diameter diaphragm actuated dial in metal case, with static
pressure tips.
ECONOMIZER
A.
2.9
Drain Pans: 24 inch downstream of coil and down spouts for cooling coil banks more than
one coil high.
Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance with
ARI 410.
Fabrication:
1.
Tubes: 5/8 inch OD seamless copper expanded into fins, brazed joints.
2.
Fins: Aluminum.
3.
Casing: Die formed channel frame of galvanized steel.
Water Heating Coils:
1.
Headers: Cast iron, seamless copper tube, or prime coated steel pipe with brazed
joints.
2.
Configuration: Drainable, with threaded plugs for drain and vent; serpentine type
with return bends on smaller sizes and return headers on larger sizes.
Water Cooling Coils:
1.
Headers: Cast iron, seamless copper tube, or prime coated steel pipe with brazed
joints.
2.
Configuration: Drainable, with threaded plugs for drain and vent; threaded plugs in
return bends and in headers opposite each tube.
Mixing Boxes: Section with factory mounted outside and return air dampers of galvanized
steel and edge seals in galvanized frame, with galvanized steel axles in self-lubricating
brass bearings, in opposed blade arrangement with damper blades positioned across short
air opening dimension.
Outside Air Damper Leakage: Maximum 3.0 cfm per square foot at 1.0 inches wg pressure
differential.
OUTSIDE AIR MEASURING AND MODULATION DEVICE

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Factory mounted in outside air and return air openings.

Damper and airflow measurement assembly sized to accommodate economizer outside
airflow.

AIR-HANDLING UNITS
15721 - 5

Phase 2
C.
2.11
CONTROLS
A.
2.12
Controls: Refer to DDC controls.
CAPACITY
A.
2.13
Construction:
1.
Frame: Extruded aluminum.
2.
Blades:
a.
Modulating Air Control:
1)
Style: Airfoil-shaped, single-piece.
2)
Action: Parallel.
3)
Orientation: Horizontal.
4)
Material: Heavy gage 6063-T5 extruded aluminum.
5)
Width: Maximum 5 inches.
b.
Stationary Sensing:
1)
Style: Airfoil-shaped, single-piece.
2)
3)
Material: Heavy gage 6063-T5 extruded aluminum.
4)
Width: Maximum 5-1/4 inches.
5)
Finish: Anodized.
3.
Bearings: Self-lubricating molded synthetic sleeve, turning in extruded hole in
frame.
4.
Seals:
a.
Blade: Extruded rubber. Mechanically attached to blade edge.
b.
Jamb: Stainless steel, flexible metal compression type.
c.
Linkage: Concealed in frame.
d.
Axles: Minimum 1/2 inch diameter plated steel, hex-shaped, mechanically
attached to blade.
e.
Mounting: Vertical.
f.
Electric Actuator: 24 V, 60 Hz, modulating, with position feedback.
5.
Digital Controller: Application specific controller. Programming logic and
calibration in nonvolatile EPROM. Controller uses generic 0 - 10 vdc inputs and
outputs for interface to building automation system.
6.
Air Straightener Section: 3 inches deep section contained in 5 inch long sleeve
attached to damper-airflow monitor frame.
7.
Finish: Mill aluminum.
Refer to Air Handling Unit Schedule for capacity information.
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS

A.
03798614
03/15
Refer to Division 16 Specifications.

AIR-HANDLING UNITS
15721 - 6

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.3
Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before

starting work.
Verify roof curbs are installed and dimensions are as shown on shop drawings.
Install in accordance with ARI 430.

Roof Curb:
1.
Assemble roof curb.
2.
Install roof curb level.
3.
Install units on roof curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and
utility services.
4.
Install gasket material between unit base and roof curb.
Install flexible connections between unit and inlet and discharge ductwork. Install metal
bands of connectors parallel with minimum 1 inch flex between ductwork and fan while
running.
Install assembled units with vibration isolators. Install isolated fans with resilient
mountings and flexible electrical leads. Install restraining snubbers as required. Adjust
snubbers to prevent tension in flexible connectors when fan is operating.
Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to condensate drainage
system.
Provide sheaves required for final air balance.
Insulate coil headers located outside airflow as specified for piping.
INSTALLATION CHILLED WATER COOLING COIL

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
03798614
03/15
Make connections to coils with unions or flanges.

Connect water supply to leaving airside of coil (counter flow arrangement).
Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at top.
Install water coils to allow draining and install drain connection at low points.
Install the following piping accessories on chilled water piping connections.
1.
On supply:
a.
Thermometer well and thermometer.
b.
Well for control system temperature sensor.
c.
Shutoff valve.
d.
Strainer.
e.
Control valve.
f.
Pressure gage.
2.
On return:
a.
b.
c.
Pressure gage.
d.
Shutoff valve.
e.
3-way flow control valve.
Install valves and piping specialties in accordance with details as indicated on Drawings.
Install automatic air vents at high points complete with shutoff valve.
Install hot water piping accessories within unit casing.
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
15721 - 7

Phase 2
3.4
INSTALLATION HOT WATER HEATING COIL

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.5
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A.
B.
3.6

Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet.
Install new throwaway filters in units at Substantial Completion.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
B.
C.
3.8
Section 01450 - Quality Control: Requirements for manufacturers field services.

Furnish initial start-up and shutdown during first year of operation, including routine
servicing and checkout.
CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
3.7
Make connections to coils with unions or flanges.

Connect water supply to leaving airside of coil (counter flow arrangement).
Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at top.
Install water coils to allow draining and install drain connection at low points.
Install the following piping accessories on hot water piping connections.
1.
On supply:
a.
b.
c.
Shutoff valve.
d.
Strainer.
e.
Control valve.
f.
Pressure gage.
2.
On return:
a.
b.
c.
Pressure gage.
d.
Shutoff valve.
e.
3-way flow control valve.
Install valves and piping specialties in accordance with details as indicated on Drawings.
Install automatic air vents at high points complete with shutoff valve.
Install hot water piping accessories within unit casing.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training.

Demonstrate unit operation and maintenance.
Furnish services of manufacturer's technical representative for one 8-hour day to instruct
Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of units. Schedule training with Owner,
provide at least 7 days notice to Owner of training date.

A.
B.

Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and
fan has been test run under observation.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15

AIR-HANDLING UNITS
15721 - 8

Phase 2
SECTION 15810
DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.3

Duct Materials.
Insulated flexible ducts.
Single wall spiral round ducts.
Single wall spiral flat oval ducts.
Double wall spiral insulated round ducts.
Double wall spiral insulated flat oval ducts.
Casings.
Ductwork fabrication.
Duct cleaning.
REFERENCES
A.
03798614
03/15
ASTM International:
1.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2.
ASTM A90/A90M - Standard Test Method for Weight Mass of Coating on Iron and
Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings.
3.
Applications.
4.
5.
ASTM A568/A568M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and HighStrength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for.
6.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
7.
ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with
Improved Formability.
8.
A1011/A1011M-07 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with
Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength
9.
and Plate.
10. ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert
Pipe.
11. ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes,
DUCTS
15810 - 1

Phase 2
12.
B.
C.
D.
1.4
A.
1.5
C.
D.

Shop Drawings:
1.
Fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including plans, elevations, sections,
details of components, and attachments to other work.
2.
Fittings.
3.
Reinforcing details and spacing.
4.
Seam and joint construction details.
5.
Penetrations through fire rated and other walls.
6.
Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations.
7.
Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration
isolation, and duct attachment.
Product Data: Submit data for duct materials.
Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure,
and leakage rate, following SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.7
Variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss
coefficient is not permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in
place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and
round ducts.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.6
Materials.
1.
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems.
2.
NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air
Conditioning Systems.
3.
NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial
Cooking Operations.
1.
SMACNA - Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards.
2.
SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
3.
1.
UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.

Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record
changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
03798614
03/15
Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and flexible.
DUCTS
15810 - 2

Phase 2
B.
C.
1.8
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
B.
1.9
C.

Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant
manufacturers.
Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.11

A.
B.
1.10
Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B standards.

Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. Contractor may modify new ductwork
sizes as needed to install new ductwork at the existing conditions and maintain equivalent
internal free area for any modifications. All changes are to be noted and shown on the
AS-BUILT drawings as part of the closeout documents.
WARRANTY
A.
B.

Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for ducts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DUCT MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.2
Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653/A653M, galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming

quality, having G60 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90/A90M.
Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B209, aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum Connectors
and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061-T6 or of equivalent strength.
Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304.
Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M, steel, galvanized or aluminum (where required), threaded
both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded.
INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A.
03798614
03/15
Product Description: Two ply vinyl film supported by helical wound spring steel wire;
fiberglass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film.
1.
Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive and 1.0 inches wg negative.
2.
Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3.
Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F.
4.
Thermal Resistance: 6.0 square feet-hour-degree F per BTU.
DUCTS
15810 - 3

Phase 2
2.3
SINGLE WALL SPIRAL ROUND DUCTS

A.
B.
Product Description: UL 181, Class 1, round spiral lockseam duct constructed of

galvanized steel.
Construct duct with the following minimum gages:
Diameter
3 inches to 14 inches
C.
Gauge
26
24
22
20
18
Construct fittings with the following minimum gages:

Diameter
2.4
Gauge
24
22
20
20
18
16
SINGLE WALL SPIRAL FLAT OVAL DUCTS

A.
B.
C.
Product Description: Machine made from round spiral lockseam duct constructed of
galvanized steel; rated for 10 inches wg pressure.
Joints: Either fully welded or bolted flange with gasket material in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations.
Construct duct with the following minimum gauges:
Major Axis Dimension
84 inches and larger
D.
Gauge
24
22
20
18
16
Construct fittings with the following minimum gauges:

Major Axis Fitting Dimension
03798614
03/15
Gauge
20
18
16
DUCTS
15810 - 4

Phase 2
2.5
DOUBLE WALL SPIRAL INSULATED ROUND DUCTS

A.
B.
Product Description: Machine made from round spiral lockseam duct with light reinforcing
corrugations, galvanized steel outer wall, 2 inch thick glass fiber insulation, solid
galvanized steel inner wall; fittings manufactured with solid inner wall.
Construct round duct with the following minimum gages:
Diameter
C.
Gauge
26
24
22
20
18
Construct round fittings with the following minimum gages:

Diameter
2.6
Gauge
24
22
20
20
18
16
DOUBLE WALL SPIRAL INSULATED FLAT OVAL DUCTS

A.
B.
Product Description: Machine made from round spiral lockseam duct with light reinforcing
corrugations, galvanized steel outer wall, 2 inch thick glass fiber insulation, solid
galvanized steel inner wall; fittings manufactured with solid inner wall.
Construct flat oval duct with the following minimum gauges:
Major Axis Dimension
C.
Gauge
24
22
20
18
16
Construct flat oval fittings with the following minimum gauges:

Major Axis Fitting Dimension
2.7
Gauge
20
18
16
CASINGS
A.
03798614
03/15
Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible and construct for operating pressures indicated.
DUCTS
15810 - 5

Phase 2
B.
C.
2.8
Reinforce access door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum
supporting angles. Furnish hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to
equipment for cleaning and inspection.
Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Furnish 16 gage back facing and
22 gage front facing panel. Construct panels 3 inches thick packed with 4.5 lb./cu. ft.
minimum glass fiber media, on inverted channels of 16 gage.
DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Fabricate and support rectangular ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and as indicated on Drawings. Provide duct
material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
Construct T's, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times centerline duct width.
Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil turning vanes.
Where acoustical lining is indicated, furnish turning vanes of perforated metal with glass
fiber insulation.
Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;
maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence
downstream.
Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct
gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or
electric welded. Prime coat welded joints.
Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs. When space does not allow 45-degree
lateral wye takeoff, use 90-degree conical tee connections.
Seal joints between duct sections and duct seams with welds, gaskets, mastic adhesives,
mastic plus embedded fabric systems, or tape.
1.
Sealants, Mastics and Tapes: Conform to UL 181A. Provide products bearing
appropriate UL 181A markings.
2.
Do not provide sealing products not bearing UL approval markings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2

Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible.
During construction, install temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
Use crimp joints with or without bead or beaded sleeve couplings for joining round duct
sizes 8 inch and smaller.
Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with Section 15061.
Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
Slope underground ducts to plenums or low pump out points at 1: 500. Install access doors
for inspection.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
DUCTS
15810 - 6

Phase 2
H.
I.
J.
3.3

A.
B.
C.
3.4
C.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.

Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust.
To obtain sufficient air flow, clean one half of system completely before proceeding to
other half. Protect equipment with potential to be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary
filters, or bypass during cleaning.
Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment with potential to
be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Install access openings
into ductwork for cleaning purposes.
TESTING
A.
3.6
Install openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and

controllers. Install pitot tube openings for testing of systems. Install pitot tube complete
with metal can with spring device or screw to prevent air leakage. Where openings are
provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside metal ring.
Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with 5 feet
maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp.
Connect air terminal units to supply ducts directly. Do not use flexible duct to change
direction.
CLEANING
A.
B.
3.5
Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swing so fan static pressure
holds door in closed position.
Casings: Install floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels
on 8 inch centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, furnish liner of 18 gage
galvanized expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides
with sheet metal shields.
Exhaust Outlet Locations:
1.
Minimum Distance from Building Openings: 3 feet.
2.
Minimum Distance from Outside Air Intakes: 10 feet.
For ductwork designed for 3 inches w.c. above ambient, pressure test minimum 25 percent
of ductwork after duct cleaning, but before duct insulation is applied or ductwork is
concealed.
1.
Test in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
2.
Maximum Allowable Leakage: In accordance with ICC IECC.
SCHEDULES
A.
Ductwork Material Schedule:

AIR SYSTEM
Supply
Return and Relief
General Exhaust
03798614
03/15
MATERIAL
Steel, Aluminum
Steel, Aluminum
Steel, Aluminum
DUCTS
15810 - 7

Phase 2
B.
Ductwork Pressure Class Schedule:

AIR SYSTEM
Supply
Return and Relief
General Exhaust
PRESSURE CLASS
1 inch wg
1 inch wg regardless of velocity.
1 inch wg regardless of velocity.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
DUCTS
15810 - 8

Phase 2
SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.3
Back-draft dampers.
Combination fire-and-smoke dampers.
Duct access doors.
Smoke dampers.
Volume control dampers.
Flexible duct connections.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.4


1.
ASTM International:
1.
ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers.
1.
Systems.
2.
NFPA 92A - Recommended Practice for Smoke-Control Systems.
1.
1.
UL 555 - Standard for Safety for Fire Dampers.
2.
UL 555C - Standard for Safety for Ceiling Dampers.
3.
UL 555S - Standard for Safety for Smoke Dampers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15

Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers.
Product Data: Submit data for shop fabricated assemblies and hardware used.
Product Data: Submit for the following. Include where applicable electrical characteristics
and connection requirements.
1.
Fire dampers including locations and ratings.
2.
Smoke dampers including locations and ratings.
3.
Backdraft dampers.
4.
Flexible duct connections.
5.
Volume control dampers.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820 - 1

Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.6
C.
D.
E.

Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and
packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material.
Storage: Store materials in a dry area indoor, protected from damage.
Handling: Handle and lift dampers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect
materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.10


A.
B.
C.
1.9
Dampers tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest UL requirements.
Damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with
AMCA 500.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.8

Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of access doors.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.7
6.
Duct access doors.
7.
Duct test holes.
Product Data: For combination fire and smoke dampers submit the following:
1.
Include UL ratings, dynamic ratings, leakage, pressure drop and maximum pressure
data.
2.
Indicate materials, construction, dimensions, and installation details.
3.
Damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in
accordance with AMCA 500.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for Fire and Combination Smoke and Fire
Dampers.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15

conditions.
Coordinate Work where appropriate with building control Work.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820 - 2

Phase 2
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
B.

Furnish five-year manufacturer warranty for duct accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BACK-DRAFT DAMPERS
A.
2.2
COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
2.3
Product Description: Multi-Blade, back-draft dampers: Parallel-action, gravity-balanced,

galvanized 16 gage thick steel, or extruded aluminum. Blades, maximum 6 inch width,
center pivoted, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges. Blades linked together in rattle-free
manner with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin. Furnish
dampers with adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, and UL 555S.

Fire Resistance: 1-1/2 hours or 3 hours. Where applicable, verify with architectural
drawings.
Leakage Rating: Class II, maximum of 20 cfm at 4 inches wg differential pressure.
Damper Temperature Rating: 250 degrees F.
Frame: 16 gage, galvanized steel.
Blades:
1.
Style: Single skin with 3 longitudinal grooves or airfoil-shaped, single piece, double
skin, depending on fire resistance rating.
2.
Action: Opposed.
3.
4.
Material: Minimum 16 gage equivalent thickness, galvanized steel.
5.
Bearings: Stainless steel pressed into frame.
Seals: Silicone blade edge seals and flexible stainless steel jamb seals.
Release Device: Close in controlled manner and allow damper to be automatically reset.
Actuator:
1.
Type: Electric 120 volt, 60 hertz, two-position, fail close.
2.
Mounting: External.
Fusible Link Release Temperature: 165 degrees F.
Finish: Mill galvanized.
Factory installed sleeve and mounting angles. Furnish silicone caulk factory applied to
sleeve at damper frame to comply with leakage rating requirements.
DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A.
03798614
03/15
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820 - 3

Phase 2
B.
2.4
SMOKE DAMPERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
2.5
Fabrication: Rigid and close fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick
fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, furnish minimum 1 inch thick insulation
with sheet metal cover.
1.
Less than 12 inches square, secure with sash locks.
2.
Up to 18 inches Square: Furnish two hinges and two sash locks.
3.
Up to 24 x 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches.
4.
Larger Sizes: Furnish additional hinge.
5.
Access panels with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555S.

Fire Resistance: 1-1/2 hours.
Leakage Rating: Class II, maximum of 20 cfm at 4 inches wg differential pressure.
Damper Temperature Rating: 250 degrees F.
Frame: 16 gage, galvanized steel.
Blades:
1.
Style: Single skin with 3 longitudinal grooves.
2.
Action: Opposed.
3.
4.
Material: Minimum 16 gage equivalent thickness, galvanized steel.
5.
Bearings: Stainless steel pressed into frame.
Seals: Silicone blade edge seals and flexible stainless steel jamb seals.
Actuator:
1.
Type: Electric 120 volt, 60 hertz, two-position, fail close.
2.
Mounting: External.
Sleeve: Factory installed 20 gage sleeve, minimum 12 inches long.
Finish: Mill galvanized.
VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Flexible.
Splitter Dampers:
1.
Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in both dimensions, and two gages
heavier for sizes over 24 inches.
2.
Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with
continuous hinge or rod.
3.
Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action,
flanged bushing with set screw.
4.
Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch.
Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes
8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized frame
channel with suitable hardware.
End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, furnish end bearings. On
multiple blade dampers, furnish oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. Furnish
closed end bearings on ducts having pressure classification over 2 inches wg.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820 - 4

Phase 2
E.
2.6
Quadrants:
1.
Furnish locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.
2.
On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on standoff mounting brackets, bases,
or adapters.
3.
Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches furnish regulator at both ends.
FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A.
B.
C.
Flexible.
Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.
1.
Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric conforming
to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz. per sq. yd.
2.
Net Fabric Width: Approximately 3 inches wide.
3.
Metal: 3 inch wide, 24 gage galvanized steel.
Leaded Vinyl Sheet: Minimum 0.55 inch thick, 0.87 lbs. per sq. ft., 10 dB attenuation in
10 to 10,000 Hz range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2

conditions.
Verify rated walls are ready for fire damper installation.
Verify ducts and equipment installation are ready for accessories.
Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to
conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Install in accordance with NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible.
Access Doors: Install access doors at the following locations:
1.
Before and after each combination fire and smoke damper.
Access Door Sizes: Install minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for
shoulder access. Review locations prior to fabrication.
1.
Mark access doors for fire and smoke dampers on outside surface, with minimum
1/2 inch high letters reading: FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER.
Install combination fire and smoke dampers at locations as indicated on Drawings. Install
with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion
resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.
1.
Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with
NFPA 92A.
2.
Install dampers square and free from racking with blades running horizontally.
3.
Do not compress or stretch damper frame into duct or opening.
4.
Handle damper using sleeve or frame. Do not lift damper using blades, actuator, or
jack shaft.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820 - 5

Phase 2
5.
Install bracing for multiple section assemblies to support assembly weight and to
hold against system pressure. Install bracing as needed.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820 - 6

Phase 2
SECTION 15840
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3
B.
C.
D.
American Refrigeration Institute:

1.
ARI 880 - Air Terminals.
2.
ARI 885 - Procedure for Estimating Occupied Space Sound Levels in the
Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets.
1.
1.
Systems.
1.
UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
Fan powered terminal units.

Single duct variable air volume terminal units with reheat coils.
REFERENCES
A.
1.4


Product Data: Submit data indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials used
in fabrication. Include catalog performance ratings indicating airflow, static pressure,
heating coil capacity, and NC designation. Include electrical characteristics and connection
requirements. Include schedules listing discharge and radiated sound power level for each
of second through sixth octave bands at inlet static pressures of 1 inch to 4 inches wg.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit support and hanging details, and service
clearances required.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15

Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of units.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating
instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts lists. Include directions for resetting
constant volume regulators.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
15840 - 1

Phase 2
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
B.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
B.
1.10

FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.9
Test and rate air terminal units performance for air pressure drop, flow performance, and
acoustical performance in accordance with ARI 880 and ARI 885. Attach ARI seal to each
terminal unit.

Coordinate Work with Section 15902 - Controls & Instrumentation - DDC.
WARRANTY
A.
B.

Furnish five-year manufacturer warranty for air terminal units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FAN POWERED VARIABLE VOLUME UNITS

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Product Description: Variable air volume terminals for connection to central air systems
with electronic controls and hot water heating coils.
Identification: Furnish each air terminal unit with identification label and airflow indicator.
Include unit nominal airflow, maximum factory-set airflow and minimum factory-set
airflow and coil type.
Basic Assembly:
1.
Casings: Minimum 22 gage galvanized steel.
2.
Lining: Minimum 1 inch thick neoprene or vinyl coated glass fiber insulation,
1.5 lb./cu. ft. density, meeting NFPA 90A requirements and UL 181 erosion
requirements. Face lining with 10 mil Mylar film.
3.
Plenum Air Inlets: Round stub connections and S slip and drive connections for duct
attachment.
4.
Plenum Air Outlets: S-slip and drive connections.
Basic Unit:
1.
Configuration: Air volume damper assembly and fan in parallel arrangement inside
unit casing. Locate control components inside protective metal shroud.
2.
Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and selflubricating bearings; maximum damper leakage: 2 percent of design air flow at
3 inches rated inlet static pressure.
3.
Mount damper operator to position damper normally open.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
15840 - 2

Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
2.2
Automatic Damper Operator:

1.
Electric Actuator: 24 volt with remote temperature read and reset capability.
Fan Assembly:
1.
Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type with direct drive permanent-split-capacitor
type, thermally protected motor.
2.
Speed Control: Infinitely adjustable with electronic controls.
3.
Isolation: Fan/motor assembly on rubber isolators.
4.
Electrical Characteristics: Refer to Division 16.
Attenuation Section: Line attenuation sections with 2 inch thick insulation.
Hot Water Heating Coil:
1.
Construction: 1/2 inch copper tube mechanically expanded into aluminum plate fins,
leak tested under water to 200 psig pressure, factory installed.
2.
Capacity: Based on 180 degree F entering water, 160 degree F leaving water and
50 percent total air volume.
Wiring:
1.
Factory mount and wire controls. Mount electrical components in control box with
removable cover. Incorporate single point electrical connection to power source.
2.
Factory mount transformer for control voltage on electric and electronic control
units. Furnish terminal strip in control box for field wiring of thermostat and power
source.
3.
Wiring Terminations: Wire fan and controls to terminal strip. Furnish terminal lugs
to match branch-circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose
terminal lugs in terminal box.
4.
Disconnect Switch: Factory mount fused disconnect switch in control panel.
Sound Ratings: Not to exceed 25 NC.
Controls: Electronic Controls: Contain in NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure with access panel
sealed from airflow and mounted on side of unit. Factory mount controls and thermostat.
Thermostat: Wall-mounted electric type with appropriate mounting hardware.
SINGLE DUCT VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS WITH REHEAT COILS
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Product Description: Variable air volume terminal units for connection to central air
systems, with electronic controls, and hot water reheat coils.
Identification: Furnish each air terminal unit with identification label and airflow indicator.
Include unit nominal airflow, maximum factory-set airflow, and minimum factory-set
airflow and coil type.
Basic Assembly:
1.
Casings: Minimum 22 gage galvanized steel.
2.
Lining: Minimum 1 inch thick neoprene or vinyl coated glass fiber insulation,
1.5 lb./cu. ft. density, meeting NFPA 90A requirements and UL 181 erosion
requirements.
3.
Plenum Air Inlets: Round stub connections for duct attachment.
4.
Plenum Air Outlets: S slip-and-drive connections.
Basic Unit:
1.
Configuration: Air volume damper assembly inside unit casing. Locate control
components inside protective metal shroud.
2.
Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and
self-lubricating bearings; maximum damper leakage: 2 percent of design air flow at
2 inches rated inlet static pressure.
3.
Mount damper operator to position damper normally open.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
15840 - 3

Phase 2
4.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Hot Water Heating Coil:

a.
Construction: 1/2 inch copper tube mechanically expanded into aluminum
plate fins, leak tested under water to 200 psig pressure, factory installed.
b.
Capacity: Based on 180 degree F entering water, 150 degree F leaving water
at heating CFM scheduled or 50% of total volume, whichever is greater.
Electrical Characteristics: Refer to Division 16 for electrical information.
Automatic Damper Operator: 24 volt with remote temperature read and reset capability.
Calibration pressure taps for pressure independent control to compensate for varying inlet
static pressure.
Maintain airflow to within 5 percent of set point with inlet static pressure variations up to
2 inches.
Sound Ratings: Not to exceed 35 NC at 2.0 psi static pressure.
Thermostat: Refer to Direct Digital Controls.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.3
Connect to ductwork in accordance with Section 15810.

Install ceiling access doors or locate units above easily removable ceiling components.
Support units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork.
Support air terminal units connected by flexible duct independently of flexible duct.
Install transition piece to match flexible duct size to inlet or outlet of variable air volume
terminal.
ADJUSTING
A.
B.
3.4

conditions.
Verify ductwork is ready for air terminal installation.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for starting and adjusting.

Reset volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing flow range modulation
from 100 percent of design flow to 50 percent full flow. Set units with heating coils for
minimum 50 percent full flow.
SCHEDULES
A.
Refer to Schedule sheets.

END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
15840 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 15850
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
B.
C.
C.
D.

Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.7

Product Data: Submit sizes, finish, and type of mounting. Submit schedule of outlets and
inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.
Test Reports: Rating of air outlet and inlet performance.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.6

1.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1.
ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and
Inlets.
1.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.5
Diffusers.
Registers
Grilles.
Louvers.
REFERENCES
A.
1.4

Test and rate diffuser, register, and grille performance in accordance with ASHRAE 70.
Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
03798614
03/15

15850 - 1

Phase 2
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
B.

Furnish five-year manufacturer warranty for air outlets and inlets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Refer to Construction Drawings for Air Distribution Schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
Section 01310 Project Management and Coordination: Coordination and project

conditions.
Verify inlet and outlet locations.
Verify ceiling or wall systems are ready for installation.
Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection.

Install balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, whether or not
dampers are furnished as part of diffuser, grille, and register assembly.
Paint visible portion of ductwork behind air outlets and inlets matte black.
Do not locate air registers, diffusers or grilles in floors of toilet or bathing rooms.

A.
Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform
to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
15850 - 2

Phase 2
SECTIONS 15902
CONTROLS & INSTRUMENTATION - DDC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3

Johnson Controls, Inc.

No Exceptions.
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
Provide new DDC controllers, digital thermostats, damper, and valve actuators meeting
this specification and the existing JCI NAE direct digital control system at the facility.
Contractor to verify the exact size and quantity of the actuators required on the valves and
dampers for the existing second floor air handling unit. The existing second floor air
handling unit is the only piece of existing HVAC equipment being converted to new DDC
controls in this phase of the project. The existing pneumatic controls for the remaining
portions of the second floor and the remaining portions of the building shall remain
operational during and after this Project.
Furnish and install an energy management system to control the new equipment as shown
on the drawings and described herein.
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and operating
temperature control system, utilizing a high speed peer to peer network of Direct Digital
Controls as shown on the drawings and as described herein.
Drawings are diagrammatic only. Equipment and labor not specifically referred to herein
or on the plans, that are required to meet the functional intent, shall be provided without
additional cost to the Owner.
Complete temperature control system to be DDC with electronic sensors and electric
actuation of valves and dampers and electronic actuation of terminal equipment valves and
actuators as specified herein.
All work described in this section shall be installed, wired, circuit tested and calibrated by
factory certified technicians qualified for this work and in the regular employment of the
temperature control system manufacturer. The local installing office shall be a
manufactured owned branch and shall have a minimum of twenty years of installation
experience. Supervision, calibration and checkout of the system shall be by the employees
of the local temperature control contracting office. Supplier shall have an in place support
facility within 150 miles of the site with technical staff, spare parts inventory and all
necessary test and diagnostic equipment.
All installation labor (i.e., wiring, conduit, tubing, etc.) and installation material for the
installation of the control system, including all power requirements, shall be provided by
the temperature control subcontractor.
CONTROLS & INSTRUMENTATION DDC
15902 - 1

Phase 2
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
1.5
FMS DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
C.
1.6
ASC: Application Specific Controller.

AHU: Air Handling Unit.
BMS: Building Management System.
DDC: Direct Digital Control.
FMS: Facility Management System.
GUI: Graphical User Interface.
HVAC: Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning.
LAN: Local Area Network.
NAE: Network Automation Engineer.
UNT: Unitary Controller.
VAV: Variable Air Volume.
PID: Proportional, Integral, Derivative.
UDP: User Datagram Protocol.
The FMS shall be a complete system designed for use on Intranets and the Internet. This
functionality shall extend into the equipment rooms. Primary nodes located in equipment
rooms and similar shall be fully IT compatible devices that mount and communicate
directly on the IT infrastructure existing in the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for
coordination with the Owners IT staff to ensure that the FMS will perform in the Owners
environment without disruption to any of the other activities taking place on that LAN.
All points of user interface shall be on standard PCs that do not require the purchase of any
special software from the FMS manufacturer for use as a building operations terminal. The
primary point of interface on these PCs will be a standard Web Browser such as Internet
Explorer or Netscape.
The FMS work shall consist of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, software, software
licenses, wiring, tubing, installation, engineering, calibration, documentation, submittals,
testing, verification, training services, permits and licenses, management, warranties,
services and items as Specified in these Division documents which are required for the
complete, fully functional and commissioned FMS.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Bids by wholesalers, franchised, and non-franchised contractors shall not be acceptable.

The system manufacturer shall, as a minimum, manufacture and supply the Application
Specific Controllers, Supervisory Controllers, Graphical User Interface, damper actuators,
and valve actuator assemblies.
All work described in this section shall be installed, wired, circuit tested and calibrated by
factory certified technicians qualified for this work and in the direct employment of the
temperature control system manufacturer.
The Building Management System contractor shall have a full service facility within
20 miles of the project that is staffed with engineers in Johnson Controls systems and
technicians fully capable of providing instructions and routine emergency maintenance
service on all Johnson Controls system components.
Mechanical equipment manufacturers desiring to provide DDC type controls as factory
mounted equipment shall not be acceptable.
15902 - 2

Phase 2
F.
G.
H.
1.7

A.
1.8
Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are

indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to
unit manufacturer.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
1.9

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems."
Comply with National Electric Code.
Coordinate location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with plans and room
details before installation.
Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical circuits for control units and panels.
SYSTEM INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
03798614
03/15
All exposed temperature control and interlock wiring shall be installed in conduit, unless
otherwise noted on the plans. Power or interlock wiring shall be run in separate conduit
from sensor and communications wiring.
All non-plenum rated cable will be run in conduit from termination to termination points.
Plenum rated cabling run in the return plenum above dropped ceilings does not need to be
run in conduit, but shall be installed and supported as close as possible to the structural
members. Main cable bundles shall, in general, run above Corridor ceilings, with
individual cables extending above ceiling to the terminal units. Cable shall not lay on the
ceiling grid, lights, ductwork etc. It will be run at right angles, parallel and perpendicular to
the building lines with runnouts into rooms being perpendicular to the main cable bundles.
All wiring within Mechanical Rooms or Air Handling Rooms shall be run in conduit.
Wiring extending from these rooms shall be installed in conduit that extends a minimum of
12 inches beyond the mechanical room wall. Remote satellite boxes used for housing
control transformers shall be located above accessible ceilings of Corridors within 10 feet
of mechanical rooms. Control transformers shall not be installed above ceilings of limited
access areas such as offices, conference rooms, office suites, etc., or above non-accessible
ceilings.
All plenum rated cabling run in standard drywall construction will be run inside the wall in
new or existing conduit which extends six inches above the top plate of the wall and
exiting the wall through standard wall boxes.
On wall constructed of solid concrete, cinder block or plaster, cables will be run in
concealed conduit, surface wire mold or other approved raceway.
No ceiling tiles will be removed or holes punched out to accommodate cable penetration
into a room.
All cabling will be labeled or tagged to indicate system served and termination number.
Matching labels are required on both ends of the cable. Bundle labels shall be provided at
every 50 feet on exposed runs or 25 feet on concealed runs, and at every entry/exit point
throughout the run.
Cabling shall be bundled neatly and well secured using nylon zip straps. It shall not be
wrapped around piping or conduit. Support cabling at walls, to sub-ceiling or structural
steel with wall locks or clamps. Cabling shall not be installed with excessive slack.
15902 - 3

Phase 2
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
1.10
Cables requiring crimp-on connectors must have those connectors attached with an
appropriate and recommended specialized crimping tool.
The Temperature Control Contractor in accordance with the requirements as stated in
Division 16 shall install all line voltage and low voltage control wiring.
Identify each item, mounted on the face of a control panel, with an engraved nameplate
(1/4 inch high engraved letters minimum).
Thermostats or sensors mounted on outside walls shall be mounted on an insulated
mounting base (or equal).
All sensor elements in water lines shall be installed in separable wells, packed with heat
conductive compound.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Graphic Display. The system shall display a graphic with 20 dynamic points with all
current data within 20 seconds.
Graphic Refresh. The system shall update a graphic with 20 dynamic points with all
current data within 20 seconds.
Object Command. The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the
operator and the reaction by the device shall be less than 5 seconds. Analog objects should
start to adjust within 5 seconds.
Object Scan. All changes of state and change of analog values will be transmitted over the
high-speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or workstation will
be updated within 60 seconds.
Alarm Response Time. The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it
is annunciated at the workstation shall be 20 seconds.
Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of
running as often as once every 5 seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting
execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.
Performance. Digital controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops at a
selectable frequency of at least once per second. The controller shall scan and update the
process value and output generated by this calculation at this same frequency.
Multiple Alarm Annunciation. All workstations on the network must receive alarms within
5 seconds of each other.
Reporting Accuracy. The system shall report all values with an end-to-end accuracy as
listed or better than those listed below.
Measure Variable
Space Temperature
Ducted Air
Outside Air
Dew point
Water Temperature
Relative Humidity
Water Flow
Airflow (terminal)
Airflow (measuring stations)
Air Pressure (ducts)
Air Pressure (space)
03798614
03/15
Reported Accuracy
1 F
1 F
2 F
3 F
1 F
5% RH
5% of full scale
10% of reading
5% of full scale
0.1 inch W.G.
0.01 inch W.G.
15902 - 4

Phase 2
Measure Variable
Water Pressure
Electrical
Carbon Dioxide (CO2)
J.
Stability of Control. Control loops shall maintain measured variable at set point within the
tolerances listed below:
Controlled
Variable
Air Pressure
Airflow
Temperature
Humidity
Fluid Pressure
1.11
Control
Accuracy
0.2 inch w.g.
0.01 inch w.g.
5% of full scale
1.0 F
5% RH
1.5 psi
1.0 inch w.g.
Range of
Medium
0-6 inch w.g.
-0.1 to 0.1 inch w.g.
1-150 psi
0-50 inch w.g. differential
WORK BY OTHERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.12
Reported Accuracy
2% of full scale (absolute or differential)
5% of reading (A, V, W, Power factor)
5% of reading
Automatic Valves: Installed under applicable piping section under supervision of the
temperature control subcontractor. All reducers and fittings necessary to install smaller
than pipe size valves shall be furnished and installed under applicable piping sections.
Automatic Dampers: Installed under Division 15, Air Distribution System, under
supervision of the temperature control subcontractor.
Smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed by the Division 16 contractor. The
temperature controls subcontractor shall be responsible for interlock wiring between the
smoke detectors and the air handling unit safety circuits.
Motor starters shall be furnished and installed by the Division 16 contractor. The
temperature controls subcontractor shall be responsible for all wiring necessary involving
the starter to perform the sequence of operation specified.
SHOP DRAWINGS/SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Ten (10) copies of shop drawings of the entire control system shall be submitted and shall
consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturer's catalog data
sheets and installation instructions. Shop drawings shall also contain complete wiring and
schematic diagrams, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to
demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a system.
Terminal identification for all control wiring shall be shown on the shop drawings.
A complete written Sequence of Operation as well as a hard copy graphical depiction of
the application control programs shall also be included with the submittal package. Device
identification as shown on the control schematics and wiring diagrams shall be referenced
in the written Sequence of Operation.
Listing and explanation of both standard and user defined configuration parameters for the
device.
System Architecture: Provide a schematic diagram of the Local Area Network and Johnson
Controls architecture diagram indicating supervisory controllers, Graphical User
Interface(s) and database server(s) including all devices and controllers installed by other
trade contractors. This should be accompanied by explicit information regarding
configuration of Routers, Bridges and Repeaters. Schematic shall also include interface
15902 - 5

Phase 2
requirements with other systems including but not limited to: security systems, lighting
controls, fire alarm, elevator status, power monitoring system. Diagrams detailing the
variables mapped between protocols shall be submitted for all gateways. Each schematic
shall have all control points labeled. The schematic shall graphically show all control
elements. The point name format shall be approved by Gary Davis at Covenant Health
System before any drawing or programming proceeds.
1.13
WARRANTY
A.
B.
The temperature control system contractor shall provide a one (1) year warranty that will
commence from the Date of Substantial Completion as determined by the Architect.
The controls contractor shall respond to the job site within a 4 hour period for any
emergency relating to the control system during the warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
B.
2.2
All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, of regular manufacture for
this application. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven
in actual use.
All products used in this project shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be
applied in similar installations for a minimum of 2 years. This installation shall not be used
as a test site for any new products unless explicitly approved by the Owners
Representative in writing. Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after
completion of this contract.
MATERIALS
A.
Wiring and Conduit: All wire shall be copper and meet the minimum wire size and
insulation class listed below:
Wire Class
Power
Class One
Class Two
Class Three
Communications
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Wire Size
Isolation Class
12 Gauge
600 Volt
14 Gauge Std.
600 Volt
18 Gauge Std.
300 Volt
18 Gauge Std.
300 volt
Per Mfr. Recommendations
Power and Class One wiring may be run in the same conduit. Class Two and Three wiring
and communications wiring may be run in the same conduit.
Where different wiring classes terminate within the same enclosure, maintain clearances
and install barriers per the National Electric Code.
Where wiring is required to be installed in conduit, EMT shall be used. Conduit shall be
minimum 1/2 inch galvanized EMT. Watertight compression fittings shall be used. Provide
conduit sealoff fitting where exterior conduits enter the building or between areas of high
temperature/moisture differential.
Flexible metallic conduit (max. 3 feet) shall be used for connections to controllers, and
sensors mounted on vibration producing equipment. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be
use in exterior locations and interior locations subject to moisture.
15902 - 6

Phase 2
F.
2.3
CONTROL VALVES
A.
2.4
B.
Control air damper actuators shall be electric, low voltage (24 VAC) utilizing a 4-20 mA
modulating control signal as required by the sequence of operation. Each actuator shall
incorporate a spring return to position the dampers to their normal positions upon a loss of
the 24 VAC control power. Control air damper actuators shall be properly sized to provide
sufficient torque to their respective dampers throughout the actuators operating range. All
control air damper actuators shall be mounted outside of the air stream.
Valve actuators for heating water and chilled water systems shall be electric. Operators
shall be sized to operate their appropriate valves with sufficient reserve power to provide
smooth modulating action or two-position action as specified.
CONTROL PANELS
A.
2.7
Control air dampers shall be parallel blade for two-position control and opposed blade for
modulating control applications. Dampers shall be black enamel finish or galvanized, with
nylon bearings. Blade edge and tip seals shall be included for all dampers. Leakage
through the damper shall not exceed 6 CFM per square foot at 4 inches w.g. (based on a
48" x 48" test sample). Blades shall be 16 gauge minimum and 10 inches wide maximum
and frame shall be of welded channel iron. Dampers with both dimensions under 18 inches
may have strap iron frames. Dampers over 48 inches wide shall be equipped with a jack
shaft to provide sufficient force throughout the intended operating range.
DAMPER AND VALVE ACTUATORS

A.
2.6
Control valves shall be three-way pattern, constructed for tight shutoff and shall operate
satisfactorily against system pressures and differentials. Valves with size up to and
including 2-1/2 inches shall be "screwed" with 250 psi ANSI pressure body rating; 3 inches
and larger valves shall be flanged configuration. Proportional control valves shall be
sized for a maximum pressure drop of 5.0 psig at rated flow (except as noted).
CONTROL AIR DAMPERS

A.
2.5
Junction boxes shall be provided at all cable splices, equipment terminations, and
transitions from EMT to flexible conduit. Interior dry location J-boxes shall be galvanized
pressed steel, nominal four-inch square with blank cover. Exterior and damp location
JH-boxes shall be cast alloy FS boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed covers.
All application specific direct digital controllers, not specifically designed for direct
mounting on the equipment served, shall be installed in NEMA 1 enclosures. Enclosures
shall be of suitable size to accommodate all power supplies, relays and accessories required
for the application. Each enclosure shall include a perforated subpanel for direct mounting
of the enclosed devices. Include matched key locks for all enclosures provided.
TEMPERATURE SENSORS
A.
03798614
03/15
Duct/Well Sensors:
1.
As required by the sequence of operation, provide either 1,000 Balco or 10K
Thermistor type sensors. Where the element is used for sensing mixed air or coil
discharge temperatures and/or the duct cross-sectional area is in excess of 14 square
feet, the element shall be of the averaging type. Where temperature elements are
15902 - 7

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.8
used for sensing liquid temperatures, they shall be furnished with separable stainless
steel wells. Provide a Johnson Controls TE-6311M-1 for ductwork temperature
sensors. Provide a Johnson Controls NS-DTN7043-0 for fan powered terminal box
discharge temperature sensors.
Space Sensors:
1.
Space temperature sensors shall be Resistance temperature devices (RTD) or
thermistor equipped with set point adjustment, override switch, display, and
communication port. Provide a Johnson Controls NS-BTB7002.
Binary Temperature Devices:
1.
Low-limit thermostats. Low-limit thermostats shall be vapor pressure type with an
element 20 ft minimum length. Element shall respond to the lowest temperature
sensed by any 1 ft section. The low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only.
Provide a Johnson Controls A70HA-1C.
Analog Current Sensors:
1.
As required by the sequence of operation, provide split-core, sensors for indication
of equipment amperage. Span shall be adjustable for improved resolution. Current
sensors shall incorporate trip indication LEDs and shall be sized for proper operation
with equipment they serve. Current sensors and installation to be provided under
work of this section. Provide a Veris H735.
Pressure Switches:
1.
Differential pressure type switches shall be UL Listed, SPDT snap acting, pilot duty
rated, NEMA 4 enclosure, with scale range and differential suitable for intended
applications, or as shown. Provide a Johnson Controls DPT2641-005 to measure
duct pressure. Provide a Johnson Controls AFS-460 for high and low duct pressure
switches.
2.
As required by the sequence of operation, provide a differential pressure switch
across each air handling unit filter section for unit filter alarm indication. Provide a
Johnson Controls P32AC-2C.
Temperature/Humidity Sensors:
1.
The humidity and a temperature sensor shall be combined in a single unit as a ductmount style. The humidity sensor shall be capable of measuring Relative Humidity
(RH) over the entire range of 0 to 100%. It shall be housed in an all-polymer
construction for resistance to chemical corrosion. The sensor shall produce voltage
output signals proportional to measured humidity for humidity indication. The
temperature sensor shall be thin-film nickel. The sensor shall comply with National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). Provide a Johnson Controls
HE-67N3-0N00P. Place these sensors in the return air ductwork to the floor air
handler.
Outside Air Temperature/Humidity Sensors:
1.
Sensors shall have a thermoplastic conduit box with 1/2-14 NPT female thread for
connecting to conduit. Use the 1/2-14 NPT female thread to mount the Outdoor Air
models directly to ridged conduit. Sensors shall be 1k thin-film nickel. Provide a
Johnson Controls HE-67N3-0N00P. Place these sensors in the outside air ductwork
to the floor air handling unit.
DDC EQUIPMENT
A.
03798614
03/15
Workstation Client Hardware Stations: The system shall be capable of supporting at least
5 clients using a standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape
15902 - 8

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
2.9
Navigator operating on any standard computer that supports the current version of
Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
Web Browser Clients:
The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics,
schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided
by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that require
different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be
permitted.
The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions:
1.
User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user
attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java
authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be
implemented.
2.
Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the Web
browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI shall be
supported by the Web browser interface.
3.
HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a
Web page. HTML editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires a
specific look or format.
4.
Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Building Control Units (BC), without
requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems that require
graphics storage on each client are not acceptable.
5.
Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without
requiring a manual refresh of the Web page.
6.
Users shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the access
privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following:
7.
Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points in
a graphical manner.
8.
Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any
keyboard entry from the operator.
9.
Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard
entry from the operator.
10. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the
selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu.
11. View logs and charts.
12. View and acknowledge alarms.
13. The system shall provide the capability to specify a users (as determined by the
log-on user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to
just their defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or pages in
the system shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator.
14. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other
locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource
Locator (URL) for the desired link.
CONTROL UNITS, GENERAL

A.
03798614
03/15
Provide an adequate number of control units to achieve monitoring and control of all data
points specified and necessary to satisfy the sequence of operation for all mechanical
systems shown on the plans. Provide a minimum of one separate controller for each AHU
or other HVAC system. Multiple DDC controllers may control one system provided that
15902 - 9

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.10
all points associated with individual control loops are assigned to the same DDC controller.
Points used for control loop reset such as outside air or space temperature are exempt from
this requirement. Each of the following panel types shall meet the following requirements.
Controllers shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.
Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted within
waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 F to 140 F and 5 to
95% RH, non-condensing.
Controllers used in conditioned ambient space shall be mounted in dust-proof enclosures,
and shall be rated for operation at 32 F to 122 F and 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing.
Serviceability: Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All
wiring connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a
termination card connected by a ribbon cable.
Memory: The Control Units shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the
event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.
Diagnostics: The Building Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and
memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall assume a
predetermined failure mode and generate an alarm notification.
Immunity to power and noise: Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of
nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage.
Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios
up to 5 W at 3 ft.
Automatic staggered restart of field equipment after restoration of power and short cycle
protection.
NETWORK AUTOMATION ENGINE (NAE)

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Provide a Johnson Controls MS-NAE5510.

The Network Automation Engine (NAE) shall provide the interface between the LAN or
WAN and the field control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over
the control devices connected to the NAE. It shall be capable of executing application
control programs to provide:
1.
Calendar functions.
2.
Scheduling.
3.
Trending.
4.
Alarm monitoring and routing.
5.
Time synchronization by means of an Atomic Clock Internet site including
automatic synchronization.
The Network Automation Engine (NAE) must provide the following hardware features as
a minimum:
1.
One Ethernet Port 10/100 Mbps.
2.
One RS-232 port.
3.
Two N2 or BACnet trunks.
4.
Battery Backup.
5.
Flash memory for long term data backup. (If battery backup or flash memory is not
supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte storage
capacity.)
NAE shall provide the capability to support standard Web browser access via the
Intranet/Internet. It shall support a minimum of 4 simultaneous users.
15902 - 10

Phase 2
2.11
EVENT ALARM NOTIFICATION AND ACTIONS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
2.12
The NAE shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and analysis to
supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers.
The NAE shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether
connected to a local network or remote via dial-up telephone connection, or wide-area
network.
Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement
requirements including but limited to:
1.
To alarm.
2.
Return to normal.
3.
To fault.
Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight of alarm classes for the purpose of routing
types and or classes of alarms, i.e., security, HVAC, fire, etc.
Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node.
Provide alarm generation from binary object runtime and/or event counts for equipment
maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count values with appropriate
password control.
Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated.
Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user.
Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability to route
and email alarms based on:
1.
Day of week.
2.
Time of day.
3.
Recipient.
Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message
The following shall be recorded by the NAE for each alarm (at a minimum):
1.
Time and date.
2.
Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.).
3.
Equipment (air handler #, accessway, etc.).
4.
Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement.
5.
Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement.
Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for that
purpose.
Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types or
classes of alarms defined by the user.
Provide a query feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters.
A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be
provided and available for review by the user.
An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and
available for review by the user.
DATA COLLECTION AND STORAGE

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
The NAE shall have the ability to collect data for any property of any object and store this
data for future use.
The data collection shall be performed by log objects, resident in the NAE that shall have,
at a minimum, the following configurable properties:
Designating the log as interval or deviation.
For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week and the
sample collection interval.
15902 - 11

Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
2.13
AUDIT LOG
A.
2.14
For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a variable to a fixed
value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of the object.
For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for the log and to
set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover the data on a first-in, first-out
basis.
Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-based event or by a userdefined event or action.
All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the NAE and the data shall be
accessed from a server (if the system is so configured) or a standard Web Browser.
All log data, when accessed from a server, shall be capable of being manipulated using
standard SQL statements.
All log data shall be available to the user in the following data formats:
1.
HTML.
2.
XML.
3.
Plain Text.
4.
Comma or tab separated values.
Systems that do not provide log data in HTML and XML formats at a minimum shall
provide as an alternative Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle 8i or Express, Hyperion
Solutions SQL Server.
The NAE shall have the ability to archive its log data either locally (to itself), or remotely
to a server or other NAE on the network. Provide the ability to configure the following
archiving properties, at a minimum:
1.
Archive on time of day.
2.
Archive on user-defined number of data stores in the log (buffer size).
3.
Archive when log has reached its user-defined capacity of data stores.
4.
Provide ability to clear logs once archived.
Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the NAE.
Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log based
on time or when the log has reached its user-defined buffer size. Provide the ability to
archive the log locally (to the NAE), to another NAE on the network, or to a server. For
each log entry, provide the following data:
1.
Time and date.
2.
User ID.
3.
Change or activity: i.e., change setpoint, add or delete objects, commands, etc.
DATABASE BACKUP AND STORAGE

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
The NAE shall have the ability to automatically backup its database. The database shall be
backed up based on a user-defined time interval.
Copies of the current database and, at the most recently saved database shall be stored in
the NAE and in the primary Server. The age of the most recently saved database is
dependent on the user-defined database save interval.
The NAE database shall be stored, at a minimum, in XML format to allow for user viewing
and editing, if desired. Other formats are acceptable as well, as long as XML format is
supported.
15902 - 12

Phase 2
2.15
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS
A.
B.
2.16
Provide Johnson Controls FEC module.

Standalone DDC panels shall be microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time
digital control processors. Each standalone DDC panel shall consist of modular hardware
with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies, and
input/output modules. A sufficient number of controllers shall be supplied to fully meet the
requirements of this Specification and the attached point list.
FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNIT MODULE ASSEMBLY CONTROLLER

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Provide Johnson Controls VMA 1620.

The VMA shall provide both standalone and networked direct digital control of pressureindependent, variable air volume terminal units. It shall address both single and dual duct
applications.
The VMA shall be a configurable digital controller with integral differential pressure
transducer and damper actuator. All components shall be connected and mounted as a
single assembly that can be removed as one piece.
The integral damper actuator shall be a fast response stepper motor capable of stroking
90 degrees in 30 seconds for quick damper positioning to speed commissioning and
troubleshooting tasks.
The VMA shall utilize a proportional plus integration (PI) algorithm for the space
temperature control loops.
The VMA shall provide the ability to download and upload VMA configuration files, both
locally and via the communications network. Controllers shall be able to be loaded
individually or as a group using a zone schedule generated spreadsheet of controller
parameters.
VMA control setpoint changes initiated over the network shall be written to VMA
non-volatile memory to prevent loss of setpoint changes and to provide consistent
operation in the event of communication failure.
The VMA shall provide a compliant interface for ASHRAE Standard 62-1989 (indoor air
quality), and shall be capable of resetting the box minimum airflow based on the percent of
outdoor air in the primary air stream.
The VMA shall comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1 (energy efficiency) by preventing
simultaneous heating and cooling, and where the control strategy requires reset of airflow
while in reheat, by modulating the box reheat device fully open prior to increasing the
airflow in the heating sequence.
The VMA shall be compatible with the U.S. EPA Energy Star Buildings recommendations
for fan energy reduction via demand-based static pressure reset down to 2/3 of duct static
pressure set point, VSD 2/3 Reset.
The VMA shall support the NS-BTB7001 LCD display room sensor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Install equipment, piping and wiring raceway parallel to the building lines (i.e., horizontal,
vertical and parallel to walls) wherever possible.
Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and
equipment.
15902 - 13

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
3.2
ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS
A.
3.3
All electrical interlocks shall be provided as specified. All electrical interlocks shall be
made by means of motor starters or shall be accomplished by separate relays. No motor
power lead shall be utilized in an interlock circuit. All interlocked starters with disconnect
switches shall be provided with auxiliary contacts on the disconnect switch so that
interlocking circuits are interrupted when the disconnect switch is in the off position.
OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL

A.
3.4
Install all equipment in readily accessible locations as defined by Chapter 1, Article 100,
Part A of the National Electric Code (NEC).
Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds.
All equipment, installation and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications
and standards for performance, reliability and compatibility and be executed in strict
adherence to local codes and standard practices.
The Owner shall sign a copy of the manufacturers standard software and firmware
licensing agreement as a condition of this contract. Such license shall grant use of all
programs and application software to Owner as defined by the manufacturers license
agreement, but shall protect manufacturers rights to disclosure of trade secrets contained
within such software. All project developed software and documentation shall become the
property of the Owner. These include, but are not limited to project graphic images, record
drawings, project database, project specific application programming code, and all other
associated documentation.
TRAINING
A.
Provide a minimum of 4 hours of on-site or classroom training throughout the contract

period for personnel designated by the Owner. Train the designated staff of Owners
Representative and Owner to enable them to:
1.
Proficiently operate the system.
2.
Understand control system architecture and configuration.
3.
Understand DDC system components.
4.
Understand system operation, including DDC system control and optimizing
routines (algorithms).
5.
Operate the workstation and peripherals.
6.
Log on and off the system.
7.
Access graphics, point reports, and logs.
8.
Adjust and change system set points, time schedules, and holiday schedules.
9.
Recognize malfunctions of the system by observation of the printed copy and
graphical visual signals.
10. Understand system drawings, and Operation and Maintenance manual.
11. Understand the job layout and location of control components.
12. Access data from DDC controller.
13. Operate portable operators terminals.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
15902 - 14

Phase 2
SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.3
Testing, adjusting, and balancing of air systems.

Testing, adjusting, and balancing of hydronic systems.
Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.4

Associated Air Balance Council:

1.
AABC MN-1 - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating,
and Air Conditioning Systems.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
1.
ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of
Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems.
Natural Environmental Balancing Bureau:
1.
NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of
Environmental Systems.
Testing Adjusting and Balancing Bureau:
1.
TABB - International Standards for Environmental Systems Balance.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15

Prior to commencing Work, submit proof of latest calibration date of each instrument.
Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 National Standards for Total System Balance
forms or NEBB Report forms.
Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of
systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
Prior to commencing Work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting,
balancing, and equipment data required. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report
forms and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guaranty or copy of NEBB
Certificate of Conformance Certification.
Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project.
Furnish reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with table of
contents page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of
reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets,
and indicating thermostat locations.
15950 - 1

Phase 2
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.7
Perform Work in accordance with AABC MN-1 National Standards for Field Measurement
and Instrumentation, Total System Balance, and NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing,
Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.8

Operation and Maintenance Data: Furnish final copy of testing, adjusting, and balancing
report inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
Agency: Company specializing in testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience certified by AABC or
certified by NEBB.
SEQUENCING
A.
B.
Section 01110 - Summary of Work and Special Requirements: Work sequence.

Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15

conditions.
Verify systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Verify the following:
1.
Systems are started and operating in safe and normal condition.
2.
HVAC control systems are installed complete and operable.
3.
Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4.
Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to
final filters.
5.
Duct systems are clean of debris.
6.
Fans are rotating correctly.
7.
Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8.
Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9.
Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage is minimized.
12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.
13. Pumps are rotating correctly.
15950 - 2

Phase 2
14.
15.
3.2
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
B.
C.
3.3
Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design
to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
ADJUSTING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.4
Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place or in normal position.

Service and balancing valves are open.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

Verify recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing
settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted. If disrupted,
verify correcting adjustments have been made.
Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, preventing system
balance.
Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing
doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points
or areas as selected and witnessed by Owner.
Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit
report.
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
03798614
03/15
Adjust air handling and distribution systems to obtain required or design supply, return,
and exhaust air quantities at site altitude.
Make air flow rate measurements in main ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross
sectional area of duct.
Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent adjustments do not
create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by using volume
dampers located in ducts.
Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide sheave drive changes
to vary fan speed. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or
inlet.
Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure
drops, and total pressure across fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for
design conditions.
Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to
check leakage.
At modulating damper locations, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions.
Balance variable volume systems at maximum airflow rate, full cooling, and at minimum
airflow rate, full heating.
15950 - 3

Phase 2
K.
L.
3.5
WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.6
For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to airflow setting
indicated. Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic
variable-air-volume temperature control.
On fan powered VAV boxes, adjust airflow switches for proper operation.
Adjust water systems, after air balancing, to obtain design quantities.

Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to
determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow-metering devices are not installed,
base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in
system.
Confirm air bleeds indicate system is full of water.
Adjust systems to obtain specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements
prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in
conjunction with air balancing.
Perform system balance with automatic control valves fully open triple duty valves fully
open, and pump VFDs at 100 percent speed.
Confirm pump rotation and differential pressure at full flow.
Perform adjustment of water distribution systems by the following measures:
1.
Reduce total system flow rate first by reducing speed of VFD.
2.
Use balancing cocks, valves, and fittings.
Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless designed for balancing and shutoff functions. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or
individual system parts, simulate full flow in one part by temporary restriction of flow to
other parts.
SCHEDULES
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Partial list of Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing:

1.
HVAC Pumps.
2.
Induction Units.
3.
Air Handling Units.
4.
Fans.
5.
Air Terminal Units.
6.
Air Inlets and Outlets.
Report Forms
1.
Title Page:
a.
Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
b.
Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
c.
Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Agency
d.
Project name
e.
Project location
f.
Project Architect
g.
Project Engineer
h.
Project Contractor
i.
Project altitude
j.
Report date
15950 - 4

Phase 2
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
03798614
03/15
Summary Comments:
a.
Design versus final performance
b.
Notable characteristics of system
c.
Description of systems operation sequence
d.
Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate building pressurization
e.
Nomenclature used throughout report
f.
Test conditions
Instrument List:
a.
Instrument
b.
Manufacturer
c.
Model number
d.
Serial number
e.
Range
f.
Calibration date
Electric Motors:
a.
Manufacturer
b.
Model/Frame
c.
HP/BHP and kW
d.
Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load
e.
RPM
f.
Service factor
g.
Starter size, rating, heater elements
h.
Sheave Make/Size/Bore
V-Belt Drive:
a.
Identification/location
b.
Required driven RPM
c.
Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
d.
Belt, size and quantity
e.
Motor sheave diameter and RPM
f.
Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual
Pump Data:
a.
Identification/number
b.
Manufacturer
c.
Size/model
d.
Impeller
e.
Service
f.
Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW
g.
Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW
h.
Discharge pressure
i.
Suction pressure
j.
Total operating head pressure
k.
Shut off, discharge and suction pressures
l.
Shut off, total head pressure
Heating Coil Data:
a.
b.
Location
c.
Service
d.
Manufacturer
e.
Air flow, design and actual
f.
Water flow, design and actual
15950 - 5

Phase 2
8.
9.
10.
11.
03798614
03/15
g.
Water pressure drop, design and actual
h.
Entering water temperature, design and actual
i.
Leaving water temperature, design and actual
j.
Entering air temperature, design and actual
k.
Leaving air temperature, design and actual
l.
Air pressure drop, design and actual
Induction Unit Data:
a.
Manufacturer
b.
c.
Location
d.
Model number
e.
Size
f.
Design air flow
g.
Design nozzle pressure drop
h.
Final nozzle pressure drop
i.
Final air flow
Air Moving Equipment:
a.
Location
b.
Manufacturer
c.
Model number
d.
Serial number
e.
Arrangement/Class/Discharge
f.
Air flow, specified and actual
g.
Return air flow, specified and actual
h.
Outside air flow, specified and actual
i.
Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
j.
Inlet pressure
k.
Discharge pressure
l.
m.
Number of Belts/Make/Size
n.
Fan RPM
Exhaust Fan Data:
a.
Location
b.
Manufacturer
c.
Model number
d.
Serial number
e.
Air flow, specified and actual
f.
Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
g.
Inlet pressure
h.
Discharge pressure
i.
j.
Number of Belts/Make/Size
k.
Fan RPM
Air Distribution Test Sheet:
a.
Air terminal number
b.
Room number/location
c.
Terminal type
d.
Terminal size
e.
Area factor
f.
Design velocity
15950 - 6

Phase 2
g.
h.
i.
j.
Design air flow

Test (final) velocity
Test (final) air flow
Percent of design air flow
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
15950 - 7

Phase 2
SECTION 16000
BASIC ELECTRICAL METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES AND STANDARDS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
1.3

Regulatory Agencies: Installation, materials, equipment and workmanship shall conform to the
applicable provisions of the following:
National Electrical Code (NEC).
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
Terms and conditions of the electrical utility and other authorities having lawful jurisdiction
pertaining to the work required.
All temperature control wiring and associated conduit and boxes, shall be provided under other
sections of the specifications. All power and control wiring, not identified under Division 15,
shall be provided under Division 16.
The work covered by Division 16 of the Specifications includes the furnishing of all materials,
labor, transportation, tools, permits, and fees for the complete installation of all electrical work
required in the Contract Drawings.
In the event that additional or special construction is required, the Contractor is responsible for
providing all material and equipment which are usually furnished with such construction in
order to complete the installation, whether indicated or not.
The contractor shall familiarize himself with the existing conditions of the site and advise the
Architect of any discrepancy or conflict prior to bidding.
The contractor shall be responsible for all permits, fees, and licenses required for the project.
All cost of such permits or fees shall be included in the bid.
All equipment and material shall be installed in accordance with the applicable manufacturers
recommendations and standards.
Install sleeves, sealant pans, and roof penetrations as required for the installation of the
electrical work. All such work is subject to the approval of the Architect.
Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the utility service provider to verify all
locations, routing, equipment and labor that will be furnished as a part of this contract.
Any fees or charges associated with delivering permanent power for the project shall be
included in the Contractors bid.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
The intent of this section is to give general submittal information, refer to specific submittal
information in the subsequent mechanical sections.
Within 10 days after award of the contract, and before orders are placed, Contractor shall
submit specific information on list of equipment and principal materials specified. Contractor
shall indicate and/or provide names of manufacturers, catalog and model numbers, cut sheets,
and such other supplementary information as necessary for evaluation. Minimum of six (6)
16000 - 1

Phase 2
C.
copies, or as directed by the Engineer, of each shall be submitted and shall include all items
mentioned by model number and/or manufacturers name in the specifications or in schedules
on the drawings.
Requirements for each submittal:
1.
Bear a dated stamp or specific written indication that the Contractor has reviewed and
approved all submittal prior to submission to Engineer.
2.
Have all information deleted by Contractor that pertains to the means and methods of
construction or to fabrication, assembly, installation, or erection (approval by Engineer
shall not extend to these areas unless specifically noted by Engineer).
3.
Be clearly and SPECIFICALLY marked as to which specific piece of equipment is
being submitted, by use of a permanent marker, stamp, etc., so as to distinguish it from
other pieces of equipment that may occur on the same page.
4.
Be clearly marked as to which available options are being submitted that are associated
with a piece of equipment.
5.
Be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specific performance, materials, and
similar data to enable the Engineer to review the proposed equipment.
Omission by Contractor of any of the above requirements or submittals will subject submittal
to automatic rejection without review.
Any submittals received by Engineer that were not requested shall be returned without review
of any kind.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
The electrical requirements for equipment specified or indicated on the drawings are based on
information available at the time of design. If equipment furnished for installation has
electrical requirements other than indicated on the electrical drawings, the Contractor shall
make any required changes to wire and conduit size, controls, overcurrent protection and
installation as required to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to
the Owner. The complete responsibility and costs for such adjustments shall be assigned to the
respective section of this specification under which the equipment is furnished.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer unless
specified otherwise.
Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in
the production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's current and standard design.
Altitude: Equipment affected by altitude shall perform satisfactorily for the function intended
at the altitude of the project site.
16000 - 2

Phase 2
D.
E.
Detectable Warning Tape: Acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, minimum 6" wide and 4 mils
thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a
protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up
to 30" deep; colored as follows:
1.
Red: Electric.
2.
Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
3.
Orange: Telephone and other communications.
4.
Blue: Water systems.
5.
Green: Sewer systems.
Backfill Material
1.
Material 4" below and 12" above pipes and conduit shall be natural or manufactured
sand complying with ASTM C 33.
2.
Material more than 12" above pipes and conduits shall be sand indicated above or
native fill free of rock or gravel larger than 3/8" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen
materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
03798614
03/15
Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete electrical system shall be done in
accordance with accepted good practice by qualified personnel experienced in such work and
shall proceed in an orderly manner so as not to impede the progress of the project. The
Electrical Contractor shall check all areas and surfaces where electrical equipment material is
to be installed, removed or relocated and report any unsatisfactory conditions before starting
work. Commencement of work signifies this Contractor's acceptance of existing conditions. In
the acceptance or rejection of the finished installation, no allowance will be made for lack of
skill on the part of workmen. Surfaces requiring coatings will be completed prior to
installation of any electrical work on these surfaces.
The electrical drawings are diagrammatic. The installation requirements shall be carefully
coordinated with structural, architectural and mechanical conditions and shall be adjusted to
avoid conflict.
All work shall be concealed in walls, ceilings, chases unless specifically noted to be exposed
or otherwise approved.
The locations of electrical equipment is approximate and are not intended to convey the exact
details and mounting of location of outlets, equipment and other items. Exact locations are to
be field determined by actual measurements.
The location height and projection of fixtures illuminating signs or special features shall be
approved by Architect prior to installation.
Contractor shall coordinate the location of all exterior fixtures with Architectural drawings and
specifications.
Consult the Architectural Drawings to determine wall finishes and locations of wall mounted
equipment, counter top splashes and similar items to avoid conflict with electrical equipment.
At locations where surface or pendant mounted light fixtures are noted, provide for all
necessary framing channels, pendants, chains, canopies and other hardware as required for a
complete and operable system
Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide
protective insulating materials as necessary.
16000 - 3

Phase 2
I.
03798614
03/15
Excavation for Pipe and Conduit

1.
Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
2.
Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of
pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12" higher than
top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and
support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells,
joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove
projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.
a.
For pipes and conduit less than 6" in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed,
multiple-duct conduit units, hand excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and
conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.
b.
For pipes and conduit 6" or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to
support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped
sand backfill.
c.
Excavate trenches 4" deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
4.
Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for
material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
5.
Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698:
a.
Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top
12" of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent.
b.
Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6" below subgrade and compact
each layer of backfill or fill material at 92 percent.
c.
Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6" below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent.
6.
Install detectable warning tape above conduits and pipe, 12" below finished grade,
except 6" below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
7.
Protection
a.
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and
erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
b.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or
partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose
compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.
1)
Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by
Architect; reshape and recompact.
c.
Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished
surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct
surfacing.
1)
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match
adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent
possible.
8.
Disposal of Surplus and Waste Materials
a.
Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including
unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owners
property unless otherwise directed by Owner.
Repair: Any damage to shrubs, grass or structures shall be repaired to previous
b.
condition by Contractor at no additional expense to Owner.
16000 - 4

Phase 2
J.
K.
3.2
PERFORMANCE TESTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.3
It shall be the responsibility of the Division 16 Contractor to provide for all disconnecting and
motor control devices for all equipment. The Contractor shall coordinate to determine voltage,
phase and configurations. Any changes necessary to coordinate these items between Division
15 and Division 16 shall be considered part of this contract.
The Division 16 Contractor shall be responsible for providing for all power requirements
associated with the mechanical systems including power, control devices, smoke dampers, etc.
Refer to Division 15 drawings for locations and requirements.
Thoroughly test all control circuits, fixtures, services and all circuits for proper operating
condition and freedom from grounds and short circuits before acceptance is requested. All
equipment, appliances and devices shall be operated under load conditions.
After the interior wiring system installation is complete conduct operating tests for approval.
When requested, test all the wire, cable, devices and equipment after installation, to assure that
all material continues to possess all the original characteristics as required by governing codes
and standards listed in these specifications.
After motor operation has been verified make voltage readings at all panelboards and starters.
Based on these readings, make final adjustments of primary taps on all transformers in the
building as directed, or coordinate with the utility proper building voltage.
Perform such other tests as required by other sections of these specifications or as requested to
prove acceptability.
Furnish all instruments and labor for testing.
All material installed shall be listed, inspected, and approved by a nationally accepted testing
laboratory such as UL and/or ETL. All material shall bear the UL or ETL label where
available.
SUBMITTAL AND APPROVAL OF MATERIALS

A.
B.
All requirements for submittals shall comply with the applicable provisions included in the
individual specification sections.
Unless identified as a sole source item, the listing of product manufacturers, catalog numbers,
etc., on the drawings is intended to establish a standard of quality of the product. It is the
responsibility of the contractor to review all items he intends to submit. If equipment other
than that indicated on drawings is proposed by the contractor, the information will be reviewed
at the time of the submission of the submittal.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
16000 - 5

Phase 2
SECTION 16111
CONDUIT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
D.
E.
F.
ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.

ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies.
ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
NECA "Standard of Installation."
NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.6
Section 16130 - Boxes.

Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding.
Section 16190 - Supporting Devices.
Section 16195 - Electrical Identification.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
1.5
Metal conduit.
Flexible metal conduit.
Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
Electrical metallic tubing.
Fittings and conduit bodies.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.4

Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15

Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal
conduit, nonmetallic conduit, fittings and conduit bodies.
CONDUIT
16111 - 1

Phase 2
1.7

A.
B.
1.8
A.
B.
1.9
Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.

A.
B.
C.
D.
1.10

Accurately record actual routing of conduits.
Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide
appropriate covering.
Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as
required to complete wiring system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.2
Minimum Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified.

Wet and Damp Locations above grade: Use rigid steel or liquid tight flexible conduit.
Dry Locations: Use electrical metallic tubing for concealed and exposed locations.
Below Slab: Non metallic PVC conduit is acceptable within limitations specified.
Below Grade: Use only PVC coated rigid galvanized steel, wrapped rigid steel, or non metallic
PVC conduit within limitations specified.
MC Cable: Shall not be utilized on this project.
METAL CONDUIT
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Manufacturers:
1.
Allied.
2.
Wheatland.
3.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; all steel fittings.
CONDUIT
16111 - 2

Phase 2
2.3
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.4
LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.5
Manufacturers:
1.
Electri-flex.
2.
Ultratite.
3.
Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
Applications: Use for final connections to motorized equipment in exterior locations and areas
subjected to moisture (kitchen).
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.6
Manufacturers:
1.
Allied Tube.
2.
Electri-Flex.
3.
Greenfield.
4.
Description: Interlocked steel construction. Aluminum is not permitted.
Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1 with fittings approved for steel flex.
Applications: Use for final connections to motorized equipment, connections to recessed
lighting fixtures located in accessible ceilings, and connections to dry type transformers.
Utilization of 3/8 in lieu of the minimum 3/4 is acceptable under the limitations of the
National Electrical Code.
Manufacturers:
1.
Allied.
2.
Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; all steel, compression.
Applications: Do not use below grade or in exterior locations. Use only in interior locations.
PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Manufacturers:
1.
Levy.
2.
Robroy Industries.
3.
Description: NEMA RN-1, rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 20 mil thick.
General: Protective layer may be factory applied or galvanized rigid steel conduit may be
applied with two layers of corrosion resistant tape.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coatings to
match conduit.
CONDUIT
16111 - 3

Phase 2
2.7
NON-METALLIC PVC CONDUIT

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Manufacturers:
1.
Allied.
2.
Carlon.
3.
Description: NEMA TC2; Schedule 40 PVC. Flame retardant type resistant to bending and
cracking.
Fittings and conduit bodies: NEMA TC3.
Vertical risers and ells installed below grade shall be rigid steel with wrapping.
Do not use above grade.
Joints made with PVC fittings shall be applied with solvent compound after thorough cleaning.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
W.
X.
03798614
03/15
Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."

Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis
hangers, and split hangers.
Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel.
Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16190.
Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary
supports
Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding
104 degrees F.
Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.
Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet
locations and to cast boxes.
Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to
make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use factory elbows for bends in metal
conduit larger than 2 inch size.
Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses,
control and expansion joints.
Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170.
Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195.
Ducts shall be cleaned with an flexible mandrel assembly.
CONDUIT
16111 - 4

Phase 2
Y.
All conduits passing vertically through slabs on grade shall be PVC-coated, rigid steel. Rigid
steel conduits shall be applied with protective coatings as indicated herein. All transitions from
PVC to rigid steel shall occur below the slab.
Z.
Underground branch circuit extensions to parking lot lighting fixtures and other branch circuits
may be direct buried PVC conduit. Service entrance PVC conduit shall be concrete encased in
accordance with the drawings unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
AA. Minimum cover for underground conduits shall be 24 inches unless otherwise noted.
BB. All conduit shall be routed concealed as much as possible including conduit serving
roof-mounted equipment. Roof penetrations for conduits shall adhere to the requirements and
details as indicated on the Architectural drawings.
CC. All underground electrical conduits shall be installed below slab and not in slab.
3.2

A.
B.
Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack
with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
CONDUIT
16111 - 5

Phase 2
SECTION 16123
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3
D.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.

Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A.
B.
1.8

Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type.
SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A.
B.
C.
1.7
Section 01120 - References and Definitions: Requirements for references and standards.
NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association).
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment
and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association).
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A.
B.
1.6
Section 16195 - Electrical Identification.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
1.5
Building wire and cable.

Wiring connectors and connections.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

Section 01720 - Contract Closeout Procedures: Procedures for submittals.

Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
03798614
03/15
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with

16123 - 1

Phase 2
1.9
A.
B.
1.10
FIELD SAMPLES
A.
1.11
Provide under provisions of Section 01330.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.12
Conform to NFPA 70.

Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
Division 1 - Administrative Requirements.

Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
Conductor sizes are based on copper.
Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned.
COORDINATION
A.
B.
Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01310.

Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact
routing and lengths required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BUILDING WIRE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.2
Manufacturers:
1.
American Cable.
2.
Houston Wire and Cable.
3.
Southwire.
4.
Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 Product Requirements.
Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
Conductor: Copper.
Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
Insulation: NFPA 70, Type indicated herein.
MC Cable: Shall not be utilized on this project.
WIRING CONNECTORS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Split Bolt Connectors:

1.
Buchanan.
2.
Burndy.
3.
Ilsco.
4.
Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
Solderless Pressure Connectors:
1.
Buchanan.
2.
Burndy.
16123 - 2

Phase 2
C.
D.
3.
Ilsco.
4.
Spring Wire Connectors:
1.
Ideal.
2.
Compression Connectors:
1.
Buchanan.
2.
Burndy.
3.
Ilsco.
4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
WIRING METHODS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.4
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting

work.
Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.
Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in
raceway.
Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in
raceway.
Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in
raceway.
Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in
raceway.
Exterior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway.
Use wiring methods indicated.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Manufacturer's instructions.

Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions.
Install cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation."
Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
Use stranded conductors for control circuits.
Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits with the exception of
pre-manufactured fixture whips, listed for such use and not exceeding 6' in length.
Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits.
16123 - 3

Phase 2
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
W.
3.5
Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 100 feet and as
indicated on the drawings.
Install all conductors in conduit.
Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
Protect exposed cable from damage.
All cables shall be neatly supported.
Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible
temperature rise.
Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape
uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of
conductor.
Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and
taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps,
10 AWG and smaller.
Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195. Identify each
conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.
The number of conductors in each conduit run shall be limited to the requirements as indicated
on the drawings and indicated in Article 310 of the 2005 National Electrical Code.
Multiwire branch circuits shall be provided with a disconnecting means as indicated in Article
210.4(B) of the 2005 National Electric Code.

A.
B.
C.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Field inspection, testing and adjusting.

Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
16123 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 16130
BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.3
NECA - Standard of Installation.

NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

A.
B.
1.6
Section 16140 - Wiring Devices: Wall plates in finished areas.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.5
Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.

Pull and junction boxes.
Floor boxes.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

Section 01700 Execution Requirements: Submittals for Project closeout.

Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project
record documents.
A.
B.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OUTLET BOXES
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.

Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported;
include half-inch male fixture studs where required.
BOXES
16130 - 1

Phase 2
C.
D.
2.2
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.3
Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast ferroalloy. Provide gasketed cover by box
manufacturer.
Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16140.
Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.

Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction
box:
Material: Galvanized cast iron.
Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
Kitchen/Scullery Area Boxes: All boxes that are stubbed up for dedicated equipment use or
are used in a non-concealed application shall be cast.
FLOOR BOXES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
These floor boxes are for electrical plans only (E-Sheets). Refer to A/V plans and
specifications for additional requirements.
Stamped steel boxes with a minimum of 16 gauge steel for use in concrete slab applications.
16 gauge steel powder coated finish for use with carpet inserts or without. Provide cover with
cable door.
Provide a minimum of two duplex receptacles and two data outlet locations.
In addition to the required power conduits, provide a spare 1 conduit to above an accessible
ceiling.
Boxes shall be Hubbell No. HBLCFB301 BASE with covers, faceplates, devices, and other
accessories as noted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Verify locations of outlets in all locations areas prior to rough-in.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
03798614
03/15
Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."

Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,
equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.
Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights specified in section
for outlet device.
Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust
box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose.
Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140.
Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.
Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from
ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials
and methods specified.
BOXES
16130 - 2

Phase 2
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
W.
X.
Y.
Z.
3.3

A.
3.4
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Adjusting installed work.

Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
Install knockout closures in unused box openings.
CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
3.6
Coordinate installation of outlet box for equipment connected under Section 16180.
ADJUSTING
A.
B.
C.
3.5
Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and
backsplashes with Architectural drawings and other trades.
Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only.
Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches
separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for
surface finish thickness.
Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
Support boxes independently of conduit.
Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations and at all
locations serving kitchen equipment.
Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal
box in other locations.
Coordinate with other trades for box rough-in, such that control devices are grouped
(i.e., thermostats, wall switches, volume controls, etc.).
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Cleaning installed work.

Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
REPAIR
A.
B.
Repair any areas or surfaces damaged during conduit installation.

Paint (resurface) to original condition.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
BOXES
16130 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.3
C.

Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and
configurations.
Manufacturers with similar catalog numbers will not be considered as a basis for an equivalent
product.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.7

NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Dimensional Requirements.

A.
B.
1.6
Section 16130 - Boxes.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
Wall switches.
Receptacles.
Device plates and decorative box covers.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section

A.
B.
03798614
03/15

Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 1

Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WALL SWITCHES
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
DIMMERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
Manufacturers:
1.
Hubbell AS153.
Description: 1500 watt, 120 V, 60 hz. Slide control.
Device Body: Provide Hubbell AS2I, ivory plate kit.
Fluorescent Dimmers: All fluorescent dimmers shall be compatible with fluorescent ballasts;
Lutron Hi-Lume or approved equal.
RECEPTACLES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.4
Manufacturers:
1.
Hubbell HBL1221-I.
2.
Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600.
Description: NEMA WD 1, 20 amp, Heavy-Duty, AC only general-use snap switch.
Body and Handle: nylon ivory handle.
Utilize equivalent series of manufacturers numbers above for threeway, four-way and twopole applications.
Manufacturers:
1.
Hubbell HBL 5352-I.
2.
Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600. Equivalent.
Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-duty general use receptacle, with triple wipe contacts and
grounding contacts integral with backstrap (no rivets).
Device Body: Ivory plastic.
Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.
Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20.
GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet
regulatory requirements. Hubbell GF5352-I or equivalent.
Floor boxes shall be type Walker #RFB4-RAK or equal. Inserts shall be as follows:
1.
Receptacle insert: Walker #RFB-RB-SS.
2.
Tele/Data insert: Walker #RFB-2T-SS.
3.
Microphone insert: Walker #RFB-B-SS.
WALL PLATES
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Decorative Cover Plate: Stainless steel.

Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with gasketed device cover on exterior
devices.
Surface Mounted Plates: Galvanized steel plates.
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 2

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
3.3
K.
Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."

Install devices plumb and level.
Install switches with OFF position down.
Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
Install receptacles with grounding pole on top.
Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above
accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
Install blank cover plate to match other wall plates on all unused boxes.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.5
Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
Clean debris from outlet boxes.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.4
Division 1 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions prior to

beginning work.
Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height.
Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to
wiring devices.
Verify installation location of all boxes to be installed in millwork with Architect.
Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16130 to obtain mounting heights
specified and indicated on drawings.
Install all wall switches, thermostats, and fire alarm pull stations at 48 inches above finished
floor.
Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor.
Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above backsplash of counter unless otherwise directed
by Architect.
Install telephone jack 18 inches above finished floor.
Install telephone for jack wall telephone to position top of telephone at 48 inches above
finished floor.

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Field inspection, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
Inspect each wiring device for defects.
Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 3

Phase 2
D.
E.
F.
3.6
ADJUSTING
A.
B.
3.7
Verify that each receptacle device is energized.

Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.

Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
CLEANING
A.
B.

Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 16170
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.3
C.
Grounding System Maximum Resistance: 10 ohms.

A.
B.
1.7
Metal underground water pipe.

Metal frame of the building.
Rod electrodes.
A.
1.6
Section 01120 - References and Definitions: Requirements for references and standards.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment
and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association).
GROUNDING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A.
B.
C.
1.5
Grounding electrodes and conductors.

Equipment grounding conductors.
Bonding.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
1.4


Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections.

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Section 01720 - Contract Closeout Procedures: Procedures for submittals.

Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.
Certificate of Compliance: Indicate approval of installation by authority having jurisdiction.
16170 - 1

Phase 2
1.8
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.9

with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100
miles of Project.
A.
B.

Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ROD ELECTRODES
A.
B.
C.
2.2
MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A.
2.3
Description: In lieu of exothermic connections, high compression type as manufactured by

Burndy using the 12 ton Hy-Ground series.
EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS
A.
2.4
Material: Copper.
Diameter: 3/4 inch.
Length: 10 feet.
Manufacturers: Cadweld.
WIRE
A.
B.
Material: Stranded copper.

Grounding Electrode Conductor: Minimum size to meet NFPA 70 requirements or as indicated
on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
Section 01310 - Project Management and Coordination: Verification of existing conditions

prior to beginning work.
Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Manufacturer's instructions.

Install rod electrodes. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve a resistance to
ground of 10 ohms or less. Rods shall be installed with a minimum separation of 6 feet.
16170 - 2

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.3
Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements.

Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground.
Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder
and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.
Grounding Electrode System: The new grounding electrode system shall consist of the
common bonding of building steel, underground steel water piping and supplemental ground
rods as detailed on the drawings.
Provide proper bonding of the electrical systems grounded conductor (neutral) and the
grounding electrode system sized in accordance with N.E.C. Article 250. This bonding shall
occur at all locations where there are separately derived systems.

A.
B.
C.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Field inspection, testing, adjusting.

Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
16170 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 16180
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
C.

Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions,
configurations, and construction.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
A.
B.
1.7
NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices.

NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.6
Section 16000 - Basic Electrical Methods.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
1.5
Electrical connections to equipment specified under other sections.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4


COORDINATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
03798614
03/15
Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01310.

Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment
furnished under other sections.
Determine connection locations and requirements.
Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation schedule for
equipment.
Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for equipment.
16180 - 1

Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CORDS AND CAPS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1.

Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for
equipment.
Cord Construction: ANSI/NFPA 70, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment
grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.
Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit
overcurrent protection.
Division 16 - Contractor shall be responsible for providing matching cord/receptacle for all
equipment not furnished with such equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
Verify conditions under provisions of Section 01700.

Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.

Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit
with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations including all locations serving kitchen
equipment. Utilize pvc-coated, rigid steel conduit for all conduit stub-ups serving kitchen
equipment. All boxes for use in the kitchen shall be for use in wet locations (last type).
Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures
encountered in heat producing equipment.
Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug is indicated. Provide cord
and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is indicated.
Provide suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and
equipment connection boxes.
Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices as indicated.
Modify equipment control wiring with terminal block jumpers as indicated.
Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment where indicated.
Check and modify phase connections as required for proper motor rotation.
Provide power to equipment only after equipment supplier verifies acceptance to receive and
approves.
Contractor shall coordinate with all equipment to verify exact power and control wiring as
required to properly serve equipment.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
16180 - 2

Phase 2
SECTION 16190
SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3
Conduit and equipment supports.

Anchors and fasteners.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
1.4

NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association.

A.
B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance.

Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of
equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products.
Anchors and Fasteners:
1.
Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors, powder actuated anchors and
preset inserts.
2.
Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, spring steel clips and steel ramset
fasteners.
3.
Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors.
4.
Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
5.
Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
SUPPORTING DEVICES
16190 - 1

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".
Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit.
Obtain permission from Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.
Fabricate supports from structural steel as indicated on drawings. Rigidly weld members or use
hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use lock
washers under all nuts.
Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one
inch off wall.
Install conduit supports a maximum spacing specified in the NEC.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
SUPPORTING DEVICES
16190 - 2

Phase 2
SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3

Nameplates and labels.

Wire and cable markers.
REFERENCES
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A.
B.
C.
2.2
Nameplates and Labels: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black
background.
Locations:
1.
Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.
2.
Communication cabinets, and computer cabinets.
3.
Field disconnects, start stop stations, control panels.
Letter Size:
1.
Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.
2.
Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
3.
Use 3/8 inch letters for identifying Main Disconnect equipment.
WIRE/CONDUIT/BOX MARKERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Description: Brady B-321 Heat-Shrink Polyolefin markers. Typed label to identify each
termination end point of the conductor. DC conductors shall identify polarity.
Locations: Each conductor at wireway, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load
connection. All conduit penetrations identifying the location of each end.
Legend:
1.
Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings.
Boxes:
1.
Label each junction box in accessible locations to indicate the type of system
(i.e., security; power circuit - 1, 3, 5, etc.).
2.
Boxes serving fire alarm system shall have box covers painted red.
16195 - 1

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
APPLICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.

Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws or rivets.
Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at
12 inches below finished grade. Identify all conduit at exposed locations into all boxes,
cabinets, etc. (see specification Section 16000).
Identify all conductors at every termination indicating endpoints of termination and tag
identification as required.
Color coding for phase identification:
120/208 Volts
Black
Red
Blue
White
Green
Phase
A
B
C
Neutral
Ground
277/480 Volts
Brown
Orange
Yellow
Gray
Green
Conductor phase and voltage identification shall be made by color-coded insulation for all
conductors smaller than No. 6 AWG. For conductors No. 6 AWG and larger, identification
shall be made by color-coded insulation, or conductors with black insulation may be furnished
and identified by colored electrical tape. Conductor identification shall be provided within
each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
16195 - 2

Phase 2
SECTION 16441
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.3
Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.7

Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.

UL 198C - High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type.
UL 198E - Class R Fuses.
NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.5
Fusible switches.
Non-fusible switches.
Fuses.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.4

Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with

A.
B.
03798614
03/15

Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
16441 - 1

Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.3
Eaton.
General Electric.
Siemens.
Square D.
Fusible or Non-fusible as indicated.

Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD load interrupter enclosed knife switch with
externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON
position. Handle lockable in OFF position.
Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, class R fuses.
Enclosures: NEMA KS 1.
Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
Exterior Locations: Type 3R or 4.
NEMA ratings of enclosures as specified on drawings take precedence over location
specification.
Current rating of switch to be equal to or greater than that of the circuit it is interrupting.
FUSES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Manufacturers:
1.
Bussman.
2.
Gould Shawmut.
3.
Littlefuse.
Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated.
Voltage: Provide fuses with suitable voltage ratings for phase to phase voltages.
Service Entrance: Class L, Bussman Low-peak or equivalent.
General Purpose Loads: Class RK1, Bussman Low-peak or equivalent.
Motor Loads: Class RK5, Bussman Fusetron or equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Install in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation

Install fuses in all fusible disconnects.
Apply adhesive tag on the inside door of all disconnects indicating the NEMA class fuse and
size installed.
Provide a disconnect switch for all equipment where indicated or required by the National
Electrical Code. Coordinate with other disciplines to determine where disconnects are
furnished with equipment.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
16441 - 2

Phase 2
SECTION 16470
SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.3
H.
NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) "Standard of Installation."

NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
NEMA PB-2 - Switchboards
NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards
Rated 600 Volts or Less.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.6
Section 16190 - Supporting Devices.

Section 16195 - Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.5
Distribution and Branch circuit panelboards.

Switchboards.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
1.4

Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support
point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit
breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.
stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.

A.
03798614
03/15
Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Record actual locations of Products; indicate
actual branch circuit arrangement.
16470 - 1

Phase 2
1.7

A.
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.9
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable
for purpose specified and indicated.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.12

with minimum five years experience.
A.
1.11
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.10
Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts data
listing; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Provide maintenance materials under provisions of General Conditions. Provide two of each
panelboard key if required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PANELBOARDS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
Manufacturers:
1.
Cutler Hammer.
2.
Siemens.
3.
Square-D.
Description: NEMA PB-1, circuit breaker type.
Panelboard Bus: Copper with ratings as indicated. Provide a copper ground bus in each
panelboard.
Minimum integrated short circuit rating: Fully rated devices with minimum levels as indicated.
Series rated systems will not be allowed. Minimum calculated values are labeled on each
panelboard and are indicated as AIC.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on, circuit breakers with integral thermal
and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as type HACR
for air-conditioning equipment loads and type SWD for switching applications.
Enclosure: NEMA PB-1, Type 1.
Cabinet Front: Surface or recessed type as indicated on the drawings, fastened with concealed
trim clamps, hinged door with flush lock, metal directory frame, and finished in
manufacturers standard gray enamel.
16470 - 2

Phase 2
2.2
SWITCHBOARDS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
03798614
03/15
Manufacturers:
1.
Cutler Hammer.
2.
Siemens.
3.
Square D.
Construction: Unit shall be constructed of steel members bolted or welded to form a rigid
frame. All closure plates shall be constructed to allow a single individual to install. All
sections shall be rear aligned and shall be front accessible. Sections shall be bolted together to
form a mechanically and electrically continuous unit in a NEMA 3R enclosure.
Bussing: Tin or silver plated copper for all sections. Brace bars for indicated interrupting
ratings. Bus joints shall be bolted with grade 5 bolts. Horizontal bussing shall be full size and
full length of the switchboard. Install vertical bussing the full height of the switchboard with a
minimum of ampacity of 80% of the total of all protective devices of the bussed space. Provide
a full size full length neutral bus with the same ampacity as the phase bus. Provide a copper
ground bus the full length.
Main Device: Thermal-Magnetic Molded Case circuit breaker with electronic trip and
adjustable long time, short time and instantaneous settings. Interrupting rating shall be as
indicated on the drawings and shown as AIC on the schedule for a fully rated system. Series
rated systems will not be allowed.
Feeder Devices: Instantaneous thermal and magnetic trips, molded case circuit breakers.
Provide adjustable magnetic trip option on frame sizes larger that 225 amps. Feeder breakers
shall be group mounted.
Surge Protective Device (SPD): Unit shall be mounted integral in panel. Provide circuit
breaker for SPD unit as required by manufacturer. Equipment shall be Square D TVS4XGAINT 240KA/phase: Standard Protection Modes: L-N, L-G, L-L, and N-G or approved equal.
Provide an integral monitoring and metering device to monitor the following for all phases:
1.
Phase current.
2.
Phase voltage (L-L and L-N).
3.
Real power.
4.
Apparent power.
5.
Power factor.
6.
Frequency.
7.
Energy (KWH).
8.
Front Display.
9.
THD.
10. Current and Power Demand.
11. Alarms.
12. Min/Max Readings.
13. Date/Event Logs.
The circuit monitor shall be capable of networking for remote indication. Unit shall be Square
PM 820; or approved equal. Provide software factory start-up and factory training for meter by
Square D. ION Enterprise with license as required. Provide data connection to nearest
LAN rack.
Provide energy reducing maintenance switch with status indicator for main circuit breaker in
accordance with NEC 240.87.
16470 - 3

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2

A.
3.3
Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1. Install panelboards plumb. Provide
supports in accordance with drawings and Section 16190. Height: 6 ft. maximum to top of
panelboard. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. Provide typed circuit
directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes
required to balance phase loads. Spare slots shall be labeled as such in erasable pencil on
directory. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195.
Provide two empty 1 inch conduits from each recessed panelboard to an accessible location
above and label as spare.
Ground each panelboard and switchboard in accordance with Section 16170.
Provide concrete pad for switchboard. Refer to Structural Drawings for requirements.
Field inspection and test for grounds on each circuit after installation is completed. Measure
steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to
balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for
multi-wire branch circuits. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage,
proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of
connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses.
FINAL DOCUMENTS/CD
A.
Provide an Electronic (CD) and hard copies of switchboards and panelboards at completion of
project. Coordinate file type with Owner.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
16470 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 16481
ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.3
C.
D.

Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of
switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure
details.
Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and
starting of Product.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.6

UL 1 98C - High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type.
UL 1 98E - Class R Fuses.
NECA "Standard of Installation," published by National Electrical Contractors Association.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.5
Manual motor starters.

Magnetic motor starters.
Combination magnetic motor starters.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.4


QUALIFICATIONS
A.
03798614
03/15

16481 - 1

Phase 2
1.7
A.
B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUAL CONTROLLERS
A.
B.
C.
2.2
AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 each field convertible contacts in addition to seal-in
contact.
Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 2, heavy duty type.
Pushbuttons: Recessed type.
Indicating Lights: LED type.
Selector Switches: Rotary type.
Relays: NEMA ICS 2.
Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary. Provide fused primary and secondary, and
bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.
DISCONNECTS
A.
B.
2.5
Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller

for induction motors rated in horsepower.
Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.
Overload Relay: NEMA ICS; electronic type; with phase loss and unbalance protection.
Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1.
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES

A.
2.4
Manual Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated,

full-voltage controller with overload element, NO auxiliary contact, and toggle operator.
Fractional Horsepower Manual Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A
manually operated, full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with
thermal Overload unit, and toggle operator.
Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1.
Combination Controllers: Combine motor controllers with fusible switch disconnect in

common enclosure.
Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable
handle. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses.
FUSES
A.
B.
03798614
03/15
Description: Dual element, current limiting, time delay, one-time fuse, 250V volt, UL 198E,
Class RK 5.
Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes.
16481 - 2

Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.2
Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Provide a motor controller for all equipment not furnished as integral with equipment.
Coordinate actual motor loads with overload protection.
Install enclosed controllers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 16190.
Height: 5 ft to operating handle.
Install fuses in fusible switches.
Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor
characteristics.
Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195.
Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served,
nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating.

A.
B.
Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of other Sections.
Inspect and test each enclosed controller to NEMA ICS 2.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
16481 - 3

Phase 2
SECTION 16510
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.3
C.
Refer to Section 16000 for requirements.

A.
B.
1.7
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures for submittals.

Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard
product of the manufacturer.
Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
1.6
ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications.

NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

A.
B.
1.5
Interior luminaires and accessories.

Exit signs.
Ballasts.
Fluorescent lamp emergency power supply.
Lamps.
Luminaire accessories.
Occupancy sensors.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.4

Section 01720 - Contract Closeout Procedures: Submittals for project closeout.

Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
03798614
03/15

INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
16510 - 1

Phase 2
1.8
A.
B.
C.
1.9

Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
EXTRA PRODUCTS
A.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LUMINAIRES
A.
2.2
EXIT SIGNS
A.
2.3
Furnish Products as scheduled. Refer to Section 01600 for substitutions and product options.
Furnish products as scheduled.
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
03798614
03/15
Manufacturers:
1.
Advance.
2.
Magnatek.
3.
Motorola.
4.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Substitutions: Permitted.
Description: ANSI C82.1, high power factor type electronic ballast, suitable for lamps
specified.
Voltage: Match luminaire voltage.
Source Quality Control: Certify fluorescent ballast design and construction by Certified
Ballast Manufacturers, Inc.
All ballasts shall be UL listed, Class P, with a sound rating of Class A and shall contain no
PCBs.
Ballasts shall comply with 47 CFR 18 for electromagnetic interference and shall not interfere
with the operation of other electrical equipment.
Unless otherwise indicated (i.e., dual switches) the minimum number of ballasts per fixture
shall be used.
Light output regulation shall be 10%.
Power factor shall not be less than 0.95.
A 60 Hz filter shall be provided.
Provide integral disconnect for light fixture ballast according to NEC.
Dimming ballast shall be compatible dimming control system. Provide Lutron Hi-Lume
dimming ballast or approved equal.
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
16510 - 2

Phase 2
2.4
LAMPS
A.
B.
C.
2.5
FLUORESCENT LAMP EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.6
Fluorescent Lamp Manufacturers:

1.
General Electric.
2.
Philips.
3.
Sylvania.
4.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Substitutions: Permitted.
Lamp Types: As specified for luminaire. Provide 3500 degrees Kelvin lamps for all
fluorescent fixtures, unless otherwise noted.
Provide integral disconnect as required by NEC.
Description: Emergency battery supply suitable for installation in ballast compartment of

fluorescent luminaire.
Lamp Rating: Fluorescent lamp providing 1100 lumens minimum.
Battery: Sealed lead calcium type, rated 10 year life.
Include Test switch and AC on indicator light, installed to be operable and visible from
the outside of an assembled luminaire.
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A.
B.
Sensors
1.
Provide dual technology passive infrared/ultrasonic sensors where indicated on the
drawings.
2.
All units shall be U.L. listed.
3.
Provide adjustable sensitivity and digital time delay.
4.
Provide with swivel mounted bracket for use in ceiling mounted applications.
5.
Provide LED indication for occupancy detection of each of the two technologies.
6.
Sensors shall be capable of covering an area of approximately 1,000 square feet while
detecting typical desktop motions.
7.
Sensors shall be equal to Hubbell Omni DT2000 or approved equal.
8.
Single wall switch occupancy sensor shall be Hubbell LHMTS1or approved equal.
9.
Dual wall switch occupancy sensor shall be Hubbell LHMTD2 or approved equal.
Accessories
1.
Provide power packs and slave packs as required to power the sensors and provide
interlocking and control strategies as indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant
length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines
and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from
building structure.
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
16510 - 3

Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
3.2

A.
B.
3.3

Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
Clean finishes and touch up damage.
DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A.
3.6

Aim and adjust luminaires as directed.
Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.5
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Field inspection, testing, and adjusting.

Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and
operation.
ADJUSTING
A.
B.
C.
3.4
Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.

Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory
requirements for fire rating in locations where fire rated ceilings are present.
Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.
Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as indicated
on Drawings or as scheduled.
Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for
temperature conditions within luminaire.
Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire.
Provide separate 120 V circuit for 277 V fixtures with quartz restrike lamp option.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Demonstrating installed work.

A.
B.
Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting installed work.

Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
16510 - 4

Phase 2
SECTION 16620
ENGINE GENERATOR
(DEDUCT ALTERNATE NO. 1)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.3
Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.5
Generator testing procedures.

Generator.
Engine.
Controller.
Instrument panels.
Accessories.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.4

NFPA-110.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum).
NEMA MG1-22.40 and 16.40.
MIL E-4970A.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Submit six sets of all submittals to Owner.

Provide Data: Submittal shall include specification sheets showing all standard and optional
accessories to be supplied, schematic wiring diagrams, dimension drawings, and
interconnection diagrams identifying by terminal number each required interconnection
between the generator set, the transfer switch, and the remote annunciator panel if it is
included elsewhere in these specifications.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations. Indicate
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, hoisting, installation
and starting of Product.
Certification that service mechanic will be on-site within four hours if generator fails to start.
ENGINE GENERATOR
16620 - 1

Phase 2
1.6
TESTING
A.
1.7
FINAL PRODUCTION TESTS

A.
1.8
Generator set shall be tested under varying loads with guards and exhaust system in place.
These tests shall be done with a reactive load bank. Tests shall include:
1.
Single-step load pickup.
2.
Transient and steady state governing.
3.
Safety shutdown device testing.
4.
Voltage regulation.
5.
Rate Power.
6.
Maximum Power.
A.
B.
1.9
To assure that the equipment has been designed and built to the highest reliability and quality
standards, the manufacturer shall be responsible for design prototype tests as described herein:
Components of the standby system, such as the engine/generator set, transfer switch, and
accessories shall not be subjected to prototype tests since the tests are potentially damaging.
Rather, similar design prototypes, which will not be sold, shall be used for these tests.
Prototype test programs shall include the requirements of NFPA-110 and the following:
1.
Maximum power (kW).
2.
Maximum starting (kVA) at 35% instantaneous voltage dip.
3.
Alternator temperature rise by embedded thermocouple and by resistance method per
NEMA MG1-22.40 and 16.40.
4.
Governor speed regulation under steady state and transient conditions.
5.
Voltage regulation and generator transient response.
6.
Fuel consumption at no load, 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, and full load.
7.
Harmonic analysis, voltage waveform deviation, and telephone influence factor.
8.
Three-phase line-to-line short circuit test.
9.
Alternator cooling air flow.
10. Torsional analysis testing to verify that the generator set is free of harmful torsional
stresses.
11. Endurance testing.
Conform to requirements of NFPA-110.

Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
WARRANTY
A.
03798614
03/15
The warranty period shall be for a period of two years from the date of start-up and shall
include all parts, labor, travel expenses and all expendables used during repair.
ENGINE GENERATOR
16620 - 2

Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
C.
2.2
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
Caterpillar.
Onan.
Or approved equal.
It is the intent of this specification to secure a standby generator system that has been
prototype tested, factory built, production tested, site tested, of the latest commercial design,
together with all accessories necessary for a complete installation as shown on the plans and
drawings and as specified herein. The equipment supplied and installed shall meet the
requirements of the National Electric Code and all applicable local codes and regulations. All
equipment shall be new, of current production by a national firm which manufactures the
generator and controls and assembles the standby generator sets as a matched unit so that there
is one source responsibility for warranty, parts, and service through a local representative with
factor-trained servicemen. It shall be a requirement of this matched unit that service personnel
shall be factory authorized to service the generator as well as the engine through the same
company. Any proposed engines and generators shall be manufactured in the United States of
America.
The standby generator set shall be rated continuous standby (defined as continuous for the
duration of any power outage) 480/277 V, 3 phase, 4 wire, rated at 350 KW, 437.5 KVA with
a 0.8 power factor in a 110o F ambient temperature. This rating shall include fan and other
generator set ancillary loads. Vibration isolators shall be provided between the
engine-generator and welded steel base. Provide the unit with an integral base fuel tank.
The unit shall comply with the most current EPA emission standards and shall comply with all
applicable regulations.
Provide service entrance rated circuit breaker as indicated on each riser diagram.
ENGINE
A.
03798614
03/15
The engine shall be equipped with the following:

1.
Engine driven or electric fuel transfer pump, fuel filters and electric solenoid fuel
shut-off-valve.
2.
Electronic isochronous governor with externally adjustable droop from 0 - 10% from no
load to rated load. Steady state frequency regulation shall be 0.25 percent.
3.
24 volt positive engagement solenoid shift-starting motor.
4.
35-ampere minimum automatic battery charging alternator with solid-state voltage
regulation.
5.
Positive displacement, full pressure lubrication oil pump, cartridge oil filters, dipstick,
and oil drain.
6.
Dry-type replaceable air cleaner elements.
7.
The naturally aspirated or turbocharged engine shall be fueled with Diesel, number of
cylinders as required, 4-cycle, and liquid cooled. A unit-mounted radiator, blower fan,
water pump, and thermostat shall properly cool the engine with up to 3.0 inches H20
external static pressure on the cooling system.
ENGINE GENERATOR
16620 - 3

Phase 2
2.4
GENERATOR
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.5
The alternator shall be salient-pole, reconnectable 12-lead, self-ventilated of drip-proof

construction with amortisseur rotor windings and stator for smooth voltage waveform. The
insulation shall meet the NEMA standard (MGI-22.40 and 16.40) for Class F and be vacuum
impregnated with epoxy varnish to be fungus resistant per MIL E-4970A. The excitation
system shall be of brushless construction controlled by a solid-state voltage regulator with
adjustable Volts-per-Hertz operation capable of maintaining voltage within 0.25% at any
constant load from 0 to 100% of rating. The regulator must be protected from the environment
by conformal coating.
On application of any load up to the rated load, the instantaneous voltage dip shall not exceed
20% and shall recover to 2% of rated voltage within five seconds.
The generator shall employ a permanent magnet system capable of sustaining at least 300% of
rated current for at least 10 seconds under a 3 phase symmetrical short by inherent design.
The generator, having a single maintenance free bearing, shall be directly connected to the
flywheel housing with a semiflexible coupling between the rotor and the flywheel.
CONTROLLER
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
Standards
1.
The generator set must meet NFPA-110 Level 1 requirements and must have an integral
alarm horn as required by NFPA.
Applicability
1.
Environment
a.
40 C to +70 C operating temperature range.
b.
5-95% humidity, non-condensing.
Hardware Requirements
1.
The controller shall have a run-off/reset-auto three-position selector switch.
2.
A controller mounted latch type emergency stop push button must be supplied.
3.
Indicating lights to indicate ready, warning, and shutdown.
4.
Lighted display with alphanumeric characters for messages.
5.
Keypad for menu selection and data entry.
6.
An audible alarm must be supplied in the controller.
Controller Functional Requirements
1.
Field programmable time delay for engine start. Adjustment range, 0-5 minutes in
1 second increments.
2.
Field programmable time delay engine cooldown. Adjustment range, 0-10 minutes in
1 second increments.
3.
It shall be possible to start the generator set and run it at an idle speed during warm-up.
Engine cooldown at idle must also be available.
4.
Real time clock and calendar for time stamping of events.
5.
Output for shedding of loads if the generator set reaches a user programmable
percentage of its kW rating.
6.
Programmable cyclic cranking.
7.
It must be possible to exercise the generator set by programming a running time into the
controller.
ENGINE GENERATOR
16620 - 4

Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
2.6
Generator Set System Monitoring Requirements

1.
All monitored functions must be viewable on the digital display.
2.
The following generator set functions must be monitored:
a.
All output voltages - single phase, three phase, line to line, and line to neutral,
0.5% accuracy.
b.
All single phase and three phase currents, 0.5% accuracy.
c.
Output frequency, 0.5% accuracy.
d.
Power factor by phase with leading/lagging indication.
e.
Total instantaneous kilowatt loading and kilowatts per phase, 0.5% accuracy.
f.
kVARS total and per phase, 0.5% accuracy.
g.
kVA total and per phase, 0.5% accuracy.
h.
kW hours.
3.
Engine parameters listed below shall be monitored:
a.
Coolant temperature both in English units.
b.
Oil pressure in English units.
c.
Battery voltage.
d.
RPM.
The controller shall be capable of monitoring key generator parameters.
1.
The following parameters shall system shutdown:
a.
Emergency stop.
b.
High coolant temperature.
c.
High oil temperature.
d.
Locked rotor - fail to rotate.
e.
Low coolant level.
f.
Low oil pressure.
g.
NFPA common alarm.
h.
Overcrank.
i.
Generator set overvoltage with user adjustable level, range 105% to 135%.
j.
Overfrequency with user adjustable level, range 102% to 140%.
k.
Underfrequency with user adjustable level, range 80% to 90%.
2.
Key generator parameters that will provide a warning without unit shutdown. These
warnings shall be the manufacturers default warnings.
Inputs and Outputs
1.
Inputs
a.
There shall be a minimum of 4 dry contact inputs that can be user configured to
shutdown the generator set or provide a warning.
2.
Outputs
a.
All NFPA 110 Level 1 outputs must be available.
b.
There shall be six outputs available.
REMOTE SERIAL ANNUNCIATOR

A.
B.
C.
03798614
03/15
Provide for the number of annunciators on generator and front desk. Annunciator must meet
the following specifications:
1.
Operating temperature range: -20 to 70 C.
2.
Storage temperature range: -40 to 85 C.
3.
Humidity range: 5 - 95% noncondensing.
Standards:
1.
NFPA 110, Level 1.
Hardware Requirements
ENGINE GENERATOR
16620 - 5

Phase 2
1.
2.
D.
E.
F.
2.7
Front panel.
Light-emitting diode (LED) indicators for shutdowns, warnings (pre-alarms), and
status.
3.
LEDs must be activated to indicate: shutdowns, warnings (pre-alarms), or status.
4.
LEDs required to activate for the following shutdown and/or warning conditions:
a.
Overcrank.
b.
Low Coolant Temperature.
c.
High Engine Temperature.
d.
Low Oil Pressure.
e.
Overspeed.
f.
Emergency Stop.
g.
Low Fuel.
h.
Low Coolant Level.
i.
Not-In-Auto.
j.
High Battery Voltage.
k.
Low Battery Voltage.
l.
Battery Charger Failure.
m.
Common Fault.
5.
LEDs required to activate upon the following status conditions:
a.
Lamp test.
b.
Alarm silence.
c.
System ready.
d.
Generator running.
e.
Communications.
Up to (3) user-defined inputs shall each activate an LED and an audible horn for shutdowns,
warnings, or status conditions.
Front panel of annunciator shall be a sealed membrane and shall be capable of both surfacemounting and flush-mounting.
Network Communication: Provide an RS-485 connection at the annunciator from the generator
controller.
ACCESSORIES TO BE PROVIDED
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
03798614
03/15
Overvoltage protection will shut down the unit after one second of 15% or more overvoltage.
Battery rack, battery cables, 12-volt battery(ies) capable of delivering the minimum
cold-cranking amps required at zero degrees Fahrenheit per SAE Standard I-537 shall be
supplied dry, along with separate electrolyte, which will be added just prior to start-up.
Gasproof, seamless, stainless steel, flexible exhaust connection.
Flexible fuel line(s).
Engine exhaust silencer rated for critical applications. The muffler shall be supported. Exhaust
sleeves, flashings and penetration requirements shall be carefully coordinated with other
trades. Slope exhaust to drain and provide trap and drain cock. The exhaust stack will be
extended to an elevation that is a minimum of 12 above the top of the retaining wall. This will
require a support system attached to the wall.
Block heater of proper wattage and voltage, thermostatically controlled to maintain engine
coolant at proper temperature to meet the start-up requirements. The size of the actual block
heater shall be coordinated with the requirements of the branch circuit. Adjust the size of
overcurrent device, conductors and conduit as required to accommodate the heater.
10-ampere automatic float battery charger with constant voltage regulation, current limiting
capability, cranking disconnect relay, temperature compensated for ambients from - 20 degree
ENGINE GENERATOR
16620 - 6

Phase 2
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
Fahrenheit, voltmeter, ammeter, charger malfunction and low voltage alarm contacts, equipped
for conduit installation.
Provide fuel lines, piping, fitting, pumps, tank and valving as required to serve the generator
from the integral base tank.
Provide all fuel for testing and provide a full tank of fuel upon turnover to the Owner.
Provide a manufacturers standard weather-proof enclosure for an exterior rating for the unit.
All covers and doors shall allow access to all genset components for maintenance.
Provide a reinforced concrete slab as recommended by the genset manufacturer. This will
include demolition of the existing concrete pad as required.
The generator shall be furnished with a double wall steel diesel fuel tank with a U.L. listing.
The manufacturer shall size the diesel base tank to provide a duration of 24 hours based on
operation of 100% of full load. All units shall be of the standard design of the generator
manufacturer and shall be installed and configured by the generator manufacturer.
Accessories shall include.
1.
Lockable Fuel Cap.
2.
Fuel Level Gauge.
3.
Internal Baffling.
4.
U.L. venting for primary and secondary leak containment tanks.
5.
U.L. 142.
6.
Baked Enamel Finish.
7.
Leak detection within the leak containment tank.
Provide a 90 discharge boot on the generator to deflect the air upwards. The boot shall be
compatible with the generator and shall be the standard of the generator manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Install cabinets with a minimum of 4 bolts.
Contractor shall coordinate with engine generator supplier to determine control, heater, alarm
and other circuits required for proper operation.
Exact generator siting shall comply with the Uniform Fire Code and manufacturers clearance
requirements for distance separation.
Extend the annunciator cabling in conduit as shown.
SITE TESTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
An installation check, start-up, and building load test shall be performed by the manufacturer's
local representative. The Owners Representative, and the maintenance staff shall be notified
of the time and date of the site test. The test shall include:
Fuel, lubricating oil, and antifreeze shall be checked for conformity to the manufacturer's
recommendations under the environmental conditions present and expected.
Accessories that normally function while the set is standing by shall be checked prior to
cranking the engine. This shall include: engine heater, battery charger, remote annunciator, etc.
Start-up under test mode to check for exhaust leaks, cooling air flow, movement during
starting and stopping, vibration during running, normal and emergency line-to-line voltage and
phase rotation.
ENGINE GENERATOR
16620 - 7

Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
3.3
Automatic start-up by means of simulated power outage to test remote-automatic starting,

transfer of the load, and automatic shutdown. Prior to this test, all transfer switch timers shall
be adjusted for proper systems coordination. Engine temperature, oil pressure and battery
charge level along with generator voltage, amperes, and frequency shall be monitored
throughout the test.
Provide for all necessary load banks, cables, labor and material as required to test the unit in
place.
Provide a 4-hour recorded load bank test at 0.8 power factor at 100% load and record the
following at 15 minute intervals:
1.
Meter hours.
2.
Volts all phases.
3.
Amps all phases.
4.
Frequency.
5.
Power factor.
6.
Water temperature.
7.
Oil pressure.
8.
Fuel pressure.
9.
Ambient temperature.
10. Engine coolant temperature.
11. All readings shall be certified by an authorized generator service provider and copies
shall be submitted to the engineer for review.
CLOSEOUT
A.
B.
Submittal:
1.
Provide two operating and maintenance manual covering all equipment provided.
2.
Provide spare parts list with cost.
Training:
1.
Provide 8 hours of training to Owner on the operation of equipment.
2.
Coordinate training with Engineer.
3.
Training shall provide maintenance personnel with a knowledge of all routine
maintenance requirements and running hours between each type of service.
4.
Two sets of all training material, interval charts and expandable item lists shall be
provided.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
ENGINE GENERATOR
16620 - 8

Phase 2
SECTION 16630
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Product Data: Submit catalog sheets showing voltage, switch size, ratings and size of
switching and overcurrent protective devices, operating logic, short circuit ratings,
dimensions, and enclosure details.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.6
NEMA ICS 10 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - AC Transfer Switch

Equipment.
NETA ATS (International Electrical Testing Association) - Acceptance Testing
Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
UL 1008 - Automatic Transfer Switches.
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Systems.
IEEE Standard 446 IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power
Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
A 4 pole, 600 VAC fully rated automatic transfer switch (ATS). The automatic priority
selector transfer shall consist of an inherently double throw power transfer switch unit and
control modules interconnected to provide complete automatic operation.
REFERENCES
A.
1.4

Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed transfer switches.

Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit routine preventative maintenance and lubrication
schedule. List special tools, maintenance materials, and replacement parts.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
B.
03798614
03/15

Supplier: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum three years
experience and factory authorized service facility within 100 miles of the work site.

16630 - 1

Phase 2
1.7
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Provide service and maintenance of transfer switches for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MECHANICALLY HELD AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
03798614
03/15
Manufacturers:
1.
ASCO.
2.
Russelectric.
3.
Zenith Controls.
4.
Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
Transfer switch unit shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The electrical
operator shall be a single-solenoid mechanism, momentarily energized. Main operators
which include overcurrent disconnect devices will not be accepted. The switch shall be
mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of two possible positions, normal or standby.
Switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by momentary outages so that contact
pressure is maintained at a constant value and temperature rise at the contacts is minimized
for maximum reliability and operating life.
Inspection of all contacts shall be possible from the front of the switch without disassembly
of operating linkages and without disconnection of power conductors. A manual operating
handle shall be provided for maintenance purposes. The handle shall permit the operator to
manually stop the contacts at any point throughout their entire travel to inspect and service
the contacts when required.
Designs utilizing components of molded-case circuit breakers, contactors, or parts thereof
which are not intended for continuous duty, repetitive switching or transfer between two
active power sources are not acceptable. Interlocked molded case circuit breakers will not
be acceptable.
Rating: 600 VAC, 3 Phase, 60 Hz, 4 pole. Provide two (2) ATS units.
Withstand Current Rating: as indicated on the drawings.
Automatic Sequence of Operation:
1.
Initiate Time Delay to Start Alternate Source Engine Generator: Upon initiation by
normal source monitor.
2.
Time Delay to Start Alternate Source Engine Generator: 0 to 60 seconds, adjustable.
3.
Initiate Transfer Load to Alternate Source: Upon initiation by normal source monitor
and permission by alternate source monitor.
4.
Time Delay Before Transfer to Alternate Power Source: 0 to 90 seconds, adjustable.
5.
Initiate Retransfer Load to Normal Source: Upon permission by normal source
monitor.
6.
Time Delay before Transfer to Normal Power: 0 to 90 seconds, adjustable; bypass
time delay in event of alternate source failure.
7.
Time Delay before Engine Shut Down: 0 to 6 minutes, adjustable, of unloaded
operation.
Enclosure:
1.
Enclosure: NEMA 1.
2.
Finish: Brushed.
Main contact material shall consist of silver (87% min) and cadmium.
16630 - 2

Phase 2
K.
L.
2.2
MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL PANEL

A.
B.
C.
2.3
Provide shop inspection and testing of each transfer switch.
VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY SENSING

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.5
Control panel shall direct the operation of the transfer switch. The panels sensing and
logic shall be controlled by a built-in microprocessor for maximum reliability, minimum
maintenance, and inherent serial communications capability. The control panel shall be
connected to the transfer switch by an interconnecting wiring harness. The harness shall
include a keyed disconnect plug to enable the control panel to be disconnected from the
transfer switch for routine maintenance.
Sensing and control logic shall be provided on printed circuit boards. Interfacing relays
shall be industrial grade plug-in type with dust covers.
The control panel shall meet or exceed the requirements for Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC) as follows:
1.
Ring Wave Test per IEEE 472 (ANSI C37.090A).
2.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) - IEC 801-2, Level 4.
3.
Electrical Fast Transients (EFT) - IEC 801-4, Level 4.
4.
Surge Withstand - IEC 801-5, Level 4.
5.
Electromagnetic Interference - Mil Std 461, Class 3C.

A.
2.4
Plexiglas covers shall shield electronic controls and main contact connections.
The break before make transfer switch action shall require no more than 10 cycles, and the
mechanism shall incorporate life time lubrication within the temperature range of 20F to
140F.
The voltage of each phase of the normal source (Priority-1) shall be monitored, with
pickup adjustable from 85% to 100% of nominal and dropout adjustable from 75% to 98%
of pickup setting.
The voltage of each phase of the emergency source (Priority-2) shall be monitored, with
pickup adjustable from 85% to 100% of nominal and dropout adjustable from 75% to 98%
of pickup setting.
Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within 2% over an operating temperature
range of -20 C to 70 C.
Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments without the use
of tools, meters or power supplies. Actual settings shall be clearly defined in the operators
manual.
TIME DELAYS
A.
03798614
03/15
A time delay shall be provided to override momentary generator source outages

(Priority-1) to delay transfer to the generator source (Priority-2). The delay shall be
adjustable from 0 to 6 seconds.

16630 - 3

Phase 2
B.
C.
A time delay shall be provided on transfer to generator (Priority-2), adjustable from

0 to 5 minutes for controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency source, factory set at
0 seconds.
All time delays shall be fully field adjustable without the use of tools.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2

A.
3.3
Demonstrate operation of transfer switch in normal and standby modes.
WITHSTAND AND CLOSING RATINGS

A.
3.7
Adjust control and sensing devices to achieve specified sequence of operation.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A.
3.6
Check out transfer switch connections and operations and place in service.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.5
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.22.3.
MANUFACTURERS FIELD SERVICES

A.
3.4
Provide engraved plastic nameplates identifying transfer as indicated in Section 16195.
The ATS shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 1008 and be labeled in accordance with
that standards 1-1/2 and 3 cycle, long-time ratings. ATSs which are not tested and labeled
with 1-1/2 and 3 cycle (any breaker) ratings and have series, or specific breaker ratings
only, are not acceptable.
TESTS AND CERTIFICATION

A.
B.
03798614
03/15
The complete ATS shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation of the individual
components and correct overall sequence of operation and to ensure that the operating
transfer time, voltage, frequency and time delay settings are in compliance with the
specification requirements.
The transfer switch and control panel shall be subjected to a dielectric strength test per
NEMA Standard ICS1-109.21.

16630 - 4

Phase 2
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.8
Upon request, the manufacturer shall provide a notarized letter certifying compliance with
all of the requirements of this specification including compliance with the above codes and
standards, and withstand and closing ratings. The certification shall identify, by serial
number(s), the equipment involved. No exceptions to the specifications, other than those
stipulated at the time of the submittal, shall be included in the certification.
Prior to system start-up, provide a factory authorized technician to certify all transfer
switch operations and settings.
Provide a minimum of four hours of on-site training with appropriate operating and
maintenance manuals for the Owners personnel.
Provide conduit and control wiring between each ATS and the engine generator to start the
generator upon loss of normal power. This will include the automatic transfer switch
serving the elevator machines on the eleventh floor.
SERVICE REPRESENTATION
A.
The ATS manufacturer shall maintain a national service organization of factory authorized
personnel located throughout the contiguous United States. The service centers personnel
must be factory trained and must be on call 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15

16630 - 5

Phase 2
SECTION 16762
TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2

REFERENCES
Design, installation and testing of all passive components shall be in compliance with the
following referenced documents using latest edition, including any errata or additions:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.3
TIA J-STD-607 (2002a) - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding

Requirements for Telecommunications.
TIA-526-14 (2010b) - OFSTP-14A Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed
Multimode Fiber Cable Plant.
TIA-568-2 (2009c; Errata 2010) - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cable Components.
TIA-568-C.1 (2009) - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
TIA-568-C.3 (2008; Corrections 2008) - Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.
TIA-569 (2004b; Add 1 2009) - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND DEFINITIONS

A.
B.
C.
D.
03798614
03/15
The communication system shall include Category 6 patch panel, Category 6 back bone
cables, telephone and data outlets, equipment racks, and connecting hardware. Connecting
hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions of 32 to 140 degrees F.
All work under this section shall be performed by and all equipment shall be furnished and
installed by a qualified telecommunications contractor hereafter referred to as Contractor.
Contract shall have minimum of 3 years experience in the application, installation and
testing of the specified systems and equipment.
The equipment and hardware provided under this contract will be from manufacturers that
have a minimum of 3 years experience in producing the types of systems and equipment
specified.
Cable Requirements and Definitions
1.
Horizontal Distribution Wiring - Category 6 UTP:
Intra-building cable that cross-connects the workstation data jack to the designated
equipment closet. Horizontal wiring shall be four pair, 100-ohm plenum grade
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable meeting, at a minimum, Category 6 standards.
RJ-45 modular connectors will be wired to meet EIA/TIA-568B standards and color
code tables. Each connection shall include all eight wires of the four pair cable. All
termination patch panels will comply with Category 6 standards. Additionally, all
equipment selected will meet the manufacturers end-to-end solution requirements
for warranty. All horizontal wiring shall be secured and/or protected to safeguard
against damage. All cables that drop below ceiling level will be concealed conduit.
16762 - 1

Phase 2
E.
F.
1.4
Patch Panels: RJ-45 patch panels shall support all of the RJ-45 connections for a
designated LAN zone. Provide fiber optic patch panel. Each port shall be labeled
designating the ports destination outlet and port number. All conductors of all cables shall
be terminated at both ends.
Data Outlets: Provide Category 6 RJ-45 Outlet as indicated on drawings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

Product Data: Submit for Category 6 outlet, Category 6 cable, Category 6 patch panel.
Test Reports: Reports shall show the field test performed to verify compliance with the
specified performance criteria. Test reports shall include record of the physical parameters
verified during testing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION WIRING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

The horizontal cable for communication outlet wiring is defined as multi-conductor,
thermoplastic-insulated, copper cable, 24 AWG air core, with four unshielded twisted pairs rated
to a performance criteria of Category 6.
Cable protection will be of the highest concern. The cable sheath shall be protected from sharp
edges. Where cables pass over a sharp edge, a bushing or grommet shall be inserted to protect the
cable.
To reduce EMI induced into the cabling from fluorescent lights, cable sheath shall be installed in
a hanging pathway in the area above the drop ceilings to maintain proper clearance of 5 inches
from fluorescent lights.
Testing after installation and termination will be required to ensure a rating to
Category 6 performance.
The cables outer sheath shall be blue in color for data.
Horizontal cabling shall be installed in a star topology. Each work area outlet must be cabled
directly to a horizontal cross connect in the appropriate equipment closet.
Splices shall not be permitted for twisted-pair horizontal cabling.
Bridged taps (multiple appearances of the same cable pairs at several distribution points) shall not
be permitted in the horizontal cable.
In all cases where the overall cable length allows, an additional 5 feet of slack shall be allowed
for in the equipment closet.
In all cases where the overall cable length allows, an additional 12 inches of cable slack shall be
allowed for at the outlet location.
03798614
03/15
16762 - 2

Phase 2
In no case shall the slack allowances cause the overall length of the cable to exceed the limits as
described in this section.
A.
B.
2.2
JACKS AND PATCH PANELS

A.
2.3
Horizontal Cable Lengths: The maximum horizontal cable length from the cross connect
panel to the workstation outlet shall not exceed 295 feet. An additional 33-foot allowance
has been made for the combined length of patch cables and cables used to connect
equipment in the work area and equipment rack.
Category 6 High Speed LAN Data specifications
1.
Electrical Specifications:
Impedance 100 ohm 15 percent.
2.
See testing specification for Category 6 performance - Execution for Attenuation
and NEXT requirements.
3.
Mutual Capacitance:
17pF/ft Max.
Jacks and panel shall match existing. Category 6 rating shall be applied to all connecting
hardware appropriate for use with UTP cables specified in the EIA/TIA-568-C3.
Components used shall be characterized up to a minimum 6 certification and typically
intended for emerging technologies and applications. Provide a minimum of 10 spare ports
in patch panel. Provide separate patch panels for telephone and data wiring.
SUPPORT PRODUCTS
A.
All Data/Telephone cabling shall be in conduit or J-hook supports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Contractor shall provide Category 6 Cable, Category 6 Patch Panels, Category 6 Outlets, and Mounting
hardware for LAN HUB. All communication cables shall be terminated and tested.
3.1
CABLE DISTRIBUTION
A.
03798614
03/15
The contractor shall wire the building as indicated on the contract drawings in accordance
with standards. The building shall be wired using a universal wire plan that must
accommodate the cables described in this specification. The wiring plan is designed to
provide adequate pairs to support the campus LAN systems high-speed data connections.
1.
One four-pair Category 6, 100-ohm plenum rated UTP cable shall be provided for
each data port. Cable shall be rated CMP.
2.
Category 6, RJ-45 modular connections shall be wired to meet TIA/EIA 568-C.1
and TIA/EIA 568-C.2 pin, pair and color designation.
3.
Each connection shall include all eight conductors of the four pair cable.
4.
Placement relative to nearby noise sources, such as electric power wiring, radio
frequency (RF) sources, large motors and generators, induction heaters, fluorescent
light ballast, etc. shall be avoided. If necessary, place exposed cables not closer than
4 feet from large motors or transformers, 1 foot from conduit and cables used for
electrical power distribution, and 5 inches from fluorescent lighting.
5.
Unless otherwise instructed by this specification installation shall be in compliance
with EIA/TIA-568-C1, TIA-568-2, TIA-569, NFPA 70, UL Standards,
16762 - 3

Phase 2
6.
3.2
Telecommunications Cabling Standard, EIA/TIA-569 Commercial Building

Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces, and ANSI/NFPA 70
National Electric Code. Installation shall also meet any additional manufacturers
requirements to fulfill warranty specifications.
Provide a minimum of 5 feet of cable slack in the equipment cabinets and 12 inches
at the outlet for each cable run to accommodate for future cabling system changes.
USER WORK AREA

Distribution of drop locations will be as indicated on the contract documents. Provide the
following at each outlet location: Minimum Telephone/Data - one (1) Category 6 jack (RJ-45) at
each outlet (with one (1) blue cable). Provide number of drops per outlet as indicated on plans.
A.
B.
1000 Mbite/Sec, Fast Ehternet, Lockable.

Labeling
All data outlets, patch panel ports, and both ends of each cable shall be clearly and neatly
labeled. Two cable identification schemes will be used, one for the end of the cable in the
work area, and one for the end of the cable at the patch panel. The labeling schemes shall
be as follows:
Work Area Scheme: The first digit of the I.D. number will use a numeric character,
designating the LAN zone in which the jack is located. The first digit will be followed by a
dash (-). The next character will be an alphabetic designator to identify the patch panel in
which the cable is terminated. This character will be followed by a dash (-). The last digit
will be a numeric designator corresponding with the patch panel port into which the cable
is terminated. For example: The cable to the first port in the first patch panel in LAN
Zone 1, will be designated as 1-A-1. The cable to the second port will be 1-A-2. Cables to
the second patch panel will be labeled 1-B-1, 1-B-2, 1-B-3, etc. The contractor will be
responsible for clearly and visibly labeling each patch panel in accordance with the scheme
described above.
Patch Panel Scheme: The first portion of the I.D. number will correspond with the room
number to which the cable runs. This number will be followed by a dash (-). The next
portion of the I.D. number will be an alphabetic designator to identify the faceplate in the
work area where the cable is terminated. This character will be followed by a dash (-). The
last portion of the I.D. number will be a numeric designator that corresponds with the
faceplate jack in which the cable is terminated. For example: The cable to the first jack in
the first faceplate in Room 32 will be designated as 32-A-1. The cable to the second jack
will be 32-A-2. Cables to the next faceplate in Room 32 will be labeled 32-B-1, 32-B-2,
32-B-3, etc. The contractor will be responsible for clearly and visibly labeling each
faceplate in accordance with the scheme described above. Faceplates should be lettered in a
clockwise sequence beginning at the main entrance into the room. Jacks on each faceplate
will be sequenced in a clockwise direction beginning from the upper left-hand side of the
faceplate. In situations where cable is run to an unnumbered room, the contractor will be
responsible for coordinating with the appropriate government representative(s) to assign a
number to the room.
03798614
03/15
16762 - 4

Phase 2
3.3
EQUIPMENT CLOSETS
Equipment racks shall be bolted to the floor slab. Cable guides shall be bolted or screwed to
racks. Racks shall be installed level.
A.
3.4
Patch Panels: High density, low profile patch panels shall be used in all locations. Patch
panels may vary in number of ports provided, but shall be of the same manufacturer and
series, for all closets. All patch panels will be populated with port counts that equal or
exceed total ports needed, plus 10 percent, for each closet.
1.
UTP Patch Panels
All patch panels used to terminate UTP cables shall comply with selected vendors
channel rating for Category 6.
a.
Patch cables connecting data work ports to the LAN switches shall be
Category 6 compliant, both cordage and couplers. Patch cables shall be
constructed of stranded cable. Although the switches and other active
components will be provided by the owner, all patch cables shall be provided
by the contractor to provide connection to these active components. The
contractor shall also provide each site a quantity of spare patch cables equal to
10 percent of the total used at that site. Patch cables shall be appropriately
sized to allow for a neat and maintainable system.
b.
All ports will be labeled in accordance with the labeling scheme described in
this specification.
TESTING
A.
03798614
03/15
Horizontal Wiring Testing: Testing of all data horizontal UTP cables shall be performed in
accordance with EIA/TIA TSB-1152 to ensure rating of Category 6 performance. Test
parameters shall include wire mapping, attenuation, NEXT and noise measurements to
verify a limit below 100 mV.
1.
All distribution plant facilities associated with the new wiring system shall be tested
and verified after installation activities and all major plant rearrangements have been
completed. Tested copper pairs shall conform to the design guidelines as specified,
as well as manufacturers standards. Cable plant testing of the data jack will
diagnose the presence of all open-loop conductors, noisy lines and distortion,
low-loop current, high-loop loss, ringer failures, grounded, shorted or crossed
conductors, dB loss, split connections, attenuation range, and/or near-end cross-talk.
The contractor will supply complete testing and correction reports/information and
explanation to the government, or designated representative, for review prior to
acceptance of the system(s). The contractor and the government or designated
representative will develop a mutually acceptable format for recording and reporting
of testing results prior to the start of testing activities. All errors are to be corrected
at the contractors expense prior to providing the completed records.
a.
Perform Category 6 link tests in accordance with EIA TIA/EIA-568-C.1 and
EIA TIA/EIA-568-C.2. Tests shall include wire map, length, insertion loss,
NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, return loss, propagation delay and
delay skew.
2.
A wire map test will be performed as per TIA/EIA TSB-568-C.3. This test will be
used to verify pair to pin termination at each end and check for installation
connectivity errors.
16762 - 5

Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
Horizontal Wiring Testing (Test from both ends)

1.
The following parameters will be measured from both sides of the link:
a.
Attenuation: A measure of signal loss in the link.
b.
Near-End Crosstalk Loss (NEXT): A measure of signal coupling from one
pair to another within a UTP cabling link and is derived from swept/stepping
frequency voltage measurements.
Noise Testing
1.
The noise level testing associated with the data circuit will only be required if
problems occur with the previous test procedures, or if the manufacturer requests it
for warranty purposes. If tested, it shall be measured over seven different
frequencies.
a.
Noise will be measured by recording interference from all outside sources (for
example, power cables). The noise is generally steady throughout the entire
frequency range and permanently exists. Acceptable levels will be the lower
of the manufacturers specifications, or less than 100 mV.
b.
Noise peaks will be measured by adjusting a threshold. All peaks that exceed
the threshold will be documented. Acceptable peaks will be determined by the
manufacturers specifications, or by IEEE 802.3 10BaseT Ethernet Standards.
Additional Testing
1.
Any additional testing and/or documentation required by the manufacturer to show
full compliance with warranty requirements shall be provided to the government by
the contractor. Final test results will meet manufacturers guidelines for the cabling
channel.
Telecommunications Cabling Testing
1.
Perform telecommunications cabling inspection, verification, and performance tests
in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, EIA TIA/EIA-568-C.2, EIA TIA/EIA-568-C.3,
and TIA-568-2. Perform optical fiber field inspection tests via attenuation
measurements on factory reels and provide results along with manufacturer
certification for factory reel tests. Remove failed cable reels from project site upon
attenuation test failure. All fiber optic, data, and telephone cables shall be terminated
and tested.
2.
For multimode optical fiber, perform optical fiber end-to-end attenuation tests in
accordance with EIA TIA/EIA-568-C.3 and EIA TIA/EIA-526-14 using Method A,
Optical Power Meter and Light Source for multimode optical fiber.
END OF SECTION
03798614
03/15
16762 - 6

JACC Phase 2 Project Manual - 3.19.15

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

JACC Phase 2 Project Manual - 3.19.15

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Project Manual

Covenant Health System

Joe Arrington Cancer Center Renovations and Additions

DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT INFORMATION

Letter from Dunn + Teinert

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Summary of Work and Special Requirements

DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION

Joe Arrington Cancer Center Renovations and Additions

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Preparation for Reroofing (To Be Issued by Addendum)

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

Steel Door Frames

Joe Arrington Cancer Center Renovations and Additions

Finish Material Legend

Visual Display Boards

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

Machine Room-less Elevators

Joe Arrington Cancer Center Renovations and Additions

General Mechanical Requirements

Basic Electrical Methods

Joe Arrington Cancer Center Renovations and Additions

Basic Electrical Methods

DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY

Joe Arrington Cancer Center Bidder,

Covenant Health Systems

Joe Arrington Cancer Center & MOB Renovations

Proposals will be received by the Construction Manager at Risk:

As Described in the Proposal Documents.

JACC & MOB Package 2

Dunn+Teinert and COVENANT HEALTH SYSTEMS are Equal Opportunity Employers.

Construction Manager at Risk:

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID

JACC & MOB Package 2

CONTRACT DOCUMENT ACQUISITION:

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID

JACC & MOB Package 2

" "# $%& '& ("

" "# $%& '& ("

Competitive Proposals for:

Faxed Proposals may be sent to:

Email Proposals may be sent to:

COMPETITIVE PROPOSALS PREPARATION:

JACC & MOB Renovation Package 2

AFTER HOURS WORK:

Noisy Work (attachment to existing structure, etc.)

*Infection control plans must be coordinated in advance of this type of work.

JACC & MOB Renovation Package 2

SECURITY FOR FAITHFUL PAYMENT (Proposals exceeding $25,000):

JACC & MOB Renovation Package 2

JACC & MOB Renovation Package 2

TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES:

ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS:

NOTICE OF SPECIAL CONDITIONS:

JACC & MOB Renovation Package 2

JACC & MOB Renovation Package 2

Joe Arrington Cancer Center & MOB Renovations

Construction Manager at Risk

Cost for Performance and Payment Bond:

ADD______________ DEDUCT_______________NO CHANGE_____NOT APPLICABLE_____.

Alternate No. 2 Eliminate renovation of existing Courtyard #1:

ADD__ DEDUCT_NO CHANGE_NOT APPLICABLE___.

ADD__ DEDUCT_NO CHANGE_NOT APPLICABLE___.

ADD__ DEDUCT_NO CHANGE_NOT APPLICABLE___.

ADD__ DEDUCT_NO CHANGE_NOT APPLICABLE___.

ADD__ DEDUCT_NO CHANGE_NOT APPLICABLE___.

ADD__ DEDUCT_NO CHANGE_NOT APPLICABLE___.

ADD__ DEDUCT_NO CHANGE_NOT APPLICABLE___.

ADD__ DEDUCT_NO CHANGE_NOT APPLICABLE___.

ADD__ DEDUCT_NO CHANGE_NOT APPLICABLE___.

ADD__ DEDUCT_NO CHANGE_NOT APPLICABLE___.

ADD__ DEDUCT_NO CHANGE_NOT APPLICABLE___.

ADD__ DEDUCT_NO CHANGE_NOT APPLICABLE___.

ADD__ DEDUCT_NO CHANGE_NOT APPLICABLE___.

ADD__ DEDUCT_NO CHANGE_NOT APPLICABLE___.

ADD__ DEDUCT_NO CHANGE_NOT APPLICABLE___.

ADD__ DEDUCT_NO CHANGE_NOT APPLICABLE___.

ADD__ DEDUCT_NO CHANGE_NOT APPLICABLE___.